0% found this document useful (0 votes)

856 views736 pages

6RA70 V3.1 Operating Instructions

Uploaded by

Şaban Şeker

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

856 views736 pages

6RA70 V3.1 Operating Instructions

Uploaded by

Şaban Şeker

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 736

s

SIMOREG DC-MASTER

Operating Instructions

6RA70 Series
Microprocessor-Based Converters from 6kW to 2500kW
for Variable-Speed DC Drives

Edition 12

Order-No.: 6RX1700-0AD76

General

05.2007

These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:

Language

German

French

Spanish

Italian

Order No.

6RX1700-0AD00

6RX1700-0AD77

6RX1700-0AD78

6RX1700-0AD72

Converter software version:

As these Operating Instructions went to print, SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters were being delivered from
the factory with software version 3.1 installed.
These Operating Instructions also apply to other software versions.
Earlier software versions: Some parameters described in this document might not be stored in the software
(i.e. the corresponding functionality is not available on the converter) or some
parameters will have a restricted setting range. If this is the case, however,
appropriate reference to this status will be made in the Parameter List.
Later software versions:

Additional parameters might be available on the SIMOREG DC-MASTER (i.e.

extra functions might be available which are not described in these Operating
Instructions) or some parameters might have an extended setting range. In this
case, leave the relevant parameters at their factory setting, or do not set any
parameter values which are not described in these Instructions !

The software version of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER can be read in parameters r060 and r065.
The latest software version is available at the following Internet site:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/en/8479576

CAUTION
Before updating your software, find out the product state of your SIMOREG device. You will find this on the
rating plate (field on the bottom left-hand side "Prod. State").
Prod. State = A1,A2 (devices with the CUD1 electronics board, version C98043-A7001-L1-xx):
It is only permissible to load software versions 1.xx and 2.xx.
Prod. State = A3 (devices with the CUD1 electronics board, version C98043-A7001-L2-xx):
It is only permissible to load software versions 3.xx.

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is

not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable
for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or
registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
We have checked that the contents of this publication agree with the
hardware and software described herein. Nonetheless, differences
might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are
completely identical. The information given in this publication is
reviewed at regular intervals and any corrections that might be
necessary are made in the subsequent printings. Suggestions for
improvement are welcome at all times.

Siemens AG 1998 - 2007 All rights reserved

SIMOREG is a registered trademark of Siemens

05.2007

Contents

Contents
Page

Safety information

Type spectrum

2.1

Converter order number code

2-4

2.2

Rating plate

2-5

2.3

Packaging label

2-5

2.4

Ordering information for options using codes

2-6

2.5

Reference to new products

2-8

Description

3.1

Applications

3-1

3.2

Design

3-1

3.2.1

Special features of devices with 460V rated connection voltage

3-2

3.2.2

Installation of SIMOREG devices in cabinets in accordance with UL508C standards

3-2

3.3

Mode of operation

3-2

3.4

Technical data

3-3

3.4.1

Load types

3-3

3.4.1.1

Load cycles for 1Q applications

3-4

3.4.1.2

Load cycles for 4Q applications

3-5

3.4.2

Converters 3AC 400V, 30A to 125A, 1Q

3-7

3.4.3

Converters 3AC 400V, 210A to 600A, 1Q

3-8

3.4.4

Converters 3AC 400V, 850A to 2000A, 1Q

3-9

3.4.5

Converters 3AC 460V, 30A to 125A, 1Q

3-10

3.4.6

Converters 3AC 460V, 210A to 600A, 1Q

3-11

3.4.7

Converters 3AC 460V, 850A to 1200A, 1Q

3-12

3.4.8

Converters 3AC 575V, 60A to 600A, 1Q

3-13

3.4.9

Converters 3AC 575V, 800A to 2200A, 1Q

3-14

3.4.10

Converters 3AC 690V, 720A to 2000A, 1Q

3-15

3.4.11

Converters 3AC 830V, 900A to 1900A, 1Q

3-16

3.4.12

Converters 3AC 400V, 15A to 125A, 4Q

3-17

3.4.13

Converters 3AC 400V, 210A to 600A, 4Q

3-18

3.4.14

Converters 3AC 400V, 850A to 2000A, 4Q

3-19

3.4.15

Converters 3AC 460V, 30A to 125A, 4Q

3-20

3.4.16

Converters 3AC 460V, 210A to 600A, 4Q

3-21

3.4.17

Converters 3AC 460V, 850A to 1200A, 4Q

3-22

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0-1

Contents

05.2007
Page

3.4.18

Converters 3AC 575V, 60A to 600A, 4Q

3-23

3.4.19

Converters 3AC 575V, 850A to 2200A, 4Q

3-24

3.4.20

Converters 3AC 690V, 760A to 2000A, 4Q

3-25

3.4.21

Converters 3AC 830V, 950A to 1900A, 4Q

3-26

3.4.22

Converters 3AC 400V, 3000A, 1Q / 4Q

3-27

3.4.23

Converters 3AC 575V, 2800A, 1Q / 4Q

3-28

3.4.24

Converters 3AC 690V, 2600A, 1Q / 4Q

3-29

3.4.25

Converters 3AC 950V, 2200A, 1Q / 4Q

3-30

3.5

Applicable standards

3-32

3.6

Certification

3-33

3.7

Abbreviations

3-33

Shipment, unpacking

4.1

Remove the transportation protection for devices with 1500A to 2200A rated DC

Installation

5.1

Dimension diagrams for standard devices

5-3

5.1.1

Converters: 3AC 400V and 460V, 30A, 1Q

5-3

5.1.2

Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 60A to 280A, 1Q

5-4

5.1.3

Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 400A, 1Q

5-5

5.1.4

Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 600A, 1Q

5-6

5.1.5

Converters: 3AC 400V, 575V and 690V, 720A to 850A, 1Q

5-7

5.1.6

Converters: 3AC 400V,460V, 575V, 690V and 830V, 900A to 1200A, 1Q

5-8

5.1.7

Converters: 3AC 400V, 575V, 690V, and 830V, 1500A to 2000A, 575V/2200A 1Q

5-9

5.1.8

Converters: 3AC 400V / 3000A, 3AC 575V / 2800A, 3AC 690V / 2600A,
3AC 950V / 2200A 1Q

5-10

5.1.9

Converters: 3AC 400V and 460V, 15A to 30A, 4Q

5-11

5.1.10

Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 60A to 280A, 4Q

5-12

5.1.11

Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 400A to 600A, 4Q

5-13

5.1.12

Converters: 3AC 400V, 575V and 690V, 760A to 850A, 4Q

5-14

5.1.13

Converters: 3AC 400V, 460V, 575V, 690V and 830V, 950A to 1200A, 4Q

5-15

5.1.14

Converters: 3AC 400V, 575V, 690V, and 830V, 1500A to 2000A, 575V/2200A 4Q

5-16

5.1.15

Converters: 3AC 400V / 3000A, 3AC 575V / 2800A, 3AC 690V / 2600A,
3AC 950V / 2200A 4Q

5-17

Dimension diagrams of the devices with additional cable connections

on the top of the device

5-18

5.2.1

Converters: 3AC 460V, 60A to 125A, 1Q

5-18

5.2.2

Converters: 3AC 460V, 210A to 280A, 1Q

5-19

5.2.3

Converters: 3AC 460V, 450A to 600A, 1Q

5-20

5.2.4

Converters: 3AC 460V, 850A, 1Q

5-21

5.2

0-2

4-1

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Contents
Page

5.2.5

Converters: 3AC 460V, 60A to 125A, 4Q

5-22

5.2.6

Converters: 3AC 460V, 210A to 280A, 4Q

5-23

5.2.7

Converters: 3AC 460V, 450A to 600A, 4Q

5-24

5.2.8

Converters: 3AC 460V, 850A, 4Q

5-25

5.3

Mounting options

5-26

5.3.1

Terminal expansion board CUD2

5-26

5.3.2

Optional supplementary boards

5-27

5.3.2.1

Local bus adapter (LBA) for mounting optional supplementary boards

5-27

5.3.2.2

Mounting of optional supplementary boards

5-27

Connections

6.1

Installation instructions for proper EMC installation of drives

6-2

6.1.1

Fundamental principles of EMC

6-2

6.1.1.1

What is EMC

6-2

6.1.1.2

Noise radiation and noise immunity

6-14

6.1.3

Information on line-side harmonics generated by converters in a

fully-controlled three-phase bridge circuit configuration

6-15

6.2

Block diagrams with recommended connection

6-17

6.2.1

Converters: 15A to 125A

6-17

6.2.2

Converters: 210A to 280A

6-18

6.2.3

Converters: 400A to 3000A with a 3-phase fan

6-19

6.2.4

Converters: 450A to 850A with a 1-phase fan

6-20

6.3

Parallel connection of converters

6-21

6.3.1

Circuit diagram showing parallel connection of SIMOREG converters

6-21

6.3.2

Parameterization of SIMOREG converters for parallel connection

6-22

6.3.2.1

Standard operating mode

6-22

6.3.2.2

Operating mode "N+1 mode" (redundancy mode of the armature supply)

6-23

6.3.2.3

Redundancy mode of the field supply

6-25

6.4

Power connections

6-26

6.4.1

Converters: 30A, 1Q

6-26

6.4.2

Converters: 60A, 1Q

6-27

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0-3

Contents

05.2007
Page

6.4.3

Converters: 90A to 280A, 1Q

6-28

6.4.4

Converters: 400A to 600A, 1Q

6-29

6.4.5

Converters: 720A, 1Q

6-30

6.4.6

Converters: 800 to 850A, 1Q

6-31

6.4.7

Converters: 900A to 950A, 1Q

6-32

6.4.8

Converters: 1000 to 1200A, 1Q

6-33

6.4.9

Converters: 1500 to 2000A, 575V/2200A, 1Q

6-34

6.4.10

Converters: 400V/3000A, 575V/2800A, 690V/2600A, 950V/2200A 1Q

6-36

6.4.11

Converters: 15 to 30A, 4Q

6-38

6.4.12

Converters: 60A, 4Q

6-39

6.4.13

Converters: 90A to 210A, 4Q

6-40

6.4.14

Converters: 280A, 4Q

6-41

6.4.15

Converters: 400A, 4Q

6-42

6.4.16

Converters: 450A to 600A, 4Q

6-43

6.4.17

Converters: 760A, 4Q

6-44

6.4.18

Converters: 850A, 4Q

6-45

6.4.19

Converters: 950A to 1000A, 4Q

6-46

6.4.20

Converters: 1100 to 1200A, 4Q

6-47

6.4.21

Converters: 1500 to 2000A, 575V/2200A, 4Q

6-48

6.4.22

Converters: 400V/3000A, 575V/2800A, 690V/2600A, 950V/2200A 4Q

6-50

6.5

Field supply

6-52

6.6

Fuses and commutating reactors

6-55

6.6.1

Commutating reactors

6-55

6.6.2

Fuses

6-59

6.8

Terminal assignments

6-62

Start-up

7.1

General safety information

7-1

7.2

Operator control panels

7-3

7.2.1

Simple operator control panel (PMU)

7-3

7.2.2

User-friendly operator control panel (OP1S)

7-4

7.3

Parameterization procedure

7-6

0-4

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Contents
Page

7.3.1

Parameter types

7-6

7.3.2

Parameterization at the simple operator control panel

7-6

7.4

Reset to default value and adjust offset

7-8

7.5

Start-up procedure

7-9

7.6

Manual optimization (if necessary)

7-18

7.6.1

Manual setting of armature resistance RA (P110) and

armature inductance LA (P111)

7-18

7.6.2

Manual setting of field resistance RF (P112)

7-19

7.7

Starting up optional supplementary boards

7-20

7.7.1

Procedure for starting up technology boards (T100, T300, T400)

7-20

7.7.2

Sequence of operations for starting up PROFIBUS boards (CBP2)

7-22

7.7.2.1

Mechanisms for processing parameters via the PROFIBUS

7-24

7.7.2.2

Diagnostic tools

7-25

7.7.3

Sequence of operations for starting up CAN bus boards (CBC)

7-29

7.7.3.1

Description of CBC with CAN Layer 2

7-30

7.7.3.2

Description of CBC with CANopen

7-34

7.7.3.2.1

Introduction to CANopen

7-34

7.7.3.2.2

Functionality of CBC with CANopen

7-35

7.7.3.2.3

Requirements for operating the CBC with CANopen

7-36

7.7.3.3

Diagnostic tools

7-36

7.7.4

Procedure for starting up SIMOLINK boards (SLB)

7-40

7.7.5

Procedure for starting up expansion boards (EB1 and EB2)

7-44

7.7.6

Procedure for starting up the pulse encoder board (SBP)

7-45

7.7.7

Sequence of operations for starting up DeviceNet boards (CBD)

7-46

7.7.7.1

Diagnostic tools

7-52

7.7.8

Sequence of operations for starting up the serial I/O board (SCB1)

7-54

7.7.8.1

Diagnostic tools

7-56

7.7.9

Structure of request/response telegrams

7-57

7.7.10

Transmission of double-word connectors for technology and communication modules

7-60

Function diagrams

Function descriptions

9.1

General explanations of terms and functionality

9-1

9.2

Computation cycles, time delay

9-6

9.3

Switch-on, shutdown, enabling

9-7

9.3.1

OFF2 (voltage disconnection) - control word 1, bit 1

9-7

9.3.2

OFF3 (Fast stop) - control word 1, bit 2

9-7

9.3.3

Switch-on / shutdown (ON / OFF) terminal 37 - control word 1, bit 0

9-8

9.3.4

Operating enable (enable) terminal 38 - control word 1, bit 3

9-11

9.4

Ramp-function generator

9-11

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0-5

Contents

05.2007
Page

9.4.1

Definitions

9-12

9.4.2

Operating principle of ramp-function generator

9-12

9.4.3

Control signals for ramp-function generator

9-13

9.4.4

Ramp-function generator settings 1, 2 and 3

9-13

9.4.5

Ramp-up integrator

9-14

9.4.6

Ramp-function generator tracking

9-14

9.4.7

Limitation after ramp-function generator

9-15

9.4.8

Velocity signal dv/dt (K0191)

9-15

9.5

Inching

9-15

9.6

Crawling

9-16

9.7

Fixed setpoint

9-16

9.8

Safety shutdown (E-Stop)

9-17

9.9

Activation command for holding or operating brake (low active)

9-18

9.10

Switch on auxiliaries

9-21

9.11

Switch over parameter sets

9-21

9.12

Speed controller

9-22

9.13

Serial interfaces

9-23
USS

9.13.1

Serial interfaces with

9.13.2

Serial interfaces with peer-to-peer protocol

9-27

9.14

Thermal overload protection of DC motor

(I2t monitoring of motor)

9-31

9.15

Dynamic overload capability of power section

9-34

9.15.1

Overview of functions

9-34

9.15.2

Configuring for dynamic overload capability

9-35

9.15.3

Characteristics for determining the dynamic overload capability

for intermittent overload operation

9-37

9.16

Speed-dependent current limitation

9-72

9.16.1

Setting the speed-dependent current limitation for motors

with commutation transition

9-73

Setting of speed-dependent current limitation for motors

without commutation transition

9-74

9.17

Automatic restart

9-75

9.18

Field reversal

9-75

9.18.1

Direction of rotation reversal using field reversal

9-76

9.18.2

Braking with field reversal

9-77

9.19

Status description of some bits of status word ZSW1

9-79

9.20

12-pulse series connection

9-80

Faults / Alarms

10.1

Fault messages

10-2

10.1.1

General information about faults

10-2

10.1.2

List of fault messages

10-2

9.16.2

0-6

protocol

9-24

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Contents
Page

10.2

Alarms

Parameter list

List of connectors and binectors

12.1

Connector list

12-1

12.2

Binector list

12-27

Maintenance

13.1

Procedure for updating software (upgrading to a new software version)

13-1

13.2

Replacement of components

13-3

13.2.1

Replacement of fan

13-3

13.2.2

Replacement of PCBs

13-7

13.2.3

Replacement of thyristor modules on converters up to 1200A

13-8

13.2.4

Replacement of fuses and thyristor assemblies on converters of 1500A and above

13-9

Servicing

14.1

Technical Support

14-1

14.1.1

Time zone Europe and Africa

14-1

14.1.2

Time zone America

14-1

14.1.3

Time zone Asia / Australia

14-1

14.2

Spare parts

14-2

14.3

Repairs

14-2

14.4

On-site servicing

14-2

DriveMonitor

15.1

Scope of delivery

15-1

15.2

Installing the software

15-1

15.3

Connecting the SIMOREG to the PC

15-1

15.4

Setting up an online link to the SIMOREG

15-2

15.5

Further information

15-2

Environmental compatibility

Applications

Appendix

18.1

Additional documentation

18-1

Sheet for customer feedback

18-3

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-27

0-7

Contents

0-8

05.2007

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Safety Information

Safety information
WARNING
Hazardous voltages and rotating parts (fans) are present in this electrical equipment during
operation. Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury
or substantial property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment after first becoming
thoroughly familiar with all warning and safety notices and maintenance procedures contained
herein. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling,
installation, operation and maintenance.

Definitions:
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, a "Qualified person" is someone
who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the
hazards involved. He or she must have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established
safety procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid.
V DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
V WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
V CAUTION
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially situation which, if not
avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1-1

Safety Information

05.2007

NOTE
These operating instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to
provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or
maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens
Sales Office.
The contents of these operating instructions shall not become part or modify any prior or existing
agreement, commitment or relationship. The Sales Contract contains the entire obligations of
Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of
Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing
warranty.

DANGER
Converters contain hazardous electrical voltages, Death, severe bodily injury or significant
material damage can occur if the safety measures are not followed.
1. Only qualified personnel, who are knowledgeable about the converters and the provided
information, can install, start up, operate, troubleshoot or repair the converters.
2. The converters must be installed in accordance with all relevant safety regulations (e.g. DIN
VDE) as well as all other national or local regulations. Operational safety and reliability must
be ensured by correct grounding, cable dimensioning and appropriate short-circuit
protection.
3. All panels and doors must be kept closed during normal operation.
4. Before carrying out visual checks and maintenance work, ensure that the AC power supply
is disconnected and locked out. Before the AC supply is disconnected, both converters and
motors have hazardous voltage levels. Even when the converter contactor is open,
hazardous voltages are still present.
5. When making measurements with the power supply switched on, electrical connections
must not be touched under any circumstances. Remove all jewelry from wrists and fingers.
Ensure that the test equipment is in good conditions and operationally safe.
6. When working on units which are switched on, stand on an insulating surface, i.e. ensure
that you are not grounded.
7. Carefully follow the relevant instructions and observe all danger, warning and cautionary
instructions.
8. This does not represent a full listing of all the measures necessary for safe operation of the
equipment. If you require other information or if certain problems occur which are not
handled in enough detail in the information provided in the Instruction Manual, please
contact your local Siemens office.

1-2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Safety Information

CAUTION
Electrostatically sensitive devices
The converter contains electrostatically sensitive devices. These can easily be destroyed if they are not
handled correctly. If, however, it is absolutely essential for you to work on electronic modules, please pay
careful attention to the following instructions:
Electronic modules (PCBs) should not be touched unless work has to be carried out on them.
Before touching a PCB, the person carrying out the work must himself be electrostatically discharged.
The simplest way of doing this is to touch an electrically conductive earthed object, e.g. socket outlet
earth contact.
PCBs must not be allowed to come into contact with electrically insulating materials plastic foil,
insulating table tops or clothing made of synthetic fibers
PCBs may only be set down or stored on electrically conducting surfaces.
When carrying out soldering jobs on PCBs, make sure that the soldering tip has been earthed.
PCBs and electronic components should generally be packed in electrically conducting containers
(such as metallized-plastic boxes or metal cans) before being stored or shipped.
If the use of non-conducting packing containers cannot be avoided, PCBs must be wrapped in a
conducting material before being put in them. Examples of such materials include electrically
conducting foam rubber or household aluminium foil.
For easy reference, the protective measures necessary when dealing with sensitive electronic components
are illustrated in the sketches below.
a

Conductive flooring

Anti-static overall

Anti-static table

Anti-static chain

Anti-static footwear

Earthing connections of cabinets

f
c

Seated workstation

Standing workstation

f
c

Standing/seated workstation

WARNING
Hazardous voltages and rotating parts (fans) are present in this electrical equipment during
operation.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment after first becoming
thoroughly familiar with all warning and safety notices and maintenance procedures contained
herein.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling,
installation, operation and maintenance.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1-3

Safety Information

1-4

05.2007

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Type spectrum

600A converters

1200A converter

2200A, 3000A converter

850A converters

60A converters

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

2-1

Type spectrum

05.2007

Converter order no.

Type designation

6RA7018 - 6DS22 - 0
6RA7025 - 6DS22 - 0
6RA7028 - 6DS22 - 0
6RA7031 - 6DS22 - 0

D485 / 30 Mre - GeE6S22

D485 / 60 Mre - GeE6S22
D485 / 90 Mre - GeE6S22
D485 / 125 Mre - GeE6S22

6RA7075 - 6DS22 - 0
6RA7078 - 6DS22 - 0
6RA7081 - 6DS22 - 0
6RA7085 - 6DS22 - 0
6RA7087 - 6DS22 - 0
6RA7091 - 6DS22 - 0

D485 /
D485 /
D485 /
D485 /
D485 /
D485 /

6RA7093 - 4DS22 - 0
6RA7095 - 4DS22 - 0
6RA7098 - 4DS22 - 0

D485 / 1600 Mre - GeEF4S22

D485 / 2000 Mre - GeEF4S22
D485 / 3000 Mre - GeEF4S22

6RA7018 - 6FS22 - 0
6RA7025 - 6FS22 - 0
6RA7028 - 6FS22 - 0
6RA7031 - 6FS22 - 0

D550 / 30 Mre - GeE6S22

D550 / 60 Mre - GeE6S22
D550 / 90 Mre - GeE6S22
D550 / 125 Mre - GeE6S22

6RA7075 - 6FS22 - 0
6RA7078 - 6FS22 - 0
6RA7082 - 6FS22 - 0
6RA7085 - 6FS22 - 0
6RA7087 - 6FS22 - 0
6RA7091 - 6FS22 - 0

D550 /
D550 /
D550 /
D550 /
D550 /
D550 /

6RA7025 - 6GS22 - 0
6RA7031 - 6GS22 - 0

D690 / 60 Mre - GeE6S22

D690 / 125 Mre - GeE6S22

6RA7075 - 6GS22 - 0
6RA7081 - 6GS22 - 0
6RA7085 - 6GS22 - 0
6RA7087 - 6GS22 - 0
6RA7090 - 6GS22 - 0

D690 /
D690 /
D690 /
D690 /
D690 /

210 Mre - GeEF6S22

400 Mre - GeEF6S22
600 Mre - GeEF6S22
800 Mre - GeEF6S22
1000 Mre - GeEF6S22

6RA7093 - 4GS22 - 0
6RA7095 - 4GS22 - 0
6RA7096 - 4GS22 - 0
6RA7097 - 4GS22 - 0

D690 /
D690 /
D690 /
D690 /

1600 Mre - GeEF4S22

2000 Mre - GeEF4S22
2200 Mre - GeEF4S22
2800 Mre - GeEF4S22

6RA7086 - 6KS22 - 0
6RA7088 - 6KS22 - 0

D830 / 720 Mre - GeEF6S22

D830 / 950 Mre - GeEF6S22

6RA7093 - 4KS22 - 0
6RA7095 - 4KS22 - 0
6RA7097 - 4KS22 - 0

D830 / 1500 Mre - GeEF4S22

D830 / 2000 Mre - GeEF4S22
D830 / 2600 Mre - GeEF4S22

6RA7088 - 6LS22 - 0

D1000 / 900 Mre - GeEF6S22

6RA7093 - 4LS22 - 0
6RA7095 - 4LS22 - 0

D1000 / 1500 Mre - GeEF4S22

D1000 / 1900 Mre - GeEF4S22

6RA7096 - 4MS22 - 0

D1140 / 2200 Mre - GeEF4S22

Rated
DC voltage

2-2

210 Mre - GeEF6S22

280 Mre - GeEF6S22
400 Mre - GeEF6S22
600 Mre - GeEF6S22
850 Mre - GeEF6S22
1200 Mre - GeEF6S22

210 Mre - GeEF6S22

280 Mre - GeEF6S22
450 Mre - GeEF6S22
600 Mre - GeEF6S22
850 Mre - GeEF6S22
1200 Mre - GeEF6S22

Rated
DC current

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Type spectrum
Converter order no.

Type designation

6RA7013 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7018 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7025 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7028 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7031 - 6DV62 - 0

D420 / 15 Mreq - GeG6V62

D420 / 30 Mreq - GeG6V62
D420 / 60 Mreq - GeG6V62
D420 / 90 Mreq - GeG6V62
D420 / 125 Mreq - GeG6V62

6RA7075 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7078 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7081 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7085 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7087 - 6DV62 - 0
6RA7091 - 6DV62 - 0

D420 / 210 Mreq - GeGF6V62

D420 / 280 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D420 / 400 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D420 / 600 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D420 / 850 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D420 / 1200 Mreq - GeGF6V62

6RA7093 - 4DV62 - 0
6RA7095 - 4DV62 - 0
6RA7098 - 4DV62 - 0

D420 / 1600 Mreq - GeGF4V62

D420 / 2000 Mreq - GeGF4V62
D420 / 3000 Mreq - GeGF4V62

6RA7018 - 6FV62 - 0
6RA7025 - 6FV62 - 0
6RA7028 - 6FV62 - 0
6RA7031 - 6FV62 - 0

D480 / 30 Mreq - GeG6V62

D480 / 60 Mreq - GeG6V62
D480 / 90 Mreq - GeG6V62
D480 / 125 Mreq - GeG6V62

6RA7075 - 6FV62 - 0
6RA7078 - 6FV62 - 0
6RA7082 - 6FV62 - 0
6RA7085 - 6FV62 - 0
6RA7087 - 6FV62 - 0
6RA7091 - 6FV62 - 0

D480 / 210 Mreq - GeGF6V62

D480 / 280 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D480 / 450 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D480 / 600 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D480 / 850 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D480 / 1200 Mreq - GeGF6V62

6RA7025 - 6GV62 - 0
6RA7031 - 6GV62 - 0

D600 / 60 Mreq - GeG6V62

D600 / 125 Mreq - GeG6V62

6RA7075 - 6GV62 - 0
6RA7081 - 6GV62 - 0
6RA7085 - 6GV62 - 0
6RA7087 - 6GV62 - 0
6RA7090 - 6GV62 - 0

D600 / 210 Mreq - GeGF6V62

D600 / 400 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D600 / 600 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D600 / 850 Mreq - GeGF6V62
D600 / 1100 Mreq - GeGF6V62

6RA7093 - 4GV62 - 0
6RA7095 - 4GV62 - 0
6RA7096 - 4GV62 - 0
6RA7097 - 4GV62 - 0

D600 /
D600 /
D600 /
D600 /

6RA7086 - 6KV62 - 0
6RA7090 - 6KV62 - 0

D725 / 760 Mreq - GeGF6V62

D725 / 1000 Mreq - GeGF6V62

6RA7093 - 4KV62 - 0
6RA7095 - 4KV62 - 0
6RA7097 - 4KV62 - 0

D725 / 1500 Mreq - GeGF4V62

D725 / 2000 Mreq - GeGF4V62
D725 / 2600 Mreq - GeGF4V62

6RA7088 - 6LV62 - 0

D875 / 950 Mreq - GeGF6V62

6RA7093 - 4LV62 - 0
6RA7095 - 4LV62 - 0

D875 /1500 Mreq - GeGF4V62

D875 /1900 Mreq - GeGF4V62

6RA7096 - 4MV62 - 0

D1000 /2200 Mreq - GeGF4V62

Rated
DC voltage

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1600 Mreq - GeGF4V62

2000 Mreq - GeGF4V62
2200 Mreq - GeGF4V62
2800 Mreq - GeGF4V62

Rated
DC current

2-3

Type spectrum

2.1

05.2007

Converter order number code

6 R A

0 -

Code letters defined acc.

to general MLFB guidelines:

Options:
Z: With option

Converter model:
23: SIMOREG Comp. 4th Gen.
24: SIMOREG Comp. 4th Gen. Digital
70: SIMOREG DC-MASTER

Innovation
Closed-loop control:
1: Uncontrolled field
2: Controlled field
Closed-loop control:
1: 1Q analog
2: 1Q digital

Rated DC currents and cooling:

Natural cooling:
Separate cooling
Ambient temp.
Ambient temp.
+45C
+35C / +40C on 6RA70
00:
01: 3.6.......<4.1
02: 4.1.......<4.65
03: 4.65.....<5.25
04: 5.25.....<6.0
05: 6.0.......<6.8
06: 6.8.......<7.75
07: 7.75.....<8.8
08: 8.8.......<10.0
09:
10: 10.0.....<11.5
11: 11.5.....<13.0
12: 13.0.....<14.5
13: 14.5.....<16.5
14: 16.5.....<19.0
15: 19.0.....<21.5
16: 21.5.....<24.5
17: 24.5.....<28.0
18: 28.0.....<31.5
19:
20: 31.5.....<36.0
21: 36.0.....<41.0
22: 41.0.....<46.5
23: 46.5.....<52.5
24: 52.5.....<60.0
25: 60.0.....<68.0
26: 68.0.....<77.5
27: 77.5.....<88.0
28: 88.0.....<100
29:
30: 100......<115
31: 115......<130
32: 130......<145
33: 145......<165
34: 165......<190
35: 190......<215
36: 215......<245
37: 245......<280
38: 280......<315
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:

2-4

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60: 31.5.....<36.0
61: 36.0.....<41.0
62: 41.0.....<46.5
63: 46.5.....<52.5
64: 52.5.....<60.0
65: 60.0.....<68.0
66: 68.0.....<77.5
67: 77.5.....<88.0
68: 88.0.....<100
69:
70: 100......<115
71: 115......<130
72: 130......<145
73: 145......<165
74: 165......<190
75: 190......<215
76: 215......<245
77: 245......<280
78: 280......<315
79:
80: 315.......<360
81: 360.......<410
82: 410...... <465
83: 465...... <525
84: 525...... <600
85: 600...... <680
86: 680...... <775
87: 775...... <880
88: 880...... <1000
89:
90: 1000..... <1150
91: 1150..... <1300
92: 1300..... <1450
93: 1450..... <1650
94::1650..... <1900
95: 1900..... <2150
96: 2150..... <2400
97: 2400..... <2850
98: 2850..... <3250

7: 4Q analog
6: 4Q digital
Converter connection:
A:
B:
C:
D:
.
.
K:
.
.
S:
T:
U:
V:

B2HZ

(1Q)

(B2) A (B2) C

(4Q)

B6C

(1Q)

(B6) A (B6) C

(4Q)

Rated supply voltage:

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
K:
L:
M:

230V
400V
440V
500V - 575V
660V
690V - 750V
830V
950V

Thyristor construction
and fuse assembly:
0: Control units without power section
1: USA Power
2: USA Base
3: Disk thyristors, produced in China
4: Disk thyristors with fuse assembly
5: Thyristor modules, produced in China
6: Thyristor modules
7:
8: ANL
9:

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

2.2

Type spectrum

Rating plate

SIMOREG DC-MASTER
1) Bar code for order number (MLFB)

2) A -Z is affixed after the MLFB for

options

DC - CONVERTER

3) Code for options (order-specific)

1)
Order No. / Type

6RA70 . . - . . . . . - 0

4) Bar code, serial number (orderspecific)

5) Product version
6) Space for other symbol

4)
Serial No.

Q6 . . . . . . . . . .

e.g.:

ARMATURE
Input

3AC . . . V
. . . A 50/60Hz
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than . . . kA rms symmetrical amperes , . . . V maximum.
Output (DC-Rating)
DC . . . V
...A
Output (US-Rating)
DC . . . V
...A

FIELD SUPPLY
Input
Output
Prod. State

2AC . . . V
DC . . . V

...A
...A

50/60Hz

6)
EN 60146

Cooling

Made in Austria

2.3

Packaging label

DC - CONVERTER
Stromrichter
Static Converter
Variateur

D . . . / . . . . M . . . -GeE . . . . 2

e.g.:

6RA70 . . - . . . . . - 0
1P

6RA70 . . - . . . . . - 0

1) Space for other

symbol

EN 60146

...,...,...,...,...,...

2) A -Z is affixed to
the MLFB for
options,
followed by the
code for the
relevant option
(order-specific)

QTY 1

Q6 . . . . . . . . . .

Q......

SW - STAND

E - STAND

(Version)

---

Made in Austria

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

2-5

Type spectrum

2.4

05.2007

Ordering information for options using codes

6 R A 7 0

SIMOREG converter order no. with

suffix Z and
codes (several codes together)
and/or
plaintext (if required)

Options

Codes

Order No.

Technology software in the basic converter ("Free function

blocks")
(for orders at a later date, please quote factory serial number
of converter)

S00

6RX1700-0AS00

Module terminal expansion (CUD2)

K00

6RX1700-0AK00

DriveMonitor PC - PMU (RS232) connecting cable, 3m

6SX7005-0AB00

User-friendly operator control panel (OP1S)

AOP1 adapter for mounting OP1A in cubicle door, including
5 m connecting cable
PMU-OP1S connecting cable, 3m
PMU-OP1S connecting cable, 5m

6SE7090-0XX84-2FK0
6SX7010-0AA00

Armature circuit infeed with low voltage of 15 V to 85 V

6SX7010-0AB03
6SX7010-0AB05
L04

For 1-quadrant devices:

6RY1703-0DA41
For 4-quadrant devices:
6RY1703-0DA44

K11

6SE7090-0XX84-4HA0

For rated voltage of 400 V, 460 V and 575 V possible

LBA

Local bus adapter for the electronics box

LBA is always needed to install supplementary boards
(see Section 5.3.2)

ADB Adapter board

ADB is always needed to install CBC, CBP, EB1, EB2,
SBP and SLB boards

K01, K02

SBP Pulse encoder evaluation board 1) 2) 3)

(miniature-format board; ADB required)

C14, C15
C16, C17

Terminal expansion board 3)

(miniature-format board; ADB required)

G64, G65
G66, G67

Terminal expansion board 3)

(miniature-format board; ADB required)

G74, G75
G76, G77

SIMOLINK board 1) 3)
(miniature-format board; ADB required)

G44, G45
G46, G47

CBP2 Communications board with interface for SINEC- L2DP, (PROFIBUS) 1) 3)

(miniature-format board; ADB required)

G94, G95
G96, G97

CBC Communications board with interface for CAN protocol

G24, G25
G26, G27

G54, G55
G56, G57

EB1
EB2
SLB

1) 3)

(miniature-format board; ADB required)

CBD Communications board with interface for DeviceNet
protocol 1) 3)
(miniature-format board; ADB required)

6SE7090-0XX84-0KA0

6SX7010-0FA00
6SE7090-0XX84-0KB0
6SE7090-0XX84-0KC0
6SX7010-0FJ00
6SX7010-0FF05

6SX7010-0FG00

6SX7010-0FK00

SCB1 Serial Communication Board 1 (Master for SCI1 and

SCI2 with FO link) 3) 4)

6SE7090-0XX84-0BC0

SCI1 Serial Communication Interface 1

(terminal expansion with FO link to SCB1) for

6SE7090-0XX84-3EA0

2-6

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Type spectrum

Options

Codes

attachment to DIN EN 50022 rail

Order No.

SCI2 Serial Communication Interface 2

(terminal expansion with FO link to SCB1) for
attachment to DIN EN 50022 rail 4)

6SE7090-0XX84-3EF0

T100 module incl. hardware operating instructions without

software module) 3)

6SE7090-0XX87-0BB0

Hardware operating instructions for T100

6SE7080-0CX87-0BB0

MS100 "Universal Drive software module for T100 (EPROM)

without manual

6SE7098-0XX84-0BB0

Manual for MS100 "Universal Drive" software module

German

6SE7080-0CX84-0BB1

English

6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1

French

6SE7087-7CX84-0BB1

Spanish

6SE7087-8CX84-0BB1

Italian

6SE7087-2CX84-0BB1

T300 technology board with 2 connecting leads, SC58 and

SC60, terminal block SE300 and hardware operating
instructions 3)

6SE7090-0XX84-0AH0

T400 technology board (incl. short description)

T400 hardware and configuring manual

6DD1606-0AD0
6DD1903-0EA0

Operating instructions for SIMOREG DC-MASTER

Operating instructions in German

D00

6RX1700-0AD00

Operating instructions in Italian

D72

6RX1700-0AD72

Operating instructions in English

D76

6RX1700-0AD76

Operating instructions in French

D77

6RX1700-0AD77

Operating instructions in Spanish

D78

6RX1700-0AD78

Operating instructions and DriveMonitor in all the above

languages available on CD-ROM

6RX1700-0AD64

1) These boards can be ordered under two different numbers, i.e.

under the order number of the board without accessories (such as connectors and Short Guide)

as a retrofit kit: Board with connectors and Short Guide

Board

Order number of board (w/o accessories)

Order number of retrofit kit

ADB

6SE7090-0XX84-0KA0

6SE7010-0KA00

SBP

6SE7090-0XX84-0FA0

6SE7010-0FA00

EB1

6SE7090-0XX84-0KB0

6SE7010-0KB00

EB2

6SE7090-0XX84-0KC0

6SE7010-0KC00

SLB

6SE7090-0XX84-0FJ0

6SE7010-0FJ00

CBP2

6SE7090-0XX84-0FF5

6SE7010-0FF05

CBC

6SE7090-0XX84-0FG0

6SE7010-0FG00

CBD

6SE7090-0XX84-0FK0

6SE7010-0FK00

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

2-7

Type spectrum

05.2007

The retrofit kit must be ordered to install boards in the SMOREG converter so that the correct connectors
for system cabling and the Short Guide are also available.
The LBA local bus adapter and ADB adapter board must be ordered as additional components for
installing supplementary boards in the SIMOREG converter. These adapters are available under
separate order numbers.
2) A pulse encoder evaluation circuit is a standard component of the basic SIMOREG converter. The SBP
need therefore be ordered only in configurations requiring evaluation of a second pulse encoder.
3) An LBA local bus adapter is required to install this board in a SIMOREG converter. The adapter is
available under a separate order number.
4) Supplied packed separately, including 10 m fiber-optic cable.
5) The last figure in the order code identifies the module location or slot of the electronic box (see Section
5.3.2):
1 . . . Board location 2
2 . . . Board location 3
4 . . . Slot D
5 . . . Slot E
6 . . . Slot F
7 . . . Slot G

2.5

Reference to new products

SIMOREG DC-MASTER Converter Commutation Protector (SIMOREG CCP)
The SIMOREG DC-MASTER Converter Commutation Protector (SIMOREG CCP) can be supplied
as an option for the converters in the SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70 series.
Field of application:
The SIMOREG DC-MASTER Converter Commutation Protector (SIMOREG CCP) is for protecting
the semiconductor fuses of a line-commutated power converter in inverter mode. If the inverter
stalls, a large current is created in the regenerating direction via the power system or a crossover
current is created in the power converter. The SIMOREG CCP limits this current to a harmless
level so that thyristors and the associated super-fast fuses are protected. As a result, timeconsuming and expensive replacement of the fuses is no longer necessary. Stalling of the inverter
cannot be prevented but its effects can.
Compatibility:
Because the sensor technology and the recognition of a commutation failure can only be made in
the SIMOREG basic unit the SIMOREG CCP is only compatible to line-commutated converters of
the SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70 series (and later).
Use with converters connected in parallel is possible.
The SIMOREG CCP is operated via the SIMOREG unit (parameterization, fault messages).
Version 2.2 or a later software version must be installed in the SIMOREG unit.
For more information and help selecting the most suitable unit for your application, please contact
your local SIEMENS Sales Office.

2-8

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.1

Applications
Series 6RA70 SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters are fully digital, compact units for three-phase
supply which supply the armature and field of variable-speed DC drives with rated armature
currents of between 15A and 3000A. The compact converters can be connected in parallel to
supply currents of up to 12000A. The field circuit can be supplied with currents of up to 85A
(current levels depend on the armature rated current).

3.2

Design
Series 6RA70 SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters are characterized by their compact, spacesaving construction. Their compact design makes them particularly easy to service and maintain
since individual components are readily accessible. The electronics box contains the basic
electronic circuitry as well as any supplementary boards.
All SIMOREG DC-MASTER units are equipped with a PMU simple operator panel mounted in the
converter door. The panel consists of a five-digit, seven-segment display, three LEDs as status
indicators and three parameterization keys. The PMU also features connector X300 with a USS
interface in accordance with the RS232 or RS485 standard.
The panel provides all the facilities for making adjustments or settings and displaying measured
values required to start up the converter.
The OP1S optional converter operator panel can be mounted either in the converter door or
externally, e.g. in the cubicle door. For this purpose, it can be connected up by means of a 5 m
long cable. Cables of up to 200 m in length can be used if a separate 5 V supply is available. The
OP1S is connected to the SIMOREG via connector X300. The OP1S can be installed as an
economic alternative to control cubicle measuring instruments which display physical measured
quantities.
The OP1S features an LCD with 4 x 16 characters for displaying parameter names in plaintext.
German, English, French, Spanish and Italian can be selected as the display languages.
The OP1S can store parameter sets for easy downloading to other devices.
The converter can also be parameterized on a standard PC with appropriate software connected to
the serial interface on the basic unit. This PC interface is used during start-up, for maintenance
during shutdown and for diagnosis in operation. Furthermore, converter software upgrades can be
loaded via this interface for storage in a Flash memory.
On single-quadrant converters, the armature is supplied via a fully controlled three-phase bridge
B6C and, on four-quadrant devices, via two fully controlled three-phase bridges in circulatingcurrent-free, inverse-parallel connection (B6)A(B6)C.
The field is supplied via a single-phase, branch-pair half-controlled 2-pulse bridge connection
B2HZ.
The frequencies of the armature and field supply voltages may be different (in a range from 45 to
65 Hz). Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz is available on
request. The armature circuit supply phase sequence is insignificant.
For converters with 15A to 850A (1200A at 400V supply voltage) rated DC current, the power
section for armature and field is constructed of isolated thyristor modules. The heat sink is thus
electrically isolated. On devices with a higher rated DC current, the power section for the armature
circuit is constructed of disk thyristors and heat sinks (thyristor assemblies) at voltage potential.
The housing and terminal covers on power connections provide protection against accidental
contact for operators working in the vicinity. All connecting terminals are accessible from the front.
The power section cooling system is monitored by means of temperature sensors.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-1

Description

3.2.1

05.2007

Special features of devices with 460V rated connection voltage

This device series is available with rated direct currents of 30A to 1200A.
Devices with rated direct currents of 450A to 1200A are equipped with a 1-phase fan.
On devices with rated direct currents of 60A to 850A, the power terminals are located on the
underside and on the top of the device.

3.2.2

Installation of SIMOREG devices in cabinets in accordance with UL 508 C

standards
When the drive is provided in a panel (enclosure), the panel is ventilated and designated
"Type 1".
The minimum size panel (enclosure) to be used with the drive is 600 mm length, 600 mm width,
2200 mm height.

3.3

Mode of operation
All open-loop and closed-loop drive control and communication functions are performed by two
powerful microprocessors. Drive control functions are implemented in the software as program
modules which can be "wired up" by parameters.
The rated DC currents (continuous DC currents), load class , specified on the rated plate can be
exceeded by 180%, the permissible overload during being dependent on individual converters. The
microprocessor calculates the current I2t value of the power section cyclically to ensure that the
thyristors are not damaged in overload operation.
A selection table for overload operation can be found in Section 9 Description of functions".
Converters self-adapt to the frequency of the available supply voltage in the range from 45 to 65
Hz (armature and field are independent).
Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz is available on request.

3-2

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4

Technical data

3.4.1

Load types
To adapt the SIMOREG DC-MASTER to the load profile of the working machine as efficiently as
possible, you can dimension it using the load cycle.
The setting on the SIMOREG DC-MASTER is made in parameter P067.

Load class

Load for converter

Load cycle

DC I
(P067=1)

IDC I continuous (IdN)

15min

DC II
(P067=2)

IDC II for 15 min and 1.5 x IDC II for 60 s

100%

150%

15min

DC III
(P067=3)

100%

IDC III for 15 min and 1.5 x IDC III for 120 s

100%

150%

15min

DC IV
(P067=4)

IDC IV for 15 min and 2 x IDC IV for 10 s

100%

IUS for 15 min and 1.5 x IUS for 60 s

US rating
(P067=5)

Note:
In this setting, an ambient or coolant
temperature of 45C is permissible for all
device types.

200%

15min

100%

150%

NOTICE
If you set a value of > 1 in P067, you must ensure that the "Dynamic overload capability of
power module is enabled, i.e. a value of > 0 must be set in parameter P075.
The SIMOREG DC-MASTER does not monitor for compliance with the criteria of the load class
set in parameter P067. If permitted by the power module, the unit can operate for overload
periods in excess of those defined by the load class. The actual permissible overload period for
the installed power module is always longer than the overload period defined for the load class.
The SIMOREG DC-MASTER does monitor the actual permissible overload period for the power
module. See Section 9.15.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-3

Description
3.4.1.1

05.2007

Load cycles for 1Q applications

Load cycles

Recommended

SIMOREG DC-MASTER
C

DC I

DC II

DC III

US rating
Tu=45C

DC IV

continuous

15min
100%

60sec
150%

15min
100%

120 sec
150%

15min
100%

10sec
200%

15min
100%

60sec
150%

400V, 1Q
6RA7018-6DS22

24.9

37.4

24.2

36.3

22.4

44.8

24.9

37.4

6RA7025-6DS22

51.4

77.1

50.2

75.3

46.4

92.8

51.4

77.1

6RA7028-6DS22

74.4

111.6

72.8

109.2

65.4

130.8

74.4

111.6

6RA7031-6DS22

125

106.1

159.2

103.4

155.1

96.3

192.6

106.1

159.2

6RA7075-6DS22

210

164.9

247.4

161.4

242.1

136.5

273.0

157.5

236.3

6RA7078-6DS22

280

226.8

340.2

219.3

329.0

201.0

402.0

215.8

323.7

6RA7081-6DS22

400

290.6

435.9

282.6

423.9

244.4

488.8

278.4

417.6

6RA7085-6DS22

600

462.6

693.9

446.3

669.5

413.2

826.4

443.4

665.1

6RA7087-6DS22

850

652.3

978.5

622.4

933.6

610.1

1220.2

620.2

930.3

6RA7091-6DS22

1200

879.9

1319.9

850.8

1276.2

786.6

1573.2

842.6

1263.9

6RA7093-4DS22

1600

1255.5

1883.3

1213.1

1819.7

1139.9

2279.8

1190.1

1785.2

6RA7095-4DS22

2000

1510.2

2265.3

1456.3

2184.5

1388.8

2777.6

1438.7

2158.1

6RA7098-4DS22

3000

2288.0

3432.0

2189.1

3283.6

2164.0

4328.0

2178.6

3267.9

6RA7018-6FS22

24.9

37.4

24.2

36.3

22.4

44.8

15.0

22.5

6RA7025-6FS22

51.4

77.1

50.2

75.3

46.4

92.8

30.0

45.0

6RA7028-6FS22

74.4

111.6

72.8

109.2

65.4

130.8

60.0

90.0

6RA7031-6FS22

125

106.1

159.2

103.4

155.1

96.3

192.6

100.0

150.0

6RA7075-6FS22

210

164.9

247.4

161.4

242.1

136.5

273.0

140.0

210.0

6RA7078-6FS22

280

226.8

340.2

219.3

329.0

201.0

402.0

210.0

315.0

6RA7082-6FS22

450

320.6

480.9

311.2

466.8

274.3

548.6

255.0

382.5

6RA7085-6FS22

600

462.6

693.9

446.3

669.5

413.2

826.4

430.0

645.0

6RA7087-6FS22

850

652.3

978.5

622.4

933.6

610.1

1220.2

510.0

765.0

6RA7091-6FS22

1200

879.9

1319.9

850.8

1276.2

786.6

1573.2

850.0

1275.0

6RA7025-6GS22

51.4

77.1

50.2

75.3

46.4

92.8

51.4

77.1

6RA7031-6GS22

125

106.1

159.2

103.4

155.1

96.3

192.6

106.1

159.2

6RA7075-6GS22

210

164.9

247.4

161.4

242.1

136.5

273.0

157.5

236.3

6RA7081-6GS22

400

290.6

435.9

282.6

423.9

244.4

488.8

278.4

417.6

6RA7085-6GS22

600

462.6

693.9

446.3

669.5

413.2

826.4

443.4

665.1

6RA7087-6GS22

800

607.7

911.6

581.5

872.3

559.3

1118.6

578.0

867.0

6RA7090-6GS22

1000

735.8

1103.7

713.4

1070.1

648.0

1296.0

700.4

1050.6

6RA7093-4GS22

1600

1255.5

1883.3

1213.1

1819.7

1139.9

2279.8

1190.1

1785.2

6RA7095-4GS22

2000

1663.0

2494.5

1591.2

2386.8

1568.4

3136.8

1569.5

2354.3

6RA7096-4GS22

2200

1779.6

2669.4

1699.9

2549.9

1697.2

3394.4

1678.0

2517.0

6RA7097-4GS22

2800

2136.6

3204.9

2044.1

3066.1

2022.1

4044.2

2024.0

3036.0

460V, 1Q

575V, 1Q

3-4

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description
Load cycles

Recommended

SIMOREG DC-MASTER

DC I

DC II

DC III

US rating
Tu=45C

DC IV

continuous

15min
100%

60sec
150%

15min
100%

120 sec
150%

15min
100%

10sec
200%

15min
100%

60sec
150%

6RA7086-6KS22

720

553.1

829.7

527.9

791.9

515.8

1031.6

525.9

788.9

6RA7088-6KS22

950

700.1

1050.2

677.1

1015.7

624.4

1248.8

668.1

1002.2

6RA7093-4KS22

1500

1156.9

1735.4

1118.2

1677.3

1047.0

2094.0

1101.9

1652.9

6RA7095-4KS22

2000

1589.3

2384.0

1522.2

2283.3

1505.5

3011.0

1503.9

2255.9

6RA7097-4KS22

2600

1992.7

2989.1

1906.3

2859.4

1887.2

3774.4

1876.9

2815.3

6RA7088-6LS22

900

663.8

995.7

642.0

963.0

592.1

1184.2

633.5

950.3

6RA7093-4LS22

1500

1156.9

1735.4

1118.2

1677.3

1047.0

2094.0

1101.9

1652.9

6RA7095-4LS22

1900

1485.4

2228.1

1421.6

2132.4

1396.9

2793.8

1414.2

2121.3

2200

1674.3

2511.4

1603.3

2404.9

1570.7

3141.4

1588.1

2382.1

690V, 1Q

830V, 1Q

950V, 1Q
6RA7096-4MS22

3.4.1.2

Load cycles for 4Q applications

Load cycles

Recommended

SIMOREG DC-MASTER
C

DC I

DC II

DC III

US rating
Tu=45C

DC IV

continuous

15min
100%

60sec
150%

15min
100%

120 sec
150%

15min
100%

10sec
200%

15min
100%

60sec
150%

400V, 4Q
6RA7013-6DV62

13.9

20.9

13.5

20.3

12.6

25.2

13.9

20.9

6RA7018-6DV62

24.9

37.4

24.2

36.3

22.4

44.8

24.9

37.4

6RA7025-6DV62

53.1

79.7

51.8

77.7

47.2

94.4

53.1

79.7

6RA7028-6DV62

78.2

117.3

76.0

114.0

72.2

144.4

78.2

117.3

6RA7031-6DV62

125

106.1

159.2

103.6

155.4

95.4

190.8

106.1

159.2

6RA7075-6DV62

210

164.9

247.4

161.4

242.1

136.5

273.0

157.5

236.3

6RA7078-6DV62

280

226.8

340.2

219.3

329.0

201.0

402.0

215.8

323.7

6RA7081-6DV62

400

300.1

450.2

292.4

438.6

247.4

494.8

285.5

428.3

6RA7085-6DV62

600

470.8

706.2

453.9

680.9

410.4

820.8

450.1

675.2

6RA7087-6DV62

850

658.3

987.5

634.2

951.3

579.6

1159.2

626.4

939.6

6RA7091-6DV62

1200

884.1

1326.2

857.5

1286.3

768.8

1537.6

842.3

1263.5

6RA7093-4DV62

1600

1255.5

1883.3

1213.1

1819.7

1139.9

2279.8

1190.1

1785.2

6RA7095-4DV62

2000

1477.7

2216.6

1435.3

2153.0

1326.7

2653.4

1404.6

2106.9

6RA7098-4DV62

3000

2288.0

3432.0

2189.1

3283.6

2164.0

4328.0

2178.6

3267.9

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-5

Description

05.2007
Load cycles

Recommended

SIMOREG DC-MASTER
C

DC I

DC II

DC III

US rating
Tu=45C

DC IV

continuous

15min
100%

60sec
150%

15min
100%

120 sec
150%

15min
100%

10sec
200%

15min
100%

60sec
150%

460V, 4Q
6RA7018-6FV62

24.9

37.4

24.2

36.3

22.4

44.8

15.0

22.5

6RA7025-6FV62

53.1

79.7

51.8

77.7

47.2

94.4

30.0

45.0

6RA7028-6FV62

78.2

117.3

76.0

114.0

72.2

144.4

60.0

90.0

6RA7031-6FV62

125

106.1

159.2

103.6

155.4

95.4

190.8

100.0

150.0

6RA7075-6FV62

210

164.9

247.4

161.4

242.1

136.5

273.0

140.0

210.0

6RA7078-6FV62

280

226.8

340.2

219.3

329.0

201.0

402.0

210.0

315.0

6RA7082-6FV62

450

320.6

480.9

311.2

466.8

274.3

548.6

255.0

382.5

6RA7085-6FV62

600

470.8

706.2

453.9

680.9

410.4

820.8

430.0

645.0

6RA7087-6FV62

850

658.3

987.5

634.2

951.3

579.6

1159.2

510.0

765.0

6RA7091-6FV62

1200

884.1

1326.2

857.5

1286.3

768.8

1537.6

850.0

1275.0

575V, 4Q
6RA7025-6GV62

53.1

79.7

51.8

77.7

47.2

94.4

53.1

79.7

6RA7031-6GV62

125

106.1

159.2

103.6

155.4

95.4

190.8

106.1

159.2

6RA7075-6GV62

210

164.9

247.4

161.4

242.1

136.5

273.0

157.5

236.3

6RA7081-6GV62

400

300.1

450.2

292.4

438.6

247.4

494.8

285.5

428.3

6RA7085-6GV62

600

470.8

706.2

453.9

680.9

410.4

820.8

450.1

675.2

6RA7087-6GV62

850

658.3

987.5

634.2

951.3

579.6

1159.2

626.4

939.6

6RA7090-6GV62

1100

804.7

1207.1

782.6

1173.9

689.6

1379.2

766.8

1150.2

6RA7093-4GV62

1600

1255.5

1883.3

1213.1

1819.7

1139.9

2279.8

1190.1

1785.2

6RA7095-4GV62

2000

1663.0

2494.5

1591.2

2386.8

1568.4

3136.8

1569.5

2354.3

6RA7096-4GV62

2200

1779.6

2669.4

1699.9

2549.9

1697.2

3394.4

1678.0

2517.0

6RA7097-4GV62

2800

2136.6

3204.9

2044.1

3066.1

2022.1

4044.2

2024.0

3036.0

6RA7086-6KV62

760

598.7

898.1

575.4

863.1

532.9

1065.8

569.3

854.0

6RA7090-6KV62

1000

737.3

1106.0

715.2

1072.8

639.5

1279.0

702.3

1053.5

6RA7093-4KV62

1500

1171.6

1757.4

1140.1

1710.2

1036.6

2073.2

1116.2

1674.3

6RA7095-4KV62

2000

1477.7

2216.6

1435.3

2153.0

1326.7

2653.4

1404.6

2106.9

6RA7097-4KV62

2600

1992.7

2989.1

1906.3

2859.4

1887.2

3774.4

1876.9

2815.3

6RA7088-6LV62

950

700.8

1051.2

679.8

1019.7

607.8

1215.6

667.6

1001.4

6RA7093-4LV62

1500

1171.6

1757.4

1140.1

1710.2

1036.6

2073.2

1116.2

1674.3

6RA7095-4LV62

1900

1485.4

2228.1

1421.6

2132.4

1396.9

2793.8

1414.2

2121.3

2200

1674.3

2511.4

1603.3

2404.9

1570.7

3141.4

1588.1

2382.1

690V, 4Q

830V, 4Q

950V, 4Q
6RA7096-4MV62

3-6

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

3.4.2

Description

Converters 3AC 400V, 30A to 125A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6DS22
18
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated input current armature

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

Rated DC current
Overload capability

3AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

In=1A or
In=2A

2AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

485

104

10)

125

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

14.5

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

163

240

347

400

Rated DC voltage field

max. 325

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

0 to 45 at Irated
self-cooled

Storage and transport

temperature

25 to +70

1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

385x265x239

385x265x283

5.1.1

5.1.2

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-7

Description

3.4.3

05.2007

Converters 3AC 400V, 210A to 600A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6DS22
75
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Fan rated current

Rated input current armature

Fan noise level

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

175

Rated DC current
Overload capability

233

DC 24V internal

498

In=1A or
In=2A
3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
0.3

100

570

2AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

485

332

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

3AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

m3/h

Air flow rate

210

10)

280

400

600

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

102

136

194

291

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

676

800

1328

1798

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 325
15

25
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

385x265x283

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

625x268x318

5.1.2
kg

5.1.3
17

5.1.4
30

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-8

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

3.4.4

Description

Converters 3AC 400V, 850A to 2000A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6DS22
87
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

6RA70 . . 4DS22

705

995

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)
3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

0.3

m3/h

Air flow rate

Rated DC current
Overload capability

1326

1658

3AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
50Hz

Fan rated current

1.0

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

1.25

50Hz

1.0

1.25

570

1300

2400

1600

2000

2AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

485

60Hz

850

10)

1200

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

412

582

776

970

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

2420

4525

5710

6810

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 325
30

40
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and digital
setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

700x268x362

780x410x362

880x450x500

5.1.5

5.1.6

5.1.7

125

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-9

Description

3.4.5

05.2007

Converters 3AC 460V, 30A to 125A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6FS22
18
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated input current armature

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

Rated DC current
Overload capability

3AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

104

In=1A or
In=2A

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

550

10)

125

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

16.5

49.5

68.7

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

172

248

363

417

Rated DC voltage field

max. 375

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

0 to 45 at Irated
self-cooled

Storage and transport

temperature

25 to +70

1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

385x265x239

385x265x313

5.1.1

5.2.1

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-10

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

3.4.6

Description

Converters 3AC 460V, 210A to 600A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6FS22
75
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

Fan rated current

175

233

374

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
1)

Rated DC current
Overload capability

498

In=1A or
In=2A

DC 24V internal

m3/h

Fan noise level

3AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

1AC 230 (10%)

50Hz

60Hz

0.55

0.75

100

570

Air flow rate

Rated DC voltage

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

550

210

10)

280

450

600

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

115

154

247

330

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

700

792

1519

1845

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
15

25
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

385x265x313

625x268x318

5.2.2

5.2.3
18

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-11

Description

3.4.7

05.2007

Converters 3AC 460V, 850A to 1200A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6FS22
87
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

In=1A or
In=2A

1AC 230 (10%)

60Hz

0.55

0.75

2.6

3.3

m3/h

570

1300

dBA
1)

Rated DC current
Overload capability

995

50Hz

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

705

60Hz

Fan noise level

Rated supply voltage field

3AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

50Hz
Fan rated current
Air flow rate

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

550

10)

850

1200
max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

467

660

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

2514

4620

Rated DC voltage field

max. 375

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

700x268x362

780x410x362

5.2.4

5.1.6

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-12

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

3.4.8

Description

Converters 3AC 575V, 60A to 600A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6GS22
25
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Fan rated current

Rated input current armature

Fan noise level

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
1)

Rated DC current
Overload capability

332

498

3AC 575 (+10% / 20%)

104

175

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)
DC24V
internal

In=1A or
In=2A
3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
0.3

m3/h

Air flow rate

Rated DC voltage

100

570

dBA

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

690

125

10)

210

400

600

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

145

276

414

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

265

454

730

1550

1955

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
10

0 to 45 at Irated
self-cooled

25
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

385x265x283

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

625x268x318

5.1.2
kg

5.1.3
16

5.1.4
30

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-13

Description

3.4.9

05.2007

Converters 3AC 575V, 800A to 2200A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6GS22
87
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

6RA70 . . 4GS22
93

A
m3/h

Air flow rate

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

Rated DC current

663

829

1326

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)
3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Overload capability

0.3

1658

1824

1.25

In=1A or
In=2A
3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

1.0

50Hz

1.0

60Hz

1.25

570

1300

2400

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

690

3AC 575 (+10% / 20%)

50Hz
Fan rated current

800

10)

1000

1600

2000

2200

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

552

690

1104

1380

1518

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

2638

4130

5942

7349

7400

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
30

40
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and digital
setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

700x268x362

780x410x362

880x450x500

5.1.5

5.1.6

5.1.7

125

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-14

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4.10 Converters 3AC 690V, 720A to 2000A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6KS22
86
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

6RA70 . . 4KS22

597

788
2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);
1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

0.3

m3/h

Air flow rate

Rated DC current
Overload capability

1244

1658

3AC 690 (+10% / 20%)

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
50Hz

Fan rated current

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

1.0

1.25

In=1A or
In=2A

50Hz

1.0

60Hz

1.25

570

1300

2400

1500

2000

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

830

720

10)

950

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

598

789

1245

1660

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

2720

4380

6706

8190

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
30

40
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and digital
setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

700x268x362

780x410x362

880x450x500

5.1.5

5.1.6

5.1.7

125

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-15

Description

05.2007

3.4.11 Converters 3AC 830V, 900A to 1900A, 1Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6LS22
88
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Fan rated current

A
m3/h

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

Rated DC current
Overload capability

3AC 830 (+10% / 20%)

746

1244

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
60Hz

1.0

1.25

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
50Hz
1.0

60Hz

1.25

1300

2400

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

10)

45 to 65

1000

1575

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

50Hz

Air flow rate

Rated input current armature

6RA70 . . 4LS22

900

1500

1900

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

900

1500

1900

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

4638

6778

8700

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
30

40
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

780x410x362

880x450x500

5.1.6

5.1.7

125

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-16

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4.12 Converters 3AC 400V, 15A to 125A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6DV62
13
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

Rated DC current
Overload capability

Rated input current armature

104

3AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

In=1A or
In=2A

2AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

420

10)

125

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

6.3

12.6

52.5

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

117

163

240

312

400

Rated DC voltage field

max. 325

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

0 to 45 at Irated
self-cooled

Storage and transport

temperature

25 to +70

1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

385x265x239

385x265x283

5.1.9

5.1.10

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-17

Description

05.2007

3.4.13 Converters 3AC 400V, 210A to 600A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6DV62
75
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Fan rated current

Rated input current armature

Fan noise level

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

175

Rated DC current
Overload capability

233

DC 24V internal

498

In=1A or
In=2A
3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
0.3

100

570

2AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

420

332

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

3AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

m3/h

Air flow rate

210

10)

280

400

600

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

118

168

252

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

676

800

1328

1800

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 325
15

25
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

385x265x283

625x268x318

5.1.10

5.1.11
17

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-18

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4.14 Converters 3AC 400V, 850A to 2000A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6DV62
87
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

6RA70 . . 4DV62

705

995

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)
3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

0.3

m3/h

Air flow rate

Rated DC current
Overload capability

1326

1658

3AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
50Hz

Fan rated current

1.0

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

1.25

50Hz

1.0

1.25

570

1300

2400

1600

2000

2AC 400 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

420

60Hz

850

10)

1200

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

357

504

672

840

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

2420

4525

5708

6810

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 325
30

40
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and digital
setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

700x268x362

780x410x362

880x450x500

5.1.12

5.1.13

5.1.14

145

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-19

Description

05.2007

3.4.15 Converters 3AC 460V, 30A to 125A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6FV62
18
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated input current armature

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

Rated DC current
Overload capability

3AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

104

In=1A or
In=2A

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

480

10)

125

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

14.4

28.8

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

172

248

328

417

Rated DC voltage field

max. 375

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

0 to 45 at Irated
self-cooled

Storage and transport

temperature

25 to +70

1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

385x265x239

385x265x313

5.1.9

5.2.5

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-20

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4.16 Converters 3AC 460V, 210A to 600A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6FV62
75
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

Fan rated current

175

233

374

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
1)

Rated DC current
Overload capability

498

In=1A or
In=2A

DC 24V internal

m3/h

Fan noise level

3AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

1AC 230 (10%)

50Hz

60Hz

0.55

0.75

100

570

Air flow rate

Rated DC voltage

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

480

210

10)

280

450

600

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

100

134

216

288

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

700

792

1519

1845

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
15

25
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

385x265x313

625x268x318

5.2.6

5.2.7
18

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-21

Description

05.2007

3.4.17 Converters 3AC 460V, 850A to 1200A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6FV62
87
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

In=1A or
In=2A

1AC 230 (10%)

60Hz

0.55

0.75

2.6

3.3

m3/h

570

1300

dBA
1)

Rated DC current
Overload capability

995

50Hz

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

705

60Hz

Fan noise level

Rated supply voltage field

3AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

50Hz
Fan rated current
Air flow rate

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

480

10)

850

1200
max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

408

576

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

2514

4620

Rated DC voltage field

max. 375

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

700x268x362

780x410x362

5.2.8

5.1.13

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-22

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4.18 Converters 3AC 575V, 60A to 600A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6GV62
25
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Fan rated current

Rated input current armature

Fan noise level

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
1)

Rated DC current
Overload capability

332

498

3AC 575 (+10% / 20%)

104

175

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)
DC24V
internal

In=1A or
In=2A
3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
0.3

m3/h

Air flow rate

Rated DC voltage

100

570

dBA

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

600

125

10)

210

400

600

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

126

240

360

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

265

455

730

1550

1955

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
10

0 to 45 at Irated
self-cooled

25
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

385x265x283

625x268x318

5.1.10

5.1.11
16

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-23

Description

05.2007

3.4.19 Converters 3AC 575V, 850A to 2200A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6GV62
87
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

6RA70 . . 4GV62
93

A
m3/h

Air flow rate

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

Rated DC current

705

912

1326

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)
3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz
3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Overload capability

1658

1824

0.3

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

1.0

1.25

50Hz

1.0

60Hz

1.25

570

1300

2400

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

600

3AC 575 (+10% / 20%)

50Hz
Fan rated current

850

10)

1100

1600

2000

2200

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

510

660

960

1200

1320

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

2780

4515

5942

7349

7400

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
30

40
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and digital
setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

700x268x362

780x410x362

880x450x500

5.1.12

5.1.13

5.1.14

145

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-24

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4.20 Converters 3AC 690V, 760A to 2000A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6KV62
86
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

6RA70 . . 4KV62

630

829
2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);
1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

3AC 400 (15%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

0.3

m3/h

Air flow rate

Rated DC current
Overload capability

1244

1658

3AC 690 (+10% / 20%)

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
50Hz

Fan rated current

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

1.0

1.25

In=1A or
In=2A

50Hz

1.0

60Hz

1.25

570

1300

2400

1500

2000

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

725

760

10)

1000

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

551

725

1088

1450

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

2850

4605

6706

8190

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
30

40
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and digital
setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

700x268x362

780x410x362

880x450x500

5.1.12

5.1.13

5.1.14

145

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-25

Description

05.2007

3.4.21 Converters 3AC 830V, 950A to 1900A, 4Q

Order No.

6RA70 . . 6LV62
88
1)

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Fan rated current

A
m3/h

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

Rated DC current
Overload capability

3AC 830 (+10% / 20%)

788

1244

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
60Hz

1.0

1.25

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz
50Hz
1.0

60Hz

1.25

1300

2400

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

875

1575

2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);

1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

50Hz

Air flow rate

Rated input current armature

6RA70 . . 4LV62

950

10)

1500

1900

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

831

1313

1663

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

4870

7153

8700

Rated DC voltage field

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

max. 375
30

40
0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

780x410x362

880x450x500

5.1.13

5.1.14

145

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-26

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4.22 Converters 3AC 400V, 3000A, 1Q / 4Q

6RA70984DS22-0

Order No.

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

3AC 400 (+10% / 20%)

2487

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated DC current
Overload capability

50Hz

1.25

1.0

60Hz

1.25

2400

2AC 400 (+15% / 20%) 7)

45 to 65

10)

485

420

3000

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

1455

1260

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

10.66

max. 325

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

Rated DC voltage field

2400

Hz
1)

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

1.0

m3/h

Air flow rate

2487
2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);
1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

50Hz
Fan rated current

6RA70984DV62-0

0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

880x450x500
5.1.8

5.1.15

125

145

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-27

Description

05.2007

3.4.23 Converters 3AC 575V, 2800A, 1Q / 4Q

6RA70974GS22-0

Order No.

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

3AC 575 (+10% / 20%)

2321

A
m3/h

Air flow rate

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Rated DC voltage

1.0

Rated DC current
Overload capability

50Hz

1.25

1.0

60Hz

1.25

2400

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

10)

690

600

2800

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

1932

1680

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

10.56

max. 375

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

Rated DC voltage field

2400

Hz
1)

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

Rated frequency

2321
2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);
1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

50Hz
Fan rated current

6RA70974GV62-0

0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

880x450x500
5.1.8

5.1.15

125

145

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-28

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description

3.4.24 Converters 3AC 690V, 2600A, 1Q / 4Q

6RA70974KS22-0

Order No..

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

3AC 690 (+10% / 20%)

2155

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

Rated DC current
Overload capability

50Hz

1.25

1.0

60Hz

1.25

2400

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

10)

830

725

2600

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

2158

1885

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

10.33

max. 375

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

Rated DC voltage field

2400

Hz
1)

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

Rated frequency
Rated DC voltage

1.0

m3/h

Air flow rate

2155
2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);
1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

50Hz
Fan rated current

6RA70974KV62-0

0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

880x450x500
5.1.8

5.1.15

125

145

Explanation at end of list of tables

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-29

Description

05.2007

3.4.25 Converters 3AC 950V, 2200A, 1Q / 4Q

6RA70964MS22-0

Order No.

Rated supply voltage armature

Rated supply voltage electronics

power supply

Rated supply voltage fan

Rated input current armature

3AC 950 (+15% / 20%)

1824

A
m3/h

Air flow rate

Fan noise level

dBA

Rated supply voltage field

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

Rated DC voltage

1.0

Rated DC current
Overload capability

50Hz

1.25

1.0

60Hz

1.25

2400

2AC 460 (+15% / 20%)

45 to 65

10)

1140

1000

2200

max. 180% of rated DC current

Rated output

2508

2200

Power loss at rated DC current

(approx.)

11.37

max. 375

Rated DC current field

Operational ambient temperature

Storage and transport

temperature

Rated DC voltage field

2400

Hz
1)

In=1A or
In=2A

3AC 400 (10%) 50Hz

3AC 460 (10%) 60Hz

60Hz

Rated frequency

1824
2AC 380 ( 25%) to 460 (+15%);
1AC 190 ( 25%) to 230 (+15%);
( 35% for 1min)

50Hz
Fan rated current

6RA70964MV62-0

0 to 40 at Irated
forced-cooled

25 to +70
1000 m at rated DC current

Installation altitude above sea level

Control stability

n = 0.006% of the rated motor speed, valid for pulse encoder operation and
digital setpoint
n = 0.1% of the rated motor speed, valid for analog tacho or analog
setpoint 5)

Environmental class
DIN IEC 60 721-3-3

3K3

Degree of protection

IP00

DIN EN 60529

Dimensions (HxWxD)

Dimension diagram see Section

Weight (approx.)

880x450x500
5.1.8

5.1.15

125

145

Explanation at end of list of tables

3-30

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Description
1) The armature/field supply voltage can be lower than the rated armature/field voltage (setting in
parameter P078, input voltages down to 85V are permissible for converters with rated supply
voltage of 400V). The output voltage is reduced accordingly.
The specified output DC voltage can be guaranteed up to an undervoltage corresponding to
95% of line voltage (rated supply voltage armature/field).
2) Values apply to output rated DC current.
3) Load factor K1 (direct current) as a function of coolant temperature (see P077 Section 11).
K1 > 1 permitted only if K1 * K2 1.
Total derating factor K = K1 * K2 (K2 see below)
Ambient
temperature or
coolant
temperature

Load factor K1
in devices with self-cooling in devices with enhanced
air cooling

+ 30C

1.18

1.10

+ 35C

1.12

1.05

+ 40C

1.06

1.00

+ 45C

1.00

0.95

+ 50C

0.94

0.90

+ 55C

0.88

+ 60C

0.82

a) In spite of derating, converters of 400 A with forced air cooling may be operated at an
ambient or coolant temperature of 50C only if the rated supply voltage of the converter fan
is safely within the limited tolerance range of 400V + 10% 15%.
b) Not permissible when T400 or OP1S is used.
4) Load values as a function of installation altitude (refer to P077 in Section 11)
Total derating factor K = K1 * K2 (K1 see above)

Percentage
load "b"

%
100

Installation
altitude
[m]

80
67%

60
40
20

Derating
factor K2

1000

1.0

2000

0.835

3000

0.74

4000

0.71

5000

0.67

0
1000

2000

3000

4000

5000 m

Installation altitude

Curve b1: Reduction factor of load values (DC current) at installation altitudes above 1000 m

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-31

Description

05.2007
Derating as a function of installation altitude:
Units can operate at altitudes of up to 4500m when the electronics and field are supplied with
voltages of 460 VAC line-to-line (maximum 300 VAC to earth). The maximum permissible
voltage up to 5000m is 400 VAC line-to-line (maximum 230 VAC to earth).
Units with a rated supply voltage of 950V armature can be operated up to maximum 4000m
above sea level without derating.
933 VAC is the maximum permitted armature supply voltage up to 4500m.
881 VAC is the maximum permitted armature supply voltage up to 5000m.
At higher altitudes, or at higher voltages, only basic insulation is afforded rather than "Protection
by electrical separation".

5) Conditions
The control stability (closed-loop PI control) is referred to the rated motor speed and applies
when the SIMOREG converter is warm. The following conditions are applicable:
-

Temperature changes of 10 K

Line voltage changes corresponding to +10% / 5% of the rated input voltage

Temperature coefficient of temperature-compensated tacho-generators 0.15 per 10 K

(applies only to analog tacho-generator)

Constant setpoint (14-bit resolution)

6) Also refer to Section 3.3 and 9.

7) Also permissible for 2AC 460 (+15% / 20%).
8) Motor protection type 3RV1011-0DA1 or 3RV1011-0EA1 trimmed to 0.3A manufactured by
Siemens is to be provided for blower motor type R2D220-AB02-19 in drive models 6RA7081,
6RA7085, 6RA7087 with rated input voltage 400V or 575V.
9) Motor protection type 3RV1011-0KA1 or 3RV1011-1AA1 trimmed to 1.25A manufactured by
Siemens is to be provided for blower motor type RH28M-2DK.3F.1R in drive models 6RA7090,
6RA7091, 6RA7093, 6RA7095 with rated input voltage 400V or 575V.
10) Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz is available on request.

3.5

Applicable standards
VDE 0106 Part 100
Arrangement of operator control elements in the vicinity of components/parts at hazardous voltage
levels.
EN 50178
Electronic equipment for use in power installations
Degree of pollution 2:
Under normal conditions, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, pollution may
become conductive for a short period of time when the electronic equipment is not in operation.
EN60146 T1-1 / VDE 0558 T11
Semiconductor converter
General requirements and line-commutated converters
DIN EN50178 / VDE 0160
Regulations for equipping electrical power systems with electronic equipment.
EN61800-3
Variable-speed drives, part 3, EMC Product Standard including special testing procedures
DIN IEC 60068-2-6 acc. to severity grade 12 (SN29010 Part1)
Mechanical stressing
UL 508 C Power Conversion Equipment

3-32

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

3.6

Description

Certification
ISO 9001:
The products referred to in this document are manufactured and operated in accordance with
DIN ISO 9001 (Certificate Register No.: 257-0).
UL:
Certificate No. E203250
All devices with a rated supply voltage of 575 V have been certified, except for order number
6RA7096-4GS22-5.
Ship-building:
Certificate No.
Germanischer Lloyd
Lloyd's Register
American Bureau of Shipping
Det Norske Veritas

26 071 - 05 HH
06 / 20053
06HG196689-PDA
E-7925

Information on the necessary measures can be found in the CD-ROM package "SIMOREG DCMASTER documentation" order number 6RX1700-0D64 (CD1 from issue 24 onwards) or in the
Internet at http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/24063215

3.7

Abbreviations
ADB

Adapter Board, carrier for miniature-format supplementary boards

CAN

Field bus specification of user organization CiA (CAN in Automation)

(Controller Area Network)

Supplementary Communication Board

CBC

Supplementary board for CAN Bus link

(Communication Board CAN Bus)

CBD

Supplementary board for DeviceNet link

(Communication Board DeviceNet)

CBP2

Supplementary board for PROFIBUS link

(Communication Board PROFIBUS)

COB

Communication Object for CAN Bus communication

CUD1

Electronics board C98043-A7001 of SIMOREG DC-MASTER

(Control Unit / Direct Current)

CUD2

Terminal expansion board C98043-A7006 for CUD1

DeviceNet

Field bus specification of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association)

Distributed Peripherals

EB1

Supplementary board with additional inputs/outputs (Expansion Board 1)

EB2

Supplementary board with additional inputs/outputs (Expansion Board 2)

GSD file

Device master data file defining the communication features of the PROFIBUS
communication board

Identifier for CAN Bus communication

IND

Parameter Index

LBA

Connection module for mounting supplementary modules

(Local Bus Adapter)

LWL

Fiber-optic cable

MSAC_C1

Designation of a transmission channel for PROFIBUS

(Master Slave Acyclic / Class 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

3-33

Description

3-34

05.2007

MSCY_C1

Designation of a transmission channel for PROFIBUS

(Master Slave Cyclic / Class 1)

OP1S

Optional device operating panel with plaintext display and internal memory for
parameter sets (Operator Panel 1 / Store)

PKE

Parameter identifier

PKW

Reference to parameter (parameter identifier value)

PMU

Simple operator panel of SIMOREG DC-MASTER (Parameterization Unit)

PNU

Parameter number

PPO

Definition of number of parameter and process data words for PROFIBUS

communication (Parameter Process Data Object)

PROFIBUS

Field bus specification of PROFIBUS user organization (Process Field Bus)

PWE

Parameter value

PZD

Process data

SBP

Supplementary board for linking tacho (Sensor Board Pulse)

SCB1

Supplementary board for linking SCI1 or SCI2 via fiber optic cable
(Serial Communication Board 1)

SCI1

Supplementary board with additional inputs/outputs; I/O slave module on SCB1

(Serial Communication Interface 1)

SCI2

Supplementary board with additional inputs/outputs; I/O slave module on SCB1

(Serial Communication Interface 2)

SIMOLINK

Field bus specification for fiber optic ring bus (Siemens Motion Link)

SLB

Supplementary board for SIMOLINK link (SIMOLINK Board)

STW

Control word

T100

Supplementary board with technology functions (Technology Board 100)

T300

Supplementary board with technology functions (Technology Board 300)

T400

Supplementary board with technology functions (Technology Board 400)

Technology board T100, T300 or T400

USS

Universal serial interface

ZSW

Status word

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Shipment, Unpacking

Shipment, unpacking
SIMOREG converters are packed in the production works according to the relevant ordering data.
A product packing label is attached to the box.
Protect the package against severe jolts and shocks during shipment, e.g. when setting it down.
Carefully observe the information on the packaging relating to transportation, storage and proper
handling.
The SIMOREG device can be installed after it has been unpacked and the shipment checked for
completeness and/or damage.
The packaging materials consist of cardboard and corrugated paper and can be disposed of
according to locally applicable waste disposal regulations.
If you discover that the converter has been damaged during shipment, please inform your shipping
agent immediately.

4.1

Remove the transportation protection for devices with 1500A to

3000A rated DC

Remove the brackets for cabinet

mounting by cutting open the cable ties
and fix them to the outside of the device if
required.

Remove the six M8 hexagon-head nuts.

Remove the two M8 hexagon-head nuts

and the transportation bracket.

Remove the two banding strips.

Remove the transportation sheet after

assembling the device and before startup
by removing the six M6 hexagon-head
nuts.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

4-1

Shipment, Unpacking

4-2

05.2007

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Installation

Installation
CAUTION
Failure to lift the converter in the correct manner can result in bodily injury and/or property
damage.
The device must always be lifted by properly trained personnel using the appropriate
equipment (i.e. protective gloves, etc.).
To preclude the risk of deformation damage to the housings of converters with rated DC
current of 720A or higher, the lifting lugs used to raise them must not be subjected to any
horizontal forces.
The user is responsible for installing the converter, motor, transformer as well as other
equipment according to safety regulations (e.g. DIN, VDE), as well as all other relevant
national or local regulations regarding cable dimensioning and protection, grounding, isolating
switch, overcurrent protection, etc.
The converter must be installed in accordance with the relevant safety regulations (e.g. DIN,
VDE), as well as all other relevant national and local regulations. It must be ensured that the
grounding, cable dimensioning and appropriate short-circuit protection have been implemented
to guarantee operational safety and reliability.

Installation of SIMOREG devices in cabinets in accordance with UL 508 C standards

When the drive is provided in a panel (enclosure), the panel is ventilated and designated "Type 1".
The minimum size panel (enclosure) to be used with the drive is 600 mm length, 600 mm width,
2200 mm height.
Possible lifting method for converters with rated DC current of 1500A to 3000A

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

5-1

Installation

05.2007

Cubicle mounting of converters with rated DC current of 1500A to 3000A

These converters are supplied with 2 fixing angles a. These can be bolted to the SIMOREG
unit by means of the supplied M6 hexagon-head screws (3 per angle) to assist cubicle
mounting.
The unit can then be supported by 2 further angles s (not included in scope of supply) in the
control cubicle.
The converters must be bolted to the cubicle rear panel in 4 places.

WARNING
A clearance of at least 100 mm must be left above and below the converter in order to ensure
an unrestricted cooling air intake and outlet.
The converter may overheat if this clearance is not provided!

5-2

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
15

V5+V2

Converters: 3AC 400V and 460V, 30A, 1Q

366

350
1U1 1V1 1W1
1D1 1C1

10101010

V3+V6

17.5

5.1.1

112.5

XF2

V1+V4

XF1

265
230

Dimension diagrams for standard devices

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

63.5
70

for M6

5.1

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 1,5 Nm
= 25 Nm

100 1)

X300

239
227

05.2007
Installation

385
12.5

100 1)

5-3

5-4
350
15

48.5
1U1

V1+V4

XF2

Fan in devices 210A only

12.5

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

108
129

XF1

1D1

48.5
1V1

V3+V6

R100

265
230

37
1C1

48.5
1W1

V5+V2

for M8

17.5

366

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 13 Nm
= 25 Nm

100 1)

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 2 x 95 mm2

for M6

5.1.2

X300

283
271.5

Installation
05.2007

Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 60A to 280A, 1Q

385

100 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
585
35

4U1
4V1
4W1

120

625
133
39

47.5

1C1

47.5

1W1

V5+V2

for M10

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 25 Nm
= 50 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye in accordance with DIN 46234:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1 = 2 x 150 mm 2
1C1, 1D1 = 2 x 185 mm 2

1V1

V3+V6

XF2

160

for M10

1D1

R100

XF1

for M8

602

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

100 1)
1U1

V1+V4

179.7
123.7

268
230

5.1.3

X300

318
306.5

05.2007
Installation

Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 400A, 1Q

100 1)

5-5

5-6
585

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

100 1)
120

625
133
39

47.5

1C1

47.5

1W1

V5+V2

for M10

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 25 Nm
= 50 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye in accordance with DIN 46234:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1 = 2 x 150 mm2
1C1, 1D1 = 2 x 185 mm2

1V1

V3+V6

XF2

160

for M10

1D1

R100

XF1

for M8

602

4U1
4V1
4W1

1U1

V1+V4

179.7
123.7

268
230

5.1.4

X300

318
306.5

Installation
05.2007

Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 600A, 1Q

100 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

677

1C1

1W1

for M12

139
192

V1+V4
V3+V6
V5+V2

150

275

T2
T3

350

for M10

Lifting lug 20

660

30
76
30
119
30
162
205

1D1

1V1

for M8
100 1)

1U1

XF2

268
230

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 50 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 4 x 150 mm2

X300

5.1.5

XF1

05.2007
Installation

Converters: 3AC 400V, 575V, and 690V, 720A to 850A, 1Q

100 1)

55
85

700

510

5-7

R100

XF1
XF2

5-8

1C1

320

394
406

30
30

10
15
for M12

140
155

R100

220

350
362

for M12

4U1
4V1
4W1

Lifting lug 20

30 30 30 30

310

740
717

254

V5
+
V2

765

30
122
188

1W1

1V1

1U1

1D1

V3
+
V6

194
150
100 1)

V1
+
V4

for M10

1) Minimum clearance for circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 60 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 4 x 150 mm2

X300

5.1.6

V7
V8

410
320

Installation
05.2007

Converters: 3AC 400V, 460V, 575V, 690V, and 830V, 900A to 1200A, 1Q

100 1)

780

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

4U1
4V1
4W1

160 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

840

433

1D1

235

158

Lifting lug 22

260

304

63,5

171

V11

F111
F112
(F11)

313

V13

F131
F132
(F13)

360

T3
855

347

for M12

V14

205

1U1

F141
F142
(F14)

1V1

V16

F161
F162
(F16)

V12

1W1

F121
F122
(F12)

for M12

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye in accordance with DIN 46234:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1 = 4 x 240 mm2
1C1, 1D1 = 8 x 240 mm2
Tightening torque for customer connections:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 60 Nm

Cable duct

XF1
XF2

View of rear thyristor level

2) Remove transport cover by undoing 6 M6

hexagon head screws before start-up
3) Number of fuses see section 6.6.2.2

for M12

V15

F151
F152
(F15)

for M10

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

450

Front view without doors

5.1.7

Customer terminals

1C1

500

05.2007
Installation

Converters: 3AC 400V, 575V, 690V, and 830V, 1500A to 2000A, 575V/2200A
1Q

880

150 1)

5-9

4U1
4V1
4W1

5-10

160 1)

840

433
418

240

155

T2
T3

30
171

V11

F111
F112

313

V13

F131
F132

360

450

3) Insulation of mains terminals U1, V1, W1

for M10

880
Cable duct

for M12

40
35 35
190

47
48

1U1

V21

F141
F142

332
Customer terminals
1U1, 1V1, 1W1: copper bus 2x100x10 for M12x50
1C1, 1D1: copper bus 2x80x10 for M12x50
: copper bus 120x10 for M12x40

for M12

V15

F151
F152

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation, customer

connection and replacaement of fan. An adequate
cooling air supply must be provided
2) Remove transport cover by undoing 6 M6
hexagon head screws before start-up

35 35

1W1

V25

F121
F122

47
for M12

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 60 Nm

35 35

1V1

V23

F161
F162

View of rear thyristor level

58,5

125

855

1D1
(1C1)

XF1,XF2
Lifting lug 22

260

Front view without doors

5.1.8

Customer terminals

1C1
(1D1)

500

Installation
05.2007

Converters: 3AC 400V / 3000A, 3AC 575V / 2800A, 3AC 690V / 2600A,
3AC 950V / 2200A 1Q

150 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

350

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

100 1)

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 1,5 Nm
= 25 Nm

63.5
70

for M6

XF1

112.5

XF2

1U1 1V1 1W1

1D1 1C1
(1C1) (1D1)

10101010

265
230

17.5

366

5.1.9

X300

239
227

05.2007
Installation

Converters: 3AC 400V and 460V, 15A to 30A, 4Q

12.5

385

100 1)

5-11

5-12
350
15

48.5
1U1

XF2

37
1D1
(1C1)

R100

Fan in devices 210A only

12.5

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

108
129

XF1

48.5

1V1

265
230

37
1C1
(1D1)

48.5

1W1

for M8

17.5

366

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 13 Nm
= 25 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 2 x 95 mm2

100 1)

X300

283
271.5

for M6

Installation
05.2007

5.1.10 Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 60A to 280A, 4Q

385

100 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
100 1)
585
35

4U1
4V1
4W1

120

625
133
47.5

47.5

1V1

47.5

1C1
(1D1)

XF2

1W1

for M10

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 25 Nm
= 50 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye in accordance with DIN 46234:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1 = 2 x 150 mm2
1C1, 1D1 = 2 x 185 mm2

1D1
(1C1)

R100

XF1

for M8

160

for M10

1U1

179.7
123.7

268
230

602

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

X300

318
306.5

05.2007
Installation

5.1.11 Converters: 3AC 400V and 575V, 400A to 600A, 4Q

100 1)

5-13

5-14

1D1
(1C1)

XF2

1V1

677

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

for M12

for M8

139

V4
V6
V2

V1
V3
V5

192

150

275

T2
T3

350

for M10

Lifting lug 20

660

30
76
30
119
30
162
205

1U1

XF1

268
230
100 1)

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 50 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 4 x 150 mm2

X300

Installation
05.2007

5.1.12 Converters: 3AC 400V, 575V, and 690V, 760A to 850A, 4Q

100 1)

55
85

700

510

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

R100

XF1
XF2

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

V7
V8

198
254

330

394
406

1W1

10
15

for M12

140
155

R100

194
150

1U1

for M12

4U1
4V1
4W1

Lifting lug 20

30 30 30 30
350
362

310

740
717

122

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

767

1U1

1D1
(1C1)

for M10
100 1)

410
320

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 60 Nm

max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 4 x 150 mm2

X300

05.2007
Installation

5.1.13 Converters: 3AC 400V, 460V, 575V, 690V, and 830V, 950A to 1200A, 4Q

100 1)

780

5-15

4U1
4V1
4W1

5-16

160 1)

235

158

63.5

171

840
313

V13

V11

F131
F132
(F13)

V26

V24

F111
F112
(F11)

360

450

30
2) Remove transport cover by undoing 6 M6
hexagon head screws before start-up
3) Number of fuses see section 6.6.2.2

for M12

V15

V22

F151
F152
(F15)

for M10

V23

V21

V16

1V1

F161
F162
(F16)

V14

for M12
40
205
347

1U1

F141
F142
(F14)

XF1
XF2

View of rear thyristor level

V25

V12

1W1

F121
F122
(F12)

for M12
Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye in accordance with DIN 46234:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1 = 4 x 240 mm2
1C1, 1D1 = 8 x 240 mm2
Tightening torque for customer connections:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 60 Nm

Cable duct

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

855

433

1D1
(1C1)

Lifting lug 22

260

304

Front view without doors

Customer terminals

1C1
(1D1)

500

Installation
05.2007

5.1.14 Converters: 3AC 400V, 575V, 690V, and 830V, 1500A to 2000A, 575V/2200A
4Q

880

150 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

4U1
4V1
4W1

433
418

240

155

160 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

840
10

T2
T3

30
313

V13

V26

F131
F132

3) Insulation of mains terminals U1, V1, W1

for M10

880
Cable duct

for M12

40
35 35
190

332

35 35

1W1

V25

V12

F121
F122

for M12

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 60 Nm

35 35

V23

V21

1V1

V16

1U1

F161
F162

V14

F141
F142

View of rear thyristor level

Customer terminals
1U1, 1V1, 1W1: copper bus 2x100x10 for M12x50
1C1, 1D1: copper bus 2x80x10 for M12x50
: copper bus 120x10 for M12x40

for M12

V15

V22

F151
F152

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation, customer

connection and replacaement of fan. An adequate
cooling air supply must be provided
2) Remove transport cover by undoing 6 M6
hexagon head screws before start-up

171

V11

V24

F111
F112

360

450

855

58,5

125

880

1D1
(1C1)

XF1,XF2
Lifting lug 22

260

Front view without doors

Customer terminals

1C1
(1D1)

500

05.2007
Installation

5.1.15 Converters: 3AC 400V / 3000A, 3AC 575V / 2800A, 3AC 690V / 2600A,
3AC 950V / 2200A 4Q

150 1)

5-17

5-18
15

48,5
1U1

1U1

1D1

XF2

1D1

1V1

1C1

1C1
48

48
1W1

1W1

17,5

for M8

5.2
Dimension diagrams of the devices with additional cable
connections on the top of the device

5.2.1
Converters: 3AC 460V, 60A to 125A, 1Q

350
100

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

138

XF1

63,5

265
230

159

for M6

366

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 13 Nm
= 25 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 2 x 95 mm2

100 1)

X300

313
301,5

Installation
05.2007

385
12,5

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

100 1)
350

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
100

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

12,5

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 13 Nm
= 25 Nm

138

48,5
1U1

1U1

1D1

XF2

1D1

1V1

1C1

1C1
48

159

XF1

63,5

265
230

1W1

1W1
17.5

17,5

for M8

366

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 2 x 95 mm2

for M6

5.2.2

X300

313
301,5

05.2007
Installation

Converters: 3AC 460V, 210A to 280A, 1Q

12.5

385

5-19

5-20
100 1)
585

604
625
133

164

1U1

47,5

1D1

47,5

1V1

XF1

1V1

47,5

1C1

47,5

XF2

1C1

1W1

for M10

for M8

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 25 Nm
= 50 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye in accordance with DIN 46234:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1 = 2 x 150 mm2
1C1, 1D1 = 2 x 185 mm2

268
230

602

125

for M10

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

155
139

5.2.3

X300

318
306,5

Installation
05.2007

Converters: 3AC 460V, 450A to 600A, 1Q

100 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
19

1D1

660

677

275

1C1

1W1

111

268

230

1V1

View A

1U1

651

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

100 1)

for M12

for M8

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 50 Nm

360

192
147
130

205
162
119
30
76
30
33 30

12
for M10

5.2.4

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 4 x 150 mm2

X300

Lifting lug 20

355

05.2007
Installation

Converters: 3AC 460V, 850A, 1Q

700

100 1)

5-21

5-22
350
100

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

138

48,5
1U1

1D1
(1C1)

XF2

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1C1
(1D1)
48

159

XF1

63,5

1U1

265
230

1W1

17,5

for M8

366

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 13 Nm
= 25 Nm

100 1)

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 2 x 95 mm2

for M6

5.2.5

X300

313
301,5

Installation
05.2007

Converters: 3AC 460V, 60A to 125A, 4Q

385
12,5

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

100 1)
350

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
100

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

12,5

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 13 Nm
= 25 Nm

138

48,5
1U1

1D1
(1C1)

XF2

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1C1
(1D1)
48

159

XF1

63,5

1U1

265
230

1W1

1W1
17.5

17,5

for M8

366

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 2 x 95 mm2

for M6

5.2.6

X300

313
301,5

05.2007
Installation

Converters: 3AC 460V, 210A to 280A, 4Q

12.5

385

5-23

5-24
100 1)
585

604
625
133

164

1U1

47,5

1D1
(1C1)

1D1
(1C1)
47,5
47,5

1V1

XF1

47,5

1C1
(1D1)

XF2

1W1

1C1
1W1
(1D1)
47,5
47,5

for M10

for M8

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 25 Nm
= 50 Nm

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye in accordance with DIN 46234:
1U1, 1V1, 1W1 = 2 x 150 mm2
1C1, 1D1 = 2 x 185 mm2

1U1

268
230
1V1

602

125

for M10

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

155
139

5.2.7

X300

318
306,5

Installation
05.2007

Converters: 3AC 460V, 450A to 600A, 4Q

100 1)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
19

1D1
(1C1)

660

677

275

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

111

268

230

1V1

View A

1U1

651

1) Minimum clearance for air circulation

An adequate cooling air supply must be provided

100 1)

for M12

for M8

Tightening torque for customer connections:

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1C1, 1D1 = 44 Nm
= 50 Nm

360

192
147
130

205
162
119
30
76
30
33 30

for M10

5.2.8

Max. conductor size for cables with cable eye

in accordance with DIN 46234: 4 x 150 mm2

X300

Lifting lug 20

355

05.2007
Installation

Converters: 3AC 460V, 850A, 4Q

700

100 1)

5-25

Installation

05.2007

5.3

Mounting options

5.3.1

Terminal expansion board CUD2

CUD2

1
CUD1

Remove electronics board CUD1 from the electronics box by undoing the two fixing screws a.
Attach the 3 hexagon-head bolts supplied at position s on the CUD1 electronics board with the
screws and fixing elements d supplied and insert the two plug connectors f.
The two plug connectors must be positioned such that the short pin ends are inserted in the
socket connectors of the CUD1 and the long pin ends in the socket connectors of the CUD2.
Position board CUD2 in such a way that the two plug connectors f are properly contacted.
Secure board CUD2 in position using the supplied screws and retaining elements g.
Insert electronics board CUD1 into electronics box and tighten up the two fixing screws a
again as instructed.

5-26

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

5.3.2

Installation

Optional supplementary boards

WARNING
Safe operation is dependent upon proper installation and start-up by qualified personnel under
observance of all warnings contained in these operating instructions.
Boards must always be replaced by properly qualified personnel.
Boards must not be inserted or removed when the power supply is connected.
Failure to observe this warning can result in death, severe physical injury or substantial
property damage.

CAUTION
The boards contain ElectroStatic Discharge Sensitive Devices (ESDS). Before touching a
board, make sure that your own body has been electrostatically discharged. The easiest way to
do this is to touch a conductive, earthed object (e.g. bare metal part of cubicle) immediately
beforehand.
5.3.2.1

Local bus adapter (LBA) for mounting optional supplementary boards

Optional supplementary boards can be installed only in conjunction with the LBA option. If an LBA
is not already fitted in the SIMOREG converter, one must be installed in the electronics box to
accommodate the optional board.
How to install an LBA local bus adapter in the electronics box:
Undo the two fixing screws on the CUD1
board and pull board out by special
handles.
Push LBA bus extension into electronics
box (see picture on right for position) until it
engages.
Insert CUD1 board in left-hand board
location again and tighten fixing screws in
handles.

Location 2 (Options)
Location 3 (Options)
Location 1 (CUD1)

Mounting of optional supplementary boards

Supplementary boards are inserted in the slots
of the electronics box. Option LBA (local bus
adapter) is required to fit supplementary boards.
The designations of the board locations or slots
are shown in the adjacent diagram.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

CUDx

5.3.2.2

Arrangement of
board locations 1 to 3
and slots D to G in
electronics box

5-27

Installation

05.2007

Supplementary boards may be inserted in any slot subject to the following restrictions:

NOTICE
Slot 3 must not be used until slot 2 is already occupied.
A technology board must always be installed in board location 2 of the electronics box.
If a technology board is used in conjunction with one communication board, then the
communication board must be fitted in slot G (miniature-format boards, for example CBP2
and CBC) or slot 3 (large-format board SCB1).
A type T400 technology module can also be used with two communication boards of type
CBC, CBD or CBP2 (see Section 7.7.1, Procedure for starting up technology boards).
It is not possible to operate boards EB1, EB2, SLB and SBP in conjunction with a technology
board.
The data of large-format boards are always output under slot E or slot G, i.e. the software
version of a technology board, for example, is displayed in r060.003.
In addition to the LBA, miniature-format boards (for example CBP2 and CBC) also require an
ADB (adapter board, support board). Due to their very compact physical dimensions, these
boards must be inserted in an ADB before they can be installed in the electronics box.
A total of two supplementary boards of the same type can be used (e.g. 2 EB1s), but only 1
SBP and 1 SLB may be installed.

The diagram below shows which locations or slots can be used for the supplementary boards you
wish to install and which board combinations are possible:
no
Use TB?
TB = T100, T300 or T400
yes
Use SCB1?
TB on its own?

yes

yes
SCB1 on its own?

Only one of the following

boards can be used in
addition to the TB:
CBC, CBD, CBP2,
SCB1
TB in location 2 and
CBC, CBD, CBP2 in slot G
with ADB in location 3 or
SCB1 in location 3.
Exception: T400 with two
communication modules
(see Section 7.7.1,
Procedure for starting up
technology boards)
TB in slot 2

Required: LBA

yes

One of the miniature-format

boards CBC, CBD, CBP2,
EB1, EB2, SLB or SBP can
be installed in addition to SCB1.
SCB1 can be installed in
either location 2 or lacation 3.
The ADB required for the other
board(s) is then inserted in the
other location in each case.

A maximum total of 4 boards

can be installed, these may
include no more than two of
the miniature-format boards
CBC, CBD, CBP2, EB1 and
EB2 or one of the miniatureformat boards SLB or SBP.
A maximum of two miniatureformat boards may be inserted
in the ADB.
Location 3 may not be used
unless a board has already
been inserted in lacation 2.

SCB1 in lacation 2

Required: LBA and ADB

(for CBx only)

Required: LBA

Required: LBA and ADB

(for miniature-format boards
only)

Required: LBA and ADBs

(depending on number of
miniature-format boards)

For information about starting up supplementary boards, please refer to Section 7.7 "Starting up
optional supplementary boards".

5-28

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Connections
WARNING
The converters are operated at high voltages.
Disconnect the power supply before making any connections!
Only qualified personnel who are thoroughly familiar with all safety notices contained in the
operating instructions as well as erection, installation, operating and maintenance instructions
should be allowed to work on these devices.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage.
Failure to make the correct connections may result in irreparable damage to the unit.
Voltage may be present at the power and control terminals even when the motor is stopped.
The snubber capacitors might still be carrying hazardous voltage after isolation from the
supply. For this reason, the converter must not be opened for at least two minutes after switchoff.
When working on the open converter, remember that live parts are exposed. The unit must
always be operated with the standard front covers in place.
The user is responsible for ensuring that the motor, SIMOREG converter and other devices are
installed and connected up in accordance with the approved codes of practice of the country
concerned and any other regional or local codes that may apply. Special attention must be paid
to proper conductor sizing, fusing, grounding, isolation and disconnection measures and to
overcurrent protection.
These converters contain hazardous rotating machinery (fans) and control rotating mechanical
components (drives). Death, serious bodily injury or substantial property damage may occur if
the instructions in the relevant operating manuals are not observed.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on careful transportation,
proper storage and installation as well as correct operation and maintenance.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-1

Connections

6.1

05.2007

Installation instructions for proper EMC installation of drives

NOTE
These installation instructions do not purport to handle or take into account all of the equipment
details or versions or to cover every conceivable operating situation or application. If you require
more detailed information, or if special problems occur, which are not handled in enough detail
in this document, please contact your local Siemens office.
The contents of these installation instructions are not part of an earlier or existing agreement or
legal contract and neither do they change it. The actual purchase contract represents the
complete liability of the A&D Variable-Speed Drives Group of Siemens AG. The warrant
conditions, specified in the contract between the two parties, is the only warranty which will be
accepted by the A&D Variable-Speed Drives Group. The warranty conditions specified in the
contract are neither expanded nor changed by the information provided in the installation
instructions.

6.1.1

Fundamental principles of EMC

6.1.1.1

What is EMC
EMC stands for "electromagnetic compatibility" and defines the capability of a piece of equipment
to operate satisfactory in an electromagnetic environment without itself causing electromagnetic
disturbances that would adversely affect other items of equipment in its vicinity.
Thus, different items of equipment must not adversely affect one another.

6.1.1.2

Noise radiation and noise immunity

EMC is dependent on two characteristics of the equipment/units involved, i.e. radiated noise and
noise immunity. Items of electrical equipment can either be fault sources (transmitters) and/or
noise receivers.
Electromagnetic compatibility exists if the fault sources do not adversely affect the function of the
noise receivers.
An item of equipment can be both a fault source and a fault receiver. For example, the power
section of a converter must be regarded as a fault source and the control section as a noise
receiver.

6.1.1.3

Limit values
Electrical drives are governed by Product Standard EN 61800-3. According to this standard, it is
not necessary to implement all EMC measures for industrial supply networks. Instead, a solution
adapted specifically to the relevant environment can be applied. Accordingly, it may be more
economical to increase the interference immunity of a sensitive device rather than implementing
noise suppression measures for the converter. Thus, solutions are selected depending on their
cost-effectiveness.
SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters are designed for industrial applications (industrial low-voltage
supply system, i.e. a system that does not supply domestic households).

6-2

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Noise immunity defines the behaviour of a piece of equipment when subjected to electromagnetic
disturbance. The Product Standard regulates the requirements and assessment criteria for the
behaviour of equipment in industrial environments. The converters in this description comply with
this Standard (Section 6.1.2.3).
6.1.1.4

SIMOREG converters in industrial applications

In an industrial environment, equipment must have a high level of noise immunity whereas lower
demands are placed on noise radiation.
SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters are components of an electrical drive system in the same way
as contactors and switches. Properly qualified personnel must integrate them into a drive system
consisting, at least, of the converter, motor cables and motor. Commutating reactors and fuses are
also required in most cases. Limit values can only be maintained if these components are installed
and mounted in the correct way. In order to limit the radiated noise according to limit value "A1",
the appropriate radio interference suppression filter and a commutating reactor are required in
addition to the converter itself. Without an RI suppression filter, the noise radiated by a SIMOREG
DC-MASTER converters exceeds limit value "A1" as defined by EN55011.
If the drive forms part of a complete installation, it does not initially have to fulfil any requirements
regarding radiated noise. However, EMC legislation requires the installation as a whole to be
electromagnetically compatible with its environment.
If all control components in the installation (e.g. PLCs) have noise immunity for industrial
environments, it is not necessary for each drive to meet limit value "A1" in its own right.

6.1.1.5

Non-grounded supply systems

Non-grounded supply systems (IT systems) are used in a number of industrial sectors in order to
increase plant availability. In the event of a ground fault, no fault current flows so that the plant can
still produce. When RI suppression filters are installed, however, a ground fault does cause a fault
current to flow, resulting in shutdown of the drives and, in some cases, destruction of the
suppression filter. For this reason, the Product Standard does not define limit values for these
supply systems. From the economic viewpoint, RI suppression should, if required, be implemented
on the grounded primary side of the supply transformer.

6.1.1.6

EMC planning
If two units are not electromagnetically compatible, you can either reduce the noise radiated by the
noise source, or increase the noise immunity of the noise receiver. Noise sources are generally
power electronics units with a high power consumption. To reduce the radiated noise from these
units, complex, costly filters are required. Noise receivers are predominantly control equipment and
sensors including evaluation circuitry. Increasing the noise immunity of less powerful equipment is
generally easier and cheaper. In an industrial environment, therefore, it is often more cost-effective
to increase noise immunity rather than reduce radiated noise. For example, in order to adhere to
limit value class A1 of EN 55011, the noise suppression voltage at the mains connection may be
max. 79 dB(V) between 150 kHz and 500 kHz and max. 73 dB (V) (9 mV or 4.5 mV) between
500 kHz and 30 MHz.
In industrial environments, the EMC of the equipment used must be based on a well-balanced
mixture of noise radiation and noise immunity.
The most cost-effective RI suppression measure is the physical separation of noise sources and
noise receivers, assuming that it has already been taken into account when designing the
machine/plant. The first step is to define whether each unit is a potential noise source (noise
radiator or noise receiver). Noise sources are, for example, PLCs, transmitters and sensors.
Components in the control cabinet (noise sources and receivers) must be physically separated, if
necessary through the use of metal partitions or metal enclosures for individual components.
Figure 1 shows an example component layout in a control cabinet.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-3

Connections

05.2007

6.1.2

Proper EMC installation of drives (installation instructions)

6.1.2.1

General
Since drives can be operated in a wide range of differing environments and the electrical
components used (controls, switched-mode power supplies, etc.) can widely differ with respect to
noise immunity and radiation, any mounting/installation guideline can only represent a practical
compromise. For this reason, EMC regulations do not need to be implemented to the letter,
provided that measures are checked out on a case by case basis.
In order to guarantee electromagnetic compatibility in your cabinets in rugged electrical
environments and fulfil the standards specified by the relevant regulatory bodies, the following
EMC regulations must be observed when designing and installing cabinets.
Rules 1 to 10 generally apply. Rules 11 to 15 must be followed to fulfil standards governing
radiated noise.

6.1.2.2

Rules for proper EMC installation

Rule 1
All the metal components in the cabinet must be conductively connected over a large surface area
with one another (not paint on paint!). Serrated or contact washers must be used where necessary.
The cabinet door should be connected to the cabinet through the shortest possible grounding
straps (top, center, bottom)..
Rule 2
Contactors, relays, solenoid valves, electromechanical hours counters, etc. in the cabinet, and, if
applicable, in adjacent cabinets, must be provided with quenching elements, for example, RC
elements, varistors, diodes. These devices must be connected directly at the coil.
Rule 3
Signal cables 1) should enter the cabinet at only one level wherever possible.
Rule 4
Unshielded cables in the same circuit (incoming and outgoing conductors) must be twisted where
possible, or the area between them kept as small as possible in order to prevent unnecessary
coupling effects.
Rule 5
Connect spare conductors to the cabinet ground (ground 2)) at both ends to obtain an additional
shielding effect.
Rule 6
Avoid any unnecessary cable lengths in order to reduce coupling capacitances and inductances.
Rule 7
Crosstalk can generally be reduced if the cables are installed close to the cabinet chassis ground.
For this reason, wiring should not be routed freely in the cabinet, but as close as possible to the
cabinet frame and mounting panels. This applies equally to spare cables.
Rule 8
Signal and power cables must be routed separately from one another (to prevent noise from being
coupled in). A minimum 20 cm clearance should be maintained.
If the encoder cables and motor cables cannot be routed separately, then the encoder cable must
be decoupled by means of a metal partition or installation in a metal pipe or duct. The partition or
metal duct must be grounded at several points.

6-4

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Rule 9
The shields of digital signal cables must be connected to ground at both ends (source and
destination). If there is poor potential bonding between the shield connections, an additional
potential bonding cable of at least 10 mm must be connected in parallel to the shield to reduce the
shield current. Generally speaking, the shields can be connected to the cabinet housing (ground 2))
at several points. The shields may also be connected at several locations outside the cabinet.
Foil-type shields should be avoided. Their shielding effect is poorer by a factor of 5 as compared to
braided shields.
Rule 10
The shields of analog signal cables may be connected to ground at both ends (conductively over a
large area) if potential bonding is good. Potential bonding can be assumed to be good if all metal
parts are well connected and all the electronic components involved are supplied from the same
source.
The single-ended shield connection prevents low-frequency, capacitive noise from being coupled
in (e.g. 50 Hz hum). The shield connection should then be made in the cabinet. In this case, the
shield may be connected by means of a sheath wire.
The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor (X174:22 and X174:23) must be shielded and
connected to ground at both ends.
Rule 11
The RI suppression filter must always be mounted close to the suspected noise source. The filter
must be mounted over the largest possible area with the cabinet housing, mounting plate, etc.
Incoming and outgoing cables must be routed separately.
Rule 12
To ensure adherence to limit value class A1, the use of RI suppression filters is obligatory.
Additional loads must be connected on the line side of the filter.
The control system used and the other wiring in the cubicle determines whether an additional line
filter needs to be installed.
Rule 13
A commutating reactor must be installed in the field circuit for controlled field supplies.
Rule 14
A commutating reactor must be installed in the converter armature circuit.
Rule 15
Unshielded motor cables may be used in SIMOREG drive systems.
The line supply cable must be routed at a distance of at least 20 cm from the motor cables (field,
armature). Use a metal partition if necessary.
Footnotes:
1) Signal cables are defined as:
Digital signal cable:

Analog signal cable.:

Pulse encoder cables

e.g. + 10 V setpoint cable

Serial interfaces, e.g. PROFIBUS-DP

2) The term "Ground" generally refers to all metallic, conductive components which can be
connected to a protective conductor, e.g. cabinet housing, motor housing, foundation grounder,
etc.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-5

Connections

05.2007

Cabinet design and shielding:

The cabinet design illustrated in Figure 1 is intended to make the user aware of EMC-critical
components. The example does not claim to include all possible cabinet components and their
respective mounting possibilities.
Details which influence the noise immunity/radiation of the cabinet and are not absolutely clear in
the overview diagram are described in Figures 1a - 1d.
Figures 2a -2d show details of different shield connection techniques with ordering source
information.
Arrangement of RI suppression filters and commutating reactors:
Section 6.1.2.3 shows how RI suppression filters and commutating reactors are arranged in the
SIMOREG DC-MASTER system. The specified sequence for mounting reactors and filters must be
observed. The line-side and load-side filter cables must be physically separated. Fuses for
semiconductor protection are selected according to Section 6.6.2.

6-6

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Control transformer for fan

Circuit-breakers

SIMOREG DC Master

Fig. 1c or 1d
Shield connection

Fuse-links/miniature
circuit-breakers
Commutating
reactor for field

Main contactor

Fig. 1e
Circuit breaker
Line filter
Fig. 1b

Converter filter
3AC

Shield rail
Connecting terminals
Shield rail
Fuse-links
Fuse-links
Connecting terminals

Main switch

Cable duct
Shield rail
Fig. 1a
Cable clamping bar

Commutating reactor
PE conductor
(position is not critical)

Fig. 1:

Customer terminal 3AC

Customer terminal DC
Customer terminal of field winding
Pulse encoder

Example of a cabinet design with a SIMOREG DC-MASTER 15 A to 850 A

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-7

Connections

05.2007

Cable duct
Do not use shield
rail as strain relief
Cable clamping bar

Cable clamping bar

Connect to cabinet housing at

both ends in conductive,
large-surface connection!

Shield at plant end as well

(e.q. on pulse encoder)

Shield connection according to the

following variants 1,2,3 and 4.

Fig. 1a: Shield at cable entry point to cabinet

Data line
(e.g. PROFIBUS-DP)

Data line
(e.g. pulse encoder)

Analog signal line

Terminals

Connect to cabinet housing

at both ends in a conductive,
large-area connection!

Shield at the plant end as well

(e.g. on pulse encoder)

Fig. 1b: Shielding in the cabinet

6-8

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

XF1

XF2

X171

X161

X162

X172
X163
X173

X164
X174

X175

The customer connections must be routed above the electronics box.

Fig. 1c: Connecting shields on SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters up to 850A

XP
XR
XS
XT

X171

X172
X173
X174
X175

Fig. 1d: Connecting shields on SIMOREG DC-MASTER >850A

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-9

Connections

05.2007

Separate filtered and

unfiltered cables

Mains connection

NETZ/LINE

LAST/LOAD
Electronics supply and mains
connection for field supply

Connect the
PE conduct
Connect line filter over large
surface to cabinet housing!

Fig. 1e: Line filter for SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70 electronics power supply

6-10

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Shield connections:
Variant 1:

Variant 2:

Fig. 2a: Terminal on a copper busbar, max.

cable diameter 15 mm

Fig. 2b: Terminal on copper busbar, max. cable

diameter 10 mm

Caution!
The conductor might be damaged if the terminal
screw is over-tightened.

Note:

Terminals:
5 mm busbar thickness
Order No. 8US1921-2AC00
10 mm busbar thickness
Order No. 8US1921-2BC00

Terminals:
Order No. 8HS7104,
8HS7104, 8HS7174, 8HS7164

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-11

Connections

05.2007

Variant 3:

Variant 4:

Fig. 2c: Metallized tubing or cable ties on a bare

metal comb-type/serrated rail

Fig. 2d: Clamp and metallic mating piece on a

cable clamping rail

Note:

Comb-type rail:
Item No. J48028

Siemens 5VC55... cable clamps;

Clamping rails in various sizes:
Item No. K48001 to 48005

6-12

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
6.1.2.3

Connections
Arrangement of components for converters
Arrangement of reactors and RI suppression filter
230V

Line voltage

400V

5N1

5U1

5W1

5N1

Power supply input

either 230V or 400V

5U1

5W1

3U1

3W1

1U1

Field

SIMOREG-converter

1V1

1W1

Armature

3C 3D

1C1

1D1

1) The commutating reactor in the field circuit is dimensioned for the rated motor field current.
2) The commutating reactor in the armature circuit is dimensioned for the motor rated current in
the armature.
The line current equals DC times 0.82.
3) The RI suppression filter for the armature circuit is dimensioned for the motor rated current in
the armature.
The line current equals DC times 0.82
4) The RI suppression filter for the electronics power supply alone with 400 V is dimensioned
for 1A.
The RI suppression filter for the field circuit and electronics power supply with 400 V is
dimensioned for the rated current of the motor field plus 1A.
5) The RI suppression filter for the electronics power supply with 230 V is dimensioned for 2A.

CAUTION
When RI suppression filters are installed, commutating reactors must always be inserted
between the filter and device input to decouple the surge suppression circuits and protect the X
capacitors.
The commutating reactors must be selected from Catalog LV60. The RI suppression filters must
be selected from Catalog LV60 or according to the table of EPCOS filters below.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-13

Connections
6.1.2.4

05.2007

List of recommended RI suppression filters made by EPCOS:

Rated current
RI suppression
filter (A)

RI suppression filter
Order number

Terminal
cross-section
(mm)

Dimensions
Weight

HxWxD

(kg)

(mm)

Holes for M . .

B84143-G8-R11*

4 mm

1,3

80 x 230 x 50

B84143-G20-R11*

4 mm

1,3

80 x 230 x 50

B84143-G36-R11*

6 mm

2,8

150 x 280 x 60

B84143-G50-R11*

16 mm

3,3

150 x 60 x 330

B84143-G66-R11*

25 mm

4,4

150 x 330 x 80

B84143-G90-R11*

25 mm

4,9

150 x 330 x 80

120

B84143-G120-R11*

50 mm

7,5

200 x 380 x 90

150

B84143-G150-R11*

50 mm

8,0

200 x 380 x 90

220

200 x 810 x 385

) The code for the construction type must be inserted instead of :

0 = 480 V
2 = 530 V
**) The code for the construction type must be inserted instead of **:
20 = 500 V
21 = 760 V
24 = 690 V
*) RI suppression filters produce discharge currents. VDE 0160 stipulates a 10 mm PE
connection. To ensure an optimum filtering effect, it is absolutely essential to mount the filters and
converter on a single metal plate.
In the case of converters with a 3-phase connection, the minimum rated current of the filter
equals the output DC of the converter times 0.82.
With a two-phase connection (field supply and electronics supply), only two phases are connected
to the three-phase RI suppression filter. In this case, the line current equals the field DC (plus 1A
for the electronics supply).
Important technical data of Siemens RI suppression filters:
Rated supply voltage

3AC 380-460 V ( 15%)

Rated frequency

50/60 Hz ( 6%)

Operating temperature

0 C to +40 C

Degree of protection

IP20 (EN60529) IP00 with 500 A and above

For further technical data about RI suppression filters, please refer to the Operating Instructions:
SIMOVERT Master Drives RI Suppression Filters EMC Filters, Order number:
6SE7087-6CX87-0FB0.

6-14

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

6.1.3

Connections

Information on line-side harmonics generated by converters in a

fully-controlled three-phase bridge circuit configuration B6C and (B6)A(B6)C
Converters for the medium power range usually consist of fully-controlled three-phase bridge
circuit configurations. An example of the harmonics generated by a typical system configuration for
two firing angles ( = 20 and = 60) is given below.
The values have been taken from an earlier publication entitled "Harmonics in the Line-Side
Current of Six-Pulse Line-Commutated Converters" written by H. Arremann and G. Mltgen,
Siemens Research and Development Dept., Volume 7 (1978) No. 2, Springer-Verlag 1978.
Formula have been specified with which the short circuit power SK and armature inductance La of
the motor to which the specified harmonics spectrum applies can be calculated depending on the
applicable operating data [line voltage (no-load voltage Uv0), line frequency fN and DC current Id].
A dedicated calculation must be performed if the actual system short circuit power and/or actual
armature reactance deviate from the values determined by this method.
The spectrum of harmonics listed below is obtained if the values for short circuit power SK at the
converter supply connection point and the armature inductance La of the motor calculated by the
following formula correspond to the actual plant data. If the calculated values differ, the harmonics
must be calculated separately.
a.) = 20

b.) = 60

Fundamental factor g = 0.962

Fundamental factor g = 0.953

I/I1

0.235

0.018

0.283

0.026

0.100

0.016

0.050

0.019

0.083

0.011

0.089

0.020

0.056

0.010

0.038

0.016

0.046

0.006

0.050

0.016

0.035

0.006

0.029

0.013

0.028

0.003

0.034

0.013

0.024

0.003

0.023

0.011

The fundamental-frequency current I1 as a reference quantity is calculated by the following

equation:

I 1 = g 0.817 I d
where Id

DC current of operating point under investigation

where g

Fundamental factor (see above)

The harmonic currents calculated from the above tables are valid only for
I.) Short-circuit power SK at converter supply connection point
SK =

Uv2 0

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

(VA )
6-15

Connections

05.2007

where

X N = X K X D = 0.03536

U v0
2f N LD
Id

( )

and
Uv0

No-load voltage in V at the converter supply connection point

DC current in A of operating point under investigation

Line frequency in Hz

Inductance in H of commutating reactor used

Impedance of the commutating reactor

Impedance of the network

Impedance at the converter terminals

II.) Armature inductance La

La = 0.0488

U v0
(H )
f N Id

A separate calculation must be performed if the actual values for short-circuit power SK and/or
armature inductance La deviate from the values calculated on the basis of the above equations.
Example
Let us assume that a drive has the following data:
Uv0 = 400 V
Id = 150 A
fN = 50 Hz
LD = 0.169 mH (4EU2421-7AA10 where ILn = 125 A)
When

X N = 0.03536

400
2 50 0.169 10 3 = 0.0412
150

the required system short-circuit power at the converter supply connection point is as follows:

SK =

400 2
= 3.88MVA
0.0412

and the required motor armature inductance as follows:

La = 0.0488

400
= 2.60mH
50 150

The harmonic currents I listed in the tables above (where I1 = g x 0.817 x Id for firing angles =
20 and = 60) apply only to the values SK and La calculated by the above method. If the
calculated and actual values are not the same, the harmonics must be calculated separately.
For the purpose of dimensioning filters and compensation circuits with reactors, the harmonic
values calculated by these equations can be applied only if the values calculated for SK and La tally
with the actual values of the drive. If they do not, they must be calculated separately (this is
especially true when using compensated motors as these have a very low armature inductance).

6-16

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Zero mark >

Track 2 >

Track 1 >

X173

COMP
X>Y

P15
200mA max.

C98043-A7001

RS232 / RS485 to X300

Armature current

TB and CB boards

X107

X171

M
X175

X101

X108

X101

X109

C98043-A7009
Rear panel wiring

EEPROM

C98043-A7005

to OP1S

RS232

RS485

PMU

C98043-A7002 / A7003

Fan control and monitoring

Field current actual value

Gating pulses field

Supply voltage field

Gating pulses armature

Armature voltage

X300

X102

3U1

XF2

Shunt

3W1

1C1
(1D1)

BA = electronically switchable bus termination

U/I = electronically switchable voltage / current input

1) P24_S total max. 200mA

2) is required for 4Q converters

X102

C98043-A7010 /
C98043-A7014+15 XF1

X11-X16
X21-X26

X3.3

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

Analog tacho #

P24

Rx-/TxM
M
X172
I act

+
Rx+/Tx+

Tx-

Supply voltage
armature

1U1

Selection
5/15V

Open- and
closed-loop
control for
armature
and field

RS485 BA

Tx+

X3.2

X3.1

Armature current

X3.4
Load

110

109

Temperature monitoring

51
52

Electronics power supply

19
20
21

E-Stop
Power ON

1W1

P24_S

X110 / X111

M
X163

M
X164

Converters: 15A to 125A

X171

M
X174

U/I

N10 1% / 10 mA

P10 1% / 10 mA

CUD1

X110 / X111

P24
C98043-A7006

6.2.1

37
38

CUD2 (optional)

X163

Block diagram with recommended connection

Supply

Switch-on/
shutdown
Enable signal

KTY84 / PTC

40
41

E-Stop

ES/
P24

5U1

10k
Main
setpoint

Binary
select inputs

P24_S

Analog
tacho

8-270V

M
X162

103

104

Rx-/Tx-

107

RS485

1AC 50-60Hz, 230V

105

Tx+ Rx+/Tx+

Parallel switch
interface
(2x)

3AC 50-60Hz, 400V-575V

106

X166

X165

Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

5U1

5W1

X164

Clk

R/T

T/R

S_IMP

7
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V-460V

108

5N1

205

X164

M
X161

P24_S

5N1

KTY84 / PTC

Motor
temperature

204

216
217

214
215

213

212

211

210

NC
K1

Binary
select inputs

6.2

5W1

05.2007
Connections

6-17

6-18

Zero mark >

Track 2 >

Track 1 >

CUD1

X173

X171

M
X174

COMP
X>Y

P24

Analog tacho #

RS485

+
Rx+/Tx+

Tx-

Tx+

M
X163

M
X164

C98043-A7001

X171

M
X175

Rx-/TxM
M
X172
I act

RS232 / RS485 to X300

Armature current

TB and CB boards

X107

Open- and
closed-loop
control for
armature
and field

X110 / X111

Selection
5/15V

COMP
X>Y

P15
200mA max.

P24_S

U/I

N10 1% / 10 mA

P10 1% / 10 mA

X110 / X111

P24
C98043-A7006

X109

X101

X108

X101

C98043-A7009
Rear panel wiring

EEPROM

C98043-A7005

to OP1S

RS232

RS485

PMU

C98043-A7002 / A7003

Fan control and monitoring

Field current actual value

Gating pulses field

Supply voltage field

Gating pulses armature

Armature voltage

Supply voltage
armature

Armature current

X300

X102

3W1

1C1
(1D1)

BA = electronically switchable bus termination

U/I = electronically switchable voltage / current input

X75

Shunt

1) P24_S total max. 200mA

2) is required for 4Q converters

XF1

3U1

XF2

Fan control
and monitoring or
air flow monitoring

X102

C98043-A7014+15

X11-X16
X21-X26

X3.3

X3.2

X3.1

Load

110

109

X3.4

Temperature monitoring

51
52

Electronics power supply

19
20
21

E-Stop
Power ON

E-Stop

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

37
38

CUD2 (optional)

X163

Analog
tacho

1U1

Supply

Switch-on/
shutdown
Enable signal

KTY84 / PTC

40
41

P24_S

M
X162

5U1

10k
Main
setpoint

Binary
select inputs

8-270V

103

RS485

ES/
P24

107

104

1AC 50-60Hz, 230V

105

Rx-/Tx-

Parallel switch
interface
(2x)

3AC 50-60Hz, 400V-575V

5U1

Tx63

Tx+

X166

X165

+ Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

5W1

106

Clk

R/T

T/R

S_IMP

7
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V-460V

108

X164

5N1

205

X164

M
X161

P24_S

5N1

KTY84 / PTC

204

216
217

214
215

213

212

211

210

Motor
temperature

Binary
select inputs

1W1

5W1
K1

6.2.2

Connections
05.2007

Converters: 210A to 280A

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Zero mark >

X173

COMP
X>Y

X107

Open- and
closed-loop
control for
armature
and field
D

Analog tacho #

P24

RS485 BA

C98043-A7001

X171

M
X175

X109

Tx-

+
Rx+/Tx+

Tx+

Rx-/TxM
M
X172
I act

RS232 / RS485 to X300

Armature current

TB and CB boards

Selection
5/15V

COMP
X>Y

P15
200mA max.

P24_S

X101

X108

X101

Load

C98043-A7009
Rear panel wiring

EEPROM

C98043-A7005

to OP1S

RS232

RS485

PMU

C98043-A7002 / A7003

Fan control and monitoring

Field current actual value

Gating pulses field

Supply voltage field

Gating pulses armature

Armature voltage

Supply voltage
armature

X300

X102

3U1

3W1

1C1
(1D1)

BA = electronically switchable bus termination

U/I = electronically switchable voltage / current input

X75

Shunt

1) P24_S total max. 200mA

2) is required for 4Q converters

XF2

Fan control
and monitoring or
air flow monitoring

X102

C98043-A7004 /
XF1
C98043-A7014+15

X11-X16
X21-X26

X3.3

X3.2

X3.1

Armature current

X3.4

Temperature monitoring

Electronics power supply

110

109

51
52

1D1
(1C1)

M
3~

4W1

Track 2 >

Track 1 >

X171

M
X174

U/I

N10 1% / 10 mA

X110 / X111

M
X163

M
X164

1V1

CUD1

P10 1% / 10 mA

X110 / X111

P24
C98043-A7006

19
20

1U1

37
38

CUD2 (optional)

X163

P24_S

E-Stop
Power ON

E-Stop

1W1

Supply

Switch-on/
shutdown
Enable signal

KTY84 / PTC

Analog
tacho

or
5U1

10k
Main
setpoint

Binary
select inputs

40
41

M
X162

8-270V

103

107

RS485

ES/
P24

105

104

5U1

Rx-/Tx-

1AC 50-60Hz, 230V

4V1

Tx+ Rx+/Tx+

Parallel switch
interface
(2x)

3AC 50-60Hz, 400V-830V

5W1

X166

X165

Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

106

7
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V-460V

108

X164

Clk

R/T

T/R

S_IMP

5N1

205

X164

M
X161

5N1

KTY84 / PTC

204

216
217

214
215

213

212

P24_S

Motor
temperature

Binary
select inputs

211

210

4U1

5W1
K1

6.2.3

05.2007
Connections

Converters: 400A to 3000A with a 3-phase fan

6-19

6-20

Zero mark >

X173

COMP
X>Y

X107

Open- and
closed-loop
control for
armature
and field
D

Analog tacho #

P24

RS485 BA

+
Rx+/Tx+

C98043-A7001

X171

M
X175

Rx-/TxM
M
X172
I act

RS232 / RS485 to X300

Armature current

TB and CB boards

Selection
5/15V

COMP
X>Y

P15
200mA max.

P24_S

Tx-

Tx+

X101

X108

X101

Load

X109

C98043-A7009
Rear panel wiring

EEPROM

C98043-A7005

to OP1S

RS232

RS485

PMU

C98043-A7002 / A7003

Fan control and monitoring

Field current actual value

Gating pulses field

Supply voltage field

Gating pulses armature

Armature voltage

Supply voltage
armature

X300

X102

3W1

1C1
(1D1)

BA = electronically switchable bus termination

U/I = electronically switchable voltage / current input

X75

Shunt

1) P24_S total max. 200mA

2) is required for 4Q converters

XF1

3U1

XF2

Fan control
and monitoring or
air flow monitoring

X102

C98043-A7014+15

X11-X16
X21-X26

X3.3

X3.2

X3.1

Armature current

X3.4

Temperature monitoring

Electronics power supply

110

109

51
52

1D1
(1C1)

M
1~

4N1

Track 2 >

Track 1 >

X171

M
X174

U/I

N10 1% / 10 mA

X110 / X111

M
X163

M
X164

19
20

1V1

CUD1

P10 1% / 10 mA

X110 / X111

P24
C98043-A7006

E-Stop
Power ON

E-Stop

1U1

37
38

CUD2 (optional)

X163

Analog
tacho

1W1

Supply

Switch-on/
shutdown
Enable signal

KTY84 / PTC

40
41

P24_S

M
X162

5U1

10k
Main
setpoint

Binary
select inputs

8-270V

103

RS485

ES/
P24

107

104

1AC 50-60Hz, 230V

105

Rx-/Tx-

Parallel switch
interface
(2x)

3AC 50-60Hz, 400V-690V

5U1

Tx63

Tx+

X166

X165

+ Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

5W1

106

Clk

R/T

T/R

S_IMP

7
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V-460V

108

X164

5N1

205

X164

M
X161

P24_S

5N1

KTY84 / PTC

204

216
217

214
215

213

212

211

210

Motor
temperature

Binary
select inputs

4U1

5W1
K1

6.2.4

Connections
05.2007

Converters: 450A to 850A with a 1-phase fan

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

6.3

Parallel connection of converters

6.3.1

Circuit diagram showing parallel connection of SIMOREG converters

3AC 50-60Hz, 400V

3AC 50-60Hz, 575V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
3AC 50-60Hz, 830V

3AC 50-60Hz, 400V

L1 L2 L3 5N1 5W15U1
Fan

Power
supply

3U13W1

1U1 1V1 1W1

Field

Armature

SIMOREG-converter (Slave)
CUD1
34 37 38

CUD2
3C 3D

1C1 1D1
(1D1) (1C1)
2)

Power
supply

3U13W1

1U1 1V1 1W1

Field

Armature

SIMOREG-converter (Master)
CUD1

X165 X166
3)

L1 L2 L3 5N1 5W15U1
Fan

34 37 38

CUD2

L1 L2 L3 5N1 5W15U1
Fan

3C 3D

1C1 1D1
(1D1) (1C1)

Power
supply

3U13W1

1U1 1V1 1W1

Field

Armature

SIMOREG-converter (Slave)
CUD1

X165 X166

34 37 38

CUD2
X165 X166
3C 3D

1C1 1D1
(1D1) (1C1)

1) The same phase sequence is required between 1U1 /1V1 /1W1.

2) The same phase sequence is required between 1C1 / 1D1.
3) The converters are connected by means of an (8-pin) shielded Patch cable of type UTP CAT5
according to ANSI/EIA/TIA 568, such as those used in PC networking.
A standard 5 m cable can be ordered directly from Siemens (order number: 6RY1707-0AA08).
(n-1) cables are needed to connect n converters in parallel.
The bus terminator must be activated (U805=1) on the converter at each end of the bus.
4) These fuses may only be used on converters up to 850A.
5) For converters up to 850A in 4Q operation only
The terminal expansion option (CUD2) is required for each converter in a parallel connection.
A maximum of 6 converters can be connected in parallel.
When several converters are connected in parallel, the master unit should be positioned in the
center to allow for signal transit times. Maximum length of paralleling interface cable between
master and slave converters at each end of bus: 15m.
For the purpose of current distribution, separate commutating reactors of the same type are
required for each SIMOREG converter. Current distribution is determined by the differential reactor
tolerance. A tolerance of 5% or better is recommended for operation without derating (reduced
current).
Caution:
Parallel connections may only be made between converters with the same DC current rating!

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-21

Connections

05.2007

6.3.2

Parameterization of SIMOREG converters for parallel connection

6.3.2.1

Standard operating mode

Master

Slaves

U800 = 1
U800 = 2
U803 = 0

Paralleling interface active

if a SIMOREG CCP is
used

U800 = 2

Paralleling interface active

Use master firing pulses

"N+1 mode" not active

U804.01 = 30 control word 1

U804.01 = 32 status word 1

U804.02 = 31 control word 2

U804.03 = 167 Actual speed value
U805 = 1
0
U806 = 12
13
14
15
16

(bus termination)
(no bus termination)

on the two end units

(at both physical ends of the bus cable)
on all other units

master for one slave

master for 2 slaves
master for 3 slaves
master for 4 slaves
master for 5 slaves

U806 = 2
U806 = 2 and 3
U806 = 2, 3 and 4
U806 = 2,3,4 and 5
U806 = 2,3,4,5 and 6

1 slave
2 slaves
3 slaves
4 slaves
5 slaves

Set U806.02 like U806.01

P082 <> 0

P082 = 0

internal field is not used

P083 = 4

Freely connected actual speed value

P609 = 6023

Use actual speed value of master

operating mode for field

Set P083 depending on the source of the

actual speed value
P100 =

Rated motor current

Number of SIMOREG units

Set P648, P649 depending on the source

of the control word

P110 = Actual armature resistance

x no. of SIMOREG converters

P100 =

Rated motor current

Number of SIMOREG units

P648 = 6021

Use control word 1 from master

P649 = 6022

Use control word 2 from master

P821.01 = 31

Suppress alarm A031

P110 = set as on master

P111 = set as on master

P111 = Actual armature inductance

x no. of SIMOREG converters
The optimization run for current controller
and precontrol (P051 = 25) sets these
parameters correctly.
For further details about the operating principle of parallel connections between SIMOREG
converters, please refer to Section 8, Function Diagrams, Sheet G195 (paralleling interface).
Notes:
Control commands "Switch-on/Shutdown", "Enable operation", "Emergency stop" etc. must be
connected to a group of parallel-connected SIMOREG converters via the master device.
Terminals 37 and 38 must be permanently connected to terminal 34 on the slave !
Optimization runs must be started on the master device. All slaves must be connected and
ready to run when optimization is started.

6-22

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
6.3.2.2

Connections
Operating mode "N+1 mode" (Redundancy mode of the armature supply)

Master

Standby master

U800 = 1 Paralleling interface

active
U800 = 2 if a SIMOREG CCP is
used

U800 = 2

Slaves

Paralleling interface active

Use master firing pulses

U803 = 1 "N+1 mode" active

U804.01 = 30 control word 1
U804.02 = 31 control word 2
U804.03 = 167 actual speed value
U804.04 = any
U804.05 = any

U804.01 = 32 status word 1

U804.02 = any
U804.03 = any
U804.04 = any
U804.05 = any

U804.06 = 32 status word 1

U804.07 = any
U804.08 = any
U804.09 = any
U804.10 = any

U804.06 = 30 control word 1

U804.06 = any
U804.07 = 31 control word 2
U804.07 = any
U804.08 = 167 actual speed value U804.08 = any
U804.09 = any
U804.09 = any
U804.10 = any
U804.10 = any

U805 = 1 (bus termination)

0 (no bus termination)
U806.01 = 12
13
14
15
16

master + 1 slave
master + 2 slaves
master + 3 slaves
master + 4 slaves
master + 5 slaves

U806.02 = 2 slave 2
P082 <> 0 operating mode for
field

U804.01 = 32 status word 1

U804.02 = any
U804.03 = any
U804.04 = any
U804.05 = any

on the two end units

(at both physical ends of the bus cable)
on all other units
U806.01 = 2

slave 2

U806.02 = 12
13
14
15
16

master + 1 slave
master + 2 slaves
master + 3 slaves
master + 4 slaves
master + 5 slaves

P082 = 0

U806.01 = 3
U806.01 = 3 and 4
U806.01 = 3,4 and 5
U806.01 = 3,4,5 and 6

2 slaves
3 slaves
4 slaves
5 slaves

U806.02 = set like U806.01

internal field is not used

P083, set according to source of the actual speed value

P083 = 4

Freely connected
actual speed value

P609 = 6023 Use actual speed

value of master
P100 =

Rated motor current

Number of SIMOREG units

P648, P649, set according to source of the control word

P648 = 6021 Use control word 1

from master
P649 = 6022 Use control word 2
from master
P821.01 = 31Suppress alarm
A031

U807 = 0.000s telegram failure does not lead to a fault message

P110 =Actual armature resistance P110 = set as on master
x no. of SIMOREG converters
P111 = set as on master
P111 = Actual armature
inductance
x no. of SIMOREG
converters
The optimization run for current
controller and precontrol
(P051 = 25) sets these parameters
correctly.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-23

Connections

05.2007

Basic operating principle of the N+1 operation mode:

In this mode it is possible to maintain operation with the remaining SIMOREG units if one unit
should fail (e.g. fuse blown in the power section, appearance of a fault message). The functional
SIMOREG units continue to run without interruption if one unit fails. During configuration, make
sure that the power of only n units (instead of n+1 units) is sufficient for the application.
The parameters described above cause one SIMOREG unit to be defined as the standby master.
Providing the SIMOREG unit that is parameterized as the master functions correctly, the standby
master operates as a slave. If the master fails, the standby master assumes the master function
(indicated by display parameter n810, segment 15 or binector B0225).
The master function is always transferred from the master to the standby master by sending a
telegram via an intact paralleling interface. The master still has sufficient time to transfer the
master function by sending a telegram even after its electronics supply voltage is switched off.

NOTE
An intact paralleling connection is essential for the redundancy mode of the armature supply. The
master function cannot be transferred if the paralleling cable is interrupted.
If the electronics supply for one unit fails, the complete drive must be shut down before it is
restored.
When the master is active, it sends the values set in accordance with U804.01 to 05. If a fault
occurs on the master (i.e. after the master function has been transferred to the standby master), it
sends the values set in accordance with U804.06 to 10.
When the standby master operates as a slave (i.e. when the master is active and functioning
correctly), it sends the values set in accordance with U804.01 to 05. When the standby master is
operating as the master (i.e. after the master function has been transferred owing to a fault on the
master), it sends the values set in accordance with U804.06 to 10.
For further details about the operating principle of SIMOREG units connected in parallel, see
Section 8, Function diagrams, Sheet G195 (Paralleling interface).
Notes:
Control commands Switch-on/Shutdown, Enable operation, Emergency stop etc. must be
connected to a group of parallel-connected SIMOREG converters via the master device AND
the standby master device.
Terminals 37 and 38 must be permanently connected to terminal 34 on the slaves.
The speed setpoint and the actual speed must be connected to a group of parallel-connected
SIMOREG converters via the master device AND the standby master device.
All parameters except for those in the above list must be set identically on the master and the
standby master.
Optimization runs must be started on the master device. All slaves must be connected and
ready to run when optimization is started.
The parameters described above enable the armature current to continue flowing without
interruption if a fuse blows in the armature or field power section (on any one power section), a
fault message appears on any one device or the electronics supply fails on any one device
(master, standby master or slave).

CAUTION
As soon as the paralleling connection is interrupted (either by unplugging the paralleling cable or
if the electronics supply voltage for the master fails), the master/slave assignment can no longer
be guaranteed to function correctly.
The electronics supply voltage for the standby master must be switched off before the
electronics supply voltage for the master is restored (in order to prevent two masters from being
simultaneously active).

6-24

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
6.3.2.3

Connections
Redundancy mode of the field supply
In N+1 operation mode, a redundancy mode can also be defined for the field supply included in
the SIMOREG unit. The 3C, 3D output of the SIMOREG field supply for the master and the
standby master is connected in parallel with the motor field winding for this purpose.
In normal operation the field voltage is supplied via the master and the field firing pulses of the
standby master are disabled. If the master fails, it transfers the master function to the standby
master. At the same time, the field firing pulses of the master are disabled and the field voltage is
supplied via the standby master.
Since the field voltages are connected in parallel, part of the total motor field current flows via the
free-running branch of the relevant field power section with the disabled field firing pulses. The
free-running current detected by the partner device must therefore be added to the actual internal
field current K0266 with P612.02 in order to determine the total motor field current (indicated by
parameter r035).
The following settings are consequently required on the master and the standby master for the
redundancy mode of the field supply in addition to the parameters specified in the table in Section
6.3.2.2:
P082 <> 0

(Operating mode for field)

P612.02 = 6024 (Addition of receive word 4 to actual field current controller value)
U804.04 = 266

(Send word 4 if master device is active, actual internal field current)

U804.09 = 266

(Send word 4 after master function transferred to standby master, actual

internal field current)

The parameters described above enable the field current to continue flowing without interruption if
one device fails (fuse blown in the armature or field power section, appearance of a fault
message).

NOTE
An intact paralleling connection is essential for the redundancy mode of the field supply and the
electronics supply voltage for the master and the standby master must likewise be intact.
If redundancy of the field supply needs to be maintained even if the electronics supply voltage for
the master or the standby master fails, the total actual motor field current must be externally
sensed. This value must be fed to the master and the standby master by means of P612.
Notes on commissioning:
The following parameters must be identically set on the master and the standby master in
addition to the above-mentioned parameters, after all the necessary connections have been
made: P076.02, P078.02.
The field supply must be optimized on the master. Optimization runs must be started on the
master device for this purpose (current controller optimization run, , recording of field
characteristics). All slaves must be connected and ready to run when optimization is started.
After the field supply for the master has been optimized, the following master parameters must be
read and set to the same values on the standby master: P081, P102, P103, P112, P115 to P139,
P255, P256, P275, P276 as well as all field-specific settings that may have been made (see
Section 8, Function diagrams, Sheets G165 and G166).

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-25

1U1 1D1 1V1 1C1 1W1

X13

V3+V6

X16

V1+V4

X11

X14

X15

V5+V2

X12

C98043-A7002

X12-2

X12-1

X15-1

X15-2

X16-2

X16-1

X13-1

X13-2

X14-2

X12

X15

X16

X13

X14

X11

1C1

XC1

XC2

G1
G2

V5
+
V2

V3
+
V6

V1
+
V4

XU2

XV2

C98043-A7010

XW2

1D1

XD1

XD2

X25

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

B603

X25-2

X25-1

B602

B600

X101

Tacho

NS
NS

109
110

ES/P_Reset

106

ES/P

P24/ES

105

108

ES/S

107

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V
104

103

to A7009 - X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

3
5N1 5W1 5U1

C98043-A7002

B601

F2 F1
M1A M1A

5N1 5W1 5U1

Converters: 30A, 1Q

X14-1

T2, T3
Primary conductor on
L1: 15A-converters
fed through 2x
L2: 30A-converters
fed through 1x

AC 190 to 230V

6.4.1

X11-1

X11-2

X102

XW1

Power connections

Arrangement of thyristor modules

XV1

AC 380 to 460V

6.4

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = Rheytherm 120 2.5mm2

All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

R100

XU1

R76

1U1 1V1 1W1

R75

6-26
NC
3

Connections
05.2007

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1U1

V1 + V4

1D1

1V1

V3 + V6

X16 X13

X14 X11

1C1

1W1

V5 + V2

R100

X12 X15

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

X15-1
X15-2

X13-1
X13-2

X11-1
X11-2

X75-1

X75-2

X75-3

C98043-A7002

X102

C98043A7015

1C1

V5 + V2

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

X_AC

k
K

X_AC

D (L-)

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

Tacho 270V

110

ES/P_Reset
109

ES/P
108

P24/ES
107

ES/S
106

to A7009 - X101

Tacho ground
105

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

C98043-A7002

R76

1D1

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

R75

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

6.4.2

a = copper busbar 20 x 3
b = copper busbar 20 x 5
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

C98043A7014

X75-4

1U1 1V1 1W1

05.2007
Connections

Converters: 60A, 1Q

6-27

6-28

G2
K2

K2
G2

1D1

1V1

1D1

1V1

V3 + V6

X13

K1
G1

K2
G2

1C1

1U1

1D1

1V1

G1
K1

1C1

G2
K2

X15

1W1

V5 + V2

X12

G1
K1

C98043-A7002

X15-1
X15-2

X13-1
X13-2

X11-1
X11-2

X75-1

X75-2

X75-3

E301

1C1

K1
G1

V5 + V2

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

K1
AK

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

Top-mounted fad from D... / 210 only

X91-1

X91-2

X92-1

X_AC

k
K

X_AC

1U1 1V1 1W1

D (L-)

1D1

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

P24/ES
106

109
110

ES/P_Reset
108

ES/P

ES/S
105
107

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V

to A7009 - X101

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7002

R76

V3 + V6

X13

K1
G1

R100

X102

C98043A7015

E302

R75

V1 + V4

G2
K2

G1
K1

X16

X11

X14

1W1

V5 + V2

X15

1W1

X12

Converters: 460V and 575V / 280A

1U1

V1 + V4

X16

K2
G2

K1
G1

X11

X14

1C1

V5 + V2

V3 + V6

Converters: 460V / 210A

1U1

V1 + V4

K2 G2 K1 G1

X12 X15

K2 G2 K1 G1

X16 X13

X14 X11

Converters: 400V / 90A, 125A and 210A

460V / 90A and 125A
575V / 125A and 210A

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Cables are designed as specified at ends

C98043A7014

X75-4

X92-2

6.4.3

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 20 x 3
b = copper busbar 20 x 5
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

Connections
05.2007

Converters: 90A to 280A, 1Q

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1U1

V1 + V4

X11

G1
K1

1D1

G2
K2

1V1

V3 + V6

X11

1U1

V1 + V4

X14

K1
G1

1D1

K2
G2

1C1

1V1

V3 + V6

1D1

1V1

1C1

1W1

X15-1
X15-2

X13-1
X13-2

X11-1
X11-2

C98043-A7002

X102

1C1

E301
Fan

K1
G1

R12

R11

k
K

R14

R13

T3
l

R15

C98043-A7011

R10

V5 + V2

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

1U1 1V1 1W1

1D1

90 D

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

ES/P_Reset

108
110

ES/P
109

P24/ES
107

ES/S
105
106

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V

to A7009 - X101

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7002

R75

V5 + V2

K1
G1

G1
K1

R100

C98043-A7015

4U1 4V1 4W1

R76

1U1

V3 + V6

K2 G2 G1 K1

X12 X15

1W1

V1 + V4

X15

V5 + V2

X16 X13

K2 G2 G1 K1

X14 X11

K2 G2 G1 K1

X12

K2
G2

K1
G1

X13

1W1

X16

Converters: 460V / 450A

400V to 575V / 600A

K2
G2

1C1

X15

V5 + V2

G2
K2

G1
K1

X12

X13

X16

Converters: 575V / 400A

G2
K2

X14

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Converters: 400V / 400A

Cables are designated as specified at ends

C98043-A7014

4U1 4N1

Converters: 460V

6.4.4

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 30 x 5
b = copper busbar 35 x 5
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

05.2007
Connections

Converters: 400A to 600A, 1Q

6-29

6-30

1U1

X11 X14

K1 G1 G2 K2

V1 + V4

1D1

1V1

X13 X16

K1 G1 G2 K2

V3 + V6

1C1

1W1

X15 X12

K1 G1 G2 K2

R100

V5 + V2

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Cables are designated as specified at ends

X15-1
X15-2

X13-1
X13-2

X11-1
X11-2

C98043-A7003

X102

C98043-A7015

C98043-A7014

1C1

K1
G1

V
99

U
91

R14

C98043-A7011

R12

V5 + V2

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

R10

E301
Fan

k
K

R13

98
90

R15
W

C98043-A7011

R11

1U1 1V1 1W1

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603
R76
Tacho

P24/ES
ES/P
ES/P_Reset

106
107
108
110

ES/S
105

109

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V

to A7009 - X101

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

C98043-A7003

B601

B600
R75

1D1

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

6.4.5

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (Kathoden) leads red

a = copper busbar 60 x 5
b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Bettherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

4U1 4V1 4W1

Connections
05.2007

Converters: 720A, 1Q

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1U1

1D1

1V1

X13 X16

X11 X14

K1 G1 G2 K2

V3 + V6

K1 G1 G2 K2

V1 + V4

1C1

1W1

X15 X12

K1 G1 G2 K2

R100

V5 + V2

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Cables are sesignated as specified at ends

X15-1
X15-2

X13-1
X13-2

X11-1
X11-2

C98043-A7002

X102

C98043-A7015

C98043-A7014

1C1

E301
Fan

b
90

V
93

U
92

R14

R13

94
90

R15
W

C98043-A7011

R11

1U1 1V1 1W1

C98043-A7011

R12

V5 + V2

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

R10

4U1 4V1 4W1

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603
R76

Tacho

P24/ES
ES/P
ES/P_Reset

106
107
108
110

ES/S
105

109

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V

to A7009 - X101

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

C98043-A7002

B601

R75

1D1

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

B600

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

6.4.6

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (Kathoden) leads red

a = copper bar 60 x 5
b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

Converters: 460V
4U1 4N1

05.2007
Connections

Converters: 800 to 850A, 1Q

6-31

6-32

1U1

1D1

1V1

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

1C1

K2 G2 G1 K1

X16 X13

X14 X11

1W1

V5 + V2

K2 G2 G1 K1

X12 X15

C98043-A7004

U2
U1

X15-1
X15-2

X13-1
X13-2

X11-1
X11-2

1C1

R14

C98043-A7011

R12
V

R10

V5 + V2

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

k
K

R13

98
90

R15
W

C98043-A7011

R11

1D1

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

B603

W2
W1
V2
V1

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

X14-2
X14-1

B602

R76

Arrangement of thyristor modules

C98043-A7003

E301
Fan

B600

C98043-A7004

Tacho

X102

NS
110

ES/P_Reset
109

ES/P
108

P24/ES
107

ES/S
105
106

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V

to A7009 - X101

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7003

B601

R75

R100

Cables are designated as specified at ends

1U1 1V1 1W1

6.4.7

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 60 x 10
b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

4U1 4V1 4W1

Connections
05.2007

Converters: 900A to 950A, 1Q

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1D1

1V1

1U1

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

1C1

K2 G2 G1 K1

X16 X13

1W1

V5 + V2

K2 G2 G1 K1

X12 X15

C98043-A7004

U2
U1

X15-1
X15-2

X13-1
X13-2

X11-1
X11-2

1C1

R14

C98043-A7011

R12
V

R10

V5 + V2

V3 + V6

V1 + V4

k
K

R13

94
90

R15
W

C98043-A7011

R11

1D1

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

W2
W1
V2
V1

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

C98043-A7004

Tacho

X102

ES/P_Reset
108
110

ES/P
109

P24/ES
107

ES/S
106

105

Tacho 270V
Tacho Ground
104

103

to A7009 - X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

NC
3

AC 380 to 460V

C98043-A7002

R76

X14 X11

C98043-A7002

E301
Fan

R75

Arrangement of thyristor modules

R100

Cables are designated as specified at ends

1U1 1V1 1W1

6.4.8

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 60 x 10
b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Bettherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

4U1 4V1 4W1

05.2007
Connections

Converters: 1000 to 1200A, 1Q

6-33

6-34

R100
b

1C1

F152

<1>

F161 (F16)

U1
V1
W1

V15

F121 (F12)

F132

<1>

F141 (F14)

V3
V13

<1>

1W1

F162

X15-2
X15-1

K1
G1

V1
V11

F112

F142

1V1

V12

V16

V14

K2
G2

1D1

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

B602

B603

B601

B600

U2
V2
W2

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

C98043-A7004

X102

Tacho

P24/ES
ES/P
ES/P_Reset
NS

106
107
108
109

ES/S
105

110

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V

to A7009 - X101

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

Converters D485/... and D690/...

C98043-A7002
Converters D830/... and D1000/...
C98043-A7003

X14-2
X14-1

R76

X13-2
X13-1

X11-2
X11-1

K1
G1

E301
Fan

1U1

R75

C98043-A7004

C98043-A7003

Converters D830/... and D1000/...

C98043-A7002

Converters D485/... and D690/...

<1> Number of fuses see section 6.6.2.2

Cables are designated as specified at ends

4U1 4V1 4W1

6.4.9

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 80 x 10
b = copper busbar 50 x 10
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

Connections
05.2007

Converters: 1500 to 2000A, 575V/2200A, 1Q

F122

F151 (F15)

F131 (F13)

F111 (F11)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections
Arrangement of thyristor blocks

V14

V16

V12

V11

V13

V15

At rear

At front

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-35

6-36

R100

U1
V1
W1

K1
G1

1C1

C98043-A7017

X90

V15

C98043-A7017

X90

V13

C98043-A7017

X90

V11

K
l

F121

2
1

1W1

F162

X15-2
X15-1

1V1

F142

2 K1
1 G1

E301
Fan

1U1

X90

C98043-A7017

X90

V12

C98043-A7017

X90

V16

C98043-A7017

V14

1D1

K2 2
G2 1

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

B602

B603

B601

B600

U2
V2
W2

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X16-2
X16-1

C98043-A7004

X102

Tacho

P24/ES
ES/P
ES/P_Reset
NS

106
107
108
109

ES/S
105

110

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V

to A7009 - X101

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

Converters D485/... and D690/...

C98043-A7002
Converters D830/... and D1000/...
C98043-A7003

X14-2
X14-1

R76

X13-2
X13-1

X11-2
X11-1

4U1 4V1 4W1

R75

C98043-A7004

C98043-A7003

Converters D830/... and D1000/...

C98043-A7002

Converters D485/... and D690/...

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 80 x 10
b = copper busbar 50 x 10
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

Connections
05.2007

6.4.10 Converters: 400V/3000A, 575V/2800A, 690V/2600A, 950V/2200A 1Q

F122

F151

F161
F152

F131

F141
F132

F111

F112

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections
Arrangement of thyristor blocks

V14

V16

V12

V11

V13

V15

At rear

At front

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-37

6-38

X24

X21

X26

X13

X25

1U1 1D1 1V1 1C1 1W1

(1C1)
(1D1)

X23

X16

X11

X14

X22

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

X15

X12

a = Rheytherm 120 2.5mm

All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

R100

X12

X15

X16

X13

X14

X11

1C1
(1D1)

XU2

XV2

C98043-A7010

XW2

XW1

1D1
(1C1)

XD1

XD2

X25

X22

X23

X26

X21

X24

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-2

X25-1

X22-1

X22-2

X23-2

X23-1

X26-1

X26-2

X21-2

X21-1

X24-1

X24-2

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

110

ES/P_Reset

108
109

ES/P
107

P24/ES

ES/S
106

Tacho ground
105

Tacho 270V
104

103

to A7009 - X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

5N1 5W1 5U1

X101

AC 190 to 230V

F2 F1
M1A M1A

5N1 5W1 5U1

C98043-A7002

R76

XC1

XC2

T2, T3
Primary conductor on
L1: 15A converters
fed through 2x
L2: 30A converters
fed through 1x

XV1

R75

C98043-A7002

X12-2

X12-1

X15-1

X15-2

X16-2

X16-1

X13-1

X13-2

X14-2

X14-1

X11-1

X11-2

X102

XU1

1U1 1V1 1W1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

Connections
05.2007

6.4.11 Converters: 15 to 30A, 4Q

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

X25 X12

C98043-A7002

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

X75-1

X75-2

X75-3

1C1
(1D1)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

G1
K

X_AC

k
K

X_AC

D (L-)

G2
A

1D1
(1C1)

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

110

109

108

107

106

105

104

103

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

ES/S

Tacho ground

to A7009 - X101

Tacho 270V

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7002

R76

1D1
(1C1)

X23 X16

X102

C98043A7015

R75

1U1

X21 X14

X22 X15

X26 X13

X24 X11

R100

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 20 x 3
b = copper busbar 20 x 5
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

C98043A7014

X75-4

1U1 1V1 1W1

05.2007
Connections

6.4.12 Converters: 60A, 4Q

6-39

6-40

1U1

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

K2
G2

X14

G2
K2

G1
K1

1U1

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

X23

X16

G2
K2

G1
K1

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

X25

G2
K2

K1
G1

X12

X15

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

X75-1

X75-2

X75-3

C98043-A7002

X102

C98043A7015
M

E301

1C1
(1D1)

G2
K2

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

X_AC

k
K

X_AC

1U1 1V1 1W1

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

Top-mounted FanD... / 210 only

X91-1

X91-2

X92-1

E302

D (L-)

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

1D1
(1C1)

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

106

110

109

108

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

105
107

ES/S

Tacho 270V
Tacho ground
104

to A7009 - X101

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7002

R76

X21

K1
G1

X22

K2
G2

K1
G1

X26

1W1

X25 X12

R100

C98043A7014

X75-4

X92-2

R75

G1
K1

X11

X24

X13

X23 X16

X21 X14

Converters: 460V / 210A

K2
G2

1C1
(1D1)

G1 K1 G2 K2

K2 G2 K1 G1

X22 X15

K2 G2 K1 G1

X26 X13

X24 X11

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Converters: 400V / 90A, 125A and 210A
460V / 90A and 125A
575V / 125A and 210A

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 20 x 3
b = copper busbar 20 x 5
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

Connections
05.2007

6.4.13 Converters: 90A to 210A, 4Q

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

K1
G1

G2
K2

X16

K2
G2

K1
G1

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

X12

K2
G2

G1
K1

C98043-A7002

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

X75-1

X75-2

X75-3

E301

1C1
(1D1)

G2
K2

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

C98043-A7007

C (L+)

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

Top-mounted FanD... / 210 only

X91-1

X91-2

X92-1

X_AC

k
K

X_AC

1U1 1V1 1W1

D (L-)

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

1D1
(1C1)

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

110

109

108

107

106

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

ES/S

Tacho ground
105

Tacho 270V
104

to A7009 - X101

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7002

R76

1D1
(1C1)

X25

X15

X102

C98043A7015

E302

R75

1U1

X23

X21

K1
G1

G2
K2

K2
G2

G1
K1

X22

X13

G2
K2

G1
K1

X26

X14

X11

X24

R100

Arrangement of thyrister modules

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 20 x 3
b = copper busbar 20 x 5
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

C98043A7014

X75-4

X92-2

05.2007
Connections

6.4.14 Converters: 280A, 4Q

6-41

6-42

1U1

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

X23

X21

K1
G1

G2
K2

G1
K1

1U1

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

X23

X16

X13

1C1
(1D1)

G2
K2

K1
G1

G1
K1

K2
G2

1W1

X25

X22

1W1

K2
G2

G2
K2

K1
G1

X12

X15

X12

G1
K1

R100

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

C98043-A7002

X102

1C1
(1D1)

V1
96

U1
95

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

E301
Fan

R12

R11

R14

R13

R15

C98043-A7011

R10

1U1 1V1 1W1

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

1D1
(1C1)

90 D

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

110

109

108

107

106

105

104

103

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

ES/S

Tachoground

to A7009 - X101

Tacho 270V

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7002

R76

X21

K2
G2

K1
G1

X26

X14

X11

X24

1C1
(1D1)

X25

X15

C98043-A7015

C98043-A7014

4U1 4V1 4W1

R75

G1
K1

K2
G2

X22

X16

G2
K2

K1
G1

G1
K1

K2
G2

X13

X26

G2
K2

G1
K1

X14

X11

X24

Converters: 575 / 400A

K1
G1

G2
K2

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Converters: 400V / 400A

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 20 x 3
b = copper busbar 20 x 5
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

Connections
05.2007

6.4.15 Converters: 400A, 4Q

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

R100

1U1

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

C98043-A7002

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

1C1
(1D1)

E301
Fan

V1
96

U1
95

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

R12

R11

R14

R13

R15

C98043-A7011

R10

1U1 1V1 1W1

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

1D1
(1C1)

90 D

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

110

109

108

107

106

105

104

103

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

ES/S

Tachoground

to A7009 - X101

Tacho 270V

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7002

R76

X25 X12

X102

C98043-A7015

C98043-A7014

4U1 4V1 4W1

R75

K1 G1 G2 K2

X23 X16

K1 G1 G2 K2

X21 X14

K2 G2 G1 K1

X22 X15

K1 G1 G2 K2

K2 G2 G1 K1

X26 X13

X24 X11

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Cables are designated like specified at ends

G (Gate)leads yellow
K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 30 x 5
b = copper busbar 35 x 5
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

Converters: 460V
4U1 4N1

05.2007
Connections

6.4.16 Converters: 450A to 600A, 4Q

6-43

6-44

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

X25 X12

C98043-A7003

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

1C1
(1D1)

R14

C98043-A7011

U
91

R12

R10

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

E301
Fan

k
K
L

R13

R15

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

C98043-A7011

R11

1D1
(1C1)

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

110

109

108

107

106

105

104

103

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

ES/S

Tacho ground

to A7009 - X101

Tacho 270V

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7003

R76

1U1

X23 X16

X21 X14

K1 G1 G2 K2

K2 G2 G1 K1

X22 X15

1U1 1V1 1W1

R75

K1 G1 G2 K2

K2 G2 G1 K1

X26 X13

X24 X11

Arrangement of thyristor modules

R100

X102

C98043-A7015

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

Cables are designated as specified at ends

C98043-A7014

a = copper busbar 60 x 5
b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

4U1 4V1 4W1

Connections
05.2007

6.4.17 Converters: 760A, 4Q

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

R100

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

X25 X12

C98043-A7002

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

1C1
(1D1)

R14

C98043-A7011

U
92

R12

R10

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

E301
Fan

k
L

R13

R15

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

C98043-A7011

R11

1U1 1V1 1W1

1D1
(1C1)

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

B601

B600

Tacho

110

109

ES/P_Reset

ES/P
108

P24/ES

ES/S

107

Tacho ground
105
106

Tacho 270V
104

to A7009 - X101

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7002

R76

1U1

X23 X16

X21 X14

K1 G1 G2 K2

K2 G2 G1 K1

X22 X15

X102

C98043-A7015

C98043-A7014

4U1 4V1 4W1

R75

K1 G1 G2 K2

K2 G2 G1 K1

X26 X13

X24 X11

Arrangement of thyristor modules

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 60 x 5
b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

4U1 4N1

Converters: 460V

05.2007
Connections

6.4.18 Converters: 850A, 4Q

6-45

6-46

1U1

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

K2 G2 G1 K1

C98043-A7004

U1
V1
W1

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

1C1
(1D1)

b
90

R14

C98043-A7011

R12
V

R10

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

E301
Fan

1V1

1W1

R13
99

R15

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

C98043-A7011

R11

K2
G2
A

1D1
(1C1)

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

U2
V2
W2

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

Tacho

X102

110

109

108

107

106

105

104

103

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

ES/S

Tacho ground

to A7009 - X101

Tacho 270V

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

C98043-A7003

B601

B600

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7004

R76

K2 G2 G1 K1

X23 X16

X21 X14

X25 X12

X22 X15

K1 G1 G2 K2

X26 X13

K1 G1 G2 K2

X24 X11

K1 G1 G2 K2

C98043-A7003

1U1

R75

Arrangement of thyristor modules

R100

Cables are designatedas specified at ends.

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads rd

a =copper busbar 60 x 10
b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

4U1 4V1 4W1

Connections
05.2007

6.4.19 Converters: 950A to 1000A, 4Q

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1U1

1D1
(1C1)

1V1

1C1
(1D1)

1W1

K2 G2 G1 K1

C98043-A7004

U1
V1
W1

X22-1
X22-2

X15-2
X15-1

X26-1
X26-2

X13-2
X13-1

X24-1
X24-2

X11-2
X11-1

1C1
(1D1)

b
90

R14

C98043-A7011

R12
V

R10

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

G2
K2

K1
G1
K

E301
Fan

1V1

1W1

R13
93

R15

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

K2
G2
A

G1
K1

C98043-A7011

R11

K2
G2
A

1D1
(1C1)

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

U2
V2
W2

X25-1
X25-2

X12-2
X12-1

X23-1
X23-2

X16-2
X16-1

X21-1
X21-2

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

Tacho

X102

109
110

ES/P_Reset

ES/P
108

107

P24/ES

ES/S
105
106

Tacho ground

Tacho 270V

to A7009 - X101

104

103

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

C98043-A7002

B601

B600

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

C98043-A7004

R76

K2 G2 G1 K1

X23 X16

X21 X14

X25 X12

X22 X15

K1 G1 G2 K2

X26 X13

K1 G1 G2 K2

X24 X11

K1 G1 G2 K2

C98043-A7002

1U1

R75

Arrangement of thyristor modules

R100

Cables arer designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper bar 60 x 10
b = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables areBetatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

4U1 4V1 4W1

05.2007
Connections

6.4.20 Converters: 1100 to 1200A, 4Q

6-47

6-48

XU1
XV1
XW1

1C1
(1D1)

V22

<1>

F152

R100

F161 (F16)

3
4

V15

F121 (F12)

C98043-A7004

1
2

F132

<1>

1W1

F162

X22-1
X22-2

3
4

V26

F141 (F14)

X15-1
X15-2

V3
V13

<1>

1V1

F142

X26-1
X26-2

1
2

V24

V1
V11

F112

X13-1
X13-2

3
4

E301
Fan

1U1

V25

V23

V21

V12

V16

V14

2
1

4
3

2
1

4
3

2
1

4
3

1D1
(1C1)

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

XU2
XV2
XW2

X25-2
X25-1

X12-2
X12-1

X23-2
X23-1

X16-2
X16-1

X21-2
X21-1

X14-2
X14-1

B602

B603

X102

110

109

108

107

106

105

Tacho 103
104

C98043-A7004

C98043-A7003

Converters D725/... and D875/...

C98043-A7002

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

ES/S

Tacho ground

to A7009 - X101

Tacho 270V

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

Converters D420/... and D600/...

B601

B600

R75

X24-1
X24-2

1
2

4U1 4V1 4W1

R76

X11-1
X11-2

Converters D420/... and D600/...

C98043-A7002
Converters D725/... and D875/...
C98043-A7003

<1> Number of fuses see section 6.6.2.2

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 80 x 10
b = copper busbar 50 x 10
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

Connections
05.2007

6.4.21 Converters: 1500 to 2000A, 575V/2200A, 4Q

F122

F151 (F15)

F131 (F13)

F111 (F11)

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections
Arrangement of thyristor blocks

V14

V16

V12

V21

V23

V25

V24

V26

V22

V11

V13

V15

At rear

At front

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-49

6-50

R100

XU1
XV1
XW1

1C1
(1D1)

3
4

G2 V22
K2

G1
K1

G2 V26

G1
K1

G2 V24

G1
K1

C98043-A7017

V15

C98043-A7017

V13

C98043-A7017

V11

K
L

T3
l

F121

C98043-A7004

1W1

F162

X22-1
X22-2

X15-1
X15-2

1
2

3
4

1
2

3
4

1
2

F142

X26-1
X26-2

X13-1
X13-2

X24-1
X24-2

E301
Fan

1V1

V16

V12

V25

C98043-A7017

V23

C98043-A7017

V21

C98043-A7017

V14

K1
G1

K2
G2

K1
G1

K2
G2

K1
G1

K2
G2

2
1

4
3

2
1

4
3

2
1

1D1
(1C1)

4
3

X3-3
X3-2

X3-1
X3-4

B602

XU2
XV2
XW2

X25-2
X25-1

X12-2
X12-1

X23-2
X23-1

X16-2
X16-1

X21-2
X21-1

X14-2
X14-1

B603

X102

Tacho

C98043-A7004

C98043-A7003

110

109

108

107

106

105

104

103

Converters D725/... and D875/...

C98043-A7002

ES/P_Reset

ES/P

P24/ES

ES/S

Tacho ground

to A7009 - X101

Tacho 270V

X101

F2 F1
M1A M1A

AC 190 to 230V

5N1 5W1 5U1

AC 380 to 460V
NC
3

Converters D420/... and D600/...

B601

B600

R75

1U1

R76

X11-1
X11-2

Converters D420/... and D600/...

C98043-A7002
Converters D725/... and D875/...
C98043-A7003

Cables are designated as specified at ends

G (Gate) leads yellow

K (cathode) leads red

a = copper busbar 80 x 10
b = copper busbar 50 x 10
c = Raychem 44A0311-20-9
All cables are Betatherm 145 1mm2 unless otherwise designated

4U1 4V1 4W1

Connections
05.2007

6.4.22 Converters: 400V/3000A, 575V/2800A, 690V/2600A, 950V/2200A 4Q

F122

F151

F161
F152

F131

F141
F132

F111

F112

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections
Arrangement of thyristor blocks

V14

V16

V12

V21

V23

V25

V24

V26

V22

V11

V13

V15

At rear

At front

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-51

Connections

6.5

05.2007

Field supply
Converter type D . . . / 15 to 30A
3U1 3W1

C98043-A7010

XF1-2

XF1-1

XF2-1

XF2-2

Gating leads are Betatherm 145 1mm

Module

6-52

Rated DC
current armature

Rated DC
current field

A7010-L1

15A

0R1

A7010-L2

30A

0R1

0R05

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Converter type D . . . / 60 to 850A

3U1 3W1
XF1-2

XF1-1

C98043-A7014

C98043-A7015

X102

to A7002 - X102

XF2-1

XF2-2

Gating leads are Betatherm 145 1mm

Module

Rated DC
current armature

Rated DC
current field

A7014-L1

60A to 125A

10A

0R04

A7014-L2

210A to 280A

15A

0R04

A7014-L2

400A to 600A

25A

0R04

A7014-L2

720A to 850A

30A

0R04

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-53

Connections

05.2007

Converter type D . . . / 900 to 3000A

3U1 3W1
XF1-2

XF1-1

C98043-A7004

X102

to A7002 - X102

U1
V1
W1
K

U2
V2
W2

a
XF2-1

XF2-2

a = Betatherm 145 6mm

Gating leads are Betatherm 145 1mm

Rated DC
current armature

Rated DC
current field

A7004-L1/-L2

900A to 1200A

A7004-L1/-L2
A7004-L3/-L4

Module

6-54

30A

0R04

1500A to 2000A

40A

0R04

2200A to 3000A

85A

0R01

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

6.6

Fuses and commutating reactors

6.6.1

Commutating reactors
Commutating reactors can be selected from Catalog LV60.
The line impedance including commutating reactors must be equivalent of between 4% and 10%
short-circuit voltage. Commutating reactors can be provided by the customer to limit commutating
voltage dips in the supply system (subject to local regulations).

6.6.2

Fuses
For technical data, configuring data and dimension drawings, please refer to Catalog DA94.1.
It is essential to use "UL-listed" or "UL-recognized" fuses for protection of devices in accordance
with UL standards.

6.6.2.1

Recommended fuses for field circuit

Converter unit

Max. permissible

Rated DC current

field current

1 Siemens fuse

1 Bussmann fuse
FWP 700V U

Order No.

5SD420

FWP-5B

5SD420

FWP-5B

60 to 125

5SD420

FWP-15B

210 to 280

5SD440

FWP-20B

400 to 600

5SD440

FWP-30B

710 to 1200

5SD480

FWP-35B

1500 to 2000

FWP-50B

2200 to 3000

3NE1802-0 1)
3NE8021-1 1)

100

FWP-100B

100

1) UL-recognized
6.6.2.2

Fuses for armature circuit

6.6.2.2.1 Converters 1Q: 400V, 575V, 690V, 830V and 950V

Converter
Order No.

C/V

3 line fuses
Siemens U
Order No.

A/V

C/V
A/V

6RA7018-6DS22

30 / 400

3NE8003-1

35 / 690

6RA7025-6DS22

60 / 400

3NE1817-0

50 / 690

6RA7025-6GS22

60 / 575

3NE1817-0

50 / 690

6RA7028-6DS22

90 / 400

3NE1820-0

80 / 690

6RA7031-6DS22

125 / 400

3NE1021-0

100 / 690

6RA7031-6GS22

125 / 575

3NE1021-0

100 / 690

6RA7075-6DS22

210 / 400

3NE3227

250 / 1000

6RA7075-6GS22

210 / 575

3NE3227

250 / 1000

6RA7078-6DS22

280 / 400

3NE3231

350 / 1000

6RA7081-6DS22

400 / 400

3NE3233

450 / 1000

6RA7081-6GS22

400 / 575

3NE3233

450 / 1000

6RA7085-6DS22

600 / 400

3NE3336

630 / 1000

6RA7085-6GS22

600 / 575

3NE3336

630 / 1000

6RA7087-6DS22

850 / 400

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

6RA7087-6GS22

800 / 575

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

6RA7086-6KS22

720 / 690

3NE3337-8

710 / 900

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-55

Connections

Converter
Order No.

05.2007

C/V

Branch fuses
Siemens U
Qty.

Order No.

C/V

A/V

6RA7091-6DS22

1200 / 400

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

6RA7090-6GS22

1000 / 575

3NE3337-8

710 / 900

6RA7088-6KS22

950 / 690

3NE3337-8

710 / 900

6RA7088-6LS22

900 / 830

3NE3337-8

710 / 900

6RA7093-4DS22

1600 / 400

6RY1702-0BA02

1000 / 660

6RA7093-4GS22

1600 / 575

6RY1702-0BA02

1000 / 660

6RA7093-4KS22

1500 / 690

6RY1702-0BA03

1000 / 1000

6RA7093-4LS22

1500 / 830

6RY1702-0BA03

1000 / 1000

6RA7095-4DS22

2000 / 400

6RY1702-0BA01

1250 / 660

6RA7095-4GS22

2000 / 575

6RY1702-0BA01

1250 / 660

6RA7095-4KS22

2000 / 690

6RY1702-0BA04

630 / 1000

6RA7095-4LS22

1900 / 830

6RY1702-0BA04

630 / 1000

6RA7096-4GS22

2200 / 575

6RY1702-0BA05

1500 / 660

6RA7096-4MS22

2200 / 950

6RY1702-0BA07

800 / 1250

6RA7097-4KS22

2600 / 690

6RY1702-0BA08

1000 / 1000

6RA7097-4GS22

2800 / 575

6RY1702-0BA08

1000 / 1000

6RA7098-4DS22

3000 / 400

6RY1702-0BA08

1000 / 1000

Branch fuses are included in converter, external semiconductor fuses are not needed.

6.6.2.2.2 Converters 1Q: 460V

Converter
Order No.

C/V

3 line fuses
Siemens U
Order No.

A/V

C/V

3 line fuses
Bussmann U
Order No.

A/V

C/V

3 line fuses
Bussmann U
Order No.

A/V

C/V
A/V

6RA7018-6FS22

30 / 460

3NE1815-0

25 / 690

170M1562

32 / 660

FWH-35B

35 /500

6RA7025-6FS22

60 / 460

3NE1817-0

50 / 690

170M1565

63 / 660

FWH-60B

60 /500

6RA7028-6FS22

90 / 460

3NE1820-0

80 / 690

170M1567

100 / 660

FWH-100B

100 /500

6RA7031-6FS22

125 / 460

3NE1021-0

100 / 690

170M1568

125 / 660

FWH-125B

125 /500

6RA7075-6FS22

210 / 460

3NE3227

250 / 1000

170M3166

250 / 660

FWH-225A

225 /500

6RA7078-6FS22

280 / 460

3NE3231

350 / 1000

170M3167

315 / 660

FWH-275A

275 /500

6RA7082-6FS22

450 / 460

3NE3233

450 / 1000

170M3170

450 / 660

FWH-450A

450 /500

6RA7085-6FS22

600 / 460

3NE3336

630 / 1000

170M4167

700 / 660

FWH-600A

600 /500

6RA7087-6FS22

850 / 460

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

170M5165

900 / 660

FWH-800A

800 /500

FWH-... and FWP-... fuses are not mechanically compatible with the 3NE... or 170M... fuses.

Converter
Order No.

C/V

Branch fuses
Siemens U
Qty.

Order No.

C/V

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

A/V
6RA7091-6FS22

1200 / 460

A/V

Branch fuses are included in converter, external semiconductor fuses are not needed.

6-56

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

6.6.2.2.3 Converters 4Q: 400V, 575V, 690V, 830V and 950V

Converter
Order No.

C/V

3 line fuses
Siemens U
Order No.

I/U

A/V

1 DC fuse
Siemens U
Order No.

C/V

A/V

6RA7013-6DV62

15 / 400

3NE1814-0

20 / 690

3NE1814-0

20 / 690

6RA7018-6DV62

30 / 400

3NE8003-1

35 / 690

3NE4102

40 / 1000

6RA7025-6DV62

60 / 400

3NE1817-0

50 / 690

3NE4120

80 / 1000

6RA7025-6GV62

60 / 575

3NE1817-0

50 / 690

3NE4120

80 / 1000

6RA7028-6DV62

90 / 400

3NE1820-0

80 / 690

3NE4122

125 / 1000

6RA7031-6DV62

125 / 400

3NE1021-0

100 / 690

3NE4124

160 / 1000

6RA7031-6GV62

125 / 575

3NE1021-0

100 / 690

3NE4124

160 / 1000

6RA7075-6DV62

210 / 400

3NE3227

250 / 1000

3NE3227

250 / 1000

6RA7075-6GV62

210 / 575

3NE3227

250 / 1000

3NE3227

250 / 1000

6RA7078-6DV62

280 / 400

3NE3231

350 / 1000

3NE3231

350 / 1000

6RA7081-6DV62

400 / 400

3NE3233

450 / 1000

3NE3233

450 / 1000

6RA7081-6GV62

400 / 575

3NE3233

450 / 1000

3NE3233

450 / 1000

6RA7085-6DV62

600 / 400

3NE3336

630 / 1000

3NE3336

630 / 1000

6RA7085-6GV62

600 / 575

3NE3336

630 / 1000

3NE3336

630 / 1000

6RA7087-6DV62

850 / 400

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

3NE3334-0B 1)

500 / 1000
500 / 1000
500 / 1000

6RA7087-6GV62

850 / 575

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

3NE3334-0B 1)

6RA7086-6KV62

760 / 690

3NE3337-8

710 / 900

3NE3334-0B 1)

1) Two fuses connected in parallel

Converter
Order No.

C/V

Branch fuses
Siemens U
Qty.

Order No.

A/V
6RA7091-6DV62

1200 / 400

C/V
A/V

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

6RA7090-6GV62

1100 / 575

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

6RA7090-6KV62

1000 / 690

3NE3337-8

710 / 900

6RA7088-6LV62

950 / 830

3NE3337-8

710 / 900

6RA7093-4DV62

1600 / 400

6RY1702-0BA02

1000 / 660

6RA7093-4GV62

1600 / 575

6RY1702-0BA02

1000 / 660

6RA7093-4KV62

1500 / 690

6RY1702-0BA03

1000 / 1000

6RA7093-4LV62

1500 / 830

6RY1702-0BA03

1000 / 1000

6RA7095-4DV62

2000 / 400

6RY1702-0BA01

1250 / 660

6RA7095-4GV62

2000 / 575

6RY1702-0BA01

1250 / 660

6RA7095-4KV62

2000 / 690

6RY1702-0BA04

630 / 1000

6RA7095-4LV62

1900 / 830

6RY1702-0BA04

630 / 1000

6RA7096-4GV62

2200 / 575

6RY1702-0BA05

1500 / 660

6RA7096-4MV62

2200 / 950

6RY1702-0BA07

800 / 1250

6RA7097-4KV62

2600 / 690

6RY1702-0BA08

1000 / 1000

6RA7097-4GV62

2800 / 575

6RY1702-0BA08

1000 / 1000

6RA7098-4DV62

3000 / 400

6RY1702-0BA08

1000 / 1000

Branch fuses are included in converter, external semiconductor fuses are not needed.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-57

Connections

05.2007

6.6.2.2.4 Converters 4Q: 460V

Converter
Order No.

C/V

3 line fuses
Siemens U
Order No.

3 line fuses
Bussmann U

C/V

A/V

Order No.

A/V

C/V

3 line fuses
Bussmann U
Order No.

A/V

C/V
A/V

6RA7018-6FV62

30 / 460

3NE1815-0

25 / 690

170M1562

32 / 660

FWH-35B

35 /500

6RA7025-6FV62

60 / 460

3NE1817-0

50 / 690

170M1565

63 / 660

FWH-60B

60 /500

6RA7028-6FV62

90 / 460

3NE1820-0

80 / 690

170M1567

100 / 660

FWH-100B

100 /500

6RA7031-6FV62

125 / 460

3NE1021-0

100 / 690

170M1568

125 / 660

FWH-125B

125 /500

6RA7075-6FV62

210 / 460

3NE3227

250 / 1000

170M3166

250 / 660

FWH-225A

225 /500

6RA7078-6FV62

280 / 460

3NE3231

350 / 1000

170M3167

315 / 660

FWH-275A

275 /500

6RA7082-6FV62

450 / 460

3NE3233

450 / 1000

170M3170

450 / 660

FWH-450A

450 /500

6RA7085-6FV62

600 / 460

3NE3336

630 / 1000

170M4167

700 / 660

FWH-600A

600 /500

6RA7087-6FV62

850 / 460

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

170M5165

900 / 660

FWH-800A

800 /500

Converter
Order No.

C/V

1 DC fuse
Siemens U

1 DC fuse
Bussmann U

Order No.

C/V
40 / 1000

A/V

Order No.

C/V

FWP-35B

35 / 660

A/V

6RA7018-6FV62

30 / 460

3NE4102

6RA7025-6FV62

60 / 460

3NE4120

80 / 1000

FWP-70B

70 / 660

6RA7028-6FV62

90 / 460

3NE4122

125 / 1000

FWP-125A

125 / 660

6RA7031-6FV62

125 / 460

3NE4124

160 / 1000

FWP-150A

150 / 660

6RA7075-6FV62

210 / 460

3NE3227

250 / 1000

FWP-250A

250 / 660

6RA7078-6FV62

280 / 460

3NE3231

350 / 1000

FWP-350A

350 / 660

6RA7082-6FV62

450 / 460

3NE3334-0B

500 / 1000

FWP-500A

500 / 660

6RA7085-6FV62

600 / 460

3NE3336

630 / 1000

FWP-700A

700 / 660

6RA7087-6FV62

850 / 460

3NE3334-0B 1)

500 / 1000

FWP-1000A

1000 / 660

FWH-... and FWP-... fuses are not mechanically compatible with the 3NE... or 170M... fuses.
1) Two fuses connected in parallel
Converter
Order No.

C/V

Branch fuses
Siemens U
Qty.

Order No.

A/V
6RA7091-6FV62

1200 / 460

C/V
A/V

3NE3338-8

800 / 800

Branch fuses are included in converter, external semiconductor fuses are not needed.

6.6.2.3

F1 and F2 fuses in the power interface

Only UL listed or UL recognized fuses must be used for UL listed converters.

Wickmann 198 1A / 250 V 5 x 20 mm time lag
Wickmann 343 1A / 250 V 6,3 x 32 mm time lag
Schurter FSD 1A / 250 V 5 x 20 mm time lag Ordering Code 0034.3987
Schurter FST 1A / 250 V 5 x 20 mm time lag Ordering Code 0034.3117

6-58

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

6.7

Connections

Terminal arrangement
Module C98043-A7001 (CUD1)

34
35
36
37
38
39
46
47
48
54

X171

56
57
58
59
60

X172

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

X173

X107

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
22
23
24

X174

12
13
14
15
16
17

X175

X109

C98043-A7001

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-59

Connections

05.2007

Module C98043-A7006 (CUD2)

210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217 X161

61
62
63
64
65

X162

44
45
40
41
42
43
50
51
52
53

X163

8
9
10
11
18
19
20
21
204
205 X164

C98043-A7006

6-60

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Module C98043-A7002 or C98043-A7003

X102
F2
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110

5N1

5W1

5U1

Module C98043-A7010
XF1

XF2
X102

3U1

3W1

Module C98043-A7014
XF1

3U1

XF2

3W1

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-61

Connections

6.8

05.2007

Terminal assignments
WARNING
The converter might sustain serious or irreparable damage if connected incorrectly.
The power cables and/or busbars must be secured mechanically outside the converter.

Power section

Terminal type:

15A and 30A units

KDS10 PCB feed-through terminal (screw-type terminal)

Maximum cross-section 10mm2, finely stranded

60A to 280A units

1U1,1V1,1W1: Through-hole for M8 (3x20 copper bus)

1C1,1D1: Through-hole for M8 (5x20 copper bus)

400A and 600A units

1U1,1V1,1W1: Through-hole for M10 (5x30 copper bus)

1C1,1D1: Through-hole for M10 (5x35 copper bus)

710A to 850A units

Through-hole for M12 (5x60 copper bus)

950A to 1200A units

Through-hole for M12 (10x60 copper bus)

1500A to 2200A units

1U1,1V1,1W1: Through-hole for M12 (10x80 copper bus)

1C1,1D1: Through-hole for M12 (10x50 copper bus)

2200A to 3000A units

1U1,1V1,1W1: Through-hole for M12 (2x copper bus 10x100)

1C1,1D1: Through-hole for M12 (2x copper bus 10x80)

The converters are designed for a permanent power supply connection according to DIN VDE 0160
Section 6.5.2.1.
PE conductor connection: Minimum cross-section 10mm2. (see Section 5.1 for connection options).
The connection cross-sections must be determined according to the applicable regulations, e.g.
DIN VDE 100 Part 523, DIN VDE 0276 Part 1000.
Function
Armature supply input

Terminal
1U1
1V1
1W1

see technical data in Section 3.4

PE conductor
Armature circuit motor
connection

Field circuit

Connection values/Remarks

1C1 (1D1)
1D1 (1C1)

Terminal type:

15A to 850A units

MKDS terminal block (screw-type terminal)

Maximum connection cross-section 4mm2, finely stranded

1200A to 2000A units

G10/4 converter terminal (screw-type terminal)

Maximum connection cross-section 10mm2, finely stranded

2200A to 3000A units

UK16N converter terminal (screw-type terminal)

Maximum connection cross-section 16mm2, finely stranded

Function
Supply connection

Field winding connection

6-62

Terminal
XF1-2 3U1
XF1-1 3W1
XF2-2 3C
XF2-1 3D

Connection values/Remarks
2AC 400V ( 20%), 2AC 460V (+10%)

Rated DC voltage 325V / 373V

For 2AC 400V / 460V supply connection
Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Electronics power supply

Terminal type: Type 49 plug-in terminal
Maximum cross-section 1.5mm2, finely stranded
Function

Connection

Incoming supply
400V
NC

or
Incoming supply
230V

1
2
3

Terminal
XP
5U1
5W1
5N1

1
2
3

5U1
5W1
5N1

Connection values/Remarks

2AC 380V ( 25%) to 460V (+15% ); In=1A

( 35% for 1min)
Internal fuse protection with F1, F2 on board C98043A7002 or -A7003 (see Section 6.6.2.3)
external fuse protection 6A, characteristic C recommended
1AC 190V ( 25%) to 230V (+15% ); In=2A
( 35% for 1min)
Internal fuse protection with F1, F2 on board C98043A7002 or -A7003 (see Section 6.6.2.3)
external fuse protection 6A, characteristic C recommended

NOTE
In the case of line voltages which exceed the tolerance range specified in Section 3.4, the
electronics supply voltage, field circuit mains supply connection and converter fan connection
must be adjusted by means of transformers to the permissible value stated in Section 3.4. It is
essential to use an isolating transformer for rated line voltages in excess of 460V.
The rated supply voltage for the armature circuit (index 001) and the field circuit (index 002)
must be set in parameter P078.

Fan
(for forced-cooled converters 400A)
Terminal type: DFK-PC4 plug-in terminal (screw-type)
Maximum connection cross-section 4mm2 , finely stranded
The insulation on the supply cables must be taken up to the terminal housing.
Function
Incoming supply 400V to 460V

Terminal
4U1
4V1
4W1

Connection values/Remarks
3AC 400V to 460V
For further details, see technical data in Section 3.4

4U1
4N1

1AC 230V
For further details, see technical data in Section 3.4

PE conductor
or
Incoming supply 230V

WARNING
The converter might overheat if the incorrect phase sequence is connected (incorrect direction
of rotation of fan).
Check:
On converters up to 850A (fan at bottom), check whether fan is rotating in direction of arrow
On converters of > 850A (fan at top), check whether fan is rotating in counter-clockwise
direction (to left) when viewed from above
Caution: Rotating parts can cause physical injuries!

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-63

Connections

05.2007

Open-loop and closed-loop control section

Terminal type: X171 to X175
XR, XS, XT

Plug-in terminal (screw-type)

Maximum connection cross-section 1.5mm2
MSTB2.5 plug-in terminal
Maximum connection cross-section 2.5mm2

Analog inputs - setpoint inputs, reference voltage (see also Section 8, sheet G113)

Module C98043-A7001 (CUD1)

Function
Reference

Select input
Select input

M
P10
N10
main setpoint +
main setpoint
analog 1 +
analog 1

Terminal
X174
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Connection values/Remarks

1% at 25C (stability 0.1% per 10K); 10mA shortcircuit-proof

Input type (signal type) parameterizable:
- Differential input 10V; 150k
- Current input
0 - 20mA; 300 or
4 - 20mA; 300
Resolution can be parameterized up to approx. 555V
(14bit)
Common mode suppression: 15V

Analog inputs - actual speed inputs, tacho inputs (see also Section 8, sheet G113)

Module C98043-A7002 or A7003 power interface

Function
Terminal Connection values/Remarks
XT
Tacho connection 8V to 270V
103
270V; >143k
Ground analog M
104

6-64

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Pulse encoder input (see also Section 8, sheet G145)

Module C98043-A7001 (CUD1)

Function
Supply (+13,7V to+15,2V)

Terminal
X173
26

Ground pulse encoder M

Track 1
Positive terminal
Negative terminal

27
28
29

Track 2

30
31
32
33

Zero marker

Positive terminal
Negative terminal
Positive terminal
Negative terminal

Connection values/Remarks

200mA; short-circuit-proof (electronic protection)

Overload response: Fault message F018
Warning signal A018
Load:
5.25mA at 15V
(w/o switching losses, see below for cable, cable length,
shield connection)
Switching hysteresis: See below
Pulse/pause ratio: 1:1
Level of input pulses: See below
Track offset:
Table 1 see below
Pulse frequency:
Table 2 see below
Cable length:
See below

Characteristic data of pulse tacho evaluation electronics

Level of input pulses:

Encoder signals (symmetrical and asymmetrical) up to a max. 27V differential voltage can be processed by
the evaluated electronics.
Electronic adaptation of evaluation electronics to signal voltage of encoder:
Rated input voltage range 5V P142=0:
Low level:
Differential voltage <0.8V
High level:
Differential voltage >2.0V
Hysteresis:
>0.2V
Common-mode control range: 10V
Rated input voltage range 15V P142=1:
Low level:
Differential voltage <5.0V
High level:
Differential voltage >8.0V Restriction: See switching frequency
Hysteresis:
>1V
Common-mode control range: 10V
If the pulse encoder does not supply symmetrical encoder signals, then its ground must be routed as a
twisted-pair lead with every signal cable and connected to the negative terminals of track 1, track 2 and the
zero marker.
Switching frequency:

The maximum frequency of the encoder pulses is 300kHz. To ensure correct evaluation of the encoder
pulses, the minimum distance Tmin between two encoder signal edges (tracks 1 and 2) specified in the table
must be observed:
Table 1:
Differential voltage
Tmin 2)

Rated input voltage 5V

2V
>2.5V
630ns
380ns

Rated input voltage 15V

8V
10V
>14V
630ns
430ns
380ns

1) Differential voltage at terminals of evaluation electronics

2) The phase error LG (deviating from 90), which may occur as the result of encoder and cable, can be
calculated from Tmin :
LG= (90 fp * Tmin * 360)
LG = phase error
fp = pulse frequency
Tmin = minimum distance between edges
This formula applies only if the encoder pulse ratio is 1:1.
Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-65

Connections

05.2007

If the pulse encoder is incorrectly matched to the encoder cable, disturbing cable reflections will be produced
at the receive end. These reflections must be damped so that the encoder pulses can be correctly evaluated.
The limit values listed in the table below must be maintained to ensure that the resultant power loss in the
adapting element of the evaluation electronics is not exceeded.
Table 2:
fmax
Differential voltage

50kHz

100kHz

150kHz

200kHz

300kHz

Up to 27V

Up to 22V

Up to 18V

Up to 16V

Up to 14V

3) Differential voltage of encoder pulses at no load

(approximate encoder power supply voltage)
Cable, cable length, shield connection:

The encoder cable capacitance must be recharged at each encoder edge change. The RMS value of this
current is proportional to the cable length and the pulse frequency and must exceed the current specified by
the encoder manufacturer. A suitable cable as recommended by the encoder manufacturer must be used.
The maximum cable length must not be exceeded. Generally, a twisted cable pair with common pair shield is
sufficient for each track. Crosstalk between the cables is thus reduced. The shielding of all pairs protects
against noise pulses. The shield must be connected to the shield bar of the SIMOREG converter over the
largest possible surface area.

Temperature sensor inputs (motor interface 1) (see also Section 8, sheet G185)

Module C98043-A7001 (CUD1)

Function
Motor temperature
Connection of the temperature
sensor
Ground analog M

Terminal
X174
22
23

Connection values/Remarks

Sensor acc. to P490 index 1

The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor must
be shielded and connected to ground at both ends.

Analog outputs (see also Section 8, sheet G115)

Module C98043-A7001 (CUD1)

Function
Actual current
Ground analog M
Select output
Ground analog M
Select output
Ground analog M

6-66

analog 1
analog 2

Terminal
X175
12
13

14
15
16
17

Connection values/Remarks

0. . .10V corresponds to 0. . .200%

Converter rated DC current (r072.002)
Max. load 2mA, short-circuit-proof
0. . . 10V, max. 2mA
short-circuit-proof
Resolution 11bits

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Binary control inputs (see also Section 8, sheet G110)

Module C98043-A7001 (CUD1)

Function
Supply (output)

Terminal
X171
34

Ground digital M

Select input
binary 1
Power On / Shutdown
H signal: Power ON
Line contactor CLOSED +
(with H signal at terminal 38),
acceleration along rampfunction generator ramp to
operating speed.
L signal: Shutdown
Deceleration along rampfunction generator ramp to
n < nmin (P370) + , controller
disable + line contactor OPEN.
See Section 9.3 for exact
function description.
Enable operation
H signal: Controller enabled
L signal: Controller disabled
See Section 9.3.4 for exact
function description
Select input
binary 2

36
37

Connection values/Remarks

24V DC, short circuit proof

max. load 200mA (terminals 34, 44, and 210 combined),
internal supply with respect to internal ground
Overload response: Error signal F018
Warning signal A018
H signal:+13V to +33V
L signal: 33V to +3V or terminal open
8.5mA at 24V

Safety shutdown (E-STOP) (see also Section 9.8 and Section 8, sheet G117)

Module C98043-A7002 or A7003 power interface

Function
Terminal
XS
Supply for safety shutdown (output)
106

Safety shutdown switch

Safety shutdown pushbutton
Safety shutdown Reset

105
107
108

Connection values/Remarks

24V DC, max. load 50mA, short-circuit-proof

Overload response: Error signal F018
Warning signal A018
Ie = 20mA
NC contact Ie = 30mA
NO contact Ie = 10mA

NOTICE
Both 105 + 106 terminals or 106, 107 + 108 terminals can be used! Combined use of terminals
105 108 will result in a malfunction.
Terminal 105 is connected to terminal 106 in the state as delivered.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-67

Connections

05.2007

Binary control outputs (see also Section 8, sheet G112)

Module C98043-A7001 (CUD1)

Function
Select output

binary 1

binary 2

47
48
54

Ground M
Select output
Ground M

Terminal
X171

Connection values/Remarks

H signal: +20V to +26V

L signal: 0 to +2V
Short-circuit-proof 100mA
Internal snubber circuit (free-wheeling diode)
Overload response: Error signal F018
Warning signal A018

Binary control outputs (isolated relay outputs)

Module C98043-A7002 or A7003 power interface

Function
Terminal
XR
Relay for line contactor
109
110

Connection values/Remarks

Load capability:
250V AC, 4A; cos=1
250V AC, 2A; cos=0,4
30V DC, 2A
External fuse protection max. 4A, characteristic C
recommended

Serial interface 1 RS232 (9-pin SUBMIN D socket connector) (G-SST1)

X300
Use a shielded connecting cable! Ground shield at both ends!

Module C98043-A7005 PMU

Con. pin Function
X300
1
Housing earth
2
Receive cable to RS232 (V.24) standard
3
Send and receive cables to RS485, two-wire, positive differential input/output
4
Input: Reserved for later use
5
Ground
6
5 V voltage supply for OP1S
7
Send cable to RS232 (V.24) standard
8
Send and receive cables to RS485, two-wire, positive differential input/output
9
Ground
Cable length:

Up to 15m according to EIA Standard RS232C

Up to 30 m capacitive load, max. 2.5nF (cable and receiver)

A serial connection to a PLC or PC can be made using connector X300 on the PMU, allowing the converter
to be controlled and operated from a central control center or room.

6-68

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connections

Serial interface 2 RS485 (G-SST2)

Module C98043-A7001 (CUD1)

Function
Terminal
X172
TX+
56
TX57
RX+/TX+
58
RX-/TX-

Cable length:

Connection values/Remarks

RS485, 4-wire send cable, positive differential output

RS485, 4-wire send cable, negative differential output
RS485, 4-wire receive cable, positive differential input,
2-wire send/receive cable, positive differential input
RS485, 4-wire receive cable, negative differential input,
2-wire send/receive cable, negative differential input
Ground

For transmission rate =187.5kBd 600m

For transmission rate 93.75kBd 1200m

The following must be observed: DIN 19245 Part 1

The potential difference between the data reference potentials M of all interfaces must not
exceed -7V / +12V. If this cannot be guaranteed, then equipotential bonding must be
provided.
Activation of interface 1 or 2:
Set the baud rate in parameter P783 or P793.
Set the protocol in parameter P780 or P790.

Siemens AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

6-69

Connections

05.2007

Options:
Terminal expansion CUD2
Terminal type: Plug-in terminal (screw-type)
Max. connection cross-section 1.5mm2
Motor interface (see also function diagrams, Section 8, sheets G185 and G186)

Module C98043-A7006 CUD2

Function
Motor temperature
(temperature sensor input)

Module C98043-A7006 CUD2

Function
Supply for digital inputs
(output)

Terminal
X164
204
205

Connection values/Remarks

Terminal
X161
210

Connection values/Remarks

Binary input
Binary input
Binary input
Binary input

211
212
213
214

Ground for binary inputs

Ground for binary inputs
M

215
216
217

Sensor acc. to P490 index 2

The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor must
be shielded and connected to ground at both ends.

24V DC, short circuit proof with respect to internal

ground
max. load 200mA (terminals 34, 44, and 210
combined),
Overload response: Error signal F018
Warning signal A018
H signal:+13V to +33V
L signal: 33V to +3V or terminal open
Input resistance = 2.8k
can be isolated from internal ground
(open wire jumper between terminals
216 and 217)

Analog inputs (see also Section 8, sheet G114)

Module C98043-A7006 CUD2

Function
Select input
analog 2
Ground analog
Select input
analog 3
Ground analog

Terminal
X164
8
9
10
11

Connection values/Remarks

10V, 52k
Resolution: 10bit
Common mode suppression: 15V

Analog outputs (see also Section 8, sheet G116)

Module C98043-A7006 CUD2

Function
Select output
Ground analog M
Select output
Ground analog M

6-70

analog 3
analog 4

Terminal
X164
18
19
20
21

Connection values/Remarks

0. . . 10V, max. 2mA

Ready yellow LED

LED illuminated

in Ready state (o1 .. o7).

(see r000 in Section 11)

Fault red LED

LED illuminated

in Fault signal present state (o11)

(see r000 in Section 11 and Faults and Alarms (Section 10))

LED flashing

7.2.2

An alarm is active (see Faults and Alarms in Section 10).

User-friendly operator control panel (OP1S)

The optional, user-friendly, operator control panel with plaintext display (order no.: 6SE70900XX84-2FK0) is mounted in the special location provided in the converter door.
This location provides a connection to the serial basic converter interface SST1.
Parameters can be selected directly through input of the parameter number via the keyboard of the
OP1S. The following interrelationships apply:

Basic converter
parameter
Technology board
parameter

Displayed
number

Number to be keyed in
on OP1S

rxxx, Pxxx

(0)xxx

Uxxx, nxxx

2xxx

Hxxx, dxxx

1xxx

Lxxx, cxxx

3xxx

If the RAISE or LOWER key on the OP1S is used to select adjacent parameter numbers, then any
missing numbers in the range of basic converter parameters are skipped.
This automatic skipping over missing numbers does not work for technology board parameters. In
this case, the numbers of existing parameters must be entered directly.
The OP1S switches to operational display a few
seconds after initialization.
By pressing the key, you can switch from the
operating display to the Basic Menu in which you can
either select "Free access" to all parameters or a variety
of functions. Details of these functions can be found in the
function diagram "OP1S operational display" (Section 8,
Sheet Z123) and the OP1S operating instructions.
The converter parameters can be set in "Free access"
status.
You can return to the operating status display by pressing
the <R> key (several times if necessary).

7-4

Operating status
display

<R>

Basic menu

<R>

Free access

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up

Control bits from OP1S operator panel:

(see also function diagram "OP1S operational display" (Section 8, Sheet Z123) and the OP1S
operating instructions)
Data are exchanged between the OP1S and SIMOREG 6RA70 converter via the G-SST1 interface
(RS485) and USS protocol.
The OP1S operator panel transfers the following control bits in process data word 1 in the USS
message:
Key on OP1S

Function *)

Bit in PZD word1

(connector K2001)

Binector

ON key / OFF key (I / 0)

ON / OFF1

Bit 0

B2100

Reset

Acknowledge

Bit 7

B2107

Jog

Jog (inch)

Bit 8

B2108

Reverse

Enable positive direction of rotation

Bit 11

B2111

Enable negative direction of rotation

Bit 12

B2112

UP key

Increase motorized potentiometer

Bit 13

B2113

DOWN key

Decrease motorized potentiometer

Bit 14

B2114

Suggested functions. Since binectors can be freely wired up to any selector switch, the control signals from the OP1S
can be used for any type of control task in the SIMOREG 6RA70.

Connection of control signals from the OP1S for the suggested functions:
Functions can be implemented via the OP1S only if the following conditions are fulfilled:
1) Bit-by-bit input of control bits in control word 1 (P648 = 9), see also Section 8, Function
Diagrams, Sheet G180
2) OP1S in "Operational display" status
ON / OFF1:
Parameterization of switch-on/shutdown via OP1S by setting
P654 = 2100
Please also note AND operation with "Switch-on/Shutdown" from terminal 37 (see also Function
Diagrams, Sheet G130 in Section 8 and Section "Switch-on/Shutdown (ON / OFF) terminal 37" in
Section 9)
Acknowledge:
Parameterization of fault message acknowledgements via OP1S by setting
P665, P666 or P667 = 2107
Faults can always be acknowledged by pressing the key on the PMU.
Inching:
Parameterization of inching via OP1S by setting
P668 or P669 = 2108
Selection of source of inching setpoint via the corresponding index of P436 (see "Inching setpoint"
function diagram)
Direction of rotation enable:
Parameterization of direction of rotation enabling via OP1S by setting
P671 = 2111 (positive direction of rotation)
P672 = 2112 (negative direction of rotation)
Motorized potentiometer:
Parameterization of motorized potentiometer via OP1S by setting
P673 = 2113 (higher)
P674 = 2114 (lower)
P644 = 240 (main setpoint from motorized potentiometer)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-5

Start-Up

7.3

05.2007

Parameterization procedure
Parameterization is the process of changing setting values (parameters) via the operator panel,
activating converter functions or displaying measured values.
Parameters for the basic converter are called P, r, U or n parameters. Parameters for an optional
supplementary board are called H, d, L or c parameters.
The basic unit parameters are displayed first on the PMU, followed by the technology board
parameters (if such a board is installed). It is important not to confuse the parameters of the
optional S00 technology software of the basic unit with the parameters of an optional
supplementary board (T100, T300 or T400).
Depending on how parameter P052 is set, only some parameter numbers (see Section 11,
Parameter List) are displayed.

7.3.1

Parameter types
Display parameters are used to display current quantities such as the main setpoint, armature
voltage, setpoint/actual value difference of speed controller, etc. The values of display parameters
are read-only values and cannot be changed.
Setting parameters are used to both display and change quantities such as the rated motor
current, thermal motor time constant, speed controller P gain, etc.
Indexed parameters are used to both display and change several parameter values which are all
assigned to the same parameter number.

7.3.2

Parameterization on simple operator control panel

After the electronics supply voltage has been switched on, the PMU is either in the operational
display state and indicating the current operating status of the SIMOREG 6RA70 (e.g. o7.0), or in
the fault/alarm display state and indicating a fault or alarm (e.g. F021).
Operational states are described under parameter r000 in Section 11 and the fault and alarm
messages in Section 10.
1. To reach the parameter number level from the operational display state (e.g. o7.0), press the P
key and then the <Up> or <Down> key to select individual parameter numbers.
2. To reach the parameter index level (for indexed parameters) from the parameter number level,
press P and then the <Up> or <Down> key to select individual indices.
If you press P when a non-indexed parameter is displayed, you go directly to the parameter
value level.
3. To reach the parameter value level from the parameter index level (for indexed parameters),
press P.
4. On the parameter value level, you can change the setting of a parameter value by pressing the
<Up> or <Down> key.

NOTE
Parameters can be altered only if the following conditions are fulfilled:
- The appropriate access authorization is set in key parameter P051, e.g. 40 (see Section 11,
Parameter List).

7-6

The converter is the correct operational state. Parameters with characteristic offline cannot
be changed when the converter is in the Run (online) state. To change parameters with this
characteristic, switch the converter to the o1.0 status (Ready).

The values of display parameters can never be changed (read only).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
5. Manual shifting
If the 5 existing digits on the 7-segment display are not sufficient to display a parameter value, the
display first shows just 5 digits (see Fig. 7.1). To indicate that digits are concealed to the right or
left of this window, the right-hand or left-hand digit flashes. By pressing the +<Down> or
+<Up> key, you can shift the window over the remaining digits of the parameter value.
As an orientation guide, the position of the right-hand digit within the overall parameter value is
displayed briefly during manual shifting.
Example: Parameter value 208.173
"208.17" is displayed when the parameter is selected. When the
P and LOWER keys are pressed, "1" appears briefly followed by
08.173, i.e. the right-hand digit 3 is the 1st position in the
parameter value.
When the P and RAISE keys are pressed, "2" appears briefly
followed by 208.17, i.e. the right-hand digit 7 is the 2nd position
in the parameter value.
Fig. 7.1

P
+

Shifting the PMU display for parameter values with more than 5 digits
6

6. Press the P key to return to the parameter number level from the parameter value level.
Tables 7.1 and 7.2 below show an overview of displays which may appear on the PMU:

Display
parameters
Setting
parameters
Table7.1

Parameter number

Index

Parameter value

e. g.

Basic unit

Technology

Basic unit

Technology

Display of visualization and setting parameters on the PMU

Actual value

Parameter value
not (currently)
possible

Alarm

Fault

Display
Table 7.2

Status displays on the PMU

NOTE
Parameters are described in the Parameter List in Section 11 and faults and alarms in Section
10.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-7

Start-Up

7.4

05.2007

Reset to default value and adjust offset

Restoring parameters values to defaults (works settings) and performing an internal converter
offset adjustment.
The "Restore factory setting" function must be executed after every software update if the
converter software has been updated from version 1.0 or 1.1.
With converter SW version 1.2 and later, it is no longer necessary to execute "Restore factory
settings" after a software update because the parameter settings prior to the update remain valid.
The Restore to default function can be executed if a defined basic setting is to be established,
e.g. in order to carry out a complete new start-up operation.

NOTICE
When the Restore to default function is activated, all parameters set for a specific installation
are overwritten (deleted). We therefore recommend that all old settings be read out beforehand
with Drive Monitor and stored on a PC or programmer.
Restore to default must be followed by a completely new start-up operation or else the
converter will not be ready with respect to safety.
Execution of function:
1. Set parameter P051 = 21
2. Transfer parameter values to the non-volatile memory.
The parameter values are stored in non-volatile storage (EEPROM) so that they will still be
available when the converter is switched off. This operation takes at least 5 s (but may also last
several minutes). The number of the parameter currently being processed is displayed on the
PMU during the process. The electronics power supply must remain connected while this
operation is in progress.
3. Offset adjustments
Parameter P825.ii is set (takes approx. 10 s).
The offset adjustment can also be activated as an individual function by means of parameter
P051 = 22.

7-8

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

7.5

Start-Up

Start-up procedure
WARNING
The converter is at a hazardous voltage level even when the line contactor is open. The gating
board (board mounted directly to lower part of housing) has many circuits at hazardous voltage
levels.
Non-observance of the safety instructions given in this manual can result in death, severe
personal injury or substantial property damage.

Access authorization
P051 . . . Key parameter
0 Parameter cannot be changed
40 Parameter can be changed
P052 . . . Selection of parameters to be displayed
0 Only parameters that are not set to default are visible
3 All parameters are visible
P927 . . . Enter an odd number if parameters are to be entered via CB (PROFIBUS)

Adjustment of converter rated currents

NOTICE
On North American manufactured Base Drive assemblies (Type 6RA70xx-2xxxx) the US rating
must be set in Parameter P067.
The rated converter armature DC current must be adapted by the setting in parameter P076.001
(in %) or parameter P067, if:
Max. armature current
< 0,5
Rated armature DC current
The rated converter field DC current must be adjusted by the setting in parameter P076.002 (in %)
if:
Max. field current
< 0,5
Rated converter field DC current
3

Adjustment to actual converter supply voltage

P078.001 . . . Rated input voltage converter armature (in volts)
P078.002 . . . Rated input voltage converter field (in volts)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-9

Start-Up

05.2007

Input of motor data

In the parameters below, the motor data must be entered as specified on the motor rating plate.
P100 . . . Rated armature current (in amps)
P101 . . . Rated armature voltage (in volts)
P102 . . . Rated field current (in amps)
P104 . . . Speed n1 (in rpm)
P105 . . . Armature current I1 (in amperes)
P106 . . . Speed n2 (in rpm)
P107 . . . Armature current I2 (in amperes)
P108 . . . Maximum operating speed n3 (in rpm)
P109 . . . 1 = speed-dependent current limitation active
P114 . . . Thermal time constant of motor (in minutes)
(if necessary: activate fault signal F037 with P820!)

Actual speed sensing data

5.1

5.2

Operation with analog tacho

P083 = 1:

The actual speed is supplied from the Main actual value channel (K0013)
(terminals XT.103, XT.104)

P741

Tacho voltage at maximum speed ( 270,00V to +270,00V)

Operation with pulse encoder

P083 = 2:
P140

The actual speed is supplied by the pulse encoder (K0040)

Selecting a pulse encoder type (pulse encoder types see below)

0 No encoder/"Speed sensing with pulse encoder" function not selected
1 Pulse encoder type 1
2 Pulse encoder type 1a
3 Pulse encoder type 2
4 Pulse encoder type 3
1. Pulse encoder type 1
Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90 (with/without zero marker)
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

7-10

Heidenhain ROD
Teldix Rotaswitch Serie 26

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
2. Pulse encoder type 1a
Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90 (with/without zero marker).
The zero marker is converted internally to a signal in the same way as on encoder
type 1.
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

360

225 60

Hbner OG9DN, POG9DN

Teldix Rotaswitch Serie 25
Honeywell HDM Series

internal zero marker

3. Pulse encoder type 2

Encoder with one pulse track per direction of rotation (with/without zero marker).
CW rotation

CCW rotation

Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

4. Pulse encoder type 3

Encoder with one pulse track and one output for direction of rotation (with/without
zero marker).
CW rotation
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

CCW rotation

Pulse output
Rot. direction

Zero marker

P141

Number of pulses of pulse encoder (in pulses/rev)

P142

Matching to pulse encoder signal voltage

0 Pulse encoder outputs 5 V signals
1 Pulse encoder outputs 15V signals
Matching of internal operating points to signal voltage of incoming pulse encoder
signals.

NOTICE
Resetting parameter P142 to the alternative setting does not switch over the supply
voltage for the pulse encoder (terminals X173.26 and 27).
Terminal X173.26 always supplies +15V. An external voltage supply must be
provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply.
P143

Setting the maximum speed for pulse encoder operation (in pulses/rev)
The speed set in this parameter corresponds to an actual speed (K0040) of 100%.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-11

Start-Up

5.3

5.4

6.2

P083 = 3:

The actual speed is supplied from the Actual EMF channel (K0287),
but weighted with P115.

P115

EMF at maximum speed

(1.00 to 140.00% of rated converter supply voltage (r078.001)).

Freely wired actual value

P083 = 4:

The actual value input is defined with P609.

P609

Number of connector which is connected to controller actual value input.

Field control
P082 = 0:

Internal field is not used

(e.g. with permanent-field motors)

P082 = 1:

The field is switched together with the line contactor

(field pulses are enabled/disabled when line contactor closes/opens)

P082 = 2:

Automatic connection of standstill field set via P257 after a delay parameterized via
P258, after operating status o7 or higher has been reached

P082 = 3:

Field current permanently connected

Field weakening
P081 = 0:

No field weakening as a function of speed or EMF

P081 = 1:

Field weakening operation as a function of internal EMF control so that, in the field
weakening range, i.e. at speeds above rated motor speed (= threshold speed),
the motor EMF is maintained constantly at setpoint
EMFset (K289) = P101 P100 * P110.

Selection of basic technological functions

7.1

7.2

7-12

Operation without tacho (EMF control)

Field data
6.1

05.2007

Current limits
P171

Motor current limit in torque direction I (in% of P100)

P172

Motor current limit in torque direction II (in% of P100)

Torque limits
P180

Torque limit 1 in torque direction I

(in % of rated motor torque)

P181

Torque limit 1 in torque direction II

(in % of rated motor torque)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

7.3

Start-Up
Ramp-function generator
P303
P304
P305
P306

Acceleration time 1 (in seconds)

Deceleration time 1 (in seconds)
Initial rounding 1 (in seconds)
Final rounding 1 (in seconds)

Execution of optimization runs

8.1

The drive must be in operating state o7.0 or o7.1 (enter SHUTDOWN!).

8.2

Select one of the following optimization runs in key parameter P051:

P051 = 25
P051 = 26

P051 = 27
P051 = 28
P051 = 29
8.3

Optimization run for precontrol and current controller for armature and field
Speed controller optimization run
can be preceded by selection of the degree of dynamic response of the speed
control loop with P236, where lower values produce a softer controller setting.
Optimization run for field weakening
Optimization run for compensation of friction moment and moment of inertia
Speed controller optimization run for drives with oscillating mechanical system.

The SIMOREG converter switches to operating state o7.4 for several seconds and then to o7.0
or o7.1 and waits for the input of SWITCH-ON and OPERATING ENABLE..
Enter the commands SWITCH-ON and OPERATING ENABLE.
The flashing of the decimal point in the operational status display on the PMU (simple operator
control panel) indicates that an optimization run will be performed after the switch-on command.
If the switch-on command is not given within 30 s, this waiting status is terminated and fault
message F052 displayed.

8.4

As soon as the converter reaches operating status <o1.0 (RUN), the optimization run is
executed.
An activity display appears on the PMU, consisting of two 2-digit numbers, separated by a bar
that moves up and down. These two numbers indicate (for SIEMENS personnel) the current
status of the optimization run.
P051 = 25

Optimization run for precontrol and current controller for armature and field
(process lasts approximately 40s)
The current controller optimization run may be executed without a mechanical
load coupled to the motor; it may be necessary to lock the rotor.
The following parameters are set automatically: P110, P111, P112, P155, P156,
P255, P256, P826.

CAUTION
Permanent-field motors (and motors with an extremely high residual flux) must be
mechanically locked during this optimization run.

CAUTION
In order to avoid rotation in the case of separately excited motors with a very high
field circuit time constant, the motor field current must be zero before starting this
optimization run. The value 1 (11, 21) must therefore be set at P082 instead of 3
(13, 23) for the duration of this optimization run. The standstill field P257 is to be
set to 0.0 percent if P082 = 2 (12, 22).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-13

Start-Up

05.2007

WARNING
The set current limits are not effective during the current controller
optimization run. 75% of the rated motor armature current flows for
approximately 0.7s. Furthermore, individual current spikes of
approximately 120% of the motor rated armature current are
generated.
P051 = 26

Speed controller optimization run (process lasts approximately 6s)

The degree of dynamic response of the speed control loop can be selected with
P236, where lower values produce a softer control loop. P236 must be set before
the speed controller is optimized, and affects the settings of P225, P226, and
P228.
For the purpose of speed controller optimization, the ultimate mechanical load
should be connected to the motor where possible, since the parameter settings
are determined by the measured moment of inertia.
The following parameters are set automatically: P225, P226 and P228.
Note:
The speed controller optimization run takes only the filtering of the actual speed
controller value parameterized in P200 into account and, if P083=1, filtering of
the main actual value parameterized in P745.
When P200 < 20ms, P225 (gain) is limited to a value of 30.00.
The speed controller optimization run sets P228 (speed setpoint filter) to the
same value as P226 (speed controller integration time) (for the purpose of
achieving an optimum control response to abrupt setpoint changes).

NOTICE
In the case of separately excited motors with a very high field circuit time
constant, a motor field current approximately equal to the rated field current of the
motor according to P102 should be flowing before this optimization run starts.
The value 3 (13, 23) must therefore be set at P082 instead of 1 (11, 21), 2 (12,
22) or 4 (14, 24) for the duration of this optimization run.

WARNING
During the speed controller optimization run, the motor is accelerated
at a maximum of 45% of its rated armature current. The motor may
reach speeds of up to approximately 20% of maximum speed.
If field weakening is selected (P081 = 1), if closed-loop torque control (P170=1) or torque limiting
(P169=1) is selected or if a variable field current setpoint is applied:
P051 = 27

Optimization run for field weakening (process lasts approx. 1min)

This optimization run may also be started without a mechanical load.
The following parameters are set automatically: P117 to P139, P275 and P276.
Note:
In order to determine the magnetization characteristic, the field current setpoint is
reduced during the optimization run from 100% of the motor rated field current as
set in P102 down to a minimum of 8%. The field current setpoint is limited to a
minimum according to P103 by parameterizing P103 to values < 50% of P102 for
the duration of the run. This might be necessary in the case of uncompensated
motors with a very high armature reaction.
The magnetizing characteristic is approximated linearly to 0, starting from the
measuring point, at a minimum field current setpoint.
To execute this optimization run, the minimum field current (P103) must be
parameterized to less than 50% of the rated motor field current (P102).

7-14

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up

WARNING
During this optimization run, the drive accelerates to approximately
80% of rated motor speed (the armature voltage corresponds to
maximum 80% of the rated motor armature voltage (P101)).

P051 = 28

Optimization run for compensation of friction moment

and moment of inertia (if desired) (process lasts approx. 40s)
The following parameters are set automatically: P520 to P530, P540

WARNING
The drive accelerates up to maximum speed during this optimization
run.

On completion of this run, the friction and inertia moment compensation function
must be activated manually by setting P223=1.
When the operating mode is switched from current control to torque control with
P170, the optimization run for friction and inertia moment compensation must be
repeated.
Note:
The speed controller may not be parameterized as a pure P controller or as a
controller with droop when this optimization run is executed.
P051 = 29

Speed controller optimization run on drives with oscillating mechanical

components (takes up to 10 minutes)
The following parameters are set automatically: P225, P226 and P228.
The frequency response of the controlled system for frequencies of 1 to 100 Hz are
recorded during this optimization run.
The drive is first accelerated up to a base speed (P565, FS=20%). A sinusoidal
speed setpoint with low amplitude (P566, FS=1%) is then injected. The frequency
of this supplementary setpoint is changed in steps of 1 Hz from 1 Hz to 100 Hz. An
average is calculated from a programmable number of current peaks (P567,
WE=300) for each frequency.
[The value set in P567 is significant in determining the time taken to perform the
run. With a setting of 300, the run can take about 3 to 4 minutes.]
The optimum speed controller setting for the controlled system is calculated on the
basis of the frequency response measured for the system.

WARNING
This optimization run must not be carried out if the motor is coupled to
a mechanical load which is capable of moving the torque-free motor
(e.g. a vertical load).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-15

Start-Up

05.2007

8.5

At the end of the optimization run, P051 is displayed on the operator panel and the drive
switches to operating state o7.2.

NOTICE
In the case of drives with a limited travel path, the optimization run for field weakening (P051=27)
may not be interrupted by the SHUTDOWN command until the 1st field weakening measuring
point has been plotted. Likewise, the optimization run for the friction moment and moment of
inertia compensation function (P051=28) may not be interrupted by SHUTDOWN until the
measuring point at 10% of maximum speed has been determined. Premature interruption in both
cases will lead to activation of fault message F052. When either of these optimization runs is
restarted (P051=27 or P051=28), it will be continued at a more advanced position. In this way,
the respective run can be completed in several stages, even if the travel path is limited.
Note:
The respective optimization run is executed completely after a restart if a) a fault message is
activated during the optimization run, b) if the electronics supply is disconnected before the
relevant optimization run is restarted, c) if another function dataset than the one before is
selected or d) if another optimization run is started in-between.
The parameters of the function data set selected in each case are optimized.
While optimization runs are being executed, the function data set selection must not be changed
or else a fault message will be activated.

NOTE
Optimization runs should be executed in the order listed above (precontrol and current controller,
speed controller, field weakening control, friction moment and moment of inertial compensation).
The determined parameters are dependent on the motor temperature. Values set automatically
when the motor is cold can be used as effective defaults.
For highly dynamic drives, the optimization run P051=25 should be repeated after the drive has
been operated under load (i.e. when motor is warm).

Checking and possible fine adjustment of maximum speed

After the optimization runs have been executed, the maximum speed must be checked and it's setting
corrected if necessary.
If it is necessary to change the maximum speed setting by more than about 10%, the control response
of the speed control loop must be checked. It may be necessary to repeat the speed controller
optimization run or re-optimize the controller manually.
The optimization runs for field weakening and friction motor and moment of inertial compensation
must be repeated every time the maximum speed setting is altered.

Checking the drive settings

The optimization runs do not provide optimum results for every application. The controller settings
must therefore be checked by suitable means (oscilloscope, DriveMonitor, Trace etc.). In some cases,
manual re-optimization will be necessary.

7-16

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up

Manual (post-)optimization (if necessary)

Precontrol and current controller for armature and field
Instructions on how to manually set parameters for the precontrol function can be found in Section 7.2
Manual optimization.
Speed controller
P200
P225
P226
P227
P228

Actual speed filtering

Speed controller P gain
Speed controller integration time
Speed controller droop
Speed setpoint filtering

Note:
P228 is set to the same value as P226 (speed controller integration time) during the speed controller
optimization run (P051=26) (for the purpose of achieving an optimum control response to abrupt
setpoint changes). When the ramp-function generator is used, it may be better to parameterize a
lower speed setpoint filtering value (P228).
Setting of empirical values or optimization using setpoint control boxes according to generally
applicable optimization guidelines.
EMF controller
P275
P276

EMF controller P gain

EMF controller integration time

Setting of empirical values or optimization using setpoint control boxes according to generally
applicable optimization guidelines.
12

Setting of supplementary functions

e.g. activating monitoring functions

NOTE
In the factory setting, the following fault signals are deactivated with parameters P820.01 to
P820.06:
F007 (overvoltage)
F018 (short circuit at the binary outputs)
F031 (controller monitoring speed controller)
F035 (drive blocked)
F036 (no armature current can flow)
F037 (i2t monitoring of motor)
Activate the monitoring functions required in your applications by replacing the fault number in
question with the value 0.
e.g. activating the free function blocks

NOTE
Freely assignable function blocks are enabled in parameter U977.
For enabling instructions, please refer to Section 11, Parameter List, description of parameters
U977 and n978.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-17

Start-Up

05.2007

Documentation of setting values

Read out parameters with DriveMonitor (see Section 15 DriveMonitor)
or
Document parameters
If P052=0, only parameters that are not set to the default setting are displayed on the operator
control panel.

7.6

Manual optimization (if required)

7.6.1

Manual setting of armature resistance RA (P110) and armature inductance

LA (P111)
Setting of armature circuit parameters according to motor list
Disadvantage: The data is very inaccurate and/or the actual values deviate significantly.
The feeder resistances are not taken into account in the armature circuit resistance.
Additional smoothing reactors and feeder resistances are not taken into account in the armature
circuit inductance.
Rough estimation of armature circuit parameters from motor and supply data
Armature circuit resistance P110
RA [] =

Rated motor armature voltage [V] (P101)

10 Rated motor armature current [A] (P100)

The basis for this formula is that 10% of the rated armature voltage drops across armature
circuit resistor RA at rated armature current.
Armature circuit inductance P111
LA [mH] =

1.4 Rated converter supply voltage of armature power section [V] (P071)
Rated motor armature current [A] (P100)

The basis for this formula is the empirical value: The transition from discontinuous to continuous
current is at approx. 30% of the rated motor armature current.
Calculation of armature circuit parameters based on current/voltage measurement
Select current-controlled operation: P084=2
Set parameter P153=0 (precontrol deactivated)
The field must be switched off by setting P082=0 and, in the case of excessively high
residual flux, the rotor of the DC motor locked so that it cannot rotate.
Set the overspeed protection threshold P354=5%
Enter a main setpoint of 0
If ENABLE OPERATION is applied and the SWITCH ON command entered, an armature
current of approximately 0% now flows.

7-18

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Calculation of armature circuit resistance P110 from measured armature current and
armature voltage values
Increase the main setpoint (displayed at r001) slowly until the actual armature current
value (r019 in % of rated converter armature current) reaches approximately 70% of the
rated motor armature current.
Read out r019 (actual armature current value) and convert to amps (using P100)
Read out r038 (actual armature voltage in volts)
Calculate the armature circuit resistance:
RA [W] =

r038
r019 (converted to amps)

Set the armature circuit resistance in parameter P110

Calculation of armature circuit inductance P111 from measured armature current at
transition from discontinuous to continuous current
Make an oscilloscope trace of the armature current (e.g. at terminal 12)
Increase the main setpoint (displayed at r001) slowly starting from 0 until the armature
current reaches the transition from discontinuous to continuous current.
Measure armature current at transition (at standstill EMF=0) ILG, EMF=0 or read out the
value of r019 and convert to amps using P100.
Measure the phase-to-phase voltage of the armature power section Usupply or read out
the value of r015.
Calculate the armature circuit inductance using the following formula:
LA [mH] =

0.4 Usupply [V]

ILG, EMF = [A]

Set the armature circuit inductance in parameter P111.

7.6.2

Manual setting of field circuit resistance RF (P112)

Rough estimation of field circuit resistance RF (P112) from motor rated field data
RF =

Rated motor field voltage

Rated motor field current (P102)

Adapt the field circuit resistance RF (P112) using a field current setpoint/actual value
comparison
Set parameter P112=0 to produce a 180 field precontrol output, and thus an actual field
current value = 0
Set parameter P082=3 to ensure that the field remains permanently energized, even when
the line contactor has dropped out
Set parameters P254=0 and P264=0, i.e. only field precontrol active and field current
controller disabled
Set parameter P102 to the rated field current
Increase parameter P112 until the actual field current (r035 converted to amps be means of
r073.002) is equal to the required setpoint (P102).
Reset parameter P082 to the plant operating value.
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-19

Start-Up

7.7

05.2007

Starting up optional supplementary boards

For board mounting instructions, see Section 5.3.2 , Mounting Optional Supplementary Boards.
This section also contains details on the number of supplementary boards that can be installed and
in which slots they may be inserted.
The basic converter automatically detects all installed supplementary boards during power-up.
All communications-related settings must be made by means of parameters. The function
diagrams in Section 8 show a general overview of the parameters provided for this purpose.
If two boards of the same type (e.g. two EB1s) are installed in a converter, the slots in which they
are installed determine the parameter settings. The board in the slot with the lower slot letter is the
1st board (e.g. the 1st EB1) of this particular type and the board with the higher letter the 2nd board
(e.g. 2nd EB1).
The 1st board is parameterized via index 1 and the 2nd board via index 2 of the corresponding
parameter (e.g. to define the signal type of the analog inputs of boards of type EB1, parameter
U755.001 is used for the 1st EB1 and parameter U755.002 for the 2nd EB1).

7.7.1

Procedure for starting up technology boards (T100, T300, T400):

NOTE
Freely configurable technology boards T300 and T400 are guaranteed to operate correctly (board
run up and data exchange with the SIMOREG 6RA70). The user, however, must bear
responsibility for ensuring that the system is properly configured.

Disconnect the power supply and insert the board in location 2.

Power up the system again to gain access to the parameters of the technology board (d and
H parameters, as well as c and L parameters if programmed).
The process data are interconnected at the basic converter end by means of the appropriate
connectors and binectors (see Section 8, function diagram Z110)
For meaning of bits of control and status words, please see Section 8, Sheets G180 to
G183.
If a communication board is used in addition to a technology board, then data are exchanged
with the basic converter via the technology board. The basic converter cannot directly
access the data of the communication board. The connections of the transfer data are then
determined by the configuration or parameter settings of the technology board.
Module T100 comprising software submodule MS100 already contains several technology
functions and arithmetic, control, and logic modules, which are freely configurable using
parameters. This software can be expanded with customized components, if required.
As module T300 has already been replaced by T400, T300 should only be used in special
circumstances.
Only one communication module (CBC, CBD, CBP2, SCB1) is permitted in slot G in addition
to the technology modules T100 and T300 in slot 2.
Module T400 is already available with standard configurations for frequent applications.
They permit the use of several functions (e.g. inputs/outputs, serial interfaces, link to a
communications module) without any additional configuration.

7-20

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
As from configuration software D7-SYS V4.0 R07/98, it is possible to configure not only one,
but two communications modules (CBC, CBD, CBP2) for module T400. These modules are
then located on an ADB in slots G (1. CB) and F (2. CB).
In this case, the 2nd CB is not configured with parameters of the basic device, but the CB
parameters must be configured as modifiable parameters of the T400.
Possible communications paths are shown in the figure below. For details of how to
configure a T400, please consult the relevant documentation (e.g. SIMADYN D
Configuring Instructions T400, 6DD1903-0EA0 etc.).
Dual-port RAM

Dual-port RAM

Configuration channel
to COMBOARD

FB-@DRIVE

Setpoint channel

Transmitter
FB-CTV

Receiver
FB-CRV

Setpoint channel

Actual value channel

Receiver
FB-CRV

Transmitter
FB-CTV

Actual value channel

Warning channel
from COMBOARD

FB-TFAW
receives
and
transmits
alarm and
warning
messages

Transmitter
FB-CTV

Warning channel
from TECHBOARD

Actual
values

Parameter channel from

operator panel on CUD1

Receiver
FB-CRV

FB@DRIVE (BBF=0)
processes parameters
for number ranges
1000 to 1999 and
3000 to 3999

Parameter channel
TECHBOARD

Fault channel
from TECHBOARD

Parameter channel
BASEBOARD

FB-PTRANS transfers parameters

Setpoints

Parameter channel
BASEBOARD

Parameter
channel

Configuration of the 1st COMBOARD using

CB parameters U710 to U72

Parameter channel
TECHBOARD

lokal USS slave

interface
Warning channel
from COMBOARD

CUD1 - module of the

SIMOREG DC Masters
6RA70

1st COMBOARD
Dual-port RAM
FB-CBCONF

Configuration channel
to COMBOARD

Receiver
FB-CRV

Setpoint channel

Transmitter
FB-CTV

Actual value channel

Parameter channel
BASEBOARD

Receiver
FB-CRV

Transmitter
FB-CTV

Setpoints

Actual
values

Parameter
channel

FB@DRIVE (BBF=0)
processes parameters
for number ranges
1000 to 1999 and
3000 to 3999

Parameter channel
TECHBOARD

lokal USS slave

interface
Warning channel
from COMBOARD

BASEBOARD

TECHBOARD

2nd COMBOARD

The SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70 does not permit direct evaluation of the signals of a
pulse generator connected to the terminals of the CUD1 by the T400.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-21

Start-Up

7.7.2

05.2007

Sequence of operations for starting up PROFIBUS boards (CBP2):

Switch off the power supply and insert the board or adapter with board. For board mounting
instructions, see Section 5.3.2 , Mounting Optional Supplementary Boards.

The following are important communication parameters. Index 1 of each parameter is set for
the 1st communication board (1st CB) and index 2 for the 2nd communication board (2nd CB):
-

U712 PPO type, definition of the number of words in the parameter and process data
section of the telegram (required only if the PPO type cannot be set via PROFIBUSDP master)

- U722 Telegram failure time for process data (0 = deactivated)

The DP master configuring data determine whether the slave (CBP2) must monitor
telegram traffic with the master. If this monitoring function is activated, the DP
master passes a time value (watchdog time) to the slave when the link is set up. If
no data are exchanged within this period, the slave terminates the process data
exchange with the SIMOREG converter. The latter can monitor the process data as
a function of U722 and activate fault message F082.
-

P918 Bus address

P927 Parameterization enable (need only be set if parameters are to be assigned via
PROFIBUS)
process data of the 1st or 2nd communication board are connected by means of the
appropriate connectors and binectors (see Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111)
For meaning of bits of control and status words, please see Section 8, Sheets G180 to
G183.

-The

Turn the electronics supply voltage off and on again or set U710.001 or U710.002 to "0" to
transfer the values of parameters U712, U722 and P918 to the supplementary board.

WARNING
This initialization process will interrupt the communication of any supplementary
board that has already been started up.

WARNING
Note the setting of parameter U722. In the factory setting of U722 (monitoring
deactivated) the drive continues to run with the last received setpoints in case
of a PROFIBUS failure and can only be stopped by an OFF signal from the
terminal. For details, see Section 11, Parameter list.
The CBP2 (Communication Board PROFIBUS) serves to link drives and higher-level automation
systems via the PROFIBUS-DP. For the purpose of PROFIBUS, it is necessary to distinguish
between master and slave converters.
Masters control the data traffic via the bus and are also referred to as active nodes. There
are two classes of master:
DP masters of class 1 (DPM1) are central stations (e.g. SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7 or
SIMADYN D) which exchange data with slaves in predefined message cycles.
DPM1s support both a cyclic channel (transmission of process data and parameter data)
and an acyclic channel (transmission of parameter data and diagnostic data).
DP masters of class 2 (DPM2) are programming, configuring or operator
control/visualization devices (e.g. DriveMonitor) which are used in operation to configure,

7-22

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
start up or monitor the installation.
DPM2s support only an acyclic channel for transferring parameter data.
The contents of the data frames transferred via these channels are identical to the structure
of the parameter section (PKW) as defined by the USS specification.
The following diagram shows the services and channels supported by a CBP2:
DriveMonitor
(Class 2 master)

CPU
(Class 1 master)
MSCY_C1
Cyclic channel

PPO
PKW
Job/
response

PZD
Setpoint/
actual values

MSAC_C1
Acyclic channel

DS 0

DS 100

Diagnosis

PKW
Job/
response

Parameter channel

MSAC_C2
Acyclic channel

PKW
Job/
response

PZD
Setpoint/
actual values

Process data channel

Slaves (e.g. CBP2) may only respond to received messages and are referred to as passive
nodes.
PROFIBUS (Process Field Bus) combines high baud rates (to RS485 standard) with simple, lowcost installation. The PROFIBUS baud rate can be selected within a range of 9.6 kbaud to 12
Mbaud and is set for all devices connected to the bus when the bus system is started up.
The bus is accessed according to the token-passing method, i.e. permission to transmit for a
defined time window is granted to the active stations (masters) in a "logical ring". The master can
communicate with other masters, or with slaves in a subordinate master-slave process, within this
time window.
PROFIBUS-DP (Distributed Peripherals) predominantly utilizes the master-slave method and data
is exchanged cyclically with the drives in most cases.
The user data structure for the cyclic channel MSCY_C1 (see picture above) is referred to as a
Parameter Process(data) Object (PPO) in the PROFIBUS profile for variable-speed drives. This
channel is also frequently referred to as the STANDARD channel.
The user data structure is divided into two different sections which can be transferred in each
telegram:
PZD section
The process data (PZD) section contains control words, setpoints, status words and actual
values.
PKW section
The parameter section (PKW - Parameter ID Value) is used to read and write parameter
values.
When the bus system is started up, the type of PPO used by the PROFIBUS master to address the
drive is selected. The type of PPO selected depends on what functions the drive has to perform in
the automation network.
Process data are always transferred and processed as priority data in the drive.
Process data are "wired up" by means of connectors of the basic unit (drive) or via technology
board parameters, if these are configured.
Parameter data allow all parameters of the drive to be accessed, allowing parameter values,
diagnostic quantities, fault messages, etc. to be called by a higher-level system without impairing
the performance of the PZD transmission.
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-23

Start-Up

05.2007
A total of five PPO types are defined:
PKW section
PKE

PZD section

IND

2
word

PKW: Parameter ID value

IND:

Index

PZD:

Process data

PWE: Parameter value

HSW: Main setpoint

PKE:

Parameter identifier

STW:

ISW:

2
word

PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9

STW HSW
1
HIW
ZSW
1
1
word

1
word

PWE

3
word

4
word

3
word

4
word

5
word

6
word

7
word

8
word

ZSW

Status word

9
word

PZD
10

10
word

PPO1
PPO2
PPO3
PPO4
PPO5

Control word

Main actual value

The acyclic channel MSCY_C2 (see diagram above) is used exclusively for the start-up and
servicing of DriveMonitor.
7.7.2.1

Mechanisms for processing parameters via the PROFIBUS:

The PKW mechanism (with PPO types 1, 2 and 5 and for the two acyclic channels MSAC_C1 and
MSAC_C2) can be used to read and write parameters. A parameter request job is sent to the drive
for this purpose. When the job has been executed, the drive sends back a response. Until it
receives this response, the master must not issue any new requests, i.e. any job with different
contents, but must repeat the old job.
The parameter section in the telegram always contains at least 4 words:
Parameter identifier
PKE

Index
IND

Parameter value 1
PWE1 (H word)

Paramter value 2
PWE2 (L word)

Details about the telegram structure can be found in Section 7.7.9, "Structure of request/response
telegrams, and in the PROFIBUS profile "PROFIBUS Profile, Drive technology" of the user's
organization PROFIBUS International (http://www.profibus.com).
The parameter identifier PKE contains the number of the relevant parameter and an identifier
which determines the action to be taken (e.g. "read value").
The index IND contains the number of the relevant index value (equals 0 in the case of
nonindexed parameters). The IND structure differs depending on the communication mode:
-

Definition in the PPOs (structure of IND with cyclical communication via PPOs)

Definition for acyclical channels MSAC_C1 and MSAC_C2 (structure of IND with acyclical
communication)

The array subindex (referred to simply as "subindex" in the PROFIBUS profile) is an 8-bit value
which is transferred in the high-order byte (bits 8 to 15) of the index (IND) when data are
transferred cyclically via PPOs. The low-order byte (bits 0 to 7) is not defined in the DVA profile.
The low-order byte of the index word is used in the PPO of CBP2 to select the correct number
range (bit7 = Page Select bit) in the case of parameter numbers of > 1999.
In the case of acyclical data traffic (MSAC_C1, MSAC_C2) the number of the index is transferred
in the low-order byte (bits 0 to 7). Bit 15 in the high-order byte is used as the Page Select bit. This
assignment complies with the USS specification.
Index value 255 (request applies to all index values) is meaningful only for acyclical transmission
via MSAC_C1. The maximum data block length is 206 bytes with this transmission mode.

7-24

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
The parameter value PWE is always transferred as double word (32-bit value) PWE1 and PWE2.
The high-order word is entered as PWE1 and the low-order word as PWE2. In the case of 16-bit
values, PWE1 must be set to 0 by the master.
Example (acyclical data traffic):
Read parameter P101.004 (for details, see Section 7.7.9, "Structure of request/response
telegrams):
Request identifier PKE = 0x6065 (request parameter value (array) P101),
Index IND = 0004h = 4d
Parameter value PWE1 = PWE2 = 0
SIMOREG response:
Response identifier PKE = 0x4065,
Index IND = 0004h = 4d
Value of P101.004 = 0190h = 400d (PWE1 = 0, because it is not a double word parameter)
Rules for job/response processing:
A job or a response can only ever refer to one parameter.
The master must send the job repeatedly until it receives an appropriate response from the
slave. The master recognizes the response to the job it has sent by analyzing the response
identifier, the parameter number, the parameter index and the parameter value.
The complete job must be sent in one telegram. The same applies to the response.
The actual values in repeats of response telegrams are always up-to-date values.
If no information needs to be fetched via the PKW interface (but only PZD) in cyclic
operation, then a "No job" job must be issued.
PROFIBUS devices have a variety of difference performance features. In order to ensure that all
master systems can correctly address each supplementary board, the characteristic features of
each board are stored in a separate device master file (GSD).
You need file <siem8045.gsd> for CBP2.
The appropriate file can be chosen in the selection menu for the SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES
files in later versions of the configuring tool.
If a device master file is not available in the menu, it can be collected from an Internet site. The
Internet address is http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/en/4647098.
Product Support/PROFIBUS GSD files/Drives/ . Have all entries displayed using the search
function and click on the search results.
SIMOVERT/SIMOREG/SIMADYN CBP
File: siem8045.gsd
The communication boards can only be operated on a non-Siemens master as a DP standard
slave, the corresponding GSD file containing all necessary information for this mode.
Detailed information about communication via PROFIBUS can be found in Section 8.2 of the
compendium for SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Motion Control (order no. 6SE7080-0QX50). The
description in this document is fully applicable in every respect, except that the specified parameter
numbers differ from those used on the SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70.

7.7.2.2

Diagnostic tools:
LED displays of CBP2 (flashing LEDs mean normal operation):
Red LED
Yellow LED
Green LED

Status of CBP2
Communication between SIMOREG and CBP2
Communication between CBP2 and PROFIBUS

As a start-up support tool, the PROFIBUS board supplies data which can be displayed in n732.001
to n732.032 (1st CB) or n732.033 to n732.064 (2nd CB).
The values of the indices are as follows:
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-25

Start-Up

05.2007
Index

Meaning for CBP2

001/033 CBP_Status
Bit0: "CBP Init", CBP is being initialized or waiting to be initialized by the basic unit
(not set in normal operation)
Bit1: "CBP Online", CBP is selected by basic unit
(set in normal operation)
Bit2: "CBP Offline", CBP not selected by basic unit
(not set in normal operation)
Bit3: Illegal bus address (P918)
(not set in normal operation)
Bit4: Diagnostic mode activated (U711 <> 0)
(not set in normal operation)
Bit8: Incorrect identifier bytes transferred (incorrect configuring message from PROFIBUS Master)
(not set in normal operation)
Bit9: Incorrect PPO type (incorrect configuring message from PROFIBUS Master)
(not set in normal operation)
Bit10: Correct configuring data received from PROFIBUS_DP Master (set in normal operation)
Bit12: Fatal error detected by DPS Manager software (not set in normal operation)
Bit13: Program in endless loop in main.c (loop can only be exited by a Reset)
Bit15: Program in communications online loop (loop can only be exited through re-initialization by basic unit)

002/034 SPC3_Status
Bit0:

Offline/Passive Idle
(0=SPC3 is operating in normal mode (offline)
1=SPC3 is operating in Passive Idle)
Bit2: Diag flag
(0=diagnostic buffer has been picked up by master
1= diagnostic buffer has not been picked up by master)
Bit3: RAM Access Violation, memory access >1.5kB
(0=no address violation, 1=for addresses > 1536 bytes, 1024 is subtracted from address and access
made to the new address)
Bit4+5: DP state (00=Wait_Prm, 01=Wait_Cfg, 10=Data_Ex, 11=not possible)
Bit6+7: WD state (00=Baud search, 01=Baud_Control, 10=DP_Control, 11=not possible)
Bit8-11: Baud rate (0000=12MBd, 0001=6MBd, 0010=3MBd, 0011=1,5MBd, 0100=500kBd, 0101=187.5kBd,
0110=93.75kBd, 0111=45.45kBd, 1000=19.2kBd, 1001=9.6kBd)
Bit12-15: SPC3-Release (0000=Release 0)

003/035 SPC3_Global_Controls
Bits remain set until the next DP global command
Bit1: 1=Clear_Data message received
Bit2: 1=Unfreeze message received
Bit3: 1=Freeze message received
Bit4: 1=Unsync message received
Bit5: 1=Sync message received

004/036 L byte: No. of received error-free messages (DP Standard only)

H byte: Reserved
005/037 L byte: "Timeout" counter
H byte: Reserved
006/038 L byte: "Clear Data" counter
H byte: Reserved
007/039 L byte: "Heartbeat counter error" counter
H byte: Reserved
008/040 L byte: No. bytes for special diagnosis
H byte: Reserved
009/041 L byte: Mirroring of slot identifier 2
H byte: Mirroring of slot identifier 3
010/042 L byte: Mirroring of P918 (CB bus addr.)
H byte: Reserved
011/043 L byte: "Re-config. by CUD" counter
H byte: "Initialization runs" counter
012/044 L byte: Error ID DPS manager error
H byte: Reserved
013/045 L byte: PPO type found
H byte: Reserved
014/046 L byte: Mirroring of "DWord specifier ref"

7-26

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Index

Meaning for CBP2

015/047 H byte: Mirroring of "DWord specifier act"

016/048 L byte: DPV1:DS_Write, pos. ack. counter
H byte: Reserved
017/049 L byte: DPV1:DS_Write, neg. ack. counter
H byte: Reserved
018/050 L byte: DPV1:DS_Read, pos. ack. counter
H byte: Reserved
019/051 L byte: DPV1:DS_Read, neg. ack. counter
H byte: Reserved
020/052 L byte: DP/T:GET DB99 pos. ack. counter
H byte: DP/T:PUT DB99 pos. ack. counter
021/053 L byte: DP/T:GET DB100 ps. ack. counter
H byte: DP/T:PUT DB100 ps. ack. counter
022/054 L byte: DP/T:GET DB101 ps. ack. counter
H byte: DP/T:PUT DB101 ps. ack. counter
023/055 L byte: DP/T service neg. acknow. counter
H byte: DP/T:Application association pos. acknow. counter
024/056 Reserved
025/057 Date of creation: Day, month
026/058 Date of creation: Year
027/059 Software version (Vx.yz, display x)
028/060 Software version (Vx.yz, display yz)
029/061 Software version: Flash-EPROM checks.
030/062 Reserved
031/063 Reserved
032/064 Reserved
Fault and alarm messages:
For details about fault messages, see Section 10.
Fault F080
An error occurred as board CBP2 was being initialized, e.g. incorrect value of a CB
parameter, incorrect bus address or defective module.
Fault F081
The heartbeat counter (counter on CBP2) which is monitored by SIMOREG for "signs of life"
from the board has not changed for at least 800 ms.
Fault F082
Failure of PZD telegrams or a fault in the transmission channel.
Alarm A081 (1st CB) or alarm A089 (2nd CB)
The identifier byte combinations transmitted by the DP master in the configuration telegram
do not match the permitted identifier byte combinations (configuring error on DP master)
Effect: No link can be established with the DP master, reconfiguration necessary.
Alarm A082 (1st CB) or alarm A090 (2nd CB)
No valid PPO type can be determined from the configuration telegram from the DP master.
Effect: No link can be established with the DP master, reconfiguration necessary.
Alarm A083 (1st CB) or alarm A091 (2nd CB)
No user data, or only invalid data, are being received from the DP master.
Effect:The process data are not transferred to the basic unit. When the telegram failure

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-27

Start-Up

05.2007
monitoring function is active (U722 set to value other than 0), this disturbance generates
fault message F082 with fault value 10.
Alarm A084 (1st CB) or alarm A092 (2nd CB)
The exchange of data between the communication board and DP master has been
interrupted (e.g. cable break, bus connector removed or DP master switched off).
Effect: When the telegram failure monitoring function is active (U722 set to value other than
0), this disturbance generates fault message F082 with fault value 10.
Alarm A085 (1st CB) or alarm A093 (2nd CB)
Error in the DPS software of the communication board.
Effect: Fault message F081 is generated.
Alarm A086 (1st CB) or alarm A094 (2nd CB)
Failure of heartbeat counter detected by SIMOREG DC-MASTER.
Effect: Interruption in communication with PROFIBUS.
Alarm A087 (1st CB) or alarm A095 (2nd CB)
DP slave software has detected serious fault, fault number in diagnostic parameter n732.08.
Effect:Total communication failure (secondary fault F082).
Alarm A088 (1st CB) or alarm A096 (2nd CB)
At least 1 configurable internode transmitter is not yet active or has failed again (for details,
see diagnostic parameter n732).
Effect:If a transmitter is not yet active, the associated setpoints are set to "0" as an
alternative. If an internode transmitter fails again, transmission of the setpoints to the
SIMOREG may be interrupted depending on the setting of U715 (with secondary fault F082).

7-28

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

7.7.3

Start-Up

Sequence of operations for starting up CAN bus boards (CBC):

With the power supply switched off, insert the board with adapter board (ADB) into the slot.
For board mounting instructions, see Section 5.3.2 , Mounting Optional Supplementary
Boards.

The following are important communication parameters. Index 1 of each parameter is set for
the 1st communication board (1st CB) and index 2 for the 2nd communication board (2nd CB):
Exception: In parameter U721, i001 to i005 are applicable to the 1st CB and i006 to i010 to
the 2nd CB (indices 3 to 5 and 8 to 10 are reserved).
The meaning of the parameters also differs depending on the setting of U721, i.e. CANLayer 2 (U721=0) and CANopen (U721=1):
CAN-Layer 2

CANopen

U711

Basic identifier for PKW Request/PKW Response

1 Receive-PDO

U712

Basic identifier for PZD Receive

2 Receive-PDO

U713

Basic identifier for PZD Send

3 Receive-PDO

U714

Number of PZD for PZD Send

4 Receive-PDO

U715

Updating rate for PZD Send

1 Transmit-PDO

U716

Basic identifier for PZD Receive-Broadcast

2 Transmit-PDO

U717

Basic identifier for PZD Receive-Multicast

3 Transmit-PDO

U718

Basic identifier for PZD Receive-Internode

4 Transmit-PDO

U719

Basic identifier for PKW Request-Broadcast

Response to Life Time Event

U720

Baud rate when U721.002 or U721.007 = 0:

0=10kbit/s, 1=20kbit/s, 2=50kbit/s, 3=100kbit/s,
4=125kbit/s, 5=250kbit/s, 6=500kbit/s,
7=Reserved, 8=1Mbit/s

Baud rate when U721.002 or U721.007 = 0:

0=10kbit/s, 1=20kbit/s, 2=50kbit/s, 3=100kbit/s,
4=125kbit/s, 5=250kbit/s, 6=500kbit/s,
7=Reserved, 8=1Mbit/s

nd
rd
th
st

nd
rd
th

U721.01
or
U721.06

0 = Functionality according to Layer 2 of ISO-OSI- 1 = Functionality according to Layer 7 of ISO-OSI7 Layer Model
7 Layer Model (CANopen)

U721.02
or
U721.07

Bus timing (this should not be changed)

U722

Telegram failure time (0 = deactivated)

P918

Bus address (node ID)

P927

Parameterizing enable (required only in cases

where parameter values must be altered via the
CAN Bus)

Parameterizing enable (required only in cases

where parameter values must be altered via the
CAN Bus)

The process data of the 1st or 2nd communication board are connected by means of the
appropriate connectors and binectors (see Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111)
For meaning of bits of control and status words, please see Section 8, Sheets G180 to
G183.

Turn the electronics supply voltage off and on again or set U710.001 or U710.002 to "0" to
transfer the values of parameters U711 to U721 and P918 to the supplementary board.
Note: The initialization process may interrupt the communication link to a supplementary
board which is already operational.

WARNING
This initialization process will interrupt the communication of any supplementary
board that has already been started up.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-29

Start-Up

05.2007
The CAN (Controller Area Network) fieldbus is being used increasingly for industrial applications in
spite of its limited network length (max. 40 m with a data transmission rate of 1 Mbaud).
Data are transferred by means of telegrams. Each data message, the so-called COBs
(Communication Objects), has its own individual identifier and contains a maximum of 8 bytes of
user data. The CBC board uses the Standard Message Format with 11-bit identifier.
Simultaneous use by other nodes of Extended Message Format with 29-bit identifiers is tolerated,
but messages with this format are not evaluated.
Nodes on the bus determine from the identifier which telegrams apply to them. The COBs to be
sent and received by each node must be defined before data transmission commences.
The identifiers also determine bus accessing priority. Low identifiers gain faster access to the bus,
i.e. they have higher priority then high identifiers.
Errored telegrams can be reliably detected by means of a number of interactive error detection
mechanisms. A transmission is automatically repeated when errors are detected.
The figure below shows a diagram of the CAN architecture model that is oriented toward the ISOOSI-7 layer reference model. The CBC supports the functionalities provided by layers 2 and 7 of
this model.
Functionality according to layer 2
The user data from the user software (as COBs on byte level) must be transferred directly to layer
2 (see also the examples of PZD and PKW data exchange given further down).
Functionality according to layer 7 (CANopen)
Process data are exchanged rapidly by means of so-called PDOs (Process Data Objects)
analogous to the transmission method used for layer 2.
Parameter data are exchanged by means of so-called SDOs (Service Data Objects).

CAN protocol

Device net

Communication
profile

CIA
DS 301

Application layer

CIA CAL
DS 201 .. 205, 207
CANopen
CAL

Device net
specification includes:
- Device profile
Communication
profile
Application layer

Device profile
Application

Layer 7

Layer 3-6
Communication

Layer 2

Layer 1

7.7.3.1

Data link layer

ISO-DIS 11898

Physical layer,
electrical
Physical layer,
mechanical

CIA DS 102-1

Device Net ODVA

Description of CBC with CAN Layer 2

User data are exchanged between the CAN master and the CAN boards on the drives, i.e. the
slaves. User data are categorized as either process data (control and status information, setpoints
and actual values) or data which relate to parameters.
Process data (PZDs) are time-critical and therefore processed faster by the drive (every 3.3 ms at
system frequency of 50 Hz) than the non-time-critical PKW data (parameter identifier value), which
is processed by the drive every 20 ms.
All settings required to operate the communication board are made in drive parameters (see
Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111).
Process data (PZD) are categorized as either data received by the drive (control words and
setpoints: PZD Receive) or data transmitted by the drive (status words and actual values: PZD
Send). A maximum of 16 PZDs can be transferred in either direction; these are divided into COBs
with 4 data words each by the communication board. In other words, 4 COBs are required to
transfer 4 PZD words, with each COB requiring its own separate identifier. Identifiers are assigned
in the CB parameters as shown in the following diagram:

7-30

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
PZD Receive 1 (setpoints 1 to 4)

Node address
of drive (P918)

Basic identifier for parameterizing

PZD Receive (U712)

PZD Receive 2 (setpoints 5 to 8)

PZD Receive 3 (setpoints 9 to 12)

PZD Receive 4 (setpoints 13 to 16)

Example of PZD Receive:

P918 = 1
U712 = 96

This settings assigns identifier 100 to the first 4 receive PZDs,

identifier 101 to the second 4 receive PZDs, etc.
PZD Send 1 (actual values 1 to 4)

Node address
of drive (P918)

Basic identifier for

PZD send (U713)

PZD Send 2 (actual values 5 to 8)

PZD Send 3 (actual values 9 to 12)

PZD-Send 4 (actual values 13 to 16)

Example of PZD Send:

P918 = 1
U713 = 196

This setting assigns identifier 200 to the first 4 send PZDs,

identifier 201 to the second 4 send PZDs, etc.

How received data are utilized by the drive or which data are to be sent by the drive is determined
by connectors (see Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111).
3 different modes of COB transmission can be selected in CB parameter 5 (U715):
U715 = 0

Actual values are transmitted only on request (Remote Transmission

Requests)
U715 = 1 to 65534 Actual values are transmitted after the set time [ms] or on request
(Remote Transmission Requests)
U715 = 65535
Actual values are transmitted if the values have changed (event) or on
request (Remote Transmission Requests). This option should only be
used in cases where values seldom change so as to prevent excessive
bus loading.
Structure of a telegram for PZD data exchange:
The telegram consists of the following data words:
Identifier
ID

Process data word 1

PZD1

Process data word 2

PZD2

Process data word 3

PZD3

Process data word 4

PZD4

ID is the CAN identifier that is defined for the COB in question by parameterization.
PZDx are process data words

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-31

Start-Up

05.2007

Example of a PZD setpoint telegram:

Using the receive identifier of the above example
Receive identifier
1. Setpoint
2. Setpoint
3. Setpoint
4. Setpoint

100d
40063d
8192d
123d
0d

0064h
9C7Fh
2000h
007Bh
0h

control word 1
speed setpoint 50%

Using the CAN BusAnalyser++ from Steinbeis, the setpoint data appear as follows (data field
length = 8 bytes, low and high bytes are shown swapped round):
Identifier

Data field

64 00

7F 9C

00 20

7B 00

00 00

PZD1

PZD2

PZD3

PZD4

The following functions are also available, each allowing a maximum of 16 process data to be
transferred:
PZD Receive Broadcast
This function is used to send setpoints and control words from the master to all slaves on
the bus simultaneously. With this option, an identical identifier must be set on all slaves
utilizing the function. This common identifier is set in CB parameter 6 (U716). The first 4
PZDs are transferred with the value set in U716 and the second 4 PZDs with the value in
U716+1, etc.
PZD Receive Multicast
This function is used to send setpoints and control words from the master to a group of
slaves on the bus simultaneously. With this option, all slaves within the group using the
function must be set to an identical identifier. This group identifier is set in CB parameter 7
(U717). The first 4 PZDs are transferred with the value set in U717 and the second 4 PZDs
with the value in U717+1, etc.
PZD Receive Internode
This function is used to receive setpoints and control words from another slave, allowing
PZDs to be exchanged between drives without intervention by a CAN master. For this
purpose, the identifier of PZD Receive Internode on the receiving slave must be set to the
identifier of PZD Send on the transmitting slave. This identifier is set in CB parameter 8
(U718). The first 4 PZDs are transferred with the value set in U718 and the second 4 PZDs
with the value in U718+1, etc.
Notes regarding PZD transmission:
Control word 1 must always be transferred as the first PZD word for setpoints. If control word
2 is needed, then it must be transferred as the fourth PZD word.
Bit 10 (control by PLC) must always be set in control word 1 or else the drives will not accept
setpoints and control words.
The consistency of process data can only be guaranteed within a COB. If more than 4 data
words are needed, these must be divided among several COBs. Since drives accept the
data asynchronously, the data transferred in several COBs may not always be accepted and
processed in the same processing cycle.
For this reason, interrelated data should be transferred within the same COB. If this is not
possible, data consistency can be assured by means of control word bit 10 (control by PLC),
i.e. by setting the bit to "off" in the first COB to temporarily prevent the drive from accepting
the data from the communications board. The remaining data are then transmitted. Finally, a
COB containing a control word bit 10 set to "on" is transmitted. Since a drive can accept up
to 16 PZDs simultaneously from the communication board, data consistency is assured.

7-32

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Since a variety of different functions can be used to transfer PZDs simultaneously, data are
overlayed in the drive. For example, the first PZD from PZD Receive and PZD Receive
Broadcast are always interpreted as the same control word 1. For this reason, care should
be taken to ensure that data are transferred in meaningful combinations.
Two CAN identifiers are required for the purpose of processing parameters, i.e. one CAN identifier
for PKW Request (parameter request job to drive) and one CAN identifier for PKW Response
(parameter response by drive). These assignments are made in CB parameters as shown in the
following diagram:
Node address
of drive (P918)

PKW Request

Basic identifier for

parameterizing (U711)

PKW Response

Example of PKW data exchange:

P918 = 1
U711 = 298

This setting assigns identifier 300 to the parameter job (request)

and identifier 301 to the parameter response.

Structure of a telegram for PKW data exchange:

The telegram consists of the following data words:
Identifier
ID

Parameter identifier
PKE

Parameter index
IND

Parameter value 1
PWE1

Parameter value 2
PWE2

ID is the CAN identifier that is defined for the COB in question by parameterization.
PKE contains the request or response ID and the parameter number
Request or response ID

Parameter number
PNU

Bit 0 to bit 10 contain the number of the parameter concerned. Bit 12 to bit 15 contain the
request or response ID.
The index IND contains the value 0 for unindexed parameters, for indexed parameters it
contains the corresponding index value. Bit15 also has a special function as the page select
bit for parameter numbers greater than 1999.
The index value 255 means that the request concerns all indices of the parameter in
question. For a change request, the parameter values must then be passed on for all indices
of the parameter. Because a COB can only contain up to 4 data words (8 bytes) of net data,
use of this request is only possible for parameters with (up to ) 2 indices. In the other
direction, the drive supplies all index values in the response telegram to a read request.
Details about the telegram structure can be found in Section 7.7.9, "Structure of
request/response telegrams.

Example of a PKW request:

Changing the parameter value of the indexed parameter P301.02 (in the RAM) to -95.00%.
The example telegram therefore contains the following values:
Request identifier
Request code
Parameter number
Index
Parameter value

300d
7d
301d
2d
9500d

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

012Ch
7h
012Dh
0002h
DAE4h

For use of the IDs of the example above

"Change parameter value (array word)"
=> PKE = 712Dh

7-33

Start-Up

05.2007

Using the CAN BusAnalyser++ from Steinbeis, the transmit data appear as follows (data
field length = 8 bytes, low and high bytes are shown swapped round):
Identifier

Data field

2C 01

2D 71

02 00

E4 DA

PKE

IND

PWE1

00 00

The following transfer function is also available:

PKW Request Broadcast
A parameter job (request) is processed simultaneously by all slaves on the bus. The node
address is not used to generate the CAN identifier because this must be set identically on all
slaves utilizing the PKW Request Broadcast function. This common identifier is set in CB
parameter 9 (U719). The corresponding parameter response is made with the CAN identifier
for PKW Response described above.
Notes regarding PKW transmission:
The length of the job and the response is always 4 words. Jobs which apply to all indices of
a parameter (e.g. "Request all indices") are not possible.
As a general rule, the low-order byte (in words) or the low-order word (in double words) is
transferred first. SIMOREG 6RA70 does not use double word parameters itself, these jobs
can only be executed where access is available to technology board parameters (e.g. T400).
The CBC does not respond to a parameter request job until the drive data are available. This
normally takes 20 ms. The response times will be longer only if change (write) jobs including
storage of the value in the EEPROM are received from other sources (e.g. serial basic
converter interface), resulting in a delay in job execution.
In certain system states (e.g. initialization states), parameter processing is greatly delayed or
does not take place at all.
The master may not issue a new parameter request job until any current parameter job has
been acknowledged.

7.7.3.2

Description of CBC with CANopen

7.7.3.2.1 Introduction to CANopen

CANopen is a standardized application for distributed, industrial automation systems based on
CAN and the CAL communication standard. CANopen is a standard of CAN in Automation (CiA)
and was in widespread use shortly after it became available.
CANopen can be regarded in Europe as the definitive standard for the implementation of industrial
CAN-based system solutions.
CANopen is based on a so-called "communication profile" which specifies the underlying
communication mechanisms and their definition [CiA DS-301].
The main types of device deployed for automating industrial systems, such as digital and analog
input/output modules [CiA DS-401], drives [CiA DS-402], control panels [CiA DS-403], controllers
[CiA DS-404], PLCs [CiA DS-405] or encoders [CiA DS-406], are described in so-called "device
profiles". These profiles define the functionality of standard equipment of the relevant type.
A central component of the CANopen standard is the definition of device functionality using an
"Object Directory" (OD). This object directory is subdivided into two sections, one which contains
general information about the device, such as identification, manufacturer's name, etc. and the
communication parameters, and the other describing the scope of device functions. An entry
("object") in the object directory is identified by means of a 16-bit index and an 8-bit subindex.
The "application objects" of a device, such as input and output signals, device parameters, device
functions or network variables, are made accessible in standardized form via the network by
means of the entries in the object directory.

7-34

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Similar to other field bus systems, CANopen employs two basic data transmission mechanisms:
The rapid exchange of short process data via so-called "process data objects" (PDOs) and the
accessing of entries in the object directory via so-called "service data objects (SDOs). Process
data objects are generally transferred either event-oriented, cyclically or on request as broadcast
objects without an additional protocol overhead. SDOs are used mainly to transmit parameters
during the device configuring process and generally for the transmission of longer data areas.
A total of 8 bytes of data can be transferred in a PDO. The assignment between application objects
and a PDO (transfer object) can be set by means of a structure definition ("PDO mapping") stored
in the OD and is thus adaptable to the individual operating requirements of a device.
SDOs are transmitted as a confirmed data transfer with two CAN objects in each case between
two network nodes. The relevant object directory entry is addressed through the specification of
index and subindex. Messages of unrestricted length can be transferred in principle. The
transmission of SDO messages involves an additional overhead.
Standardized, event-oriented, high priority alarm messages ("Emergency Messages) are
available for signaling device malfunctions.
The functionality required for the preparation and coordinated starting of a distributed automation
system corresponds to the mechanisms defined under CAL Network Management (NMT); this also
applies to the "Node Guarding" principle underpinning the cyclical node monitoring function.
Identifiers can be entered directly into the data structures of the object directory to assign CAN
message identifiers to PDOs and SDOs; predefined identifiers can be used for simple system
structures.

7.7.3.2.2 Functionality of CBC with CANopen

The CBC with CANopen supports only minimal boot-up as defined in communication profile CiaA
DS-301 (Application Layer and Communication Profile).
Up to four Receive PDOs and four Transmit PDOs are available. Parameters U711 to U714 can be
programmed to select the mapping and communication properties of the Receive PDOs and
parameters U715 to U718 to set the mapping and communication properties of the Transmit
PDOs.
Dynamic mapping, i.e. changing the assignment between the objects from the object directory
and a PDO in operation, is not supported by the CBC. Transmission type and identifier of the
communication objects (PDO, SDO, SYNC, EMCY and Node Guarding Object) can, however, be
set via SDOs in operation. These settings override the settings of the CP parameters and are
erased when the supply voltage is switched off.
One server SDO is available.
Another available communication object is the SYNC object. Using a synchronization message,
the CAN master can synchronize the transmission and reception of PDOs for the whole network
("synchronous PDOs").
The EMCY object (Emergency Object) is implemented. This telegram is used to signal all faults
and alarms generated in the SIMOREG system via the CAN Bus.
The network functionality is monitored via the Node Guarding Telegram with which the master
addresses the slaves cyclically. Each slave must individually respond to this telegram within a
parameterizable time frame.
If the master does not receive a response to its request, the communication link to the slave must
be malfunctioning in some way (e.g. cable break, bus connector removed, etc.).
If the slave does not receive a Node Guarding Telegram from the master within a particular time
period (Life Time Event), it can assume that there is error in the communication link. The reaction
of the slave to this event can be parameterized in parameter U719.
Canopen modes Velocity Mode (speed control) and Profile Torque Mode (torque control), both in
accordance with CiA DS-401 (Device Profile for Drives and Motion Control), and the manufacturerspecific Current Mode (current control) are implemented.
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-35

Start-Up

05.2007

7.7.3.2.3 Requirements for operating the CBC with CANopen

To be able to operate the CBC with CANopen, the following two conditions must be fulfilled:
-

SIMOREG firmware, V1.9 and later

CBC firmware, V2.2 and later

To be able to operate the individual CANopen profiles, certain parameter settings must be made in
the SIMOREG.
7.7.3.3

Diagnostic tools:
LED displays on the CBC (flashing LEDs indicate normal operation):
Red LED
Yellow LED
Green LED

Status of CBC
Communication between SIMOREG and CBC
Communication between CBC and CAN Bus

LED

7-36

Status

red

yellow

green

flashing

off

CBC waiting for commencement of initialization by SIMOREG

flashing

off

CBC waiting for end of initialization by SIMOREG

flashing

off

No PZD data exchange via CAN Bus

flashing

CBC defective

Normal operation

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Diagnostic parameter n732:
Indices i001 to i032 apply to a CBC as the first communication board; indices i033 to i064 apply to
a CBC as the second communication board.
Value
n732.001
or
n732.033

Meaning
No fault
Fault F080/fault value 5 is displayed under fault conditions:
Fault values for CAN layer 2:

1
2
5
7
13
14
15
20
21
22
23
35
36
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68

Incorrect address on CAN Bus (P918 / slave address)

Incorrect CAN identifier with PKW Request (U711)
Incorrect CAN identifier with PKW Request-Broadcast (U719)
Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive (U712)
Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Transmit (U713)
PZD transmit length = 0 (U714)
PZD transmit length > 16 , i.e. too long (U714)
Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Broadcast (U716)
Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Multicast (U717)
Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Internode (U718)
Invalid baud rate (U720)
Incorrect CAN protocol type (U721)
PKW Request-Broadcast (U719) without PKW Request (U711)
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PKW Broadcast
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Transmit
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Broadcast
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Multicast
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Internode
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Transmit
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Broadcast
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Multicast
Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Internode
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Transmit
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Broadcast
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Multicast
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Internode
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive-Broadcast
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive-Multicast
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive Internode
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Broadcast and PZD Receive-Multicast
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Broadcast and PZD Receive-Internode
Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Multicast and PZD Receive-Internode
Fault values for CANopen:

1
23
35
257
258
273
274
513
514
529
530
769
770
785
786
1025
1026
1041
1042
1092

Incorrect bus address (P918)

Invalid baud rate (U720)
Incorrect CAN protocol type (U721)
Invalid mapping of 1st Receive PDO (U711)
st
Invalid transmission type of 1 Receive PDO (U711)
st
Invalid mapping of 1 Transmit PDO (U715)
st
Invalid transmission type of 1 Transmit PDO (U715)
nd
Invalid mapping of 2 Receive PDO (U712)
nd
Invalid transmission type of 2 Receive PDO (U712)
nd
Invalid mapping of 2 Transmit PDO (U716)
nd
Invalid transmission type of 2 Transmit PDO (U716)
rd
Invalid mapping of 3 Receive PDO (U713)
rd
Invalid transmission type of 3 Receive PDO (U713)
rd
Invalid mapping of 3 Transmit PDO (U717)
rd
Invalid transmission type of 3 Transmit PDO (U717)
th
Invalid mapping of 4 Receive PDO (U714)
th
Invalid transmission type of 4 Receive PDO (U714)
th
Invalid mapping of 4 Transmit PDO (U718)
th
Invalid transmission type of 4 Transmit PDO (U718)
Invalid Life Time Event or incorrect basic unit parameterized (U719)

n732.002
or
n732.034

Number of correctly received PZD CAN telegrams since Power ON

Irrelevant for CANopen

n732.003
or
n732.035

Number of PZD telegrams lost since Power ON

Telegrams will be lost if the CAN Bus master sends PZD telegrams faster than they can
be processed by the slave.
Irrelevant for CANopen

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-37

Start-Up

05.2007
Value

Meaning

n732.004
or
n732.036

Counter of Bus Off states since Power ON (alarm A084)

n732.005
or
n732.037

Counter of Error Warning states since Power ON (alarm A083)

n732.006
or
n732.038

Status of the CAN controller

n732.007
or
n732.039

Number of errors occurring during reception of PCD frames

n732.008
or
n732.040

Type of error occurring during reception of PCD frames

n732.009
or
n732.041

Value of error occurring during reception of PCD frames

n732.010
or
n732.042

Number of correctly transmitted PZD CAN telegrams since Power ON

Irrelevant for CANopen

n732.011
or
n732.043

Number of errors during transmission of PZD telegrams

PZD telegrams cannot be transmitted when the bus is overloaded

n732.012
or
n732.044

Type of error occurring during transmission of PCD frames

n732.013
or
n732.045

Value of error occurring during transmission of PCD frames

n732.014
or
n732.046

Number of correctly processed PKW requests and responses since Power ON

Irrelevant for CANopen

n732.015
or
n732.047
n732.016
or
n732.048

Number of PKW request processing errors, e.g. owing to bus overload or missing
responses from CUD1 (see below for error type)
Irrelevant for CANopen
0
9
11
12

Type of PKW request processing error:

No error
Error transmitting the PKW response (while waiting for a free channel)
Timeout waiting for the PKW response from the CUD1
Timeout waiting for a free channel (bus overload)
Irrelevant for CANopen

7-38

n732.017
or
n732.049

Value of error occurring while processing PKW requests

n732.018
or
n732.050

Number of lost PKW requests

Irrelevant for CANopen

n732.026
or
n732.058

Software version of CBC

(e.g. "12 = version 1.2, see also r060)

n732.027
or
n732.059

Software identifier
(extended software version identifier, see also r065)

n732.028
or
n732.060

Date of generation of CBC software

Day (H byte) and month (L byte)

n732.029
or
n732.061

Date of generation of CBC software

Year

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up

Fault and alarm messages:

Detailed information about fault messages can be found in Section 10.
Fault F080
An error occurred during initialization of the CBC board, e.g. incorrect setting of a CB
parameter, incorrect bus address or defective board.
Fault F081
The heartbeat counter (counter on CBC) which is monitored by SIMOREG for "signs of life"
from the board has not changed for at least 800 ms.
Fault F082
Failure of PZD telegrams or a fault in the transmission channel
Alarm A083 (Error Warning)
Errored telegrams are being received or sent and the error counter on the supplementary
board has exceeded the alarm limit.
Errored telegrams are ignored. The data most recently transferred remain valid. If the
errored telegrams contain process data, fault message F082 with fault value 10 may be
activated as a function of the telegram failure time set in U722. No fault message is
generated for PKW data.
Alarm A084 (Bus Off)
Errored telegrams are being received or sent and the error counter on the supplementary
board has exceeded the fault limit.
Errored telegrams are ignored. The data most recently transferred remain valid. If the
errored telegrams contain process data, fault message F082 with fault value 10 may be
activated as a function of the telegram failure time set in U722. No fault message is
generated for PKW data.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-39

Start-Up

7.7.4

05.2007

Procedure for starting up the SIMOLINK board (SLB):

Disconnect the power supply and insert adapter board (ADB) containing SLB in a location.
Please remember to insert a board in location 2 before you use location 3. .

The SLBs must be connected up using fiber optics in such a manner as to avoid long
distances between two units (max. 40m with plastic fiber optics and max. 300 m with glass
fiber optics). Please also note that the transmitter (in center of SLB) on one unit is
connected to the receiver (at corner of SLB) on the next unit. These connections must be
made on all units until they are linked in a closed circuit.

The following are important communication parameters. Index 1 of each parameter is set for
the 1st SIMOLINK board (1st SLB) and index 2 for the 2nd SIMOLINK board (2nd SLB) (the
use of a 2nd SLB is planned for future software versions):
- U740 Node address (address 0 identifies the dispatcher)
Node addresses must be assigned consecutively unless a SIMOLINK master is
being used.
- U741 Telegram failure time (0 = deactivated)
- U742 Transmitter power
The output of the fiber optic transmitter module can be set on each active bus node.
- U744 Reserved for SLB selection (leave at 0 setting)
- U745 Number of channels (telegrams) used per node
The SLB with dispatcher function assigns the same number of channels to all nodes
- U746 Traffic cycle time
In contrast to converters of the SIMOVERT series, the line-synchronous SIMOREG
converter cannot be synchronized with the cycle time of the SIMOLINK bus in order to
minimize the data interchange time.
The user data in the telegrams are exchanged cyclically (6x per mains period, i.e. every 3.3
ms at 50 HZ) between the SIMOREG converter and the SLB, irrespective of the cycle time
on the bus (U746). A shorter cycle time still means, however, that the data are transferred
more quickly after they have been made available by the converter or more up-to-date
information for the converter.
U745 and U746 together determine the number of addressable nodes (this can be checked
with diagnostic parameter n748.4 in the converter with the dispatcher board).

No. of addressable nodes =

1
U 746[us ] + 3,18us

2 *

6,36us

U 745

The number of nodes serves only to check whether data can be exchanged with the values
set in U745 and U746. These parameters must otherwise be corrected.
A maximum of 201 nodes (dispatcher and 200 transceivers) can be connected to the
SIMOLINK bus. Node addresses 201 to 255 are reserved for special telegrams and others.
Consequently, with 8 channels per node, a bus cycle can be a maximum of 6.4 ms in
duration.

7-40

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up

Process data are connected to the SIMOLINK board through assignment of the
corresponding connectors and/or binectors to telegram addresses and channel numbers
(see Section 8, Sheet Z122).
Example:
U749.01 = 0.2

means that the values of node 0 / channel 2 are read as word1

(K7001) and word2 (K7002)

U740.01 = 1
U751.01 = 32
U751.02 = 33

means that node 1 in channel 0 transmits status word 1 (K0032) as

word1 and status word 2 (K0033) as word2

Changes to the settings of the receive data parameters do not take effect until the
electronics power supply is switched on again.

WARNING
Changing parameters U740, U745, U746 and U749 causes re-initialization,
resulting in an interruption in communication with all drives linked to the
SIMOLINK bus.

SIMOLINK (Siemens Motion Link) is a digital, serial data transmission protocol which uses fiber
optics as a transmission medium. The SIMOLINK drive link has been developed to allow a fast,
cyclic exchange of process data (control information, setpoints, status information and actual
values) via a closed ring bus.
Parameter data cannot be transferred via SIMOLINK.
SIMOLINK consists of the following components:
SIMOLINK Master
Active bus node as interface to higher-level automation systems (e.g. SIMATIC M7 or
SIMADYN)
SIMOLINK Board (SLB)
Active bus node as interface for drives on SIMOLINK
SIMOLINK Switch
Passive bus node with switching function between two SIMOLINK ring busses. The
separating filter and concentrator are identical in terms of hardware, but perform different
functions. Separating filters are used to reverse the signal flow, e.g. in order to link the nodes
on one ring bus to another ring bus after the failure of their master. Concentrators allow ring
segments to be star-connected to form a complete ring.
Fiber optic cables
Transmission medium between the SIMOLINK nodes. Glass or plastic fiber optic cables can
be used. The permissible maximum distances between adjacent nodes in the ring differs
depending on the type of fiber optic used (plastic: max 40m, glass: max. 300m).
SIMOLINK is a closed fiber optic ring. One of the nodes on the bus has a dispatcher function
(SIMOLINK master or SLB parameterized as the dispatcher). This dispatcher node is identified by
node address 0 and controls communication on the bus. Using SYNC telegrams, it supplies the
common system clock cycle for all nodes and sends telegrams in ascending sequence of telegram
addresses and channel numbers in the task table. The task table contains all telegrams which are
transmitted cyclically in normal data interchange.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-41

Start-Up

05.2007
When an SLB is employed as the dispatcher, the task table is configured solely on the basis of
drive parameters. The following restrictions apply as compared to the use of a SIMOLINK master
as the dispatcher:
Flexible address lists with gaps in address sequence are not allowed on the bus. Addresses
are assigned consecutively to the nodes, starting with address 0.
The number of telegrams (channels) used per node is identical for all nodes.
It is not possible to use application-specific special data.
All other active bus nodes apart from the dispatcher are transceivers. These simply forward
telegrams (with updated contents in some cases) along the bus.
Active bus nodes receive and/or send telegrams (SIMOLINK master, dispatcher, transceivers).
Passive bus nodes simply forward received telegrams along the bus without changing their
contents (separating filters, concentrators).
A separate address is assigned to each active bus node; the dispatcher is always assigned node
address 0.
A maximum of 8 telegrams can be transferred per active node. The number of telegrams used per
node is a parameterizable quantity.
Telegrams are identified by the node address and distinguished by their channel number of
between 0 and 7, with 2 data words transferred as user data in each telegram. The first channel
number starts with 0 and is counted in ascending sequence.
Telegram
Word0

Word1

Application Flags
Channel number
Node address

The assignment between connector values to be transferred and individual telegrams and
channels is also parameterized (see Section 8, Sheet Z122).
Transmission of double-word connectors:
The values of double-word connectors can be transmitted in the first four channels (selected with
U749.01 to U749.04 in the receive direction or with U751.01 to U751.08 in the transmission
direction). In the receive direction, the values of any two adjacent connectors (K) are combined to
form a double-word connector (KK) (e.g. K7001 and K7002 to KK7031). These double-word
connectors can be connected to other function blocks in the usual way. For details of how to
connect with double-word connectors, see Section 9.1, subsection, " The following rules apply to
the selection of double-word connectors ".
In the transmission direction, a double-word connector is applied by entering the same doubleword connector at two contiguous indices of selection parameter U751.
Examples:

7-42

KK9498

U751 (0)
9498

KK9498

9498

K0401

401

K0402

402

KK9498

U751 (0)
9498

KK9499

9499

K0401

401

K0402

402

.01
.02
.03
.04

L-Word
H-Word

2x the same KK - number

Word
Word

H-Word
H-Word

2 different KKs !

Word
Word

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Apart from these data, a SIMOLINK master can also send special telegrams with applicationspecific data (addresses 201 to 204 and channel number 0). An SLB as dispatcher does not
support these special telegrams.
If a transceiver stops receiving telegrams due to an interruption, it automatically transmits special
telegram "Time Out.
The transmission rate is 11 Mbits/s. The data telegrams are transmitted in direct succession,
followed by a SYNC telegram and a pause telegram, within one bus cycle. Transferring the data
telegrams without pauses ensures a higher data throughput. At a data transmission rate of 11
Mbit/s, the transmission time for one telegram is 6.36s.
Bus cycle

...

SYNC Break

Data telegrams

The assignment of telegrams to nodes is determined by the type of SIMOLINK application, i.e.
peer-to-peer functionality or master-slave functionality.
When an SLB is configured as the dispatcher, only the peer-to-peer functionality is available.
Peer-to-peer functionality
In this mode, there is no defined logical master for distributing information. The drives have equal
status in logical terms and exchange data with one another via the ring bus. One node (SLB)
specifies the bus cycle in its dispatcher role to keep the transmission alive. All nodes receive
and/or send user data. Dispatcher and transceivers can read any telegram, but may only write
information in the telegrams specifically assigned to them (node address = address in telegram).
Master-slave functionality
A logical master (e.g. SIMATIC) supplies all nodes with information on the one hand and, on the
other, specifies the bus clock cycle (dispatcher function). All other nodes behave as described
above under peer-to-peer functionality, i.e. they receive and/or send user data, but are only
permitted to read or write telegrams containing their address.
In contrast to peer-to-peer functionality, the restrictions described above (no gaps in address
sequence, uniform number of used channels, no special data) do not apply. The master has its
own 8 channels for transferring data, but can also use telegrams with the address and channel
numbers of the transceivers for its data transmissions.

NOTE
An external 24V power supply to the SIMOLINK modules ensures that communication with the
other bus nodes continues if a device fails.
However, this power supply does not prevent the short interruption in communication when the
device is switched on again when establishing communication is forced.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-43

Start-Up

7.7.5

05.2007

Procedure for starting up expansion boards (EB1 and EB2)

Remove connector X480 from the EB1 board for safety reasons. A short circuit could
otherwise occur should the signal direction of the bidirectional binary inputs/outputs be
incorrectly parameterized (see also point 3).
This risk of short circuits does not exist on EB2 boards.

The analog inputs on the EB1 can be used either as current or voltage inputs, the mode
being selected by setting jumpers (X486, X487, X488) appropriately (see Function
Diagrams, Section 8). The same applies to EB2 (X498); on this board, the analog output can
also be configured as a current or voltage source (X499).

Parameterize the desired functions for the inputs and outputs (see Function Diagrams,
Section 8).
If you wish to operate a bidirectional binary input/output on an EB1 as an input, please note
that the output circuit must be deactivated in the corresponding parameter (e.g. U769.01=0).
A short circuit will otherwise occur if the signal levels of the external input and output signals
are opposed.
Switch off the device.

With the power supply disconnected, insert the adapter board with expansion board in a
location. Please remember to insert a board in location 2 before you use location 3.

EB1 boards only: Plug connector X480 back into board.

Expansion boards EB1 and EB2 expand the range of terminals on the basic converter. A total of 2
EB1 boards and 2 EB2 boards may be installed in one SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70. The EB1
and/or EB2 are plugged into adapter (carrier) boards (ADB). 2 boards may be mounted on each
ADB.
The EB1 provides the following expansion terminals:
3 binary inputs
4 bidirectional binary inputs/outputs
1 analog input for differential signal (current or voltage input)
2 analog inputs (single ended), can also be used as binary inputs
2 analog outputs
1 connector for external 24 V voltage supply to binary outputs
The EB2 provides the following expansion terminals:
2 binary inputs
1 connector for external 24 V voltage supply to binary outputs
1 relay output with changeover contacts
3 relay outputs with NO contacts
1 analog input for differential signal (current or voltage input)
1 analog output (current or voltage output)
For further details, see Section 8, function diagrams for expansion boards EB1 and EB2.

7-44

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

7.7.6

Start-Up

Procedure for starting up the pulse encoder board (SBP)

Set the switches (for encoder supply and bus terminating resistors) on the SBP board:
If one pulse encoder is connected to one SBP board, then the three switches for bus
terminating resistors must be switched to ON.
If one pulse encoder is connected to several SBP boards, then the three switches for bus
terminating resistors must be switched to ON only on the last SBP.
The fourth switch connects and disconnects the supply voltage for the encoder.
(Caution: Switch open means supply voltage connected)

Disconnect power supply and insert adapter with board into location. Please remember to
insert a board in location 2 before you use location 3.

Connect the terminals on strips X400, X401 on the pulse encoder board to the appropriate
terminals on the encoder (for circuit example, refer to operating instructions for pulse
encoder board). If you connect unipolar signals, a ground connection for all signals to
terminal 75 (CTRL-) is sufficient. For very long lines or high interference irradiation, we
recommend jumpering terminals 69, 71, and 75 (A-, B-, and CTRL-) and connecting to
encoder ground. The zero track of the pulse encoder is not evaluated by SIMOREG and
need not therefore be connected.
The terminals designated coarse pulse1, coarse pulse2 and fine pulse2 can be used as
digital inputs for any function (see Function Diagrams in Section 8)

Please make the following settings:

- U790 Voltage level of inputs
0:
1:
2:
3:

HTL unipolar
TTL unipolar
HTL differential input
TTL/RS422 differential input

- U791 Level of encoder supply

0:
1:

5V voltage supply
15V voltage supply

- U792 Pulse encoder resolution

- U793 Type of pulse encoder
0:
1:

Encoder with A/B track (two tracks displaced by 90 degrees)

Encoder with separate forward and reverse track

- U794 Reference speed

(For further details, see Section 11, description of parameters U790- U794)

The pulse encoder board SBP (Sensor Board Pulse) supports commercially available pulse
encoders with pulse frequencies up to 410kHz. The voltage level of the encoder signals can be
parameterized. TTL or HTL level pulses, bipolar or unipolar, can be used.
A voltage supply for 5V and 15V encoders is provided on the board.
Evaluation of a temperature sensor is not supported on SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70
converters.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-45

Start-Up

7.7.7

05.2007

Sequence of operations for starting up DeviceNet boards (CBD):

With the power supply switched off, insert the board or adapter board with board in the slot.
Please note that slot 2 (on right) must always be occupied before slot 3 (in center) can be
used.

Wire up the DeviceNet using appropriate cabling (see below for details of cables).

The following parameters are relevant with respect to communications. Index 1 of the
relevant parameter applies to the 1st communication board (1st CBx) and index 2 to the 2nd
communication board (2nd CBx):
-

U711 CB parameter1
Definition of number of words in the process data area that the SIMOREG sends as
a response to a request by the master (produced data). The following options can be
selected:
U711 = 170 ... 4 PZD (status word and actual values)
U711 = 171 ... 8 PZD (status word and actual values)
U711 = 172 ... 16 PZD (status word and actual values)

-U712 CB parameter2
Definition of number of words in the process data area that SIMOREG expects to
receive after a request from the master (consumed data). The following options can
be selected:
U712 = 120 ... 4 PZD (control word and setpoints)
U712 = 121 ... 8 PZD (control word and setpoints)
U712 = 122 ... 16 PZD (control word and setpoints)
U711 and U712 can be parameterized independently of one another. The first 4 PZD
words (produced data) are always sent after a request from the master.

-U720 CB parameter10
Definition of the DeviceNet transmission rate. The following options can be selected:
U720 = 0 ....... 125kbaud
U720 = 1 ....... 250kbaud
U720 = 2 ....... 500kbaud

- U722 CB/TB telegram failure time

Definition of the time period within which at least 1 telegram with PZDs must be
exchanged before a fault message is generated.
This parameter should be set to "0" first (monitoring function deactivated). Once the
network is operating correctly, a time value can be set within which PZDs are
normally exchanged.

7-46

P918 Bus address

Definition of DeviceNet MAC ID for the CBD in the 0 to 63 range.

P927 Parameterizing enable (necessary only if parameter values need to be altered via
DeviceNet)

The process data of the 1st or 2nd communication board are wired up by means of the
appropriate connectors or binectors (see Section 8, function diagrams Z110 and Z111).
For meaning of the control and status word bits, see Section 8, Sheets G180 to G183.

Switch the electronics power supply off and on again or set U710.001 or U710.002 to "0" to
transfer the values of parameters U712, U720, U722 and P918 to the supplementary board.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up

WARNING
This initialization process will interrupt the communication of any supplementary
board that has already been started up.

The CBD board supports "DeviceNet Explicit Messages for the transfer of process data, as well as
"DeviceNet I/O Messages for the transmission of parameter data. The meaning of the data within
an I/O message is determined by the corresponding "Connection ID".
The CBD supports the "Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set defined in the DeviceNet
Specification. Both "poll" and "bit strobe I/O messages are supported.
The CBD adheres to the "DeviceNet Device Profile for Communication Adapter (Device Type 12).
This profile has been selected to allow the DeviceNetMaster to utilize all the options and extended
functions provided by the SIMOREG.
DeviceNet messages can be divided roughly into 3 groups:
-

DeviceNet configuration data, e.g. channel assignment, timeouts and I/O messages, for
which explicit messages are used

Process data, e.g. control/status word and setpoints/actual values, for which I/O
messages are used

Parameter data, for which manufacturer-specific PKW objects and explicit messages are
used, to read or modify drive parameter settings

The drive is controlled by process data. The number of process data words is determined either by
the value of particular CB parameters (U711 and U712) after booting, or dynamically by the
DeviceNet.
The master uses a manufacturer-specific PKW object to read or modify drive parameters via
DeviceNet, utilizing the explicit messaging channel. The user thus has access via DeviceNet to all
SIMOREG parameters and any installed technology board (e.g. detailed diagnostic information and
fault messages).
DeviceNet specifies a shielded cable with 2 individually screened two-wire conductors for signal
transmission and power supply. 2 types of different cross-sections may be used, i.e. "Thin Cable
and "Thick Cable.
Thick cables are used in networks of >100m in length and thin cables for spur lines and networks
of <100m.
The following cable types are recommended for use as DeviceNet bus cables:
Thin cable:Belden 3084A
Thick cable:Belden 3082A, 3083A or 3085A
Pin assignment and color coding are defined as follows:
Pin

Function

Color of wire in DeviceNet cable

X438.1

V-

Black (power supply ground)

X438.2

CAN-

Blue

X438.3

Shield

X438.4

CAN+

White

X438.5

V+

Red ( +24V supply +/- 1% )

Recommended bus connector:Phoenix Combicon MSTB 2.5/5-ST-5.08-AU

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-47

Start-Up

05.2007
Transmission rates and bus cable lengths:
Transmission rate

Max. cable length

(thick cable)

125kbaud

Spur line length (thin cable)

Maximum

Cumulative

500m

156m

250kbaud

250m

78m

500kbaud

100m

39m

To ensure proper functioning, both ends of the bus cable must be terminated by a terminating
resistor (121 metal film resistor, +/- 1%, 0.25W).
The DeviceNet cable screen should be earthed at ONE point (e.g. at the power supply). Earthing
the screen at several locations can produce ground loops and cause malfunctions.
Telegrams transmitted via DeviceNet have the same useful data structure as those used in CAN
Bus communication.
A CAN telegram comprises the protocol header, CAN identifier, up to 8 bytes of useful data and the
protocol trailer.
The methods applied for DeviceNet transmissions allow useful data of any length to be transferred.
Data which are longer than 8 bytes can be transmitted in fragmented form (in several consecutive
telegrams).
PZD object (process data)
Both control words and setpoints as well as status words and actual values (process data) are
transmitted by means of DeviceNet I/O message connections. The number of process data to be
transferred (4, 8 or 16) depends on which DeviceNet I/O assembly instance has been selected.
The quantity of process data transmitted by the drive can differ from the quantity received.
Options for defining the number of PZD:
-

"Consumed Connection Path with "Poll I/O" (direction: Master -> drive)
U712 = 120 ... 4 PZD (control word and setpoints)
U712 = 121 ... 8 PZD (control word and setpoints)
U712 = 122 ... 16 PZD (control word and setpoints)

"Produced Connection Path with "Poll I/O (direction: Drive -> master)
U711 = 170 ... 4 PZD (status word and actual values)
U711 = 171 ... 8 PZD (status word and actual values)
U711 = 172 ... 16 PZD (status word and actual values)

"Produced Connection Path with "Bit Strobe I/O

U711 = 170 ... 4 PZD (status word and actual values); cannot be changed

The meaning of each process data word is determined by the assignment of connectors
parameterized in the drive (see function diagrams in Section 8, particularly "Data exchange with 1st
and 2nd CB"). Process data can be exchanged between the SIMOREG and CBD 6x per line period,
i.e. every 3.3ms at 50Hz, but is dependent on the data exchange mode via DeviceNet. For further
details, see also "Information about PZD transmission" in Section 7, "Sequence of operations for
starting up CAN Bus boards.
Information about PZD transmission:
The low-order byte or word is always transferred before the high-order byte or word.
Control word 1 must always be sent as the first PZD word. If control word 2 is also used, this must
always be sent as the 4th PZD word.
Bit10 in control word 1 ("control requested) must always be set or else no new setpoints will be
accepted from the drive.
The second PZD word should normally contain the main setpoint.

7-48

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
The consistency of a block of data words is guaranteed within a DeviceNet I/O message
connection even in cases where more than 4 PZD words are used and the transmission data is
distributed among several telegrams. The data are not transferred from the CBD to the drive until
all data words have been received.
PKW object (parameter data)
The manufacturer-specific PKW object (class 100) is used to read and modify parameters of the
drive or a technology board by means of the DeviceNet master (PKW = parameter identifier value).
Explicit messaging mode is used for this purpose.
Only two instances are implemented for the PKW object: Instance 0 permits access to class
attributes and instance 1 (always set to "1") access to all parameter numbers (see DeviceNet
objects below).
Apart from the protocol header and trailer specific to DeviceNet, the structure of a telegram is
follows:
Parameter identifier
PKE

Parameter index
IND

Parameter value1
PWE1

Parameter value2
PWE2

For details about this telegram area, see also Section 7.7.9, Structure of request/response
telegrams. The useful data area of PROFIBUS, CAN Bus and DeviceNet telegrams is structured
identically.

DeviceNet GET Single

This object is used to read parameter values and 9 bytes in length.
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

DeviceNet identification
[FRAG] [XID] [SRC/DST MAC ID]
[R/R] [Service]
Class
Instance
Attribute

0x0E
100
1
1

PKE
IND

[Get_Attribute_Single]
[PKW object] manufacturer-specific
[Instance number] always set to 1
[Attribute number] always set to 1
Parameter ID, L byte
Parameter ID, H byte
Parameter index, L byte
Parameter index, H byte

DeviceNet SET Single

This object is used to modify parameter values and 14 bytes in length
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

DeviceNet identification
[FRAG] [XID] [SRC/DST MAC ID]
[Fragmentation Protocol]
[R/R] [Service]
Class
Instance
Attribute
PKE
IND
PWE1
PWE2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0x10
100
1
1

[Set_Attribute_Single]
[PKW object] manufacturer-specific
[Instance number] always set to 1
[Attribute number] always set to 1
Parameter ID, L byte
Parameter ID, H byte
Parameter index, L byte
Parameter index, H byte
Parameter value, L word, L byte
Parameter value, L word, H byte
Parameter value, H word, L byte
Parameter value, H word, H byte

7-49

Start-Up

05.2007
DeviceNet Response
This object is used to respond to requests of the above type and 8 bytes in length.
Byte
1
2

DeviceNet identification
[FRAG] [XID] [SRC/DST MAC ID]
[R/R] [Service]

3
4
5
6
7
8

0x8E
0x90

[Get/Set_Attribute_Single]
Parameter ID, L byte
Parameter ID, H byte
Parameter value, L word, L byte
Parameter value, L word, H byte
Parameter value, H word, L byte
Parameter value, H word, H byte

PKE
PWE1
PWE2

Examples
Read parameter P101.004 using GET Single (for details in the shaded data area, see also Section
7, Starting up PROFIBUS boards):
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

DeviceNet identification
[FRAG] [XID] [SRC/DST MAC ID]
[R/R] [Service]
Class
Instance
Attribute
PKE
IND

0x0E
100
1
1
0x65
0x60
4
0

Request identifier = 0x6065 (request parameter value (array) P101), Index = 0004h = 4d
Response by SIMOREG:
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

DeviceNet identification
[FRAG] [XID] [SRC/DST MAC ID]
[R/R] [Service]
PKE
PWE1
PWE2

0x8E
0x65
0x40
0x90
0x01
0x00
0x00

[Get_Attribute_Single]
Parameter ID, L byte
Parameter ID, H byte
Parameter value, L word, L byte
Parameter value, L word, H byte
Parameter value, H word, L byte
Parameter value, H word, H byte

Response identifier = 0x4065, value of P101.004 = 0190h = 400d (PWE2 remains unused because
it is not a double word parameter)

7-50

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Modify parameter U099.001 using SET Single (for details in the shaded data area, see also
Section 7, Starting up PROFIBUS boards):
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

DeviceNet identification
[FRAG] [XID] [SRC/DST MAC ID]
[Fragmentation Protocol]
[R/R] [Service]
Class
Instance
Attribute
PKE
IND
PWE1
PWE2

0x10
100
1
1
0x63
0x70
0x01
0x80
0xC8
0x00
0x00
0x00

[Set_Attribute_Single]
[PKW object] manufacturer-specific
[Instance number] always set to 1
[Attribute number] always set to 1
Parameter ID, L byte
Parameter ID, H byte
Parameter Index, L byte
Parameter Index, H byte
Parameter value, L word, L byte
Parameter value, L word, H byte
Parameter value, H word, L byte
Parameter value, H word, H byte

Request identifier = 7063h (modify parameter value (array) U099), index = 0001h = 1d (bit 15 is
also set in the H byte in order to address the parameter number range from 2000 to 4000), value =
00C8h = 200d
Response by SIMOREG:
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

DeviceNet identification
[FRAG] [XID] [SRC/DST MAC ID]
[R/R] [Service]
PKE
PWE1
PWE2

0x90
0x63
0x40
0xC8
0x00
0x00
0x00

[Set_Attribute_Single]
Parameter ID, L byte
Parameter ID, H byte
Parameter value, L word, L byte
Parameter value, L word, H byte
Parameter value, H word, L byte
Parameter value, H word, H byte

Response identifier = 0x4063, value of U099.001 = 00C8h = 200d (PWE2 remains unused
because SIMOREG 6RA70 has no double word parameters)
Information about PKW transmission:
The length of a request from the master is two words (for GET Single) or 4 words (SET Single).
The length of a SIMOREG response is always 3 words.
The low-order byte or word is always sent before the high-order byte or word.
The master may generate a new PKW request only after it has received a response from the slave
to the previous request.
The master identifies the response to the transmitted request by
evaluating the response identifier
evaluating the parameter number
evaluating the parameter value (if further identification is needed)
The CBD slave does not respond to a parameter request until it has received the relevant data
from the drive. The time delay depends on the type of request, but is at least 20 ms. During the
initialization phase after Power ON or a re-initialization operation due to a change in a CB
parameter setting, requests may not be processed at all, in which case the ensuing delay could be
as much as 40 s.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-51

Start-Up
7.7.7.1

05.2007
Diagnostic tools:
LED displays on the CBD (steadily flashing LEDs indicate normal operation):
Red
Yellow
Green

Status of CBD (software working correctly)

Communication between SIMOREG and CBD
PZD data exchange between CBD and DeviceNet

LED

Status

red

yellow

green

flashing

off

CBD waiting for commencement of initialization by SIMOREG

flashing

off

CBD waiting for end of initialization by SIMOREG

flashing

off

No PZD data exchange via DeviceNet

flashing

CBD defective

Normal operation

Diagnostic parameter n732:

Indices i001 to i032 apply to a CBD as the first communication board, while indices i033 to i064
apply to a CBD as the second communication board.
Value
n732.001
or
n732.033

n732.002
or
n732.034

Meaning

1
2
3
17

Fault F080/fault value 5 is displayed under fault conditions:

DeviceNet MAC ID (P918 / slave address) incorrect
DeviceNet polled I/O produced connection path (U711) incorrect
DeviceNet polled I/O produced consumed path (U712) incorrect
Baud rate (U720) incorrect
The displayed decimal values must be converted to hexadecimal values. In hexadecimal
notation, every digit of the 16-bit data word has a meaning:
Thousands place

Thousands place:
(Idle Indicator)
0 = device not idle; A
poll or bit strobe
request with length
other than 0 was last
received
1 = device idle; A
poll or bit strobe
request with length
equal to 0 was last
received

7-52

Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8

Hundreds place:
(Channel Allocation)
The meaning of
individual bits is as
follows
Bit8: 1 = Explicit
Channel allocated
Bit9: 1 = I/O Poll
Channel allocated
Bit10: 1 = I/O Bit
Strobe Channel
allocated
Bit11: 1 = Reserved

Tens place

Tens place:
Reserved

Units place

Units place:
(network status)
0 = CBD not online
(Dup_MAC_ID test
not yet complete)
1 = CBD online, but
not assigned to a
master
2 = CBD online and
assigned to the
master
3 = data cannot be
exchanged via bus
(multiple MAC IDs or
Bus Off)

n732.003
or
n732.035

Number of correctly received telegrams since Power ON. The value contains all Group2
DeviceNet messages including those that are not addressed to this CBD.

n732.008
or
n732.040

Number of correctly received PZD telegrams since Power ON

n732.009
or
n732.041

Number of Bus Off states since Power ON (alarm A084)

n732.019
or
n732.051

Number of correctly transmitted telegrams since Power ON

n732.026
or
n732.058

Software version of CBDs

( e.g. "12 = Version 1.2, see also r060)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Value

Meaning

n732.027
or
n732.059

Software identifier
(extended software version identifier, see also r065)

n732.028
or
n732.060

Date of generation of CBD software (day and month)

th
(e.g. "2508 = 25 August)

n732.029
or
n732.061

Date of generation of CBD software (year)

Fault and alarm messages:

For details about fault messages, see Section 10.
Fault F080
An error occurred as board CBD was being initialized, e.g. incorrect value of a CB
parameter, incorrect bus address or defective board.
Fault F081
The heartbeat counter (counter on CBD) which is monitored by SIMOREG for "signs of life"
from the board has not changed for at least 800 ms.
Fault F082
Failure of PZD telegrams or a fault in the transmission channel.
Alarm A081
Idle condition alarm; a PZD telegram of length = 0 has been received either in the "poll" or
"bit strobe I/O message channel". The alarm is reset when a PZD telegram of normal length
is received.
Faulty CAN messages of this type are ignored. The last transmitted data remain valid.
Alarm A083 (error alarm)
Telegrams containing errors are being received or transmitted and the error counter on the
supplementary board has exceeded the alarm limit.
The faulty telegrams are ignored. The last transmitted data remain valid. If the faulty
telegrams contain process data, fault message F082 with fault value 10 may be generated
as a function of the telegram failure time set in U722.
Alarm A084
Faulty DeviceNet CAN telegrams have been received or transmitted, causing the internal
error counter to overrun.
Faulty CAN messages of this type are ignored. The last transmitted data remain valid.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-53

Start-Up

7.7.8

05.2007

Sequence of operations for starting up the serial I/O board (SCB1):

With the power supply disconnected, insert the SCB1 board into slot 2 (or, if you have
installed a technology board, into slot 3).

Set bus address on SCI using DIP-Fix switch S1 (each SCI slave requires its own address
number):
Slave 1

Slave 2

Address number

Switch setting S1

open

closed

Mount the interface board(s) on the rail, make the connection to the 24 V power supply and
the fiber optic connection between SCB1 and SCI.

The SCB1 board is used in conjunction with the SIMOREG DC-MASTER only as the master
for SCI slaves.
Depending on the type of SCI slaves used and the functions required, the following
parameters are relevant with respect to board operation (for details, see function diagrams
in Section 7, and parameter list in Section 11):
-

U690 Configuration of analog inputs of SCI1

The type of input signal for each input is parameterized via the indices.

- U691 Smoothing time constant of analog inputs of SCI1

Filtering of the input signal for each input is parameterized via the indices.

7-54

U692 Zero calibration of analog inputs of SCI1

The input signal for each input is zero calibrated via the indices.

U693 Actual value output via analog outputs of SCI1

A connector number is selected via the indices to define the output quantity at each
output.

U694 Gain of analog outputs of SCI1

The gain for each output is parameterized via the indices.

U695 Zero calibration of analog outputs of SCI1

The output signal for each output is zero calibrated via the indices.

U698 Binector selection for binary outputs of SCI1

Selection of binectors whose states are output via the binary outputs of the SCIs.

Display parameters n697 (diagnostic information) and n699 (display of input/output data)
facilitate troubleshooting during start-up.

Switch the electronics power supply off and on again or set U710.001 or U710.002 to "0" to
transfer the values of parameters U690 to U698 to the supplementary board.
Note: This initialization process will interrupt the communication of any supplementary board
that has already been started up.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Option board SCB1 (Serial Communication Board 1) is used to link the SIMOREG DC-MASTER
6RA70 to board SCI1 or SCI2 (Serial Communication Interface) using a fiber optic connection
(recommendation: Siemens plastic fiber optic cable, CA-1V2YP980/1000,200A or Siemens glassfiber cable, CLY-1V01S200/230,10A). These boards can be used if the CUD2 terminal expansion
module is not large enough or safe electrical isolation via fiber optics is an absolute necessity.
This board only allows the SCB1 master to exchange data with the SCI slaves. Data cannot be
exchanged between the SCI slaves themselves.
A maximum of 2 SCIs, of either the same or different types, can be connected to the SCB1.
SCI1 or SCI2 are terminal expansion boards which are mounted on a rail outside the SIMOREG
DC-MASTER and supplied with 24 V DC voltage (-17% +25%, 1A) from an external source.
The interface boards extend the converter by the following additional inputs/outputs:
SCI1

SCI2

10 binary inputs

16 binary inputs

8 binary outputs

12 binary outputs

3 analog inputs
3 analog outputs
Reception of SCI data by the SCB1 or transmission to the SCIs is synchronized, i.e. the data of two
slaves is received simultaneously or transmitted simultaneously.
Details about the functions and connections of inputs and outputs are shown in the function
diagrams in Section 8.

CAUTION
SCI boards have no external enclosure to protect them against direct contact or ingress of
pollutants. To protect them against damage, they must be installed in a housing or in the
control cabinet of a higher-level system.
The maximum permissible length of fiber optic cables is 10m.
An input filter must be fitted for the external power supply of the interface boards.
Ground SCI at X80 using a short lead.
Analog inputs on SCI1: Only the voltage input or the current input may be used for each
channel.
Analog outputs on SCI1: Only the voltage input or the current input may be used for each
channel. The outputs are short-circuit-proof.
The binary driver outputs are short-circuit-proof. Relays may only be connected to these
outputs in conjunction with an external power supply.
The binary relay outputs are not designed for protective separation.
To protect them against static discharge, the boards may only be placed on conductive
surfaces.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-55

Start-Up

05.2007

Recommended circuit for connecting SCB1 to SCI1 and SCI2 using fiber optic cables:

SCB1
U121

U425

U125

U435

U421

X428

24V

SCI2

SCI1
X429

U431

X427

X439

X438

X437

WARNING
If the 24 V voltage supply for an SCI slave fails which data are being exchanged between the
SCB1 and an SCI, then the "1" signal applied at a binary input is sent to the SCB1 or
SIMOREG as an "0" shortly before the power finally fails.
In contrast, the "1" remains applied in the SIMOREG in the event of an interruption in the fiber
optic connection.
If an external voltage (logical "1") has already been applied to a binary input when the electronics
supply voltage is switched on, this status will not be registered until the external voltage is
disconnected and reconnected again.

7.7.8.1

Diagnostic tools:
LED display on SCB1:
LED on
LED flashing
LED off

Reset state
Normal operation
Error

LED display on SCI1 or SCI2 slave:

LED on
LED flashing

LED off

Reset state
12Hz frequency No telegram traffic (e.g. fiber optic cable not
connected)
5Hz frequency Faulty telegram traffic (e.g. fiber optic ring
interrupted or other slave has no supply
voltage)
0.5Hz frequency Normal operation
Error

Details about fault or alarm messages which may occur in relation to SCB1 or SCI (F070 to F079
and A049 and A050) can be found in Section 10.

7-56

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

7.7.9

Start-Up

Structure of request/response telegrams

There is no basic difference between the useful data area in the request and response telegrams
for PROFIBUS and CAN Bus. There are differences, for example, in the protocol frame and in the
sequence in which H and L bytes are transmitted. The structures shown here are those of a
SIMOREG DC-MASTER n735, for example. The structure of the protocol frame and the
transmission sequence of bytes are therefore described where necessary in the sections
containing the start-up description for the appropriate board.
Each request and each response basically comprises three areas apart from the telegram frame
with header and trailer:
Header

Parameter identifier
PKE

Index
IND

Parameter value
PWE

Trailer

The parameter identifier (PKE) contains a request or response identifier (i.e. type of request or
response) and the number of the addressed parameter. The spontaneous signaling bit SPM (bit11)
is not used on the SIMOREG DC-MASTER.
Header

Task/ response
identifier

Parameter identifier
PKE

SPM

Index
IND

Parameter value
PWE

Trailer

Parameter number (PNU)

Bits 0 to 10 contain the number of the parameter specified in the request.

Owing to the length restriction of the bit field (11 bits), a parameter number (PNU) higher than
1999 must be converted to another code for use in the parameter identifier; the Page Select Bit in
the index is used for this purpose:
Parameter
area
Basic unit
Technology
board

Displayed
number
Pxxx, rxxx
Uxxx, nxxx
Hxxx, dxxx
Lxxx, cxxx

Input on OP1S
0 - 999
2000 - 2999
1000 - 1999
3000 - 3999

PNU in parameter
identifier
0 - 999
0 - 999
1000 - 1999
1000 - 1999

Page Select Bit

(index bit 15)
0
1
0
1

In the case of a request, for example, which specifies parameter U280 (2280), therefore, PNU =
280 must be entered in the parameter identifier and bit 15 set in the index.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

7-57

Start-Up

05.2007
Bits 12 to 15 contain the request identifier or the associated response identifier as shown in the
following list:
Request
identifier

Meaning

No request

Request parameter value (word or double word)

1 or 2

Modify parameter value (word)

Modify parameter value (double word)

Request descriptive element

Reserved

Request parameter value (array) (word or double word)

4 or 5

Modify parameter value (array - word)

Modify parameter value (array-double word)

Request number of array elements

Reserved

Modify parameter value (array-double word) and store in EEPROM

Modify parameter value (array-word) and store in EEPROM

Modify parameter value (double word) and store in EEPROM

Modify parameter value (word) and store in EEPROM

Request text

Response identifier

positive

negative

7 or 8

If the drive has been unable to process the request, it does not return the associated response
identifier, but error identifier 7 (or 8) instead.
In this case, an error code defining the error in more detail as shown in the following list is returned
as a parameter value:
Error code

7-58

Meaning

Illegal parameter number (PNU)

No PNU specified

Parameter value cannot be modified

Visualization parameter

Lower or upper value limit violated

Faulty subindex

Parameter is not indexed (no array)

Incorrect data type

Parameter value can only be reset

Descriptive element cannot be modified

PPO Write (acc. to "Information Report") is not available

Parameter description is not available

Incorrect access level

No parameterizing enable (P927)

Keyword missing

Text cannot be read cyclically

No text

PPO Write missing

Incorrect operating state

Value cannot be read cyclically

101

Parameter number currently deactivated

102

Channel not wide enough

Key parameter P051 incorrectly set

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Start-Up
Error code

Meaning

103

PKW number incorrect

Applies only to serial interfaces

104

Illegal parameter value

Applies to BiCo selection parameters

105

Indexed parameter

106

Request not implemented in drive

107

Text cannot be modified

108

Incorrect number of parameter values

Applies to "Change all indices" request

The index IND contains a "0" for non-indexed parameters; a 8-bit long index value is entered (in
the low-order byte) for indexed parameters.
Bit 15 (Page Select bit) has a special function. This is used to identify parameter numbers higher
than 1999 (see above for details of recoding parameter numbers).
Exception: In the case of cyclical PROFIBUS services, the L and H byte sequence is reversed (see
"Start-up of PROFIBUS boards").

Header

Parameter identifier
PKE

Bit
15

Index
IND

Index, H byte

Parameter value
PWE

Trailer

Index, L byte

An index value of 255 means that the request applies to all indices of the relevant parameter. In the
case of a modification request, the parameter values for all indices of the parameter must be
transferred. Conversely, the drive supplies all index values in its response to a read request.
The parameter value PWE is treated like a double word (PWE1 and PWE2). The high word is set
to 0 when a single word is transferred.

Header

Parameter identifier
PKE

Index
IND

PWE1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Parameter value
PWE

Trailer

PWE2

7-59

Start-Up

05.2007

7.7.10 Transmission of double-word connectors for technology and

communication modules
In the receive direction, the values of two adjacent connectors (K) are combined to form a single
double-word connector (KK) (e.g. K3002 and K3003 to KK3032). These double-word connectors
can themselves be connected to other function blocks in the usual way. For details of how to
connect double-word connectors, see Section 9.1, subsection, " The following rules apply to the
selection of double-word connectors ".
In the transmit direction, a double-word connector is applied by entering the same double-word
connector in two contiguous indices of the selection parameter.
Example:
U734
K0032

KK9498

9498

KK9498

9498

K0401

401

U734
K0032

7-60

KK9498

9498

KK9499

9499

K0401

401

.01

Word

.02

L-Word

.03

H-Word

.04

.01

Word

.02

H-Word

.03

(Technology software in the basic converter, S00 option)

Page

B100
B101

Table of contents........................................................................................................ 8-60

Startup of the technology software (option S00)........................................................ 8-61

Monitoring
B110

Voltage monitor for electronics power supply ............................................................ 8-62

Fixed values
B110
100 Fixed values ............................................................................................................... 8-62
Alarm, fault messages
B115
32 Fault message triggers............................................................................................... 8-63
8 Alarm message triggers ............................................................................................. 8-63
Connector / binector converters
B120
3 Connector / binector converters ................................................................................. 8-64
B121
3 Binector / connector converters ................................................................................. 8-65
Mathematical functions
B125
15 Adders / subtractors ...................................................................................................
4 Sign inverters..............................................................................................................
2 Switchable sign inverters............................................................................................
B130
12 Multipliers ...................................................................................................................
B131
6 Dividers.......................................................................................................................
3 High-resolution multipliers / dividers ..........................................................................
B135
4 Absolute-value generators with filter ..........................................................................

8-66
8-66
8-66
8-67
8-68
8-68
8-70

Limiters, limit-value monitors

B134
3 Limiters ....................................................................................................................... 8-69
B135
3 Limiters ....................................................................................................................... 8-70
B136
3 Limit-value monitors with filter .................................................................................... 8-71
B137,B138 7 Limit-value monitors without filter ......................................................................... 8- 72,73
Processing of connectors
B139
4 Averagers ................................................................................................................... 8-74
B140
4 Maximum selections................................................................................................... 8-75
4 Minimum selections.................................................................................................... 8-75
B145
2 Tracking / storage elements ....................................................................................... 8-76
2 Connector memories .................................................................................................. 8-76
B150
15 Connector changeover switches ................................................................................. 8-77
High-resolution blocks
B151
2 limit-value monitors (for double-word connectors) ..................................................... 8-78
2 connector-type converters.......................................................................................... 8-78
2 adders/subtractors (for double-word connectors) ...................................................... 8-78
Position/positional deviation acquisition, Root extractor
B152
1 Position/positional deviation acquisition...................................................................... 8-79
B153
1 Root extractor .............................................................................................................. 8-80
Control elements
B155
3 Integrators .................................................................................................................. 8-81
3 DT1 elements ............................................................................................................. 8-81
B156... 10 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks)............................................... 8-82...84
B158
Characteristics
B160
9 Characteristic blocks .................................................................................................. 8-85
B161
3 Dead zones ................................................................................................................ 8-86
1 Setpoint branching ..................................................................................................... 8-86
Ramp-function generator
B165
1 Simple ramp-function generator................................................................................. 8-87
Controllers
B170
1 Technology controller ................................................................................................. 8-88
B180... 10 PI controllers........................................................................................................ 8-89...98
B189
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

8-3

Function diagrams

05.2007
Page

Velocity / speed calculators, variable inertia

B190
1 Velocity / speed calculator.......................................................................................... 8-99
1 Speed / velocity calculator.......................................................................................... 8-99
B191
1 Calculation variable inertia ....................................................................................... 8-100
Multiplexers for connectors
B195
3 Multiplexer ................................................................................................................. 8-101
Counter
B196

1 16-bit software counter .............................................................................................. 8-102

Logical functions
B200
2 Decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8 ..............................................................
B205
28 AND elements with 3 inputs each.............................................................................
B206
20 OR elements with 3 inputs each...............................................................................
4 EXCLUSIVE OR elements with 2 inputs each .........................................................
B207
16 Inverters....................................................................................................................
12 NAND elements with 3 inputs each ..........................................................................
B210
14 RS flipflops................................................................................................................
B211
4 D flipflops ..................................................................................................................
B215
6 Timers (0.000...60.000s) ..........................................................................................
B216
4 Timers (0.00...600.00s) ............................................................................................
5 Binary signal selector switches.................................................................................

8-103
8-104
8-105
8-105
8-106
8-106
8-107
8-108
8-109
8-110
8-110

NOTE
Freely assignable function blocks are enabled in parameter U977.
For enabling instructions, please refer to Section 11, Parameter List, description of parameters
U977 and n978.

Optional supplementary boards

Page

Z100
Z110
Z111
Z112
Z113
Z114
Z115
Z116
Z117
Z118
Z119
Z120
Z121
Z122
Z123
Z124
Z130
Z131
Z135
Z136
Z140
Z141
Z145
Z146
Z150
Z151
Z155
Z156

8-111
8-112
8-113
8-114
8-115
8-116
8-117
8-118
8-119
8-120
8-121
8-122
8-123
8-124
8-125
8-126
8-127
8-128
8-129
8-130
8-131
8-132
8-133
8-134
8-135
8-136
8-137
8-138

8-4

Table of contents ................................................................................................................

Data exchange with a technology board (TB) or the 1st communications board (CB) .......
Data exchange with the 2nd communications board (CB)...................................................
1st EB1: Analog inputs.........................................................................................................
1st EB1: Analog outputs ......................................................................................................
1st EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs- / outputs, 3 digital inputs ....................................................
2nd EB1: Analog inputs........................................................................................................
2nd EB1: Analog outputs......................................................................................................
2nd EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs- / outputs, 3 digital inputs ...................................................
1st EB2: Analog input, Analog output, 2 digital inputs, 4 relay outputs ...............................
2nd EB2: Analog input, Analog output, 2 digital inputs, 4 relay outputs ..............................
SBP pulse encoder evaluation............................................................................................
SIMOLINK board: Configuration, diagnosis........................................................................
SIMOLINK board: Receiving, transmitting ..........................................................................
OP1S operator panel ..........................................................................................................
Interfaces: connector-type converters ................................................................................
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary inputs ..........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary inputs ..........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary outputs ........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary outputs ........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary inputs ..........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary inputs ..........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary outputs ........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary outputs ........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog inputs .........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog inputs .........................................................................
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog outputs .......................................................................
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog outputs .......................................................................

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

P046 (0)
B
B
B
B

P697.B (1)
B

P818 (1)
B

B0161

K0040

B0202

KK9498

K0401

r045.02

.01
.02
.03
.04

P462.F(10,00s)
0,01...300,00s
Ramp-up time

(see also Section 9.1)

Selection of binectors via "indexed" parameter

Factory setting in parentheses
Setting range = all binector numbers
Selected binectors for each index can be specified

Selection of a binector
Factory setting in parentheses
".B" = Parameter in BICO data set
Setting range = all binary numbers
Selected binector can be specified in symbol

Selection of a binector
Factory setting in parentheses
Setting range = all binector numbers
Selected binector can be specified in symbol

Identifier for a freely assignable

function block
(Number of function block)

Binector assigned to a fixed quantity

(i.e. not optional)

Connector assigned to a fixed quantity

(i.e. not optional)

Binector
(freely connectable binary signal)

Double-word connector
(freely connectable 32-bit value)

Connector
(freely connectable 16-bit value)

Display parameter
Parameter number = r045
.02 = index 2 of parameter

Setting parameter
Factory setting in parentheses
".F"= parameter in a function parameter set
0.00...300.00s = setting range

Key to symbols

[G152.1]

P510 (0)
KK

FS
.01
141
.02
0

KK9498

K0401

KK9498

U181 (0)
KK9498
U181
KK 401
P044
K 9498

y (Word) = HIGH word of x (KK9498)

y - LOW word = 0
y - HIGH word = x (K0401)

y - LOW word = LOW word of x (KK9498)

y - HIGH word = HIGH word of x (KK9498)

- 000 -

Reference to another sheet in function diagrams, destination symbol

[Sheet.Column]

Selection of a double-word connector

Factory setting in parentheses
Setting range = all connector numbers
Selected connector can be specified in symbol

Selection of connectors via "indexed" parameter

Factory settings differ for each index
Setting range = all connector numbers
Selected connectors for each index
can be specified in symbol

Selection of connectors via "indexed" parameter

Factory setting in parentheses
Setting range = all connector numbers
Selected connectors for each index
can be specified in symbol

Selection of a connector
Factory setting in parentheses
Setting range = all binector numbers
Selected connector can be specified in symbol

Selection of binectors via "indexed" parameter

Factory settings differ for each index
Setting range = all binector numbers
Selected binectors for each index can be specified in symbol

Selection of double-word connectors:

P601
K

P606 (9)
K
K
K
.01
.02
.03
.04

FS
.01
500
.02
510
.03
1

P510 (2)
K

U320
B
B
B

05.2007
Function diagrams

Key to symbols

8-5

8-6

Legend :

Additional setpoint
before r-f generator

= Parameterizable connection
/disconnection points

abcd

[G136]

a ... Analog input

b ... Serial interface
c ... Basic converter function
d ... Supplementary board

Additional setpoint
before r-f generator
from

[G135]

Setpoint
limiting
[G136]

Actual value
speed controller

EMF
actual value
generation

EMF
setpoint
generation

Precontrol

[G165]

EMF controller

Additional setpoint
EMF controller

[G160]

Torque limiting

Current limiting

[G162]

Current limiting
[G165]

Current
controller

Precontrol

[G166]

Current
controller

Field current
actual value

Field current
limits

[G161]

Actual value
armature current
controller

Armature
current limits

Additional field
current setpoint

Current
setpoint
generation

Additional
current setpoint

Torque limits

Additional
torque setpoint

[G151, G152]

Speed
controller

Additional setpoint
speed controller

Setpoint limiting
speed controller
Additional
setpoint speed
controller limiting

Ramp-functiongenerator Ramp-function
setpoint limiting
generator

Additional
setpoint

Setpoint limiting
ramp-function generator

equals

[G110 - G130]

Setpoint
processing

Overview

Additional setpoint
before r-f generator

Main
setpoint

[G166]

Field gating
unit

[G163]

Armature
gating unit

- G100 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Basic functions Sheets G100 to G200

Sheet G100 Overview

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

P067

P075

P076

P077

P078

r068

r069

r070

r071

r072

r073

r074

Load class

Control word for

power section

Reduction of converter
rated DC current

Total thermal
reduction factor

Reduction of converter
rated supply voltage

Options according to rating plate

Serial number

MLFB (order number)

Converter rated
supply voltage (armature)

Converter rated
DC current (armature)

Converter rated
DC current (field)

Converter rated
supply voltage (field)

Definition of SIMOREG DC Master power section

Hardware configuration

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
1

U910.002

U910.003

U910.004

U910.005

Select / deselect slots

Creation date
of software
.001 Year
.002 Month
.003 Day
.004 Hour
.005 Minute
r061

.001 CUD
.002 Slot D
.003 Slot E
.004 Slot F
.005 Slot G
r060

r064.001

r064.005

r064.004

Board in location 1

Board in slot G

Board in slot F

Board in slot E

Board in slot D

Software

.001 Converter firmware

.002 Boot sector
r062

Checksum

r065.001

r065.005

r065.004

r065.003

r065.002

r064.002

r064.003

Software identifiers

Board compatibility

Software version

r063.001

r063.005

r063.004

r063.003

r063.002

Board code

- G101 -

Arrangement of board
locations 1 to 3 and slots
D to G in electronics box

CUDx

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G101 Hardware configuration

8-7

8-8

Binary inputs (1)

X171

CUD1

24V

P24_S

K0020

r010

40
39

B0017

IRES (to sheet "Pulse encoder evaluation")

[G145.2]
B0016

B0015

Enable operation (to sheet "Control word 1")

[G180.2]
B0014

B0013

EStop 214 213 212 211

Switch-on/Shutdown (to Sheet "Crawling setpoint / Terminal 37")

[G130.1]
B0012

B0011

B0010

Display of terminal states on 7-segment display

- G110 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G110 Binary inputs terminals 36 to 39

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Binary inputs (2)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
43

X163

CUD2

24V

P24_S

[G145.2]

B0025

B0024

B0023

B0022

B0021

B0020

B0019

B0018

Enable counter for zero markers

(to sheet "Pulse encoder evaluation")

For display of terminal states on

7-segment display, see block
diagram "Binary inputs (1)"

- G111 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G111 Binary inputs terminals 40 to 43

8-9

8-10

P774 (0)
B

P773 (0)
B

P772 (0)
B

P771 (0)
B

Binary outputs

ON/OFF delay

T
1

<1>

K0021

r011

<1> With log. "1": Output transistor is conductive

Inversion

P770.04 (0)

P778 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

Inversion

ON/OFF delay

P770.03 (0)

P777 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

Inversion

ON/OFF delay

P770.02 (0)

P776 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

P770.01 (0)

Inversion

ON/OFF delay

P775 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

P24

X163

CUD2

X171

CUD1

109
110
52

- G112 -

r011
Indication of terminal states on 7-segment display

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G112 Binary outputs terminals 46/47, 48/54, 50/51 and 52/53

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

104

103

u
10V

i
20mA
7

Analog select
input 1

X174

Analog input
main
actual value

CUD1

i
20mA
5

PowerInterface

u
10V

Analog select
input
main setpoint

CUD1 X174

2 1 0

8 - 270V

2 1 0

Signal type
P710 (0)

A
D

100%
100%
100%

Open circuit
(i 2mA)

K0010

* 100%

P701

Normalization Offset
P701.F(100,0) P702 (0,00)

0
1
2

Open circuit
(i 2mA)

K0014

* 100%

P711

Normalization Offset
P711.F(100,0) P712 (0,00)

K0012

Offset
P742 (0,00)

1 = "Fault F047"

B0051

-1

P713 (0)

-1

P743 (0)

-1

P703 (0)

0%
0%
0%

Signal type Normalization Offset

1 = "Fault F046"

B0050

Resolution
P717 (12Bit)

10V =100%
20mA=100%

HardwareSmoothing 1ms

1ms

Signal type
P700 (0)

10V =100%
20mA=100%

HardwareSmoothing 1ms

Resolution
P707 (12Bit)

Kxxxx
-100% ... +100%
-100% ... +100%
0 ... +100%

I
---20...+20mA
4 ... 20mA

-10V ... +10V

-----

Normalization
P741.F (60,00)

2 1 0

Analog inputs (1)

-1
1

-1

Sign reversal

P714 (0)
B

Sign reversal

P744 (0)
B

Sign reversal

P704 (0)
B

Filtering

Filter time [ms]

P715 (0)

Filtering

Filter time [ms]

P745 (0)

Filtering

Filter time [ms]

P705 (0)

P716 (1)
B

P746 (1)
B

P706 (1)
B

r003

r002

Switch in
analog input

r001

K0011

- G113 -

K0015

[G151.1]

K0013

[G127.2]

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G113 Analog inputs terminals 4/5, 6/7, and 103/104

8-11

8-12

u
10V

Analog select
input 3

u
10V

Analog select
input 2

X164

CUD2

(to ground)

Analog inputs (2)

10V = 100%

Hardwaresmoothing

1ms

Hardwaresmoothing

1ms

K0018

* 100%

P731

Normalization Offset
P731.F(100,0) P732 (0,00)

K0016

* 100%

P721

Normalization Offset
P721.F(100,0) P722 (0,00)

-1

P733 (0)

-1

P723 (0)

-1
1

-1

Sign reversal

P734 (0)
B

Sign reversal

P724 (0)
B

Filtering

Filter time [ms]

P735 (0)

Filtering

Filter time [ms]

P725 (0)

P736 (1)
B

P726 (1)
B

Switch in
analog input

r005

r004

- G114 -

K0019

K0017

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G114 Analog inputs terminals 8/9 and 10/11

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

P755 (0)
K

P750 (0)
K

CUD1

-1

P756 (0)

-1

P751 (0)

Analog outputs (1)

Filter time
(0...10000ms)
P757 (0)

Filter time
(0...10000ms)
P752 (0)

r007

r006

Internal
actual current

K0027

x
y [V] =
* P758
100%

Normalization
-200,00...+199,99V
P758 (10,00)

K0026

x
y [V] =
* P753
100%

Normalization
-200,00...+199,99V
P753 (10,00)

-1

P749 (0)

Actual current display

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
P759 (0,00)

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
P754 (0,00)

1ms

Uout [V] =

X175

* normalization [V] + offset [V]

actual current

- G115 -

* normalization [V] + offset [V]

Analog output 2

100%

K0027

Analog output 1

100%

K0026

lact

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G115 Analog outputs terminals 12/13, 14/15, and 16/17

8-13

8-14

P765 (0)
K

P760 (0)
K

CUD2

-1

P766 (0)

-1

P761 (0)

Analog outputs (2)

Filter time
(0...10000ms)
P767 (0)

Filter time
(0...10000ms)
P762 (0)

r009

r008

x
x
* P763
100%

K0029

y [V] =

x
* P768
100%

Normalization
-200,00...+199,99V
P768 (10,00)

K0028

y [V] =

Normalization
-200,00...+199,99V
P763 (10,00)

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
P769 (0,00)

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
P764 (0,00)

Uout [V] =

X164

* normalization [V] + offset [V]

- G116 -

* normalization [V] + offset [V]

Analog output 4

100%

K0029

Analog output 3

100%

K0028

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G116 Analog outputs terminals 18/19 and 20/21

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Reset
E Stop

Initiate
E Stop

108

Power
Interface

108

107

105

106

Initiate
E Stop

"E Stop" switch

(NC contact)

106

105

Switch operation

Either terminal 105 or terminals 107 + 108 may be used!

Terminal 105 is connected to terminal 106 in the delivery state.

NOTICE

"Reset E Stop" button

(NO contact)

"E Stop"button
(NC contact)

24 V

Pushbutton operation

E-Stop, relay output line contactor

24 V

U619.B(124)
B
[G182.6]

r011

Power
ON

U616

K0021

0 1

E Stop
0 = E Stop
1 = no E Stop

B0168

B0169

109
110

Line contactor

PowerInterface

110

109

- G117 -

Instantaneous pulse disable on E Stop

[G163.6]
[G180.2]

to sheet "Control word 1"

[G180.2]

r011
Indication of terminal states on 7-segment display

energize line contactor

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G117 E-Stop, Relay output line contactor

8-15

8-16

P411.F (0,00)

P410.F (0,00)

P409.F (0,00)

P408.F (0,00)

P407.F (0,00)

P406.F (0,00)

P405.F (0,00)

P404.F (0,00)

P403.F (0,00)

P402.F (0,00)

K0411

K0410

K0409

K0408

K0407

K0406

K0405

K0404

K0403

K0402

K0401

P416.F (0)

P415.F (0)

P414.F (0)

P413.F (0)

K0416

K0415

K0414

K0413

K0412

setting range
-32768 to +32767
P412.F (0)

5 fixed values

setting range
-199.99 to +199.99%

11 fixed values

P401.F (0,00)

P428.F (0)

P427.F (0)

P426.F (0)

P425.F (0)

P424.F (0)

P423.F (0)

P422.F (0)

B0428

B0427

B0426

B0425

B0424

B0423

B0422

B0421

8 fixed control bits

P421.F (0)

-150,00%

-50,00 %

150,00 %

50,00 %

-200,00%

-100,00 %

200,00 %

100,00 %

0,00 %

B0001

B0000

K0008

K0007

K0006

K0005

K0004

K0003

K0002

K0001

K0000

- G120 -

Constant fixed values

and control bits

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G120 Fixed values, fixed control bits, constant fixed values and control bits

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07

r043.07

r043.06

r043.05

r043.04

r043.03

r043.02

r043.01

P042 (0)
K
K

.01
.02

300 ms

Display in % (-200.0 to 199.9 %)

r041.02

r041.01

High-resolution connector displays

with filtering

K
K
K

P044 (0)
K
K
K

Display in % (-200.0 to 199.9 %)

Connector displays

K
K

U044 (0)
K
K
K
.01
.02
.03
.04
.05

n045.05

P046 (0)
B
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03
.04

K
K

U046 (0)
K
K
K
.01
.02
.03
.04
.05

n047.05

n047.04

n047.03

n047.02

n047.01

Display hexadecimal (0000h to FFFFh)

r045.04

r045.03
r045.02

r045.01

Binector displays

n045.04

n045.03

n045.02

n045.01

Display decimal (-32768 to 32767)

- G121 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G121 Connector and binector displays

8-17

8-18
K

P457 (0)
K
K

P458 (0)
B
B

.03

.01
.02

.03

.01
.02

P455 (0)
K
K
K

.01
.02

P456 (0)
B
B

Connector selector switch

K0231

K0230

- G124-

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G124 Connector selector switch

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
SR

U660 (0)
B

Travel command 1

U664 (0)
B

Setpoint step S4

U661 (0)

U663 (0)
B

Setpoint step S3

Travel command 2

U662 (0)
B

Setpoint step S2

U665

SL / SR

e.g. 20%
Slow
S2

Medium

e.g. 50%

U666

Output signal = K510

Speed setpoint in 4 steps

Fast

e.g. 80%

1
0%
0

-1

Input signals
= Control commands from the master switch
= Activation of the setpoint steps

Full

e.g. 100%

U668

U668(100,00%)

U667

U665(10,00%) U666(25,00%) U667(40,00%)

Evaluation of a 4-step master switch

Setpoint of the 4-position

master switch

K0510

- G125 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G125 Evaluation of a 4-step master switch

8-19

8-20

Increase motorized potentiometer

from control word 1
Bit13 [G180.6]

Decrease motorized potentiometer

from control word1
Bit14 [G180.6]

(Capacitor symbolizes
value memory)

P469.F(-100,00%) P468.F(+100,00%)
(-199,99...+199,99%) (-199,99...+199,99%)
MOP min.
MOP max.

P461.F (0)
K

Automatic setpoint

Motorized potentiometer

Manual/Automatic

Clockwise
/Counterclockwise

P471.B (0)
B

P470.B (0)
B

* -1

Set motorized
potentiometer

P472.B (0)
B

P466.F (0)
K

Setting value

K0242

0 ... No storage of output value :

K240 is set to 0 in all operating states of > o5
The starting point after ON is specified by P467 (MOP starting value)
1 ... Non-volatile storage of output value :
K240 remains stored in all operating states

P473.F (0)

0 ... The motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator is bypassed in

automatic mode (effect as for P462 and P463 = 0)
1 ... The motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator is effective in
the manual and automatic modes

P460.F (1)

Motorized potentiometer operating mode

P467.F(0,0)
(-199,9...+199,9%)
MOP Starting value

Ramp-function generator
with permanent memory

dy/dt

P462.F(10,00s)
P463.F(10,00s)
(0,01...300,00s)
(0,01...300,00s)
Acceleration time Decelerartion time

y=x

y=0

K0240

K0241

P465.F(0)
(0 or 1)

- G126 -

Acceleration/deceleration
completed

B0241

Output = 0

B0240

Setpoint from
motorized potentiometer

60 1

P464.F(10,00s)
(0,01...300,00s)
Time difference

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G126 Motorized potentiometer

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

[G113.8]

P433.F (11)
K

Select
setpoint
P431 (0)
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K

Select injection
of fixed
setpoint
P430 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

Select fixed setpoint 1

from control word 2
[G181.5]

Select fixed setpoint 0

from control word 2
[G181.5]

Fixed setpoint

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08

0
1

P432.08

0
1

&
&

P432.01

P432.02

P432.03

P432.04

P432.05

P432.06

P432.07

1
[G128.3]

K0209

K0204

to sheet "Ramp-function generator"

[G136.4]

Bypass ramp-function generator

- G127 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G127 Fixed setpoint

8-21

8-22
3

[G127.7]

P484.F(209)

Oscillating / square-wave generator

Setpoint2
P482.F

P481.F
Time1

P481

P480
t
P482

P483.F
Time2

P483

Square-wave generator
%

Setpoint1
P480.F

P485.B (0)
B

Oscillation

Oscillating setpoint

K0203

K0208
[G129.2]

- G128 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G128 Oscillation, square-wave generator

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

P438.F(208)
K
[G128.6]

P436 (0)
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K

Select
setpoint

P435 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

Select injection
of inching
setpoint

Inching, bit 1
from control word 1
[G180.6]

Inching, bit 0
from control word 1
[G180.6]

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08

Inching setpoint

0
1

P437.08

0
1

&
&

P437.01

P437.02

P437.03

P437.04

P437.05

P437.06

P437.07

ON command [G130.7]
from ON/OFF1
(from sheet
"Crawling setpoint")

[G136.4]

to sheet "Ramp-function generator"

Bypass ramp-function generator

6
7

[G130.2]

K0207

K0202

[G180.2]

On command
from INCH
(to control word 1)

- G129 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G129 Inching setpoint

8-23

8-24

Selection
for shutdown

P444.B (0)
B

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08

P443.F(207)
K
[G129.7]

Select
crawling setpoint
P441 (0)
.01
K
.02
K
.03
K
.04
K
.05
K
.06
K
.07
K
.08
K

P440 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

Select
injection of
crawling setpoint

Switch-on/shutdown
from terminal 37
(from Sheet "Binary inputs 1")

[G110.5]

P654.B (1)
B

Selection for
switch-on/shutdown

1
R

D Q
0

<1>

1
....

<1> Flip-Flops are reset when P445=0

D Q

<1>

Level/edge
P445

0
1

P442.06

0
1

&
&

P442.01

P442.02

P442.03

P442.04

P442.05

Crawling setpoint / Terminal 37

P442.07
P442.08

[G180.2]

[G136.4]

[G129.6]

[G180.2]

[G135.1]

K0206

K0201

ON command from
CRAWL
(to control word 1)

- G130 -

to sheet "Ramp-function generator"

Bypass ramp-function generator

to sheet
"Ramp-function generator"

Switch-on command
from ON/OFF1
(to control word 1)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G130 Crawling setpoint / terminal 37

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

P323.F (1)
K

P645.F (0)
K

Additional setpoint

P322.F (1)
K

P644.F(206)
K
[G130.7]

Main setpoint

r029

P321.F (100,00)
(-300,00...300,00 %)

.01 <1>
.02 <1>
.03 <1>
.04 <1>

K0198

.01
.02
.03
.04

Maximum

K0197

K0196

Minimum

<1> When P643.0x=9, the limit

selected via P642.0x acts
with inverted sign as a
negative limit

P643 (9)
K
K
K
K

P320.F (100,00)
(-300,00...300,00 %)

K
K
K
K

P642 (2)

Setpoint processing

K0195

0
K0194

P635.F(194)
K

-1

Enable negative direction of rotation from control word 1

[G180.6]

Enable positive direction of rotation from control word 1

[G180.6]

U607.B (1)
B

U608.F (15,00%)

K0193

no direction of rotation
enabled

B0210

- G135 -

[G136.1]
to ramp-function generator
input

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G135 Setpoint processing

8-25

8-26

[G136.8]

Enable RFG tracking

Select bypass rampfunction generator

[G151.3]

0% 0

ON delay

P319.F (0,00)
(0,00...10,00 s)

P647.B (1)
B

P641.B (0)
B

P646.B (1)
B

P640.B (0)
B

r028

Run
B0104
[G182.6]
Set ramp-function
generator

Setting value

P317.F(0)

RFG tracking

r315.1

Ramp-up time

Ramp-up time
P303.F
P307.F
P311.F

Bypass ramp-function generator from sheets

"Fixed setpoint", "Inching setpoint", "Crawling setpoint"
[G127.6] [129.6] [130.7]

[G180.6]

B0211

K0192

Setpoint

Enable changeover of starting integrator

Enable ramp-function generator from

control word 1 (with "0"-Signal: y=0)

P639 (167)
.01
K
.02
K

B0104
[G182.6]
Enable setpoint from
control word 1
[G180.6]
B0161
[G180.8]
Shutdown

Operating state - -, I or II

RFG output
K0190

from starting integrator control

(see P302)

RFG setting 3

This changeover to RFG settings 2 and 3

has priority over the input of RFG setting 3
by the starting integrator control

RFG-setting 2

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06

Ramp-function generator [G180.6]

start from control word 1
RFG input
[G135.7]
1
K0193

P638.B (0)
B

P637.B (0)
B

P636 (1)
K
K
K
K
K
K

Ramp-function generator (1)

1
Lower transition
rounding
P305.F
P309.F
P313.F

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
7:
15:

B0208

B0207

KK0047

r027

15
6

Display of RFG status on r316

RFG active
to status word 1
[G182.2]

ramp-down

ramp-up

Deceleration distance

K0190

K0191

Time difference [s]

P542.F

Ramp-function generator enable

Ramp-function generator start
Setpoint enable & /OFF1
Set ramp-function generator
Track ramp-function generator
Bypass ramp-function generator
Ramp-down
Ramp-up

y=0

dv/dt

P330.F(0)

P298.F Upper transition rounding

P297.F Lower transition rounding

P296.F Ramp-down time

P295.F Overshoot
P302.F Starting integrator
P318.F Set RFG on shutdown

r316
RFG status

n-act -

n-act +

r315.4

Upper transition
rounding

Ramp-function
generator setting
2
3
0
0
0
1
1
0

Effective times for emergency stop (OFF3):

B0209

r315.3

Lower transition
rounding

Upper transition
rounding
... RFG setting 1 [s]
P306.F
P310.F ... RFG setting 2 [s]
P314.F ... RFG setting 3 [s]

Control parameter

r315.2

Ramp-down time

Parameter selection

Ramp-down time
P304.F
P308.F
P312.F

- G136 -

[G136.1]
[G137.3]

[G153.4]

P303 - P306
P311 - P314
P307 - P310

Effective
parameters

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G136 Ramp-function generator (1)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Limitation after RFG

[G136.8]

P634
K
K

Ramp-function generator (2)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Maximum

Minimum

.01 <1>
.02 <1>
.03 <1>
.04 <1>

.01
.02
.03
.04

P301.F
negative
setpoint limit

positive
setpoint limit
P300.F

<1> When P633.0x = 9, the positive limit

selected via P632.0x acts with inverted
sign as negative limit

P633 (9)
K
K
K
K

FS
.01
190
.02
0

P632 (1)
K
K
K
K

Lowest positive
setpoint limit

Limitation after
RFG has responded
Highest negative
setpoint limit

B0206

K0182

[G152.1][G160.1][G188.1]
Speed setpoint
K0170

K0183

K0181

- G137 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G137 Ramp-function generator (2)

8-27

8-28

Brake control

1 = n<nmin

B0164

Operation

B0104

OFF1 or OFF3
from the sequence control
from control word 1
[G180.6]

[G187.6]

[G182.6]

Automatic restart
(see footnote 1)

P080

Footnote 2:
A negative value in P087 means that the signal "Open brake" is delayed with respect to the enable
for the firing pulses for the thyristor. Only this case is shown in this function diagram.

P087 (0.00)
(-10.00...0.00 s)
[see footnote 2]
Brake opening time

Footnote 1:
The signal "automatic restart" is generated by the sequence control.
If the voltage at the power section fails briefly in the "operating" state (see P086)
(and if automatic restart is selected, i.e. P086 > 0), the "operating" signal goes to log. "0" and
the "automatic restart" signal to log. "1" during this time.
This causes the brake to remain open during this short time without torque.

P088 (0.00)
(0.00...10.00 s)
Delayed firing pulse disable

Priority:
1. RESET
2. SET

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

Firing pulse disable

(1 = firing pulse disabled)

Close brake

B0250

Open brake

B0255

- G140 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G140 Brake control

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

X163

CUD2

Enable counter
for zero markers
(1 = enable)

X171

CUD1

Reset position counter

(dependent on setting
in parameter P450)
(0 = reset)

Zero marker

Track 2

Track 1

Pulse encoder
supply

X173

CUD1

24V

COMP
X>Y

[G111.5]

Pulse encoder evaluation

&
3

P453.B (1)
B

P148.F
Pulse encoder
monitoring
ON/OFF

P452.B (0)
B

P141
No. of
encoder
pulses

Reset
position counter
P450.F

P140
Pulse
encoder
type

Aut.switchover
of multiple
evaluation
P145.F

Pulse encoder evaluation

Multiple
evalution of
encoder signals
P144.F

P451.F
Position counter
hysteresis
<3> Position counter
0=enable
1=reset (K0042, K0043, K0046:=0)
<4> Counter for zero markers
0=reset (K0044:=0)
1=enable

<4>

<3>

B0052

P147.F
Measuring
time

Position sensing

P143.F
Maximum
speed

Speed measurement

Automatic switchover
of measuring time
P146.F

K0040

Actual speed value

from pulse encoder
in rpm

1 = "Fault F048"
with fault value 1

K0048

[G151.1]

Actual speed value

from pulse encoder

Status register

K0912

K0041

Number of pulses

K0911

Measuring time

Position <2>

No. of zero markers

Position HIGH <1>

- G145 -

<2> Value range

8000 0000H to 7FFF FFFFH

<1> Value range

FF80 0000H to 007F FFFFH
(= -8388608 to +8388607 dec)

KK0046
[B152.1]

K0044

K0043

Position LOW <1>

Overflow
B0054
K0042

Underflow
B0053

1 = "Fault F048"
with fault value 2

Pulse encoder faulty

Fault in speed measurement

with pulse encoder

n024.001

r024

8
Raw data of pulse encoder evaluation

K0910

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G145 Pulse generator evaluation

8-29

8-30
3

<1>
U651.F (0,00%)
K0451

U655 (451) <1>

Starting pulse - speed controller

U653.F (0,00%)
<1>

U652.F (50,00%)

K0453

K0452

U656 (452) <1>

U657.B (0)
B

K0454

This connector can be used as a setting

value for the I component of the speed
controller (Sheet G152, P631)

- G150 -

<1> 100% corresponds to 100% of the rated current of the motor (P100)

Rated converter current (r072.002)

Rated motor current (P100.F)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G150 Starting pulse - speed controller

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

P115.F

135,05

* P115

P553.F (0)
K

P083.F

P556.F (0,00)
(0,00 ... 100,00 %)
Adap.point 1

(3,0)
P225.F (3.0)
(0,10 ... 200.00)
200,00)
(0.10
n contr. Kp2

P550.F (3,00)
(0,10 ... 200,00)
n contr. Kp1

Adaptation of the P gain

P609 (0)
K

Internal
actual EMF
value

K0040
[G145.7]

Actual value from

pulse encoder

K0013

[G113.8]
Main actual value

-1

Reverse polarity of actual speed value on field

reversal and applied negative field direction
from Sheet "Field reversal with
SIMOREG single-quadrant device"
[G200.3]

Selection of actual speed value

Speed controller (1)

P555.F (0)
K
x
y

P554.F (0)
K

P560.F (0,00)
(0,00 ... 100,00 %)
Adap.point 2

-1

[G152.6]

- G151 -

Speed controller integration time

to Sheet Speed controller 2

K0176
[G152.3]

dn(droop)

P051

Optimization run
for speed controller

dynamic response of
the speed control loop
P236.F

n contr. Tn(act)
r218

P563.F(-100,00)
(-199,99...0,00%)

P562.F(100,00)
(0,00...199,99%)

n contr. droop Kp (act)

r217

P557.F (0,00)
(0,00 ... 100,00 %)
Adap.point 1

P226.F (0,650)
(0,010 ... 10,000)
n contr. Tn2

P551.F (0,650)
(0,010 ... 10,000)
n contr. Tn1

Adap.point 2

I comp. n contr.

P630 (162)
[G152.7]
K

P561.F (0,00)
(0,00 ... 100,00 %)

Enable droop from

control word 2
[G181.5]

Adap.point 1

P558.F (0,00)
(0,00 ... 100,00 %)

P227.F (0,0)
(0,0 ... 10,0)
n contr. droop Kp2

P552.F (0,0)
(0,0 ... 10,0)
n contr. droop Kp1

Adaptation of the integration time

[G152.6]
Speed controller P gain
to Sheet Speed controller 2

n contr. Kp(act)
r219

Droop (with adaptation)

K0166
[G152.4][G160.1]
[G161.3][G165.2]

K0167
[G152.1]...

P559.F (0,00)
(0,00 ... 100,00 %)
Adap.point 2

r025

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G151 Speed controller (1)

8-31

8-32

P627 (178)
K
[G152.2]

[G152.2]

P629 (177)
K

n(act)

Smooth. n(act)
P200.F (0) (0...10000ms)

K0177

n(act,filter)

P206.F (0) P205.F (0)

(0 ... 100ms) (0 ... 1000ms)
T1
Tv

-1

[G152.1]

K0169

K0168

K0178

n(act,filter)

[G152.1]

K0179
[G152.1]
[G153.1]

n(act, smooth)
P623 (179)
K

[G151.3]
Absolute actual
speed value
P698.B (1)
B

K0166

r023

P234.F (1) 0...1

0 = set P component to zero

Set I-comp. n contr.

P695.B (0)
B

B<A

B0204

Switchover to P controller

Enable speed controller from

control word 2 and sequencing control

[G163.4]

Stop I component when G-limitation,

current limitation, torque limitation, speed
limiting controller reached

Stop I-comp. n contr.

Set.val.I-comp.n contr.

[G181.5]

Speed controller P gain

from Sheet Speed controller 1
[G151.4]

P631 (0)
K

P696.B (0)
B

6
Speed controller integration time
from Sheet Speed controller 1
[G151.7]

P224.F (1) 0...3

Control word for speed
controller I component

P230.F (0) 0...10000 ms

Setting period of I-comp.n contr.

Contr. dev.
P620 (165)
K

Hysteresis
P221.F

K0165

Switchover speed
P222.F

Fast stop

P624 (0)
K

4
Master/slave drive from control word 2:
Make I component follow on slave drive
so that M(set, n contr.) = M(set, limit) and set
speed setpoint = actual speed value (K0179)
[G181.5]
P229.F (0)

[G151.8] P621 (176)

n(set, smooth) P622 (174)

K
K0174
[G153.2]
[G187.2]
r026

P204.F (0) (0...3) P203.F (1) (1...140Hz)

quality
Resonant frequency

P628 (179)
K
[G152.3]

n(act)

Fast stop

P202.F (0) (0...3) P201.F (1) (1...140Hz)

quality
Resonant frequency

P626.F(167)
K
[G151.3]

n(act)

P625.F(170)
K
[G137.5]
0%

n(set,limit)

P228.F (0)
(0 ... 10000 ms)
Smooth. n(set)

Speed controller (2)

r219

r218

K0171

[G153.7]

P502 (0)
K

K0160

K0161

[G151.3]
K0162

[G153.2]
K0164

B0205

K0148

- G152 -

P223.F (0)

M(set,n contr.)
[G160.1]
[G160.2]

P component

I component

Speed controller
setpoint/act. val. deviation

Friction and moment of

inertia compensation

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G152 Speed controller (2)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

[G152.3]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

FS
.01
179
.02
0

-P530

-100%

P520

P521

Friction characteristic
P520.F to P530.F

100%

P530

K0174

[G152.7]

K0164

Setp./act. val. diff.

[G152.3]

n controller setpoint

Threshold
P543.F
P541.F

P540.F

dv/dt * P542
from ramp-function generator
[G136.6]

K0152

K0150

K0191

P619 (191)
K

[G136.8]

Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)

P519
K
K

Friction compensation

Filter time
(0...10000ms)
P546.F (0)

P697.B (1)
B

K0172

Enable dv/dt
injection

K0173

[G152.7]

K0171

- G153 -

Friction moment
and moment of inertia
compensation

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G153 Friction compensation,

Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)

8-33

8-34

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05

B0111
[G182.7]

Emergency stop

<2>With this Parameters, 100% corresponds

to the rated motor armature current (P100)

<1> When P606.0x = 9, the positive limit

selected via P605.0x acts with inverted
sign as a negative limit

.01 <1>
.02 <1>
.03 <1>
.04 <1>
.05 <1>

P172.F(-100,0%)
<2>

K0148

[G152.8]

P084 (1)

M(set, n contr.)

P606 (9)
K
K
K
K
K

P501.B (0)
K

[G137.5]

P500.B(170)
K

P171.F(100,0%)
<2>

B>A

P607.B(148)
K
[G152.8] P503.F(100%)

M(set, n contr.)

P605 (2)
K
K
K
K
K

Torque limit
changeover

P694.B (0)
B

B
[G151.3]
K0166
Absolute actual speed

Changeover speed
P184.F (0,00)

K0147
[G161.1]

Motor flux

K0290

Maximum

P100.F
________
r072.002

[G166.5]

P183.F
<2>

Maximum

P181.F
<2>

Minimum

K0290

[G166.5]
Motor flux

P100.F
________
Minimum r072.002

<2>
P182.F

Master/slave drive
from control word 2
(0 = master, 1 = slave)
[G181.5]

<2>
P180.F

r022
<2>

K0145

x
K0141

B0202
[G163.2]

K0143

K0144

[G163.2]
B0203

r021 <2>

P169.F
[G151.3]

P509 (167)
K

Lower torque
limit active

P601
K
K
FS
.01
141
.02
0

x
y2

[G166.5]

P173.B (0)
B

K0290

Motor flux

Speed limit controller

P515.F (3,00)
(0,10...200,00)
Kp
P513.F (-105,0)
P512.F (105,0)
(-199,9...0,0 %)
(0,0...199,9 %)
n(max,neg. rot.)
n(max,pos. rot.)

(n act)

P511 (4)
K

P510 (2)
K

Upper torque
limit active

Torque limitation, speed limit controller

P170.F (0)

M(set, limit)

K0134
[G161.1]

Iset

[G163.2]

- G160 -

Changeover between
current control and
torque control

Mlimit1(act)

Mlimit2(act)

B0201

Limit controller active

K0140

K0136

K0137

B0193

Neg. speed limit reached

B0192

Pos. speed limit reached

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G160 Torque limitation, speed limit controller

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

B0161

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

FS
.01
1
.02
1
.03
1
.04
1
.05
1
.06
2
.07
2

K0147

FS
.03
134
.04
0

P604 (9)
K
K
K
K
K
K
K

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07

9=neg. signal effective

acc. to P603.xx

[G160.3]

[G160.8]

P601
K
K

Armature current controller

setpoint before current limitation

P603
K
K
K
K
K
K
K

Emergency stop
B0111
[G182.7]

[G180.8]

Shutdown

Min.

Max.

neg. current limit

P172.F *)
(-100,0%)

K0133

pos. current limit

P171.F *)
(100,0%)

Current limitation

P100.F
________
r072.002

Max.

Min.

[G151.3]

K0166

Absolute
actual speed

P077

K0132

Highest pos.current limit

"-Ia_limit"

K0131

0%
(1Q converter)

-150% * P077
(4Q converter)

1Q/4Q converter

-1

Maximum

Minimum

(see Section 9)

Lowest pos.current limit

"+Ia_limit"

P108 (n3)

P107 (i2)

P106 (n2)

P105 (i1)

P104 (n1)

Minimum

It monitoring of
power section

P075

|n act|

Speed-depend. current
limit
I limit

P109 (0)

[G163.2]

B0200

Current limitation active

B0195

Armature
current setpoint

- G161 -

*) With these parameters, 100% corresponds to the

rated motor armature current (P100)

K0120

[G162.1]

Neg. current limit reached

B0194

Pos. current limit reached

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G161 Current limitation

8-35

8-36

r019*)

Overcurrent
monitoring

r072.002
P100.F

K0125

Average value over

6 current peaks

K0114
K0109

P601
K
K

EMF

Calculated EMF
K0124

K0123
0
1
2
3

P162.F (1)

Filtering/
averaging

P163.F (3)

K0117

P602 (117)
K

Pulsating current

FS
.05
125
.06
0

Fault F030

B0057

B0190

K0103

Average value over

6 current peaks *)
Conducting angle

Average value over

1 current peak

K0116

K0107

Actual torque
Absolute actual
armature current

K0149

K0142

Measured actual
EMF value

i a ... measured armature current

Ra P110.F Ua

La P111.F

P158.F
Acceleration time for
reduced gearbox stressing or
current setpoint integrator

K0120

Set armature
current

Switchover between reduced

gearbox stressing and
current setpoint integrator
P157.F

internal actual
armature current

P193 (287)
K

K0290

Motor flux

[G161.8]

[G166.5]

* -1

MII

MI M0

Filter time
P190.F (0)
(0...10000ms)

K0118

Setpoint

K0306

Line frequency

K0305

Line voltage (armature)

Requested torque
direction

K0122

K0119
[G163.1]

r020*)

Actual value
Filter time
P191.F (0)
(0...10000ms)

K0115

P175.F(1)
K

P176.F(1)
K

P156.F

P110.F
Armature
circuit
resistance

I_armature_set

I comp.
K0112

I component :=0

K0121

K0102
[G163.1]

- G162 -

G or W limitation reached
[G163.2] stop I component

[G163.2]

from sheet "Auto-reversing stage,

armature gating unit":

output

P comp.
K0111
K0110

set/actual diff.
K0113

Armature current controller

*) The following applies with these parameters

or connectors:
100% corresponds to the rated
motor armature current (P100)

12-pulse
P079(0) if P079=2
P111.F
Armature
circuit
inductance

V_control_A

Precontrol_armature

Control word
armature precontrol
P153.F

P154.F
0=Reset I
comp.

Current controller-armature

P164.F
0=Reset P
comp.

P155.F

Closed-loop armature current control

Function diagrams
05.2007

P600
K
K
K
K

stop I component

G or W limitation reached

I component :=0

to sheet "Closed-loop armature current control":

[G162.4]

Changeover threshold
P159.F

Limitation active

B0204

P151.F

165

[G152.6]

1 = Torque direction II

B0232

W shift

r018

I=0 signal

0...Enable signal for M0 or MII

1...Enable signal for M0 or MI

P161
P160

[G117.7]

fire all thyristors

simultaneously
P178.B (0)
B

P177.B (1)
B

no immediate
pulse disable

K0100

P179

Auto-reversing stage

Instantaneous pulse disable

on E Stop or in the case of F030

W-limit reached

B0197

B0196

G-limit reached

1 = Torque direction I

B0231

P150.F

1 = No torque direction

B0230

P192.F

continuous
current

0 = No torque direction
1 = Torque direction I
2 = Torque direction II

[G163.7] P165.B(220)
B

"Enable a torque direction with

torque direction changeover"

Requested
torque direction

K0106

Auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

P826.ii
Correction of
zero passages

P079
Short/long
pulses

P152.F
Filtering of line
frequency
tracking

MII 1
MII 2
MII 3
MII 4
MII 5
MII 6

MI 1
MI 2
MI 3
MI 4
MI 5
MI 6

1 = Torque direction II active

B0222

Armature
gating unit

1 = Torque direction I active

Enabled torque direction

for parallel drive

Number of additional W pulses

with enabled second pulses

Number of additional W pulses

with disabled second pulses

Additional
dead interval

B0221

[G163.5]
B0220

P179.F (0)

P161.F (0)

P160.F
(0,000s)

- G163 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G163 Auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

8-37

8-38

P111.F
La

r039

K0289

EMF

P616 (286)
K

.01
.02
.03
.04

Actual
value

P283.F (0)

EMF_set

Filter time
(0...10000ms)
P280.F (0)

K0288

P281.F (0)
(0...10000ms)
Filter time

Setpoint

P282.F (0)

K0285

Enable
precontrol
P273.F

P274.F
0=Reset
I comp. to
zero

Droop

n_f-w start

n_act

P120.F
to
P139.F
field characteristic

100% of P102

I_field_set

EMF controller precontrol

P284.F
0=Reset
P comp. to
zero

P118.F
P119.F
EMK_rated n_rated

P277.F

EMF controller

P276.F

P275.F

n_f-w start = P119*EMF_set/P118

Absolute actual
speed

[G151.3]
K0166

P272

FS
289
0
0
0

0% 0

P615
K
K
K
K

P693.B (1)
B

Enable EMF
controller

K0286

K0287

P276.F

Automatic field reduction if

EMF too high for braking operation

K0101
[G163.2]

P151 - 5 degrees
or (pulsating)
165 degrees - 5 degrees

P110.F
Ra

Ia_rated Ua_rated
P100.F
P101.F

ua ... measured armature voltage

i a ... measured armature current

Ra
P110.F r037

Closed-loop EMF control

[G166.2]

K0278

K0293

100%

P081

K0277

EMF controller output

K0280

P611
K
K
K
K

EMF controller I comp.

K0282

Stop I component

EMF controller P comp.

K0281

.01
.02
.03
.04

P614 (1)
K
K
K
K
K

FS
277
0
0
0

Minimum

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05

EMF controlller set/actual diff. after droop

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05

EMF controller set/actual diff.

P613 (1)
K
K
K
K
K

K0284

K0283

Maximum

P103.F
Minimum motor
field current

K0276

Field current
setpoint limitation

r073.002

Rated motor
field current
P102.F

Minimum

With operating status >=05 :

Setpoint upper limit = 200%
("Release")

- G165 -

Lower field current

setpoint limit

K0274

[G166.1]

Field current
setpoint
K0275

K0273

Upper field current

setpoint limit

With operating status >=o10

or
K0286>P357 AND |K0179/K0287|<5%:
Setpoint upper limit ="old" K265

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G165 Closed-loop EMF control

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

K0266

P258.F
Delay time

P082<21 (no external field device)

FS
.01
266
.02
0

P257.F
Standstill field

P612
K
K

<2> If field firing pulses are disabled,

the setpoint will be reset to 0

P082=24 and auxiliaries OFF

P082=21 and operating state > o5.0

P082 =
2, 12 or 22

B0124

[G182.6]
Line contactor CLOSED

P692.B (0)
B

Inject standstill excitation

[G165.8]

K0275

Field current setpoint

Internal actual
field current

K0293

[G165.5]

<1> With "Standstill field" K0268

K0268

[G166.3]

<1>

&
<2>

Line voltage
(field)

K0304

Filter time
P260.F (0)
(0...10000ms)

K0268

P256.F
Tn

P255.F
Kp

K0290

Motor flux

1=Enable
precontrol
P253.F

P254.F
0=Reset
I comp.

P112.F
Field circuit resistance

V_control_F

I_field_set

Field precontrol

Select input
value for flux
calculation
P263.F

P264.F
0=Reset
P comp.

[G160.3]
[G160.7]
[G162.1]

Stop
I component

- Current controller field

[G166.2]
[G167.3]
[G188.3]

Setpoint
P261.F (0)
(0...10000ms)
Filter time

Field characteristic
P120.F to P139.F

Actual value

r073.002

* P102

[G167.3]
[G188.3]
r036*)

r035*)

K0265

2
1
0

P263 (1)

Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit

output

K0260

K0251

P251.F

K0250

1 = Field firing pulses disabled

P610 (252)
K

r034

P097

P252.F
Filtering of line
frequency tracking

P082

P097: Response to fault messages

0 = Disable field firing pulses
1 = Enable field firing pulses

P250.F

- G166 -

Firing
pulse 2/4

Firing
pulse 1/3

P082 =
0:
Field firing pulses disabled
1:
Field firing pulses enabled with o5.0
2:
Standstill field with o7.0
3:
Field firing pulses are always enabled
4:
Field gating pulses enabled
with "Auxiliaries ON" (B0251)
11..14: External 40.00 A - field power module
r073.001=40.00 A
otherwise as for P082=1...4
21..24: External field device
Setpoint from K0268
Actual value to P612
r073.001 and r073.002=U838
(P076.002 is ineffective)
otherwise as for P082=1...4

*) With these parameters,

100% corresponds to the rated motor field current (P102)

K0271

K0252

G or W limitation reached

I comp.

P comp.

set/actual diff.

K0262

K0261

K0263

Field current controller

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G166 Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit

8-39

8-40

Selection of external field

current monitoring signal

Actual value at field

current controller input

Setpoint at field
current controller input

[G166.3]

K0265

[G166.3]

K0268

P265.B (1)
B

Field current monitoring

Threshold
P396.F (50)
1...100%

2% of r073.002

B<A

B>A

P082 < 20

P082 > 0

&
1

Monitoring time
P397.F (0,50)
0,02...60,00s

Fault F005

- G167 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G167 Field current monitoring

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

LOW
HIGH

K2004

K2005

K2006

K2007

K2008

K2009

K2010

K2011

K2012

K2013

K2014

K2015

K2016

LOW
HIGH

K2003

KK2045

KK2044

KK2043

KK2042

KK2041

KK2040

KK2039

KK2038

KK2037

KK2036

KK2035

KK2034

KK2033

KK2032

LOW
HIGH

K2002

K6016

K6015

K6014

K6013

K6012

K6011

K6010

K6009

K6008

K6007

K6006

K6005

K6004

K6003

K6002

K6001

LOW
HIGH

K2001

LOW
HIGH

LOW
HIGH
KK6081

KK6095

KK6094

KK6093

KK6092

KK6091

KK6090

KK6089

KK6088

KK6087

KK6086

KK60085

KK6084

KK6083

KK6082

K9016

K9015

K9014

K9013

K9012

K9011

K9010

K9009

K9008

K9007

K9006

K9005

K9004

K9003

K9002

K9001

[G172.5]
[G174.5]

LOW
HIGH

Peer-to-peer interface 3 (G174)

Peer-to-peer interface 2 (G173)

USS interface 3 (G172)

[G171.5]
[G173.5]

KK2031

USS interface 2 (G171)

[G170.5]

USS interface 1 (G170)

Serial interfaces: connector-type converters

KK9095

KK9094

KK9093

KK9092

KK9091

KK9090

KK9089

KK9088

KK9087

KK9086

KK9085

KK9084

KK9083

KK9082

KK9081

- G169 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G169 Serial interfaces: connector-type converters

8-41

8-42

+5V

Submin D

8 Rx-/Tx-

3 Rx+/Tx+

2 RxD

7 TxD

6
1
4

0 1 0 1

P785.001 (0)

RS485

RS232

Bus terminator

USS On/Off

Telegram monitoring time

Slave address

Baud rate

Length of process data

Length of parameter data

USS diagnostic parameter

Enable parameterization

P780 (2)

P787 (0,000s)

P786 (0)

P783 (6)

P781 (2)

P782 (127)

r789

P927

Parameters for USS interface

P785.002=1:
Bit 10 is treated as "control by PLC",
i.e. when bit 10=0, the other bits of word 1 as well as
words 2 to 16 are not written to connectors K2001 to K2016
or to binectors B2100 to 2915.
All these connectors and binectors retain their old values.

<1> P785.002=0:
Bit 10 is not treated as "control by PLC".

PMU

X300:
G-SST1

USS interface 1

P788 (2030)
B

...

K
K
K
K
K
K

K2010
K2011
K2012
K2013
K2014
K2015

Word 10
Word 11
Word 12
Word 13
Word 14
Word 15

1 = "Fault F011"

Fault message trigger

B2031

B2030

B2415
B2515
B2615

B2400
B2500
B2600

B2915

B2815

U116 (0)
B

0 .16

0 .14
0 .15

0 .08
.09
0
.10
0
.11
0
0 .12
0 .13

0 .06
0 .07

33 .04
0 .05

FS
32 .01
.02
167
0 .03

.16

.01

r811.01 to .16

USS parameter data

Transmit data

Binector / connector
converter

For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.13.1

B2900

B2800

B2715

B2315

B2700

B2215
B2300

B2115
B2200

B2100

Bit 0

Bit 15

K2009

Word 9

K2008

Word 8

K2016

K2007

Word 7

Word 16

K2006

Word 6

P784
K

[G183.6]

[G151.3]

K2002
K2003

[G182.6]

K2001

[G169.2]

K2005

every 16 bits

Word 5

r810.01 to .16

Parameter
processing

r811.17 r811.18 r811.19 r811.20

K2004

<1>

r810.17 r810.18 r810.19 r810.20

Word 4

Word 3

Word 2

Word 1

Process data
from USS interface

Word 4: Param.Value
High Word

Word 3: Param.Value
Low Word

Word 2: Param.Index

Word 1: Param.-ID
(PKE)

USS parameter data

Receive data

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

- G170 -

K2020

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G170 USS interface 1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0 1 0 1

P795.001 (0)

RS485

Bus terminator

USS On/Off

Telegram monitoring time

Slave address

Baud rate

Length of process data

Length of parameter data

USS diagnostic parameter

Enable parameterization

P790 (0)

P797 (0,000s)

P796 (0)

P793 (6)

P791 (2)

P792 (127)

r799

P927

Parameters for USS interface

P795.002=1:
Bit 10 is treated as "control by PLC",
i.e. when bit 10=0, the other bits of word 1 as well as
words 2 to 16 are not written to connectors K6001 to K6016
or to binectors B6100 to 6915.
All these connectors and binectors retain their old values.

<1> P795.002=0:
Bit 10 is not treated as "control by PLC".

Tx-

Tx+

X172

CUD1

G-SST2

USS interface 2

P798 (6030)
B

...

K6004

Word 4

K
K
K
K

K6013
K6014
K6015
K6016

Word 13
Word 14
Word 15
Word 16

1 = "Fault F012"

Fault message trigger

B6031

B6030

K6012

Bit 15

K6011

Word 11
Word 12

B6515
B6615

B6500
B6600

B6915

B6815

U117 (0)
B

0 .16

0 .14
0 .15

0 .11
0 .12
0 .13

0 .09
0 .10

0 .07
0 .08

0 .05
0 .06

0 .03
33 .04

FS
32 .01
167 .02

.16

.01

r813.01 to .16

USS parameter data

Transmit data

Binector / connector
converter

For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.13.1

B6900

B6800

B6715

B6415

B6400

B6700

B6315

B6215

B6200
B6300

B6115

B6100

Bit 0

K6010

Word 10

K6008

Word 8

K6007

Word 7
K6009

K6006

Word 6

Word 9

K6005

Word 5

[G183.6]

K6003

Word 3

P794
K

[G151.3]

<1>
K6002

Word 1
Word 2

every 16 bits

Parameter
processing

r813.17 r813.18 r813.19 r813.20

[G182.6]

r812.01 to .16

r812.17 r812.18 r812.19 r812.20

[G169.4]
K6001

Process data
from USS interface

Word 4: Param.Value
High Word

Word 3: Param.Value
Low Word

Word 2: Param.Index

Word 1: Param.-ID
(PKE)

USS parameter data

Receive data

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

- G171 -

K6020

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G171 USS interface 2

8-43

8-44

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

0 1 0 1

P805.001 (0)

RS485

Bus terminator

Enable parameterization

P927

P808 (9030)
B

1 = "Fault F013"

Fault message trigger

U118 (0)
B

0 .16

0 .14
0 .15

0 .11
0 .12
0 .13

0 .09
0 .10

0 .07
0 .08

0 .05
0 .06

0 .03
33 .04

FS
32 .01
167 .02

.16

.01

USS parameter data

Transmit data

Binector / connector
converter

For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.13.1

B9915

r809

B9900

Length of parameter data

USS diagnostic parameter

P802 (127)

B9815

B9800

Length of process data

B9515
B9715

B9031

B9500

B9415

B9315

B9300
B9400

B9115
B9215

B9200

B9615

P801 (2)

Bit 15
B9100

Bit 0

K9016

B9700

B9030

Word 16

K9015

K9012

Word 15

K9011

Word 11
Word 12

K9010

Word 10

K9009

Word 9

K9014

K9008

Word 8

K9013

K9007

Word 7

Word 14

K9006

Word 6

Word 13

P804
K

K9005

...

[G183.6]

[G151.3]

[G182.6]

r815.01 to .16

r815.17 r815.18 r815.19 r815.20

Word 5

K9004

Word 4

K9001

[G169.6]

K9003

every 16 bits

Word 3

r814.01 to .16

Parameter
processing

K9002

<1>

r814.17 r814.18 r814.19 r814.20

Word 2

Word 1

Process data
from USS interface

Word 4: Param.Value
High Word

Word 3: Param.Value
Low Word

Word 2: Param.Index

Word 1: Param.-ID
(PKE)

USS parameter data

Receive data

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

B9600

Slave address

Baud rate

P803 (13)

P807 (0,000s)

P806 (0)

USS On/Off

Telegram monitoring time

P800 (0)

Parameters for USS interface

P805.002=1:
Bit 10 is treated as "control by PLC",
i.e. when bit 10=0, the other bits of word 1 as well as
words 2 to 16 are not written to connectors K9001 to K9016
or to binectors B9100 to 9915.
All these connectors and binectors retain their old values.

<1> P805.002=0:
Bit 10 is not treated as "control by PLC".

Tx-

Tx+

G-SST3

X162

CUD2

USS interface 3

- G172 -

K9020

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G172 USS interface 3

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

0 1 0 1

Bus terminator

K6005

Telegram monitoring time

No. of words (1...5)

Peer-to-peer diagnostic parameter

P793 (6)

P791 (2)

r799

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

B6031

B6030

P798 (6030)
B

to preceding
drive

K6004

Word 5

B6515

1 = "Fault F012"

Fault signal trip

B6415
B6500

B6315
B6400

B6215

Bit 15
B6115

B6300

...

[G183.6]

.16

.01

to following
drive

Word 5

Word 4

Word 2
Word 3

Word 1

Transmit data

Binector / connector
converter

r813.01 to .05
FS
.01
32
.02
167
.03
0
.04
33
.05
0

U117 (0)
B

P794
[G182.6] K
[G151.3] K

B6200

Bit 0
B6100

K6003

Word 4

K6002

[G169.4]
K6001

every 16Bits

r812.01 to .05

Word 2
Word 3

Word 1

Receive data

For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.13.2

<2>

<1>

<1> Binector = 0:
Output drivers are high resistance

P797 (0,000s)

Peer-to-peer On/Off

P790 (0)

P816 (1)
B

P817 (1)
B

Enable data send

Enable data receive

P795.001 (0)

RS485

Parametes for peer-to-peer interface :

Tx+

G-SST2

X172

Peer-to-peer interface 2

CUD1

- G173 -

K6020

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G173 Peer-to-peer interface 2

8-45

8-46

Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

0 1 0 1

Bus terminator

<2>

<1>

Telegram monitoring time

Baud rate

No. of Words (1...5)

Peer-to-peer diagnostic parameter

P803 (13)

P801 (2)

r809

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

B9031

B9030

P808 (9030)
B

B9415

1 = "Fault F013"

Fault signal trip

B9515

B9315

B9400
B9500

B9215

Bit 15
B9115

B9300

...

[G183.6]

[G151.3]

.16

.01

to following
drive

Word 5

Word 4

Word 3

Word 2

Word 1

Transmit data

Binector / connector
converter

r815.01 to .05
FS
.01
32
.02
167
.03
0
.04
33
.05
0

U118 (0)
B

P804
[G182.6] K

B9200

Bit 0
B9100

K9005

Word 5
from preceding
drive

K9004

Word 4

K9003

Word 3

[G169.6]
K9001
K9002

every 16Bits

r814.01 to .05

Word 2

Word 1

Receive data

For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 9.13.2

<2> Binector = 0:
Telegram sign-of-life monitoring is not active

P807 (0,000s)

Peer-to-peer On/Off

P800 (0)

Enable Data receive

P818 (1)
B

P819 (1)
B

Enable data send

<1> Binector = 0:
Output drivers are high resistance

P805.001 (0)

RS485

Parameters for peer-to-peer interface:

Tx+

G-SST3

X162

Peer-to-peer interface 3

CUD2

- G174 -

K9020

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G174 Peer-to-peer interface 3

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

P057 (012)
011...121
Copy Bico data set

P055. (012)
(011...143)
Copy function data set

Data sets

Source data set (1/2)

Target data set (1/2)

Source data set (1...4)

Target data set (1...4)

Bico data set

from control word 2
[G181.5]

Function data set bit 1

from control word 2
[G181.5]

Function data set bit 0

from control word 2
[G181.5]

Index 1

Index 2

xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
...

Parameter
number

Index 1

Index 2

Index 3

K0034

Note:
The applicable parameters
are identified by the
code ".B"

K0035

Note:
The applicable parameters
are identified by the
code ".F"

r056
active function data set

r058
active Bico data set

Index 4

Switchover between function parameters

Switchover between binector

and connector parameters

xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
...

Parameter
number

- G175 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G175 Data sets

8-47

8-48

<1>

Pulse generator

150ms

Bit 10 is displayed in connector K0030 and

parameter r650 when control word 1 is
input in word mode. It is not, however,
functional. The mode of functioning of bit 10
is shown on Sheets G170, G171,
G172, Z110 and Z111

P667.B (0)
B

P666.B (0)
B

P665.B (0)
B

P660.B (1)
B

P659.B (1)
B

E-Stop
from E-Stop, relay outp.line contactor
[G117.7]
P658.B (1)
B

P657.B (1)
B

P656.B (1)
B

Enable operation
(from Sheet "Binary inputs 1")
[G110.5]
P655.B (1)
B

P661.B (1)
B

Switch-on command from INCHING

(from sheet "Inching setpoint") [G129.7]

Switch-on command from CRAWL [G130.7]

(from sheet "Crawling setpoint")

Switch-on commmand from ON/OFF1

(from sheet "Crawling setpoint [G130.7]
/ Terminal 37")

Control word 1

to sequencing control,
to brake control
[G140.3]
to sequencing control

0=OFF3, fast stop

1=operating condition
1=Enable, enable pulses
0=Pulse disable

Bit 2

Bit 9

Bit 13

P673.B (0)
B

P675.B (1)
B
Bit 15

Bit 14

Bit 12

P672.B (1)
B

P674.B (0)
B

Bit 11

P671.B (1)
B

Bit 10

Bit 8

P669.B (0)
B

0 =>1 edge Acknowledge

Bit 7

P668.B (0)
B

1=Enable setpoint
0=Disable setpoint

Bit 6

P664.B (1)
B

0=External fault 1 (F021)

1=No external fault

1=Decrease motorized potentiometer

1=Increase motorized potentiometer

1=Enable negative direction of rotation

0=Negative direction of rotation disabled

1=Enable positive direction of rotation

0=Positive direction of rotation disabled

1=Control by PLC
0=No control by PLC

1=Inching bit 1

1=Inching bit 0

to sheet
"Motorized potentiometer"
[G126.2]
to sheet
"Motorized potentiometer"
[G126.2]

14
5

13
4

12
3

11
2

&
1

P key
(PMU)

Bit0

Bit8

B0161
[G136.1]
[G161.1]

B0160

- G180 -

Fault F021

External fault 1

B0179

from optimization run

from control logic for field reversal

P360.01 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

to sheet "Setpoint processing"

[G135.6]

to sheet "Setpoint processing"

[G135.6]

to sheet "Inching setpoint"

[G129.2]

to sheet "Inching setpoint"

[G129.2]

to sequencing control

to sheet "Ramp-function generator"

[G136.1]

to sheet "Ramp-function generator"

[G136.2]

1=Ramp-function generator start

0=Ramp-function generator stop

Bit 5

to sheet
"Ramp-function generator"
[G136.3]

P663.B (1)
B

Display of control word 1 (r650)

on 7-segment display

1=Enable ramp-function generator

0=Set ramp-function generator to 0

Bit 4

Bit 3

<1>

to sequencing control

0=OFF2, pulse disable, motor coasts to standstill

1=operating condition

Bit 0
Bit 1

K0030

Control word 1

to sequencing control,
to brake control
[G140.3]

Meaning

r650

0=OFF1, shutdown via ramp-function generator followed by

pulse disable
1=ON, operating condition (edge-controlled)

Bit No.

P662.B (1)
B

P648.B (9)
K

Terminals 37 and 38 are always active. They are ANDed with bit 0 or bit 3.

When P648 = 9, bit-serial input of control bits (P654 to P675 are effective)
When P648 <> 9, word-serial input of control bits (P654 to P675 are not effective)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G180 Control word 1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Bit 25

Bit 26

Bit 27

Bit 28

Bit 29

Bit 30

Bit 31

P685.B (1)
B

P686.B (1)
B

P687.B (0)
B

P688.B (1)
B

P689.B (1)
B

P690 (0)
B

P691.B (0)
B

Main contactor check-back signal

0=Select Bico data set 1

1=Select Bico data set 2

0=External alarm 2 (A022)

1=No external alarm 2

0=External alarm 1 (A021)

1=No external alarm 1

0=Master drive (speed control)

1=Slave drive (torque control)

0=External fault 2 (F022)

1=No external fault 2

1=Enable speed controller

0=Speed controller disabled

to sequencing control

to sheet "Data sets"

[G175.4]

to sheets
"Torque limitation" and
"Speed controller (2)"
[G160.2] [G152.4]

to sheet "Speed controller (2)"

[G152.6]

to sheet "Speed controller (1)"

[G151.6]

Spare

Bit 23

1=Enable speed controller droop

0=Speed controller droop disabled

Spare

Bit 22

Bit 24

to sheet "Fixed setpoint"

[G127.2]

Select fixed setpoint 1

Bit 21

P684.B (1)
B

to sheet "Fixed setpoint"

[G127.2]

Select fixed setpoint 0

Bit 20

Spare

Bit 19

P681.B (0)
B

Spare

Bit 18

P680.B (0)
B

to sheet "Data sets"

[G175.4]

Select function data set bit 1

K0031

Control word 2

Bit 17

P677.B (0)
B

r651

to sheet "Data sets"

[G175.4]

Meaning

Select function data set bit 0

Bit 16

Bit No.

P676.B (0)
B

P649.B (9)
K

When P649 = 9, bit-serial input of control bits (P676 to P691 are effective)
When P649 <> 9, word-serial input of control bits (P676 to P691 are not effective)

Control word 2

30
21

29
20

28
19

P360.04 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

P360.03 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

Alarm A022

External alarm 2

Alarm A021

External alarm 1

Fault F022

External fault 2

Display of control word 2 (r651)

on 7-segment display

P360.02 (0ms)
(0...10000ms)

Bit16

Bit24

- G181 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G181 Control word 2

8-49

8-50
B0104
B0106
B0108
B0110
B0112
B0114
B0116

1 = Run (output terminals energized)

0 = Pulses disabled
1 = Fault is active (pulses disabled)
0 = No fault is active
0 = OFF2 applied
1 = No OFF2 applied
0 = OFF3 applied
1 = No OFF3 applied
1 = Switch-on inhibit
0 = No switch-on inhibit (converter can be switched on)
1 = Alarm is active
0 = No alarm is active
0 = Setpoint/actual value deviation detected
1 = No setpoint/actual value deviation detected
1 = PZD control requests (always 1)

Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9

from fault processing

rom sequencing control

from sequencing control

from alarm processing

from sheet "Signals (1)"

[G187.6]

from sequencing control

B0124
B0126
B0128

1 = Request to energize main contactor

0 = Request not to energize main contactor
1 = Ramp-function generator active
0 = Ramp-function generator not active
1 = Positive speed setpoint
0 = Negative speed setpoint
Spare

Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15

from relay output line contactor

from ramp-function generator

[G136.7]

from sheet "Signals (2)"

[G188.3]

[G117.5][G166.1]

B0122

1 = Undervoltage fault (F006)

0 = No undervoltage fault is active

Bit 11

from fault processing

B0120

Bit 10

from sheet "Signals (1)"

[G187.6]

1=Actual value comparison setpoint (P373)

0=Actual value < comparison setpoint (P373)

from sequencing control

[G136.1][G136.3][G140.2]

B0102

1 = Ready to operate (pulses disabled)

0 = Not ready to operate

from sequencing control

[G170.6][G171.6]
[G172.6][G173.6]
[G174.6][Z110.6]
Status word 1
K0032

Bit 1

r652

B0100

Bit 0

1 = Ready to switch on
0 = Not ready to switch on

Meaning

Bit No.

Status word 1

B0129

B0127

B0125

B0123

B0121

B0117

B0115

B0113

[G160.1][G160.2]
B0111

B0109

B0107

B0105

B0103

B0101

13
4

12
3

11
2

Display of status word 1 (r652)

on 7-segment display

Bit0

Bit8

- G182 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G182 Status word 1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
B0138
B0140
B0142
B0144
B0146
B0148
B0150
B0152

1 = External fault 1 active (F021)

0 = No external fault 1 active
1 = External fault 2 active (F022)
0 = No external fault 2 active
1 = External alarm active (A021 or A022)
0 = No external alarm active
1 = Power section overload alarm active (A039)
0 = No overload alarm active
1 = Power section overtemperature fault active (F067)
0 = No overtemperature fault active
1 = Power section overtemperature alarm active (A067)
0 = No overtemperature alarm active
1 = Motor overtemperature alarm active (A029)
0 = No motor overtemperature alarm active
1 = Motor overtemperature fault active (F029)
0 = No motor overtemperature fault active
spare
1 = Motor locked fault active (F035)
0 = No motor locked fault active
spare
spare
spare

Bit 19

Bit 20

Bit 21

Bit 22

Bit 23

Bit 24

Bit 25

Bit 26

Bit 27

Bit 28

Bit 29

Bit 30

Bit 31

from sequencing control

from alarm processing

from fault processing

from alarm processing

B0156

B0136

0 = Overspeed (A038 and F038)

1 = No overspeed

Bit 18

K0033

from sheet "Signals"

[G188.7]

from fault processing

[G170.6][G171.6]
[G172.6][G173.6]
[G174.6][Z110.6]
Status word 2

Spare

r653

Bit 17

Spare

Bit 16

Meaning

Bit Nr.

Status word 2

B0157

B0153

B0151

B0149

B0147

B0145

B0143

B0141

B0139

B0137

29
20

28
19

27
18

Display of status word 2 (r653)

on 7-segment display

Bit16

Bit24

- G183 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G183 Status word 2

8-51

8-52

<5>

01:2
02:2
15:2

(PTC alarm) 01:1

(PTC trip) 02:1
(KTY84) 15:1

X164

205

204

CUD2

01:2
02:2
15:2

<5>

(PTC alarm) 01:1

(PTC trip) 02:1
(KTY84) 15:1

X174

CUD1

0,6 s

<4> 1...KTY84 (P490.02=1)

2...PTC (P490.02=2,3,4,5)

Select
temperature sensor
P490.02

<3> 1...KTY84 (P490.01=1)

2...PTC (P490.01=2,3,4,5)

Select
temperature sensor
P490.01

Trip temperature
P492.F

P491.F
Alarm temperature

K0052

Motor temperature 2 <1>

<2>

PTC response temperature

<4>
1

P491.F
Alarm temperature

K0051

PTC response temperature

<1> r012.02

<3>

Trip temperature
P492.F

Motor temperature 1 <1>

<1> r012.01

<5> Use a shielded cable and connect it to ground at both ends

<2> Response temperature used depends on the type of PTC

<1> Parameter r012 and connectors K0051 / K0052 output valid values only if a KTY84 is selected.
When a PTC is selected, r012 and K0051 / K0052 always output "0".

Motor interface (1)

B0185

Motor temperature
alarm analog 2

Motor temperature
fault analog 2

B0184

Motor temperature
alarm analog 1

Motor temperature
fault analog 1

0
1
2
3

P494.F

0
1
2
3

P493.F

- G185 -

1 = "Fault F029"

Motor temperature
fault (analog)

1 = "Alarm A029"

Motor temperature
alarm (analog)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G185 Motor interface (1)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

211

Brush length monitoring (binary)

0 = Fault
90:1
90:2

SPM
Alarm box

56:2

56:1

56:3

Motor temperature
monitoring (binary)
0 = Fault
13:1
13:2

Air-flow
monitor

Motor fan monitoring (binary)

0 = Fault

230V ~

217

216

215

214

213

212

Bearing condition monitoring (binary)

1 = Fault

210

X161

+24V

Binary inputs (3)

Motor interface (2)

CUD2
P24_S

For display of terminal states

on 7-segment display , see
block diagram "Binary inputs (1)"
(G110)

B0047

B0046

B0045

B0044

B0043

B0042

B0041

B0040

40s ON delay

10s ON delay

Operating
status < o6

2s ON delay

10s ON delay

B0183

0
1
2

P498.F
<1>

B0182

0
1
2

P497.F
<1>

B0181

0
1
2

P496.F
<1>

B0180

0
1
2

P495.F
<1>

1 = "Fault F028"

M o to r te m p e ra tu re
fa u lt (b in a ry)

1 = "Alarm A028"

Motor temperature
alarm (binary)

1 = "Fault F027"

- G186 -

Motor fan fault (binary)

1 = "Alarm A027"

Motor fan alarm (binary)

1 = "Fault F026"

B e a rin g co n d itio n
fa u lt (b in a ry)

1 = "Alarm A026"

Bearing condition
alarm (binary)

1 = "Fault F025"

Brush length fault (binary)

1 = "Alarm A025"

Brush length alarm (binary)

<1> If parameter is set to 0, the associated

binary input can be used as a select input
for any desired application

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G186 Motor interface (2) / binary inputs, terminals 211 to 214

8-53

8-54

Signals (1)

[G151.3]

[G152.3]

[G151.3]

[G152.3]

P593 (167)
K

n(act)

P592 (167)
K

n(act)

P597 (167)
K

n(act)

P596 (174)
K

n(set, smooth)

P591 (167)
K

n(act)

P590 (174)
K

n(set, smooth)

P371.F (0,50)
(0,00...199,99%)
OFF shutdown speed (hyst.)

P370.F (0,50)
(0,00...199,99%)
OFF shutdown speed

P374.F (3,00)
(0,00...199,99%)
n(comp.hyst.)

P373.F (100,00)
(0,00...199,99%)
n(comp.)

P377.F (1,00)
(0,00...199,99%)
Setp./act.val. hyst.

P376.F (3,00)
(0,00...199,99%)
Setp./act.val. dev. (perm.)

P389.F (1,00)
(0,00...199,99%)
Setp./act.val. hyst.

P388.F (3,00)
(0,00...199,99%)
Setp./act.val. dev. (perm.)

B0165

B0164

[G140.2]

OFF delay

P375.F (3,0)
(0,0...100,0 s)
Comparison (time)

OFF1 or OFF3 from

sequencing control

OFF delay

P378.F (3,0)
(0,0...100,0 s)
Setp./act.val. dev. (time)

OFF delay

P390.F (3,0)
(0,0...100,0 s)
Setp./act.val. dev. (time)

n<nmin

B0173

B0172

P088 (0,00)
(0,00...10,00 s)
Comparison (time)

Firing pulse disable

(1 = Firing pulses disabled)

Setpoint/act. value deviation 2

0 = "Alarm A031"

0 = "Fault F031"

[G182.2]
Setpoint/act. value deviation
to status word 1, bit 8

[G182.2]
Comparison setpoint reached
to status word 1, bit 10

- G187 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G187 Messages (1)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

[G137.5]

Positive speed setpoint

to status word 1, bit14
[G182.2]

0
x

1
y

y
0

1
x

Field current threshold Ifx

P398.F (80,00% of K0268)

(0,00...199,99% of K0268)

P399.F (1,00% of r073.02)

(0,00...100,00% of r073.02)
Hysteresis

Field current threshold Ifmin

[G151.3]

P595 (167)
K

[G166.3]

K0268

[G166.3]

K0265

P394.F (3,00% of r073.02)

(0,00...199,99% of r073.02)

P395.F (1.00% of r073.02)

(0.00...100.00% of r073.02)
Hysteresis

P594 (170)
K

Setpoint at the input of

the field current controller

Actual value at the input of

the field current controller

K0265

If
[G166.3]

Limit-value monitor If < Ifx

Actual value at the input of

the field current controller

Limit-value monitor If < Ifmin

n(act)

n(set)

Signals (2)

P381.F (-120,0)
(-199,9...0,0%)
n(max. neg. rot.)

B0216

If < Ifx

B0215

If < Ifmin

P380.F (120,0)
(0,0...199,9%)
n(max. pos. rot.)

to control logic for field reversal

(Sheet "Field reversal")
[G200.1]

[G200.1]

to control logic for field reversal

(Sheet "Field reversal")

Overspeed to
status word 2, bit 18
[G183.2]

1 = "Alarm A038"

1 = "Fault F038"

- G188 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G188 Messages (2)

8-55

8-56

Operation from
sequencing control

K0311

Hours run
r048

LOW byte: Current alarm number

HIGH byte: Current fault number

<1> K0801:

Hours
run
meter

Fault trip from

sequencing control

Fault memory

K9811

K0801

<1>

K9814
Fault value

6. acknowledged fault

r947.49 Fault value

.50
.51
.52
.53
.54
.55
.56
Fault time (hours run)

Fault No.

K9817

3. acknowledged fault

r947.25
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
.32
Fault time (hours run)

Fault No.

Current fault

r947.01 Fault value

.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
Fault time (hours run)

Fault No.

r949.49
.50
.51
.52
.53
.54
.55
.56
r049.07

r949.25
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
.32
r049.04

r949.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
r049.01

K9812

K9815
Fault value

7. acknowledged fault

r947.57 Fault value

.58
.59
.60
.61
.62
.63
.64
Fault time (hours run)
Fault No.

K9818

4. acknowledged fault

r947.33
.34
.35
.36
.37
.38
.39
.40
Fault time (hours run)

Fault No.

1. acknowledged fault

r947.09 Fault value

.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
Fault time (hours run)

Fault No.

r949.57
.58
.59
.60
.61
.62
.63
.64
r049.08

r949.33
.34
.35
.36
.37
.38
.39
.40
r049.05

r949.09
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
r049.02

K9816

5. acknowledged fault

r947.41 Fault value

.42
.43
.44
.45
.46
.47
.48
Fault time (hours run)
Fault No.

2. acknowledged fault

r947.17 Fault value

.18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24
Fault time (hours run)

Fault No.

K9813

r949.41
.42
.43
.44
.45
.46
.47
.48
r049.06

r949.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24
r049.03

- G189 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G189 Fault memory

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+
0
1

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+
0
1

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+
0
1

Rx-/Tx-

Rx+/Tx+
0
1

Bus terminator
U805 (0)

Bus adress

Telegram monitoring time

Diagnostic parameter

Display active slaves

(see right)

U806 (2)

U807 (0,100s)

n809

n810

U808(6040)
B

Operating mode for

parallel connection

U803 (0)

1 = "Fault F014"

Fault signal trip

On/Off

RS485

U800 (0)

Parameters for paralleling interface:

CUD2

X166

X165

B6041

B6040

1 = active paralleling
master

B0225

1 = "Telegram
monitoring
timeout"

CLK to slaves

CLK from Master

U806 (2)
Master (12...16) /
Slave (2...6)

2..6

12..16

Internal summation
firing pulse

from slave 6

from slave 5

from slave 4

from slave 3

from
Slave 2

from
master

from master

Paralleling interface

n812.11 to .15
16Bit

16Bit

K6063
K6064
K6065

Word 4
Word 5

K6062

K6061

Bit 0
B6620

K6055

Word 2
Word 3

Word 1

Word 5

K6054

K6053

Word 4

K6052

Word 3

K6051

Word 2

n812.21 to .25

K6045

Word 5

16Bit

K6044

Word 4

Word 1

K6043

Word 3

Bit 0
B6520

K6042

K6041

Bit 0
B6420

Word 2

Word 1

n812.16 to .20

K6034

Word 4
K6035

K6033

Word 3
Word 5

K6032

K6031

Word 2

Word 1

Bit 0
B6320

K6025

K6023

K6022

K6021

Bit 0
B6220

...

Bit 15
B6635

Bit 15
B6535

Bit 15
B6435

Bit 15
B6335

Bit 15
B6235

Firing pulse

K6024

16Bit

0
1
2

U800 (0)

Word 5
n812.06 to .10

n812.01 to .05

Imp.,

Internal firing
pulse

Word 4

Word 3

Word 2

Word 1

Receiving data

Torque direction,
thyristor
selection

Summation firing pulse

B6622

[G195.6]

B6322
B6422
B6522

B6623
B6222

B6523
[G195.6]
[G195.6]
[G195.6]
[G195.6]

[G195.6]
[G195.6]

Word 5

Word 4

Word 3

Word 2

Word 1

15
6

Paralleling slave: (i.e. when U800 = 2):

Segment
2 ... ON: Data for slave with address 2 are ok
3 ... ON: Data for slave with address 3 are ok
4 ... ON: Data for slave with address 4 are ok
5 ... ON: Data for slave with address 5 are ok
6 ... ON: Data for slave with address 6 are ok
8 ... ON: Slave funktion active
9 ... ON: Firing pulses of master are used
15.. OFF

- G195 -

to next
drive

1 F044

Indices .06 to .10 of U804 are

activated on the master and
the standby master when the
master function is transferred
to the standby master

Word1 bit2 = Run

bit3 = Fault
[G195.6] B6223
[G195.6] B6323
[G195.6] B6423

.10

.09

.08

.07

.06

.05

.04

.03

.02

.01

8
Transmit data

n813.01 ... .05

U800 <> 0
Operating state <o1.0
U806 >10
n810:
Paralleling master: (i.e. when U800 = 1)
Segment
2 ... ON: Slave with address 2 responding
3 ... ON: Slave with address 3 responding
4 ... ON: Slave with address 4 responding
5 ... ON: Slave with address 5 responding
6 ... ON: Slave with address 6 responding
8, 9 ... OFF
15.. ON: Master function active

U804 (0)
K

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet G195 Paralleling interface

8-57

8-58

P583 (167)
[G151.3] K

Actual speed value

B0216
If < Ifx
(from Sheet Messages 2)

[G188.5]

B0215
If < Ifmin
(from Sheet Messages 2)

P582.B (0)
B

field reversal

P581.B (0)
B

Braking with
field reversal

P580.B (0)
B

Direction of rotation reversal

using field reversal

[G188.5]

P770.02=0

P776=0

Binary output
Terminal 48 / 54
(see Sheet
"Binary outputs")

(not inverted)

(no delay)

Binary output
Terminal 46 / 47
(see Sheet
"Binary outputs")

P770.01=0

P775=0

1000 V
RS = ----------------I field rated

K21

k20

K20

k21

b) with varistor

Reverse direction

Forward direction

X171
(CUD1)

a) with protective resistor

*) Protective circuit

Reverse polarity actual speed value K0167

to Sheet "Speed controller (2)"
[G151.2]

B0261

P772 (0)
B 261

1 = Switch on field contactor 2

(negative field direction)

.01 (3,0s): Delay time for field reduction before

opening of the current field contactor
.02 (0,2s): Delay time before actuation of the
new field contactor
.03 (0,1s): Delay time before enable of the
field firing pulses
.04 (3,0s): Delay time after field build-up
before armature enable

P092 (0,0...10,0s)

Control logic
for
field reversal

B0260

P771 (0)
B 260

1 = Switch on field contactor 1

(positive field direction)

(not inverted)

(no delay)

Field reversal with SIMOREG single-quadrant converter

1C1

1D1

k20

k21

- G200 -

V1 = B32k420 (SIOV, block varistor)

RS 1.5 k

I field rated2 * L
----------------------- < 400 Ws
2

A protective circuit with varistor can

be used if the following applies:

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet G200 Field reversal with SIMOREG single-quadrant device

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function diagrams

Free function blocks Sheets B100 to B216

Technology software in the basic converter, S00 option

NOTE
Freely assignable function blocks are enabled in parameter U977.
For enabling instructions, please refer to Section 11, Parameter List, description of parameters U977
and n978.
The setting for the sequence in which these function blocks are executed is made using parameters
U960, U961, U962, and U963.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

8-59

8-60

Fixed values

Voltage monitor for electronics power supply

Alarm message triggers

Fault message triggers

Connector/binector converter
Binector/connector converter

Adders/subtracters
Sign inverters
Switchable sign inverters
Multipliers
Dividers
High-resolution multipliers/dividers
Absolute-value generator with filtering

Limiters
Limiters
Limit-value monitors with filtering
Limit-value monitors without filtering
Limit-value monitors without filtering

Averagers
Maximum selections
Minimum selections
Tracking/storage elements
Connector memories
Connector changeover switches

2
2
2

limit-value monitors (for double connectors)

connector-type converters
adders/subtracters (for double connectors)

High-resolution blocks

4
4
4
2
2
15

Processing of connectors

3
3
3
4
3

Limiters, limit-value monitors

15
4
2
12
6
3
4

Mathematical functions

3
3

Connector/binector converter

8
32

Alarm, fault messages

Monitoring

100

Fixed values

Startup of the technology software (option S00)

Content

B151
B151
B151

B139
B140
B140
B145
B145
B150

B134
B135
B136
B137
B138

B125
B125
B125
B130
B131
B131
B135

B120
B121

B115
B115

B110

B101

Sheet
Position/positional deviation acquisition
Root extractor
Integrators
DT1 elements
Derivative/delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks)
Characteristic blocks
Dead zones
Setpoint branching
Simple ramp function generator
Technology controller
PI controllers

Velocity/speed calculator
Speed/velocity calculator
Calculation of variable inertia
Multiplexers
16-bit software counter

2
28
20
4
16
12
14
4
10
5

Decoders/demultiplexers binary to 1 from 8

AND elements with 3 inputs each
OR elements with 3 inputs each
EXCLUSIVE OR elements with 2 inputs each
Inverters
NAND elements with 3 inputs each
RS flipflop
D flipflop
Timers
Binary signal selector switches

Logic functions

Counter

Multiplexer for connectors

1
1
1

Velocity/speed controller,
variable moment of inertia

1
10

Controllers

Ramp function generator

9
3
1

Characteristics

3
3
10

Control elements

1
1

Content

B200
B205
B206
B206
B207
B207
B210
B211
B215, B216
B216

B196

B195

B190
B190
B191

B170
B180 - B189

B165

B160
B161
B161

B155
B155
B156 - B158

B152
B153

Sheet

- B100 -

Function diagram SIMOREG 6RA70 - Contents of the technology software in the basic converter, option S00

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B100 Table of contents

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
Temporary enabling
U977 = 1500
n978 = 1xxx (xxx = hours remaining)

Sampling time
1 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice)
2 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice)
4 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice)
20 ms (not firing-pulse-synchronous)
Block is not calculated

= function block number

<2>

<1>
<1>
<1>

U952.99
U952.100

299
300

.
.

U951.99
U951.100
U952.01
U952.02

.
.

199
200
201
202

.
.

U950.99
U950.100
U951.01
U951.02

.
.

99
100
101
102

.
.

Function block No. Setting with parameter

1
U950.01
2
U950.02

The execution sequence of the function blocks and their activation can also be made automatic:

4. Automatic setting

U969 = 1: Restore standard sequence

U960, U961, and U962 are set to the factory setting
= 2: Set optimum sequence
U960, U961, and U962 are set in such a way that as few deadtimes as possible occur
= 3: Set standard setting of the sampling times. U950, U951, and U952 are set to the factory setting!
= 4: Automatic activation/deactivation
U950, U951, and U952 are set in such a way that the unwired function blocks are deselected
and the wired function blocks are selected (activated), if they are not yet selected.
The time slice 10 (sampling time 20 ms) is set for all function blocks not previously activated,
unchanged for all previously activated function blocks.

The execution sequence of the function blocks can be defined with parameters U960, U961, and U962.

- B101 -

The sampling times must be chosen in such a way that the maximum processor load (n009.02) is indicated on average as <90%.

287

<2> All function blocks for which a time slice <20

is set are activated

<1> T0 = Mean distance between 2 firing pulses

T0 = 3.33 ms at 50 Hz line frequency
T0 = 2.78 ms at 60 Hz line frequency

Time slice
1
2
4
10
20

5 time slices are available:

For each function block, it is necessary to define in which "time slice" (i.e. with which sampling time) it is processed.
(Note: In the factory setting of the parameters, all existing function blocks are activated)

Permanent enabling
U977 = PIN number
n978 = 2000

3. Execution sequence

2. Setting and activating

the sampling times

1. Enabling

Startup of the technology software in the basic converter (option S00)

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B101 Startup of the technology software (option S00)

8-61

8-62

U099 (0)
U099 (0)
U099 (0)

.98
.99
.100

.01
.02
.03

K9598

K9501

100 fixed values

K9599

K9502

K9600

K9503

POWER OFF

POWER ON

10ms

100ms

B9051

B9050

POWER ON

Voltage monitor for electronics power supply

- B110 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B110 Voltage monitor for electronics power supply, fixed values

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01

.02

.01

.02

.01

.02

.01

.02

U104 (0)
B

U105 (0)
B

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U105 (0)
B

U106 (0)
B

U107 (0)
B

1 = "Alarm A054"

1 = "Alarm A034"

1 = "Alarm A053"

1 = "Alarm A033"

1 = "Alarm A020"

1 = "Alarm A024"

1 = "Alarm A019"

1 = "Alarm A023"

8 alarm message triggers

259

258

257

256

U101 (0)
B
B
B
B

U100 (0)
B
B
B
B

.05
.06
.07
.08

.01
.02
.03
.04

.05
.06
.07
.08

.01
.02
.03
.04

1 = F020 fault value 1

1 = F020 fault value 2
1 = F020 fault value 3
1 = F020 fault value 4

1 = F024 fault value 1

1 = F024 fault value 2
1 = F024 fault value 3
1 = F024 fault value 4

1 = F019 fault value 3

1 = F019 fault value 4

1 = F019 fault value 1

1 = F019 fault value 2

1 = F023 fault value 3

1 = F023 fault value 4

1 = F023 fault value 1

1 = F023 fault value 2

32 fault message triggers

287

286

U103 (0)
B
B
B
B

U102 (0)
B
B
B
B

.05
.06
.07
.08

.01
.02
.03
.04

.05
.06
.07
.08

.01
.02
.03
.04

1 = F054 fault value 3

1 = F054 fault value 4

1 = F054 fault value 1

1 = F054 fault value 2

1 = F034 fault value 1

1 = F034 fault value 2
1 = F034 fault value 3
1 = F034 fault value 4

1 = F053 fault value 1

1 = F053 fault value 2
1 = F053 fault value 3
1 = F053 fault value 4

1 = F033 fault value 1

1 = F033 fault value 2
1 = F033 fault value 3
1 = F033 fault value 4

- B115 -

289

288

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B115 Fault message triggers, alarm message triggers

8-63

8-64

U112 (0)
K

U110 (0)
K

<1>

n012

B9084

n010
<1>
B9052

B9085

B9086

B9087

B9088

B9089

B9090

B9091

B9092

B9093

B9094

B9095

B9096

B9097

B9098

B9099

Bit field 3
Connector / binector converter 3

B9053

B9054

B9055

B9056

B9057

B9058

B9059

B9060

B9061

B9062

B9063

B9064

B9065

B9066

B9067

Bit field 1
Connector / binector converter 1

3 connector/binector converters

U111 (0)
K

14
6

15
7

<1> 7-segment display of bit fields

by converters n010, n011 and n012

Bit0

Bit8

n011
<1>
B9068

- B120 -

B9069

B9070

B9071

B9072

B9073

B9074

B9075

B9076

B9077

B9078

B9079

B9080

Bit field 2
Connector / binector converter 2

B9081

B9082

B9083

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B120 Connector / binector converters

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16

U113 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

U115 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Bit field 6
Binector / connector converter 3

n015

n013

K9115

<1>

K9113

<1>

3 binector / connector converter

Bit field 4
Binector / connector converter 1

U114 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16

12
4

11
3

9
1

Bit0

Bit8

Bit field 5
Binector / connector converter 2

<1> 7-segment-display of bit fields

by converters n013, n014 and n015

n014

K9114

<1>

- B121 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B121 Binector / connector converters

8-65

8-66

.01
.02
.03

U127 (0)
K
K
K

.01
.02
.03

U124 (0)
K
K
K

.01
.02
.03

U123 (0)
K
K
K

U126 (0)
K
K
K

.01
.02
.03

U122 (0)
K
K
K

.01
.02
.03

U121 (0)
K
K
K

U125 (0)
K
K
K

.01
.02
.03

U120 (0)
K
K
K

K9127

K9126

K9125

K9124

K9123

K9122

K9121

K9120

15 adders / subtractors

.04
.05
.06

U120 (0)
K
K
K

U122 (0)
K
K
K
.04
.05
.06

.04
.05
.06

.01
.02
.03

U131 (0)
K
K
K

U121 (0)
K
K
K

.01
.02
.03

U130 (0)
K
K
K

U129 (0)
K
K
K

U128 (0)
K
K
K

K9134

K9133

K9132

K9131

K9130

K9129

K9128

U138 (0)
K

U137 (0)
K

U136 (0)
K

U135 (0)
K

y = -x

-1

y = -x

-1

y = -x

-1

y = -x

-1

4 sign inverters

K9138

K9137

K9136

K9135

U142 (0)
K

U143 (0)
B

U140 (0)
K

U141 (0)
B

y = -x

-1

y = -x

-1

2 switchable sign inverters

- B125 -

K9141

K9140

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B125 Adders / subtractors, sign inverters

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01 x1
.02 x2

U150 (0)
K
K

U151 (0)
K
K

U152 (0)
K
K

U153 (0)
K
K

12 multipliers

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

x1 * x2
100%

K9153

K9152

K9151

K9150

U153 (0)
K
K

U152 (0)
K
K

U151 (0)
K
K

U150 (0)
K
K

.03 x1
.04 x2

x1 * x2
100%

296

K9436

294

K9434

292

K9432

290

K9430

U153 (0)
K
K

U152 (0)
K
K

U151 (0)
K
K

U150 (0)
K
K

.05 x1
.06 x2

x1 * x2
100%

297

K9437

295

K9435

293

K9433

291

K9431

- B130 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B130 Multipliers

8-67

8-68

.01 x1
.02 x2

U146 (1)
K
K

U147 (1)
K
K

x1 *100%
x2

With division by 0 (x2 = 0):

when x1 > 0: y = +199.99%
when x1 = 0: y = 0.00%
when x1 < 0: y = -199.99%

.01 x1
.02 x2

U145 (1)
K
K

6 dividers

K9147

K9146

K9145

U147 (1)
K
K

U146 (1)
K
K

U145 (1)
K
K

.03 x1
.04 x2

x1 * 100%
x2

K9144

K9143

K9142

.01 x1
.02 x2
.03 x3

x4=
x1 * x2

With division by 0 (x3 = 0):

when x4 > 0: y = +199.99%
when x4 = 0: y = 0.00%
when x4 < 0: y = -199.99%

U157 (1)
K
K
K

U156 (1)
K
K
K

U155 (1)
K
K
K

y=
x4 / x3

K9157

K9156

K9155

y
100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 40% 50%
80%
-200% -200% -200% -200%

Examples:

x4 (32Bit)

- B131 -

3 high-resolution multipliers / dividers

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B131 Dividers, High-resolution multipliers / dividers

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U180.02
(100,00)

U178.02
(100,00)

U176.02
(100,00)
K
-1

K9178
-1

K
K

K9260
K9261
-1

U179
K

K9177

U177
K

K9175

U175
K
K9174

3 limiters

FS
.04
0
.05
9260
.06
9261

FS
.04
0
.05
9177
.06
9178

FS
.04
0
.05
9174
.06
9175

B+

214

B+

213

B+

212

B+

X<B

X>B+

X<B

X>B+

X<B

X>B+

B9296

B9295

B9159

B9158

B9157

B9156

K9262

K9179

K9176

- B134 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B134 Limiters

8-69

8-70
3

U169 (0)
K

U166 (0)
K

U163 (0)
K

U160 (0)
K

-1

U170 (0)

-1

U167 (0)

-1

U164 (0)

-1

U161 (0)

Filter time
0...10000ms
U171 (0)

Filter time
0...10000ms
U168 (0)

Filter time
0...10000ms
U165 (0)

Filter time
0...10000ms
U162 (0)

K9163

K9162

K9161

K9160

4 absolute-value generators with filter

U180.01
(100,00)

U178.01
(100,00)

U176.01
(100,00)

K9172

K9171

K9169

K9168

K9166
-1

-1

U179
K

U177
K

U175
K
K9165

3 limiters

FS
.01
0
.02
9171
.03
9172

FS
.01
0
.02
9168
.03
9169

FS
.01
0
.02
9165
.03
9166

B+

X<B

X>B+

X<B

X>B+

X<B

X>B+

B9155

B9154

B9153

B9152

B9151

B9150

- B135 -

K9173

K9170

K9167

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B135 Absolute-value generators with filter, limiters

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U189
K
K

U185
K
K

FS
.01
0
.02
9183

FS
.01
0
.02
9181

Filter time
0...10000ms
U191 (0)

<1> Example: -50% < -40%

K9183

U190 (0,00)

K9181

U186 (0,00)

Filter time
0...10000ms
U187 (0)

U192

K9182

U188

K9180

3 limit-value monitors with filter

U188

U192

B
U192

U192/2

U192

U188

U188/2

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U192 (0,00)

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U188 (0,00)

A=B

A

|A|<B

A=B

A

|A|<B

B9165

B9164

B9163

B9162

B9161

B9160
K9185

U194 (0,00)

U193
K
K

FS
.01
0
.02
9185

Filter time
0...10000ms
U195 (0)

U196

K9184

U196

U196/2

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U196 (0,00)

A=B

A

|A|<B

B9168

B9167

B9166

- B136 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B136 Limit-value monitors with filter

8-71

8-72

U200
K
K

U197
K
K

FS
.01
0
.02
9187

FS
.01
0
.02
9186

<1> Example: -50% < -40%

K9187

U201 (0,00)

K9186

U198 (0,00)

U202

U199

U202

B
U202

U202/2

U202

U199

U199/2

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U202 (0,00)

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U199 (0,00)

4 limit-value monitors without filter

A=B

A

|A|<B

A=B

A

|A|<B

B9174

B9173

B9172

B9171

B9170

B9169

K9188

K9189

U207 (0,00)

U204 (0,00)

U206
K
K

U203
K
K

FS
.01
0
.02
9189

FS
.01
0
.02
9188

U208

U205

U208

U208/2

U208

U205

U205/2

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U208 (0,00)

Hysteresis
0,00..100,00
U205 (0,00)

A=B

A

|A|<B

A=B

A

|A|<B

- B137 -

B9180

B9179

B9178

B9177

B9176

B9175

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B137 Limit-value monitors without filter

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U213
K
K

U210
K
K

FS
.01
0
.02
9191

FS
.01
0
.02
9190

<1> Example: -50% < -40%

K9191

U214 (0,00)

K9190

U211 (0,00)

U215

U212

U215

B
U215

U215/2

U215

U212

U212/2

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U215 (0,00)

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U212 (0,00)

3 limit-value monitors without filter

A=B

A

|A|<B

A=B

A

|A|<B

B9186

B9185

B9184

B9183

B9182

B9181

K9192

U217 (0,00)

U216
K
K

FS
.01
0
.02
9192

U218

U218/2

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U218 (0,00)

A=B

A

|A|<B

- B138 -

B9189

B9188

B9187

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B138 Limit-value monitors without filter

8-73

8-74

U172 (0)
K

.02

.01

4 averagers

averaging
over
n values

Number of values
for averaging
U173.02 (1)

averaging
over
n values

Number of values
for averaging
U173.01 (1)

K9456

K9455

U172 (0)
K

.04

.03

averaging
over
n values

Number of values
for averaging
U173.04 (1)

averaging
over
n values

Number of values
for averaging
U173.03 (1)

K9458

K9457

- B139 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B139 Averagers

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01
.02
.03

x1
x2
x3

MAX

.01
.02
.03

x1
x2
x3

MIN

y = minimum of x1, x2, x3

(e.g. -50% lower than -40%)

U221 (0)
K
K
K

Minimum selection

y = maximum of x1, x2, x3

(e.g. -40% greater than -50%)

U220 (0)
K
K
K

Maximum selection

K9194

K9193

U221 (0)
K
K
K

U220 (0)
K
K
K

.04
.05
.06

x1
x2
x3

MIN

MAX

174

K9463

177

K9460

U221 (0)
K
K
K

U220 (0)
K
K
K

.07
.08
.09

x1
x2
x3

MIN

MAX

K9464

178

K9461

175

U221 (0)
K
K
K

U220 (0)
K
K
K

.10
.11
.12

x1
x2
x3

MIN

MAX

- B140 -

K9465

179

K9462

176

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B140 Maximum selections, minimum selections

8-75

8-76
3

.01
.02
.03

RESET (y=0)

STORE

Priority:
1. RESET
2. TRACK
3. STORE

K9195

<1>

Power On Mode
U224 (0)

U226 (0)
B
B
B

U225 (0)
K

RESET
(y=0)

SET
(y=x)

K9197

<2> from voltage monitor for electronics power supply

POWER ON
<2>

U228 (0)
K

U229 (0)
B

2 connector-memories

POWER ON
<2>

U230 (0)
K

.01
.02
.03

U231 (0)
B

<1> Power On Mode: U224/U227=0: No "non-volatile" storage:

Zero appears at output when voltage recovers
U224/U227=1: "Non-volatile" storage:
When power is disconnected or fails, the current output value is stored
and output again when voltage is reconnected/recovers.

U223 (0)
B
B
B

U222 (0)
K

TRACK

1 y=x
freeze y

2 tracking / storage elements

RESET (y=0)

STORE

RESET
(y=0)

SET
(y=x)

TRACK

1 y=x
freeze y

K9198

Priority:
1. RESET
2. TRACK
3. STORE

K9196

<1>

Power On Mode
U227 (0)

- B145 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B145 Tracking / storage elements, connector memories

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U248 (0)
K
K

U249 (0)
B

U246 (0)
K
K

U247 (0)
B

U244 (0)
K
K

U245 (0)
B

U242 (0)
K
K

U243 (0)
B

U240 (0)
K
K

U241 (0)
B

.01
.02

K9214

K9213

K9212

K9211

K9210

.01

.01
.02

U258 (0)
K
K

.01
.02

U256 (0)
K
K

U259 (0)
B

.01

.01
.02

U254 (0)
K
K

U257 (0)
B

.01

.01
.02

U252 (0)
K
K

U255 (0)
B

.01

.01
.02

.01

U253 (0)
B

U250 (0)
K
K

U251 (0)
B

15 connector changeover switches

K9219

K9218

K9217

K9216

K9215

.02

.03
.04

U258 (0)
K
K

.03
.04

U256 (0)
K
K

U259 (0)
B

.02

.03
.04

U254 (0)
K
K

U257 (0)
B

.02

.03
.04

U252 (0)
K
K

U255 (0)
B

.02

.03
.04

U250 (0)
K
K

U253 (0)
B

.02

U251 (0)
B

K9269

229

K9268

199

K9267

198

K9266

197

K9265

196

- B150 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B150 Connector changeover switches

8-77

8-78

.03
.04

.01
.02

A
B

U182.01

U182.02

U182.02/2

U182.01

U182.01/2

U182.01

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U182.02 (0,00)

U182.01

<1> Example: -50% < -40%

U181 (0)
KK
KK

Hysteresis
0,00...100,00
U182.01 (0,00)

A=B

A

|A|<B

A=B

A

|A|<B

Limit-value monitors (for double-word connectors)

High-resolution blocks

B9685

B9684

B9683

B9682

B9681

B9680

.03 LOW
.04 HIGH

.01 LOW
.02 HIGH

KK9499

299

KK9498

298

U132 (0)
KK
KK
KK

.04
.05
.06

.01
.02
.03

Adders / subtractors
(for double-word connectors)

U098 (0)
K
K

Connector-type converters

K9493

KK9492

K9491

KK9490

- B151 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B151 High-resolution blocks

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

[G145.7]

.01
.02

U671 (0)
B
B

U670 (0)
KK

.03
.04

.02

U672 (9471)
.01
KK

U671 (0)
B
B

U670 (46)
.01
KK

Position 2 U672 (9472) .02

KK
Set value

Set

Position 2
Reset

Position
actual value 2

Position 1
Set value

Set

Position 1
Reset

Position
actual value 1

POWER ON
<2>

U674

POWER ON
<2>

U674.F(10000) <1>

U673

transformation ratio
U673.F(10000) <1>

RESET
y=initial value
<3>

SET
(y=x)

Priority:
1. RESET
2. SET

RESET
y=initial value
<3>

SET
(y=x)

Position/positional deviation acquisition

1
54

U671 (0)
B
B

U676 (9474)
KK

U675 (0)
B

.05
.06

POWER ON
<2>

Priority:
1. RESET
2. SET

RESET
(y=0)

SET
(y=x)

U677 (0)
U677 (0)
U677 (0)
U677 (0)
U677 (0)
U677 (0)
U677 (0)
U677 (0)

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08

KK9474

KK9473

KK9472

KK9471

The output connectors are calculated

by the following formula:
KK9471 = 65536*U677.002 + U677.001
KK9472 = 65536*U677.004 + U677.003
KK9473 = 65536*U677.006 + U677.005
KK9474 = 65536*U677.008 + U677.007
That makes high-resolution setting possible.

Fixed values for set values

<3> Initial value is dependent on U678

= 0: Initial value = 0
= 1: Initial value is set such that on POWER ON KK9481 or KK9482 assumes whatever
its setting value was before the electronics supply was disconnected.

<2> from voltage monitor for electronics power supply

<1> U873 must be set less than or equal to U674

(otherwise F058 is output with fault value 14)

KK9482

Positional deviation U672 (9473) .03

KK
Set value

Set

Positional deviation
Reset

Offset positional deviation

Subtract offset
positional deviation

KK9481

- B152 -

K9484

KK9483

[B153.1]

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B152 Position/positional deviation acquisition

8-79

U680 (9483)
KK

[B152.8]

Root extractor

U682
0
U681

Threshold
U681 (1)

U683.001

U683.002

Definition of the root function

x value
y value
U683.001
U684.001

U684.001

8-80
U684.002

U681

U682

Hysteresis
U682 (1)

Output

Input

Definition of the maximum gradient

x value
y value
U683.002
U684.002

B9687

B9686

K9485

U683.002 and U684.002: Setting of the maximum gradient

With parameter U683.002 you can define
at which input value the limitation straight line
will take on value U684.002.

- B153 -

U683.001 and U684.001: Setting of the magnitude of the root function

With parameter U683.001 you can define
at which input value the output of the root
function will take on value U684.001.

Parameters:

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B153 Root extractor

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Setting value

Set integrator

Stop
.01 integrator
.02

U272 (0)
K

y
K9220

100

U267 (0)
K

U266 (0)
B
B

U264 (0)
K

-1

103

K9224

K9223

U275 (0)
K

s
(transfer function: G(s) = Tv * ------------ )
1 + s T1

Derivative
action
time (Tv) Filter time (T1)
(0...1000ms) (0...1000ms)
U273 (0)
U274 (0)

3 DT1 elements

U263 (0)
K

U262 (0)
B
B

U260 (0)
K

Integral-action time (Tn)

(10...65000ms)
U261 (10)

3 integrators

1
0

Derivative
action
time (Tv) Filter time (T1)
(0...1000ms) (0...1000ms)
U276 (0)
U277 (0)

Setting value

Set integrator

Integral-action time (Tn)

(10...65000ms)
U265 (10)

Stop
.01 integrator
.02

-1

104

K9226

K9225

K9221

101

U278 (0)
K

U271 (0)

U270 (0)
B
B

U268 (0)
K

Derivative
action
time (Tv) Filter time (T1)
(0...1000ms) (0...1000ms)
U279 (0)
U280 (0)

Setting value

Set integrator

Stop
.01 integrator
.02

Integral-action time (Tn)

(10...65000ms)
U269 (10)

-1

105

- B155 -

K9228

K9227

K9222

102

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B155 Integrators, DT1 elements

8-81

8-82

.01

U551 (1)
K

.02

U550 (0)
K

.02

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.02 (100ms)

U550 (0)
K

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.01 (100ms)

U551 (1)
K

4 LEAD / LAG blocks

.01

.02

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.02 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.01 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

271

270

K9401

K9400

U551 (1)
K
.03

.03

U551 (1)
K
.04

U550 (0)
K

.04

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.04 (100ms)

U550 (0)
K

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.03 (100ms)

.03

.04

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.04 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.03 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

273

272

K9403

K9402

G(s) =

- B156 -

1 + sTv
--------1 + sT1

Transfer function:

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B156 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.05

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.05

U551 (1)
K

.06

U550 (0)
K

.06

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.06 (100ms)

U550 (0)
K

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.05 (100ms)

U551 (1)
K

4 LEAD / LAG blocks

.05

.06

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.06 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.05 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

275

274

K9405

K9404

U551 (1)
K
.07

.07

U551 (1)
K

.08

U550 (0)
K

.08

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.08 (100ms)

U550 (0)
K

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.07 (100ms)

.07

.08

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.08 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.07 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

277

276

K9407

K9406

G(s) =

- B157 -

1 + sTv
--------1 + sT1

Transfer function:

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B157 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks)

8-83

8-84
U551 (1)
K

.09

U551 (1)
K
.10

U550 (0)
K
.10

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.10 (100ms)

.09

Derivative action time

0...10000ms
U552.09 (100ms)

U550 (0)
K

2 LEAD / LAG blocks

.09

.10

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.10 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

Filter time
1...10000ms
U554.09 (100ms)

U553 (1)
K

279

278

K9409

K9408

G(s) =

1 + sTv
--------1 + sT1

Transfer function:

- B158 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B158 Derivative / delay elements (LEAD / LAG blocks)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U281.01 (0)
K

U281.02 (0)
K

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U281.03 (0)
K

280

K9229

U284.02 (0)
K

U284.01 (0)
K

-200%
x1
23
y1

x10
+200%

U282.21 to .30 (0)

X values

-200%
x1

y10

281

U284.03 (0)
K
x

-200%
x1
23

K9411

x
x10
+200%

U285.21 to .30 (0)

X values

-200%
x1

y10

x
x10
+200%

Y values
U286.21 to .30 (0)

x10
+200%

K9410

y10

Y values
U283.21 to .30 (0)

U285.11 to .20 (0)

X values

x10
+200%

U282.11 to .20 (0)

X values

-200%
x1

y10

Y values
U286.11 to .20 (0)

x10
+200%

y10

Y values
U286.01 to .10 (0)

Y values
U283.11 to .20 (0)

U285.01 to .10 (0)

X values

106

U282.01 to .10 (0)

X values

-200%
x1

y10

Y values
U283.01 to .10 (0)

9 characteristic blocks

K9413

283

K9412

282

K9230

107

U287.03 (0)
K

U287.02 (0)
K

U287.01 (0)
K

x
x10
+200%

U288.21 to .30 (0)

X values

-200%
x1

Y values
U289.21 to .30 (0)

y10

x
x10
+200%

U288.11 to .20 (0)

X values

-200%
x1

Y values
U289.11 to .20 (0)

y10

x
x10
+200%

U288.01 to .10 (0)

X values

-200%
x1

y10

Y values
U289.01 to .10 (0)

- B160 -

K9415

285

K9414

284

K9231

108

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B160 Characteristic blocks

8-85

8-86

U294 (0)
K

U292 (0)
K

U290 (0)

-z

Dead zone z
U295 (0,00)

-z

Dead zone z
U293 (0,00)

-z

Dead zone z
U291 (0,00)

3 dead zones

K9234

111

K9233

110

K9232

109

U296 (0)
K
x

U299

-U298

100%
-U297

Maximum
speed
U298(100,00)

U299 (0,00)
Hysteresis

-100%

U297

U298

Minimum
speed
U297(0,00)

Setpoint branching

K9235

112

- B161 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B161 Dead zones, Setpoint branching

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
FS
.01
0
.02
0
.03
1

freeze y

y=0

POWER ON <2>

1 = Enable simple ramp-function

generator
0 = Reset simple ramp-function
generator

Stop simple ramp-function

generator

y=x

B9191

B9190

K9236

0 = Ramp-function generator
initial run

Priority:
1. S (SET)
2. R (RESET)

113

<2> from voltage monitor for electronics power supply

<1> When U301.01 = 9191, the ramp-function generator operates only once after it has been enabled (edge log. "0" to "1")

U301
B
B
B

U300 (0)
K

Ramp-up time Ramp-down time

U302 (0,00) U303 (0,00)

Bypass simple ramp-function

generator
<1>

Simple ramp-function generator

- B165 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B165 Simple ramp-function generator

8-87

8-88

n017

n016

K9240

1
0

K9241

U502.F (0)
<1>

K9244

Kp-factor

U483.F(0)

U505 (0)
K

U506 (0)
B

U500 (0)
B

K9245

K9246

K9242

Setting value for I component

Set I component

1000 1

U494.F
(3,000)

K9249

U508.F
(100,0)

U507 (1)
K

[B170.8]

U509 (9252)
K

U510.F
(100,0)

Stop I component

U495.F(0)

U503.F (1) U504.F (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

technology controller

U488.F
(3,00)

U499.F
(-100,00)

114

Enable technology controller

D component

U482.F(0,000)

U498.F
(100,00)

Droop injection

U496 (0)
B

U497.F(0,0)

Technology controller

Filter time
U481.F(0,00s)

1000

n018

<1> 0 = D component acts only in actual-value channel

1 = Normal PID controller: D component is applied for control deviation

K9243

0% 1
0
Setpoint

U490.F U491.F
(0,00) (100,00)
0,00...200,00%
Tresholds

Filter time [s]

U487.F(0,00)

Kp adaptation

U485.F (0,00)

.01
.02
.03
.04

Inject additional
setpoint

U486 (0)
B

Setpoint
U484 (0)
K
K
K
K

U480 (0)
K
K
K
K

Actual value

Kp-factors
0,10...30,00
U492.F U493.F
(1,00)
(1,00)

U489 (0)
K

K9248

K9247

* -1
n019

U512.F
(100,0)

U511 (1)
K

I component

P component

- B170 -

Controller at
output limit

B9499

K9251

Negative limit

K9253

K9254

Technology controller
output

K9250

Positive limit

[B170.7]
K9252

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B170 Technology controller

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01

Filter time
U535.01 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

260

.01
.11
.21
.31
.41

K9300

.01 1 = set I component <4>

.11 1 = set output <2>

.01 setting value for I component

.11 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
1

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.01

PI-controller

U537.01
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9303

K9302

K9301

* -1

K9305

Positive limit

K9306

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9670

Negative limit

K9307

Controller at
output limit

B9650

- B180 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9304

PI-controller output

B9660

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

P component active
I component is frozen
output = P component + I component
<6> freeze I component in pos. direction:
P component active
if controller input (X) is positive,
I component is frozen
output = P component + I component
<7> freeze I component in neg. direction:
P component active
if controller input (X) is negative,
I component is frozen
output = P component + I component

U545.01
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9307)

U544 (9306)
.01
K

.01

U543.01
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9305)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

P component = 0
I component = 0
output = 0
<2> set output:
P component active
I component = setting value - P component
output = setting value
<3> freeze output:
P component active
I component = frozen output - P component
output is frozen
<4> set I component:
P component active
I component = setting value
output = P component + I component

U540.01 (1) U541.01 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.01
(3,000 s)

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B180 PI controller 1

8-89

8-90

.02

Filter time
U535.02 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

261

.02
.12
.22
.32
.42

K9310

.02 1 = set I component <4>

.12 1 = set output <2>

.02 setting value for I component

.12 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
2

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.02

PI-controller

U537.02
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9313

K9312

K9311

* -1

K9315

Positive limit

K9316

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9671

Negative limit

K9317

Controller at
output limit

B9651

- B181 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9314

PI-controller output

B9661

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.02
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9317)

U544 (9316)
.02
K

.02

U543.02
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9315)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.02 (1) U541.02 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.02
(3,000 s)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B181 PI controller 2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.03

Filter time
U535.03 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

262

.03
.13
.23
.33
.43

K9320

.03 1 = set I component <4>

.13 1 = set output <2>

.03 setting value for I component

.13 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
3

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.03

PI-controller

U537.03
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9323

K9322

K9321

* -1

K9325

Positive limit

K9326

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9672

Negative limit

K9327

Controller at
output limit

B9652

- B182 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9324

PI-controller output

B9662

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.03
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9327)

U544 (9326)
.03
K

.03

U543.03
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9325)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.03 (1) U541.03 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.03
(3,000 s)

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B182 PI controller 3

8-91

8-92

.04

Filter time
U535.04 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

263

.04
.14
.24
.34
.44

K9330

.04 1 = set I component <4>

.14 1 = set output <2>

.04 setting value for I component

.14 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
4

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.04

PI-controller

U537.04
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9333

K9332

K9331

* -1

K9335

Positive limit

K9336

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9673

Negative limit

K9337

Controller at
output limit

B9653

- B183 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9334

PI-controller output

B9663

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.04
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9337)

U544 (9336)
.04
K

.04

U543.04
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9335)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.04 (1) U541.04 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.04
(3,000 s)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B183 PI controller 4

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.05

Filter time
U535.05 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

264

.05
.15
.25
.35
.45

K9340

.05 1 = set I component <4>

.15 1 = set output <2>

.05 setting value for I component

.15 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
5

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.05

PI-controller

U537.05
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9343

K9342

K9341

* -1

K9345

Positive limit

K9346

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9674

Negative limit

K9347

Controller at
output limit

B9654

- B184 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9344

PI-controller output

B9664

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.05
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9347)

U544 (9346)
.05
K

.05

U543.05
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9345)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.05 (1) U541.05 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.05
(3,000 s)

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B184 PI controller 5

8-93

8-94

.06

Filter time
U535.06 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

265

.06
.16
.26
.36
.46

K9350

.06 1 = set I component <4>

.16 1 = set output <2>

.06 setting value for I component

.16 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
6

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.06

PI-controller

U537.06
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9353

K9352

K9351

* -1

K9355

Positive limit

K9356

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9675

Negative limit

K9357

Controller at
output limit

B9655

- B185 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9354

PI-controller output

B9665

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.06
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9357)

U544 (9356)
.06
K

.06

U543.06
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9355)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.06 (1) U541.06 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.06
(3,000 s)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B185 PI controller 6

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.07

Filter time
U535.07 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

266

.07
.17
.27
.37
.47

K9360

.07 1 = set I component <4>

.17 1 = set output <2>

.07 setting value for I component

.17 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
7

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.07

PI-controller

U537.07
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9363

K9362

K9361

* -1

K9365

Positive limit

K9366

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9676

Negative limit

K9367

Controller at
output limit

B9656

- B186 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9364

PI-controller output

B9666

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.07
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9367)

U544 (9366)
.07
K

.07

U543.07
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9365)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.07 (1) U541.07 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.07
(3,000 s)

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B186 PI controller 7

8-95

8-96

.08

Filter time
U535.08 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

267

.08
.18
.28
.38
.48

K9370

.08 1 = set I component <4>

.18 1 = set output <2>

.08 setting value for I component

.18 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
8

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.08

PI-controller

U537.08
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9373

K9372

K9371

* -1

K9375

Positive limit

K9376

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9677

Negative limit

K9377

Controller at
output limit

B9657

- B187 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9374

PI-controller output

B9667

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.08
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9377)

U544 (9376)
.08
K

.08

U543.08
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9375)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.08 (1) U541.08 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.08
(3,000 s)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B187 PI controller 8

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.09

Filter time
U535.09 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

268

.09
.19
.29
.39
.49

K9380

.09 1 = set I component <4>

.19 1 = set output <2>

.09 setting value for I component

.19 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
9

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.09

PI-controller

U537.09
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9383

K9382

K9381

* -1

K9385

Positive limit

K9386

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9678

Negative limit

K9387

Controller at
output limit

B9658

- B188 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9384

PI-controller output

B9668

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.09
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9387)

U544 (9386)
.09
K

.09

U543.09
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9385)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.09 (1) U541.09 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.09
(3,000 s)

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B188 PI controller 9

8-97

8-98

.10

Filter time
U535.10 (0 ms)

U534 (1)
K

269

.10
.20
.30
.40
.50

K9390

.10 1 = set I component <4>

.20 1 = set output <2>

.10 setting value for I component

.20 setting value for PI-controller output

U533 (0)
K
K

0 = disable PI-controller <1>

1 = freeze I component <5>
1 = freeze output <3>
1 = freeze I comp. in pos. direction <6>
1 = freeze I comp. in neg. direction <7>

U532 (0)
B
B

Set PI-controller

U531 (0)
B
B
B
B
B

PI-controller
10

Enable PI-controller

U530 (0)
K

.10

PI-controller

U537.10
(3,00)

U536 (1)
K

U538 (1)
K

0 0

K9393

K9392

K9391

* -1

K9395

Positive limit

K9396

1
1 + sTn
--------- * Kp * --------1 + sT1
sTn

B9679

Negative limit

K9397

Controller at
output limit

B9659

- B189 -

Priority:
1. disable PI-controller
2. set output
3. freeze output
4. set I component
5. freeze I component
6. freeze I component in pos. direction
7. freeze I component in neg. direction

Controller at neg.
output limit

K9394

PI-controller output

B9669

Controller at pos.
output limit

G(s) =

Transfer function:

<5> freeze I component:

U545.10
(100,0)

Stop I component in
neg.direction and limit
it to negative limit
(K9397)

U544 (9396)
.10
K

.10

U543.10
(100,0)

U542 (1)
K

Stop I component in
pos.direction and limit
it to positive limit
(K9395)

I component

P component

<1> disable PI-controller:

U540.10 (1) U541.10 (1)

0 = Reset P 0 = Reset I
component component

1
sTn

U539.10
(3,000 s)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B189 PI controller 10

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U516 (0)
K

U515 (0)
K

U517 (0)
K

Diameter

Min. diameter
(10,0...6553,5mm)
U518.F (6500,0)

Setpoint velocity
(-32,768...32,767 m/s)
n022

Normalization
U523 (1638)
(10...60000mm)

Normalization
U522 (16,38)
(0,01...327,67m/s)

Actual speed
n020

Velocity / speed calculator

v set

n act

115

U519.F (1,00)
Gear ratio

Rated speed

U520.F (1450)

n rated

vset i
nset = ----------------- 100%
D nrated

Velocity-speed calculator

D nrated nact
vact = ----------------- -------i
100%

Speed-velocity calculator

nset

v act

Setpoint speed
n023

Actual velocity
(-32,768...32,767 m/s)
n021

Normalization
U521 (16,38)
(0,01...327,67m/s)

K9257

K9256

- B190 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B190 Velocity / speed calculator

8-99

8-100

U525 (1)
K
K
K
K

.01
.02
.03
.04

Variable inertia

U529 (1,00)
(0,10...100,00)

Normalization of
max. diameter
U528 (10000)
(10...60000mm)

Normalization diameter
of sleeve
U527 (10000)
(10...60000mm)

Normalization diameter
U526 (10000)
(10...60000mm)

Dmax

DCore

D4 - DCore4
JV = ------------------ * K
Dmax4

Variable inertia

116

K9258

- B191 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B191 Calculation variable inertia

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01
.02
.03

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08

.04
.05
.06

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08

U310 (0)
B
B
B

U311 (0)
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K

U310 (0)
B
B
B

U312 (0)
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K

3 Multiplexers

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7

X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7

B3 B2 B1

K9451

K9450

U313 (0)
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K

U310 (0)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08

.07
.08
.09

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

B3 B2 B1

X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7

B3 B2 B1

K9452

- B195 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B195 Multiplexer

8-101

8-102
3

K9442

K9443

K9444

Maximum counter value

0...65535
U315.02 (65535)

Counter setting value

0...65535
U315.03 (0)

Counter start value

0...65535
U315.04 (0)
K

U316
K

9444

9443

9442

POWER ON
from sheet B110

Start value

Setting value

Maximum value

<2>

Note:

The sampling time and sequence of the upstream signal processor

must also be taken into account

<3> Example: The counter operates in the time slice 1 max. counting frequency = 300 Hz

<1>

<2> The start and setting values are limited to the range (minimum value..maximum value)

.04

.03

.02

Minimum value

FS
.01
9441

Enable counter

Set counter

.05

Stop counter

.04

Count down

0
.03

Count up

<3>

.02

FS
.01
0

U317
B

<1> The counter is set to the start value after POWER ON

K9441

Minimum counter value

0...65535
U315.01 (0)

Priority:
1. Enable counter
2. Set counter
3. Stop counter
4. Count up / down

Maximum counting frequency = 1 / scanning time

16-bit software counter

Underflow

Overflow

(Binary code)

OUT

Underflow

Overflow

Count down

Count up

Counter output
3

B9291

B9290

Binary output
0...65535
n314

Example: Minimum value = 2, Maximum value = 7

Set counter
to start
value

Set counter
to setting
value

Set counter
to minimum
value

DOWN

K9445

- B196 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B196 16-bit software counter

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

118

U318 (0)
B
B
B

B9255

B9256

B9257

Q5
/Q5
Q6
/Q6
Q7
/Q7
B9267

B9266

B9265

B9264

00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11

0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1

1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0

0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

B9254

Q4
/Q4

B9263

/Q0 /Q1 /Q2 /Q3 /Q4 /Q5 /Q6 /Q7

B9253

Q3
/Q3

B9262

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

B9252

Q2
/Q2

B9261

B9260

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7

B9251

B9250

Q1
/Q1

Q0
/Q0

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

i0
i1
i2

i2-i1-i0

.01
.02
.03

2 decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8

119

U319 (0)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03
i0
i1
i2

Q7
/Q7

Q6
/Q6

Q5
/Q5

Q4
/Q4

Q3
/Q3

Q2
/Q2

Q1
/Q1

Q0
/Q0

B9277

B9276

B9275

B9274

B9273

B9272

B9271

B9270

B9287

B9286

B9285

B9284

B9283

B9282

B9281

B9280

- B200 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B200 Decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8

8-103

8-104

.01
.02
.03

U320 (1)
B
B
B

U321 (1)
B
B
B

U322 (1)
B
B
B

U323 (1)
B
B
B

U324 (1)
B
B
B

U325 (1)
B
B
B

U326 (1)
B
B
B

B9356

126

B9355

125

B9354

124

B9353

123

B9352

122

B9351

121

B9350

120

U333 (1)
B
B
B

U332 (1)
B
B
B

U331 (1)
B
B
B

U330 (1)
B
B
B

U329 (1)
B
B
B

U328 (1)
B
B
B

U327 (1)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

28 AND elements with 3 inputs each

B9363

133

B9362

132

B9361

131

B9360

130

B9359

129

B9358

128

B9357

127

U340 (1)
B
B
B

U339 (1)
B
B
B

U338 (1)
B
B
B

U337 (1)
B
B
B

U336 (1)
B
B
B

U335 (1)
B
B
B

U334 (1)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

B9370

140

B9369

139

B9368

138

B9367

137

B9366

136

B9365

135

B9364

134

U347 (1)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

U345 (1)
B
B
B

U346 (1)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

U344 (1)
B
B
B

U343 (1)
B
B
B

U342 (1)
B
B
B

U341 (1)
B
B
B

B9377

147

B9376

146

B9375

145

B9374

144

B9373

143

B9372

142

B9371

141

- B205 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B205 AND elements

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01
.02
.03

U350 (0)
B
B
B

U351 (0)
B
B
B

U352 (0)
B
B
B

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U353 (0)
B
B
B

U354 (0)
B
B
B

U355 (0)
B
B
B

U356 (0)
B
B
B

B9386

156

B9385

155

B9384

154

B9383

153

B9382

152

B9381

151

B9380

150

U363 (0)
B
B
B

U362 (0)
B
B
B

U361 (0)
B
B
B

U360 (0)
B
B
B

U359 (0)
B
B
B

U358 (0)
B
B
B

U357 (0)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

20 OR elements with 3 inputs each

B9393

163

B9392

162

B9391

161

B9390

160

B9389

159

B9388

158

B9387

157

U369 (0)
B
B
B

U368 (0)
B
B
B

U367 (0)
B
B
B

U366 (0)
B
B
B

U365 (0)
B
B
B

U364 (0)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

B9399

169

B9398

168

B9397

167

B9396

166

B9395

165

B9394

164

U373 (0)
B
B

U372 (0)
B
B

U371 (0)
B
B

U370 (0)
B
B

.01
.02

- B206 -

B9198

173

B9197

172

B9196

171

B9195

170

4 EXCLUSIVE OR elements
with 2 inputs each

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B206 OR elements, EXCLUSIVE OR elements

8-105

8-106

U387 (0)
B

U384 (0)
B

U383 (0)
B

U386 (0)
B

U382 (0)
B

U381 (0)
B

U385 (0)
B

U380 (0)
B

16 inverters

B9457

187

B9456

186

B9455

185

B9454

184

B9453

183

B9452

182

B9451

181

B9450

180

U395 (0)
B

U394 (0)
B

U393 (0)
B

U392 (0)
B

U391 (0)
B

U390 (0)
B

U389 (0)
B

U388 (0)
B

B9465

195

B9464

194

B9463

193

B9462

192

B9461

191

B9460

190

B9459

189

B9458

188

U405 (1)
B
B
B

U404 (1)
B
B
B

U403 (1)
B
B
B

U402 (1)
B
B
B

U401 (1)
B
B
B

U400 (1)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

B9475

205

B9474

204

B9473

203

B9472

202

B9471

201

B9470

200

U411 (1)
B
B
B

U410 (1)
B
B
B

U409 (1)
B
B
B

U408 (1)
B
B
B

U407 (1)
B
B
B

U406 (1)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

12 NAND elements with 3 inputs each

- B207 -

B9481

211

B9480

210

B9479

209

B9478

208

B9477

207

B9476

206

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B207 Inverters, NAND elements

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01
.02

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01
.02

POWER ON
<1>

U419 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U418 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U417 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U416 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U415 (0)
B
B

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

14 RS flipflops

B9559

219

B9558

B9557

218

B9556

B9555

217

B9554

B9553

216

B9552

B9551

215

B9550

.01
.02

POWER ON
<1>

U424 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U423 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U422 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U421 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U420 (0)
B
B

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

B9569

224

B9568

B9567

223

B9566

B9565

222

B9564

B9563

221

B9562

B9561

220

B9560

.01
.02

Priority:
1. RESET
2. SET

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

RESET
(Q=0)

SET
(Q=1)

B9577

228

B9576

B9575

227

B9574

B9573

226

B9572

B9571

225

B9570

<1> from voltage monitor for electronics power supply

POWER ON
<1>

U428 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U427 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U426 (0)
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U425 (0)
B
B

- B210 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B210 RS flipflops

8-107

8-108

.01
.02
.03
.04

RESET (Q=0)

STORE

SET (Q=1)

RESET (Q=0)

STORE

SET (Q=1)

B9493

231

B9492

B9491

230

B9490

<1> from voltage monitor for electronics power supply

POWER ON
<1>

U431 (0)
B
B
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U430 (0)
B
B
B
B

4 D flipflops

.01
.02
.03
.04

POWER ON
<1>

U433 (0)
B
B
B
B

POWER ON
<1>

U432 (0)
B
B
B
B

RESET (Q=0)

STORE

SET (Q=1)

RESET (Q=0)

STORE

SET (Q=1)

B9497

233

B9496

B9495

232

B9494

Priority:
1. RESET
2. SET
3. STORE

- B211 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B211 D flipflops

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

.01
.02

U440 (0)
B
B

U443 (0)
B
B

6 timers

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
B9583

B9582

U449 (0)
B
B

U446 (0)
B
B

.01
.02

ON/OFF delay
T
T

OFF delay
O
T

ON delay
T
O

1 = Reset

Mode

1 = Reset

Mode

U451 (0)

1 = Reset

U450 (0,000)
(0,000...60,000s)

Pulse generator

ON/OFF delay
T
T

241

B9581

B9580

OFF delay
O
T

240

ON delay
T
O

U447 (0,000)
(0,000...60,000s) U448 (0)

Pulse generator

Mode

U445 (0)

Mode

Pulse generator

ON/OFF delay
T
T

OFF delay
O
T

ON delay
T
O

U444 (0,000)
(0,000...60,000s)

1 = Reset

Pulse generator

ON/OFF delay
T
T

OFF delay

ON delay
T
O

U441 (0,000)
(0,000...60,000s) U442 (0)

243

242

B9587

B9586

B9585

B9584

U455 (0)
B
B

U452 (0)
B
B

.01
.02

1 = Reset

Mode

U457 (0)

Pulse generator

ON/OFF delay
T
T

OFF delay
O
T

ON delay
T
O

3
1 = Reset

U456 (0,000)
(0,000...60,000s)

Mode

U454 (0)

Pulse generator

ON/OFF delay
T
T

OFF delay
O
T

ON delay
T
O

U453 (0,000)
(0,000...60,000s)

245

244

- B215 -

B9591

B9590

B9589

B9588

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet B215 Timers (0.000...60.000s)

8-109

8-110

U461 (0)
B
B

.01
.02

ON/OFF delay
T
T

OFF delay
O
T

ON delay
T
O

U468 (0,00)
(0,00...600,00s)

1 = Reset

Mode

U469 (0)

1 = Reset

Pulse generator

ON/OFF delay
T
T

Mode

U466 (0)

B9595

B9594

U467 (0)
B
B

U464 (0)
B
B

OFF delay
O
T

ON delay
O
T

U465 (0,00)
(0,00...600,00s)

247

B9593

B9592

Pulse generator

Mode

U463 (0)

246

Pulse generator

ON/OFF delay
T
T

OFF delay
O
T

ON delay
T
O

U462 (0,00)
(0,00...600,00s)

1 = Reset

Mode

U460 (0)

Pulse generator

ON/OFF delay
T
T

OFF delay
O
T

ON delay
O
T

U459 (0,00)
(0,00...600,00s)

4 timers

U458 (0)
B
B

249

248

B9599

B9598

B9597

B9596

U474 (0)
B
B
B

U473 (0)
B
B
B

U472 (0)
B
B
B

U471 (0)
B
B
B

U470 (0)
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03

- B216 -

B9486

254

B9485

253

B9484

252

B9483

251

B9482

250

5 binary signal selector switches

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet B216 Timers (0.00...600.00s), Binary signal selector switches

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Data exchange with a technology board (TB) or the 1st communication board (CB)
Data exchange with the 2nd communication board (CB)
1st EB1 analog inputs
1st EB1 analog outputs
1st EB1 bidirectional inputs/outputs, digital inputs
2nd EB1 analog inputs
2nd EB1 analog outputs
2nd EB1 bidirectional inputs/outputs, digital inputs
1st EB2 analog input, digital inputs, relay outputs
2nd EB2 analog input, digital inputs, relay outputs
SBP pulse encoder evaluation
SIMOLINK board configuration, diagnosis
SIMOLINK board receiving, transmitting
OP1S operator panel
Interfaces: connector-type converters
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary inputs
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary inputs
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary outputs
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary outputs
SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary inputs
SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary inputs
SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary outputs
SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary outputs
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog inputs
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog inputs
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog outputs
SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog outputs

Content
Z110
Z111
Z112
Z113
Z114
Z115
Z116
Z117
Z118
Z119
Z120
Z121
Z122
Z123
Z124
Z130
Z131
Z135
Z136
Z140
Z141
Z145
Z146
Z150
Z151
Z155
Z156

Sheet

Function diagram SIMOREG 6RA70 - Contents of optional supplementary boards

- Z100 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Optional supplementary boards Sheets Z100 to Z156

Sheet Z100 Table of contents

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

8-111

8-112

from supplementary board

Bit 10 must be set in word 1 of the

receive data to ensure that the
process data are accepted as valid
data. Control word 1 must therefore
be transferred as the first PZD word.

Fault message trigger

1 = "Fault F082"
(fault value 10)

1 = "Fault delay timeout"

K3006

Word 6

B3035

K3005

Word 5

...

K3004

Word 4

Bit 0

K3003

Word 3
[G183.6]

[G151.3]

K3002

U734
[G182.6]

every 16 bits

[Z124.2]
K3001

n733.01 to .16

Word 1 <1>
Word 2

Receive data

For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 7.7.10

Fault delay time

U722.03 (0 ms)

1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout"

Message
monitoring time
U722.01 (0 ms)

Message monitoring for received process data:

When bit 10 ("control by PLC") = 0,

the other bits of word 1, as well as words
2 to 16 are not written to connectors K3001 to K3016
or to binectors B3100 to 3915.
All these connectors and binectors retain their old values.

<1>

Word 16

Word 15

Word 14

Word 13

Word 11
Word 12

Word 10

Word 9

Word 8

Word 7

Word 6

Word 5

Word 4

Word 2
Word 3

Word 1

Transmit data

Initialize link to supplementary boards

Valid for the following configurations:

- CB only
- TB only
- CB after TB (CB in slot G)
- 2 CBs (for CB with the lower slot letter)

- Z110 -

Bus address
Enable parameterization

Display parameter response (PKW) to TB

P918 Index.01
P927

Display parameter response (PKW) to CB

n739 Index.09-.12

Display parameter job (PKW) from TB

n739 Index.01-.04

Display parameter job (PKW) from CB

n738 Index.09-.12

CB or TB diagnosis

CB parameter 11

CB parameters 1 to 10

to supplementary board

n738 Index.01-.04

n732 Index.01-.32

U721 Index.01-.05

U711-U720 Index.01

U710 Index.01

Parameters for the 1st CB board

.01
32
.02
167
.03
0
.04
33
.05
0
.06
0
.07
0
.08
0
.09
0
.10
0
.11
0
.12
0
.13
0
.14
0
.15
0
.16
0

n735.01 to .16

Data exchange with a technology board (TB) or the 1st communications board (CB)

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z110 Data exchange with a technology board (TB) or

the 1st communications board (CB)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

from supplementary board

Bit 10 must be set in word 1 of the

receive data to ensure that the
process data are accepted as valid
data. Control word 1 must therefore
be transferred as the first PZD word.

Fault message trigger

1 = "Fault F082"
(fault value 10)

1 = "Fault delay timeout"

K8007

Word 7

Bit 15

K8006

Word 6

...

K8005

Word 5

Bit 0

K8004

Word 4

Word 16

Word 15

Word 14

Word 13

Word 12

Word 11

Word 10

Word 9

Word 8

Word 7

Word 6

Word 5

Word 4

Word 3

Word 2

Word 1

Transmit data

Display parameter response (PKW) to CB

Bus address
Enable parameterization

P918 Index.02
P927

- 2 CBs (for CB with the higher slot letter)

- Z111 -

Display parameter job (PKW) from CB

n739 Index.05-.08

Valid for the following configurations:

CB or TB diagnosis
n738 Index.05-.08

CB parameter 11
U721 Index.06-.10
n732 Index.33-.64

CB parameters 1 to 10
U711-U720 Index.02

to supplementary board

Initialize link to supplementary boards

Parameters for the 2nd CB board

.16

.15

.14

.13

.12

.11

.10

.09

.08

.07

.06

.05

.04

.03

.02

.01

n735.17 to .32

U710 Index.02

U736 (0)
K

K8003

K8001

[Z124.4]

Word 3

every 16 bits
K8002

B8035

For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 7.7.10

Fault delay time

U722.04 (0 ms)

1 = "Telegram monitoring timeout"

Message
monitoring time
U722.02 (0 ms)

n733.17 to .32

Word 2

Word 1 <1>

Receive data

Sheet Z111 Data exchange with the 2

Message monitoring for received process data:

When bit 10 ("control by PLC") = 0,

the other bits of word 1, as well as words
2 to 16 are not written to connectors K8001 to K8016
or to binectors B8100 to 8915.
All these connectors and binectors retain their old values.

<1>

Data exchange with the 2nd communications board (CB)

05.2007
Function diagrams

communications board (CB)

8-113

8-114

i
20mA
51

20mA 10V

X488

Digital inputs
24V

24V

Analog inputs
10V

10V

AI3

AI2

10V

X487

X486

A
D

13 bits + sign

10V=100%

Hardware
smoothing 220 s

13 bits + sign

10V=100%

Hardware
smoothing 220 s

also usable as digital inputs

Offset
-100,00...100,00%
U757.3 (0,00)

* 100%

U756.3

Standardization
-1000,0...1000,0
U756.3(100,0)

Offset
-100,00...100,00%
U757.2 (0,00)

* 100%

U756.2

Standardization
-1000,0...1000,0
U756.2(100,0)

Offset
-100,00...100,00%
U757.1 (0,00)

* 100%

U756.1

Standardization
-1000,0...1000,0
U756.1(100,0)

B5101
Open circuit (|i| 2mA)

13 bits + sign

10V =100%
20mA=100%

Hardware
smoothing 220 s

1st EB1: Analog inputs (to ground)

u
10V

AI1

Signal type
(0/1=10V/20mA)
U755.1 (0)

1st EB1: Analog input 1 (differential input)

-1

U758.3 (0)

-1

U758.2 (0)

-1

U758.1 (0)

Smoothing

Time constant
0...10000ms
U760.2 (0)

Smoothing

Time constant
0...10000ms
U760.1 (0)

Smoothing

Time constant
0...10000ms
U760.3 (0)

K5103

B5102

- Z112 -

B5103

Digital input

n762.3

Analog input
connection

K5102

K5101

Digital input

n762.2

Analog input
connection

U761.3 (1)
B

High at input (voltage at term. 53 > 8V)

Sign reversal

-1

U759.3 (0)
B

n762.1

Analog input
connection

U761.2 (1)
B

U761.1 (1)
B

High at input (voltage at term. 52 > 8V)

Sign reversal

-1

U759.2 (0)
B

Sign reversal

-1

U759.1 (0)
B

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z112 1 EB1: Analog inputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U763.2 (0)
K

U763.1 (0)
K

-1

U764.2 (0)

-1

U764.1 (0)

1st EB1: Analog outputs

Time constant
(0...10000ms)
U765.2 (0)

Time constant
(0...10000ms)
U765.1 (0)

n768.2

n768.1

x
100%

* U766.1

K5105

y [V] =
100%

* U766.2

Standardization
-200,00...+199,99V
U766.2 (10,00)

K5104

y [V] =

Standardization
-200,00...+199,99V
U766.1 (10,00)

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
U767.2 (0,00)

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
U767.1 (0,00)

11 bits + sign

11 Bit + VZ

AO2

AO1

Uout [V] =

* Standardization [V] + Offset [V]

100%

K5105

Sheet Z113 1 EB1: Analog outputs

- Z113 -

* Standardization [V] + Offset [V]

-10V...+10V

100%

K5104

05.2007
Function diagrams

8-115

8-116

24V

Outputs

Out

Inputs

In 43

DI3

DI2

DI1

DIO4

DIO3

DIO2

DIO1

Out

U769.4 (0)
B

U769.3 (0)
B

U769.2 (0)
B

24V

1st EB1: 3 digital inputs

24V

Out

U769.1 (0)
B

Outputs

B5117

B5116

B5115

B5114

B5113

B5112

1st EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs / outputs

B5111

B5110

B5109

B5108

B5107

B5106

B5105

B5104

Inputs

- Z114 -

Display of terminal states in n770.1 on the PMU

Example: Terminal 45 = input => U769.3=0

If one of the terminals 43 to 46 is to be used as an

input, the corresponding output must be set to
"0" (transistor blocked)!

NOTICE

K5106

n770.1

Out/In

M_external

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z114 1 EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs- / outputs, 3 digital inputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Digital inputs
24V

24V

20mA 10V

X488

AI3

AI2

10V

X487

X486

A
D

13 bits + sign

10V=100%

Hardware smoothing 220 s

13 bits + sign

10V=100%

Hardware
smoothing 220 s

also usable as digital inputs

Offset
-100,00...100,00%
U757.6 (0,00)

* 100%

U756.6

Standardization
-1000,0...1000,0
U756.6(100,0)

Offset
-100,00...100,00%
U757.5 (0,00)

* 100%

U756.5

Standardization
-1000,0...1000,0
U756.5(100,0)

Offset
-100,00...100,00%
U757.4 (0,00)

* 100%

U756.4

B5201
Open circuit (|i| 2mA)

13 bits + sign

10V =100%
20mA=100%

Analog inputs (to ground)

Analog inputs
10V

10V

2nd EB1:

i
20mA
51

Hardware
smoothing 220 s

Standardization
-1000,0...1000,0
U756.4(100,0)

-1

U758.6 (0)

-1

U758.5 (0)

-1

U758.4 (0)

Smoothing

Time constant
0...10000ms
U760.5 (0)

Smoothing

Time constant
0...10000ms
U760.4 (0)

Smoothing

Time constant
0...10000ms
U760.6 (0)

K5203

B5202

- Z115 -

B5203

Digital input

n762.6

Analog input
connection

K5202

K5201

Digital input

n762.5

Analog input
connection

U761.6 (1)
B

High at input (voltage at Kl. 53 > 8V)

Sign reversal

-1

U759.6 (0)
B

n762.4

Analog input
connection

U761.5 (1)
B

U761.4 (1)
B

High at input (voltage at term. 52 > 8V)

Sign reversal

-1

U759.5 (0)
B

Sign reversal

-1

U759.4 (0)
B

Sheet Z115 2

u
10V

AI1

Signal type
(0/1=10V/20mA)
U755.2 (0)

2nd EB1: Analog input 1 (differential input)

05.2007
Function diagrams

EB1: Analog inputs

8-117

8-118

U763.4 (0)
K

U763.3 (0)
K

-1

U764.4 (0)

-1

Time constant
(0...10000ms)
U765.4 (0)

Time constant
(0...10000ms)
U765.3 (0)

n768.4

n768.3

x
100%

* U766.3

K5205

y [V] =
100%

x
* U766.4

Standardization
-200,00...+199,99V
U766.4 (10,00)

K5204

y [V] =

Standardization
-200,00...+199,99V
U766.3 (10,00)

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
U767.4 (0,00)

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
U767.3 (0,00)

11 bits + sign

AO2

AO1

Uout [V] =

* Standardization [V] + Offset [V]

100%

K5205

- Z116 -

* Standardization [V] + Offset [V]

-10V...+10V

100%

K5204

Sheet Z116 2

-1

U764.3 (0)

2nd EB1: Analog outputs

Function diagrams
05.2007

EB1: Analog outputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

24V

Out

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Inputs

DI3

DI2

DI1

DIO4

DIO3

DIO2

DIO1

In 43

K5206

n770.2

Out/In

M_external

Out

U769.8 (0)
B

U769.7 (0)
B

U769.6 (0)
B

24V

2nd EB1: 3 digital inputs

24V

Out

U769.5 (0)
B

Outputs

B5217

B5216

B5215

B5214

B5213

B5212

2nd EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs / outputs

B5211

B5210

B5209

B5208

B5207

B5206

B5205

B5204

Inputs

- Z117 -

Display of terminal states in n770.2 on the PMU

Example: Terminal 45 = input => U769.7=0

If one of the terminals 43 to 46 is to be used as an

input, the corresponding output must be set to
"0" (transistor blocked)!

NOTICE

Sheet Z117 2

Outputs

05.2007
Function diagrams

EB1: 4 bidirectional inputs- / outputs, 3 digital inputs

8-119

8-120

24V

X498

DI1

DI2

-1

U784.1 (0)

1
B5125

B5124

B5123

B5122

y [V] =

K5112

x
100%

n773.1

K5113

U774 (0)
B
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03
.04

Iout =
-20...+20mA

Uout = -10V...+10V

100%

K5112

K5111

X499

DO4

DO3

DO2

DO1

- Z118 -

38
39

* Standardization [V] + Offset [V]

n782.1

Analog input
connection

Uout [V] =

U781.1 (1)
B

1st EB2: 4 relay outputs

* U786.1

Smoothing

9 bits + sign

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
U787.1 (0,00)

Sign reversal

-1

Time constant
0...10000ms
U780.1 (0)

M_external

24V

n788.1

U779.1 (0)
B

Standardization
-200,00...+199,99V
U786.1 (10,00)

-1

U778.1 (0)

Display of terminal states in n773.1 on the PMU

Smoothing

Time constant
(0...10000ms)
U785.1 (0)

Offset
-100,00...100,00%
U777.1 (0,00)

* 100%
B5121

1st EB2: 2 digital inputs

M_external

P24_aux

M_external

U783.1 (0)
K

U776.1

Standardization
-1000,0...1000,0
U776.1(100,0)

Open circuit (|i| 2mA)

11 bits + sign

10V =100%
20mA=100%

Hardware
smoothing 220 s

1st EB2: Analog output

20mA 10V

Signal type
(0/1=10V/20mA)
U775.1 (0)

1st EB2: Analog input (differential input)

10V 20mA

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z118 1 EB2: Analog input, Analog output, 2 digital inputs, 4 relay outputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

24V

DI1

DI2

-1

U784.2 (0)

M_external

24V

B5225

B5224

B5223

B5222

n788.2

y [V] =

K5212

100%

n773.2

K5213

U774 (0)
B
B
B
B

.05
.06
.07
.08

Iout =
-20...+20mA

Uout = -10V...+10V

100%

K5212

K5211

X499

DO4

DO3

DO2

DO1

- Z119 -

38
39

* Standardization [V] + Offset [V]

n782.2

Analog input
connection

Uout [V] =

U781.2 (1)
B

2nd EB2: 4 Relay outputs

* U786.2

9 bits + sign

Smoothing

Time constant
0...10000ms
U780.2 (0)

Offset
-10,00...+10,00V
U787.2 (0,00)

Sign reversal

-1

U779.2 (0)
B

Standardization
-200,00...+199,99V
U786.2 (10,00)

-1

U778.2 (0)

Display of terminal states in n773.2 an der PMU

Smoothing

Time constant
(0...10000ms)
U785.2 (0)

Offset
-100,00...100,00%
U777.2 (0,00)

* 100%
B5221

2nd EB2: 2 digital inputs

M_external

P24_aux

M_external

U783.2 (0)
K

U776.2

Standardization
-1000,0...1000,0
U776.2(100,0)

Open circuit (|i| 2mA)

11 Bit + VZ

10V =100%
20mA=100%

Hardware
smoothing 220 s

2nd EB2: Analog output

X498

Signal type
(0/1=10V/20mA)
U775.2 (0)

20mA 10V

2nd EB2: Analog inputs (differential input)

Sheet Z119 2

10V 20mA

05.2007
Function diagrams

EB2: Analog input, Analog output, 2 digital inputs, 4 relay outputs

8-121

8-122

Control track

Zero pulse

Track B

Track A

Power supply
Pulse encoder

X401

X400

CTRL - = M

CTRL +

Zero pulse -

Zero pulse +

Track B -

Track B +

Track A -

Track A +

<2>

Fine pulse 2

B7003

B7002

B7001
Fine pulse 2

Control track

Pulse encoder evaluation

B7000

Number of lines
100...20000
U792 (1024)

<2>

Coarse pulse 2 <2>

Coarse pulse 1

Encoder type
Voltage level
U793=0: A/B track
U790.01: A/B, CTRL track
U793=1: Forward/reverse tracks U790.02: Zero pulse

<2>

Coarse pulse 2

Coarse pulse 1

Ground coarse/fine

- Vss

+ Vss

+5/15V

Supply voltage
U791 = 0: 5V
U791 = 1: 15V

SBP pulse encoder evaluation

<1>

Position acquisition

n024.02

n795

<1> 0=Enable position counter (KK0036)

1=Reset (KK0036:=0)
<2> The signals "coarse pulse 2" and "fine pulse 2"
are only routed to binectors B7002 and B7003
in the SIMOREG DC Master.
They have no other function.

Reset
position counter
U796

Speed measurement

Reference speed
50.0...6500.0
U794 (500,0)

KK0036

B0056

B0055

K0038

K0039

- Z120 -

Position
value range:
8000 0000H to 7FFF FFFFH

Overflow

Underflow

Speed actual value in rpm

Speed actual value

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z120 SBP pulse encoder evaluation

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

<1>

Telegram failure

1 = "Fault F015"

Fault message trigger

Module
address = 0

SLB diagnosis

Dispatcher
specific
section

Monitoring is activated after the first valid telegram

B7030

Fault delay
U753 (0,0)
0,0...100,0 s

Dispatcherspecific
section

General
section

SLB
configuration

SIMOLINK board: Configuration, diagnosis

6,36 s = time for 1 telegram

U746 + 3,18 s
1
f: No. of addressed nodes = ( ---------------------- 2) -------6,36 s
U745

SLB cycle time

U746.01 (1,20)
1,00...6,50ms

U745.01 (3)
1...8

1 = 0...15m
2 = 15...25m
3 = 25...40m
Cable length

U742.01 (3)

Transmit power

SLB node
address
U740.01 (0)
0...200

Telegram monitoring
time
U741.01 (0 ms)
0...6500ms

SLB channel
selection

Starting alarm

B7050

1 = "Alarm A015"

Alarm message trigger

"SIMOLINK starting" alarm

B7040

Time out

SLB diagnosis i001: No. of error-free synchronizing telegram

i002: No. of CRC errors
n748
i003: No. of timeout errors
i004: last accessible bus address
i005: Address node transmitting the
special "timeout" telegram
i006:Implemented bus cycle time
i007: Number of re-configurations
i008: reserved
...
i016:reserved

- Z121 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet Z121 SIMOLINK board: Configuration, diagnosis

8-123

8-124

Receive

RxD

Receive data

Special
data

U749.08

U749.07

U749.06

U749.05

U749.04

U749.03

U749.02

U749.01

Bit 15
B7115

K7007

Word 7

...

K7006

Word 6

K7016

Word 16

K7104
K7105
K7106
K7107
K7108

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

Word 7

Word 8

K7103

K7015

Word 15

Word 3

K7014

Word 14

K7102

K7013

Word 13

Word 2

K7012

Word 12

Word 1

K7011

Word 11

B7215
B7315
B7415
B7515
B7615
B7715
B7815
B7915

B7200
B7300
B7400
B7500
B7600
B7700
B7800
B7900

Bit 0
B7100

K7010

Word 10

[Z124.6]
K7101

K7009

Word 9

K7008

K7005

Word 5

Word 8

K7004

Word 4

SIMOLINK board: Receiving, transmitting

n750.01 to .16

Word 2
Word 3

Word 1

U749.xx: Parameter value =

Address.ChannelNumber
(before/after decimal point.)

For transmission of double-word connectors see Section 7.7.4 "Procedure for starting up SIMOLINK boards"

SIMOLINK

.16

.15

.14

.13

.12

.11

.10

.09

.08

.07

.06

.05

.04

.03

.02

.01

n752.01 to .16

Word 16

Word 15

Word 14

Word 13

Word 12

Word 11

Word 10

Word 9

Word 8

Word 7

Word 6

Word 5

Word 4

Word 3

Word 2

Word 1

Channel 7

Channel 6

Channel 5

Channel 4

Channel 3

Channel 2

Channel 1

Channel 0

Transmit data

TxD

- Z122 -

Transmit

SIMOLINK

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z122 SIMOLINK board: Receiving, transmitting

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U049.005

U049.003

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions
U049.001

Positive direction of rotation

Negative direction of rotation

Raise motor pot.

<1>

Lower motor pot.

<1>

B2108

B2111

B2112

B2113

B2114

Jog

<1> This key works only when the OP1S

is in the "Operational display" state

Inching 1

B2107

Reset

U049.002

7
Inching (Jog) key

Jog

+/-

Reset

Sign key

Reset key

- Z123 -

0 to 9: Numerical keys

Key for the operating

level switchover

Lower key

Reversing key

OFF key

LC Display
(4 lines x 16 characters)

Raise key

Fault
Run

ON key

Active node
(=Bus address P786)

0.0V 00
#
25.00%

25.00%
Torque direc. 1

6.0%

ON / OFF1 (B2100 must also be connected

to bit 1 or 2 in control word 1
for OFF2 or OFF3.)
Acknowledge
<1>

B2100

OP operation. display
OP operation. display
1st line on right
1st line on left
FS=38:
FS=19:
display of r038
display of r019
Motor current act. value act. armature voltage val.

The control commands from the OP1S panel are transferred via word 1 in the USS protocol
and can be wired up to other functions via the binectors below (see also Section 7.2.2).

OP operation.display OP operation.display
3rd line
2nd line
FS=28:
FS=25:
display of r028
display of r025
Speed setpoint Speed controller act. value

U049.004

OP1S operator panel

OP operation display
4th line
FS=59:
display of r059
Operating state

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet Z123 OP1S operator panel

8-125

8-126

[Z110.5]

LOW
HIGH

K3002

K3003

K3004

K3005

K3006

K3007

K3008

K3009

K3010

K3011

K3012

K3013

K3014

K3015

K3016

LOW
HIGH

K3001

KK3045

KK3044

KK3043

KK3042

KK3041

KK3040

KK3039

KK3038

KK3037

KK3036

KK3035

KK3034

KK3033

KK3032

KK3031

Technology board /
1st communications board (Z110)
[Z111.5]

LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH

K8002
K8003
K8004
K8005
K8006
K8007
K8008
K8009
K8010
K8011
K8012
K8013
K8014
K8015
K8016

LOW
HIGH

K8001

KK8045

KK8044

KK8043

KK8042

KK8041

KK8040

KK8039

KK8038

KK8037

KK8036

KK8035

KK8034

KK8033

KK8032

KK8031

2nd communications board (Z111)

Interfaces: connector-type converters

[Z122.3]

[Z122.4]
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH

K7002
K7003
K7004
K7005
K7006
K7007

LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH

K7102
K7103
K7104
K7105
K7106
K7107
K7108

LOW
HIGH

K7101

K7008

LOW
HIGH

K7001

SIMOLINK board (Z122)

KK7137

KK7136

KK7135

KK7134

KK7133

KK7132

KK7131

KK7037

KK7036

KK7035

KK7034

KK7033

KK7032

KK7031

- Z124 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z124 Interfaces: connector-type converters

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

<1>

Binary input 5

~
~

24V DC

~
~

24V

Supply for the

SCI1 board

Binary input 10

A2
A9
A10
A11

A1
B9
B10
B11

Binary input 9

Supply for
binary inputs
(optional)

Binary input 8

=external supply
of binary inputs

Binary input 7

<1>

Binary input 4

=Supply of binary
inputs via SCI1

<1>

Binary input 3

Binary input 6

Binary input 2

Binary input 1

SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary inputs

P24

Reference point for

binary inputs 6 to 10

Reference point for

binary inputs 1 to 5

X427

n699.01

24V

B4129

B4128

B4127

B4126

B4125

B4124

B4123

B4122

B4121

B4120

SCI slave 1

B4109

B4108

B4107

B4106

B4105

B4104

B4103

B4102

B4101

B4100

- Z130 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet Z130 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary inputs

8-127

8-128

<1>

Binary input 5

~
~

24V DC

~
~

24V

Supply for
binary inputs
(optional)

Supply for the

SCI1 board

Binary input 8

= external supply of
binary inputs

Binary input 10

Binary input 9

Binary input 7

<1>

Binary input 4

= Supply of binary
inputs via SCI1

<1>

Binary input 3

Binary input 6

Binary input 2

A2
A9
A10
A11

A1
B9
B10
B11

Binary input 1

SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary inputs

P24

Reference point for

binary inputs 6 to 10

Reference point for

binary inputs 1 to 5

X427

n699.05

24V

B4229

B4228

B4227

B4226

B4225

B4224

B4223

B4222

B4221

B4220

SCI slave 2

B4209

B4208

B4207

B4206

B4205

B4204

B4203

B4202

B4201

B4200

- Z131 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z131 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary inputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

U698 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

n699.09

SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary outputs

X427

X429

Binary output 7

Binary output 6

Binary output 5

Binary output 4

Binary output 3

Binary output 2

Binary output 1

driver 100 mA
short-circuit-proof

B1 Binary output 8
driver P24 VDC

- Z135 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet Z135 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: binary outputs

8-129

8-130

U698 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

n699.13

SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary outputs

X427

X429

Binary output 7

Binary output 6

Binary output 5

Binary output 4

Binary output 3

Binary output 2

Binary output 1

Binary output 8
B2 100 mA short-circuit-proof

- Z136 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z136 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: binary outputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

~
~

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Supply of
SCI2 board

24V DC

~
~

24V

Supply for
binary inputs
(optional)

<1>

A10
A11
A12

B10
B11
B12

<1>

Binary input

X437

P24

24V

<1>

24V

Reference point for

binary inputs 1 to 8

SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary inputs

B4127

B4126

B4125

B4124

B4123

B4122

B4121

B4120

= external supply of
binary inputs

B4107

B4106

B4105

B4104

B4103

B4102

B4101

B4100

SCI slave 1

=Supply of binary
inputs via the SCI2

Binary input

Reference point for

binary inputs 9 to 16

n699.01

215

214

213

212

211

210

X437

24V

B4135

B4134

B4133

B4132

B4131

B4130

B4129

B4128

- Z140 -

B4115

B4114

B4113

B4112

B4111

B4110

B4109

B4108

SCI slave 1

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet Z140 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary inputs

8-131

~
~

8-132

Supply for the

SCI2 board

24V DC

~
~

24V

Supply for
binary inputs
(optional)

<1>

A10
A11
A12

B10
B11
B12

<1>

Binary input

X437

P24

24V

<1>

24V

Reference point for

binary inputs 1 to 8

SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary inputs

B4227

B4226

B4225

B4224

B4223

B4222

B4221

B4220

=external supply of
binary inputs

B4207

B4206

B4205

B4204

B4203

B4202

B4201

B4200

SCI slave 2

=Supply of binary
inputs via SCI2

Binary input

Reference point for

binary inputs 9 to 16

n699.05
SCB1/SCI
process data

215

214

213

212

211

210

X437

24V

B4235

B4234

B4233

B4232

B4231

B4230

B4229

B4228

- Z141 -

B4215

B4214

B4213

B4212

B4211

B4210

B4209

B4208

SCI slave 2

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z141 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary inputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

B
B
B
B

U698 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.10
.11
.12

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
210
211

n699.09

SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary outputs

X439

Binary output 7

Binary output 6

Binary output 5

Binary output 4

Binary output 3

Binary output 2

Binary output 1

P24

X438

- Z145 -

Auxiliary voltage M for

binary outputs

Auxiliary voltage P24 VDC

Binary output 12

Binary output 11

Binary output 10

Binary output 9

Binary output 8

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet Z145 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 1: binary outputs

8-133

8-134

B
B
B
B

U698 (0)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
210
211

n699.13

SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary outputs

X439

Binary output 7

Binary output 6

Binary output 5

Binary output 4

Binary output 3

Binary output 2

Binary output 1

P24

X438

- Z146 -

Auxiliary voltage M for

binary outputs

Auxiliary voltage P24 VDC

Binary output 12

Binary output 11

Binary output 10

Binary output 9

Binary output 8

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z146 SCB1 with SCI2 as slave 2: binary outputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

I
20mA

U
10V

X428

HardwareSmoothing 1ms

A
D

12 bits + sign

Offset
-20,00...20,00V
U692.03(0)

Offset
-20,00...20,00V
U692.02(0)

Offset
-20,00...20,00V
U692.01(0)

Changes to parameters U690, U691 or U692 do not take

effect until the system is reconfigured (e.g. using U710=0).

<1>

Signal type
0...2
U690.03(0)

<1>

Signal type
0...2
U690.02(0)

<1>

Signal type
0...2
U690.01(0)

-10 V / 5 mA for potentiometer, short-circuit-proof

+10 V / 5 mA for potentiometer, short-circuit-proof

SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog inputs

Smoothing
0...15
U691.03(2)
<2>

Smoothing
0...15
U691.02(2)
<2>

Smoothing
0...15
U691.01(2)
<2>

n699.04

n699.03

n699.02

-10 ... 10 V
0 ... 10 V
-

0
1
2

K4103

K4102

K4101

Analog input 3

Analog input 2

Analog input 1

SCI Slave 1

- Z150 -

-20 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA

Current input
Kl. X428.5, .8, .11

<2> Smoothing time constant T = 2 ms * 2U691

Voltage input
Kl. X428.3, .6, .9

U690

<1> Signal type

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet Z150 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog inputs

8-135

8-136

I
20mA

U
10V

X428

HardwareSmoothing 1ms

A
D

12 bits + sign

Offset
-20,00...20,00V
U692.06(0)

Offset
-20,00...20,00V
U692.05(0)

Offset
-20,00...20,00V
U692.04(0)

Changes to parameters U690, U691 or U692 do not take

effect until the system is reconfigured (e.g. using U710=0).

<1>

Signal type
0...2
U690.06(0)

<1>

Signal type
0...2
U690.05(0)

<1>

Signal type
0...2
U690.04(0)

-10 V / 5 mA for potentiometer, short-circuit-proof

+10 V / 5 mA for potentiometer, short-circuit-proof

SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog inputs

Smoothing
0...15
U691.06(2)
<2>

Smoothing
0...15
U691.05(2)
<2>

Smoothing
0...15
U691.04(2)
<2>

n699.08

n699.07

n699.06

-10 ... 10 V
0 ... 10 V
-

0
1
2

K4203

K4202

K4201

Analog input 3

Analog input 2

Analog input 1

SCI Slave 2

- Z151 -

-20 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA

Current input
Kl. X428.5, .8, .11

<2> Smoothing time constant T = 2 ms * 2U691

Voltage input
Kl. X428.3, .6, .9

U690

<1> Signal type

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z151 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog inputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

n699.12

n699.11

x
x
* U694.01
100%

x
* U694.02
100%

y [V] =

x
* U694.03
100%

Gain
-320,00...+320,00V
U694.03 (10,00)

y [V] =

Gain
-320,00...+320,00V
U694.02 (10,00)

y [V] =

Offset
-100,00...+100,00V
U695.03 (0,00)

Offset
-100,00...+100,00V
U695.02 (0,00)

Offset
-100,00...+100,00V
U695.01 (0,00)

Changes to parameters U694 or U695 do not take

effect until the system is reconfigured (e.g. using U710=0).

U693.03(0)
K

U693.02(0)
K

U693.01(0)
K

n699.10

Gain
-320,00...+320,00V
U694.01 (10,00)

SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog outputs

I
Iout = -20 ... 20 mA

Iout = -20 ... 20 mA

X428

Analog output 3

Analog output 2

Analog output 1

- Z155 -

05.2007
Function diagrams

Sheet Z155 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 1: analog outputs

8-137

8-138

n699.16

n699.15

x
x
* U694.04
100%

x
* U694.05
100%

y [V] =

x
* U694.06
100%

Gain
-320,00...+320,00V
U694.06 (10,00)

y [V] =

Gain
-320,00...+320,00V
U694.05 (10,00)

y [V] =

Offset
-100,00...+100,00V
U695.06 (0,00)

Offset
-100,00...+100,00V
U695.05 (0,00)

Offset
-100,00...+100,00V
U695.04 (0,00)

Changes to parameters U694 or U695 do not take

effect until the system is reconfigured (e.g. using U710=0).

U693.06(0)
K

U693.05(0)
K

U693.04(0)
K

n699.14

Gain
-320,00...+320,00V
U694.04 (10,00)

SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog outputs

I
Iout = -20 ... 20 mA

Iout = -20 ... 20 mA

X428

Analog output 3

Analog output 2

Analog output 1

- Z156 -

Function diagrams
05.2007

Sheet Z156 SCB1 with SCI1 as slave 2: analog outputs

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

Function descriptions
NOTE
The available scope of converter functions is shown in the function diagrams (block diagrams) in
Section 8.
Section 9 does not attempt to provide a complete description of all these functions, but to explain
in further detail certain individual features, which cannot be adequately illustrated in graphic
form, and provide examples of their application.

9.1

General explanations of terms and functionality

Function blocks
Although the illustrated function blocks have been implemented in digital form (as software modules),
the function diagrams can be "read" in a similar way to the circuit diagrams of analog equipment.
Configurability
The converter is characterized by the optional configurability of the function blocks provided. "Optional
configurability" means that the connections between individual function blocks can be selected by
means of parameters.
Connectors
All output variables and important computation quantities within the function blocks are available in the
form of "connectors" (e.g. for further processing as input signals to other function blocks). The
quantities accessed via connectors correspond to output signals or measuring points in an analog
circuit and are identified by their "connector number" (e.g. K0003 = connector 3).
Special cases: K0000 to K0008 are fixed values with signal levels corresponding to 0, 100, 200, -100,
-200, 50, 150, -50 and -150%.
K0009 is assigned to different signal quantities. Which signal quantity it actually refers
to is dependent on the selector switch (parameter) at which connector number 9 is set.
A description can be found under the relevant parameter number in the Parameter List.
If the Parameter List or block diagram does not contain any reference to a special
function in relation to selection of connector K0009, then the selector switch
(parameter) concerned must not be set to "9".
The internal numerical representation of connectors in the software is generally as follows:
100% corresponds to 4000 hexadecimal = 16384 decimal. The resolution is 0.006% (step change).
Connectors have a value range of -200% to +199.99%.
For a list of available connectors, please refer to Section 12.
Example: The data received via peer-to-peer 2 are available at connectors K6001 to K6005
(Section 8, Sheet G173)
G-SST2

X172

Tx+

Tx-

Rx+/Tx+

Rx-/Tx-

r812.01 to .05
Receive data

1
RS485

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Word 1
Word 2

K6001

Word 3

K6003

Word 4

K6004

Word 5

K6005

K6002

9-1

Function descriptions

05.2007

Double-word connectors (SW 1.9 and later)

Double-word connectors are connectors with a 32-bit value range (i.e. LOW word and HIGH word with
a double-word value range of 00000000Hex to FFFFFFFFHex ).
-100 % to +100 % corresponds to connector values of C0000000 Hex to 40000000 Hex
(= -1073741824 to +1073741824 decimal). This means that the value range in the upper 16 bits
(HIGH word) of a double-word connector is the same as for a "normal" connector (C000 Hex to 4000
Hex or -16384 to +16384 decimal for -100 % to +100 %). The extra 16 bits in the LOW word as
compared to a "normal connector" afford, therefore, an improved resolution of the connector value by
a factor of 65536. For information about how to use double-word connectors see also the section in
"The following rules apply to the selection of double-word connectors" below.
Double-word connector symbol in function diagrams:
KK9498

Binectors
All binary output quantities and important binary output signals of the function blocks are available as
"Binectors" (connectors for binary signals). Binectors can assume states log. "0" and log."1". The
quantities accessed via binectors correspond to output signals or measuring points in a digital circuit
and are identified by their "Binector number" (e. g. B0003 = binector 3).
Special cases: B0000 = Fixed value log."0"
B0001 = Fixed value log."1"
A list of available binectors can be found in Section 12.
Example: The status of terminal 36 is available at B0010 and, in inverted form, at binector B0011
(Section 8, Sheet G110)
36

24V

B0010

5V
M

B0011

Selection switches, connections

(see also Section "Data sets")
The inputs of function blocks are defined at "selection switches" by setting the appropriate selection
parameters. The input is defined by entering the number of the connector or binector to be applied as
the input quantity in the parameter for the relevant selection switch.
Representation in function diagrams (examples):
P750 (0)
K

Selection of a connector
Parameter number = P750, factory setting = 0 (i. e. fixed value 0%)

P704 (0)
B

Selection of a binector
Parameter number = P704, factory setting = 0 (i. e. fixed value 0)

P613 (1)
K
K
K
K

P611
K
K
K
K

9-2

Selection of connectors ("indexed" parameter with 4 indices)

Parameter number = P613, factory setting = 1 (i. e. fixed value 100%; this factory
setting applies to all the indices of P613)

.01
.02
.03
.04

FS
277
0
0
0

.01
.02
.03
.04

Selection of connectors ("indexed" parameter with 4 indices)

Parameter number = P611
Factory setting for index .01 = 277 (i. e. connection with connector K0277)
Factory setting for indices .02 to .04 = 0 (i. e. fixed value 0%)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
P046 (0)
.01
B
.02
B
.03
B
.04
B

Selection of binectors ("indexed" parameter with 4 indices)

Parameter number = P046, factory setting = 0 (i. e. fixed value 0, this factory setting
applies to all the indices of P046)

U181 (0)
KK

Selection of a double-word connector (SW 1.9 and later)

Parameter number = U181, factory setting = 0 (i.e. fixed value 0%)

The selected setting can be entered in the empty field (fields). The value in brackets next to the
parameter number is the factory setting of the selection parameter.
The following rules apply to the selection of double-word connectors (SW 1.9 and later):
KK9498

K0401

KK9498

KK9498
KK9498

U181 (0)
KK9498

Double-word connector to double-word connector selection:

U181
KK 401

Connector to double-word connector selection:

P044
K 9498

Double-word connector to connector selection:

U751 (0)
.01 L
K 9498
.02 H
K 9498

There are exceptions in the selection of transmission data for the serial
interfaces and in the transmission of optional expansion modules
(technology and communications modules, SIMOLINK module):
If the same double-word connector is entered in two contiguous indices of
the selection parameter, the entire value (the LOW and HIGH word) will be
used.

U751 (0)

If different double-word connectors are entered in two contiguous indices

of the selection parameter, in both cases only the HIGH word of the two
double-word connectors will be used.

KK9498

K 9498

KK9499

K 9499

The double word for subsequent processing comprises:

LOW word = LOW word of double-word connector (KK9498)
HIGH word = HIGH word of double-word connector (KK9498)

The double word for subsequent processing comprises:

LOW word = 0
HIGH word = selected connector (K0401)

HIGH word of the double-word connector (KK9498) is connected to

another block,
the LOW word of the double-word connector (KK9498) is not used

.01 H
.02 H

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-3

Function descriptions

05.2007

Examples: Some examples of how to handle connectors and binectors are given below.
Example 1:

As a function of the status of terminal 36 (B0010 - see Section 8, Sheet G110), analog
selectable input 1 (terminals 6 and 7) must be made available, either with the correct
sign or inverted sign, at the function block output (= connector K0015).
This output value must then be injected as an additional setpoint and output
simultaneously at analog output terminal 14.

The following settings need to be made to create the correct links:

1. P714 = 10: Selects binector B0010 (status of terminal 36) as the control signal for sign reversal.
Parameter P716 remains set at 1 (= fixed value 1, delivery state), thereby ensuring that
the analog input is switched in continuously.
Section 8, Sheet G113:
P714 (0)
B 10

P713 (0)

-1

P716 (1)
B
Filter time [ms]
P715 (0)

0
-1

1
0

r003

0
K0015
1

Sign reversal

Connection of
analog input

Filter

2. P645 = 15: Applies connector K0015 to the additional setpoint input when the setpoint is processed
Section 8, Sheet G135:
r029

Main setpoint
P644.F(206)

K0194

K0198

K0197
Maximum

P643 (9)
K
K
K
K

.01 <1>
.02 <1>
.03 <1>
.04 <1>

P321.F (100.00)
(-300.00...300.00 %)
Additional setpoint
P645.F (0)
K 15

3. P750 = 15: Applies connector K0015 to the input of the function block for the analog output
terminal 14. This example of K0015 illustrates how it is possible to apply a connector as
an input signal to any number of function blocks.
Section 8, Sheet G115:
P751 (0)

P750 (0)
K 15

-1

Filter time
(0...10000ms)
P752 (0)

1
0

9-4

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
Example 2:

The contents of connectors K0401 and K0402 must be output on the connector displays
(parameter r043)

The following settings need to be made to create the correct links:

P044.index01 = 401: Links connector K0401 to the 1st connector display
P044.index02 = 402: Links connector K0402 to the 2nd connector display
Section 8, Sheet G121:
r043.01
P044 (0)
.01
K 401
.02
K 402
.03
K
.04
K
.05
K
.06
K
.07
K

r043.03

r043.02

r043.05

r043.04

r043.07

r043.06

The following values are now displayed in parameter r043:

r043.index01:
r043.index02:
r043.index03

Contents of connector K0401

Contents of connector K0402

to
r043.index07:

Parameter P044.index.03 to 07 remain at the works setting (0) (value in

brackets next to parameter number) in this example, i. e. the contents
of connector K0000 (=fixed value 0) are displayed on r043.index.03 to
.07.

Setting parameters
(see also Section "Data sets")
In addition to the parameters that are used to select a signal (connector, binector), there are also
parameters which define an operating mode or the parameter value of some function.
Representation in function diagrams:
Apart from parameter numbers, the function diagrams may also contain the factory setting, function
and value range of parameters as supplementary information.
P109 (0)

P462.F(10.00s)
(0.01...300.00s)
Ramp-up time

Examples:

Setting parameter
Parameter number = P109, factory setting = 0

Setting parameter in function parameter set (".F" after parameter number)

Parameter number = P462, factory setting = 10.00s
Value range = 0.01...300.00s
Parameter for setting ramp-up time
P700 in Section 8, Sheet G113 defines the signal type of the analog input
(voltage input 10V, current input 0...20mA, current input 4...20mA).
P705 in Section 8, Sheet G113 defines the filter time for the analog input (adjustable
in ms).
Parameters P520 to P530 in Section 8, Sheet G153 determine the shape of the friction
characteristic.
P465 in Section 8, Sheet G126 determines whether the time settings must be multiplied
by a factor of 1 or 60.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-5

Function descriptions

05.2007

Data sets
See also Section "Switch over parameter sets"
Switch over function parameters (function data sets):
4 different sets of some parameters (function parameters) are available and can be selected by
means of the "Switch over function parameters" function. The switchover operation is controlled by
control word 2 (bits 16 and 17, see Section 8, Sheets G181 and G175). Index .01, .02, .03 or .04 of
these parameters is operative depending on the status of the control bit.
The parameters of this parameter set are identified by an ".F" next to the parameter number in the
function diagrams and by "FDS" under the parameter number in the tabulated parameter list.
The parameters belonging to the function parameter set must not be confused with other parameters
which, by chance, also have 4 indices. The latter parameters are not affected by the "Switch over
function parameters" function.
Switch over binector and connector parameters (Bico data sets):
2 different sets of some selection switches are available and can be selected by means of the "Switch
over binector and connector parameters" function. The switchover function is controlled by control
word 2 (bit 30, see Section 8, Sheets G181 and G175). The status of the control bit determines
whether index.01 or index .02 of the parameter is operative.
The parameters of the Bico data set are identified by a ".B" next to the parameter number in the
function diagrams and by "BDS" under the parameter number in the tabulated parameter list.
The parameters belonging to the Bico data set must not be confused with other parameters which, by
chance, also have 2 indices. The latter parameters are not affected by the "Switch over binector and
connector parameters" function.
Display parameters
The values of certain signals can be output using display parameters (r parameters, n parameters).
Connector displays (Section 8, Sheet G121) can be used to link all connectors with display
parameters so that they can be displayed.
Representation in function diagrams:
Apart from the parameter number, the function diagrams may also include a function description for
the parameter as supplementary information.
RFG status
r316

Display parameter
Parameter number = r316
Display of RFG (ramp-function generator) status

9.2

Computation cycles, time delay

Functions associated with analog inputs, analog outputs, binary inputs, binary outputs and interfaces,
as well as function blocks associated with the motorized potentiometer, setpoint generation, rampfunction generator and closed-loop speed and armature current controls, are called up and calculated
in synchronism with the armature firing pulses (i.e. every 3.333 ms at a line frequency of 50 Hz).
Function blocks associated with the closed-loop EMF and field current controls (shown in Section 8,
Sheets G165 and G166) are called and calculated in synchronism with the field firing pulses (i.e. every
10 ms at a line frequency of 50 Hz).
The parameter settings are processed in a further computation cycle with a cycle time of 20 ms. The
execution of optimization runs is also controlled from this cycle.
With regard to the transfer of parameter values via interfaces, it is important to remember that some
transferred parameters must be converted to this 20 ms cycle before they can be applied, for
example, in the armature firing pulse cycle.

9-6

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

9.3

Switch-on, shutdown, enabling

9.3.1

OFF2 (voltage disconnection) - control word 1, bit 1

The OFF2 signal is low active (log."0" state = voltage disconnection).
The following operating modes are possible:
P648 = 9:

The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. OFF2 is generated from the AND
operation between the binectors selected with P655, P656 and P657 (see Section 8,
Sheet G180).

P648 9:

The connector selected via P648 is used as control word 1. Bit 1 of this word then
controls the OFF2 function.

Sequence of operations for "Disconnect voltage":

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Input "Disconnect voltage" command

Disable ramp-function generator, n and I controllers
Iset = 0 is applied
The pulses are disabled when I = 0
Output signal "Close operating brake" (binector B0250 = 0, when P080 = 2)
Converter reaches operating state o10.0 or higher
An "older" actual field current value (K0265) is input as the field current setpoint upper limit
(function is "released" in operating states of o5)
8. The "Line contactor closed" relay drops out
9. Drive coasts to a standstill (or is braked by the operating brake)
10. Parameterizable delay time (P258) runs down
11. The field is reduced to a parameterizable value (P257)
12. When n < nmin (P370, P371) has been reached, the "Close holding brake" signal is output
(binector B0250 = 0, when P080 = 1)

9.3.2

OFF3 (Fast stop) - control word 1, bit 2

The OFF3 signal is LOW active (log."0" state = fast stop).
The following operating modes are possible:
P648 = 9:

The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. OFF3 is generated from the AND
operation between the binectors selected with P658, P659 and P660 (see Section 8,
Sheet G180).

P648 9:

The connector selected via P648 is used as control word 1. Bit 2 of this word then
controls the OFF3 function.

Sequence of operations for Fast stop:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Input "Fast stop" command (e.g. binary input wired up to "Fast stop")
Ramp-function generator is disabled
Enter nset = 0
up to SW 1.84: Decelerate along current limit
from SW 1.90:
Decelerate along reversal ramp acc. to P296, P297, P298
Wait until n < nmin (P370, P371)
Output signal "Close operating or holding brake" (binector B0250 = 0)
Wait for brake closing time (P088) to run down
Enter Iset = 0
Ramp-function generator and n controller are disabled
The pulses are disabled when I = 0
The "Line contactor closed" relay drops out
Converter reaches operating state o9.0 or higher
Delay time for field current reduction (P258) runs down
The field is reduced to a parameterizable value in P257

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-7

Function descriptions

05.2007

Sequence of operations for cancellation of "Fast stop":

1.
2.
3.

Stop applying "Fast stop" command

Enter "Standstill" command (e.g. via "Switch-on/shutdown" terminal)
Converter exits operating state o8
ON
Shutdown

Switch-on/Shutdown
No fast stop

External fast stop

Fast stop
No fast stop
Internal fast stop

Internal fast stop

Controller enabled
Internal controller enable

Controller disabled
Setpoint enabled

Internal setpoint enable

Setpoint =0
n > n min

n < n min (P370,P371)

n < n min

P087

Setpoint reached
Setpoint reached

Actual speed
Brake control signal (B0255)
(holding brake)
Internal standstill
field input

Close brake

Release brake
No standstill field

Sandstill field
P088

P258

P087 Brake release time (positive in this example)

P088 Brake closing time
P258 Delay for automatic field current reduction

9.3.3

The "Fast stop" command need only be applied as a short pulse (> 10 ms). It is then stored
internally. The memory can be reset only by applying the "Shutdown" command.

All "Fast stop" commands are ANDed by the SIMOREG converter, i.e. all commands must be set
to "No fast stop" before the function can be deactivated.

When n < nmin (P370, P371) is reached for the first time, an internal interlock is activated which
prevents the drive from attempting to brake again if the motor is turned by external forces.
The n < nmin signal then disappears again.

Switch-on / shutdown (ON / OFF) terminal 37 - control word 1, bit 0

The "Switch-on / shutdown" (ON / OFF) function is controlled via the "Switch-on command of ON /
OFF1" (= ANDing between signal from terminal 37 and binector selected in parameter P654, level- or
edge-triggered, see below) and bit 0 of connector selected as the control word in P648.
The following operating modes are possible:

9-8

P648 = 9:

The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. "ON / OFF" is controlled via the
"Switch-on command of ON / OFF1".

P648 9:

The connector selected in P648 is used as control word 1. Bit 0 of the control word is
ANDed with the "Switch-on command of ON / OFF1" to produce the "ON / OFF"
command (ON only if both signals are log. "1").

P445 = 0:

The "Switch-on command of ON / OFF1" is generated as an AND operation between the

signal from terminal 37 and the binector selected in P654 (level-triggered, 0 = shutdown,
1 = switch-on).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
P445 = 1:

Edge triggering of "Switch-on command of ON / OFF1":

The switch-on command is stored on the 0 1 transition (see Section 8, Sheet G130).
The binector selected in P444 must be in the log. "1" state. The memory is reset when
this binector switches to the log. "0" state.

In the following example circuit, the ON key (NO contact) is connected to terminal 37 and the
shutdown key (NC contact) to terminal 36. Connector K3003 (= Receive data from 1st CB/TB, word 3)
is used as control word 1.
The following parameter values must be set:
P444=10

Connects binector 10 (= status of terminal 36) to the reset input of the memory for the ON
signal (and to the reset input of the memory for the CRAWL command)

P445=1

Selects edge triggering of "Switch-on command of ON / OFF1" (and injection of the

crawling setpoint)

P648=3003 Connector K3003 is assigned status of control word 1.

The combination of the control bit for ON/OFF from the DPRAM control word (K3003.bit0 in this
example) and the switch-on command from the converter terminal is shown in the boxes with dot-dash
line borders.
Section 8, Sheet G110

Section 8, Sheet G130

Level / Edge

CUD1
34

P24_S

P445 = 1

Selection for
switch-on / shutdown
P654.B (1)
B

Switch-on c.
of ON/OFF1

B0010

D Q

Control word 1

Selection for
shutdown

(When P648 = 9 bit-serial

input of control bits)

<1>
1

Shutdown
24V

P648.B (9)
K 3003

Section 8, Sheet G180

Bit No. Meaning

P444.B (0)
B 10

0=OFF1, Shutdown
1=ON, op. cond.

Bit 0

Bit 1

ON
24V

1
....

Switch-on / shutdown

M
Select
injection of
crawing setpoint

P440 (0)
B
B
B

D Q

1
.01
.02
.03

P648

<1>
=9
/

K3003.bit0
1

0
Switch-on comm.
of ON/OFF1

Control
word
bit 0

Sequence of operations for switching on drive:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Enter the "Switch-on" command (e.g. via terminal "Switch-on/shutdown)

The converter exits operating state 07
The "Line contactor closed" relay picks up
The field current reduction command is cancelled

If "Enable operation" signal is applied:

6.
7.

With a positive brake release time (P087), output signal "Release holding or operating brake"
(binector B0250 = 1) and wait for P087 in operating state 01.0,
with a negative brake release time (PO87 negative), go to step 6 immediately, brake remains
closed (binector B0250 = 0)
Ramp-function generator, n controller and I controller are enabled
When a negative brake release time (P087) has run down, output signal "Release holding or
operating brake" (binector B0250 = 1).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-9

Function descriptions

05.2007

Sequence of operations for shutting down drive:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Enter the "Shutdown" command (e.g. via terminal "Switch-on / shutdown)

Decelerate along ramp-function generator ramp
Wait until n < nmin (P370, P371)
Output signal "Close holding or operating brake" (binector B0250 = 0)
Wait for brake closing time (P088) to run down
Input iset = 0
Ramp-function generator and n controller are disabled
The pulses are disabled when I = 0
The "Line contactor closed" relay drops out
The converter reaches operating state o7.0 or higher
Delay for field current reduction (P258) runs down
The field is reduced to a parameterizable value (P257)
ON

Switch-on/Shutdown

Shutdown
Controller enabled

Internal controller enable

Controller disabled
Setpoint enabled

Internal setpoint enable

Setpoint =0
n > n min

n < n min (P370,P371)

P087

n < n min

Setpoint reached

Actual speed

Setpoint reached

Brake control signal (B0255)

(holding brake)
Internal standstill
field input

Close brake

Release brake
No standstill field

Sandstill field
P088

P258

P087 Brake release time (positive in this example)

P088 Brake closing time
P258 Delay for automatic field current reduction
When n < nmin (P370, P371) is reached for the first time, an internal interlock is activated which
prevents the drive from attempting to brake again if the motor is turned by external forces. The
n < nmin signal then disappears again.
Changing the parameter setting between level and edge triggering affects the "Switch-on",
"Shutdown" and "Crawl" commands.
The "Switch-on" and "Crawl" commands are applied alternately when edge triggering is selected,
i.e. a "Switch-on" edge at terminal 37 cancels a "Crawl" function triggered beforehand, and a
"Crawl" edge at a binector selected in P440 cancels an active "Switch-on" edge.
The converter cannot be restarted automatically after a brief failure of the electronics power supply
when edge triggering is selected.
In order to ensure that "Shutdown" still works after "rewiring of parameters", if lower current or
torque limits are applied or when additional setpoints are injected, certain functions are
automatically deactivated when the "Shutdown" command is entered.
All torque limits are made inoperative while the drive brakes down to n < nmin. Of all the current
limits, only the system current limit (P171 and P172), the speed-dependent current limit and the
limit derived from I2t monitoring of the power section remain operative.

9-10

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

9.3.4

Function descriptions

Operating enable (enable) terminal 38 - control word 1, bit 3

The Enable signal is HIGH active (log."1" state = Enable).
The following operating modes are possible:
P648 = 9:

The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. The operating enable command is
generated from the AND operation between the enable signal from terminal 38 and the
binector selected in P661 (see Section 8, Sheet G180).

P648 9:

The connector selected in P648 is used as control word 1. Bit 3 of this connector is
ANDed with the signal that is generated as for P648=9 to produce the operating enable
signal.

To ensure that the "Operating enable" function can be activated, the conditions defined in the
following diagram must be fulfilled:
P648
Bit 3 of connector selected
as control word in P648

P661.B (1)
B
Operating enable
(from terminal 38)

=9
/
1

Control word 1, bit 3

1 = Enable, pulse enable
0 = Pulse disable

Sequence of operations for enabling operation (if a switch-on command is applied):

1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

Enter the "Enable operation" command

With a positive brake release time (P087), output a "Release holding or operating
brake" signal (binector B0250 = 1) and wait for P087 to run down in operating state o1.0,
with a negative brake release time (P087 negative), go to step 3 immediately, brake
remains closed (binector B0250 = 0)
Ramp-function generator, n and I controllers are enabled
Converter reaches operating state I, II or
When a negative brake release time (P087) has run down, output signal "Release holding or
operating brake" (binector B0250 = 1).

Sequence of operations for cancellation of operating enable:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.4

Cancel "Enable operation" command

Disable ramp-function generator, n and I controllers
Enter Iset = 0
The pulses are disabled when I = 0
Output signal "Close operating brake" (binector B0250 = 0, when P080 = 2)
The converter reaches operating state 0.10 or higher
Drive coasts to a standstill (or is braked by the operating brake)
When n < nmin (P370, P371) is reached, the signal "Close holding brake" is output (binector
B0250, when P080 = 1)

Ramp-function generator
See also Section 8, Sheet G136

NOTICE
The following conditions must be fulfilled for the ramp-function generator to work:
Ramp-function generator enable = 1

(control word 1.bit 4 = 1)

Enable setpoint = 1

(control word 1.bit 6 = 1)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-11

Function descriptions

9.4.1

05.2007

Definitions
Ramp-up =

Acceleration from low, positive to high, positive speeds (e.g. from 10% to 90%) or from
low, negative to high, negative speeds (e.g. from -10% to -90%)

Ramp-down = Deceleration from high, positive to low, positive speeds (e.g. from 90% to 10%) or from
high, negative to low, negative speeds (e.g. from -90% to -10%)
On transition from negative to positive speeds, e.g. -10% to +50%:
From -10% to 0 = ramp-down and
From 0 to +50% = ramp-up and vice versa
Ramp-up time refers to the time required by the ramp-function generator to reach the 100% output
value, with a lower and upper transition rounding of 0 and a step change in the input
quantity from 0 to 100% or from 0 to -100%. The rate of rise at the output is the same in
response to smaller step changes in the input quantity.
Ramp-down time refers to the time required by the ramp-function generator to reach the 100% output
value, with a lower and upper transition rounding of 0 and a step change in the input
quantity from 100% to 0 or from -100% to 0. The rate of rise at the output is the same in
response to smaller step changes in the input quantity.

9.4.2

Operating principle of ramp-function generator

K0190
K0192

HLZ

RLZ

100%
HLZ

AR/2
AR/2

ER/2

ER/2
AR/2

Ramp generator setpoint

(K0192)
Ramp generator outout
(K0190)
-100%

K0191
(dv/dt)

t
dy/dt (K0191)

HLZ ... Ramp-up time (H303, H307, H311),

RLZ ... Ramp-down time (H304, H308, H312)
AR ... Lower transition rounding (H305, H309, H313), ER ... Upper transition rounding (H306, H310, H314)
1) Transition from ramp-down gradient to ramp-up gradient
2) The lower rounding switches to the upper rounding before the maximum ramp-down gradient is reached
3) Due to the input step change, only the last part of the upper transition rounding is executed here

9-12

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

9.4.3

Function descriptions

Control signals for ramp-function generator

The ramp-function generator operating mode can be preset by the following control signals:
Ramp-function generator start (control word 1.bit 5):
1 = Setpoint is injected at ramp-function generator input
0 = Ramp-function generator is stopped at current value (generator output is injected as generator
input).
Enable setpoint (control word 1.bit 6):
1 = Setpoint enabled at ramp-function generator input
0 = Ramp-function generator setting 1 is activated and 0 applied at the input (generator output is
reduced to 0)
Set ramp-function generator:
1 = The ramp-function generator output is set to the setting value (selected in P639)
Enable ramp-function generator (control word 1.bit 4):
0 = Ramp generator disabled, generator output is set to 0
1 = Ramp-function generator enabled
Ramp-up integrator operation (parameter P302):
See below and Section 11, Parameter List, parameter P302
Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator (select via P646):
See below
Ramp-function generator settings 2 and 3
See below
Ramp-function generator tracking ON (parameter P317):
See below and Section 11, Parameter List, parameter P317
Set ramp-function generator on shutdown (parameter P318):
See Section 11, Parameter List, parameter P318
Bypass ramp-function generator:
1 = Ramp-function generator operates with ramp-up/ramp-down time of 0
The function is controlled via the binector selected in P641.
The ramp generator can also be bypassed in INCHING, CRAWLING and INJECTION OF FIXED
SETPOINT modes.

9.4.4

Ramp-function generator settings 1, 2 and 3

Selection via binectors selected in parameters P637 and P638
Status of binector

Selected via parameter

Effective

R-F generator

ramp-up

ramp-

lower

upper

P637

P638

setting

time

down time

rounding

P303

P304

P305

P306

P307

P308

P309

P310

P311

P312

P313

P314

Not permitted, activates fault message F041 (selection not clear)

The ramp-function generator settings preset via the binectors selected in P637 and P638 have priority
over the generator setting specified via the ramp-up integrator.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-13

Function descriptions

9.4.5

05.2007

Ramp-up integrator
The ramp-up integrator is activated by setting P302 = 1, 2 or 3. After an "ON" command ("Switch-on",
"Inching", "Crawling"), ramp-function generator setting 1 (P303 to P306) is applied until the rampfunction generator output reaches the required setpoint for the first time.
The remaining sequence of operations is controlled by the "Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator"
function (binector selected in P646).
Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator = 1:
As soon as the ramp-function generator output reaches the required setpoint for the first time
after the "ON" command, the ramp generator setting selected in P302 is activated automatically.
Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator = 0:
Ramp-function generator setting 1 (P303 to P306) remains active after the generator output has
reached its setpoint until the "Enable switchover of ramp-up integrator" function is switched to 1.
The ramp-function generator setting selected in P302 is then activated.
When the enable signal for ramp-up integrator switchover is cancelled ( 0), ramp-function generator
setting 1 is activated again and, with a new enable command ( 1), this setting continues to remain
active until the generator output has reached its setpoint again. The ramp generator setting selected in
P302 is then activated again.
When a "Shutdown" command is given, the drive is shut down according to setting 1.
Note:
Activation of "Ramp-function generator setting 2" (P307 to P310, selected in P637), or "Ramp-function
generator setting 3" (P311 to P314, selected in P368), has priority over the generator setting selected
by means of the "Ramp-up integrator" function.

9.4.6

Ramp-function generator tracking

The ramp-function generator output (K0190) is limited to the following values when ramp-function
generator tracking is activated:
M lim it 1.25
+ nact
Kp

RFG output

+M lim it 1.25
+ nact
Kp

When P170 = 1 (torque control), the following equation applies:

IA, lim it motor 1.25
+ nact
Kp

RFG output

+IA, lim it motor 1.25

+ nact
Kp

When P170 = 0 (current control), the following equation applies:

IA, lim it 1.25
+ nact
Kp

motor
nact
+ Mlimit
Mlimit
+ IA, limit
IA, limit
Kp

RFG output

+IA, lim it 1.25

+ nact
Kp

Normalized motor flux (1 at rated field current)

Actual speed value (K0167)
Lowest positive torque limit (K0143)
Lower negative torque limit (K0144)
Lowest positive current limit (K0131)
Lowest negative current limit (K0132)
Effective speed controller gain

However, if the value added to nact were to correspond to less than 1%, then +1% or 1% would be
added.
The purpose of the "Ramp-function generator tracking" function is to ensure that the ramp generator
value cannot deviate excessively from the actual speed value once the torque or current limit has
been reached.
Note:
When ramp-function generator tracking is selected, the filter time for the speed setpoint should be set
to a low value in P228 (preferably to 0).

9-14

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

9.4.7

Function descriptions

Limitation after ramp-function generator

Since the input signal can be freely selected, this limiter stage can be used completely independently
of the ramp-function generator.
A special feature of this limiter is that the lower limit can also be set to positive values and the upper
limit to negative values (see P300 and P301). This type of limit setting then acts as a lower limit
(minimum value) for the ramp generator output signal in the other sign direction.
Example: P632.01-04 = 1 (= 100.00%)
P300 = 100.00 (%)
P301 = 10.00 (%)
P633.01-04 = 9 (= -100.00%)
results in a limitation of the value range for K0170 to between +10.00% and +100.00%

9.4.8

Velocity signal dv/dt (K0191)

This signal specifies the change in the ramp-function generator output K0190 in the time period set in
P542.

9.5

Inching
See also Section 8, Sheet G129
The INCHING function can be preset via the binectors selected with indices .01 to .08 of parameter
P435 or via bits 8 and 9 of control word 1 (logic operation, see function diagram in Section 8).
When the control word option is used, the following operating modes are possible (see also Section 8,
Sheet 33):
P648 = 9:

The control bits in control word 1 are input bit-serially. The binectors selected in P668
and P669 determine bits 8 and 9 of control word 1 and thus the input of the INCH
command.

P648 9:

The connector selected in P648 is used as control word 1. Bits 8 and 9 of this word
control the input of the INCH command.

The "Inching" function can be executed only if "Shutdown" and "Operating enable" are applied.
The "Inch" command is input when one or several of the named sources (binectors, bits in control
word) change to the log. "1" state. In this case, a setpoint selected in parameter P436 is assigned to
each source.
An inching setpoint of 0 is applied if the inch command is input by two or more sources
simultaneously.
Parameter P437 can be set to define for each possible inch command source (binector, bit in control
word - logic operation, see block diagram in Section 8) whether or not the ramp-function generator
must be bypassed. When the ramp generator is bypassed, it operates with ramp-up/down times of 0.
Sequence of operations for entering Inching command:
If the "Inch" command is entered, the line contactor is energized via the "Line contactor closed" relay
and the inching setpoint applied via the ramp-function generator (for exact sequence, see the
description of "Switch-on / Shutdown" in Section 9.3.3).
Sequence of operations for cancellation of Inching:
After the "Inch" command has been cancelled, the sequence of operations commences in the same
way as for "Shutdown" (see Section 9.3.3). After n < nmin has been reached, the controllers are
disabled and the line contactor opened after a parameterizable delay (P085) of between 0 and 60 s
(operating state 07.0 or higher). The drive remains in operating state 01.3 while the parameterizable
delay period (max. 60.0 s) runs down.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-15

Function descriptions

9.6

05.2007

Crawling
See also Section 8, Sheet G130
The "Crawling" function can be activated in operating state o7 and, with "Operation enabled", in the
Run state.
The "Crawl" command is entered when one or several of the binectors selected in P440 switches to
the log. "1" state. A setpoint selected in parameter P441 is assigned to each binector. If the "Crawl"
command is entered via several binectors, the setpoint values are added (limited to 200%).
Parameter P442 can be set to define for each possible crawl command source (binector) whether or
not the ramp-function generator must be bypassed. When the ramp generator is bypassed, it operates
with ramp-up/down times of 0.
Level / edge
P445 = 0:

Level-triggered
Binector selected in P440 = 0: No crawl
Binector selected in P440 = 1: Crawl

P445 = 1:

Edge-triggered
The input of "Crawl" is stored when the binector state changes from 0 1 (see Section
8, Sheet G130). The binector selected in P444 must be in the log. "1" state at the same
time. The memory is reset when the latter binector changes state to log. "0" (see also
example circuit in Section 9.3.3, Switch-on / Shutdown).

Sequence of operations for entering Crawl command:

If the "Crawl" command is entered in operating state o7, the line contactor is energized via the "Line
contactor closed" relay and the crawling setpoint applied via the ramp-function generator.
If the "Crawl" command is entered in the "Run" state, the drive decelerates from the operating speed
to the crawling setpoint via the ramp-function generator.
Sequence of operations for cancellation of Crawling:
With "Crawling" active, but no "Switch-on" command applied:
If all bits which activate the "Crawling" function switch to log. "0", the controllers are disabled
after n < nmin is reached and the line contactor de-energized (operating state o7.0 or higher).
With "Crawling" active from "Run" operating state:
If all bits which activate the "Crawling" function switch to log. "0" and if the conditions for the "Run"
operating state are still fulfilled, then the drive accelerates from the set crawling speed to the operating
speed via the ramp-function generator.
See also Section 9.3.3 (switch-on / shutdown) with regard to edge triggering, automatic restart and the
effect of the current and torque limits during braking.

9.7

Fixed setpoint
See also Section 8, Sheet G127
The "Fixed setpoint" function can be activated in the "Run" state with the "Enable controllers" signal
applied.
The "Fixed setpoint" function can be input via the binectors selected via indices .01 to .08 of
parameter P430 and via bits 4 and 5 of control word 2 (= bits 20 and 21 of complete control word)
(see function diagram in Section 8 for logic operation).

9-16

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
When the control word method is used, the following operating modes are possible (see also Section
8, Sheet G181):
P649 = 9:

The control bits in control word 2 are input bit-serially. The binectors selected via P680
and P681 determine bits 4 and 5 of control word 2 (= bits 20 and 21 of complete control
word), and thus input of the "Fixed setpoint" function.

P649 9:

The connector selected via P649 is used as control word 2. Bits 4 and 5 of this word
control the input of "Fixed setpoint.

The "Fixed setpoint" function is input when one or several of the named sources (binectors, bits in
control word) switch to the log. "1" state. In this case, a setpoint selected in parameter P431 is
assigned to each source. If "Fixed setpoint" is input via several sources simultaneously, the
associated setpoints are added (limited to 200%).
Parameter P432 can be set to define for each possible fixed setpoint source (binector, bit in control
word - logic operation, see block diagram in Section 8) whether or not the ramp-function generator
must be bypassed. When the ramp generator is bypassed, it operates with ramp-up/down times of 0.
Sequence for entering Fixed Setpoint function:
The fixed setpoint is injected instead of the main setpoint.
Sequence for cancellation of Fixed Setpoint function:
When all the possible sources for injecting the fixed setpoint (binectors, bits in control word) have
changed back to log. "0", the setpoint selected in parameter P433 (main setpoint) is switched through
again.

9.8

Safety shutdown (E-Stop)

The task of the E-STOP function is to open the relay contacts (terminals 109/110) for energizing the
main contactor within about 15 ms, independently of semiconductor components and the functional
status of the microprocessor board (basic electronics). If the basic electronics are operating correctly,
the closed-loop control outputs an I = 0 command to de-energize the main contactor. When an ESTOP command is given, the drive coasts to a standstill.
The E-STOP function can be triggered by one of the following methods:

Switch operation:
(switch between terminals XS-105 and XS-106; XS-107 open; XS-108 open)
E-STOP is activated when the switch between terminals XS-105 and XS-106 opens.

Pushbutton operation:
(Stop pushbutton with NC contact between terminals XS-107 and XS-106; Reset pushbutton with
NO contact between terminals XS-108 and XS-106; XS-105 open)
Opening an NC contact between terminals XS-106 and XS-107 triggers the E-STOP function and
stores the shutdown operation. Closing an NO contact between terminals XS-106 and XS-108
resets the function.

When the E-STOP function is reset, the drive switches to the Starting lockout state. This status
needs to be acknowledged through activation of the Shutdown function, e.g. by opening terminal 37.

Note
The E-STOP function is not an EMERGENCY STOP function according to EN 60204-1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-17

Function descriptions

05.2007

Sequence of operations for entering E-STOP command:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Enter "E-STOP" command

Disable ramp-function generator, n and I controllers
Iset = 0 is applied
a) U616 = 0: E-Stop has same effect as OFF2 (as soon as I = 0, the firing pulses are disabled)
b) U616 = 1: E-Stop disables the output of firing pulses immediately (without waiting for I = 0)
5. Output signal "Close operating brake" (binector B0250 = 0, when P080 = 2)
6. Converter reaches operating state o10.0 or higher
7. An "older" actual field current value (K0265) is input as the field current setpoint upper limit
(function is "released" in operating states of o5)
8. Relay Power contactor on (terminal 109/110) drops out
9. Drive coasts to a standstill (or is braked by the operating brake)
10. Parameterizable delay time (P258) runs down
11. The field is reduced to a parameterizable value (P257)
12. When n < nmin (P370, P371) has been reached, the "Close holding brake" signal is output
(binector B0250 = 0, when P080 = 1)

Note:
15ms after entry of "E Stop" the hardware causes relay "Power contactor on" (terminal 109/110).to
drop out (even if Item 8 of this sequence has not yet been reached).

9.9

Activation command for holding or operating brake (low active)

The signal for controlling the brake is available at binector B0250:
log. "0" state = Close brake
log. "1" state = Release brake
In order to drive a brake, this binector must be "wired up" to a binary output, e.g. by setting P771 to
250 for connection to output terminals 46 /47 (see Section 8, Sheet G112, for other possible settings).
The following parameters influence the action of the brake control signal:
P080 = 1

The brake is a holding brake:

"Close brake" command is entered only when n < nmin (P370, P371)

P080 = 2

The brake is an operating brake:

The "Close brake" command is entered even when the motor is running

P087

Brake release time:

A positive value prevents the motor from acting against the brake as it is released
A negative value causes the motor to act against the brake while it is still closed in
order to prevent the occurrence of a brief, torque-free interval

P088

Brake closing time:

Causes the motor to produce a torque while the brake is closing

P319

Delay time for enabling ramp-function generator

After the controllers have been enabled, a setpoint of 0 is input for the time set
here. This time should be set such that the brake has actually been released when
the timer runs down. This is of particular importance when P087 is set to a
negative value.

The following diagrams illustrate the chronological sequence of the brake control function with a signal
level change at inputs "Switch-on / Shutdown" (e.g. terminal 37) and "Operating enable " (terminal 38).
With respect to the brake control, input commands "Inching", "Crawling" or "Fast stop" have the same
affect as "Switch-on / Shutdown", and input commands "Voltage disconnection" or "E-Stop" the same
affect as cancelling the "Operating enable" command.
The command "Close brake" is output during the optimization run for precontrol and current controller
(P051 = 25).

9-18

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

Operating brake (P080 = 2), positive brake release time (P087)

"enable"

Oper. enable
(term. 38)

"disable"
"ON"

Switch-on/shutdown
(term. 37)

"OFF"
P087

P087
Internal contr. enable

P088
n < n min (P370,P371)
B0164
Speed setpoint
Actual speed

* 1)

P319

Oper. state
o7.0

Brake contr. signal

(B0255)

o1.0

I,II,- -

* 3)

o1.1

o1.0

o7.0

I,II,- -

* 5)

* 3)

"release"
"close"

Holding brake (P080 = 1), positive brake release time (P087)

"enable"

Oper. enable
(term. 38)

"disable"
"ON"

Switch-on/shutdown
(term. 37)

"OFF"
P087

Internal contr. enable

P088
n < nmin (P370,P371)
B0164
Speed setpoint

* 2)

Actual speed
P319

Oper. state
o7.0

Brake contr. signal

(B0255)

o1.0

I,II,- -

* 3)

o1.1
"release"

o7.0

I,II,- -

* 5)
"close"

*1)
*2)
*3)
*5)

Drive is braked mechanically by means of operating brake

Drive coasts to standstill, "Close holding brake" not output until n < nmin
Time for the brake to open before the motor produces a torque (P087 positive)
Time for the brake to close while the motor is still producing a torque (P088)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-19

Function descriptions

05.2007

Operating brake (P080 = 2), negative brake release time (P087)

"enable"

Oper. enable
(term. 38)

"disable"
"ON"

Switch-on/shutdown
(term. 37)

"OFF"

Internal contr. enable

P088
n < n min (P370,P371)
B0164
Speed setpoint
Actual speed

* 1)

P319

Oper. state
o7.0

Brake contr. signal

(B0255)

o1.1

I,II,- -

* 4)

P319
o7.0

I,II,- -

* 5)

* 4)

"release"
"close"

P087

Holding brake (P080 = 1), negative brake release time (P087)

"enable"

Oper. enable
(term. 38)

"disable"
"ON"

Switch-on/shutdown
(term. 37)

"OFF"

Internal contr. enable

P088
n < n min (P370,P371)
B0164
Speed setpoint

* 2)

Actual speed
P319
Oper. state
o7.0

Brake contr. signal

(B0255)

o1.1

I,II,- -

* 4)

"release"

o7.0

I,II,- -

* 5)
"close"

P087

*1)
*2)
*4)
*5)

9-20

Drive is braked mechanically by means of operating brake

Drive coasts to standstill, "Close holding brake" not output until n < nmin
In this case, the motor is still rotating against the closed brake (P087 negative)
Time for the brake to close while the motor is still producing torque (P088)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

9.10

Function descriptions

Switch on auxiliaries
The function acts as a switch-on command for auxiliaries (e.g. motor fan).
The "Switch on auxiliaries" signal is available at binector B0251:
log. "0" state = Auxiliaries OFF
log. "1" state = Auxiliaries ON
To act as the auxiliaries drive signal, this binector must be "wired up" to a binary output, e.g. by setting
P771 to 251 for connection to output terminals 46 / 47 (see Section 8, Sheet G112, for other possible
settings).
The "Switch on auxiliaries" signal switches to "high" at the same time as the "Switch on" command.
The converter then waits in operating state o6.0 for a parameterizable delay period (P093). The line
contactor is closed on expiry of the delay.
When the "Shutdown" command is entered, the firing pulses are disabled when n < nmin is reached
and the line contactor drops out. The "Switch on auxiliaries" signal switches to "low" after a
parameterizable delay period (P094). However, if the "Switch on" command is entered again before
this delay has expired, then the converter does not stay in operating state o6.0, but the line contactor
is closed immediately instead.

9.11

Switch over parameter sets

See also in Section 9.1 under heading "Data sets"

WARNING
Parameter sets can be switched over while the converter is in operation (online). As a result,
depending on the setting of the control bits when the motor is running, the configuration or
functions may be altered in such a way as to produce dangerous operating conditions.
For this reason, we strongly recommend that a "basic" parameter set containing all basic
parameter settings is created first and then copied into the other parameter sets. The
intentional changes of the "basic" version should then be entered in each parameter set.
The "Switch over parameter sets" function affects function parameters (identified by an ".F" next to
parameter number in block diagrams in Section 8) and Bico parameters (identified by a ".B" next to
parameter number in block diagrams in Section 8).
The following operating modes are possible (see also Section 8, Sheet G181):
P649 = 9:

The control bits in control word 2 are input bit-serially.

The binectors selected in P676 and P677 determine bits 0 and 1 of control word 2 (= bits
16 and 17 of complete control word), and thus the input of the function data set.
The binector selected in P690 determines bit 14 of control word 2 (= bit 30 of complete
control word), and thus the input of the Bico data set.

P649 9:

The connector selected in P649 is used as control word 2.

Bits 0 and 1 of control word 2 (bits 16 and 17 of complete control word) control the input
of the function data set. Bit 14 (= bit 30 of complete control word) controls the input of the
Bico data set.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-21

Function descriptions

05.2007

Control word

Active function data set

Bit 16

Bit17

(active index)

Control word

Active Bico data set

Bit30

(active index)

Caution:
The parameter set selection must not be changed while the optimization run is in progress.
Error message F041 will otherwise be output after 0.5 s.
When the "Switch over parameter sets" function is activated, a time delay of up to 25ms may occur
before the newly selected parameter set actually becomes operative.
For information about copying parameter sets, please see Section 11 (Parameter List), parameters
P055 and P057.

9.12

Speed controller
See also Section 8, Sheets G151 and G152
Control signals for speed controller
The control signals for "Enable speed controller droop", "Enable speed controller" and "Switch over
master/slave drive" are supplied by control word 2. The following operating modes are possible (see
also Section 8, Sheet G181):
P649 = 9:

The control bits in control word 2 are input bit-serially.

The binectors selected in P684, P685 and P687 determine bits 8, 9 and 11 of control
word 2 (= bits 24, 25 and 27 of complete control word), and thus the functions "Enable
speed controller droop", "Enable speed controller" and "Switch over master/slave drive".

P649 9:

The connector selected in P649 is used as control word 2.

Bits 8, 9 and 11 control the functions "Enable speed controller droop", "Enable speed
controller" and "Switch over master/slave drive".

Enable speed controller:

0 = Disable controller, controller output (K0160) = 0, P component (K0161) = 0, I
component (K0162) = value of connector selected in P631
1 = Enable controller
Enable droop:
0 = Droop is not active
1 = Droop is active

9-22

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
Switch over master/slave drive:
0 = Master drive
1 = Slave drive
When "Slave drive" is selected, the I component of the speed controller is
made to "track" such that M(set,n contr.) = M(set,limit.), the speed setpoint is set to equal
the actual speed (K0179) (enable tracking with P229).
Set I component (selection of control signal via parameter P695):
When 0 1 signal transition of selected binector, the I component is set to the setting
value (selected in parameter P631)
Stop I component (selection of control signal via parameter P696):
0 = I component enabled
1 = Stop I component
Limitation active:
This signal is in the log. "1" state when the upper or lower torque limitation is violated, the
speed limiting controller is active, the current limitation is active or when the firing angle
for the armature circuit reaches the G-limit.
In this case, the I component of the speed controller is stopped.
Switch over to P controller:
The P controller function is activated (I component = 0) when the speed drops to below
the changeover value.
D component in actual value channel or setpoint/actual value deviation channel
As a basis for selecting the correct derivative action time, it is necessary to calculate the maximum
possible rate of rise at the derivative action element input, i.e. the period of time required by the input
signal to change from 0 to 100% at this maximum rate of rise. The derivative action time should
preferably be set to a shorter value than this period.

9.13

Serial interfaces
The SIMOREG 6RA70 converter is equipped with the following serial interfaces:
G-SST1 (serial interface 1)
Connector X300 on board A7005 (operator panel)
USS protocol
provided for the purpose of connection the OP1S operator panel
G-SST2 (serial interface 2)
Terminal strip X172 (terminals 56 to 60) on board A7001
USS and peer-to-peer protocol, parameterizable
Additionally if board A7006 (terminal expansion) is installed:
G-SST3 (serial interface 3)
Terminal strip X162 (terminals 61 to 65)
USS and peer-to-peer protocol, parameterizable
Interface hardware
The hardware of G-SST1 is designed to operate in RS232 and RS485 standard / two-wire mode, and
G-SST2 and G-SST3 in RS485 standard / two and four-wire mode. For connectors and terminal
assignments, see Section 8, Sheets G170 to G174.
The maximum cable length for a peer-to-peer connection from the transmitter to the last receiver
connected to the same transmission output is 1000 m. The same maximum cable length applies to the
bus cable of a USS connection. The maximum cable length is only 500 m for both types of connection
if a baud rate of 187500 bd is selected.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-23

Function descriptions

05.2007

USS:
A maximum of 32 nodes can be connected in the bus configuration (i.e. 1 master and max. 31 slaves).
The bus connector must be activated on the two bus nodes which form each end of the bus circuit.
Peer-to-peer:
Up to 31 other drives can be connected in parallel to the transmit cable of one drive. With a "parallel
connection", the bus connector must be activated on the last connected drive.

9.13.1 Serial interfaces with USS protocol

Specification for the USS protocol: Order No. E20125-D0001-S302-A1
The SIEMENS USS protocol is implemented in all digital converter devices supplied by SIEMENS. It
can be used to provide a point-to-point or bus-type link to a master station. Any mixture of converter
types can be connected up to the same bus line. The USS protocol makes it possible to access all
relevant process data, diagnostic information and parameters of the SIMOREG converter.
The USS protocol is a pure master-slave protocol. In this case, a converter device can only ever
function as slave. Converter devices will transmit a telegram to the master only if they have received
one from it first. In other words, converters linked via the USS protocol cannot exchange data directly
with one another (they can do this only via a peer-to-peer link).
Useful data which can be transferred via the USS protocol
Sheets G170 to G172 in Section 8 show how useful data can be interconnected and list the
parameters relevant for configuring USS interfaces.
If parameters need to be read and/or written via the USS interface, then "Parameter data length"
(P782, P792, P802) must be set to 3, 4 or 127 (select setting 4 only if double word parameters need to
be transferred). If parameters do not need to be transferred, the "Parameter data length" must be set
to 0.
The number of process data words to be transferred is basically identical for the transmit and receive
directions and can be set in "Process data length" (P781, P791, P801). Numeric representation "100%
equals 4000h = 16384d" applies to all connectors.
Transfer of double-word connectors:
In the receive direction, the values of any two adjacent connectors (K) are combined to form a doubleword connector (KK) (e.g. K2002 and K2003 to KK2032). These double-word connectors can be
connected in the usual way to other function blocks. For details of how to connect with double-word
connectors, see Section 9.1, subsection "The following rules apply to the selection of double-word
connectors".
In the transmission direction, a double-word connector is applied by entering the same double-word
connector at two contiguous indices of the selection parameter.
Examples:
K0032
KK9498

K 9498

KK9498

K 9498

K0401

K 401

K0032

9-24

P784
K 32

KK9498

K 9498

KK9499

K 9499

K0401

K 401

.01
.02
.03
.04

Word
L-Word
H-Word
Word

Word
H-Word
H-Word

2 different
double-word connectors

Word

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
Numeric representation of parameter numbers and values on serial interfaces
The mode of numeric representation of a parameter value is determined by the parameter "type"
assigned to each parameter in the Parameter List. The different types of parameter are explained at
the beginning of the list. Parameters are always transmitted in the form specified in the "Value range"
column of the Parameter List; any decimal point, however, is omitted (example: display value
123.45 the number 12345d = 3039h is transferred via the serial interface).
Diagnostics and monitoring functions for USS interfaces
All transmitted and received useful data words can be checked (directly at the internal software
transfer point from/to USS driver) by means of display parameters r810 / r811, r812 / r813 or r814 /
r815.
Diagnostic parameters r789, r799 or r809 provide information about the chronological distribution of
errored and error-free telegrams, as well as the nature of any communication errors that have
occurred.
A watchdog can be set in P787, P797 or P807 which can initiate a shutdown on faults (F011, F012 or
F013) in the case of timeout. By connecting binectors B2031, B6031 or B9031 to the fault message
triggers (using P788=2031 / P798=6031 / P808=9031), it is possible to acknowledge these fault
messages even if the fault is active continuously, thereby ensuring that the drive can still be operated
manually after the USS interface has failed.
Important !
The serial interfaces for the USS protocol are parameterized with the same parameters used to
configure the peer-to-peer protocol, although the setting ranges are different in some cases (see
Notes for relevant parameters in Parameter List, Section 11).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-25

Function descriptions

05.2007

USS protocol: Brief start-up guide for SIMOREG 6RA70 converters

G-SST1
RS232 / RS485

G-SST1
RS485
for connection of an OP1S

G-SST2 / G-SST3
RS485

Select USS protocol

P780 = 2

P790 / P800 = 2

Baud rate

P783 = 1 to 13, corresponding to

300 to 187500 baud

P783 = 6 (9600 Bd) or

7 (19200 Bd)
The baud rate setting must be
identical for every node in bus
operation

P793 / P803 = 1 to 13,

corresponding to 300 to 187500
baud

No. of process data (PZD No.)

(applies to Receive and Send)

P781 = 0 to 16

P781 = 2

P791 / P801 = 0 to 16

PZD assignment for control word

and setpoints
(received process data)

All received process data are

taken to connectors and must be
wired up as required

If the control bits from the OP1S

are to be used:
Word 1 (connector K2001):
Wiring up of control bits
from OP1S, see Sec. 7.2.2
Word 2 (connector K2002):
Not used

All received process data are

taken to connectors and must be
wired up as required

No. of PKW

P782 =
0:
No PKW data
3 / 4: 3 / 4 PKW data words
127: Variable data length for
slave master

P782 = 127 variable data length

P792 / P802 =
0:
No PKW data
3 / 4: 3 / 4 PKW data words
127: Variable data length for
slave master

PZD assignment for actual

values
(transmitted process data)

Selection of transmitted values

via P784

Word 1: P784.i01=32
(stat. word 1 K0032)
Word 2: P784.i02=0

Selection of transmitted values

via P794 / P804

Node address

P786 = 0 to 30

P786 = 0 to 30
Every node must have its own,
unique address for bus operation

P796 / P806 = 0 to 30

Telegram failure time

P787 = 0.000 to 65.000s

P787 = 0.000s

P797 / P807 = 0.000 to 65.000s

Bus termination

P785 = 0: Bus term. OFF

1: Bus term. ON

P785 = 0: Bus term. OFF

1: Bus term. ON

P795 / P805 =
0: Bus term. OFF
1: Bus term. ON

Bus / point-to-point
communication

RS232: Only point-to-point

operation possible
RS485: Bus operation possible

Bus operation possible

2-wire / 4-wire transmission

via RS485 interface

2-wire operation is selected

automatically

2-wire operation is selected

automatically

2-wire operation is selected

automatically

Cable

Connector assignments, see

Sect. 6.8 or Sheet G170 in
Sect. 8

See operating instructions for

OP1S operator panel

Connector assignments, see

Sect. 6.8 or Sheets G171, G172
in Sect. 8

9-26

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
Connection example for a USS bus
Master
(Bus terminating
resistors activated)

Slave 1
(Bus terminating
resistors deactivated)

Slave 2
(Bus terminating
resistors deactivated)

Slave n (n<=31))
(Bus terminating
resistors activated)

SIMATIC S5

6RA70

CP524 with RS485

-module ...0AA43

(Jumper X3: 20-18 -->

2-wire cable)
Rx Tx

14 12 10
X3 4

150

8 64
X3
+
11

+
59

+
58

+
59

+
58

+
59

+
58

SUB-D connector
15-pin

1) The interface cable shields must be connected directly on the converter with the lowest possible
impedance to converter or cubicle earth (e.g. via clamp).
2) Twisted cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0.5 sqmm; with longer cables, an equipotential bonding conductor
must be used to ensure that the difference in frame potentials between nodes stays below 7 V.

9.13.2 Serial interfaces with peer-to-peer protocol

The term "Peer-to-peer link" refers to a "Link between partners of equal status". In contrast to the
classic master/slave bus system (e.g. USS and PROFIBUS), the same converter can function as both
the master (setpoint source) and the slave (setpoint receiver) in a peer-to-peer link.
Signals can be transferred in fully digital form from one converter to another via the peer-to-peer link,
for example:
Velocity setpoints for producing a setpoint cascade, e.g. on paper, foil and wire-drawing
machines and on fiber-drawing machinery.
Torque setpoints for closed-loop load distribution controls on drives that are coupled
mechanically or via the material, e.g. longitudinal-shaft drives on printing presses or S-roll drives
Acceleration setpoints (dv/dt) for acceleration precontrol on multi-motor drives.
Control commands
Useful data which can be transferred via the peer-to-peer link
Sheets G173 and G174 in Section 8 show how useful data can be interconnected and list the
parameters relevant for configuring peer-to-peer links. Any connectors can be parameterized as
transmit data (numeric representation: 100% equals 4000h = 16384d).
Parameters cannot be transferred via the peer-to-peer link.
Transfer of double-word connectors:
In the receive direction, the values of any two adjacent connectors (K) are combined to form a doubleword connector (KK) (e.g. K6001 and K6002 to KK6081). These double-word connectors can be
connected in the usual way to other function blocks. For details of how to connect with double-word
connectors, see Section 9.1, subsection "The following rules apply to the selection of double-word
connectors".
In the transmission direction, a double-word connector is applied by entering the same double-word

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-27

Function descriptions

05.2007

connector at two contiguous indices of the selection parameter.

Examples:
P794
KK9498

K 9498

KK9498

K 9498

K0401

K 401

K0402

K 402

KK9498
KK9499
K0401
K0402

.01
.02
.03
.04

P794
.01
K 9498
.02
K 9499
.03
K 401
.04
K 402

L-Word
H-Word
Word
Word

H-Word
H-Word

2 different
double-word connectors

Word
Word

Diagnostics and monitoring functions for peer-to-peer link

All transmitted and received useful data words can be checked (directly at the internal software
transfer point from/to peer driver) by means of display parameters r812 / r813 or r814 / r815.
Diagnostic parameters r799 or r809 provide information about the chronological distribution of errored
and error-free telegrams, as well as the nature of any communication errors that have occurred. A
watchdog can be set in P797 or P807 which can initiate a shutdown on faults (F012 or F013) in the
case of timeout. By connecting binectors B6031 or B9031 to the fault message triggers (using
P798=6031 / P808=9031), it is possible to acknowledge these fault messages even if the fault is
active continuously, thereby ensuring that the drive can still be operated manually after the peer-topeer interface has failed.
Important !
The serial interfaces for the peer-to-peer protocol are parameterized with the same parameters used
to configure the USS protocol, although the setting ranges are different in some cases (see Notes for
relevant parameters in Parameter List, Section 11).

Peer-to-peer communication, 4-wire operation

Serial linking of converter to converter (partners of equal status).
The signal flow can pass through the drives, for example, in a series connection. In this case, each
drive forwards the data after processing only to the next drive (classic setpoint cascade).

9-28

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

Brief start-up guide for SIMOREG 6RA70 converters

G-SST2
RS485

G-SST3
RS485

Select peer-to-peer protocol

P790 = 5

P800 = 5

Baud rate

P793 = 1 to 13 corresponding to 300 to 187500

baud

P803 = 1 to 13 corresponding to 300 to 187500

baud

No. of process data (PZD No.)

(applies to Receive and Send)

P791 = 1 to 5

P801 = 1 to 5

PZD assignment for control word All received process data are taken to connectors
and setpoints
and must be wired up as required
(received process data)

All received process data are taken to connectors

and must be wired up as required

No. of PKW

No parameters can be transferred

PZD assignment for actual

values
(transmitted process data)

Selection of transmitted values via P794

(indices .01 to .05)

Selection of transmitted values via P804

(indices .01 to .05)

Telegram failure time

P797 = 0.000 to 65.000s

P807 = 0.000 to 65.000s

Bus termination

P795 = 0: Bus term. OFF

1: Bus term. ON

P805 = 0: Bus term. OFF

1: Bus term. ON

(depending on type of link)

2-wire / 4-wire transmission

via RS485 interface

"4-wire" operation is automatically selected

Cable

Terminal assignments, see Section 6.8 or Sheet

G173 in Section 8

Terminal assignments, see Section 6.8 or Sheet

G174 in Section 8

Examples of peer-to-peer links

Drive 2
(Bus terminating
resistors activated)

Drive 1
(Activate bus terminating
resistors when a data feedback loop is used)
6RA70
Rx

6RA70
Tx

+
59

+
58

Drive 3
(Bus terminating
resistors activated)

6RA70
Tx

+
57

+
56

+
58

Drive n
n=any number
(Bus terminating
resistors activated)
6RA70

+
57

+
56

+
58

+
57

+
56

+
58

+
56

Data feedback loop 3)

Peer link type "Series connection"

Each drive receives its own individual setpoint from the drive connected upstream (classic setpoint cascade)
1) The interface cable shields must be connected directly on the converter with the lowest possible
impedance to converter or cubicle earth (e.g. via a clamp).
2) Twisted cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0.5 sqmm; with longer cables, an equipotential bonding conductor
must be used to ensure that the difference in frame potentials between nodes stays below 7 V.
3) Optional data feedback loop via which drive 1 can monitor operation of the entire peer chain.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-29

Function descriptions

05.2007
Drive 2
(Bus terminating

Drive 3
(Bus terminating

resistors deactivated)

Drive n (n <= 32)

(Bus terminating
resistors activated)

6RA70

Drive 1

6RA70
Rx

+
58

+
-

+
56

+
58 57

+
56

58 57

+
58

+
56

Peer link type "Parallel connection"

Up to 31 drives receive identical setpoints from drive 1

1) The interface cable shields must be connected directly on the converter with the lowest possible
impedance to converter or cubicle earth (e.g. via a clamp).
2) Twisted cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0.5 sqmm; with longer cables, an equipotential bonding conductor
must be used to ensure that the difference in frame potentials between nodes stays below 7V.

Bus terminating
resistors activated

Bus terminating
resistors deactivated

Bus terminating
resistors activated

6RA70

Enable Transm.
transmit=1 data

Enable
transmit=0

+
+
58

Enable
transmit=0

+
+
58 57

+
56

Enable
transmit=0

+
+
58 57

+
56

+
+
58

+
56

Peer link type "Bus connection"

Up to 31 drives receive identical setpoints from one drive. The setpoint source drive is selected with
"Enable transmit" = 1. "Enable transmit" = 0 must be preset for all other drives.

1) The interface cable sheilds must be connected directly on the converter with the lowest possible
impedance to converter or or cubicle earth (e.g. via a clamp).
2) Twisted cable, e.g. LIYCY 2x0.5 sqmm; with longer cables, an equipotential bonding conductor
must be used to ensure that the difference in frame potentials between nodes stays below 7V.

9-30

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

9.14

Function descriptions

Thermal overload protection of DC motor

(I2t monitoring of motor)
The I2t monitoring function is parameterized in parameters P100, P113 and P114. If these parameters
are adapted correctly, the motor is protected against overloading (not all-round motor protection).
This monitoring function is disabled in the factory setting of the parameters (P820 i006 = 37).
Adaptation
A time constant Tmotor in minutes for the I2t monitoring function must be entered in
parameter P114.

P114:

P113, P100: The permissible continuous current of the motor must be defined by parameters P100
and P113.
The permissible continuous current is the product of the calculation P113 * P100.
Warning characteristic / switch-off characteristic
If the motor is loaded constantly, for example, with about 125% of the permissible continuous motor
current, then alarm A037 is triggered after a time constant (P114) has elapsed. If the load is not
reduced, then the drive is shut down when the switch-off characteristic is reached and fault message
F037 displayed.
Warning/switch-off times for other loads can be calculated from the diagram.
Alarm message triggering by motor I2t monitoring function
This diagram shows how long it takes for an alarm message to be triggered if, after a long preloading
period (> 5 * T_th), a new constant load value is injected abruptly.
T_th = P114 .. thermal time constant of motor

Load current / permissible continuous current (P100 x P113)

5
0% preloading
20% preloading
40% preloading
60% preloading
80% preloading

4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
1,5
1
0,5
0
0

0,5

1,5

2,5

Time / thermal time constant of motor

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-31

Function descriptions

05.2007

Fault message triggering by motor I2t monitoring function

This diagram shows how long it takes for a fault message to be triggered if, after a long preloading
period (> 5 * T_th), a new constant load value is injected abruptly.
T_th = P114 .. thermal time constant of motor

Load current / permissible continuous current (P100 x P113)

5
0% preloading
20% preloading
40% preloading
60% preloading
80% preloading

4,5
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
1,5
1
0,5
0
0

0,5

1,5

2,5

Time / thermal time constant of motor

CAUTION
When the electronics power supply fails for longer than 2 s, the calculated motor preloading
value is lost. When the supply is reconnected, the system assumes that the connected motor
has not been loaded at all!
If the electronics power supply fails and the converter is switched on again within 2 s (e.g. via
the "Automatic restart" function), then the temperature calculation is based on the last calculated
l2t value of the motor..
The I2t monitoring function reproduces only a rough thermal image of the motor, i.e. it does not
provide all-round motor protection.
If P114 (Tmotor) is set to zero, then the I2t monitoring function is deactivated.

9-32

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
Calculation of thermal equivalent time constant (P114)
It must be noted that the thermal equivalent time constant is dependent on the maximum overcurrent.
Thermal equivalent time constant of 1G . 5/1H . 5 DC motors according to Catalog DA12.
P114
40
30

10
8
6
5
4
3

1
100

120

140

160

180

200

I [%]
I rated

Irated ... Rated motor armature current (=P100)

I ...

Maximum overcurrent at which motor is operated

NOTES

When other motor types are connected, the manufacturer's specifications apply.

If you are using DC motors 1G.5 / 1H.5 as specified in catalog DA12, parameter P113 must
be set to 1.00

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-33

Function descriptions

9.15

05.2007

Dynamic overload capability of power section

9.15.1 Overview of functions

The converter rated DC current specified on the rating plate (= maximum permissible continuous
direct current when P077 = 1.00) may be exceeded in operation. The amount and permissible
duration of the overload are subject to limits which are explained in more detail below.
The absolute upper limit for the absolute value of overload currents corresponds to 1.8 times the
converter rated DC current * P077 (= r072.001 * P077). The maximum overload period depends both
on the time characteristic of the overload current and on the load history of the converter and differs
depending on the installed power section.
Every overload must be preceded by an "underload" (load phase at load current < P077 * rated DC
current). After the maximum permissible overload period has expired, the load current must be
reduced to a value of at least P077 * converter rated DC current.
The dynamic overload period is made possible by a thermal monitoring function (I2t monitor) in the
power section. This uses the time characteristic of the actual load current to calculate the time
characteristic of the thyristor temperature rise over ambient temperature. When the converter is
switched on, the calculation commences with the initial values that were calculated before the
converter power supply was last switched off/last failed. Allowance can be made for ambient
conditions (ambient temperature, installation altitude) by the setting in parameter P077.
In the delivery state, the ambient temperature is always set to the maximum permissible value
(i.e. 45C for naturally cooled converters and 40C for converters with forced cooling).
The I2t monitoring function responds when the calculated thyristor temperature rises exceeds the
permissible limit. Two alternative responses to the monitor can be parameterized:
P075 = 1:

Alarm A039 with reduction of armature current setpoint to P077 * converter rated DC
current

P075 = 2:

Fault F039 followed by converter shutdown

The I2t monitoring function can be deactivated. In this case, the armature current is limited to the
setting in P077 * converter rated DC current (= P077 * r072.001).
Connector K310 contains the calculated thyristor overtemperature as a % of the maximum permissible
converter-specific thyristor overtemperature:
80C on 15A to 60A converters
85C on 90A to 140A converters
90C on converters of > 200A converter rated armature DC current.

9-34

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

9.15.2 Configuring for dynamic overload capability

Section 9.15.3 provides the following information for each converter model:
Maximum overload period tan for starting with cold power section and specified constant overload
with an overload factor of X (i.e. loading with X times the converter rated DC current * P077) (see
small table at top right)
Maximum current interval tab (maximum cooling time) until the power section reaches the "cold"
state (see below small table at top right)
Limit characteristics fields for calculating overload capability in thermally settled, intermittent
overload operation (periodic load cycles).
(In tabulated form: Top left
As curve with logarithmic y axis: Curve at bottom left
As curve with linear y axis: Curve at bottom right)
Important:
The power section is in the "cold" state when the calculated thyristor temperature corresponds to less
than 5 % of its maximum permissible value. This state can be scanned via a binary selectable output.
Note:
If load cycles are started with a cold power section at least slightly within the specified load cycle
limits, then the thermally settled state can be reached without tripping the I2t monitor.
If the I2t monitoring function is parameterized for a shutdown response (P075 = 2), the converter
should not be allowed to operate too close to the limit characteristic when periodic load cycles are
configured with a load cycle time of longer or slightly shorter or equal to 300 s.
In all other cases, and especially when parameterizing reduction of the armature current setpoint
(P075 = 1) as the I2t monitoring trip response, it is possible to fully utilize the maximum overload
capability defined by the limit characteristic.
Structure of limit characteristics fields for intermittent overload duty:
Each characteristics field refers to a load cycle of intermittent overload operation with a total period of
300 s.
This type of load cycle consists of two periods,
i.e. the base-load duty period (armature actual current P077 * converter rated DC current)
and the overload period (actual armature current P077 * converter rated DC current).
Each limit characteristic displays the maximum permissible overload period Tp over
the maximum base-load current Ig for a specific overload factor X for each converter model.
For the remainder of the load cycle, the current may not exceed the base-load current as defined by
the overload factor.
If no limit characteristic is specified for a particular overload factor, then the characteristic for the nexthigher overload factor must be applied.
The limit characteristics fields apply to a load cycle time of 300s.
For load cycle times of < 300s, the overload period must be reduced proportionally (load cycle/300s).
For load cycle times of > 300s, the overload period is the same as that for a cycle time of 300s, but the
base-load period is correspondingly longer.
The limit characteristics fields apply for a setting of P077 = 1.00. If P077 is set to 1.00, i.e. in the
case of thermal derating, the currents which actually flow must be weighted with a factor of 1/P077:
Overload factor X for characteristic =
Actual maximum base-load current =

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Actual overload current

P 077 * converter rated DC current

P077 * max. base-load current acc. to characteristic in % of converter rated DC current

9-35

Function descriptions

05.2007

Basic tasks for configuring periodic overload operation

Terms:

Base-load duty period300 = min. base-load duty period for 300 s cycle time
Overload period300 = max. overload period for 300 s cycle time

Basic task 1:
Known quantities: Converter type, cycle time, overload factor, overload period
Quantities to be found: Minimum base-load duty period and maximum base-load current
Solution:

Selection of limit characteristic for specified converter type and overload factor
Cycle time < 300s: Overload period300 = (300s/cycle time) * overload period
Cycle time 300s: Overload period300 = Overload period
If: Overload period300 > overload period300 for base-load current = 0
Then: Required load cycle cannot be configured,
Otherwise: Determine the maximum base-load current for overload period300 from the
limit characteristic

Example 1:
Known quantities: 30A/4Q converter; cycle time 113.2s; overload factor = 1.45; overload period = 20s
Quantities to be found: Minimum base-load period and maximum base-load current
Solution:

Limit characteristic for 30A/4Q converter, overload factor 1.5

Overload period300 = (300s/113.2s) * 20s = 53s
Base-load period300 = 300s 53s = 247s
Maximum base-load current = approx. 45% of Irated = 13.5A

Basic task 2:
Known quantities: Converter type, cycle time, overload factor, base-load current
Quantities to be found: Minimum base-load period and maximum overload period
Solution:

Selection of limit characteristic for specified converter type and overload factor
Determine overload period300 for base-load current from limit characteristic
Cycle time < 300s:
Max. overload period = (cycle time/300s) * overload period300
Min. base-load period = cycle time max. overload period
Cycle time 300s:
Max. overload period = overload period300
Min. base-load period = cycle time max. overload period

Example 2:
Known quantities: 30A/4Q converter; cycle time 140s; current overload factor = 1.15;
base-load current = 0.6*Irated = 18A
Quantities to be found: Minimum base-load period and maximum overload period
Solution:

9-36

Limit characteristic for 30A/4Q converter, overload factor 1.2

Base-load current = 60% of Irated overload period300 = 126.35s
Max. overload period = (140s/300s) * 126.35s = approx. 58s
Min. base-load period = 140s 58s = 82s

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

9.15.3 Characteristics for determining the dynamic overload capability for intermittent
overload operation
6RA7013-6DV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

0
10
20
30
40
50

95.420
88.298
80.245
71.148
60.760
48.911

152.660
145.785
137.837
128.570
117.657
104.704

179.100
172.818
165.438
156.707
146.280
133.676

211.080
205.833
199.620
192.183
183.060
171.763

250.440
247.077
243.106
238.150
231.964
224.061

300.000
300.000
300.000
300.000
300.000
300.000

60
70
80
90
94
98
100

35.280
19.600
5.512
0.838
0.670
0.503
0.419

89.040
69.916
46.107
15.990
5.590
2.651
1.182

118.105
98.440
72.987
38.903
22.080
8.750
2.085

157.453
138.528
112.909
76.140
56.520
31.800
19.440

213.554
199.098
177.737
143.360
120.320
93.013
79.360

300.000
300.000
300.000
300.000
300.000
300.000
300.000

6RA7013-6DV62 15A/400V

X
1.1

tan (s)

1633
1112
833
651
382

1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tab (s) = 2281

6RA7013-6DV62 15A/400V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

250

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
1,0

200

150

100

X=1,3
X=1,2

X=1,1

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-37

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7018-6DS22 and 6RA7018-6FS22.

6RA7018-6DV62 and 6RA7018-6FV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

45.520
39.447
32.616
25.093
17.093
9.069
2.993
0.466
0.314
0.162
0.101
0.041
0.010

97.480
90.410
82.061
72.179
60.500
46.750
30.889
13.944
1.750
0.554
0.346
0.138
0.035

6RA7018-6DS22
6RA7018-6FS22
6RA7018-6DV62
6RA7018-6FV62

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

122.400
115.380
106.977
96.909
84.768
70.012
51.992
30.536
8.127
0.880
0.550
0.220
0.055

153.020
146.357
138.295
128.483
116.423
101.402
82.375
57.809
26.755
1.491
0.932
0.373
0.093

191.300
185.582
178.589
169.899
158.923
144.877
126.350
101.038
64.820
14.255
1.758
0.703
0.176

240.300
236.594
231.970
226.113
218.466
208.253
194.047
173.048
139.207
76.260
34.440
11.787
0.460

30A/1Q
30A/1Q
30A/4Q
30A/4Q

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tab (s) = 2169

6RA7018-6DS22
6RA7018-6FS22
6RA7018-6DV62
6RA7018-6FV62

400V
460V
400V
460V

tan (s)
1439
906
631
456
333
123

30A/1Q
30A/1Q
30A/4Q
30A/4Q

400V
460V
400V
460V

300

1000,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

10,0

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

1,0

200

150

100

0,1
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-38

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7025-6DS22. 6RA7025-6FS22 and 6RA7025-6GS22

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8
70.600
63.372
55.152
45.796
35.187
23.257
10.164
2.022
0.620
0.330
0.213
0.097
0.039

Tp (s)
X=1.5

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

122.800
115.270
106.462
96.080
83.785
69.086
51.369
30.087
6.095
0.876
0.568
0.259
0.104

146.660
139.406
131.198
120.544
108.182
93.111
74.442
51.000
21.643
1.097
0.711
0.324
0.131

175.280
168.624
160.650
151.002
139.149
124.364
105.480
80.716
47.267
4.671
1.362
0.621
0.250

210.100
204.640
198.004
189.831
179.545
166.345
148.834
124.642
89.280
33.840
5.483
2.083
0.383

253.320
250.030
245.968
240.862
234.267
225.415
213.073
194.690
164.645
106.744
65.650
22.677
1.190

6RA7025-6DS22 60A/1Q 400V

6RA7025-6FS22 60A/1Q 460V
6RA7025-6GS22 60A/1Q 575V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
2071
1352
988
756
592
296

tab (s) = 2169

6RA7025-6DS22 60A/1Q 400V

6RA7025-6FS22 60A/1Q 460V
6RA7025-6GS22 60A/1Q 575V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

10,0

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

1,0
50

0,1
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-39

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7025-6DV62. 6RA7025-6FV62 and 6RA7025-6GV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8
72.980
65.811
57.585
48.150
37.259
24.678
10.683
2.634
0.716
0.439
0.328
0.217
0.162

Tp (s)
X=1.5

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

130.400
123.227
114.814
104.895
93.130
79.007
61.827
40.555
14.001
1.241
0.927
0.614
0.457

156.740
149.957
141.930
132.360
120.832
106.735
89.233
66.989
37.903
4.225
1.420
0.940
0.700

188.460
182.498
175.350
166.711
156.101
142.839
125.906
103.596
72.993
28.730
7.154
3.179
1.191

227.300
222.876
217.469
210.816
202.443
191.669
177.370
157.563
128.433
81.603
53.876
20.823
4.296

275.940
274.175
272.034
269.379
265.933
261.301
254.787
245.064
228.970
197.474
174.472
130.537
108.570

6RA7025-6DV62 60A/4Q 400V

6RA7025-6FV62 60A/4Q 460V
6RA7025-6GV62 60A/4Q 575V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
2535
1446
1016
761
587
283

tab (s) = 2522

6RA7025-6DV62 60A/4Q 400V

6RA7025-6FV62 60A/4Q 460V
6RA7025-6GV62 60A/4Q 575V

X=1,8

300

1000,0

X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2

250

X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

X=1,8

10,0

X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

1,0

0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-40

100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7028-6DS22 and 6RA7028-6FS22

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

44.040
36.508
28.138
18.933
9.535
3.430
1.190
0.432
0.293
0.154
0.099
0.043
0.015

99.800
91.356
81.553
70.135
56.833
41.356
23.503
5.814
0.954
0.502
0.321
0.141
0.050

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

126.140
117.870
108.144
96.619
82.883
66.380
46.481
22.736
2.778
0.790
0.506
0.221
0.079

157.960
150.323
141.179
130.216
116.804
100.170
79.223
52.448
18.590
1.309
0.837
0.366
0.131

196.940
190.607
182.942
173.518
161.716
146.594
126.664
99.405
60.445
6.765
1.579
0.691
0.247

245.560
241.690
236.930
230.885
223.119
212.760
198.343
176.957
142.178
76.545
32.480
11.259
0.648

6RA7028-6DS22 90A/1Q 400V

6RA7028-6FS22 90A/1Q 460V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
1879
1186
831
604
443
151

tab (s) = 2668

6RA7028-6DS22 90A/1Q 400V

6RA7028-6FS22 90A/1Q 460V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

1,0

200

150

100

0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-41

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7028-6DV62 and 6RA7028-6FV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8
94.460
86.466
77.462
67.269
55.667
42.361
27.004
9.972
1.781
0.581
0.354
0.126
0.013

Tp (s)
X=1.5

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

141.260
133.232
123.966
113.195
100.540
85.483
67.315
44.985
17.079
1.302
0.792
0.283
0.028

162.280
154.580
145.592
135.009
122.390
107.108
88.261
64.499
33.595
2.533
1.108
0.396
0.040

187.240
180.222
171.911
161.976
149.907
134.954
115.992
91.200
57.466
9.867
1.680
0.600
0.060

217.380
211.582
204.624
196.128
185.555
172.084
154.347
129.983
94.473
37.987
7.117
2.441
0.103

254.460
250.787
246.336
240.743
233.598
224.091
210.906
191.381
159.668
99.089
56.044
18.841
0.239

6RA7028-6DV62 90A/4Q 400V

6RA7028-6FV62 90A/4Q 460V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
1911
1320
1007
804
659
391

tab (s) = 2658

6RA7028-6DV62 90A/4Q 400V

6RA7028-6FV62 90A/4Q 460V

1000,0

300

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2

250

X=1,1

10,0

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

1,0
50

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-42

100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7031-6DS22. 6RA7031-6FS22 and 6RA7031-6GS22

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

71.160
63.409
54.716
45.000
34.184
22.239
9.830
2.269
0.655
0.340
0.214
0.088
0.025

Tp (s)
X=1.5

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

122.540
114.371
104.905
93.880
80.975
65.756
47.787
26.730
5.378
0.863
0.544
0.224
0.064

146.140
138.230
128.959
118.003
104.942
89.153
69.886
46.225
17.613
1.270
0.799
0.329
0.094

174.380
167.128
158.516
148.165
135.556
119.928
100.161
74.573
40.970
3.395
1.258
0.518
0.148

208.680
202.695
195.483
186.653
175.626
161.525
142.928
117.429
80.571
25.315
3.159
1.231
0.267

251.080
247.413
242.887
237.226
229.911
220.178
206.664
186.607
153.963
91.948
49.218
16.851
0.667

6RA7031-6DS22 125A/1Q 400V

6RA7031-6FS22 125A/1Q 460V
6RA7031-6GS22 125A/1Q 575V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8
tab (s)

tan (s)
1994
1318
968
743
582
289
= 3110

6RA7031-6DS22 125A/1Q 400V

6RA7031-6FS22 125A/1Q 460V
6RA7031-6GS22 125A/1Q 575V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

X=1,8

10,0

X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

1,0

0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-43

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7031-6DV62. 6RA7031-6FV62 and 6RA7031-6GV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8
74.560
66.512
57.377
46.984
35.141
21.702
6.944
1.340
0.603
0.304
0.184
0.065
0.005

Tp (s)
X=1.5

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

125.660
117.485
107.974
95.363
83.679
67.946
48.910
25.670
2.501
0.749
0.454
0.159
0.012

148.680
140.799
131.548
120.584
107.433
91.425
71.581
46.462
14.468
1.080
0.655
0.230
0.017

176.040
168.832
160.259
149.925
137.311
121.613
101.600
75.329
39.467
1.686
1.022
0.358
0.027

209.100
203.128
195.896
187.042
175.983
161.810
143.079
117.208
79.328
19.379
1.811
0.635
0.047

249.760
245.972
241.303
235.487
227.952
217.919
203.951
183.226
149.404
84.405
38.066
12.764
0.113

6RA7031-6DV62 125A/4Q 400V

6RA7031-6FV62 125A/4Q 460V
6RA7031-6GV62 125A/4Q 575V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
2160
1453
1079
836
662
344

tab (s) = 3112

6RA7031-6DV62 125A/4Q 400V

6RA7031-6FV62 125A/4Q 460V
6RA7031-6GV62 125A/4Q 575V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

10,0

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

1,0

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-44

100

0
0

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

100

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions
6RA7075-6DS22. 6RA7075-6FS22 and 6RA7075-6GS22
6RA7075-6DV62. 6RA7075-6FV62 and 6RA7075-6GV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

1.080
0.902
0.733
0.585
0.456
0.344
0.246
0.160
0.085
0.024
0.015
0.010
0.007

Tp (s)
X=1.4

21.600
14.843
8.313
4.428
2.419
1.369
0.826
0.486
0.264
0.150
0.109
0.069
0.048

6RA7075-6DS22
6RA7075-6FS22
6RA7075-6GS22
6RA7075-6DV62
6RA7075-6FV62
6RA7075-6GV62

Tp (s)
X=1.3

50.720
43.009
34.150
24.068
12.873
4.870
1.995
0.947
0.480
0.286
0.209
0.131
0.092

210A/1Q
210A/1Q
210A/1Q
210A/4Q
210A/4Q
210A/4Q

91.660
83.652
74.216
63.100
50.001
34.589
16.667
3.749
1.081
0.581
0.424
0.266
0.187

400V
460V
575V
400V
460V
575V

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

149.600
142.448
133.825
123.347
110.490
94.498
74.278
48.370
15.400
1.407
1.025
0.644
0.454

235.560
231.608
226.741
220.628
212.789
202.443
188.324
167.990
136.377
80.999
45.980
16.631
1.956

X=1,5

tan (s)
680.00
318.00
167.00
78.00
25.00
0.96

tab (s) = 766

6RA7075-6DS22
6RA7075-6FS22
6RA7075-6GS22
6RA7075-6DV62
6RA7075-6FV62
6RA7075-6GV62

X=1,8

1000,0

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

210A/1Q
210A/1Q
210A/1Q
210A/4Q
210A/4Q
210A/4Q

400V
460V
575V
400V
460V
575V

300

X=1,4

X=1,8

X=1,3

X=1,5

X=1,2

X=1,4

X=1,1

250

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

200

150

100

1,0
50

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-45

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7078-6DS22 and 6RA7078-6FS22

6RA7078-6DV62 and 6RA7078-6FV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

21.300
16.768
12.534
8.923
6.091
4.023
2.540
1.437
0.638
0.202
0.142
0.083
0.053

Tp (s)
X=1.4

65.680
58.584
50.641
41.770
31.938
21.435
11.925
5.650
2.410
0.673
0.474
0.276
0.177

6RA7078-6DS22
6RA7078-6FS22
6RA7078-6DV62
6RA7078-6FV62

90.400
82.846
74.247
64.461
53.316
40.632
26.420
12.725
4.605
1.290
0.748
0.435
0.279

280A/1Q
280A/1Q
280A/4Q
280A/4Q

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

123.700
116.025
107.139
96.798
84.699
70.460
53.609
33.714
12.943
2.842
1.265
0.736
0.472

169.960
163.015
154.795
144.953
133.042
118.418
100.127
76.841
46.698
11.433
4.192
2.017
0.930

237.500
233.249
228.092
221.708
213.585
203.028
188.753
168.506
137.624
85.548
53.870
20.682
4.088

400V
460V
400V
460V

6RA7078-6DS22
6RA7078-6FS22
6RA7078-6DV62
6RA7078-6FV62

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
729
381
237
155
103
24

tab (s) = 840

280A/1Q
280A/1Q
280A/4Q
280A/4Q

400V
460V
400V
460V

300

1000,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8

200

150

100

X=1,5

1,0

X=1,4
X=1,3

X=1,2
X=1,1

0,1
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-46

100

0
0

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 94 98 100
Base-load current as % of rated DC current
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7081-6DS22 and 6RA7081-6GS22

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

0.820
0.680
0.555
0.447
0.355
0.276
0.207
0.146
0.090
0.039
0.020
0.010
0.006

Tp (s)
X=1.4

4.500
3.657
2.859
2.141
1.507
0.969
0.584
0.352
0.201
0.090
0.054
0.029
0.016

Tp (s)
X=1.3

10.140
8.318
6.478
4.767
3.309
2.145
1.237
0.617
0.309
0.131
0.086
0.046
0.025

23.420
20.184
16.703
13.079
9.437
6.057
3.414
1.658
0.621
0.221
0.150
0.079
0.044

Tp (s)
X=1.2
54.060
49.209
43.560
37.094
29.872
22.145
14.378
7.250
2.518
0.532
0.361
0.191
0.106

6RA7081-6DS22 400A/1Q 400V

6RA7081-6GS22 400A/1Q 575V

1000,0

121.080
115.906
109.708
102.254
93.218
82.116
68.216
50.437
28.154
6.682
2.134
1.000
0.434

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
130.40
53.90
21.70
8.90
3.80
0.72

tab (s) = 198

6RA7081-6DS22 400A/1Q 400V

6RA7081-6GS22 400A/1Q 575V

300
X=1,8

X=1,8

X=1,5

X=1,4

X=1,3

250

X=1,2

X=1,1

X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Tp (s)
X=1.1

10,0

200

150

100

1,0

0,1
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-47

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7081-6DV62 and 6RA7081-6GV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

1.640
1.446
1.235
1.023
0.814
0.617
0.437
0.277
0.137
0.036
0.018
0.011
0.007

Tp (s)
X=1.4

5.320
4.438
3.666
2.985
2.372
1.812
1.296
0.829
0.443
0.155
0.068
0.039
0.025

Tp (s)
X=1.3

13.720
10.202
7.483
5.525
4.105
3.019
2.136
1.382
0.743
0.275
0.148
0.089
0.059

42.460
36.010
28.596
20.318
12.433
7.189
4.358
2.660
1.449
0.549
0.349
0.210
0.140

Tp (s)
X=1.2
90.020
83.305
75.421
66.139
55.130
41.929
25.980
10.258
3.915
1.454
0.832
0.499
0.333

6RA7081-6DV62 400A/4Q 400V

6RA7081-6GV62 400A/4Q 575V

1000,0

Tp (s)
X=1.1
179.460
173.786
166.961
158.672
148.477
135.711
119.321
97.514
66.912
20.405
5.925
2.825
1.276

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
282.0
112.0
47.0
13.0
4.9
1.5

tab (s) = 338

6RA7081-6DV62 400A/4Q 400V

6RA7081-6GV62 400A/4Q 575V

300

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

200

150

100

1,0
X=1,8
X=1,5

X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

0,1
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-48

0
0

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

100

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7082-6FS22 and 6RA7082-6FV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

1.460
1.248
1.039
0.844
0.663
0.495
0.344
0.213
0.110
0.032
0.014
0.005
0.000

Tp (s)
X=1.4

6.560
5.412
4.266
3.189
2.248
1.512
0.980
0.587
0.289
0.090
0.051
0.018
0.001

Tp (s)
X=1.3

12.320
10.423
8.442
6.455
4.583
2.959
1.736
0.959
0.460
0.138
0.083
0.029
0.001

23.900
20.816
17.528
14.096
10.599
7.189
4.192
2.008
0.847
0.248
0.149
0.051
0.002

Tp (s)
X=1.2
49.460
44.704
39.262
33.181
26.601
19.783
13.053
6.836
2.353
0.542
0.320
0.110
0.005

6RA7082-6FS22 450A/1Q 460V

6RA7082-6FV62 450A/4Q 460V

1000,0

Tp (s)
X=1.1
103.620
98.249
91.829
84.141
74.867
63.575
49.724
33.160
15.936
2.830
0.947
0.325
0.014

X=1,5

X=1,4

X=1,4
X=1,3

X=1,3

250

X=1,2

X=1,1

X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

tab (s) = 206

X=1,8

10,0

tan (s)
109.8
49.0
22.4
11.1
5.7
1.3

6RA7082-6FS22 450A/1Q 460V

6RA7082-6FV62 450A/4Q 460V

300

100,0

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

200

150

100

1,0

0,1
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0
0

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-49

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7085-6DS22. 6RA7085-6FS22 and 6RA7085-6GS22

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

8.020
6.452
4.806
3.158
1.837
1.118
0.704
0.422
0.222
0.094
0.069
0.044
0.031

Tp (s)
X=1.4

28.640
25.538
22.113
18.383
14.378
10.177
5.955
2.214
0.792
0.281
0.206
0.131
0.094

Tp (s)
X=1.3

43.300
39.388
35.022
30.202
24.930
19.228
13.179
7.058
1.876
0.479
0.342
0.218
0.156

67.520
62.591
56.979
50.655
43.582
35.738
27.126
17.825
8.028
1.235
0.626
0.398
0.285

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

111.260
105.453
98.665
90.734
81.467
70.653
58.067
43.557
27.146
9.525
3.179
1.504
0.666

202.240
197.543
191.802
184.774
176.031
164.977
150.647
131.462
104.647
65.500
45.238
22.342
10.894

6RA7085-6DS22 600A/1Q 400V

6RA7085-6FS22 600A/1Q 460V
6RA7085-6GS22 600A/1Q 575V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
331.0
137.0
74.0
44.0
28.0
6.9

tab (s) = 381

6RA7085-6DS22 600A/1Q 400V

6RA7085-6FS22 600A/1Q 460V
6RA7085-6GS22 600A/1Q 575V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
1,0

200

150

100

X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

X=1,2
X=1,1

0,1

0
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-50

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7085-6DV62. 6RA7085-6FV62 and 6RA7085-6GV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

6.320
4.768
3.249
2.016
1.293
0.868
0.575
0.354
0.192
0.079
0.058
0.037
0.026

Tp (s)
X=1.4

34.420
29.728
24.577
19.130
13.684
8.632
4.294
1.497
0.645
0.283
0.208
0.132
0.094

Tp (s)
X=1.3

55.620
50.173
43.899
36.764
28.809
20.340
12.167
5.361
1.347
0.483
0.355
0.226
0.161

86.300
80.420
73.524
65.460
56.012
44.942
32.342
18.343
6.565
0.911
0.662
0.421
0.301

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

133.680
127.741
120.691
112.287
102.199
89.953
74.877
55.975
32.161
7.922
2.177
0.852
0.190

219.660
215.465
210.355
203.997
196.025
185.803
172.318
153.824
126.914
83.908
58.269
25.724
9.452

6RA7085-6DV62 600A/4Q 400V

6RA7085-6FV62 600A/4Q 460V
6RA7085-6GV62 600A/4Q 575V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
423.0
183.0
105.0
63.0
36.0
5.2

tab (s) = 452

6RA7085-6DV62 600A/4Q 400V

6RA7085-6FV62 600A/4Q 460V
6RA7085-6GV62 600A/4Q 575V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8

1,0

200

150

100

X=1,5
X=1,4

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1
0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-51

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7087-6DS22. 6RA7087-6FS22. 6RA7087-6GS22 and

6RA7086-6KS22

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

19.240
15.940
12.583
9.370
6.534
4.195
2.356
1.101
0.392
0.132
0.080
0.029
0.003

Tp (s)
X=1.4

45.900
40.913
35.472
29.557
23.164
16.405
9.869
4.796
1.619
0.383
0.234
0.084
0.009

6RA7087-6DS22
6RA7087-6FS22
6RA7087-6GS22
6RA7086-6KS22

850A/1Q
850A/1Q
800A/1Q
720A/1Q

Tp (s)
X=1.3

61.540
55.837
49.571
42.685
35.118
26.816
17.861
9.197
3.225
0.585
0.357
0.128
0.014

84.160
77.668
70.427
62.357
53.350
43.272
31.981
19.447
7.482
1.209
0.586
0.211
0.023

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

119.400
112.234
104.059
94.724
84.017
71.675
57.378
40.710
21.279
3.936
1.125
0.405
0.045

180.060
173.376
165.491
156.078
144.712
130.776
113.369
91.195
62.331
23.947
7.453
2.565
0.122

400V
460V
575V
690V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
296
161
102
70
50
19

tab (s) = 516

6RA7087-6DS22
6RA7087-6FS22
6RA7087-6GS22
6RA7086-6KS22

850A/1Q
850A/1Q
800A/1Q
720A/1Q

400V
460V
575V
690V

300

1000,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
1,0

200

150

100

X=1,3
X=1,2
50

X=1,1

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-52

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7087-6DV62. 6RA7087-6FV62. 6RA7087-6GV62 and

6RA7086-6KV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

13.760
10.426
7.840
5.681
4.005
2.631
1.548
0.787
0.303
0.106
0.066
0.025
0.005

Tp (s)
X=1.4

53.220
46.039
37.973
28.968
19.373
11.176
6.126
3.058
1.132
0.382
0.236
0.090
0.017

6RA7087-6DV62
6RA7087-6FV62
6RA7087-6GV62
6RA7086-6KV62

74.980
67.417
58.820
49.019
37.798
25.080
12.836
5.774
2.146
0.596
0.368
0.141
0.027

850A/4Q
850A/4Q
850A/4Q
760A/4Q

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

103.760
95.971
87.013
76.651
64.573
50.350
33.449
14.946
4.802
0.981
0.606
0.232
0.044

143.740
136.188
127.352
116.928
104.480
89.409
70.819
47.335
17.887
2.723
1.150
0.439
0.084

203.660
197.687
190.507
181.775
170.947
157.197
139.217
114.694
79.242
23.486
5.393
1.942
0.217

400V
460V
575V
690V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tab (s) = 582

6RA7087-6DV62
6RA7087-6FV62
6RA7087-6GV62
6RA7086-6KV62

1000,0

tan (s)
382.0
228.0
150.0
102.0
68.0
13.5

850A/4Q
850A/4Q
850A/4Q
760A/4Q

400V
460V
575V
690V

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5

1,0

200

150

100

X=1,4
X=1,3
50

X=1,2
X=1,1

0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-53

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7090-6GS22. 6RA7088-6KS22 and 6RA7088-6LS22

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

5.200
4.317
3.462
2.652
1.916
1.296
0.807
0.436
0.183
0.052
0.035
0.017
0.009

17.360
14.787
12.144
9.551
7.132
4.984
3.136
1.655
0.689
0.173
0.115
0.058
0.029

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

27.520
24.058
20.380
16.541
12.653
8.952
5.740
3.148
1.282
0.301
0.200
0.100
0.050

44.980
40.280
35.203
29.781
24.043
18.058
12.075
6.812
2.925
0.692
0.359
0.179
0.090

Tp (s)
X=1.2
78.220
72.007
65.028
57.253
48.664
39.296
29.251
18.728
8.727
2.145
0.793
0.397
0.198

6RA7090-6GS22 1000A/1Q 575V

6RA7088-6KD22 950A/1Q 690V
6RA7088-6LS22 900A/1Q 830V

1000,0

Tp (s)
X=1.1
148.060
141.537
133.879
124.828
114.020
100.938
84.905
65.123
41.287
15.025
6.128
2.491
0.672

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
185.0
86.0
46.0
26.0
16.0
4.6

tab (s) = 296

6RA7090-6GS22 1000A/1Q 575V

6RA7088-6KS22 950A/1Q 690V
6RA7088-6LS22 900A/1Q 830V

300

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
1,0

X=1,4

200

150

100

X=1,3
X=1,2

X=1,1

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-54

100

0
0

20
30 40 50 60 70
80 90
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

100

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7090-6KV62 and 6RA7088-6LV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

4.080
3.442
2.794
2.164
1.586
1.093
0.693
0.378
0.160
0.048
0.030
0.013
0.004

Tp (s)
X=1.4

14.280
12.036
9.811
7.746
5.854
4.142
2.616
1.385
0.581
0.147
0.093
0.040
0.013

Tp (s)
X=1.3

25.460
21.667
17.755
13.929
10.403
7.334
4.748
2.597
1.049
0.250
0.159
0.068
0.023

Tp (s)
X=1.2

46.360
41.114
35.237
28.803
22.049
15.493
9.849
5.516
2.324
0.516
0.313
0.134
0.045

82.600
76.322
69.058
60.682
51.032
39.973
27.665
15.554
6.650
1.525
0.690
0.296
0.099

6RA7090-6KV62 1000A/4Q 690V

6RA7088-6LV62 950A/4Q 830V

1000,0

152.260
145.782
138.048
128.752
117.487
103.686
86.554
64.950
37.418
9.360
3.399
1.337
0.305

tan (s)
218.0
99.0
50.0
25.0
13.0
3.6

tab (s) = 373

X=1,8

X=1,5

X=1,4

X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2

X=1,1

X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

6RA7090-6KV62 1000A/4Q 690V

6RA7088-6LV62 950A/4Q 830V

300

X=1,3

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Tp (s)
X=1.1

10,0

1,0

200

150

100

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

100

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-55

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7090-6GV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

3.220
2.667
2.126
1.627
1.190
0.820
0.514
0.276
0.116
0.032
0.020
0.008
0.003

Tp (s)
X=1.4

11.460
9.464
7.683
5.916
4.393
3.030
1.864
0.992
0.412
0.107
0.068
0.029
0.009

Tp (s)
X=1.3

21.200
17.531
13.963
10.688
7.839
5.441
3.435
1.817
0.746
0.194
0.123
0.052
0.016

Tp (s)
X=1.2

41.120
35.592
29.586
23.294
17.098
11.577
7.202
3.943
1.595
0.388
0.246
0.104
0.032

Tp (s)
X=1.1

77.020
70.260
62.571
53.843
43.959
32.922
21.337
11.248
4.679
1.042
0.559
0.235
0.074

6RA7090-6GV62 1100A/4Q 575V

1000,0

146.840
139.763
131.415
121.518
109.666
95.330
77.776
55.976
29.109
6.405
2.255
0.905
0.230

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
208.0
91.0
43.6
20.5
10.5
2.9

tab (s) = 366

6RA7090-6GV62 1100A/4Q 575V

300
X=1,8
X=1,5

X=1,8

X=1,4

X=1,5

X=1,3

X=1,4

250

X=1,2

X=1,3

X=1,1

X=1,2
X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

200

150

100

1,0

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-56

100

0
0

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

100

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7091-6DS22 and 6RA7091-6FS22

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

6.700
5.627
4.569
3.550
2.589
1.737
1.061
0.568
0.231
0.066
0.042
0.018
0.006

20.140
17.447
14.613
11.728
8.916
6.321
4.043
2.139
0.850
0.204
0.130
0.056
0.019

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

30.440
26.910
23.126
19.129
14.988
10.873
7.101
3.952
1.571
0.340
0.208
0.089
0.030

47.720
42.992
37.864
32.352
26.479
20.297
13.974
8.086
3.492
0.754
0.373
0.160
0.053

Tp (s)
X=1.2
79.460
73.349
66.463
58.749
50.180
40.779
30.640
19.951
9.534
2.231
0.780
0.334
0.111

6RA7091-6DS22 1200A/1Q 400V

6RA7091-6FS22 1200A/1Q 460V

1000,0

Tp (s)
X=1.1
143.340
136.839
129.216
120.198
109.427
96.405
80.494
61.016
37.886
12.898
4.891
1.859
0.344

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
180
88
49
30
19
6

tab (s) = 312

6RA7091-6DS22 1200A/1Q 400V

6RA7091-6FS22 1200A/1Q 460V

300

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

1,0

200

6RA7091-6FV62 1200A/4Q 460V

154.620
147.678
139.481
129.727
118.002
103.748
86.175
64.163
36.340
8.816
3.100
1.202
0.253

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
223
104
54
28
15
4

tab (s) = 383

6RA7091-6DV62 1200A/4Q 400V

6RA7091-6FV62 1200A/4Q 460V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5

1,0

200

150

100

X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2

X=1,1

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-58

100

0
0

100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7093-4KS22 and 6RA7093-4LS22

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

11.960
10.354
8.711
7.058
5.420
3.850
2.466
1.400
0.640
0.175
0.107
0.061
0.038

Tp (s)
X=1.4

33.580
29.516
25.272
20.967
16.716
12.626
8.783
5.269
2.374
0.674
0.324
0.185
0.116

Tp (s)
X=1.3

51.120
45.777
39.920
33.657
27.174
20.753
14.690
9.208
4.467
1.251
0.360
0.206
0.128

78.920
72.560
65.342
57.190
48.056
38.057
27.663
17.798
9.313
2.786
1.251
0.649
0.347

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

123.920
117.063
109.063
99.707
88.721
75.770
60.472
42.676
23.903
8.505
3.933
1.802
0.736

203.840
198.463
191.954
183.973
174.045
161.434
145.020
122.948
92.099
47.471
26.380
9.232
2.516

6RA7093-4KS22 1500A/1Q 690V

6RA7093-4LS22 1500A/1Q 830V

1000,0

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
407
183
100
59
35
11

tab (s) = 565

6RA7093-4KS22 1500A/1Q 690V

6RA7093-4LS22 1500A/1Q 830V
300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

250

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
1,0

200

150

100

X=1,4
50

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

0
0

0,1
0

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-59

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7093-4KV62 and 6RA7093-4LV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)
X=1.8

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.5

8.440
7.298
6.151
5.028
3.954
2.959
2.080
1.339
0.729
0.265
0.150
0.092
0.063

Tp (s)
X=1.4

26.800
23.608
20.256
16.808
13.363
10.070
7.079
4.489
2.403
0.975
0.550
0.316
0.198

Tp (s)
X=1.3

42.880
38.359
33.532
28.460
23.204
17.875
12.713
8.111
4.373
1.724
1.013
0.565
0.341

73.260
66.907
59.860
52.162
43.906
35.241
26.356
17.545
9.623
3.773
2.173
1.174
0.675

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

130.180
123.241
115.099
105.514
94.199
80.852
65.306
47.882
29.713
12.681
7.327
3.792
2.025

238.580
234.844
230.280
224.637
217.465
208.159
196.012
178.187
151.885
108.266
82.134
49.566
33.283

6RA7093-4KV62 1500A/4Q 690V

6RA7093-4LV62 1500A/4Q 830V

1000,0

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
546.0
195.0
92.0
47.0
27.0
7.8

tab (s) = 480

6RA7093-4KV62 1500A/4Q 690V

6RA7093-4LV62 1500A/4Q 830V

300

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

250

X=1,3
X=1,2
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5

1,0

X=1,1
200

150

100

X=1,4
X=1,3

X=1,2
X=1,1

0,1
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-60

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7093-4DS22 and 6RA7093-4GS22

6RA7093-4DV62 and 6RA7093-4GV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

15.040
12.954
10.869
8.805
6.830
4.928
3.200
1.825
0.871
0.264
0.144
0.091
0.065

Tp (s)
X=1.4

41.340
36.316
31.083
25.773
20.551
15.577
10.975
6.826
3.283
1.028
0.496
0.304
0.208

6RA7093-4DS22
6RA7093-4GS22
6RA7093-4DV62
6RA7093-4GV62

Tp (s)
X=1.3

61.280
55.103
48.348
41.070
33.418
25.708
18.373
11.783
6.134
1.905
0.964
0.550
0.342

1600A/1Q
1600A/1Q
1600A/4Q
1600A/4Q

91.820
84.796
76.885
67.986
57.998
46.892
34.932
23.052
12.641
4.482
2.176
1.133
0.612

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

140.780
133.569
125.211
115.478
104.075
90.612
74.597
55.559
33.675
13.555
7.393
3.350
1.328

227.360
222.650
216.969
210.017
201.343
190.226
175.591
155.476
127.036
81.104
55.811
28.291
14.530

400V
575V
400V
575V

6RA7093-4DS22
6RA7093-4GS22
6RA7093-4DV62
6RA7093-4GV62

1000,0

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
518.0
219.0
122.0
73.0
45.0
14.5

tab (s) = 548

1600A/1Q
1600A/1Q
1600A/4Q
1600A/4Q

400V
575V
400V
575V

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

1,0

200

150

100

X=1,3
X=1,2

X=1,1

0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-61

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7095-4LS22 and 6RA7095-4LV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

27.940
24.487
20.784
16.870
12.774
8.585
4.759
2.224
0.866
0.248
0.151
0.055
0.006

Tp (s)
X=1.4

59.320
53.864
47.829
41.224
34.075
26.448
18.459
10.297
3.403
0.644
0.383
0.139
0.016

77.240
71.061
64.114
56.347
47.728
38.274
28.103
17.464
6.908
1.152
0.561
0.203
0.024

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

103.320
96.528
88.735
79.809
69.588
57.927
44.762
30.275
15.091
2.475
0.901
0.326
0.038

141.420
134.447
126.266
116.633
105.208
91.562
75.176
55.529
32.654
8.588
2.175
0.772
0.070

200.360
194.568
187.592
179.035
168.391
154.899
137.352
113.823
81.138
35.600
14.997
5.118
0.179

6RA7095-4LS22 1900A/1Q 830V

6RA7095-4LV62 1900A/4Q 830V

1000,0

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
513.0
259.0
160.0
108.0
76.0
30.8

tab (s) = 1056

6RA7095-4LS22 1900A/1Q 830V

6RA7095-4LV62 1900A/4Q 830V
300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

10,0

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

1,0

0,1

0
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-62

100

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

100

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7095-4DS22

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8
14.080
12.164
10.242
8.340
6.490
4.731
3.124
1.755
0.750
0.150
0.091
0.033
0.004

Tp (s)
X=1.5
35.260
30.801
26.203
21.590
17.086
12.802
8.827
5.256
2.411
0.644
0.280
0.101
0.011

Tp (s)
X=1.4
51.320
45.618
39.457
32.954
26.323
19.857
13.843
8.476
3.965
1.059
0.455
0.164
0.018

Tp (s)
X=1.3
75.880
69.144
61.597
53.180
43.913
34.013
24.086
15.005
7.384
1.958
0.758
0.273
0.030

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

114.220
106.834
98.330
88.514
77.142
63.949
48.749
32.049
16.379
4.647
1.781
0.632
0.057

178.880
172.191
164.219
154.610
142.861
128.285
109.844
86.007
54.679
18.411
7.489
2.595
0.148

6RA7095-4DS22 2000A/1Q 400V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
321.0
164.0
96.0
59.0
38.0
13.7

tab (s) = 600

6RA7095-4DS22 2000A/1Q 400V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
250

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5

200

150

100

X=1,4

1,0

X=1,3

X=1,2
X=1,1

0
0

0,1
0

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-63

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7095-4KS22

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

26.880
23.649
20.327
16.978
13.665
10.445
7.380
4.552
2.097
0.496
0.243
0.135
0.081

Tp (s)
X=1.4

59.700
54.174
48.089
41.460
34.367
27.004
19.715
12.906
6.899
2.090
0.828
0.427
0.227

79.780
73.569
66.581
58.758
50.050
40.484
30.318
20.226
11.149
3.812
1.607
0.770
0.351

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

108.360
101.610
93.882
85.031
74.872
63.200
49.860
35.021
20.032
7.485
3.608
1.602
0.599

151.120
144.367
136.463
127.152
116.097
102.850
86.799
67.180
43.331
17.833
9.406
3.935
1.200

220.200
215.318
209.406
202.144
193.067
181.458
166.159
145.210
114.998
68.545
43.196
18.871
6.709

6RA7095-4KS22 2000A/1Q 690V

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
479.7
248.5
155.7
104.8
73.4
28.7

tab (s) = 663

6RA7095-4KS22 2000A/1Q 690V

300

1000,0

X=1,8

250

X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
1,0

X=1,2
200

X=1,1

150

100

X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2

X=1,1

0,1

0
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-64

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7095-4GS22 and 6RA7095-4GV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

39.720
35.381
30.789
25.968
20.951
15.779
10.524
5.568
2.295
0.753
0.411
0.280
0.214

80.060
73.782
66.849
59.224
50.876
41.819
32.135
22.016
11.757
3.171
1.542
0.883
0.553

Tp (s)
X=1.4

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

103.680
96.869
89.218
80.620
70.958
60.123
48.069
34.904
21.027
7.298
3.225
1.640
0.848

136.840
129.838
121.817
112.580
101.897
89.469
74.951
58.026
38.670
17.853
9.642
4.265
1.576

185.580
179.331
171.987
163.277
152.798
140.037
124.224
104.256
78.552
45.497
30.440
15.415
7.902

262.160
259.402
256.043
251.935
246.641
241.189
230.257
216.666
195.547
158.419
134.458
96.988
78.254

6RA7095-4GS22 2000A/1Q 575V

6RA7095-4GV62 2000A/4Q 575V

1000,0

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
1247.5
421.2
241.9
159.2
111.9
46.6

tab (s) = 1064

6RA7095-4GS22 2000A/1Q 575V

6RA7095-4GV62 2000A/4Q 575V

300

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

200

150

100

X=1,3

1,0

X=1,2
50

X=1,1

0
0

0,1
0

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-65

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7095-4DV62 and 6RA7095-4KV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

8.620
7.378
6.169
5.012
3.922
2.910
1.992
1.197
0.559
0.107
0.062
0.022
0.002

23.520
20.361
17.114
13.871
10.752
7.889
5.385
3.281
1.596
0.428
0.195
0.070
0.008

Tp (s)
X=1.4
35.400
31.064
26.540
21.887
17.198
12.663
8.571
5.173
2.535
0.709
0.311
0.112
0.012

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

56.300
50.189
43.681
36.852
29.797
22.639
15.623
9.344
4.520
1.302
0.533
0.192
0.021

Tp (s)
X=1.1

94.920
87.161
78.348
68.439
57.475
45.671
33.425
21.245
10.275
2.929
1.179
0.421
0.043

6RA7095-4DV62 2000A/4Q 400V

6RA7095-4KV62 2000A/4Q 690V

164.420
157.186
148.563
138.188
125.541
109.901
90.316
65.970
38.038
11.665
4.610
1.613
0.115

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
274
128
65
37
23
8

tab (s) = 493

6RA7095-4DV62 2000A/4Q 400V

6RA7095-4KV62 2000A/4Q 690V

1000,0

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
1,0

200

150

100

X=1,4
X=1,3
50

X=1,2
X=1,1

0,1

0
0

9-66

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

100

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Base-load current as % of rated DC current

100

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7096-4GS22 and 6RA7096-4GV62

Ig (%)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
94
98
100

Tp (s)
X=1.8

Tp (s)
X=1.5

39.000
34.653
30.048
25.226
20.218
15.067
9.838
5.003
2.073
0.636
0.341
0.190
0.114

Tp (s)
X=1.4

75.480
69.163
62.221
54.625
46.366
37.482
28.083
18.370
8.650
2.032
0.930
0.496
0.279

96.440
89.521
81.784
73.140
63.494
52.786
41.038
28.453
15.482
3.781
1.630
0.818
0.412

Tp (s)
X=1.3

Tp (s)
X=1.2

Tp (s)
X=1.1

125.460
118.189
109.887
100.396
89.496
76.940
62.485
46.016
27.901
9.411
3.521
1.616
0.663

167.360
160.398
152.267
142.699
131.303
117.591
100.872
80.237
54.722
24.713
12.433
4.978
1.251

231.500
226.803
221.147
214.187
205.444
194.231
179.350
158.741
128.525
80.823
54.030
20.492
3.722

X
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.8

tan (s)
753
340
209
142
102
45

tab (s) = 985

6RA7096-4GS22 2200A/ 1Q 575V

6RA7096-4GV62 2200A/ 4Q 575V

6RA7096-4GS22 2200A/ 1Q 575V

6RA7096-4GV62 2200A/ 4Q 575V
300

1000,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3

250

X=1,2
X=1,1
Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

100,0

10,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
1,0

200

150

100

X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2

X=1,1

0,1

0
0

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

100

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-67

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7098-4DS22 and 6RA7098-4DV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)

X=1.8

X=1.5

X=1.4

X=1.3

X=1.2

X=1.1

21.198

45.618

61.299

84.680

120.895

181.596

18.556

41.108

55.887

78.379

114.060

175.411

15.785

36.244

49.949

71.291

106.160

168.033

12.920

31.042

43.483

63.346

96.995

159.155

10.016

25.536

36.512

54.496

86.324

148.311

7.153

19.790

29.086

44.742

73.884

134.832

1.1

282.051

4.482

13.934

21.314

34.169

59.438

117.710

1.2

160.486

2.346

8.250

13.445

22.996

42.967

95.388

1.3

103.230

0.992

3.377

6.107

11.792

24.979

65.716

1.4

70.241

0.250

0.750

1.279

2.623

7.396

28.003

1.5

49.850

0.093

0.274

0.454

0.877

2.321

12.350

1.8

21.276

0.014

0.036

0.060

0.112

0.271

1.276

100

0.001

0.002

0.003

0.004

0.007

0.023

6RA7098-4DS22 3000A/ 1Q 400V

6RA7098-4DV62 3000A/ 4Q 400V

tan (s)

tab (s) = 464.709

6RA7098-4DS22 3000A/ 1Q 400V

6RA7098-4DV62 3000A/ 4Q 400V

1000,0

300

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

250

100,0

10,0

1,0

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

0,1

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-68

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7097-4GS22 and 6RA7097-4GV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)

X=1.8

X=1.5

X=1.4

X=1.3

X=1.2

X=1.1

21.783

46.496

62.302

85.790

122.053

182.663

19.049

41.860

56.758

79.362

115.107

176.407

16.191

36.876

50.691

72.147

107.098

168.959

13.244

31.560

44.099

64.076

97.824

160.013

10.264

25.947

37.007

55.101

87.042

149.100

7.332

20.102

29.468

45.221

74.488

135.551

1.1

284.613

4.596

14.155

21.591

34.527

59.921

118.354

1.2

162.461

2.400

8.387

13.625

23.239

43.321

95.947

1.3

104.869

1.012

3.437

6.201

11.932

25.203

66.164

1.4

71.595

0.255

0.762

1.298

2.664

7.494

28.276

1.5

50.952

0.095

0.279

0.461

0.891

2.361

12.530

1.8

21.915

0.014

0.037

0.061

0.115

0.278

1.315

100

0.001

0.003

0.005

0.008

0.027

6RA7097-4GS22
6RA7097-4GV62

2800A/ 1Q 575V
2800A/ 4Q 575V

tab (s) = 464.711

6RA7097-4GS22
6RA7097-4GV62

1000,0

tan (s)

2800A/ 1Q 575V
2800A/ 4Q 575V

300
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

250
100,0

10,0
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2

1,0

X=1,1

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

0
0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-69

Function descriptions

05.2007

6RA7097-4KS22 and 6RA7097-4KV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)

X=1.8

X=1.5

X=1.4

X=1.3

X=1.2

X=1.1

22.737

48.149

64.353

88.357

125.332

187.185

19.889

43.357

58.650

81.792

118.303

180.980

16.920

38.215

52.418

74.433

110.209

173.596

13.863

32.743

45.655

66.206

100.845

164.735

10.776

26.972

38.385

57.054

89.957

153.923

7.737

20.969

30.659

46.969

77.265

140.486

1.1

295.696

4.889

14.858

22.586

36.039

62.497

123.399

1.2

168.123

2.567

8.913

14.406

24.481

45.584

101.046

1.3

108.685

1.089

3.743

6.728

12.845

27.005

71.069

1.4

74.382

0.283

0.854

1.464

3.060

8.583

32.027

1.5

53.040

0.111

0.326

0.542

1.061

2.913

15.312

1.8

22.961

0.019

0.053

0.088

0.166

0.407

2.105

100

0.003

0.006

0.009

0.014

0.030

0.138

tan (s)

tab (s) = 464.711

6RA7097-4KS22 2600A/ 1Q 690V

6RA7097-4KV62 2600A/ 4Q 690V

6RA7097-4KS22 2600A/ 1Q 690V

6RA7097-4KV62 2600A/ 4Q 690V

1000,0

300

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

250
100,0

10,0
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
X=1,2

1,0

X=1,1

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

0
0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

9-70

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

6RA7096-4MS22 and 6RA7096-4MV62

Ig (%)

Tp (s)

X=1.8

X=1.5

X=1.4

X=1.3

X=1.2

X=1.1

15.179

36.286

50.532

72.696

108.661

171.633

13.535

33.236

46.728

68.046

103.368

166.627

11.699

29.743

42.323

62.547

96.944

160.390

9.704

25.819

37.308

56.138

89.220

152.616

7.598

21.493

31.693

48.770

79.963

142.865

5.461

16.824

25.515

40.434

68.919

130.486

1.1

259.007

3.463

11.939

18.869

31.177

55.862

114.490

1.2

140.205

1.891

7.097

11.988

21.172

40.737

93.340

1.3

85.952

0.837

2.942

5.468

10.948

23.938

64.882

1.4

56.076

0.220

0.690

1.194

2.490

7.221

28.203

1.5

38.461

0.084

0.259

0.436

0.858

2.325

12.736

1.8

14.839

0.014

0.037

0.062

0.118

0.292

1.432

100

0.002

0.003

0.004

0.006

0.011

0.043

6RA7096-4MS22 2200A/ 1Q 950V

6RA7096-4MV62 2200A/ 4Q 950V

tan (s)

tab (s) = 464.711

6RA7096-4MS22 2200A/ 1Q 950V

6RA7096-4MV62 2200A/ 4Q 950V

300

1000,0

X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4

Overload period in s with cycle time of 300s

250
100,0

10,0
X=1,8
X=1,5
X=1,4
X=1,3
1,0

X=1,2

X=1,3
X=1,2
X=1,1

200

150

100

X=1,1

0
0,1

0
0

90 100

Base-load current as % of rated DC current

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-71

Function descriptions

9.16

05.2007

Speed-dependent current limitation

The speed-dependent current limitation protects the commutator and brushes of the DC motor at high
speeds.
The necessary parameter settings (P104 to P107) can be taken from the motor rating plate.
The maximum operating speed of the motor (P108) must also be entered. This must be the same as
the actual maximum operating speed.
The actual maximum operating speed is determined by:
P143 with actual speed supplied by a pulse encoder,
P741 with actual speed supplied by an analog tacho,
P115 in operation without a tachometer.
Furthermore, the speed-dependent current limitation must be activated by setting P109 = 1!

CAUTION
Setting the speed-dependent current limitation function to the wrong value may cause excessive
loading of the commutator and brushes, resulting in a drastic reduction in brush life!

9-72

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

9.16.1

Setting the speed-dependent current limitation for motors with commutation

transition
Converter rated DC current
IA P
Invention point
Current limit
I10
I3

I rated
Irated
Prated

~1/n (commutation limit curve)

S1
I 20
S1

n rated

n1
nE

n motor

Motor rating plate data

nE = Point at which speed-dependent

current limitation intervenes

Permissible limit values

n3 = Maximum operating speed

I10 = 1.4 * I1
I20 = 1.2 * I2
The current limitation curve is determined by n1, I10, n2 and I20.
Parameters:
P104 = n1
P105 = I1 (used by unit to calculate I10)
P106 = n2
P107 = I2 (used by unit to calculate I20)
P108 = n3 (defines speed normalization)
P109 = 0 ... speed-dependent current limitation deactivated
1 ... speed-dependent current limitation activated
Example of a motor rating plate:
*

S H U N T -MOT.
1GG5162-0GG4 . -6HU7-Z
NRE
EN 60034
V
n1
1/MIN
n2
I1
A
I2
KW
46-380
50-1490
78.0-78.5
0.880-26.0
380
3400 / 4500
REG. 80.0 / 58.0
26.0 / 19.0
ERR.
V
A
THYR.: B6C LV= 0MH 380V/ 50HZ
SEP.
310 2.85
IP 23
IM B3
77/51 0.87/0.60
I.CL.F
Z: A11 G18 K01 K20
SEP. VENTIL.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-73

Function descriptions

9.16.2

05.2007

Setting of speed-dependent current limitation for motors without

commutation transition
Converter rated DC current
IA P

Invention point
Current limit

~1/n (commutation limit curve)

I 20
I rated
P rated = P 2

n rated

I1 = I 2

Irated S1

n1 = n2

n motor

Motor rating plate data

nE = Point at which speed-dependent

current limitation intervenes

Permissible limit values

n3 = Maximum operating speed

I20 = 1.2 * I2

Example of a motor rating plate:

S H U N T -MOT.
1GG5116-0FH40-6HU7-Z
NRE
EN 60034
V
n2 = n1
1/MIN
A
KW
46-380
50-2300
36.0-37.5
0.265-12.0
380
6000 REG.
38.5
I2 = I1
12.0
ERR.
V
A
THYR.: B6C LV= 0MH 380V/ 50HZ
SEP.
310 1.45
IP 23
IM B3
54
0.32
I.CL.F
Z: A11 G18 K01 K20
SEP. VENTIL.

9-74

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

9.17

Function descriptions

Automatic restart
The "Automatic restart" function is controlled by the setting in parameter P086:
P086 = 0
P086 = 0.1s to 2.0s

No automatic restart
Automatic restart" in seconds

The purpose of the "Automatic restart" function is to prevent the SIMOREG converter from switching
immediately to the "FAULT" state, but allow it to return to the "Run" state after the elimination of
certain fault conditions such as brief failures in supply voltages, brief undervoltage or overvoltage, very
high or very low line frequencies or in the case of an excessive deviation between the field current
actual value and setpoint.
The appropriate fault message is output only if one of the following fault conditions prevails
continuously for longer than the "Automatic restart time" set in P086 (maximum time delay within
which fault condition must be eliminated for "Automatic restart"):
F001

Failure of electronics supply in operation (5U1, 5W1)

F004

Armature supply phase failure (1U1, 1V1, 1W1)

F005

Fault in field circuit (field supply phase failure (3U1, 3W1) or

Ifield act < 50% Ifield set)

F006

Undervoltage (armature or field supply)

F007

Overvoltage (armature or field supply)

F008

Line frequency (armature or field supply) less than 45Hz

F009

Line frequency (armature or field supply) greater than 65 Hz

When one of the fault conditions associated with faults F003 to F006, F008, F009 is active and the
automatic restart time delay is still running, the converter dwells in operating state 04.0 (with armature
line voltage faults) or 05.0 (with field line voltage or field current faults).
Failures in the electronics supply lasting up to several 100 ms are bridged by the back-up power
supply. With longer failures, the failure time is measured by measuring the voltage across one
"discharge capacitor" and, if the failure has not lasted as long as the "Restart time" set in P086, the
converter restarted again immediately provided that the corresponding control signals (e.g. "Switchon", "Operating enable") are still applied.
When the "Switch-on", "Shutdown" and "Crawl" functions are edge-triggered (see P445 = 1), the
converter cannot be restarted automatically after the power supply backup has been used.

9.18

Field reversal

(also refer to Section 8 Function diagrams Sheet G200)

By reversing the current polarity in the field winding of the DC motor (i.e. through field reversal), a
drive which incorporates a SIMOREG 6RA70 single-quadrant converter (with only a single armature
conduction direction) will be able to operate in other quadrants of the speed/torque characteristic
(reversal of rotational direction and braking). Two contactors in the field circuit (1, 2) are required to
reverse the polarity of the field voltage.
The signal level of binectors B0260 ("Close field contactor 1") and B0261 ("Close field contactor 2")
are defined in an internal operating sequence involving functions "Direction of rotation reversal using
field reversal" and "Braking with field reversal". These binectors are used to control the two reversing
contactors for changing the field polarity. A snubber circuit must be installed in the field circuit.
Level of B0260:

0 No contactor control
1 Control for one contactor for switching through positive field direction.

Level of B0261:

0 No contactor control
1 Control for one contactor for switching through negative field direction.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-75

Function descriptions

05.2007

9.18.1 Direction of rotation reversal using field reversal

This function is controlled by the binector selected in P580.
The "Direction of rotation reversal using field reversal" has a switch function and defines the field
direction and, if a positive speed setpoint is applied, also the direction of rotation.
Level:

Positive field direction is selected

(Close field contactor 1 (B0260) = 1, Close field contactor 2
(B0261) = 0)

Negative field direction is selected

(Close field contactor 1 (B0260) = 0, Close field contactor 2
(B0261) = 1)

Changing the logic level of the binector controlling the "Direction of rotation reversal using field
reversal" function initiates an internal sequence which brakes the motor and accelerates it in the
opposite direction.
While the field reversal process is in progress, the logic level of the controlling binector is irrelevant,
i.e. once the function has commenced, it is completed without interruption. Only on completion is
another check made to establish whether the logic level of the controlling binector actually coincides
with the currently selected field direction.
Note:
Only positive speed setpoints are meaningful.
Sequence of control operations when "Direction of rotation reversal using field reversal" is
applied:
1.

Drive is rotating in rotational direction 1 (or is at standstill)

Logic level of binector controlling the "Direction of rotation reversal using field reversal" changes

Internal field reversal process takes place (only if a braking operation has not already been
activated by pushbutton function "Braking with field reversal"):
3.1 Wait for armature current IA = 0 and then armature pulse disable
(drive then dwells in operating state o1.4)
3.2 Disable field firing pulses (also causes K0268=0)
3.3 Wait for Ifield (K0265) < Ifield min (P394)
3.4 Waiting time according to P092.i001 (0.0 to 10.0 s, factory setting 3.0 s)
3.5 Open current field contactor (B0260 = 0 or B0261 = 0)
3.6 Waiting time according to P092.i002 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 0,2 s)
3.7 Close new field contactor (B0261 = 1 or B0260 = 1)
3.8 Reverse polarity of actual speed value (except when P083 = 3 ... EMF as actual speed
value)
3.9 Waiting time according to P092.i003 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 0,1 s)
3.10 Enable field firing pulses
3.11 Wait for Ifield (K0265) > Ifield set (K0268)*P398/100%
3.12 Waiting time according to P092.i004 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 3,0 s)
3.13 Enable armature firing pulses
(It is possible to exit operating mode o1.4)

Drive brakes and then accelerates in rotational direction 2 (or remains at standstill)

Note:
If the actual speed value polarity is reversed internally as a result of field reversal, P083 (but not
P083=3) is supplied with inverted signal values (see Section 8, Sheet G152). When the ramp-function
generator is in use, it is advisable to set P228=0 (no speed controller setpoint filtering). Otherwise,
initial braking along the current limit may occur in connection with the actual speed value polarity
reversal and setting of the ramp-function generator output (to (reversed) actual speed value (or to
value set in P639) in operating state o1.4).

9-76

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Function descriptions

9.18.2 Braking with field reversal

This function is controlled by the binector selected in P581.
"Braking with field reversal" has a pushbutton function.
If the logic level of the binector controlling the "Braking with field reversal" function = 1 (for at least
30 ms) and the converter is in an operating state o5 (line contactor closed), an internal process is
activated for braking the drive down to n < nmin The original field direction is then selected.
The motor cannot accelerate again in the original rotational direction until the braking command has
been cancelled (binector level = 0) and an acknowledgement given with "Shutdown" and "Switch-on".
Sequence of control operations when "Braking with field reversal" is applied:
1.

Drive rotates in direction 1

The binector controlling the "Braking with field reversal" function = 1 for more than 30 ms

Internal field reversal process takes place (only if the line contactor is closed (in operating state
of o5) and the drive is not already in braking mode. Braking is detected by a negative internal
actual speed (resulting from reversal of the real actual speed polarity in the negative field
direction):
3.1 Wait for armature current IA = 0 and then armature pulse disable
(drive then dwells in operating state o1.4)
3.2 Disable field firing pulses (also causes K0268=0)
3.3 Wait for Ifield (K0265) < Ifield min (P394)
3.4 Waiting time according to P092.i001 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 3,0 s)
3.5 Open current field contactor (B0260 = 0 or B0261 = 0)
3.6 Waiting time according to P092.i002 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 0,2 s)
3.7 Close new field contactor (B0261 = 1 or B0260 = 1)
3.8 Reverse polarity of actual speed value (except when P083 = 3 ... EMF as actual speed
value)
3.9 Waiting time according to P092.i003 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 0,1 s)
3.10 Enable field firing pulses
3.11 Wait for Ifield (K0265) > Ifield set (K0268)*P398/100%
3.12 Waiting time according to P092.i004 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 3,0 s)
3.13 Enable armature firing pulses (It is possible to exit operating mode o1.4)

Internal sequence for braking the drive:

4.1 Internal setting of nset = 0 at the ramp function generator input, the drive brakes
4.2 Wait for n < nmin (P370)
4.3 Wait for armature current IA = 0 and thus armature pulse disable
(drive then switches to operating state o7.2)
4.4 Wait for cancellation of braking command through binector level = 0 (as long as
level = 1, drive is held in operating state o7.2)

Internal sequence for switching over to original field direction (only if the current field direction is
not the same as the direction requested by the "Direction of rotation reversal using field
reversal" function):
5.1 Wait for armature current IA = 0 and then armature pulse disable
(drive then dwells in operating state o1.4)
5.2 Disable field firing pulses (also causes K0268=0)
5.3 Wait for Ifield (K0265) < Ifield min (P394)
5.4 Waiting time according to P092.i001 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 3,0 s)
5.5 Open current field contactor (B0260 = 0 or B0261 = 0)
5.6 Waiting time according to P092.i002 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 0,2 s)
5.7 Close new field contactor (B0261 = 1 or B0260 = 1)
5.8 Reverse polarity of actual speed value (except when P083 = 3 ... EMF as actual speed
value)
5.9 Waiting time according to P092.i003 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 0,1 s)
5.10 Enable field firing pulses
5.11 Wait for Ifield (K0265) > Ifield set (K0268)*P398/100%
5.12 Waiting time according to P092.i004 (0,0 to 10,0 s, factory setting 3,0 s)
5.13 Armature firing pulses are possible again

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

9-77

Function descriptions
6.

05.2007

Drive is in operating state o7.2

Drive can be accelerated in original rotational direction after acknowledgement by an external
"Shutdown" and "Switch-on" command.

Please also read the Note at the end of the section 9.18.1.

Delay times for field reversal (parameter P092)

P092.004
P394
P092.001

K268 * P398

Field contactor 1

closed

B260

open
P092.002

Field contactor 2
B261

P092.003
closed

open

Bild 9.18.1

9-78

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Status description of some bits of status word ZSW1

Bit 6
Switch-on inhibit
Bit 5 (low active)
Fast stop (OFF3)
Bit 4 (low active)
Voltage disconnect (OFF2)
Bit 3
Fault
Bit 2
Run
Bit 1
Ready
Bit 0
Ready to switch-on

9.19

Function descriptions

Operating status
M0, MI or MII
(=RUN)

Code
I ,II ,- -

Waiting for operating enable

(=READY)

reserved

Test phase

Wait for voltage

(armature)

Wait for field current

Wait status before closing

the line contactor

Wait for switch-on

(=READY TO SWITCH-ON)

Wait for acknowledgement

of the switch-on inhibit

Fast stop (OFF3)

Voltage disconnect (OFF2)

o10

Fault

o11

Electronics not
initialized

o12

I
II
--

0 1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0 1

9-79

Function descriptions

9.20

05.2007

12-pulse series connection

This function is facilitated by the parameter setting P079 = 2 and is available in SW 2.1 and later.
Two SIMOREG units with identical power are connected in series on the output side and supply a DC
motor.
These two units, which are parameterized as a 12-pulse series master and a 12-pulse series slave,
are coupled via the paralleling interface and fed with electrically isolated line voltages of identical
magnitude with a 30 degree phase displacement.
The power sections of both converters must be supplied with a clockwise phase sequence. The threephase system connected on the slave device must lag the system on the master device by 30
degrees.
Balancing resistors must be connected in parallel with the two series-connected single converters.
This is essential to ensure that with low armature currents, or if the armature current = 0, the total
armature voltage is symmetrically divided between the two individual units. It also enables the
armature voltage and the EMF to be correctly calculated internally.
The parameter setting P079 = 2 has the following effect:

The firing pulses of the 12-pulse series slave device are output 30 degrees later than the firing
pulses of the master device. Long pulses (pulse duration up to approx. 0.1 ms before next
pulse) are output every 30 degrees on the armature gating unit of both devices, to enable
current to flow if the armature current pulsates.

Precontrol for the armature current controller is switched over from 6-pulse operation to 12pulse series connection operation. The EMF input value for precontrol (K0122, selection with
P162, P193) must contain half the total EMF of the motor.

P110 and P111 only have an effect on half the set total motor value. The resistive + inductive
total armature voltage drop is automatically halved for the internal EMF calculation (K0123,
K0124, K0287). If the total armature voltage is symmetrically divided between the two
individual units, then half the total EMF of the motor is calculated. Since the EMF setpoint for
field weakening control (K0289) is also calculated with half the armature circuit resistance
P110/2 (K0289 = P101 - P100*P110 / 2), half the actual rated armature voltage of the motor
must be parameterized at P101.

The slave device must be disconnected from the line and bridged on the output side in order to
perform an optimization run for the current controller and precontrol (P051 = 25) on the 12-pulse
series master device. U800 = 0 must be set on the master device for the duration of the current
controller and precontrol optimization run. The total armature circuit values P110 and P111 for the
motor are set correctly after the current controller and precontrol have been optimized. P156 is also
correct. Only the automatically calculated current controller P gain P155 still needs to be manually
halved. In addition, P826.01 to 06 must be set to 0.
For details of the 12-pulse series connection, see the description of applications entitled 12-pulse
operation (see Section 17).

9-80

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Faults and alarms

When a fault or alarm message is activated, it is displayed both on the simple operator control panel
(PMU) and on the OP1S user-friendly operator control panel (see also Section 7.2, Operator control
panels).
An alarm stops being displayed immediately the cause of the alarm signal has been eliminated.
A fault message must be cancelled by pressing the P key on the PMU or Reset key on the OP1S
(panel must be in "Operational display" status) as soon as the cause has been eliminated.

NOTE
Setting parameters when fault or alarm message is active
On the PMU:
You can shift an active fault message or alarm "to the background" by pressing the P key and
Higher key simultaneously on the PMU.
If you do not press any key on the PMU within a 30 s period, the fault message or active alarm in
the background is automatically displayed again.
You can fetch a message back to the foreground earlier by pressing the P key and Lower key
simultaneously on the PMU when the parameter number level is selected.
On the OP1S:
You can set parameters normally even if a fault message or alarm is active.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-1

Faults / Alarms

10.1

05.2007

Fault messages

10.1.1 General information about faults

Fault message display:
On the PMU: F (fault) and a three-digit number. The red LED (Fault) lights up.
On the OP1S: On bottom line of operational display: The red LED (Fault) lights up.
Only one current fault message can be displayed at a time, i.e. other simultaneously active faults are
ignored.
Many fault messages (see List of Fault Messages) can only be active in certain operating states.
The system responses to a fault are as follows:

The armature current is reduced, the firing pulses are disabled and the SIMOREG unit switches to
operating state o11.0 (fault)

Fault message is displayed on the operator panel (PMU, OP1S)

B0106 ( = status word 1, bit 3) is set and B0107 cancelled (see also alarm bits for special faults
such as undervoltage, overtemperature, external faults, etc.)

The following parameters are refreshed:

r047 fault diagnostic memory
(The displayed values are decimal. For bit-serial evaluation, the values must be
converted from decimal to binary notation, e.g. to be able to determine the
relevant terminal in the case of F018)
r049 Fault time
r947 fault memory, see also r947 in Section 11, Parameter List
r949 fault value
(The displayed values are decimal. For bit-serial evaluation, the values must be
converted from decimal to binary notation, e.g. to be able to determine the
relevant terminal in the case of F018)
P952 number of faults

A text is also displayed for each individual fault in parameter r951 (fault text list). These texts can, for
example, be displayed on the OP1S.
If a fault is not acknowledged before the electronics supply voltage is switched off, then fault message
F040 will be displayed when the supply is next switched on.

10.1.2 List of fault messages

NOTE
Further information about the causes of fault messages
When a fault message is activated, values providing more information about the fault cause are
stored in parameter r047. Where the values can be interpreted by the user, they are included in
the following list of fault messages.
The value in r047.001 is referred to as the "fault value". This is also stored in r949 which also
contains the fault values belonging to older fault messages. The values in r047 are overwritten
when the next fault message occurs.
Values for r047 which are not included in the list below can help a SIEMENS specialist to locate a
fault cause. For this reason, all indices of parameter r047 should be read out whenever a fault
message occurs, even if the meaning of the individual indices of parameter r047 is not specified
for every fault message listed below.
Please note: Before you contact SIEMENS with any query regarding a fault message, please
make a note of the contents of all indices of parameter r047.

10-2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

10.1.2.1 Supply faults

F001

Failure of electronics power supply

(active in all operating states)
Failure of the electronics supply voltage (terminals 5U1, 5W1, 5N1) in RUN state for longer than the restart time set in
parameter P086 or the electronics are operating on undervoltage.
Possible fault causes:

F004

Line contactor has opened in RUN state

Brief supply failure
Supply voltage too low

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

i002 Duration of actual supply failure in 1/10 seconds

Electronics supply voltage in RUN has been interrupted

for longer than setting in P086

Supply failure prewarning responds periodically

Supply failure prewarning is active for longer than 1.28 s

Phase failure in armature supply

(active in operating states of o4)
The supply voltage RMS value, calculated from the area of each supply half-wave (rectified average value * peak factor), must be
greater than the response value for phase failure monitoring

P078.001

P353
100%

The distance between two identical supply zero passages of a phase must not exceed 450 degrees.
If one of these two conditions remains unfulfilled for longer than the restart time set in P086, a fault message is activated.
After switch-on, the converter waits in operating states o4 and o5 together for a period not exceeding the setting in P089 for
voltage to appear at the power terminals (and for field current) before activating the fault message.
Possible fault causes:

Parameter P353 is incorrectly set

Armature phase has failed
Line contactor opened in operation
Fuse has blown on three-phase side in armature circuit
Fuse has blown in power section
Interruption in a thyristor firing pulse cable (auxiliary cathodes at connectors X12, X14, X16 are voltage carriers).

Fault value:
1

Voltage failure has occurred in armature supply (1U1, 1V1, 1W1) (when P086=0)

Delay time set in parameter P089 has expired in operating state o4

Fuse has blown in power section

Voltage failure has lasted longer than period set in P086 (if this is >0)

The "Main contactor checkback" (control word 2 bit 31) [see also P691] did not switch to "1" before the time set in P095 ran
out, or switched back to "0" during operation [V1.8 and later].

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-3

Faults / Alarms

05.2007

Fault

Description

No.
F005

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault in the field circuit

(active in operating states of o5)
The line voltage RMS value calculated from the area of each network half-wave (rectification average value * peak factor) must
be greater than the response value for phase failure monitoring

P078.002

P353
100%

The distance between two identical network zero passages of the voltage for the field converter must not exceed 450 degrees.
The actual field current K0265 equals < 50% of the required field current setpoint K0268 for more than 500ms. This monitoring
function is effective only if the field current setpoint corresponds to >2% of the converter rated field current.
[In SW 1.9 and later, the percentage (50%) and time (500ms) can be altered in P396 and P397 respectively]
If one of the fault conditions described persists in operation (or o4) for longer than the restart time set in P086, the fault
message is output.
After the converter is switched on, it waits in operating state o5 for a period not exceeding the setting in P089 for the field supply
voltage or sufficiently high field current before this fault message is activated.
Monitoring for timeout as the field decays or builds up after initiation of field reversal (fault values 6 and 7) is not implemented
until SW 1.7 and later.
Possible fault causes

Threshold for phase failure (P353) set incorrectly

Undervoltage / overvoltage threshold (P351, P352) set incorrectly
Field phase failed
Line contactor opened during operation
Fuse blown in the field circuit
Field current controller and/or field current precontrol not optimized or badly optimized (check P112, P253 to P256; possibly
execute current controller optimization)
Check P396 (field current monitoring threshold) and P397 (field current monitoring time)
If the fault value is 6: Offset fault in the actual field current value sensing, relevant parameter: P825.i01-i03 (Offset depends
on P076.i02) or P394, P395 (Threshold and hysteresis for message I_field < I_field_min) must be checked
If the fault value is 7: Circuit for the "new" field direction is interrupted (e.g. because the contactor for "new" field direction
does not pick up), P398, P399 (Threshold and hysteresis for message I_field < I_field_x) must be checked

Fault value:

10-4

Voltage failure occurred in the field supply (terminals 3U1 and 3W1) (if P086 = 0)

Delay time according to P089 elapsed in state o5.1. Wait until the voltage and frequency at the field power section are
within the tolerance range (P351, P352, P353, P363, P364).

Delay time according to P089 elapsed in state o5.0

Wait until IField act (K0265) > 50% of the instantaneous field current setpoint K0268 [as of SW 1.9, can be altered by
means of P396] and until "I Field extern > I f min" (see P265)

After P086 > 0 has elapsed (time for automatic restart) in operating state o4:
Voltage failure in the field supply or
IField act (K0265) < 50% IField set (K0268) for longer than 500 ms [as of SW 1.9, can be altered by means of P396 or
P397]
or "I Field extern > I f min" (see P265)

When P086 = 0 (no automatic restart) in operating state o4:

IField act (K0265) < 50% IField set (K0268) for longer than 500 ms [as of SW 1.9, can be altered by means of P396 or
P397]
or "I Field extern > I f min" (see P265)
If field reduction before field reversal, I_field I_field_min (P394) is not reached within 30 s

If field build-up after field reversal, I_field > I_field_x (P398) is not reached within 30 s

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.
F006

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Undervoltage
(active in operating states of o4)
The voltage across terminals 1U1, 1V1 or 1W1 and 3U1, 3W1 was lower than the response threshold for longer than the "restart
time" set at P086 and the delay time according to P361 has expired.
Response threshold for armature supply voltage:

P078.001 (1+

P351
)
100%

Response threshold for field supply voltage:

P078.002 (1+

P351
)
100%

Possible fault causes

F007

Line undervoltage
Monitoring values set too sensitively or incorrectly (P351, P078)

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Undervoltage has occurred (when P086=0)

i002 Number of phase that has activated fault message

0 ... Phase UV
1 ... Phase VW
2 ... Phase WU
3 ... Phase field
i003 Incorrect voltage value (normalized to 16384)

Undervoltage persists for longer than time set in

parameter P086 (if this is set to >0)

Overvoltage
(active in operating states of o4)
The voltage across terminals 1U1, 1V1 or 1W1 and 3U1, 3W1 was higher than the response threshold for longer than the "restart
time" set at P086 and the delay time according to P362 has expired.
Response threshold for armature supply voltage:

P078.001 (1+

P352
)
100%

Response threshold for field supply voltage:

P078.002 (1+

P352
)
100%

Possible fault causes

Line overvoltage
Monitoring values set too sensitively or incorrectly (P352, P078)

NOTICE
This monitoring function is deactivated in the delivery state. It can be activated via parameter P820.

F008

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Overvoltage has occurred

002 Number of phase that has activated fault message

0 ... Phase UV
1 ... Phase VW
2 ... Phase WU
3 ... Phase field
i003 Incorrect voltage value (normalized to 16384)

Undervoltage persists for longer than time set in

parameter P086 (if this is >0)

Line frequency less than the minimum line frequency acc. to parameter P363
(active in operating states of o5)
This fault message is activated if the line frequency is less than the minimum line frequency (for longer than the restart time set
in parameter P086).
Note: Up to software version 1.7 the threshold for activation of the fault message (minimum line frequency) is 45Hz.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-5

Faults / Alarms
Fault

05.2007
Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault value:

F009

Frequency of the armature supply < minimum line frequency

Frequency of the field supply < minimum line frequency

Line frequency less than the minimum line frequency for longer than set in parameter P086 (if >0)

Line frequency greater than the maximum line frequency acc. to parameter P364
(active in operating states of o5)
This fault message is activated if the line frequency is greater than the maximum line frequency (for longer than the restart time
set in parameter P086).
Note: Up to software version 1.7 the threshold for activation of the fault message (maximum line frequency) is 65Hz
Fault value:
1

Frequency of the armature supply > maximum line frequency

Frequency of the field supply > maximum line frequency

Line frequency greater than the maximum line frequency for longer than set in parameter P086 (if >0)

10.1.2.2 Interface error

F011

Telegram failure at GSST1

when P780 = 2:
USS telegram failure at G-SST1
(active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P787.
Possible fault causes

F012

Cable break
Error in USS master

Telegram failure at GSST2

when P790 = 2:
USS telegram failure at G-SST2
(active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P797.
Possible fault causes

Cable break
Error in USS master

when P790 = 4 or 5:
Peer-to-peer telegram failure at G-SST2
(active in operating states of o6)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P797.
Possible fault causes

10-6

Interruption in connecting cable

EMC interference on connecting cable
P797 is set too low

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.
F013

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Telegram failure at GSST3

when P800 = 2:
USS telegram failure to G-SST3
(active from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P807.
Possible fault causes

Cable break
Error in USS master

when P800 = 4 or 5:
Peer-to-peer telegram failure at G-SST3
(active in operating states of o6)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter P807.
Possible fault causes
Interruption in connecting cable
EMC interference on connecting cable
P807 is set too low
F014

Telegram failure at paralleling interface

(active when U800 = 1 or 2 from the first receipt of a valid protocol in all operating states)
After the receipt of the first valid protocol, no further telegrams have been received within the time period set in parameter U807.
Possible fault causes

F015

Interruption in connecting cable

EMC interference on connecting cable
U807 is set too low

Telegram failure on one SIMOLINK board

(active when U741 > 0 as soon as the first valid telegram is received)
After receipt of one valid telegram, no further valid telegrams have arrived within the period set in parameter U741.
Possible fault causes

Break in connecting cable

Parameter setting change during telegram exchange (for parameters see Section 11 "Configuration of SIMOLINK board)
U741 is set to low

Fault value:
st

1 Telegram failure on 1 SLB

2 Reserved
F016

Hardware fault on expansion board EB1

Fault value:

F017

Fault on first EB1

Fault on second EB1

Hardware fault on expansion board EB2

Fault value:
1

Fault on first EB2

Fault on second EB2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-7

Faults / Alarms
Fault

Description

No.
F018

05.2007

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Short circuit or overloading of binary outputs

(active in all operating states)
Possible fault causes

Short circuit or overload at terminals 46, 48, 50 or 52 and 26 or 34

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

i002 Bit 8 = 1:
Bit 9 = 1:
Bit 10 = 1:
Bit 11 = 1:
Bit 12 = 1:
Bit 13 = 1:

Short circuit or overload at binary outputs

Overload at terminal 46
Overload at terminal 48
Overload at terminal 50
Overload at terminal 52
Overload at terminal 26 (15 V output)
Overload at terminal 34, 44 and/or 210
(24 V output)

NOTICE
This monitoring function is deactivated in the delivery state. It can be activated via parameter P820.

10.1.2.3 External faults

F019

F020

Fault message from free function block FB286

(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.005 is in the state log.1
2
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.006 is in the state log.1
3
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.007 is in the state log.1
4
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.008 is in the state log.1
Fault message from free function block FB287
(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.005 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.006 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.007 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.008 is in the state log.1

F021

External fault 1
(active in all operating states)

F022

External fault 2
(active in all operating states)

F023

Fault message from free function block FB2

(active in all operating states)

Bit 15 in control word 1 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 001

Bit 26 in control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 002

Fault value:
1
2
3
4
F024

the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.001 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.002 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.003 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U100 Index.004 is in the state log.1

Fault message from free function block FB3

(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

10-8

the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.001 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.002 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.003 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U101 Index.004 is in the state log.1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

10.1.2.4 Fault messages from motor sensors

F025

Brush length too short

(active in operating states of o3)
When parameter P495=2 (binary sensing of brush length), fault message at log.0 signal (longer than 10s) at terminal 211
Possible fault causes

F026

Encoder for brush length has responded

Open circuit in encoder cable

Bearings in bad condition

(active in operating states of o6)
When parameter P496=2 (bearing condition sensing) fault message at log. 1 signal (longer than 2 s) at terminal 212
Possible fault causes

F027

Encoder for bearing condition has responded

Air-flow monitoring of motor fan

(active in operating states of < o6)
When parameter P497=2 (air-flow monitoring), fault message at log 0 signal (longer than 40s) at terminal 213
Possible fault causes

F028

Encoder for fan monitoring has responded

Open circuit in encoder cable

Motor overtemperature
(active in operating states of o6)
When parameter P498=2 (thermostat connected), fault message at log. 0 signal (longer than 10s) at terminal 214
Possible fault causes

F029

Thermostat for monitoring motor temperature has responded

Open circuit in encoder cable

Motor overtemperature
(active in all operating states)
Select via

P493=2 or 3 (temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23) or

P494=2 or 3 (temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205)

When parameter P490.01=1 (KTY84 at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=1 (KTY84 at terminals 204 / 205):
The fault message is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the value set in parameter P492.
When parameter P490.01=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals
204/ 205):
The fault message is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the response value of the selected PTC thermistor.
Fault value:
1
2

Fault activation through temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23

Fault activation through temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205

10.1.2.5 Drive faults

NOTICE
The monitoring functions F031, F035, F036, and F037 are deactivated in the delivery state.
They can be activated via parameter P820.
F030

Commutation failure or overcurrent has occurred or test command has been issued via U583
(active in all operating states)
Possible error causes

Mains voltage dip in regenerative feedback mode

Current control loop not optimized

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

The blocking voltage time area for the commutating

thyristor pair was too small

for i001= 1 to 3 and 5, i002 to i006 are valid

The current crest curve breaks upwards

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

for i001= 4, i002 to i015 is invalid

10-9

Faults / Alarms
Fault

05.2007
Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
3

The maximum current value was higher than 250% of the

actual rated device current according to r072i002

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

i002 Delay angle (K0100) in case of error
i003 Actual EMF (K0287) in case of error
i004 Trigger circuitry diagnostics (K0989) in case of error
i005 Actual field current (K0265) in case of error
i006 Number of pulses (K0105) in case of error

F031

A paralleled SIMOREG DC-MASTER has detected a

commutation failure or overcurrent

test command has been issued via U583

Speed controller monitoring

(active in operating states of , I, II)
The monitor responds when the difference between the connectors selected in P590 and P591 (factory setting: Setpoint/actual
value difference of speed controller) exceeds the limit set in parameter P388 for longer than the time set in parameter P390.
Possible fault causes

F032

Open control loop

Controller not optimized
P590 or P591 is not correctly parameterized
SIMOREG CCP not ready
(active in operating states of < o4.0)
Possible error causes

No connection or cable break at X172 (G-SST2)

No connection or cable break at X165 (paralleling interface master) in a parallel connection
No connection or cable break at X29_PAR or X30_PAR (extinction-pulse interface) in a parallel connection
Hardware defective in charging circuit of extinguishing capacitors
Blown fuse in the line-side or motor-side armature circuit
Blown fuse in the precharging circuit for the chopper capacitors
Required cooling phase for chopper resistors still in progress
MLFB (order number) data of the SIMOREG CCP (n570, n571, n572) are invalid or nonexistent

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

1
2

for i001= 1 to 12, i002 to i006 are valid

3
4
5
6
7
11
12
20

No voltage at U, V, W terminals of SIMOREG CCP

Voltage at C-D on CCP does not match voltage at C-D on
SIMOREG DC-MASTER
Surge absorbing capacitors of SIMOREG CCP have not
reached setpoint voltage
Paralleling interface cable is not connected to SIMOREG
CCP assigned to paralleling master
No connection between SIMOREG DC-MASTER and
SIMOREG CCP via G-SST2 serial interface
(r799.i001 is not incremented)
No connection between parallel SIMOREG CCPs
Contents of technical data memory on SIMOREG CCP
(MLFB, rated values, serial number) invalid
I2t value (n575) of voltage chopper 1 is too high (> 100%)
I2t value (n576) of voltage chopper 2 is too high (> 50%)
Chopper capacitors not completely precharged in time
set with P089 or the condition in accordance with fault
value 5 is satisfied

for i001= 20, only i002 is valid

i002 SIMOREG CCP status (K0574) in case of error
i003 I2t value of chopper 1 (K0575) in case of error
i004 I2t value of chopper 2 (K0576) in case of error
i005 Actual armature voltage (r038) in case of error in 0.1 V
for i005 > 32767: UARMATURE [V] = (65536-r047i005)/10
i006 effective time until the fault initiation in 20 ms

10.1.2.6 External faults

F033

Fault message from free function block FB4

(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

F034

the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.001 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.002 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.003 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.004 is in the state log.1

Fault message from free function block FB5

(active in all operating states)
Fault value:

10-10

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
1
2
3
4

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.001 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.002 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.003 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.004 is in the state log.1

10.1.2.7 Drive faults

F035

Drive is blocked
(active in operating states of , I, II)
This monitoring function responds if the following conditions are fulfilled for longer than the period set in parameter P355:

Positive or negative torque or armature current limit

The armature current is higher than 1% of the converter rated armature DC current
The actual speed is less than 0.4% of maximum speed

Possible fault causes

F036

Drive is blocked

No armature current is flowing

(active in operating states of , I, II)
This monitoring function responds if the armature firing angle is at the rectifier stability limit for more than 500 ms and the
armature current is less than 1% of the converter rated armature DC current.
Possible fault causes

F037

Armature circuit is open

(e.g. DC fuses have blown, open circuit, etc.)
Rectifier stability limit G (P150) is incorrectly set
Drive is operating at G limit (e.g. due to supply undervoltage)
EMF is too high because maximum speed setting is too high,
refer to P083, P115, P143, P741)
EMF is too high because field weakening is not selected (refer to P082)
EMF is too high because field current is set too high (refer to P102)
EMF is too high because transition speed for field weakening is set too high (refer to P101) ??

I2t motor monitor has responded

(active in operating states of , I, II)

This monitoring function responds when an I2t value is reached which corresponds to the final temperature at 110% of the rated
motor armature current.
Possible fault causes

F038

Parameter P114 is incorrectly set

Drive has been operating for too long at >110% of rated motor armature current

Overspeed
(active in operating states of , I, II)
This fault message is activated if the actual speed value (selected in P595) exceeds the positive (P380) or negative (P381)
threshold by 0.5%.
Possible fault causes

F039

Lower current limit has been input

Current-controlled operation
P512, P513 are set too low
Tachometer cable contact fault in operation close to maximum speed
I2t power section monitor has responded
(active in operating states of , I, II)
This monitoring function responds if the calculated I2t value of the power section reaches the permissible value for the power
section concerned (see also P075).
Possible fault causes

Drive has been operating at overload for too long

Parameter P075 is incorrectly set
Parameter P077 is incorrectly set

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-11

Faults / Alarms

05.2007

Fault

Description

No.
F040

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Electronics supply disconnected in active fault status

(active in all operating states)
This fault message is activated if the electronics power supply has been disconnected, even though a fault was displayed and not
yet acknowledged.
Possible fault causes

Not all fault messages have been acknowledged

Fault value:
Last active fault message
F041

Ambiguous selection of parameter set or ramp-function generator

(active in all operating states)

While an optimization run is in progress, the function data set selection must not be changed. Fault F041 is displayed if
another, different function data set is selected while an optimization run is being executed.

Check whether ramp-function generator parameter set 1 or 2 or 3 (parameters P303 to P314) is clearly selected. If parameter
sets 2 and 3 are selected simultaneously for more than 0.5s, then fault message F041 is displayed. While the parameter set
selection is ambiguous, the system continues to apply the last clearly identified ramp-function generator parameters.

Possible fault causes

P676 or P677 (selection of binectors which determine the active function data set in control word 2, bits 16 and 17) is
incorrectly set
P637 or P638 (selection of binectors which determine ramp-function generator setting) is incorrectly set

Fault value:

F042

The selection of the function data set has been changed during an optimization run

Ambiguous selection of ramp-function generator parameter set

Tachometer fault
(active in operating states of , I, II)
A check is performed every 20ms to ensure that

Actual speed (K0179)

Actual EMF (K0287)

is > +5%

If the check result is incorrect for 4 times in succession, the fault message is activated.
The following rule applies:
100% actual speed
100% actual EMF

= maximum speed
= ideal average DC voltage at 0, i.e. when the thyristor bridge is fully gated

The ideal DC voltage average value at = 0 is

P078.001

The monitoring function is effective only if the EMF > a % of

3 2

P078.001

3 2

"a" is a percentage that can be set in parameter P357 (default setting 10%).
The monitoring function is effective only if the armature current is > 2% of the converter rated DC current set in r072.002.
Possible fault causes

10-12

Open circuit in tachometer or pulse encoder cable.

Tachometer of pulse encoder cable incorrectly connected.
Pulse encoder supply has failed.
Polarity for actual speed value (P743) is incorrectly set.
Armature circuit data (P110 und P111) are incorrectly set (execute current controller optimization run).
Tachometer or pulse encoder defective
Pulse encoder supply voltage is incorrectly set (P140)
The field polarity is not reversed by the external hardware when the field is reversed.

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Open circuit in tachometer or pulse encoder cable

i002 Actual speed value (K0179) in case of fault

Polarity of tachometer or pulse encoder is incorrect

i003 Actual EMF value (K0287) in case of fault

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.
F043

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

EMF too high for braking operation

(active in operating states of , I, II)
This fault message is activated if the following 5 conditions are fulfilled when a torque direction reversal is requested (selection of
MI or MII):

P272=0 (fault message is parameterized and not alarm + field weakening)

A parameterized, additional, torque-free interval (P160 0) has expired
Parallel drive is ready for engagement of the new torque direction
The absolute value of the armature current (K0118, filtered with P190) requested in the new torque direction is >1% of
P072.002
The calculated firing angle (K0101) for the armature current requested for the new torque direction is >165 degrees or >P151
when P192=1

Possible fault causes

No speed-dependent field weakening" (P081=0) is parameterized even though operation in the field weakening range is
needed for the requested maximum speed
Note:
In motor operation, it is possible to reach EMF values corresponding to the peak of the phase-to-phase supply voltage at a
firing angle of G=30 (rectifier stability limit P150) and low armature currents.
Setpoint EMF for field weakening operation too high (parameter P101 is set too high)
Supply voltage dip
EMF controller or field current controller is not optimized, possibly resulting in excessive EMF on power-up.

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Calculated firing angle (armature) before limitation (K0101)

i002 Instantaneously measured actual EMF (K0287)

i003 Armature current controller setpoint (K0118)

F044

F046

A slave connected to the paralleling interface is not operating

(active when U800 = 1 or 2 and U806>10 (master) after receipt of the first valid protocol in operating states , I, II)
Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 006:

A fault message is active on a slave

i00x = Status word 1 from slave x

A slave is not in operation (e.g. because its enable input

is set to "0")

Analog select input for main setpoint (terminals 4 and 5) faulty

(active in operating states of o6)
This fault message is activated when P700=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and an input current of less than 2mA is flowing.
Possible fault causes

F047

Open circuit in supply cable

P700 is incorrectly set

Analog select input 1 (terminals 6 and 7) is faulty

(active in operating states of o6)
This fault message is activated when P710=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and an input current of less than 2mA is flowing.
Possible fault causes

Open circuit in supply cable

P710 is incorrectly set

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-13

Faults / Alarms
Fault

Description

No.
F048

05.2007

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault in measuring channel for digital speed sensing using pulse encoder
(active in all operating states)
1. Disturbances on encoder cables:
Faults on the encoder cables (transitions to 0 with a 1 signal or to 1 with a 0 signal) are signalled as a rotational direction change
by the evaluation circuit. Frequent changes in rotational direction can occur only at speeds around 0.
The fault message is activated if 10 consecutive pulse encoder signal evaluations identify direction of rotation change at a
speed of 48 rev/min and an EMF > threshold (see below).
2. Pulse encoder defective:
The fault message is activated if, at an EMF > threshold (see below) 10 consecutive pulse encoder signal evaluations identify
implausible characteristics of these signals (i.e. frequent rotational direction changes, edges too close together, failure of an
encoder cable or short circuit between two encoder cables).
Possible fault causes

EMC-related interference on a pulse encoder signal (terminals 28 to 31)

Pulse encoder defective
Interruption in an encoder cable
Short circuit between an encoder cable and the supply voltage or another encoder cable
P110 or P111 is incorrectly set (resulting in incorrectly calculation of EMF)

Note:
When the speed encoder is operating correctly, signal sequences, which are characteristic of a faulty pulse encoder or
disturbances on the pulse encoder cables, may occur continuously at the input terminals (e.g. continuous changes in rotational
direction or short pulse intervals) at about 0 speed, e.g. as the result of slight oscillation around a bright/dark transition on the
speed encoder disk).
For this reason, fault F048 is not activated until the EMF > 10% of

P078.001

3 2
.

Fault value:
1

Disturbances on encoder cables

Defective pulse encoder

10.1.2.8 Start-up faults

F050

Optimization run not possible

(active in all operating states)
A fault has occurred during an optimization run.

NOTE
The contents of r047, Index 002 to 016, can provide specialists with more detailed information about fault causes. For this
reason, please read out and document all the indices associated with this fault and pass them on when you contact Siemens for
help.
Fault value:
1

Armature current is too low when =30 and EMF=0.

(average armature current <75% of IA, motor or <75% of IA, rated)
Possible cause:
Armature circuit interrupted
High-resistance load
P150 (Alpha G limit) has been set to excessively high value

It was not possible to determine the armature circuit resistance (P110) because the armature current was 37.5 % of P100
in fewer than 20 of the 150 firing cycles of the measuring phase.
Possible cause:
Armature current of 37.5% of P100 (I A, motor) is no longer possible (although a current of 75% of P100 was already
flowing, maybe a fuse has blown).

Armature current peaks are too small at =30 and EMF=0

(armature current peak value <50% of IA, motor or <50% of IA,rated)
Possible cause:
Armature circuit inductance is too high (field supply from armature terminals)
P150 (Alpha G limit) has been set to excessively high value
Possible remedy:
Reduce P100 (IA,motor) while this optimization run is in progress

10-14

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
4

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

The armature circuit inductance (P111) cannot be determined from the sampled values of the armature current and line
voltage of the armature current crest last generated
Possible cause:
P100 (IA,motor) or r072.i002 (IA,rated) very much smaller than actual motor rated current of the armature
LA >327.67mH (armature circuit inductance too large)
P100 (IA,motor) very much smaller than r072.i002 (IA,rated)
Armature circuit short-circuited

Offset adjustment of actual field current sensing is not possible

(value detected for P825 is outside permissible value range)
Possible cause:
Fault in actual field current sensing circuit
(defective A7004 gating board or A7001 electronics board)

The field circuit resistance (P112) is indeterminable

(the actual field current does not reach the internally specified setpoint of 95% of P102 as a result of P112 variation)
Possible cause:
RA >3276.7
Fault in actual field current sensing circuit (defective gating board or A7001 electronics board)
The command Inject standstill field is applied
P102 is set too high
A thyristor in the field bridge is not firing

80% of rated EMF (K287=P101 P100 * P110) cannot be reached within 15s (or maximum of the three set acceleration
times)
Possible cause:
Acceleration time (P303, P307, P311) is set too low
P101 does not match the set maximum speed (UA at nmax < P101) or setting for P102 is too low
The command Ramp-function generator enable=0 or Ramp-function generator stop=1

Field current control loop is not stable enough to record field characteristics
(30s after injection of internal field current setpoint, actual field current is deviating by more than (0.39% of P102 + 0.15 %
of r073.002) from the setpoint)
Possible cause:
Field current controller or field current precontrol is not optimized or optimized badly (check P112, P253 to P256 or
execute a current controller optimization run (P051=25))

Field characteristic is not uniform

(i.e. in spite of field current setpoint reduction, the flux values of this measuring point calculated from EMF and actual speed
are rising)
Possible cause:
High armature reaction and sharp load variations during recording of field characteristics
Field current controller or field current precontrol is not optimized or optimized badly (check P112, P253 to P256 or
execute a current controller optimization run (P051=25))

A lower field current limit of 50% of P102 (IF,motor) is applied

(for this reason, it is not possible to plot a minimum of 9 field weakening measuring points)
Possible cause:
P103 50% of P102
Check P614 !

The drive has reached the positive torque limit even though the applied field current setpoint is still 50% of P102
(IF,motor)
Possible cause:
Armature current is very unsteady, e.g. due to high speed controller P gain setting in P225 (on drive with high integralaction time). In this case, setting a lower actual speed filtering value in P200 and execution of another speed controller
optimization run (P051=26) may help.
Check torque limits

The drive has reached the positive armature current limit even through the applied field current setpoint is still 50% of
P102 (IF,motor)
Possible cause:
Armature current is very unsteady, e.g. due to high speed controller P gain setting in P225 (on drive with high integralaction time). In this case, setting a lower actual speed filtering value in P200 and execution of another speed controller
optimization run (P051=26) may help
Check armature current limits

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-15

Faults / Alarms
Fault

05.2007
Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
14

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

The speed has changed by more than 12.5% at a constant speed setpoint even through the applied field current setpoint is
still 50% of P102 (IF,motor)
Possible cause: as for fault value 12

The EMF setpoint is too small to plot a field characteristic

EMFset = UA IA,motor * RA = P101 P100 * P110 < 10% of 1.35 * P078.i001
(e.g. P078.i001 = 400 V . . . minimum EMFset = 54 V)

Field weakening operation is not allowed in operation without a tachometer (P083=3)

The field current controller cannot be optimized because the field circuit time constant cannot be determined (actual field
current does not decay after switch-off to below 0.95*initial value within approximately 1s or to below 0.8 * 0.95*initial
values within approximately 2 s)
Possible cause:
Setting in P103 is too high
Field circuit inductance is too high
Fault in actual field current sensing circuit (gating board or A7001 electronics board defective)
Ratio r073.02 / P102 is too high (change P076.02 if necessary)

Field weakening range is too wide, i.e. during power-up (at full field) to a speed setpoint of +10% nmax , the |EMK| is > 77%
of setpoint EMF (P101 P100 * P110)
Possible cause:
Maximum speed setting is incorrect
Pulse encoder parameters are incorrect (P140 to P143)
Parameters for tachometer adaptation are incorrect (P741)
Setpoint EMF is not correct (P101, P100, P110)
An excessively high load torque (in positive or negative direction, e.g. a suspended load) causes the drive to rotate, one
of the armature current or torque limits may be parameterized too low

A steady-state actual speed of +10%, +20%, +30% . . . or +100% of the maximum speed cannot be reached within 3
minutes (or maximum value of the three set acceleration times) in speed-controlled operation (the speed setpoint/actual
value difference averaged over 90 firing cycles must equal <0.1% nmax for a specific time period)
Possible cause:
Acceleration time is set too low (P303, P307, P311)
Drive is blocked
An excessively high load torque (in positive or negative direction, e.g. a suspended load) causes the drive to rotate, one
of the armature current or torque limits may be parameterized too low
Poor speed controller setting (P225, P226, P228) or speed controller is parameterized as pure P controller or with
droop
A band elimination filter (P201, P202 or P203, P204) is active
Command Ramp-function generator enable =0 or Ramp-function generator STOP =1 is applied
Field weakening operation (P081 = 1) is not parameterized

Current limit is too low

(With speed controller optimization run: Less than 30% or 45% of P100 (IA,motor) + the armature current required for zero
speed,
With optimization run for friction moment and moment of inertia compensation: Less than 20% of P100 (IA, motor) + the
armature current required for a steady-state speed corresponding to 10% of maximum speed)

Field weakening range is too wide (nact < +7% nmax produces |EMF| > 54% setpoint EMF)
(setpoint EMF= K289= P101 P100 * P110)
Possible cause:
Maximum speed setting is incorrect
Pulse encoder parameters are incorrect (P140 to P143)
Parameters for tachometer adaptation are incorrect (P741)
Setpoint EMF is not correct (P101, P100, P110)
Caution:
Even a high absolute negative actual speed value can produce an | EMF | of > 54% setpoint EMF

10-16

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
22

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

With speed controller optimization run:

With an acceleration current equaling 20% or 30% of P100 (IA, motor) + armature current required for zero speed or
With optimization run for friction moment and moment of inertia compensation:
With an acceleration current equaling the current required to achieve a steady-state speed of 10% of maximum speed +
20% of P100 (IA, motor), the maximum speed cannot be reached within 45s +7%
Possible cause:
Centrifugal mass is too large
Drive is blocked, heavily speed-dependent or excessively high load torque
Active load is attempting to maintain a certain speed
Possible remedy:
Increase P100 while the optimization run is in progress in order to raise the applied acceleration current during
optimization (during the speed controller optimization run, a maximum of 45% of IA, motor (+ armature current for zero
speed) is applied as the armature current setpoint, IA,motor (P100) can thus be increased to 2.2 times the value at
maximum without exceeding 100% IA, motor during optimization)

With speed controller optimization run:

With an acceleration current equaling 20% or 30% of P100 (IA, motor) + armature current required for zero speed or
With optimization run for friction moment and moment of inertia compensation:
With an acceleration current equalling the current required to achieve a steady-state speed of 10% of maximum speed +
20% of P100 (IA, motor), the maximum speed or 100% of setpoint EMF cannot be reached within 90s +13%
Possible cause:
Flywheel mass is too large
Drive is blocked, heavily speed-dependent or excessively high load torque
Active load is attempting to maintain a certain speed
Possible remedy:
Increase P100 while the optimization run is in progress in order to raise the applied acceleration current during
optimization (during the speed controller optimization run, a maximum of 45% of IA, motor (+ armature current for zero
speed) is applied as the armature current setpoint, IA,motor (P100) can thus be increased to 2.2 times the value at
maximum without exceeding 100% IA, motor during optimization)

With speed controller optimization run:

The actual speed does not drop to below +2% of maximum speed or to below the speed threshold nmin set in P370 within 2
minutes
With optimization run for field weakening:
The actual speed does not drop to below +2% of maximum speed or to below the speed threshold nmin set in P370 within
10 minutes
With optimization run for friction moment and moment of inertia compensation:
The actual speed does not drop to below +2% of maximum speed or to below the speed threshold nmin set in P370 within
11 or 2 minutes
Possible cause:
Single-quadrant drive coasts to a standstill too slowly

The average armature current required for the speed range from +7% to approximately +13% of maximum speed to cover
the friction and/or steady-state load torque cannot be calculated
Possible cause:
Drive with very little friction or very small integral-action time and, as a result of the very short measuring time,
computational inaccuracies during evaluation
Distorted or disturbed actual speed value
Large flywheel mass that is coupled to the drive via long shaft with high torsion, possibly via a
coupling with large amount of play
Possible remedy:
Reduce P100 for duration of the optimization run to decrease the acceleration current applied during optimization and
thus to lengthen the measuring time

Load torque too high (nset =0% nmax results in nict 40% nmax) (actual speed value is averaged over 90 firing cycles,
speed monitoring at 40% nmax does not start for 1s after application of speed setpoint of nset=0)
Possible cause:
An excessively high load torque (in a positive or negative direction, e.g. suspended load) causes the drive to rotate (the
speed controller parameters are parameterized according to the factory setting during this run)
One of the armature current or torque limits is parameterized too low (the motor field may not be reaching full field
strength fast enough with the result that the initial motor torque is too low)
Maximum speed setting is incorrect
Pulse encoder parameters are incorrect (P140 to P143)
Parameters for tachometer adjustment are not correct (P741)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-17

Faults / Alarms
Fault

05.2007
Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
27

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Load torque is too high (nset=0% nmax results in |EMF| >100% setpoint EMF) (EMF monitoring at (P101 P100 * P110)
does not start for 1 s after application of speed setpoint of nset=0)
Possible cause:
An excessively high load torque (in a positive or negative direction, e.g. suspended load) causes the drive to rotate (the
speed controller parameters are parameterized according to the factory setting during this run)
One of the armature current or torque limits is parameterized too low (the motor field may not be reaching full field
strength fast enough with the result that the initial motor torque is too low)
Maximum speed setting is incorrect
Pulse encoder parameters are incorrect (P140 to P143)
Parameters for tachometer adjustment are not correct (P741)
Setpoint EMF settings are incorrect (P101, P100, P110)

A steady-state actual speed corresponding to 0% of maximum speed cannot be reached within 0 s in speed-controlled
operation (the speed setpoint/actual value difference averaged over 90 firing cycles must be <1.0% nmax for a total of 4s)
Possible cause: As for fault value 26

The calculated armature circuit inductance is greater than 327.67 mH, therefore P111 = 327,67 mH has been set. All other
parameters (the current controller parameters P155 and P156 too) have been set correctly despite that. (For the real
armature circuit inductance in mH, see r047.i010).
Possible cause:
e.g. field supply from the armature terminals

The calculated armature circuit inductance is greater than 327.67 mH and the calculated armature circuit resistance is
greater than 32.767 , therefore P111 = 327,67 mH and P110 = 32,767 has been set. All other parameters have also
been set. However, the values of the current controller parameters P155 and P156 might differ from the optimum setting.
Possible cause:
e.g. field supply from the armature terminals

The calculated armature circuit resistance is greater than 32.767 , therefore P110 = 32,767 has been set. All other
parameters have also been set. Possibly the calculated P111 and therefore also the current controller parameters P155
and P156 have been distorted by the limitation in P110 .
Possible cause:
e.g. field supply from the armature terminals

The protocol selection for basic-device interface G-SST2 has not been set to communication with the SIMOREG CCP.
Possible remedy:
Set P790 to 6

The protocol counter of the error-free telegrams r799.i001 is not incremented. Communication with the SIMOREG CCP
does not take place.
Possible cause:
e.g. defective cabling for the peer-to-peer connection at X172

10-18

Incorrect MLFB identification number of the SIMOREG CCP (n570 < 250, see r047.i003)
Please contact your nearest SIEMENS agent

The electric strength of the SIMOREG CCP is too low. The SIMOREG device's rated input voltage set in P078.i001 (see
r047.i003 in V) is higher than the rated supply voltage of the SIMOREG CCP (see r047.i004 in V). It is not permissible to
operate the SIMOREG CCP in this hardware configuration.

It is not possible to set parameter U578. The calculated voltage setpoint for precharging the surge absorbing capacitors in
the SIMOREG CCP (see r047.i003 in V) is higher than the rectifier average of supply voltage actually being applied
(minimum value in line with the lower tolerance limit in accordance with P351(see r047.i004 in V)
See also the description for parameter U578 in the SIMOREG CCP operating instructions

The maximum energy - to be reduced during extinguishing in the armature circuit (see r047.i003 in kJ) is higher than the
energy that can be absorbed in the chopper resistors of the SIMOREG CCP (see r047.i003 in kJ). The selected
SIMOREAG CCP is not suitable for the existing hardware configuration.
See also step 5 in the section entitled "Commissioning steps" of the operating instructions of the SIMOREG CCP.

The value set at parameter P111 for the armature inductance is 0

Possible cause:
The optimization run for the current controller has not been carried out.

In the existing software of the SIMOREG device, there are still no setting data for operation with SIMOREG CCP.
Possible remedy:
Update the SIMOREG software

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

r047 Index 002:

F051

F052

Fault has occurred during optimization run for current controller and precontrol for armature and field (selected by means of
P051=25)

Fault has occurred during optimization run for speed controller (selected through setting P051=26)

Fault has occurred during optimization run for field weakening (selected through setting P051=27)

Fault has occurred during internal offset adjustments (selected through P051=22)

Fault has occurred in optimization run for friction and moment of inertia compensation (selected through setting P051=28)

Fault has occurred during automatic setting of the parameters for SIMOREG CCP (was selected by means of P051=30)

No optimization run when permanent memory is disabled

(active in all operating states)

[V2.1 and later]

If P051.001 is set to 0 (write access to permanent memory disabled), it is not possible to execute an optimization run.
Optimization run aborted as a result of external cause
(active in operating states of , I, II)
This fault message is activated when the converter ceases operating in the RUN state (state I, II or --) during an optimization run
(and thus in response to every FAULT) or if the EMERGENCY STOP or SHUTDOWN command is applied. The optimization run
is aborted. Only those parameters which had been fully optimized prior to activation of the fault message are altered.
When the STANDSTILL command is applied, this fault message is not activated if the optimization run for field weakening is
interrupted after the 1st field weakening measuring point has been recorded or, in the case of the optimization run for friction and
moment of inertia compensation, after the measuring point at 10% maximum speed has been determined. In these cases, the run
may be interrupted by STANDSTILL so as to be able to complete the run in several stages (by repeated restarts) for a limited
travel path.
Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Run was aborted because converter is no longer

operating in RUN mode
(For example, this can occur when r047i002=2 in the
case of a motor with a very high field circuit time constant
For help, see P051 = 26 in chapter 7.5)

i002=1 Fault has occurred during optimization run for current

controller and precontrol for armature and field
(selected by means of P051=25)

Run was aborted because EMERGENCY STOP

command was applied (speed controller setpoint =0)

i002=3 Fault has occurred during optimization run for field

weakening (selected through setting P051=27)

Run was aborted because STANDSTILL command was

applied (ramp-function generator setpoint=0)

Operation has been aborted because P051 was changed

during the optimization run

i002=5 Fault has occurred in optimization run for friction and

moment of inertia compensation (selected through
setting P051=28)

Run was aborted because SWITCH-ON command was

not applied within 30 s of selection of optimization run

Operation has been aborted because the OPERATING

ENABLE command was not entered within 1 minute of
selection of the optimization run.

Operation has been aborted because converter was not

in operating state < o7.2 15 s after selection of the
optimization run with P051 = 25, 26, 27 or 28 (input of
OFF1 command may have been forgotten)

i002=2 Fault has occurred during optimization run for speed

controller (selected through setting P051=26)

i005

Operational state (K0800) in the event of a fault

10.1.2.9 External faults

F053

Fault message from free function block FB288

(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

F054

the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.005 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.006 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.007 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U102 Index.008 is in the state log.1

Fault message from free function block FB289

(active in all operating states)
Fault value:
1
2
3
4

the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.005 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.006 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.007 is in the state log.1
the binector wired via parameter U103 Index.008 is in the state log.1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-19

Faults / Alarms
Fault

05.2007
Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

10.1.2.10 Start-up faults

F055

No field characteristic recorded

(active in operating states of , I, II)
Possible fault causes

The optimization run for field weakening (P051=27) has not yet been executed.

Fault value:

F056

P170 = 1 (torque control) selected, but no valid field characteristic has been recorded (P117=0) yet

P081 = 1 (speed-dependent field weakening) selected, but no valid field characteristic has been recorded (P117=0) yet
(P117=0)

Important parameter is not set

(active in operating states of o6)
This fault message is activated if certain parameters are still set to 0.
Fault value:

F058

Speed controller actual value selection in P083 is still set to 0

Rated motor armature current in P100 is still set to 0.0

Rated motor field current in P102 is still set to 0.00 (fault message only when P082 0)

Rated DC current of external field device is still set to 0.00 in U838 (error message if P082 >= 21 only)

Parameter settings are not consistent

(active in operating states of o6)
Inconsistent values have been set in mutually dependent parameters.
Fault value:

10-20

The parameters for speed-dependent current limitation are not set correctly (the following applies: P105>P107 (I1>I2) and
P104 < P106 (n1<n2))

The field characteristic is not uniform

The first threshold for P gain adaptation of the speed controller set in parameter P556 is higher than the second threshold
setting in parameter P559

P557 is set to greater than P560

P558 is set to greater than P561

If P083=1 (analog tachometer), then P746 may not equal 0 (main actual value is not connected)

If P083=2 (pulse encoder), then P140 may not equal x0 (no pulse encoder installed)

If P083=3 (EMF control) then P082 may not equal x1x (field weakening operation)

P090 (stabilization time for supply voltage) >P086 (time for automatic restart)

P090 (stabilization time for supply voltage) >P089 (waiting time in state o4 or o5)

P445=1 is set (switch-on, shutdown and crawl act as a pushbutton) although no binector is parameterized as a shudown
button (P444=0)

If P067 > 1, then P075 must also be > 0

Parameter U673 > U674 (this setting is not permitted; see function diagram B152)

Parameter P169 = 1 and P170 = 1 (impermissible setting)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

F059

Technology option S00 is disabled/will be disabled soon

(active in all operating statuses)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault value:

F060

Time credit for S00 = 0 hrs

The technology option S00 for 500 operating hours no longer applies. The functions are now no longer available, but the
parameter settings have been retained.
If you wish to continue using technology option S00, please contact your nearest Siemens Sales Office to obtain the PIN
number you will require to permanently enable this option.
You will need to know the serial number of your SIMOREG DC-MASTER. For further details, please refer to the description
of parameters U977 and n978 in Chapter 11 of the Parameter List.

Time credit S00 < 100 Std.

The remaining time period of temporary enabling of technology option S00 is now less than 100 operating hours. The
technology functions will not be available for much longer.
If you wish to continue using technology option S00, please contact your nearest Siemens Sales Office to obtain the PIN
number you will require to permanently enable this option.
for permanent enabling of technology option S00.
You will need to know the serial number of your SIMOREG DC-MASTER. For further details, please refer to the description
of parameters U977 and n978 in Chapter 11 of the Parameter List.

S00 operation will not be possible if an SLB cycle time of < 1 ms is set
Owing to the available capacity of the electronics board, it is not possible to operate the S00 technology option at the same
time as a SIMOLINK bus with an extremely short cycle time (U746 < 1 ms).
See also parameter U746.

Current total processor utilization (n009.i001, K9990) > 99.0%

(active in all operating statuses)
The function blocks of the technology software, option S00 will not be calculated until this fault code has been acknowledged.
The current total processor utilization can be reduced by using the function U969 = 4.

10.1.2.11 Hardware faults

F061

Fault message from thyristor check function

(active in operating state o3)
This fault message can be activated only if the thyristor check is activated via parameter P830.
If Thyristor defective or Thyristor unable to block is signaled, then the relevant thyristor module must be replaced.
Possible causes for irreparable damage to thyristors:

Interruption in snubber circuit

Current controller and precontrol are not optimized (excessive current peaks)
Inadequate cooling (e.g. fan is not operating, ambient temperature is too high, fan is rotating in wrong direction (incorrect
phase sequence), inadequate air supply, heatsink is very dirty)
Excessive voltage peaks in incoming supply system
External short circuit or fault to ground (check armature circuit)

If Thyristor unable to block is signaled, the cause can generally be attributed to a firing circuit fault, rather than to a defective
thyristor.
Possible causes:
Firing pulse cable to relevant thyristor is interrupted
Ribbon cable X101 or X102 is incorrectly inserted or interrupted
Defective electronics or gating board
Internal interruption in gating cable in thyristor module
The designations of the firing cables and associated thyristors can be found in Section 6.4 (power connections).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-21

Faults / Alarms
Fault

05.2007
Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault value:
1
2
3
4
5
6

Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V1, on 15A and 30 converters: V1 or V4)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V2, on 15A and 30 converters: V2 or V5)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V3, on 15A and 30 converters: V3 or V6)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V4, on 15A and 30 converters: V4 or V1)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V5, on 15A and 30 converters: V5 or V2)
Defective thyristor (short circuit in module V6, on 15A and 30 converters: V6 or V3)

Fault to ground in armature circuit

I=0 message defective

Possible fault cause
Defective A7001 electronics board

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Thyristor cannot be fired (X11)

Thyristor cannot be fired (X12)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X13)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X14)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X15)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X16)
2 or more thyristors (MI) cannot be fired
Possible fault cause
Armature circuit interrupted

21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Thyristor cannot be fired (X21)

Thyristor cannot be fired (X22)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X23)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X24)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X25)
Thyristor cannot be fired (X26)
2 or more thyristors (MII) cannot be fired

31
32
33
34
35
36

Thyristor unable to block (X11 or X21)

Thyristor unable to block (X12 or X22)
Thyristor unable to block (X13 or X23)
Thyristor unable to block (X14 or X24)
Thyristor unable to block (X15 or X25)
Thyristor unable to block (X16 or X26)

10.1.2.12 Internal faults

F062

Fault in parameter memory

(active in all operating states)
Software monitoring of correct functioning of the EEPROM module (non-volatile memory) on the A7009 board.
The EEPROM values contains all data which must be protected in the case of a power failure (i.e. parameter values and process
data which must remain stored during power failures).
The following are monitored:

Connection between the A7001 electronics board and the EEPROM on the A7009 backplane wiring assembly
Whether the parameter values stored on the EEPROM are within the permissible value range
Whether data are being correctly stored on the EEPROM. For this purpose, values are read and checked for correctness
after they are transferred to the module
Whether the checksum of the non-volatile process data in the EEPROM is correct

Possible causes for all fault types:

Excessive EMC-related interference is present (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose shield connections)

10-22

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)
Fault value:
1

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Connection to EEPROM is faulty

Possible fault causes
A7001 electronics board is defective
A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective
Plug-in connection X109 is defective

Parameter value is outside permissible value range

i002 Number of faulty parameter

Possible fault causes

Restore to default value has never been executed
with this software (e.g. after software replacement)
A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective

i003 Index of faulty parameter

Possible remedy:
Acknowledge fault, execute Restore to default value
and start up the drive again
Parameter value cannot be stored on EEPROM

i004 Faulty parameter value

i002 Address of fault memory location

Possible fault causes

A7001 electronics board is defective
A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective
Plug-in connection X109 is defective

i003 Faulty value in EEPROM

Checksum of non-volatile data (part 1)

is not correct

i002 Calculate checksum

Checksum of non-volatile data (part 2)

is not correct

Checksum of non-volatile data (part 3)

is not correct

Checksum of configuring table of parameter values is not

correct

i004 Correct parameter value

i003 Checksum found in EEPROM

Possible fault causes

Defective EEPROM
Restore to default value has never been executed
with this software (e.g. after software replacement)
Possible remedy:
Acknowledge fault, execute Restore to default value
and start up the drive again! Check interference
suppression measures and improve if necessary.
In the case of fault value 20, the factory setting is
restored automatically
F063

Errors in compensation data of analog inputs and outputs

(active in all operating states)
This function monitors whether the factory-set compensation data for the analog inputs and outputs are plausible
Possible fault cause:

Defective A7001 or A7006 electronics board

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Incorrect number of words in compensation values

for analog inputs and outputs of A7001

i002 Incorrect number of words

Checksum error in compensation values for

analog inputs and outputs of A7001

i002 Calculated checksum

Incorrect value among compensation values for

analog inputs and outputs of A7001

i002 Incorrect value

Incorrect value among compensation values for

analog inputs and outputs of A7006

i002 Incorrect value

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

i003 Errored checksum

10-23

Faults / Alarms

05.2007

Fault

Description

No.
F064

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Watchdog timer has initiated a reset

(active in all operating states)
An internal microprocessor hardware counter monitors whether the program for calculating the firing pulses runs at least once
every 14 ms (program is executed on average every 2.7 to 3.3 ms). If this is not the case, the counter initiates a reset, F064 is
then displayed.
Possible fault causes

F065

A7001 electronics board is defective

Excessive EMC-related interference is present (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose shield
connections)

Illegal microprocessor status

(active in all operating states)
An internal microprocessor hardware function monitors the microprocessor for illegal operating states.
Possible fault causes

F067

A7001 electronics board is defective

Excessive EMC-related interference is present (e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose shield
connections)

Converter cooling faulty

(active in operating states of o13)
The heatsink temperature monitoring function is activated 6s after connection of the electronics supply.
(The current heat sink temperature is indicated at parameter r013 and on connector K050)

F068

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Heatsink temperature > permissible heatsink temperature

(depending on the MLFB)

i002 Measured heatsink temperature (16384 .. 100C)

Heatsink temperature sensor is defective

i003 Measured ADC value

Converter fan is defective

Analog measuring channel faulty (main setpoint, main actual value or analog select input)
(active in all operating states)
Hardware monitoring of measuring circuits
Possible fault causes

A7001 module defective

Measuring circuit saturated (input voltage at terminals 4 and 5 or 6 and 7 higher than approx. 11.3V)

Fault value:

F069

Measuring channel for main setpoint / analog select input 1 faulty (terminals 4 and 5)

Measuring channel for main actual value faulty (terminals 103 and 104)

Measuring channel for analog select input 1 faulty (terminals 6 and 7)

MLFB data are faulty

(active in all operating states)
Possible fault causes

Excessive EMC-related interference is present

(e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose shield connections)
A7009 backplane wiring assembly is defective

Fault value:

r047 Index 002 to 016:

MLFB code number (r070) = MLFB code number (r070)

is illegal

i002 Incorrect MLFB code number

MLFB data checksum error

Works number checksum error

Number of words of MLFB data is incorrect

10.1.2.13 Communication errors with supplementary boards

F070

10-24

SCB1: Serious initialization error

(active in all operating states)
SCB1 and SCI cannot power up correctly (see diagnostic parameter n697 for details)
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Fault

Description

No.

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

Fault value:
12

No connection to slave 1

No connection to slave 2

F073

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input1 of slave 1

(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F074

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input2 of slave 1

(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F075

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input3 of slave 1

(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F076

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input1 of slave 2

(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F077

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input2 of slave 2

(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F078

SCB1: Current below 4mA minimum value at analog input3 of slave 2

(active in all operating states)
The cause of the fault may be a cable break

F079

SCB1: Telegram failure

(active in all operating states)
Check function of SCB1 (activity LEDs) and connection to SCI slaves (fiber optics)

F080

Error in initialization of a CB/TB board

Possible causes for fault values 1 and 6:

F081

CB/TB board is defective

CB/TB board is not installed correctly
CB/TB board is taking too long to run up (e.g. due to very complex TB configuration)

Fault value (r949 index 001):

r047 index 002 to 016:

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-25

Faults / Alarms
Fault

Description

No.
F082

05.2007

Cause as a function of fault value

(r047.001, r949.001 or r949.009 with acknowledged error)

Further information (r047.002 to r047.016)

CB/TB message timeout or error in data exchange

Possible causes of fault

CB/TB PZD message timeout (with fault value 10)

Excessive EMC-related interference
(e.g. due to unprotected contactors, unscreened cables, loose screen connections)
CB/TB board is defective
CB/TB board is not correctly inserted

Fault value (r949 index 001):

r047 Index 002 to 016:

Fault in alarm channel from CB to basic unit

i015 Code number of board:

st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

Fault in alarm channel from TB to basic unit

Fault in fault channel from TB to basic unit

Fault in parameter job channel from CB to basic unit

i015 Code number of board:

st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

6
CB

Fault in parameter response channel from basic unit to

i015 Code number of board:

st
st
1
1 TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

Fault in parameter job channel from TB to basic unit

8
TB

Fault in parameter response channel from basic unit to

CB/TB process data failure (message timeout period set

in U722)

Fault in parameter job channel from PMU to TB

i015 Code number of board:

st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

Fault in parameter response channel from TB to PMU

Fault in setpoint channel from CB/TB to basic unit

i015 Code number of board:

st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

Fault in actual value channel from basic unit to CB/TB

i015 Code number of board:

st
1
TB or 1 CB
nd
2
2 CB

10.1.2.14 Fault messages from supplementary boards

F101
to
F147

10-26

This group of fault messages is activated by supplementary boards

Please refer to the operating manual of the relevant supplementary board for explanation of the fault messages and fault values

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

10.2

Faults / Alarms

Alarm messages
Alarm message display:
On the PMU: A (Alarm) and a three-digit number. The red LED (Fault) flashes.
On the OP1S: On the bottom line of the operational display. The red LED (Fault) flashes.
An alarm message cannot be acknowledged, but disappears automatically when the cause has been
eliminated.
Several alarm messages can be active at the same time, these are then displayed in succession.
Many alarms (see List of Alarm Messages) can only be active in certain operating states.
The system responses to an alarm are as follows:

Alarm message is displayed on the operator panel (PMU, OP1S)

B0114 ( = status word 1, bit 7) is set and B0115 is cancelled

(see also special alarm bits in status word 2, e.g. for an external alarm, overload, etc.)

The corresponding bit in one of the alarm words r953 (K9801) to r960 (K9808) is set

Alarm

Description

No.
A015

Simolink start
(active in all operating states)
Although the board has been initialized, it cannot yet exchange telegrams (parameters have not yet been correctly configured on
all nodes or the boards have not yet been linked via fiber optics to form a closed ring).

A018

Short circuit at binary outputs

(active in all operating states)
Hardware monitoring function to check for short circuit at one of the binary select outputs (see also F018 and r011).

A019

Alarm message from free function block FB256

(active in all operating states)
The binector wired via parameter U104 Index.002 is in the state log.1

A020

Alarm message from free function block FB257

(active in all operating states)
The binector wired via parameter U105 Index.002 is in the state log.1

A021

External alarm 1
(active in all operating states)
Bit 28 in control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 003.

A022

External alarm 2
(active in all operating states)
Bit 29 in control word 2 was in the log. "0" state for longer than the time set in P360 index 004.

A023

Alarm message from free function block FB6

(active in all operating states)
The binector wired via parameter U104 Index.001 is in the state log.1

A024

Alarm message from free function block FB7

(active in all operating states)
The binector wired via parameter U105 Index.001 is in the state log.1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-27

Faults / Alarms
Alarm

05.2007
Description

No.
A025

Brush length too short

(active in all operating states)
When parameter P495=1 (binary sensing of brush length):
Alarm in response to log. 0 signal (longer than 10s) at terminal 211
Possible causes

A026

Encoder for brush length has responded

Interruption in encoder cable

Poor bearing condition

(active in all operating states)
When parameter P496=1 (bearing condition sensing):
Alarm in response to log. 0 signal (longer than 2s) at terminal 212
Possible causes

A027

Encoder for bearing condition has responded

Air flow monitoring

(active in operating states of < o6)
When parameter P497=1 (air flow monitoring):
Alarm in response to log. 0 signal (longer than 40s) at terminal 213
Possible causes

A028

Encoder for fan monitoring has responded

Interruption in encoder cable

Motor overtemperature
(active in all operating states)
When parameter P498=1 (thermostat connected):
Alarm in response to log. 0 signal (longer than 10s) at terminal 214
Possible causes

A029

Thermostat for monitoring motor temperature has responded

Interruption in encoder cable

Motor overtemperature
(active in all operating states)
Selection via P493=1 or 3 (thermostat at terminals 22 / 23) or
P494=1 or 3 (thermostat at terminals 204 / 205)
When parameter P490.01=1 (KTY84 at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=1 (KTY84 at terminals 204 / 205):
The alarm is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the values set in parameter P492.
When parameter P490.01=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals 22 / 23) or P490.02=2, 3, 4 or 5 (PTC thermistor at terminals
204 / 205):
The alarm is activated if the motor temperature reaches or exceeds the trip value of the selected PTC.

A030

Commutation failure or overcurrent has occurred

(active in operating states of , I, II)
Possible error causes

A031

Mains voltage dip in regenerative feedback mode

Current control loop not optimized

Speed controller monitoring

10-28

Control loop interrupted

Controller is not optimized
P590 or P591 is not correctly parameterized

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

Alarm

Description

No.
A032

SIMOREG CCP not ready

(active in operating states of < o4.0)
Possible causes

A033

No voltage at U, V, W terminals of SIMOREG CCP

Voltage at C-D on CCP does not match voltage at C-D on SIMOREG DC-MASTER
Surge absorbing capacitors of SIMOREG CCP have not reached setpoint voltage
Paralleling interface cable is not connected to SIMOREG CCP assigned to paralleling master
No connection between SIMOREG DC-MASTER and SIMOREG CCP via G-SST2 serial interface
No connection between parallel SIMIOREG CCPs
Contents of technical data memory on SIMOREG CCP (MLFB, rated values, serial number) invalid
I2t value of voltage chopper 1 is too high (> 100%)
I2t value of voltage chopper 2 is too high (> 50%)

Alarm message from free function block FB8

(active in all operating states)

A034

The binector connected via parameter U106 Index.001 is in the log. "1" state
Alarm message from free function block FB9
(active in all operating states)

A035

The binector connected via parameter U107 Index.001 is in the log. "1" state
Drive blocked
(active in operating states of , I, II)

A036

A037

A038

The monitoring function responds if the following conditions are fulfilled for longer than the time set in parameter P355:
Positive or negative torque or armature current limit reached
Armature current is greater than 1% of converter rated armature DC current
The actual speed value is less than 0.4% of maximum speed
No armature current can flow
(active in operating states of , I, II)
This monitoring function responds if the armature firing angle is at the rectifier stability limit for more than 500 ms and the
armature current is less than 1% of the converter rated armature DC current.
I2t motor monitor has responded
(active in operating states of , I, II)
The alarm is activated when the calculated I2t value of the motor reaches the value which corresponds to the final temperature
at 100% of permissible continuous motor current (= P113*P100).
Overspeed
(active in operating states of , I, II)
The monitoring function responds if the actual speed value (selected in P595) exceeds the positive (P512) or negative (P513)
threshold by 0.5%.
Possible causes

A039

A043

Lower current limit has been input

Current-controlled operation
P512, P513 are set too low
Tachometer cable contact fault in operation close to maximum speed
I2t value of power section too high
(active in all operating states)
This alarm is activated if the permissible I2t value for the relevant power section is reached. At the same time, the current limit is
set to P077 * 100% of the converter rated DC current. This limit is not cancelled again until the setpoint drops below 100% of the
converter rated DC current. See also Fault F039 and Parameter P075.
Automatic field current reduction if EMF is too high in operation
(active in operating states of , I, II)
This alarm is active only when parameter P272=1 and activated if the following equation applies to firing angle (armature)
before limitation (K101):
> (W (inverter stability limit acc. to P151) 5 degrees) or , at a low (pulsating) current
> (165 degrees 5 degrees)
AND armature current setpoint K0118 filtered with P190.F is > 1% of r072.002
The field is reduced simultaneously with A043, implemented through control of the armature firing angle to (W (or 165 degrees)
- 5 degrees) using a P controller whose output reduces the EMF controller setpoint. For this reason, Field weakening operation
through internal EMF control (PO81=1) must be parameterized.
When a change in torque direction is requested, both torque directions are inhibited until the calculated control angle (K101) is
<165 degrees for the armature current requested in the new torque direction, i.e. until the field, and thus the EMF, have been
reduced accordingly.
See also parameter P082.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

10-29

Faults / Alarms

05.2007

Alarm

Description

No.
A044
A046

An alarm is active on one slave connected to the paralleling interface

(active in all operating states)
Analog select input for main setpoint (terminals 4 and 5) faulty
(active in operating states of o6)
This alarm is activated when P700=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and the input current is less than 3mA.

A047

Analog select input 1 (terminals 6 and 7) faulty

(active in operating states of o6)

A049

SCB1: No SCI slave connected

(active in all operating states)

A050

SCB1: Not all required SCI slaves are available

(active in all operating states)

A053

Alarm message from free function block FB258

(active in all operating states)

This alarm is activated when P710=2 (current input 4 to 20 mA) and the input current is less than 3mA.

The SCI slave required to perform the parameterized functions is not available

A054

The binector connected via parameter U106 Index.002 is in the log. "1" state
Alarm message from free function block FB259
(active in all operating states)
The binector connected via parameter U107 Index.002 is in the log. "1" state

A059

Remaining time for temporary enabling of the S00 technology option is now less than 100 operating hours
(active in all operating statuses)
Remaining time for temporary enabling of the S00 technology option is now less than 100 operating hours. The functions will
soon be unavailable.

A060
A067

If you wish to continue using technology option S00, please contact to your nearest Siemens Regional Office for a PIN number
for permanent enabling of technology option S00.
You will need to know the serial number of your SIMOREG DC-MASTER. For further details, please refer to the description of
parameters U977 and n978 in Chapter 11 of the Parameter List.
Current total processor utilization (n009.i001, K9990) > 95.5%
(active in all operating states)
Converter cooling faulty
(active in all operating states)
The heat sink temperature is higher than the permissible value (depending on the MLFB).
The monitoring function is activated 6s after the electronics supply is connected.
(The current heat sink temperature is indicated at parameter r013 and on connector K050)
st

A081
to
A088

CB alarm of 1 CB
(active in all operating states o11)

A089
to
A096

CB alarm of 2 CB
(active in all operating states o11)

A097
to
A128

TB alarms
(active in operating states o11)

10-30

The meaning of these alarms depends on the type of board used.

For further information, refer to Section 7.7, Start-Up of Optional Supplementary Boards, in the relevant board description.
nd

The meaning of these alarms depends on the type of board used.

For further information, refer to Section 7.7, Start-Up of Optional Supplementary Boards, in the relevant board description.

For more information about TECH BOARD alarms, please refer to Operating Instructions or Configuring Guide of the relevant
board.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

Overview
Range of parameter
numbers

Function

r000

Operating display

r001 - P050

General visualization parameters

P051- r059

Access authorization levels

r060 - r065

Definition of SIMOREG DC-MASTER converter

P067 - P079

Definition of SIMOREG DC-MASTER power section

P080 - P098

Setting values for converter control

P100 - P139

Definition of motor

P140 - P148

Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder

P150 - P165

Closed-loop armature current control, auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

P169 - P191

Current limitation, torque limitation

P192 - P193

Auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

P200 - P236

Speed controller (further parameters for the speed controller P550 - P567)

P250 - P265

Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit

P272 - P284

Closed-loop EMF control

P295 - P319

Ramp-function generator

P320 - P323

Setpoint processing

P330

Ramp-function generator

P351 - P364

Setting values for monitoring functions and limits

P370 - P399

Setting values for limit-value monitors

P401 - P416

Settable fixed values

P421 - P428

Fixed control bits

P430 - P445

Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints)

P450 - P453

Position sensing with pulse encoder

P455 - P458

Connector selector switches

P460 - P473

Motorized potentiometer

P480 - P485

Oscillation

P490 - P498

Definition of "Motor interface

P500 - P503

Configuring of torque shell input

P509 - P515

Speed limiting controller

P519 - P530

Friction compensation

P540 - P546

Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)

P550 - P567

Speed controller (further parameters for the speed controller P200 - P236)

P580 - P583

Field reversal

P590 - P597

Input quantities for signals

P600 - P647

Configuring of closed-loop control

P648 - P691

Control word, status word

P692 - P698

Further configuring measures

P700 - P746

Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs)

P749 - P769

Analog outputs

P770 - P778

Binary outputs

P780 - P819

Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter

P820 - P821

Deactivation of monitoring functions

r824 - r829

Compensation values

P830

Thyristor diagnosis

P831 - P899

Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S

P918 - P927

Profile parameters

r947 - P952

Fault memory

r953 - r960

Visualization parameters: Alarms

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-1

Parameter list

05.2007

Range of parameter
numbers

Function

r964

Device identification

r967 - r968

Visualization parameters: Control and status word

P970 - r999

Resetting and storing parameters, list of existing and modified P and r parameters

U005 - U007

Password protection, key/lock mechanism

n009

Processor utilization

n024 - U098

Miscellaneous

U116 - U118

Binector / connector converter for the serial interfaces

n560 - U583

Commutation monitoring

U607 - U608

Setpoint reduction

U616

Definition of the function of inputs and outputs

U619

Definition of the function of the relay output at terminals 109 / 110

11-2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

Parameters for technology software in the basic converter, S00 option

("freely assignable function blocks")
Range of parameter
numbers

Function

n010 - n023

Displays

U099

Settable fixed values

U100 - U107

Triggering of faults and alarms

U110 - U115

Connector/binector converters, binector/connector converters

U120 - U171

Mathematical functions

U172 - U173

Processing of connectors (averager)

U175 - U218

Limiter, limit-value monitors

U220 - U259

Processing of connectors

U260 - U299

Integrators, DT1 elements, characteristics, dead zones, setpoint branching

U300 - U303

Simple ramp-function generator

U310 - U313

Multiplexer

n314 - U317

Counter

U318 - U411

Logic functions

U415 - U474

Storage elements, timers and binary signal selector switches

U480 - U512

Technology controller

U515 - U523

Velocity/speed calculators

U525 - U529

Variable moment of inertia

U530 - U545

PI controller

U550 - U554

Closed-loop control elements

U670 - U677

Position/positional deviation acquisition

U680 - U684

Root extractor

U950 - U952

Sampling times

U960 - U969

Altering the processing sequence of function blocks

U977 - n978

Enabling of technology software in basic unit, S00 option ("freely assignable function blocks")

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-3

Parameter list

05.2007

Overview of abbreviations
Example:
PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P520
1)
*
2)
FDS
8) 9)

Friction at 0% speed

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%4)

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or converter rated torque

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.0 5)
Type: O2 3)

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 20
Online6)

(G153)
10)

1) An under the parameter number means that the parameter requires confirmation, i.e. the altered value
*
does not take effect until the P key is pressed.
2) Abbreviation indicating that the parameter belongs to a data set (refers only to indexed parameters) (see
Section 9.11 Switch over parameter sets)
FDS
BDS

Parameter belongs to the function data set (see Section 9.1, subsection "Data sets")
Parameter belongs to the BICO data set
(see Section 9.1, subsection "Data sets")

3) Specification of parameter type

O2
Unsigned 16-bit value
I2
Signed 16-bit value
O4
Unsigned 32-bit value
I4
Signed 32-bit value
V2
Bit-coded quantity
L2
Nibble-coded quantity
4) Setting steps for access via PKW mechanism
5) Factory setting
6) Minimum setting required (P052) to allow display of the relevant parameter
Minimum access level required (P051) to allow modification of the relevant parameter
Online: The parameter can be changed in all converter operating states
Offline: The parameter can only be changed in converter operating states of o1.0
8)
S00
Parameter belongs to the technology software in the basic converter, S00 option
9) The "OP parameter number" (i.e. the number to be entered via the OP1S operator panel) is specified in
brackets in the "PNU" column for all parameters which are not "P parameters" or "r parameters": e.g. (2010)
under n010 or (2100) under U100.
10) The parameter is shown in the specified function diagram in Section 8 (here G153).

11-4

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.1
r000

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Operating status display

Operating status display
Status display, fault and alarm messages
-I
II
o1
o1.0
o1.1
o1.2
o1.3
o1.4
o1.5

o1.6

Torque direction M0, MI or MII (=RUN)

No torque direction active
Torque direction I active (MI)
Torque direction II active (MII)
Waiting for operating enable (=READY)
Brake release delay time running.
Waiting for operating enable at terminal 38.
Waiting for operating enable via binector (acc. to selection in
P661) or control word, bit 3 (acc. to selection in P648)
Inching command cancellation delay time running.
Waiting for field to be reversed.
Waiting for cancellation of command "Brake by field reversal"
Waiting for operating enable from optimization run
(the optimization run does not output the operating enable signal
at the end until n<nmin has been reached and SHUTDOWN
input).
Waiting for cancellation of immediate pulse disable via binector
(acc. to selection with P177)
[SW 1.8 and later]

o2
o2.0

Wait for setpoint > P091.002

If |n-set| (|K0193|) and |n-actual| (K0166) are less than
P091.002, the firing pulses are disabled and the drive goes into
state o2.0.
[SW 2.0 and later]

o3
o3.0
o3.1
o3.2
o3.3

Test phase
Waiting for completion of thyristor check (selectable function).
Waiting for completion of line symmetry check.
Waiting for a DC contactor to pick up
Waiting for "Main contactor checkback"
(control word 2 bit 31, see P691)
[SW 1.8 and later]

o4
o4.0

Waiting for voltage (armature)

Waiting for voltage at power terminals 1U1, 1V1, 1W1. The
voltage and frequency must be within the range specified with
parameters P351, P352, P353, P363 and P364. See also
P078.001.
Waiting for fuse monitoring to signal OK
[SW 1.7 and later]
Waiting until the chopper capacitors of the SIMOREG CCP are
completely precharged
[SW 2.2 and later]

o4.1
o4.5
o5
o5.0
o5.1

Waiting for field current

Waiting until actual field current K0266 equals > P396 (FS=50%
of field current setpoint K0275) and for "I field extern > I f min"
(see P265).
Waiting for voltage at power terminals 3U1, 3W1. The voltage
and frequency must be within the range specified with
parameters P351, P352, P353, P363 and P364. See also
P078.002.

NOTE
The converter dwells in states o4 and o5 for a maximum total delay time
that is set in parameter P089. The appropriate fault message is output if
the corresponding conditions are still not fulfilled at the end of this
period.
o6
o6.0
o6.1

Wait status before the line contactor is closed

Waiting for auxiliaries to be switched on (delay in P093)
Waiting for a setpoint P091 to be applied to the ramp-function
generator input (K0193)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-5

Parameter list
PNU

Description

o7
o7.0
o7.1
o7.2

o7.3
o7.4
o7.5
o7.6
o7.9
o8
o8.0
o8.1
o9
o9.0
o9.1
o9.2
o9.3
o10
o10.0
o10.1
o10.2
o10.3
o10.4
o10.5
o10.6

11-6

05.2007
Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Waiting for switch-on command (=READY TO SWITCH ON)

Waiting for switch-on command via terminal 37.
Waiting for switch-on command via binector (acc. to selection in
P654) or control word, bit 0 (acc. to selection in P648).
Waiting for cancellation of internal shutdown through input of an
internal shutdown command or
waiting for cancellation of command "Braking with field reversal"
Waiting for completion of "Restore factory settings" operation.
Waiting for switch-on command before execution of an
optimization run
Wait for completion of "Read in parameter set" operation.
Wait for completion of "Load MLFB" operation (performed at
factory)
reserved for firmware download for optional supplementary
modules
[SW 2.0 and later]
Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout
Waiting for acknowledgement of starting lockout through input of
SHUTDOWN command (OFF1).
Simulation operation active (see under U840) [SW1.7 and later]
Fast stop (OFF3)
Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P658)
or control word, bit 2 (acc. to selection in P648).
Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P659).
Fast stop has been input via binector (acc. to selection in P660).
Fast stop is stored internally (memory can be reset by cancelling
FAST STOP command and entering SHUTDOWN).
Voltage disconnection (OFF2)
Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P655) or control word, bit 1 (acc. to selection in
P648).
Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P656).
Voltage disconnection has been input via binector (acc. to
selection in P657).
E-Stop (safety shutdown) has been input via terminal 105 or 107
Wait for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST1 (only if telegram
failure time monitoring is set with P787 0)
Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST2 (only if
telegram failure time monitoring is set with P797 0)
Waiting for receipt of a valid telegram on G-SST3 (only if
telegram failure time monitoring is set with P807 0)

o11
o11.0

Fault
= Fxxx Fault message is displayed, red LED lights up.

o12
o12.1
o12.2
o12.3
o12.9

Electronics initialization in progress

Basic converter electronics initialization in progress
Supplementary board is sought in module plug-in location 2
Supplementary board is sought in module plug-in location 3
Restructuring of parameters in non-volatile storage after
software update (takes approx. 15s)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

o13
o13.0
o13.1
xxxxx
o13.2
o13.3

11.2

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Software update in progress

Waiting for arrival of start command from HEXLOAD PC routine
(press the DOWN key to abort this status and start a RESET)
Deletion of Flash EPROM in progress
Display of address currently being programmed
The Flash EPROM has been successfully programmed
(a RESET is performed automatically after approx. 1 second)
Programming of the Flash EPROM has failed
(press UP key to return to operating state o13.0)

o14

Loading of boot sector in progress

(this operation is performed only in factory)

o15

Electronics not connected to voltage

Dark display: Waiting for voltage at terminals 5U1, 5W1
(electronics supply voltage).

General visualization parameters

r001

Display of terminals 4 and 5 (main setpoint)

(G113)
r002

Analog input, terminals 103 and 104 (main actual value)

(G113)
r003

Analog input, terminals 6 and 7 (selectable input 1)

(G113)
r004

Analog input, terminals 8 and 9 (selectable input 2)

(G114)
r005

Analog input, terminals 10 and 11 (selectable input 3)

(G114)
r006

Analog output, terminals 14 and 15

(G115)
r007

Display of output value before normalization and offset

(G115)
r008

Display of output value before normalization and offset

(G116)
r009

Display of output value before normalization and offset

(G116)

Display of output value before normalization and offset

Analog output, terminals 16 and 17

Analog output, terminals 18 and 19
Analog output, terminals 20 and 21

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-7

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r010

Display of status of binary inputs

Representation on operator panel (PMU):

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: V2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

(G110)

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

10 9

Corresponding terminal is activated

(HIGH level is applied)
Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied)

Segment or bit
0 ........ Terminal 36
1 ........ Terminal 37 (switch-on)
2 ........ Terminal 38 (operating enable)
3 ........ Terminal 39
4 ........ Terminal 40
5 ........ Terminal 41
6 ........ Terminal 42
7 ........ Terminal 43
8 ........ Terminal 211
9 ........ Terminal 212
10 ........ Terminal 213
11 ........ Terminal 214
12 ........ Safety shutdown (E-Stop is applied) 1)
13 ........ (not used)
14 ........ (not used)
15 ........ (not used)
1) The safety shutdown command is applied (segment dark) if
- terminal XS-105 is open (switch operation, see also Section 9)
or
- terminal XS-107 (Stop pushbutton) is opened briefly and terminal XS108 (Reset pushbutton) is not yet activated (pushbutton operation,
see also Section 9)
r011

Display of status of binary outputs

Representation on operator panel (PMU):

(G112)
(G117)

Segment ON:

Corresponding terminal is activated

(HIGH level is applied) or overloaded or short-circuited

Segment OFF:

Corresponding terminal is not activated

(LOW level is applied) or not overloaded or not shortcircuited

Display of status of binary output terminals:

Segment or bit
0 ..... Terminal 46
1 ..... Terminal 48
2 ..... Terminal 50
3 ..... Terminal 52
7 ..... Terminal 109/110 (relay contact for line contactor)
Display of overloading of binary outputs:
Segment or bit
8 ..... Terminal 46
9 ..... Terminal 48
10 .... Terminal 50
11 .... Terminal 52
12 .... Terminal 26 (15V output)
13 .... Terminal 34, 44 and/or 210 (24V output)

11-8

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r012

Motor temperature

-58 to +318
[C]
1C

(G185)

Display of motor temperature when a KTY 84 temperature sensor is

connected (P490.x=1).
A value of "0" is always output in r012 when a PTC thermistor or no
temperature sensor is installed.
i001:
i002:

r013

Heatsink temperature
Temperature rise
i001:
i002:

r015

Calculated motor temperature rise (see P114)

Calculated thyristor temperature rise (see P075)

Display of line voltage (armature)

(generated as arithmetic rectification average, RMS value display applies to
sinusoidal voltage, average over 3 line-to-line voltages)

r016

Display of line voltage (field)

(generated as arithmetic rectification average, RMS value display applies to
sinusoidal voltage)

r017

Display of line frequency

r018

Display of firing angle (armature)

(G163)
r019

Display of actual armature current

(G162)

The internal actual armature current value is displayed (arithmetic average

over the last 6 current peaks in each case)

r020

Display of the absolute value of armature current setpoint

(G162)
r021

Display of torque setpoint after torque limitation

(G160)

0.1% of rated motor torque (=rated motor armature current

Steps: 1 =
(P100) * magnetic flux at rated motor field current (P102))

r022

Display of torque setpoint before torque limitation

(G160)

0.1% of rated motor torque (=rated motor armature current

Steps: 1 =
(P100) * magnetic flux at rated motor field current (P102))

r023

Display of speed controller setpoint/actual value deviation

(G152)
r024

Display of actual speed value from pulse encoder

(G145)
r025

Display of actual speed controller value

(G151)
r026

Display of speed controller setpoint

(G152)
r027

Display of ramp-function generator output

(G136)
r028

Display of ramp-function generator input

(G136)
r029

Display of main setpoint before limitation

(G135)
r034

Display of firing angle (field)

(G166)
r035

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: 2
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.0 to 2800.0
[V]
0.1V

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.0 to 800.0
[V]
0.1V

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.00 to 120.00
[Hz]
0.01Hz
0.00 to 180.00
[degrees]
0.01degrees
-400.0 to 400.0
[% of P100]
0.1% of P100

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

0.0 to 300.0
[% of P100]
0.1% of P100
-400.0 to 400.0
[%]
0.1% (see column on
left)

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

-400.0 to 400.0
Ind: None
[%]
Type: I2
0.1% (see column on
left)

P052 = 3

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 180.00
[degrees]
0.01degrees
0.0 to 199.9
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Motor temperature 1 (sensor at terminals 22 / 23)

Motor temperature 2 (sensor at terminals 204 / 205)

Display of heatsink temperature

r014

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
Type: I2

Display of field current controller actual value

(G166)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

-47 to +200
[C]
1C
0.0 to 200.0
[%]
0.1%

11-9

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r036

Display of field current controller setpoint

0.0 to 199.9
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102
-1500.0 to 1500.0
[V]
0.1V
-1500.0 to 1500.0
[V]
0.1V
0.0 to 1500.0
[V]
0.1V

(G166)
r037

Display of actual EMF value

(G165)
r038

Display of actual armature voltage value

r039

Display of EMF setpoint

(G165)

This parameter displays the EMF setpoint which is applied as the control
quantity in the field-weakening range.
This value is calculated from:
Umotorrated Imotorrated * RA (= P101 P100 * P110)

r040

Display of limitations:

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
Type: I2

P052 = 3

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 7
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Representation on operator panel (PMU):

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

Corresponding limitation is reached

Corresponding limitation is not reached

Segment or bit
0
W limit (field) reached (P251)
1
Negative current limit (field) reached (K0274)
2
W limit (armature) reached (W acc. to P151
for continuous current, 165 for discontinuous current)
3 ....... Negative current limit (armature) reached (K0132)
4 ....... Negative maximum speed reached (P513)
Speed limiting controller responds (B0201)
5 ....... Negative torque limit reached (B0203)
6 ....... Neg. limitation at ramp generator output reached (K0182)
7 ....... Neg. limitation at ramp generator input reached (K0197)
8 ....... G limit (field) reached (P250)
9 ....... Positive current limit (field) reached (K0273)
10 ....... G limit (armature) reached (P150)
11 ....... Positive current limit (armature) reached (K0131)
12 ....... Positive maximum speed reached (P512)
Speed limiting controller responds (B0201)
13 ....... Positive torque limit reached (B0202)
14 ....... Pos. limitation at ramp generator output reached (K0181)
15 ....... Pos. limitation at ramp generator input reached (K0196)
Note:

This parameter has the same bit assignments as connector K0810.

Connector and binector displays

r041
High-resolution connector display:
(G121)

i001:
i002:

Display of connector selected in P042.01

Display of connector selected in P042.02

The display value is filtered with a time constant of 300ms (see Section 8,
Sheet G121)
P042
*
(G121)

r043
(G121)

11-10

High-resolution connector display:

i001:
i002:

Selection of connector to be displayed in r041.01

Selection of connector to be displayed in r041.02

The display value is filtered with a time constant of 300ms (see Section 8,
Sheet G121)
Connector display:
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:

Display of connector selected in P044.01

Display of connector selected in P044.02
Display of connector selected in P044.03
Display of connector selected in P044.04
Display of connector selected in P044.05
Display of connector selected in P044.06
Display of connector selected in P044.07

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P044
*

Connector display:

All connector
numbers
1

(G121)

r045
(G121)

P046
*
(G121)

r047

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:

Selection of connector displayed in r043.01

Selection of connector displayed in r043.02
Selection of connector displayed in r043.03
Selection of connector displayed in r043.04
Selection of connector displayed in r043.05
Selection of connector displayed in r043.06
Selection of connector displayed in r043.07

Binector display:
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

Selection of binector displayed in r045.01

Selection of binector displayed in r045.02
Selection of binector displayed in r045.03
Selection of binector displayed in r045.04

Display of fault diagnostic memory

Provides more detailed information about the cause of a fault after activation
of a fault message (see Section 10).
i001
i002
...
i016

(G189)

Display of time (hours) in which drive has been operating in states I, II or - -.

All times of approx. 0.1 s are included in the count.

r049

Fault time

(G189)

Display of time at which the current fault, and the last 7 acknowledged
faults, were activated.
Current fault
st
1 acknowledged fault
nd
2 acknowledged fault
rd
3 acknowledged fault
th
4 acknowledged fault
th
5 acknowledged fault
th
6 acknowledged fault
th
7 acknowledged fault

P052 = 3

All binector numbers

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 16
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 65535
[hours]
1 hour

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 65535
[hours]
1 hour

Ind: 8
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 4
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 0
Online

hours
hours
hours
hours
hours
hours
hours
hours

Language
Language of plaintext display on optional OP1S operator panel and in
DriveMonitor PC service routine
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:

Ind: 4
Type: O2

Word 16 (fault number)

Hours run

P050
*

0 to 1

Word 1 (fault value)

Word 2

r048

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Display of binector selected in P046.01

Display of binector selected in P046.02
Display of binector selected in P046.03
Display of binector selected in P046.04

Binector display:
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 7
FS=0
Type: L2

German
English
Spanish
French
Italian

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-11

Parameter list
PNU

11.3
P051
*

Description

Key parameters
0
6
7
9
21

26
27
28
29
30

P053
*

P054

11-12

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

see column on left

Ind: None
FS=40
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 0
Online

0, 1, 3

Ind: None
FS=3
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 0
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 0
on-line

0, 1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 0
Online

Access authorization levels

22
25

P052
*

05.2007

No access authorization
Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
Do not set (for use by DriveMonitor)
Restore factory settings
All parameters are reset to their defaults (factory settings).
Parameter P051 is then automatically reset to factory setting
"40".
Execute internal offset compensation (see Section 7.4)
Optimization run for precontrol and current controller (armature
and field) (see Section 7.5)
Optimization run for speed controller (see Section 7.5)
Optimization run for field weakening (see Section 7.5)
Optimization run for compensation of friction and moment of
inertia (see Section 7.5)
Optimization run for the speed controller with an oscillating
mechanical system (see Section 7.5)
Automatic setting of the parameters for SIMOREG CCP Altered
parameters:
P351.i001, U577, U578, U800,
in the event of a fault, P790 if appropriate
Access authorization to parameter values for authorized service
personnel

Selection of display parameters

0 Display only parameters that are not set to original factory

settings

Display only parameters for simple applications

Display all parameters used

Control word for the permanent memory

[SW 1.7 and later]

Disabling or enabling write accesses to the permanent memory

i001:

Disabling or enabling write accesses to the parameter memory

0 Only save parameter P053 in the permanent memory;
parameter changes are active immediately but the changed
values are only stored temporarily and are lost when the
electronics supply voltage is switched off
1 Save all parameter values in the permanent memory

i002:

Disabling or enabling write accesses to the memory of the

nonvolatile process data
0 Do not save nonvolatile process data in the permanent
memory
1 Save all nonvolatile process data in the permanent memory
If the nonvolatile process data are not stored (P053.002=0),
data are lost when the electronics supply of the SIMOREG DCMASTER is switched off, i.e. they have the value 0 after the
electronics supply is switched on again:
K0240: Setpoint of the motor potentiometer
K0309: Motor heating
K0310: Thyristor heating
K9195: Output of the 1st tracking/storage element
K9196: Output of the 2nd tracking/storage element

OP1S Background lighting

ON continuously

ON when panel is in use

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P055
*

Copy function data set

011 to 143
1

(G175)

This parameter allows parameter set 1, 2, 3 or 4 to be copied to parameter

set 1, 2, 3 or 4. This function is applicable only to parameters with 4 indices
in the function data set (see also Section 9.1, Data sets and Section 9.11,
and Section 8, Sheet G175).
0xy

Do nothing, automatic resetting value at the end of a copy

operation.

1xy

The contents of parameter set x (source data set, x=1, 2, 3 or 4)

are copied to parameter set y (target data set, y=1, 2, 3 or 4)
(parameter set x remains unchanged, the original contents of
parameter set y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective parameter set numbers (1, 2, 3 or 4)
of the source and target parameter sets.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=012
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 4
1
011 to 121
1

Ind: None
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=012
Type: L2

P052 = 3

1 to 2
1
0.0 to 14.5
0.1

Ind: None
Type: O2
Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.0 to 9.9
0.1

Ind: 5
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 5
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 2
Type: L2

P052 = 3

The copy operation is started by switching P055 over into parameter mode
when P055=1xy.
During the copy operation, the numbers of the parameters being copied are
displayed on the operator panel (PMU).
At the end of the copy operation, P055 is reset to P055=0xy.
r056
(G175)
P057
*
(G175)

Display of active function data set

Copy Bico data set
This parameter allows parameter set 1 or 2 to be copied to parameter set 1
or 2. This function is applicable only to parameters with 2 indices in the Bico
data set (see also Section 9.1, Data sets and Section 9.11, and Section 8,
Sheet G175).
0xy

Do nothing, automatic resetting value at the end of a copy

operation.

1xy

The contents of parameter set x (source data set, x=1 or 2) are

copied to parameter set y (target data set, y=1 or 2) (parameter
set x remains unchanged, the original contents of parameter set
y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective parameter set numbers (1 or 2) of the
source and target parameter sets.

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

The copy operation is started by switching P057 over into parameter mode
when P057=1xy.
During the copy operation, the numbers of the parameters being copied are
displayed on the operator panel (PMU).
At the end of the copy operation, P057 is reset to P057=0xy.
r058
(G175)
r059

Display of active Bico data set

Display of operating state
Meaning as for r000

11.4

Definition of SIMOREG DC-MASTER converter

r060

111:
Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
131 to 139:
Technology board
141 to 149:
Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)

i003:

Board in slot E (lower slot of location 2)

111:
Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
131 to 139:
Technology board
141 to 149:
Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)

i004:

Board in slot F (upper slot of location 3)

111:
Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
141 to 149:
Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)

i005:

Board in slot G (lower slot of location 3)

111:
Pulse encoder board (SBP) [SW 1.8 and later]
141 to 149:
Communications board
151, 152, 161: Special board (EB1, EB2, SLB)

r064

Board compatibility

(G101)

Compatibility identifier of boards in locations 1 to 3 of electronics box.

The compatibility identifier is bit-coded. To ensure the compatibility of a
board, it must have a "1" setting at the same bit location of the parameter
value as the CUD (in location 1 / index i001).
Indices:
i001: Compatibility identifier of board in location 1
i002: Compatibility identifier of board in slot D
i003: Compatibility identifier of board in slot E
i004: Compatibility identifier of board in slot F
i005: Compatibility identifier of board in slot G
Example:
Index Value
i001
253
i002
002
i003
001

Bit representation
0000 0000 1111 1101
0000 0000 0000 0010
0000 0000 0000 0001

Compatible with CUD

no
yes

r065

Software identifiers

(G101)

Extended software version identifiers in locations 1, 2, and 3 of the

electronics box
Indices:
i001: Software identifier of the board in location 1
i002: Software identifier of the board in slot D
i003: Software identifier of the board in slot E
i004: Software identifier of the board in slot F
i005: Software identifier of the board in slot G

11-14

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.5
P067
*
(G101)

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
Type: 02

P052 = 3

Ind: 16
Type: L2

P052 = 3

0 to 120
1

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

10 to 1000
[V]
1V
0.0 to 6553.5
[A]
0.1A

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 2
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.00 to 100.00
[A]
0.01A

Ind: 2
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Definition of SIMOREG DC-MASTER power section

Load class
1
2
3
4
5

[SW1.8 and later]

Load class DC I
Load class DC II
Load class DC III
Load class DC IV
US rating

1 to 5
1

The load classes are described in Chapter 3.4.1.

Depending on the load class selected, the device rated DC of the
SIMOREG DC-MASTER is reduced to a value of different magnitude to suit
the power section and load class.
The current value of the device rated DC is indicated in parameter r072.002.
Notes:
If the device rated DC is reduced via parameter P076.001, the lesser of the
two values is active.
If you set a value of > 1 in P067, you must ensure that the "Dynamic
overload capability of power module is enabled, i.e. a value of > 0 must be
set in parameter P075.
The SIMOREG DC-MASTER does not monitor for compliance with the
criteria of the load class set in parameter P067. If permitted by the power
module, the unit can operate for overload periods in excess of those defined
by the load class. The permissible overload period for the installed power
module is always longer than the period defined for the load class. The
SIMOREG DC-MASTER does monitor the actual permissible overload
period for the power module. See Section 9.15.
r068
(G101)

r069
(G101)

Options according to rating plate

0
1
2
3

No option
Option L04 (low voltage, 85V)
Option K00 (terminal expansion)
L04 and K00

Serial number of SIMOREG DC-MASTER converter

i001: 1 and 2 places of serial number

rd
th
i002: 3 and 4 places of serial number
th
th
i003: 5 and 6 places of serial number
th
th
i004: 7 and 8 places of serial number
th
th
i005: 9 and 10 places of serial number
th
th
i006: 11 and 12 places of serial number
th
th
i007: 13 and 14 places of serial number
i008 to i015:
0
i016: Checksum for serial number
The serial number ASCII code is displayed in this parameter. The number is
output in plaintext on the OP1S panel.

r070

MLFB (order number) of SIMOREG DC-MASTER converter

(G101)

The corresponding MLFB is displayed in encoded form in this parameter.

The MLFB is displayed in plaintext on the OP1S panel.

r071

Converter rated supply voltage (armature)

(G101)
r072

Converter rated supply voltage (armature) as specified on rating plate

(G101)

r073
(G101)

Converter rated DC current (armature)

i001:

Converter rated DC current (armature) as specified on rating

plate (output DC current at power terminals 1C1 and 1D1)

i002:

Actual converter rated DC current (armature) according to

setting in parameter P076.001 or P067

Converter rated DC current (field)

i001:

Converter rated DC current (field) as specified on rating plate

(output DC current at power terminals 3C and 3D)

i002:

Actual converter rated DC current (field) as set in parameter

P076.002

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-15

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r074

Converter rated supply voltage (field)

(G101)
P075
*

Converter rated supply voltage (field) as specified on rating plate

10 to 460
[V]
1V
0 to 2
1

(G101)
(G161)

P076
*
(G101)

Control word for power section

Selection of operating characteristics of thermal monitor (I2t monitoring) of
power section (see also Section 9.16 Dynamic overload capability of power
section).

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 2
FS=100.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

The Dynamic overload capability of the power module allows the

SIMOREG DC-MASTER to operate for short periods on armature currents
that are higher than the converter rated DC current specified on the rating
plate (=r072.001).
The permissible overload period is determined solely by the power module
and the preceding operating history.
The "thermal power module monitoring" function does not monitor operation
in compliance with the load class criteria set in parameter P067. If permitted
by the power module, the unit can operate for overload periods in excess of
those defined by the load class.
0

Dynamic overload capability is not permitted

The armature current is limited to P077 * r072.001.

Dynamic overload capability is permitted, alarm A039

The armature current is limited to P077 * 1.8 * r072.001 as long
as the calculated thyristor temperature does not exceed the
permitted value.
If the temperature exceeds the permitted value, the SIMOREG
DC-MASTER protects itself by reducing the current limit to P077
* r072.001. Alarm A039 is output at the same time.
The armature current setpoint limit is not increased to P077 *
1.8 * r072.001 (alarm A039 also disappears) until the calculated
thyristor temperature has dropped below the limit value again
and the armature current setpoint is lower than the converter
rated DC current (r072.001).

Dynamic overload capability is permitted, fault F039

The armature current is limited to P077 * 1.8 * r072.001 as long
as the calculated thyristor temperature does not exceed the
permitted value.
Fault message F039 is output if the permissible temperature
limit is exceeded.

Reduction of converter rated DC current

i001:
i002:

Reduction of converter rated DC current (armature)

Reduction of converter rated DC current (field)

see column on left

For the purpose of achieving a close match between the converter and
motor, the converter rated DC current is reduced to the value entered here.
The current value of the device rated DC is indicated in parameter r072.002.
The following values can be set:
10.0%, 20.0%, 33.3%, 40.0%, 50.0%, 60.0%, 66.6% 70.0%, 80.0%, 90.0%
and 100.0%
Note:
If a load class is selected in parameter P067 which causes a reduction in
the converter rated DC current, then the lower of the two parameter setting
values is effective.

11-16

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=1.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

P077

Total thermal reduction factor

(G101)
(G161)

The factor set in this parameter effects a reduction in the armature current
limit (as defined by the setting in P075).

0.50 to 1.00
0.01

i001: 10 to r071
i002: 10 to r074
[V]
1V

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: r071
i002: 400V
except when
r071 = 460V
then 460V
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

The converter must be derated in the following instances:

Operation at high ambient temperatures:

If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (on naturally air-cooled
converters) or 35C (on converters with forced air-cooling), the possible
load capability of the converter decreases as a consequence of the
maximum permissible thyristor junction temperature by percentage
reduction "a" as specified in the table in Section 3.4, resulting in a
temperature reduction factor of
ktemp = k1

Installation altitudes of over 1000m above sea level:

In this case, the lower air density and thus less effective cooling reduce
the possible load capability of the converter to the percentage load "b1"
specified in the table in Section 3.4, resulting in an installation altitude
reduction factor of
kaltitude = k2

P077 must be set as follows: P077 = ktemp * kaltitude

Note:
A general reduction in the converter rated DC current (through appropriate
setting of parameter P076.001) can be included in this calculation.
P078
(G101)

Reduction of converter rated supply voltage

i001:
i002:

Rated input voltage converter armature

Rated input voltage converter field

The rated voltage value of the power system actually used to supply the
power section must be set in this parameter.
This setting acts as the reference for the undervoltage, overvoltage and
phase failure monitoring functions (see also P351, P352 and P353) as well
as for connectors K0285 to K0289, K0291, K0292, K0301 K0302, K0303
and K0305

NOTE
If a SIMOREG converter is operated at a rated input voltage that is
lower than its rated supply voltage, then the rated DC voltage specified
in the technical data (Section 3.4) cannot be reached !
P079
*
(G162)
(G163)

Short pulses / long pulses, armature gating unit

Short pulses (0.89 ms=approx. 16 degrees at 50 Hz) are output

on the armature gating unit.

Long pulses (pulse duration up to approx. 0.1 ms before next

pulse) are output on the armature gating unit (e.g. required in
cases where field is supplied via armature terminals).

Must be set on the 12-pulse series master and the 12-pulse

series slave in a 12-pulse series connection (if two units are fed
with two line voltages with a 30 degree phase displacement)
[can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]. This setting has the
following effect:

Long pulses (pulse duration up to approx. 0.1 ms before next

pulse) are output every 30 degrees on the armature gating
unit.

Precontrol for the armature current controller is switched over

from 6-pulse operation to 12-pulse series connection
operation (half the total motor EMF must be fed in P162).

P110 and P111 only have an effect on half the set total motor
value (Sheets G162, G165)

Must only be set on the paralleling device of the 12-pulse series

master in a 12-pulse series connection (if two units are fed with
line voltages with a 30 degree phase displacement). Long
pulses (pulse duration up to approx. 0.1 ms before next pulse)
are output every 30 degrees on the armature gating unit [can
only be set in SW 2.1 and later].

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-17

Parameter list
PNU

11.6
P080
*

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

1 to 2

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Setting values for converter control

Control word for brake control
1

The brake is a holding brake

When the "Operating enable" command is cancelled or when
the "Voltage disconnection" or "E-Stop" command is input, the
"Close brake" command is not input until n< nmin (P370, P371)
is reached.

The brake is an operating brake

When the "Operating enable" command is cancelled or when
the "Voltage disconnection" or "E-Stop" command is input, the
"Close brake" command is input immediately, i.e. while the
motor is still rotating.

(G140)

P081
*

05.2007

EMF-dependent field weakening

No field-weakening operation as a function of speed or EMF

(100% of rated motor field current is applied constantly as the
internal field current setpoint).

Field-weakening operation by internal closed-loop EMF control

to ensure that in field-weakening operation, i.e. at speeds above
the motor rated speed (="field-weakening activation limit
speed), the motor EMF is maintained constantly at the setpoint
EMFset (K0289) = P101 P100 * P110 (field current setpoint is
the product of the EMF controller output and the precontrol
component determined by the actual speed according to the
field characteristic).

(G165)

NOTICE
When P081=1, a valid field characteristic must be available (P117=1),
otherwise the optimization run for field weakening (P051=27) must be
executed.

11-18

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P082
*

Operating mode for field

0 to 24
1

(G166)

No field
0

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

No field is used (e.g. in the case of permanent-field motors). The

field gating pulses are disabled. Unlike all other cases, the motor
flux (K0290) is not calculated according to the field characteristic
(P120 to P139) as a function of the actual field current (K0265),
but set to the value for 100% rated flux.
Internal field power module

The field is switched with the line contactor - this setting must be
selected if the mains supplies for the field and armature power
sections are connected or disconnected simultaneously (field
gating pulses are enabled/disabled at the same time as the line
contactor is closed/opened, the field current decays with the
field time constant).

Automatic injection of standstill field set in P257 after expiry of a

time period set in P258, after converter has reached operating
state o7 or higher.

the field is controlled as described in para. 4.

NOTICE
Even though changes to the parameter value from > 0 to = 0 are
accepted in operating states of o1.0, they do not take effect until the
converter reaches an operating state of o7.0.
[Values 11 to 24 can be set only in SW 1.9 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-19

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P083
*

Selection of actual speed value

0 to 4
1

FDS
(G151)

P084
*
(G160)

P085

Actual speed value is not yet selected (fixed value 0%)

Actual speed value supplied by "Main actual value channel

(K0013) (terminals XT.103, XT.104)

Actual speed value supplied by "Actual speed from pulse

encoder channel (K0040)

Actual speed value supplied by "Actual EMF" channel (K0287),

but weighted with P115 (operation without tacho)
Note:
The effectiveness of the overspeed monitoring function (see
Section 8, function diagram G188) is restricted, since very high
motor speeds can be reached if the EMF is utilized as the actual
speed value when the actual field current value is too low.

Actual speed value is wired up freely (selected in P609)

Selection of closed-loop speed / current or torque control

Operation under closed-loop speed control

Operation under closed-loop current / torque control

The setpoint supplied by the ramp-function generator output is
input as a current or torque setpoint (speed controller is
bypassed)

Wait period after cancellation of inching command

After an inching command has been cancelled, the drive dwells in operating
state o1.3 for the time period set in this parameter with the controllers
disabled, but the line contactor closed. This wait period does not commence
until n<nmin (P370, P371) is reached. If a new inching command is input
within this period, then the drive switches to the next operating state (o1.2 or
lower). However, if the time runs out without a new inching command being
entered, then the line contactor drops out and the drive switches to
operating state o7 (see also Section 9).

P086

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 2
1

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.0 to 60.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: None
FS=10.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: None
FS=0.40
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 10.00
[s]
If the voltage fails (F001, F004) at one of the terminals 1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 3U1, 0.01s
3W1, 5U1 or 5W1, or if it drops below a certain threshold (F006
undervoltage) or exceeds a certain threshold (F007 overvoltage), or its
frequency is too low (F008 frequency < P363) or too high (F009 frequency >
P364), or if the actual field current drops to below 50% of the field current
setpoint for more than 0.5s (F005), then the corresponding fault message is
activated only if the fault condition has not been eliminated within the
"Automatic restart" period set in this parameter.

Voltage failure period for automatic restart

The gating pulses and controllers are disabled while the fault conditions are
present. The converter dwells in operating state o4 (in the case of armature
line voltage fault) or o5 (in the case of field line voltage or field current fault)
or in o13.
Setting this parameter to 0.00s deactivates the "Automatic restart" function.
NOTE:
Setting values higher than 2.00s are effective only in relation to the voltages
at terminals 1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 3U1 and 3W1.
A "restart time" of 2.00 s is operative in this case for the voltage at terminals
5U1 and 5W1 (electronics power supply).
P087

Brake release time

(G140)

-10.00 to -0.01 s
The "Release brake" command is delayed in relation to enabling of the
gating pulses for thyristors and controllers (i.e. operating state I, II or --) by
the delay time set in this parameter. During this period, the motor rotates
against the closed brake. This setting is useful, for example, for vertical
loads.

-10.00 to 10.00
[s]
0.01s

0.00 to +10.00 s
When a "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is input with
"Operating enable", the drive dwells in operating state o1.0 for the delay
period set in this parameter; the internal controller enabling signal, and thus
enabling of the thyristor gating pulses, do not take effect until the delay
period has elapsed so as to give the holding brake time to open.

11-20

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P088

Brake closing time

(G140)
(G187)

When the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or "Crawling" command is cancelled, or

when the "Switch-on" command is not applied, or when the "Fast stop"
command is input, the internal controller disabling signal, and thus the
thyristor gating pulse disabling signal, is not actually activated after n<nmin
has been reached until the time delay set in this parameter has elapsed.
During this period, the drive continues to produce a torque (operating state
I, II or ), so as to give the holding brake enough time to close.

P089

Maximum wait time for voltage to appear at power section

When the line contactor has dropped out and the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or
"Crawling" command is applied, the converter waits in operating states o4
and o5 for voltage to appear at the power section, for the actual field current
value (K0265) to reach > 50% of the field current setpoint (K0268). The
corresponding fault message is activated if no power section voltage and no
field current is detected. This parameter specifies the maximum total delay
period in which the drive may dwell in operating states o4 and o5 (response
threshold for function which checks for voltage at power section, see
parameter P353).

P090

Stabilization time for line voltage

When the line contactor has dropped out and the "Switch-on" or "Inching" or
"Crawling" command is applied, or after a phase failure has been detected
in the armature or field mains supply with active "Automatic restart" function
(P086>0), the converter dwells in operating state o4 and o5 until voltage
appears at the power section. Line voltage is not assumed to be applied to
the power terminals until the amplitude, frequency and phase symmetry
have remained within the permissible tolerance for a period exceeding the
setting in this parameter. The parameter applies to both the armature and
field power connections.

0.00 to 10.00
[s]
0.01s

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 60.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: None
FS=2.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.01 to 1.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: None
FS=0.02
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 199.99
i002: 0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Caution:
The setting in P090 must be lower than the settings in P086 (except when
P086=0.0) and P089!
P091

Setpoint threshold
i001:

i002:

Threshold for function "Switch on only if setpoint is low

The converter can be switched on only if a setpoint
|K0193| P091.001 is applied to the ramp-function generator
input. If the applied setpoint is higher, the converter dwells in
state o6 after "switch-on" until the absolute setpoint value is
P091.001.
Threshold for function
"Automatic pulse disable if setpoint is low [SW 2.0 and later]
If |n-set| (|K0193|) and |n-act| (K0166) are less than P091.002,
the firing pulses are disabled and the drive goes into state o2.0.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-21

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P092

Delay times for field reversal

(G200)

These times are used to control a reversing contactor for reversing the field
polarity on a 1-quadrant converter with field reversal.
i001:

0.0 to 10.0
[s]
0.1s

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=
i001: 3.0
i002: 0.2
i003: 0.1
i004: 3.0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 120.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: None
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 6500.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: None
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 1.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 60.0
[min]
0.1min

Ind: None
FS=4.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Delay time for the field reduction before opening of the current
field contactor
When field polarity reversal is initiated, the delay time set in
P092.i001 elapsed after reaching Ifield (K0265) < Ifield min
(P394) before the current field contactor is opened.

i002:

Delay time before actuation of the new field contactor

[only SW 1.7 and later]
After opening the current field contactor the delay time set in
P092.i002 elapsed before the field contactor for the "new" field
direction is actuated (drop-out delay time of the contactor use is
usually longer then the pick-up delay time).

i003:

Delay time for enabling the field firing pulses

[only SW 1.7 and later]
After actuation of the field contactor for the "new" field direction,
the delay time acc. to P092.i003 elapses before the field firing
pulses are enabled. This time must be longer than the pick-up
delay time of the contactor used.

i004:

Delay time after the field build-up before armature enable

[only SW 1.7 and later]
After - directly following the field firing pulse enable - the actual
field current value Ifield in the "new" field direction has reached
the value Ifield (K0265) > Ifield set (K0268)*P398/100%, the
delay time acc. to P092.i004 elapses. Then the internal
(armature) "Operating enable of field reversal" is issued, i.e. the
Stopping of the drive in operating state o1.4 is canceled. This
delay time permits waiting of the end of overshooting of the
actual field current value and therefore overshooting of the EMF
of the DC machine straight after the field current has been built
up again, before the "armature operating enable" is issued. This
is intended to prevent armature overcurrents due to excessive
EMF during overshooting.

P093

Pick-up delay for line contactor

Pick-up of the line contactor is delayed in relation to "Switch on auxiliaries"
by the time delay set in this parameter.

P094

Switch-off delay for auxiliaries

Switch-off of the auxiliaries is delayed in relation to dropout of the line
contactor by the time delay set in this parameter.

P095

Pick-up time for a contactor in the DC circuit

If the DC output (terminals 1C1 and 1D1) is switched through to the motor
via a contactor, and if this contactor is controlled by the "Relay for line
contactor" (terminals 109 and 110), then the gating pulses may not be
enabled until the contactor has safely picked up. For this purpose, it may be
necessary to parameterize an additional delay time for the pick-up
operation. The timer set in P095 commences during a pick-up operation
when the converter reaches operating state o5. If the timer has still not run
down by the time the converter exits state o4, then the converter dwells in
state o3.2 until the timer has finished.
During the time period set in P095, the "Main contactor checkback" signal
must also switch to "1" if this function is activated (see P691). Otherwise the
converter dwells in state o3.3 until the timer has finished and fault message
F004 is then output with fault value 6.

P096

After-running time for the device fan

[SW 1.6 and later]

After the drive has been shut down (operating state 7.0 reached)
the device fan continues to run until the power section has cooled down.
With this parameter you can set the minimum duration for the after-running
time.
Note:
If the field current is not switched off after the drive is shut down (see P082),
the field current can prevent cooling of the power section. In this case, the
equipment blower is never switched off.

11-22

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

P097
*
(G166)

Response of field current to fault messages

P098
*

Contactor in DC circuit

11.7
P100
*
FDS
(G165)
P101
*
FDS
(G165)

P102
*
FDS
(G165)
P103
*
FDS
(G165)
P104
*
FDS
(G161)
P105
*
FDS
(G161)
P106
*
FDS
(G161)
P107
*
FDS
(G161)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 2.1 and later]

Field pulses are blocked when a fault message is activated

Field pulses are not blocked when a fault message is activated,

but the field current setpoint cannot be increased above its
current setting.
[SW 2.1 and later]

The DC circuit does not include a contactor

The DC circuit contains a contactor which is controlled by the

relay for the line contactor" (terminals 109 and 110).
The values for the armature voltage Ua and for EMF (K0123,
K0124, K0286, K0287, K0291, K0292, r037, r038) are set to 0%
whenever B0124 = 0 (request main contactor not active). This is
because the motor terminals are separated in this case from
output terminals 1C and 1D of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER and
it is then impossible to measure the armature voltage Ua (or the
EMF).

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 6553.0
[A]
0.1A

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10 to 2800
[V]
1V

Ind: 4
FS=400
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.00 to 600.00
[A]
0.01A

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[A]
0.01A

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 10000
[rev/min]
1rev/min

Ind: 4
FS=5000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.1 to 6553.0
[A]
0.1A

Ind: 4
FS=0.1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 10000
[rev/min]
1rev/min

Ind: 4
FS=5000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.1 to 6553.0
[A]
0.1A

Ind: 4
FS=0.1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Definition of motor
Rated motor armature current (acc. to motor rating plate)
0.0

Parameter not yet set

Rated motor armature voltage (acc. to motor rating plate)

Notes:
One of the functions of this parameter is to determine the point at which
field-weakening operation commences.
If possible, the rated motor armature voltage + the voltage drop in the motor
feeder cable (for a current setting acc. to P100) should be set in P101.
Rated motor field current (acc. to motor rating plate)
0.00

Parameter not yet set

Minimum motor field current

Note:
P103 must be set to <50% of P102 to execute the optimization run for field
weakening (P051=27).
Speed n1 (acc. to motor rating plate)
st

1 point (speed value) in speed-dependent current limitation.

This parameter is used together with P105, P106, P107 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.
Armature current I1 (acc. to motor rating plate)
st

1 point (current value) in speed-dependent current limitation.

This parameter is used together with P104, P106, P107 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.
Speed n2 (acc. to motor rating plate)
nd

2 point (speed value) in speed-dependent current limitation.

This parameter is used together with P104, P105, P107 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.
Armature current I2 (acc. to motor rating plate)
nd

2 point (current value) in speed-dependent current limitation.

This parameter is used together with P104, P105, P106 and P108 to define
the characteristic of the current limiting value as a function of actual speed.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-23

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P108
*

Maximum operating speed n3

1 to 10000
[rev/min]
1rev/min

FDS
(G161)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=5000
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Armature circuit resistance

When the speed-dependent current limitation is in use, the maximum speed

which is defined by the selection of the actual speed source as set in P083,
must be entered in this parameter:
When P083=1 (analog tacho):
Speed at which a tacho voltage as set in P741 is reached
When P083=2 (pulse encoder):
Same value as maximum speed set in P143
When P083=3 (operation without tacho):
Speed at which EMF as set in P115 is reached

0 to 1
1

P109
*
FDS
(G161)

Control word for speed-dependent current limitation

P110
FDS
(G162)
(G165)
P111
FDS
(G162)
(G165)
P112

0.000 to 32.767
[]
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol
0.001
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

Ind: 4
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Armature circuit inductance

0.000 to 327.67
[mH]
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol 0.01mH
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 3276.7
[]
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol
0.1
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.50 to 2.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.0 to 80.0
[min]
0.1min

Ind: 4
FS=10.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

1.00 to 140.00
[% of P078.001]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2800
[V]
1V

Ind: 4
FS=340
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FDS
(G166)
P113
*
FDS

Speed-dependent current limitation is deactivated

(=standard setting, P104...P108 are not evaluated)

Speed-dependent current limitation is activated

Field circuit resistance

Continuous current factor torque control / current control

This parameter defines the current to be permitted as a continuous current
2
by the I t motor monitoring function without activation of alarm message
A037 or fault message F037.
This current is the product of calculation P113 * P100.

P114

Thermal time constant of motor

(see Section 9.15)

FDS

0.0

P115

EMF at maximum speed in operation without tachometer

FDS

This parameter is used to adjust the speed in cases where the internal
actual EMF value is applied as the actual speed value. P115 defines the
EMF which corresponds to maximum speed as a percentage of P078.001.

(G151)
P117
*
FDS

I2t monitoring deactivated

Control word for field characteristic

No valid field characteristic has yet been recorded

Valid field characteristic (P118 to P139 valid)

The parameter is set automatically during the field-weakening optimization

run (P051=27).
P118
FDS
(G165)

Rated EMF value

EMF that is reached with a full field (according to parameter P102) and a
speed as set in parameter P119.
The parameter is set automatically during the field-weakening optimization
run (P051=27) and specifies in this case the setpoint EMF in the fieldweakening range.
Note:
As regards the closed-loop field-weakening control, only the ratio between
P118 and P119 is relevant. The EMF setpoint in the field-weakening range
is determined by (P101 P100 * P110). When the setting in P100, P101 or
P110 is changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run need
not be repeated. However, P118 then no longer defines the setpoint EMF in
the field-weakening range.
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the fieldweakening optimization run must be repeated, the same applies if the
maximum speed setting is subsequently re-adjusted.

11-24

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

P119

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
Speed at which an actual EMF value as set in parameter P118 is reached at 0.1%
full field (according to parameter P102).
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for field
weakening (P051=27) and specifies in this case the field-weakening
activation limit speed.

FDS
(G165)

Rated speed

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Note:
As regards the closed-loop field-weakening control, only the ratio between
P118 and P119 is relevant. When the setting in P100, P101 or P110 is
changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run need not be
repeated. However, P119 then no longer defines the field-weakening
activation limit speed.
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the fieldweakening optimization run must be repeated, the same applies if the
maximum speed setting is subsequently re-adjusted.

Magnetization characteristic (field characteristic)

Parameters P120 to P139 determine the curve shape of the magnetization characteristic (field characteristic) in normalized representation
(see example field characteristic below for further details).
Note:
When the setting in parameter P102 is changed subsequently, the field-weakening optimization run must be repeated, because this alters
the degree of saturation and thus the shape of the magnetization characteristic. (When parameter P100, P101 or P110, or the maximum
speed adjustment, is subsequently altered, the settings in P120 to P139 remain the same, but the values in P118 and/or P119 are
changed).
0.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
r120
Field current for 0% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 0)
[% of P102]
Type: O2
FDS
0.1% of P102
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P121
Field current for 5% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 1)
[%]
FS=3.7
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P122
Field current for 10% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 2)
[% of P102]
FS=7.3
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P123
Field current for 15% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 3)
[% of P102]
FS=11.0
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P124
Field current for 20% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 4)
[% of P102]
FS=14.7
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P125
Field current for 25% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 5)
[% of P102]
FS=18.4
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P126
Field current for 30% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 6)
[% of P102]
FS=22.0
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P127
Field current for 35% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 7)
[% of P102]
FS=25.7
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P128
Field current for 40% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 8)
[% of P102]
FS=29.4
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P129
Field current for 45% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 9)
[% of P102]
FS=33.1
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)
0.0 to 100.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P130
Field current for 50% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 10)
[% of P102]
FS=36.8
P051 = 40
FDS
0.1% of P102
Type: O2
Offline
(G165)
(G166)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-25

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P131
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P132
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P133
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P134
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P135
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P136
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P137
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P138
FDS
(G165)
(G166)
P139
FDS
(G165)
(G166)

Field current for 55% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 11)

11-26

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=40.6
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 60% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 12)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=44.6
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 65% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 13)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=48.9
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 70% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 14)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=53.6
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 75% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 15)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=58.9
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 80% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 16)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=64.9
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 85% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 17)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=71.8
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 90% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 18)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=79.8
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field current for 95% motor flux (field characteristic, point no. 19)

0.0 to 100.0
[% of P102]
0.1% of P102

Ind: 4
FS=89.1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Example of a field characteristic

The example characteristic exhibits a sharper curvature (i.e. a lower degree of saturation) than the field characteristic produced by the
factory setting.

Motor flux in % of ratet flux

100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25

15
10
5
0
P129

P124
P123
P122
P121
r120

P134

P128
P127
P126
P125

P139

P133
P132

P137

P131
P130

100,0%

P138

Field current in % of P102

P136
P135

1) For actual field currents If of > 100% of P102, the characteristic is extended linearly for internal calculation of the motor flux.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-27

Parameter list
PNU

11.8

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Definition of pulse encoder, speed sensing using pulse encoder

The following types of pulse encoder can be used (type selection in P140):
1.

Pulse encoder type 1

Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90 (with/without zero marker)
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

Pulse encoder type 1a

Encoder with two pulse tracks mutually displaced by 90 (with/without zero marker). The zero marker is converted internally to a
signal
in the same way as on encoder type 1.
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

360
225 60

internal zero marker

Pulse encoder type 2

Encoder with one pulse track per direction of rotation (with/without zero marker).
CW rotation

CCW rotation

Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

Pulse encoder type 3

Encoder with one pulse track and one output for direction of rotation (with/without zero marker).
CW rotation
Track 1
X173 28, 29
Track 2
X173 30, 31
Zero marker
X173 32, 33

11-28

CCW rotation

Pulse output
Rot. direction

Zero marker

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Notes on selecting a pulse encoder (number of pulses):

The lowest speed which can be measured by a pulse encoder is calculated with the following equation:

n min [ rev / min] =21973

1
X P141

Formula applies with a nominal measuring time of 1 ms when P146=0 and P147=0

The following applies:

X = 1 for 1x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=0)
2 for 2x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=1)
4 for 4x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (P144=2)
see also Single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses
Lower speeds are interpreted as n=0.
The frequency of the pulse encoder signals at terminals 28 and 29 or 30 and 31 must not be higher than 300 kHz.
The highest speed which can be measured by a pulse encoder is calculated with the following equation:
n max [ rev / min] =

18000000
P141

When selecting a pulse encoder, therefore, it is important to ensure that the lowest possible speed 0 is significantly higher than nmin and
the highest possible speed does not exceed nmax.

IM >>
IM

21973
X n min [ rev / min]

Equations for selection of pulses per revolution IM of pulse encoder

18000000
n max [ rev / min]

Single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses:

The setting for single/multiple evaluation of encoder pulses is applicable for both the speed and position sensing functions.
1x evaluation:

Only the rising edges of one pulse track are evaluated (applies to all encoder types).

2x evaluation:

The rising and falling edges of one pulse track are evaluated (can be set for encoder types 1, 1a and 2).

4x evaluation:

The rising and falling edges of both pulse tracks are evaluated (can be set for encoder types 1 and 1a)

See parameters P450 and P451 for position sensing function

P140

Selection of pulse encoder type

(G145)

See beginning of this Section (11.8) for pulse encoder types

0
1
2
3
4

Number of pulses of pulse encoder

(G145)
P142

Matching to pulse encoder signal voltage

0
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 32767
[pulses/rev]
1 pulse/rev
0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=500
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

No encoder/"Speed sensing with pulse encoder" function not

selected
Pulse encoder type 1
Pulse encoder type 1a
Pulse encoder type 2
Pulse encoder type 3

P141

(G145)

0 to 4
1

Pulse encoder outputs 5 V signals

Pulse encoder outputs 15V signals

Matching of internal operating points to signal voltage of incoming pulse

encoder signals.

CAUTION
Resetting parameter P142 to the alternative setting does not switch
over the supply voltage for the pulse encoder (terminals X173.26 and
27). Terminal X173.26 always supplies +15V. An external voltage
supply is must be provided for pulse encoders requiring a 5V supply.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-29

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P143
FDS
(G145)

Setting the maximum speed for pulse encoder operation

1.0 to 6500.0
[rev/min]
0.1rev/min

The speed set in this parameter corresponds to an actual speed (K0040) of

100%.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=500.0
Type: O4

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Control parameters for speed sensing with pulse encoder P144 to P147:
P144 and P147 determine the basic setting for actual speed sensing by means of pulse encoder (single or multiple evaluation of pulse
encoder signals and nominal measuring time) and thus also define the lowest possible measurable speed (minimum speed).
P145 and P146 can be used in special cases to extend the measurable speed range down to even lower speeds, on the basis of the
minimum speed defined by the settings in P144 and P147.
P144
*
FDS
(G145)

P145
*
FDS
(G145)

Multiple evaluation of encoder signals

0
1
2

1x evaluation of pulse encoder signals

2x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (for encoder types 1, 1a, 2)
4x evaluation of pulse encoder signals (for encoder types 1, 1a)

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Note:
In contrast to the 1x evaluation method, 2x or 4x evaluation reduces the
minimum measurable speed by a factor of 2 or 4 respectively, but may
produce an "unsteady" actual speed value on encoders with unequal
pulse/pause ratio or without an exact 90 displacement between encoder
signals.
Automatic measuring range switchover for measurement of low
speeds - switchover of multiple evaluation
0

Automatic switchover of multiple evaluation of pulse encoder

signals OFF (i.e. P144 is always active)

Automatic switchover of multiple evaluation of pulse encoder

signals ON (i.e. when P144 = 0, 2x evaluation is selected for low
speeds and 4x evaluation for very low speeds. When P144 = 1,
4x evaluation is selected for low speeds)
As opposed to P145 = 0, this setting reduces the minimum
measurable speed by up to a factor of 4.

Caution:
Switching over the multiple evaluation method for encoder pulses also
affects the position sensing function in the measuring channel. For this
reason, this setting may not be used in conjunction with positioning
operations. Connectors K0042 to K0044 are inoperative when P145 = 1.
P146
*
FDS
(G145)

Automatic measuring range switchover for measurement of low

speeds - switchover of measuring time
0

Automatic switchover of measuring time OFF

(i.e. P147 is always active)

Automatic switchover of measuring time ON

This setting extends the measuring time for low speeds (based
on the measuring time set in P147, i.e. when P147 = 0, the
nominal measuring time is switched over to 2 ms for low speeds
and to 4 ms for very low speeds. When P147 = 1, the nominal
measuring time is switched over to 4 ms for low speeds)

Caution:
When P146=1, the minimum measurable speed can be reduced by up to a
factor of 4 as opposed to a 0 setting. However, this setting results in a
longer actual speed sensing delay in the extended minimum speed range.

11-30

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P147
*

Nominal measuring time of pulse encoder signal evaluation

0 to 20
1

FDS
(G145)

Nominal measuring time 1 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized

measurement

Nominal measuring time 2 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized

measurement (produces "steadier" actual speed value than
setting 0)

Nominal measuring time 4 ms, gating-pulse-synchronized

measurement (for drives with high moment of inertia, produces
"steadier" actual speed value than setting 0)

Nominal measuring time 0.2 ms, asynchronous measurement

13
...
20

Nominal measuring time 0.3 ms, asynchronous measurement

Note:
12 to 20

P148
*
FDS
(G145)

11.9

Notice:
When P147=1 or 2 the minimum measurable speed can be reduced by a
factor of 2 or 4 respectively as opposed to 0 or 12 to 20. However, these
settings increase the actual speed sensing delay. For this reason, P200
should be parameterized to at least 5ms before the optimization run for the
speed controller is executed.
Pulse encoder monitoring function
0

Pulse encoder monitoring OFF (activation of F048 in response

to a defective pulse encoder is disabled)

Pulse encoder monitoring ON (hardware monitoring of pulse

encoder signals for implausible behaviour (i.e. frequent speed
changes, distance between edges too short, encoder cable
defect or short between two encoder cables) may cause
activation of F048)

0 to 1
1

Rectifier stability limit for firing angle of armature converter.

0 to 165
[degrees]
1 degrees

(G163)
P151

Alpha W limit (armature)

FDS

Inverter stability limit for firing angle of armature converter.

120 to 165
[degrees]
1 degrees

(G163)
P152
*
FDS

Closed-loop armature current control,auto-reversing stage,armature gating

unit

FDS

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

Nominal measuring time 0.2 ms to 1 ms, asynchronous

measurement
for highly dynamic drives, reduces dead time in the actual speed
value channel, but "less steady" actual speed value than
achieved with setting 0 to 2 [can be set only in SW 1.9 and later]

Alpha G limit (armature)

P153
*

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Nominal measuring time 1 ms, asynchronous measurement

P150

(G163)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

The internal line synchronization for the armature gating pulses derived from
the power terminals (armature mains infeed) is averaged over the number of
line periods set in this parameter. In operation on "weak" power supplies
with unstable frequencies, for example, on a diesel-driven generator
(isolated operation), this parameter must be set lower than for operation on
"constant V/Hz" systems in order to achieve a higher frequency correction
speed.
0 to 3
Control word for the armature precontrol
1
0
Armature precontrol disabled, output of the precontrol=165
1

Armature precontrol active

Armature precontrol active but EMF influence only active on

change in torque direction

Armature precontrol active but without EMF influence., i.e. for

precontrol, the EMF is assumed to be 0.
(recommended setting for supplying large inductance from
armature terminals, e.g. solenoids, field supply)
[can only be set on SW 1.7 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Ind: 4
FS=5 / 30
(for 1Q / 4Q
converters)
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=150
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=20
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

11-31

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P154
*
FDS
(G162)

Set armature current controller I component to zero

0 to 1
1

P155

Armature current controller P gain

FDS

Proportional gain of armature current controller

This parameter is automatically set during the optimization run for precontrol
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

(G162)

0
1

Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P

controller)
Controller I component is active

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 4
FS=0.10
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0,200
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.000 to 1.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: 4
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of n controller
output

Ind: 4
FS=0.01
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.000 to 2.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: 4
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 100
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.01 to 200.00
0.01

Control word for current setpoint integrator

FDS

Reduced gearbox stressing

The integrator is active only after a change in torque direction
(acts as ramp-function generator for armature current setpoint
only until the output reaches the setpoint at the integrator input
st
for the 1 time after a change in torque direction).

Current setpoint integrator

The integrator is always active (acts as ramp-function generator
for the armature current setpoint)

(G162)

P158
FDS
(G162)

Ramp-up time for current setpoint integrator (reduced gearbox

stressing)
Period of an acceleration ramp with a setpoint step change from 0% to
100% at r072.002.
For older DC machines (i.e. unsuitable for steep rates of current rise),
P157=1 and P158=0.040 must be set.

P159
FDS

Switchover threshold for auto-reversing stage (armature)

requested torque direction
0.05%

(G163)
I
0

Speed controller output

II
P159

P160

Additional torque-free interval

FDS
(G163)

Additional torque-free interval for torque direction change in 4Q operation.

It is particularly important to set this parameter to values of > 0 for converter
armatures which supply large inductances (e.g. lifting solenoids).

P161

Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses

FDS

Number of additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses after

(G163)

These pulses cause the current to decay prior to a change in torque

direction. When it drops below the thyristor holding current value, the
current is suddenly chopped by the unfired second thyristor and the residual
energy stored in the load inductor must be dissipated via a suppressor
circuit (e.g. a varistor) to prevent the load inductor from producing a surge
voltage. See also P179.

11-32

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P162
*

EMF calculation method for armature precontrol

0 to 3
1

FDS
(G162)

P163
*
FDS

The EMF derived from the measured armature voltage (K0123)

is applied

The EMF derived from the calculated armature voltage (K0124)

is applied
(the purpose of this setting is to prevent the occurrence of any
low-frequency (< 15 Hz) armature current fluctuations)

The EMF for armature current precontrol is calculated from the

armature voltage selected with P193 (the resistive + inductive
armature voltage drop is subtracted internally; if P079 = 2, then
P110 and P111 only have an effect on half the value) [can only
be set in SW 2.1 and later]

The connector selected with P193 serves as the EMF for

armature current precontrol. This setting also facilitates DC link
voltage control [can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]

EMF filtering method for armature precontrol

No filtering

Filtering element, filter time constant = half line period (10 ms at

50 Hz line frequency)
(for use by works engineers only)

Averaging over the last 2 EMF values

(for use by works engineers only )

(G162)

Averaging over the last 3 EMF values

Filtering element, filter time constant = line period (20 ms at

50 Hz line frequency) [can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]

Filtering element, filter time constant = 2 * line period (40 ms at

50 Hz line frequency) [can only be set in SW 2.1 and later]

Filtering element, filter time constant = 4 * line period (80 ms at

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

BDS
(G163)

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Binector status =
0 ... Enable for M0 or MII
1 ... Enable for M0 or MI

11.10
P169
*
FDS
(G160)

Current limitation, torque limitation

Select closed-loop torque / current control
See parameter P170

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-33

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P170
*

Select closed-loop torque / current control

0 to 1
1

FDS
(G160)

P169

P170

Closed-loop current control and current limitation

Closed-loop torque control with torque limitation (the

torque setpoint is converted to a current setpoint: Current
setpoint = torque setpoint / motor flux)
Current limitation is active additionally

Closed-loop current control with torque limitation (the

specified torque limit is converted to a current limit:
Current limit = torque limit / motor flux)
Current limitation is active additionally

Do not set!

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Note:
A valid field characteristic (P117=1) must be available when P169 or
P170=1. If one is not, the optimization run for field weakening (P051=27)
must be executed.
P263 determines the input quantity for the motor flux calculation.
P171
FDS
(G160)
(G161)
P172
FDS
(G160)
(G161)
P173
*

System current limit in torque direction I

0.0 to 300.0
[% of P100]
0.1% of P100

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

System current limit in torque direction II

-300.0 to 0.0
[% of P100]
0.1% of P100

Ind: 4
FS=-100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Source for "Torque control / Current control" switchover

[SW 1.9 and later]

All binector numbers

BDS

The binector selected here has the same effect as parameter P170.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

(G160)
P175
*
FDS
(G162)
P176
*
FDS
(G162)
P177
*
BDS
(G163)

Source for variable P gain

[SW 1.8 and later]

The content of the selected connector acts as the P gain for the armature
current controller after multiplication with P155.
Source for variable Integration time

[SW 1.8 and later]

The content of the selected connector acts as the integration time for the
armature current controller after multiplication with P156.
Source for the command "no immediate pulse disable"
[SW 1.8 and later]
A low signal causes the armature firing pulses to be disabled immediately
without waiting for the I=0 signal or without outputting alpha-W pulses for
current reduction. The additional alpha-W pulses (acc. to parameters P179
and P161) are not output either. As long as this command is pending, it is
not possible to fall below operating state o1.6.
This command can be used, for example, if it is not a motor that is supplied
by the SIMOREG DC-MASTER but a field and the current is to be reduced
via an external parallel-connected de-excitation resistance.

P178
*

Source for the command "fire all thyristors simultaneously"

[SW 1.8 and later]

BDS

Setting this command (high signal) causes all six thyristors of the thyristor
bridge I to be fired continuously and simultaneously. Switchover to long
pulses is automatic. This command is only active if no line voltage is applied
to the armature power section .

(G163)

11-34

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P179

Additional Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses

[SW 1.9 and later]

0 to 100
1

FDS
(G163)

Number of additional Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses after

detection of I=0 message prior to a change in torque direction.
It is particularly important to set this parameter to values of > 0 for converter
armatures which supply large inductances (e.g. lifting solenoids).
These pulses cause the current to decay before a change in torque
direction; the thyristors are fired in pairs to prevent sudden chopping, and
the generation of a surge voltage by the load inductor, when the current
drops below the thyristor holding current.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

When a change in torque direction is required, the current in the existing

direction must be reduced.
This is achieved in the following ways:
If P179 > 0:
1) Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses
until the I=0 signal arrives
2) Additional Alpha W pulses with enabled second pulses
(number as set in P179.F)
3) Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
(number as set in P161.F)
4) Additional torque-free interval (period as set in P160.F)
If P179 = 0:
1) Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
until the I=0 signal arrives
2) Additional Alpha W pulses with disabled second pulses
(number as set in P161.F)
3) Additional torque-free interval (period as set in P160.F)
P180

Positive torque limit 1

-300.00 to 300.00
Ind: 4
[%]
FS=300.00
0.01%
Type: I2
of rated motor torque

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Negative torque limit 1

-300.00 to 300.00
Ind: 4
[%]
FS=-300.00
0.01%
Type: I2
of rated motor torque

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Positive torque limit 2

-300.00 to 300.00
Ind: 4
[%]
FS=300.00
0.01%
Type: I2
of rated motor torque

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-300.00 to 300.00
Ind: 4
[%]
FS=-300.00
0.01%
Type: I2
of rated motor torque

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 120.00
[%]
0.01%
of maximum speed

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

FDS
(G160)
P181
FDS
(G160)
P182

(G160)

If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694

=1) and the speed is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter
P184, then torque limit 2 is activated in place of torque limit 1.

P183

Negative torque limit 2

FDS
(G160)

If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694

=1) and the speed is higher than the threshold speed set in parameter
P184, then torque limit 2 is activated in place of torque limit 1.

P184

Threshold speed for torque limits

FDS

If "Torque limit switchover" is selected (state of binector selected in P694

=1) and the speed (K0166) is higher than the threshold speed set in
parameter P184, then torque limit 2 (P182, P183) is activated in place of
torque limit 1 (P180, P181).

FDS

(G160)

P190
FDS
(G162)

P191

Filter time for setpoint for armature current precontrol

[SW 1.9 and later]
Filtering of the armature current setpoint at the input of the precontrol for the
armature current controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the armature current precontrol from
the armature current controller.
Filter time for setpoint for armature current controller
[SW 1.9 and later]

FDS
(G162)

Filtering of the armature current setpoint at the input of the armature current
controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the armature current precontrol from
the armature current controller.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-35

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P193
*

Source for the actual armature voltage or EMF value for armature
current precontrol
[SW 2.1 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

(G162)

The connector which is used as the actual armature voltage (if P162.F = 2)
or EMF (if P162.F = 3) value for armature current precontrol is selected. The
selected connector value must correspond to half the motor armature
voltage or half the motor EMF in a 12-pulse series connection (P079 = 2).

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=287
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

1 to 140
[Hz]
1Hz
0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

1 to 140
[Hz]
1Hz
0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1000
[ms]
1ms
0 to 100
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 10.0
[%]
0.1%
0.010 to 10.000
[s]
0.001s
0.01 to 200.00
0.01

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

11.11
P192
*
FDS

Auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

Control word for the Alpha W limit (armature)
0

Continuous current:
Inverter stability limit for the delay angle of the armature
converter (Alpha W) = value according to parameter P151
Intermittent current:
Alpha W = 165

Inverter stability limit for the delay angle of the armature

converter (Alpha W) = value according to parameter P151

(G163)

11.12

[as of SW 2.1]

Speed controller

further parameters for the speed controller P550 - P567

Setting values for speed controller - actual value/setpoint processing
P200

Filter time for actual speed controller value

FDS
(G152)

Filtering of the actual speed value by means of a PT1 element.

This filter setting is taken into account by the speed controller optimization
run (P051=26).

P201
FDS
(G152)
P202

Band-stop 1: Resonant frequency

FDS
(G152)
P203
FDS
(G152)
P204
FDS
(G152)

Band-stop 1: Quality
0
1
2
3

Quality = 0.5
Quality = 1
Quality = 2
Quality = 3

Band-stop 2: Resonant frequency

Band-stop 2: Quality
0
1
2
3

Quality = 0.5
Quality = 1
Quality = 2
Quality = 3

P205
FDS
(G152)
P206
FDS
(G152)

D element: Derivative-action time

r217

Indication of the active droop of the speed controller [SW 1.7 and later]

D element: Filter time

(G151)
r218
(G151)
(G152)
r219
(G151)
(G152)

11-36

Indication of the active integration time of the speed controller

[SW 1.7 and later]
Display of effective P gain of speed controller

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P221

Speed controller: Hysteresis for speed-dependent PI/P controller

switchover
[SW 1.9 and later]

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.00 to 10.00
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

FDS
(G152)
P222
FDS
(G152)

See P222 for further details.

Speed controller: Speed-dependent switchover threshold for PI / P
controller
0.00

Automatic switchover from PI to P controller deactivated.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=2.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.10 to 200.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.010 to 10.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: 4
FS=0,650
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

> 0.00 Depending on the actual speed (K0166), the PI controller

switches over to a P controller if the speed drops below the
threshold set in parameter P222. The integrator is not switched
in again (with value of 0) until the actual speed is > P222 +
P221.
This function allows the drive to be stopped without overshoot
using a zero setpoint with the controllers enabled.
This function is active only if the binector selected in P698 is in
the log. "1" state.

Setting values for speed controller

P223
*
FDS
(G152)
P224
*
FDS
(G152)

Control word for speed controller precontrol

0
1

Speed controller precontrol disabled

Speed controller precontrol acts as torque setpoint (is added to
n controller output)

Control word for speed controller I component

0
1
2
3

Set controller I component to 0 (i.e. to achieve a pure P

controller)
Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped when a torque or current limit is
reached
Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped when a torque limit is reached
Controller I component is active
The I component is stopped only when 199.99% is reached

P225

Speed controller P gain

FDS

See also setting values for "Speed controller adaptation" function (P550 to
P559).
This parameter is set automatically during the speed controller optimization
run (P051=26).

(G151)
P226
FDS
(G151)

Speed controller reset time

This parameter is set automatically during the speed controller optimization
run (P051=26).

Speed controller droop

Function: A parameterizable feedback loop can be connected in parallel to the I and P components of the speed controller (acts on
summation point of setpoint and actual value).
0.0 to 10.0
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P227
Speed controller droop
[%]
FS=0.0
P051 = 40
A 10% speed droop setting causes a 10% deviation in the speed from the
0.1%
Type: O2
Online
FDS
setpoint at a 100% controller output (100% torque or armature current
setpoint) ("softening" of closed-loop control).
(G151)
See also P562, P563, P630 and P684
P228

Filter time for speed setpoint

FDS

Filtering of setpoint by means of a PT1 element.

This parameter is automatically set to the same value as the speed
controller reset time during the speed controller optimization run (P051=26).
It may be useful to parameterize lower values when the ramp-function
generator is in use.

(G152)
P229
*
FDS
(G152)

Control of I component tracking for slave drive

On a slave drive, the I component of the speed controller is

made to follow such that M(set, ncontr.) = M(set, limit),
the speed setpoint is set to the actual speed value
Tracking deactivated

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

11-37

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

P230

Setting period of speed controller integrator

FDS

After a positive edge at the binector set in P695, the integrator of the speed
controller is set to the instantaneous value of the connector set in P631.
If a time of > 0 is set on P230, this setting operation is not performed just
once, but the speed controller integrator is set continually to the setting
value for the parameterized time period.

(G152)
P234
*

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.9 and later]

Set speed controller P component to zero

FDS
(G152)

Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain a pure I

controller)
Controller P component is active

P236
*

Specifying the dynamic response of the speed control loop

[SW 2.0 and later]

FDS

The parameter value is used as the optimization criterion for the speed
control loop.

G151

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10 to 100
[%]
1

Ind: 4
FS=75
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
online

0 to 180
[degrees]
1 degree
0 to 180
[degrees]
1 degree
0 to 200
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=180
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=200
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.01 to 100.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=5.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0,200
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Note:
Changes to this value do not take effect until the speed controller
optimization run (P051 = 26, see Section 7.5) has been executed.
Setting instructions:
For drives, for example, with gear backlash, optimization should be
started with low dynamic response values (from 10%).
For drives with top synchronism and dynamic response requirements,
values up to 100% should be used.

11.13
P250
FDS
(G166)
P251
FDS
(G166)
P252
*
FDS
(G166)

Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit

Alpha G limit (field)
Rectifier stability limit for firing angle of field converter
Alpha W limit (field)
Inverter stability limit for firing angle of field converter
Filtering of line frequency correction (field)
The internal line synchronization for the field gating pulses derived from the
field mains infeed terminals is filtered with this time constant. In operation
on "weak" power supplies with unstable frequencies, for example, on a
diesel-driven generator (isolated operation), the filter time constant must be
set lower than for operation on "constant V/Hz" systems in order to achieve
a higher frequency correction speed.
Using the units position, the line synchronization function can be altered
additionally as follows:
When the parameter is set to an uneven number, the measured line zero
crossings for line synchronization are subjected to an extra "filter", may
improve performance in the case of difficulties with brief mains interruptions
(e.g. power supply via sliding current collectors), but may only be set for
constant V/Hz power supplies (not for weak isolated supply systems).

P253
*
FDS
(G166)

Control word for field precontrol

Field precontrol disabled, precontrol output = 180

Field precontrol active, output is dependent on field current

setpoint, field line voltage, P112

P254
*
FDS
(G166)

Set field current controller I component to zero

P255

Field current controller P gain

FDS
(G166)

This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

P256

0.001 to 10.000
[s]
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for precontrol 0.001s
and current controller (armature and field) (P051=25).

FDS
(G166)

11-38

0
1

Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P

controller)
Controller I component is active

Field current controller reset time

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P257

Standstill field

FDS
(G166)

Value to which the field current is reduced when "Automatic field current
reduction" function is parameterized (by means of P082=2) or with signaldriven selection of "Standstill excitation" function (selected in P692).

P258

Delay time with automatic field current reduction

FDS
(G166)

Delay after which the field current is reduced to the value set in parameter
P257 with automatic or signal-driven "Field current reduction" function when
the drive is stopped after operating state o7.0 or higher is reached.

P260

Filter time for setpoint for field current precontrol

FDS

Filtering of the field current setpoint at the input of the precontrol for the field
current controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the field current precontrol from the
field current controller.
Filter time for setpoint for field current controller
[SW 1.9 and later]

(G166)
P261
FDS
(G166)
P263
*
FDS

[SW 1.9 and later]

Filtering of the field current setpoint at the input of the field current
controller.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the field current precontrol from the
field current controller.
Input quantity for motor flux calculation
0

The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the field
current controller actual value according to P612 (K0265), to be
used in connection with a fully compensated DC machine

The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the precontrol
output for the EMF controller (K0293)
(exception: Field current controller setpoint (K0268) with active
standstill field or with disabled field pulses), to be used in
connection with an non-compensated DC machine. The EMF
controller must be active when this setting is selected (EMF
controller compensates the armature reaction).

The input quantity for the motor flux calculation is the field
current controller setpoint (K0268). Advantage: Quantities
derived from the setpoint are generally "steadier" than those
derived from actual values.

(G166)

P264
*
FDS
(G166)

Set field current controller P component to zero

P265
*

Source for selection of external field current monitoring signal

[SW 1.9 and later]

BDS

Selection of the binector to supply the field monitoring signal when an

external field device is used.
(status "1" = field current is o.k., If > If-min)

(G167)

0
1

Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I

controller)
Controller P component is active

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1% of P102

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 60.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: 4
FS=10.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

The converter waits for this signal in state o5.0 as part of the power ON
routine. If this signal disappears during operation, the drive is shut down
with fault message F005 with fault value 4 (in the case of P086>0) or with
fault value 5 (in the case of P086=0).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-39

Parameter list
PNU

11.14
P272
*

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.10 to 100.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=0.60
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.010 to 10.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: 4
FS=0.200
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

EMF controller droop

0.0 to 10.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Filter time for setpoint for EMF controller precontrol [SW 1.9 and later]

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Closed-loop EMF control

Operating mode of closed-loop EMF control
0

Fault message F043 (EMF for braking mode too high) is

active:
If a change in the torque direction is requested (MI or MII is to
be started) and the EMF is too high, both torque directions are
blocked.
Criterion for EMF too high: The calculated control angle (K0101)
for the armature current requested in the new torque direction is
> 165 degrees (when P192=0) or > P151 (when P192=1).
If the armature current requested in the new torque direction
(value from K0118 filtered by means of P190) is > 1% of the
device's rated direct current (r072.i02), fault message F043 is
also triggered. For possible causes, see section 10

Alarm A043 and automatic field reduction, if EMF in braking

mode is too high:
If the EMF is too high during braking and the requested
armature current (value from K0118 filtered by means of P190)
is > 1% of the device's rated direct current (r072.i02), alarm
A043 is emitted.
Criterion for EMF too high: For the armature control angle
before limitation (K0101), the following applies: > (W 5
degrees). W is the inverter impact limit according to P151 (in
the case of continuous armature current or when P192=1) or
165 degrees (when P192=0 in the case of non-continuous
armature current)
At the same time as A043, field reduction takes place. This field
reduction is achieved by changing the armature control angle to
(W 5 degrees) by means of a P controller whose output
reduces the EMF controller setpoint. It is therefore necessary to
parmaterize "Field weakening mode by internal EMF control"
(P081=1) so that field weakening can have an effect.
If a change in the torque direction is requested (MI or MII is to
be started) and the EMF is too high, both torque directions are
blocked until the field and therefore the EMF have been lowered
accordingly. This is the case if the calculated control angle
(K0101) for the armature current requested in the new torque
direction is < 165 degrees (when P192=0) or < P151 (when
P192=1).

(G165)

P273
*
FDS
(G165)
P274
*
FDS
(G165)
P275
*
FDS
(G165)
P276
*
FDS
(G165)
P277
*
FDS
(G165)
P280
FDS
(G165)

11-40

05.2007

Control word for EMF controller precontrol

EMF controller precontrol disabled, precontrol output = rated

motor field current (P102)

1
EMF controller precontrol is active
Set EMF controller I component to zero
0

Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P

controller)
1
Controller I component is active
EMF controller P gain
This parameter is automatically set during the field weakening optimization
run (P051=27).
EMF controller reset time
This parameter is automatically set during the field weakening optimization
run (P051=27).

Filtering of the EMF setpoint at the input of the EMF controller precontrol.
The purpose of this filter is to decouple the EMF controller precontrol from
the EMF controller.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

P281

Filter time for setpoint for EMF controller

FDS
(G165)

Filtering of the EMF setpoint at the input of the EMF controller.

The purpose of this filter is to decouple the EMF controller precontrol from
the EMF controller.

P282

Filter time for actual value for EMF controller

FDS
(G165)
P283

Filtering of actual EMF value at the input of the EMF controller.

FDS
(G165)
P284
*
FDS
(G165)

11.15

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.9 and later]

[SW 1.9 and later]

Filter time for actual value for EMF controller precontrol

[SW 1.9 and later]
Filtering of actual speed value at the input of the EMF controller precontrol.
The purpose of this filter is to stabilize the EMF controller precontrol, even
when the actual speed signal is unsteady or distorted by harmonics.
Set EMF controller P component to zero
0
1

Set controller P component to zero

(i.e. to obtain pure I controller)
Controller P component is active

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01 s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Ramp-function generator

(see also Section 8, Sheet G136 and Section 9)

See P639 and P640 for ramp-function generator setting parameters
P295
FDS

Mode for rounding the ramp-function generator

(G136)

[SW 1.9 and later]

If the setpoint is reversed during ramp-up (or ramp-down),

acceleration (deceleration) is aborted and initial rounding of the
deceleration (acceleration) process begins immediately. The
setpoint is not increased (decreased) any further, but the signal
at the ramp-function generator output has a breakpoint (i.e. a
step change in the acceleration rate).

Ramp generator
output
Ramp generator
input

If the setpoint is reversed during ramp-up or ramp-down,

acceleration/deceleration gradually changes to
deceleration/acceleration. The setpoint increases/decreases
further, but there is no breakpoint in the signal at the generator
output (i.e. there is no step change in the acceleration rate).

Ramp generator
output

Ramp generator
input

P296
FDS
(G136)

Ramp-down time of ramp generator with emergency stop (OFF3)

[SW 1.9 and later]
When the "Emergency stop" command is issued, the drive must normally
brake down to 0 speed along the current limit. If the mechanical design of
the drive makes this option impermissible or undesirable, then a value of > 0
can be set here. In this case, the drive brakes along the deceleration ramp
programmed here when the "Emergency stop" command is issued.
see also parameter P330

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-41

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P297

Lower transition rounding of ramp generator with emergency stop

(OFF3)
[SW 1.9 and later]

FDS
(G136)
P298

Upper transition rounding of ramp generator with emergency stop

(OFF3)
[SW 1.9 and later]

0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Limitation at ramp-function generator output (setpoint limiting)

The effective limitations are:
Upper limit:
Minimum value of P300 and the four connectors selected with P632
Lower limit:
Maximum value of P301 and the four connectors selected with P633
Note:
P300
FDS
(G137)
P301
FDS
(G137)
P302
*
FDS
(G136)

The limiting values for both the positive and negative setpoint limits can have a positive or negative sign. The negative
setpoint limit, for example, can therefore be parameterized to a positive value and the positive setpoint limit to a negative
value.
-200.00 to 199.99
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
Positive limitation at ramp-function generator output
[%]
FS=100.00
P051 = 40
0.01%
Type: I2
Online
-200.00 to 199.99
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
Negative limitation at ramp-function generator output
[%]
FS=-100.00 P051 = 40
0.01%
Type: I2
Online
0 to 3
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
Select ramp-function generator / ramp-up integrator mode
1
FS=0
P051 = 40
0
Normal ramp-function generator operation:
Type: O2
Offline
Ramp-function generator setting 1 (P303 to P306) is applied.
When a binary selectable input parameterized as "Rampfunction generator setting 2" (P307 to P310) (selected in P637)
or Ramp-function generator setting 3" (P311 to P314)
(selected in P638), generator setting 2 or 3 is applied as
appropriate.
1

Ramp-up integrator operation:

When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to a ramp-up/down
times = 0

Ramp-up integrator operation:

When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to generator setting 2 (P307
to P310)

Ramp-up integrator operation:

When the setpoint is reached for the first time, ramp-function
generator setting 1 is switched over to generator setting 3 (P311
to P314)

Ramp-function generator parameter set 1 (see also parameter P330)

0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01s
0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01s
0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s
0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ramp-function generator parameter set 2 is selected via the binector parameterized in P637.
0.00 to 650.00
P307
Ramp-up time 2
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
0.00 to 650.00
P308
Ramp-down time 2
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
0.00 to 100.00
P309
Lower transition rounding 2
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)

Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

P303
FDS
(G136)
P304
FDS
(G136)
P305
FDS
(G136)
P306
FDS
(G136)

Ramp-up time 1
Ramp-down time 1
Lower transition rounding 1
Upper transition rounding 1

Ramp-function generator parameter set 2 (see also parameter P330)

11-42

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

P310
FDS
(G136)

Upper transition rounding 2

0.00 to 100.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.00 to 10.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ramp-function generator parameter set 3 (see also parameter P330)

Ramp-function generator parameter set 3 is selected via the binector parameterized in P638.
0.00 to 650.00
P311
Ramp-up time 3
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
0.00 to 650.00
P312
Ramp-down time 3
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
0.00 to 100.00
P313
Lower transition rounding 3
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
0.00 to 100.00
P314
Upper transition rounding 3
[s]
FDS
0.01s
(G136)
Displays
r315
(G136)

r316

Display of effective times

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

Display of effective ramp-up time

Display of effective ramp-down time
Display of effective lower transition rounding
Display of effective upper transition rounding

0.00 to
650.00 / 10.00
[s]
0.01s

Display of ramp-function generator status

Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

(G136)
15
7

Segment:
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
15
P317
*
FDS
(G136)
P318
*
FDS
(G136)

RFG enable
RFG start
Setpoint enable & /OFF1
Set RFG
RFG tracking
Bypass RFG
Ramp-down
Ramp-up

Ramp-function generator tracking

0
1

Ramp-function generator tracking is not active

Ramp-function generator tracking is active

Set ramp-function generator output

This parameter determines how the ramp-function generator output is set at
the commencement of a "Shutdown" process:
0

The ramp-function generator output is not set at the

commencement of a "Shutdown" process

At the commencement of "Shutdown", the output is set to the

actual speed value K0167 (actual speed value K0167 is
"unfiltered")

At the commencement of "Shutdown", the output is set to the

actual speed value K0179 (value is filtered by PT1 in P200,
other filters may also be active)
(setting may not be used in conjunction with P205 > 0)

During a "Shutdown" process, the limitation at the ramp-function generator

output is not effective. P318 must be set to 1 or 2 to prevent any
(temporary) excess speed during "Shutdown" when the generator output is
limited.
P319
FDS
(G136)

Delay time for enabling ramp-function generator

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

[SW 1.5 and later]

11-43

Parameter list
PNU

11.16

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Setpoint processing

P320

Multiplier for main setpoint

FDS
(G135)
P321

-300.00 to 300.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Multiplier for additional setpoint

-300.00 to 300.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Source for multiplier for main setpoint

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 bis 1
1

Ind: 4
WE=0
Typ: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 4
FS=-20
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=20
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=40
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0,5
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FDS
(G135)
P322
*
FDS
(G135)
P323
*
FDS
(G135)

11.17
P330
*
FDS
(G136)

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Source for multiplier for additional setpoint
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

Ramp-function generator
Factor for ramp-function generator times

Selection of a factor for the values set in parameters P296, P297, P298,
P303 to P314 and P542 (ramp-function generator times).
0
1

11.18

[SW 2.1 and later]

Factor = 1
Factor = 60
i.e. effective ramp-function generator times = values set in
[minutes] instead of in [seconds]

Setting values for monitoring functions and limits

Setting values for monitoring functions

P351
FDS

P352
FDS

-90 to 0
[%]
If the line voltage drops below a specific value (P078) and does not return to Armature:
the permissible tolerance range within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault
1% of P078.001
message F006 is activated. The drive dwells in operating state o4 or o5
Field:
while the line undervoltage persists.
1% of P078.002
0 to 99
Source for overvoltage trip
[%]
If the line voltage exceeds a specific value (P078) and does not return to the Armature:
permissible tolerance range within the "Restart time" set in P086, fault
1% of P078.001
message F007 is activated.
Field:
1% of P078.002
Threshold for undervoltage trip

P353

Response threshold for phase failure monitoring

FDS

If the line voltage drops below the permissible value in operating states of
o4 and does not return to an "acceptable" value within the "Restart time"
set in P086, fault message F004 or F005 is activated.
The drive dwells in operating state o4 or o5 for the period that the line
voltage remains below the threshold and during the subsequent voltage
stabilization period set in P090.

10 to 100
[%]
Armature:
1% of P078.001
Field:
1% of P078.002

When a switch-on command is entered, the converter dwells in operating

states o4 and o5 for a maximum total delay period for both states set in
P089 until the voltages in all phases exceed the threshold set in this
parameter before fault message F004 or F005 is activated.
P355
FDS

0.0 to 600.0
[s]
F035 is activated if the conditions for the "Stall protection" fault message are 0.1s
fulfilled for longer than the period set in P355.
Stall protection time

When P355=0.0, the "Drive blocked" monitoring function (F035) is

deactivated and alarm A035 is likewise suppressed.

11-44

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
10 to 70
[%]
1%

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=10
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

P357

Threshold for tachometer interruption monitoring

FDS

F042 is suppressed if the actual EMF value is lower than the value set in
P357.

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 60000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 60000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=10000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

23.0 to 60.0
[Hz]
0.1 Hz

Ind: 4
FS=45.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

50.0 to 110.0
[Hz]
0.1 Hz

Ind: 4
FS=65.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FS=0,50
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

The setting is entered as a % of the ideal mean DC voltage value at =0,

i.e. as a % of P078.001 * 1.35
P360

Response delay for external faults and alarms

(G180)
(G181)

The fault message or alarm is not activated on the converter until the
appropriate input or corresponding control word bit (as selected in P675,
P686, P688 or P689) has been in the LOW state for at least the time period
set in this parameter (see also Section 8, Sheets G180 and G181).
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

Delay for external fault 1

Delay for external fault 2
Delay for external alarm 1
Delay for external alarm 2

P361

Delay time for the undervoltage monitoring

[SW 1.7 and later]

FDS

Activation of the fault message F006 (line undervoltage) is delayed by the

time that can be set in this parameter. During this delay time firing pulses
are output!
Another time which is parameterized for automatic restarting (P086) only
begins after the time set here has elapsed.

P362

Delay time for the overvoltage monitoring

FDS

Activation of the fault message F007 (line overvoltage) is delayed by the

time that can be set in this parameter. During this delay time firing pulses
are output!

[SW 1.7 and later]

Another time which is parameterized for automatic restarting (P086) only

begins after the time set here has elapsed.
P363

Threshold for the minimum line frequency

FDS

If the line frequency falls below the value set here and does not rise above it
again within the "restart" time set in P086, the fault message F008 is
activated. As long as the line frequency is below the value set here, the
drive is kept in operating state o4 or o5.
[values < 45.0 Hz can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

[SW 1.8 and later]

CAUTION
Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz
is available on request.
P364

Threshold for the maximum line frequency

FDS

If the line frequency rises above the value set here and does not fall below it
again within the "restart" time set in P086, the fault message F009 is
activated. As long as the line frequency is above the value set here, the
drive is kept in operating state o4 or o5.

[SW 1.8 and later]

CAUTION
Operation in the extended frequency range between 23 Hz and 110 Hz
is available on request.

11.19

Setting values for limit-value monitors

(see also Section 8, Sheet G187 und G188)

n < nmin signal
P370

Speed threshold nmin

FDS

Speed threshold for n < nmin limit-value monitor.

(G187)

Note:
This threshold also affects the sequence of control operations for
"Shutdown", "Fast stop", cancellation of the "Inching" or "Crawling"
command, the "Braking with field reversal" function and the brake control
operation (see Section 9).

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-45

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0,50
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

P371

Hysteresis for n < nmin signal

FDS
(G187)

This value is added to the response threshold if n < nmin is active.

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=3.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FD=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.0 to 100.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: 4
FS=3.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1% of maximum
speed
-199.9 to 0.0
[%]
0.1% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FS=120.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=-120.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.0 to 100.0
[s]
0.1s

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=3.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

n < ncomp. signal

P373

Speed threshold ncomp.

FDS
(G187)
P374

Speed threshold for n < ncomp. signal

FDS
(G187)
P375
FDS
(G187)

This value is added to the response threshold if n < ncomp. is active.

Hysteresis for < ncomp. signal (n < ncomp. signal)

OFF delay for n < ncomp. signal

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed
0.0 to 100.0
[s]
0.1s

Setpoint/actual value deviation 2

P376

Permissible setpoint/actual value deviation 2

FDS
(G187)
P377

Hysteresis for setpoint/actual value deviation 2 signal

[SW 1.9 and later]

FDS
(G187)
P378
FDS
(G187)

This value is added to the response threshold if a setpoint/actual value

deviation signal is active
Response delay for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 2
[SW 1.9 and later]

Overspeed
P380

Maximum speed in positive direction of rotation

FDS
(G188)
P381

Maximum speed in negative direction of rotation

FDS
(G188)
Setpoint/actual value deviation 1
P388

Permissible deviation between setpoint and actual value 1

FDS
(G187)
P389

Hysteresis for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 1

FDS
(G187)
P390
FDS
(G187)

11-46

This value is added to the response threshold if a setpoint/actual value

deviation signal is active
Response delay for setpoint/actual value deviation signal 1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of converter
rated field DC
current (r073.i02)

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of converter
rated field DC
current (r073.i02)

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

If < If min signal

P394

Field current threshold If min

FDS

Field current threshold for If < If min limit-value monitor.

(G188)

Note:
This threshold affects the sequence of control operations for the "Direction
of rotation reversal using field reversal" and "Braking with field reversal"
functions (see Section 9).
The If < If min signal is connected to binector B0215, the actual value at
field current controller input K0265 is applied as If.
B0215 = 0 when K0265 > threshold set in P394
B0215 = 1 when K0265 < threshold set in P394 + hysteresis set in P395
0 1 transition takes place when K0265 < P394
1 0 transition takes place when K0265 > P394 + P395

P395
FDS

Hysteresis for If < If min signal

This value is added to the response threshold if If < If min is active.
(see also P394)

(G188)
Field current monitoring

Fault message F005 (fault value 4) is activated if the actual field current (K0265) is lower than the percentage of the field current setpoint
(K0268) set in P396 for longer than the time set in parameter P397.
F005 is also triggered if "I Field extern 2% of the converter rated DC current of the field (r073.i02)
ist.
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P396
Threshold for field current monitoring
[SW 1.9 and later] 1 to 100
[%]
FS=50
P051 = 40
0.01% of setpoint at Type: O2
on-line
FDS
field current con(G167)
troller input (K0268)
Ind: 4
P052 = 3
P397
Field current monitoring time
[SW 1.9 and later] 0.02 to 60.00
[s]
FS=0.50
P051 = 40
FDS
0.01s
Type: O2
on-line
(G167)
If < If x signal
P398

Field current threshold If x

FDS

Setpoint-oriented field current threshold for If < If x limit-value monitor.

(G188)

Note:
This threshold affects the sequence of control operations for the "Direction
of rotation reversal using field reversal" and "Braking with field reversal"
functions (see Section 9).

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01% of setpoint at
field current
controller input
(K0268)

Ind: 4
FS=80.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of converter
rated field DC
current (r073.i02)

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

The If < If x signal is connected to binector B0216, the actual value at field
current controller input K0265 is applied as If.
B0216 = 0 when K0265 > threshold set in P398
B0216 = 1 when K0265 < threshold set in P398 + hysteresis set in P399
0 1 transition takes place when K0265 < P398
1 0 transition takes place when K0265 > P398 + P399
P399
FDS

Hysteresis for If < If x signal

This value is added to the response threshold if If < If x is active.
(see also P398)

(G188)

11.20

Settable fixed values

Function: The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified connector
P401
K401 fixed value
FDS
is applied to connector K0401
(G120)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-47

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P402
FDS
(G120)
P403
FDS
(G120)
P404
FDS
(G120)
P405
FDS
(G120)
P406
FDS
(G120)
P407
FDS
(G120)
P408
FDS
(G120)
P409
FDS
(G120)
P410
FDS
(G120)
P411
FDS
(G120)
P412
FDS
(G120)
P413
FDS
(G120)
P414
FDS
(G120)
P415
FDS
(G120)
P416
FDS
(G120)

K402 fixed value

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-32768 to 32767
1

11.21
Function:
P421
FDS
(G120)
P422
FDS
(G120)
P423
FDS
(G120)
P424
FDS
(G120)
P425
FDS
(G120)
P426
FDS
(G120)
P427
FDS
(G120)

11-48

is applied to connector K0402

K403 fixed value
is applied to connector K0403
K404 fixed value
is applied to connector K0404
K405 fixed value
is applied to connector K0405
K406 fixed value
is applied to connector K0406
K407 fixed value
is applied to connector K0407
K408 fixed value
is applied to connector K0408
K409 fixed value
is applied to connector K0409
K410 fixed value
is applied to connector K0410
K411 fixed value
is applied to connector K0411
K412 fixed value
is applied to connector K0412
K413 fixed value
is applied to connector K0413
K414 fixed value
is applied to connector K0414
K415 fixed value
is applied to connector K0415
K416 fixed value
is applied to connector K0416

-32768 to 32767
1
-32768 to 32767
1
-32768 to 32767
1
-32768 to 32767
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Fixed control bits

The value set in the parameter is applied to the specified binector
B421 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0421
B422 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0422
B423 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0423
B424 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0424
B425 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0425
B426 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0426
B427 fixed bit
is applied to binector B0427

0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1
0 to 1
1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P428
FDS
(G120)

B428 fixed bit

0 to 1
1

11.22

is applied to binector B0428

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Digital setpoint input (fixed setpoint, inching and crawling setpoints)

(see also Section 8, Sheets G127, G129 and G130)

Fixed setpoint
Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P431 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an additional fixed setpoint (K0204,
K0209) via the binectors selected in P430, indices .01 to .08 (setpoint is applied when binector switches to log. "1" state). P432
indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on
setpoint injection.
If fixed setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P433 is applied to K0209.
P430
*
(G127)

Source for fixed-setpoint injection

Selection of binector to control injection of the fixed setpoint
("1" state = fixed setpoint injected).

All binector numbers

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=11
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P431
*
(G127)

P432
*
(G127)

P433
*
FDS
(G127)

Source for fixed setpoint

Selection of connector to be injected as the fixed setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass
Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed
when the fixed setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P430 and the setting in the same index of
P432 produces a log. "1"
Source for standard setpoint
Selection of the connector to be applied if fixed-setpoint injection is not
selected
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Inching setpoint
Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P436 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an inching setpoint (K0202, K0207) via
the binectors selected in P435, indices .01 to .08 (setpoint is applied when binector switches to log. "1" state). P437 indices .01
to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint
injection. If more than one inching setpoint is injected, an output value corresponding to inching setpoint = 0% is applied.
P435
*
(G129)

If inching setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P438 is applied to K0207.
All binector numbers
Source for injection of inching setpoint
1
Selection of binector to control injection of the inching setpoint
("1" state = inching setpoint injected).

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P436
*
(G129)

Source for inching setpoint

Selection of connector to be injected as the inching setpoint

All connector
numbers
1

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-49

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P437
*

Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass

0 to 1
1

(G129)

P438
*
FDS
(G129)

Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed

when the inching setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P435 and the setting in the same index of
P437 produces a log. "1".
Source for standard setpoint
Selection of the connector to be applied if inching-setpoint injection is not
selected

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 4
FS=208
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Crawling setpoint
Function: Up to 8 connectors can be selected in P441 indices .01 to .08. These can be applied as an additional crawling setpoint (K0201,
K0206) via the binectors selected in P440, indices .01 to .08. P445 can be set to define whether the setpoint must be applied
when the selected binectors have reached the log. "1" state (when P445=0) or in response to a 0 1 transition (when
P445=1). When setpoint injection in response to a 0 1 transition is selected, the setpoint injection function is reset when the
binector selected in P444 switches to the log. "0" state. P442 indices .01 to .08 can be set to define for each setpoint
individually whether the ramp-function generator must be bypassed on setpoint injection.
P440
*
(G130)

P441
*
(G130)

P442
*
(G130)

P443
*
FDS
(G130)

P444
*
BDS
(G130)

11-50

If crawling setpoint injection is not selected, the connector set in P443 is applied to K0206.
All binector numbers
Source for injection of crawling setpoint
1
Selection of binector to control injection of the crawling setpoint.

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=207
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for crawling setpoint
Selection of connector to be injected as the crawling setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for selection of ramp-function generator bypass
Selection as to whether or not ramp-function generator must be bypassed
when the crawling setpoint is injected.
The ramp-function generator is bypassed if the AND operation between the
binector selected via an index of P440 and the setting in the same index of
P442 produces a log. "1".
Source for standard setpoint
Selection of the connector to be applied if crawling-setpoint injection is not
selected
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for standstill command
Selection of the binector to control the standstill operation (OFF1) or
resetting of crawling setpoint injection when P445=1 (log. "0" state = reset).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P445
*

Selection of level/edge for switch-on/crawling

0 to 1
1

(G130)

Selection to define whether ON command must be input via terminal 37 and

the crawling setpoint injected in response to a log. "1" level or to a 0 1
transition
0

11.23

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 3
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

ON with log. "1" state at terminal 37 and

injection of crawling setpoint with binectors selected in P440 in
log. "1" state
ON in response to 0 1 transition at terminal 37 and
injection of crawling setpoint in response to 0 1 transition of
binectors selected in P440
With this setting, the ON command or injection command for the
crawling setpoint is stored. The memory is reset when the
binector selected in P444 switches to the log. "0" state.

Position sensing with pulse encoder

See parameters P140 to P148 for pulse encoder definition and monitoring
P450
Resetting of position counter
*
0
Reset position counter OFF
FDS
1
Reset position counter with zero marker
(G145)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

Reset position counter with zero marker when LOW signal is

applied to terminal 39

Reset position counter when LOW signal is applied to terminal

Note: Counter resetting with P450 = 2 and 3 is executed in the hardware

and is not affected by how the binectors controlled by terminal 39 are
interconnected
P451
*
FDS
(G145)
P452
*
BDS
(G145)
P453
*
BDS
(G145)

11.24

Position counter hysteresis

Hysteresis for rotational direction reversal OFF

Hysteresis for rotational direction reversal ON (the first pulse

encoder input pulse after a change in rotational direction is not
counted)

Source for "Reset position counter" command

[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binector to control resetting of the position counter.

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for "Enable zero marker counter" command

[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binector to control enabling of the zero marker counter

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Connector selector switches

(see also Section 8, Function Diagram Sheet G124)

P455
Source for inputs of connector selector switch 1
[SW 1.9 and later] All connector
numbers
*
Selection of connectors for the input signals for connector selector switch 1. 1
(G124)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P456
*
(G124)

Source for control of connector selector switch 1

[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binectors to control connector selector switch 1.

All binector numbers

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-51

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

P457
*

[SW 1.9 and later] All connector

numbers
Selection of connectors for the input signals for connector selector switch 2. 1

(G124)

P458
*
(G124)

11.25

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

(G126)

Source for control of connector selector switch 2

[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binectors to control connector selector switch 2.

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.01 to 300.00
[s]
0.01s
0.01 to 300.00
[s]
0.01s
0.01 to 300.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=10.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-199.9 to 199.9
[%]
0.1%
-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Motorized potentiometer

Motorized potentiometer ramp generator is active in Manual and

Automatic modes

Source for setpoint in Automatic mode

Selection of the connector to be applied as the Automatic setpoint to the
ramp-function generator in the motorized potentiometer
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P462
FDS
(G126)
P463
FDS
(G126)
P464

Ramp-up time for motorized potentiometer

FDS

Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at a connector,

i.e. on K0241 the change in the output quantity (K0240) is output within the
time set in P464, multiplied by the factor set in P465
(unit of time setting is [s] if P465=0 or [min] if P465=1)

(G126)

All binector numbers

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

FDS

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Source for inputs of connector selector switch 2

(see also Section 8, Sheet G126)

P460
Control word for motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator
*
0
The motorized potentiometer ramp generator is bypassed in
FDS
Automatic mode (same effect as for P462 and P463 = 0.01, i.e.
the generator output is made to follow the automatic setpoint
(G126)
without delay)

P461
*

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

Ramp-down time for motorized potentiometer

Time difference for dy/dt

Example: - The ramp-function generator is currently ramping up with a

ramp-up time of P462=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation from y=0%
to y=100% takes 5s.
- A time difference dt of P464=2s is set.
- A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K0241 since the dy
within the set dt of 2 s equals (2s/5s)*100%.
P465
*
FDS
(G126)
P466
*
FDS
(G126)

P467
FDS
(G126)
P468
FDS
(G126)

11-52

Factor of expansion for motorized potentiometer

The effective ramp-up time, ramp-down time or time difference for dy/dt is
the product of the time setting in parameter P462, P463 and P464
respectively, multiplied by the factor set in this parameter.
0
1

Parameters P462, P463 and P464 are multiplied by a factor of 1

Parameters P462, P463 and P464 are multiplied by a factor of 60

Source for motorized potentiometer setting value

Selection of the connector to be injected as the motorized potentiometer
setting value
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Motorized potentiometer starting value
Starting value of motorized potentiometer after ON when P473 = 0
Setpoint for "Raise motorized potentiometer
Motorized potentiometer manual operation: Setpoint for "Raise motorized
potentiometer"

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P469
FDS
(G126)

Setpoint for "Lower motorized potentiometer

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

P470
*
BDS
(G126)

Motorized potentiometer manual operation: Setpoint for "Lower motorized

potentiometer"
Source for clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover
Selection of binector to control "Clockwise/counter-clockwise
switchover"
("0" state = clockwise).

Selection of binector to control "Manual/automatic switchover"
("0" state = manual).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for set motorized potentiometer
Selection of binector to control "Set motorized potentiometer"
("0" to "1" transition = set motorized potentiometer).
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Storage of output value
0

No storage of output value:

The output is set to 0 in all operating states of >o5.
The starting point after ON is determined by P467 (MOP starting
value).

Non-volatile storage of output value:

The output value remains stored in all operating states and after
voltage disconnection or failure. The last value stored is output
again after voltage recovery/reconnection.

(G126)

11.26

Oscillation

Function:
Parameters P480 to P483 define the waveshape of a rectangular signal (oscillation setpoint K0203). The value set in P480 determines the
signal level for the time period set in P481 and the value set in P482 the signal level for the time period set in P483.
Oscillation: Selected in P485. The free-running rectangular signal is switched through to the output K0208.
-199.9 to 199.9
P480
Oscillation setpoint 1
[%]
0.1% of maximum
FDS
speed
(G128)
0.1 to 300.0
P481
Oscillation time 1
[s]
FDS
0.1s
(G128)
-199.9 to 199.9
P482
Oscillation setpoint 2
[%]
0.1% of maximum
FDS
speed
(G128)
0.1 to 300.0
P483
Oscillation time 2
[s]
FDS
0.1s
(G128)
All connector
P484
Source for standard setpoint
numbers
*
Selection of connector to be injected as the output value when the
1
FDS
"Oscillation" function is not selected
(G128)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Ind: 4
FS=0,5
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0.1
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=-0,4
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0.1
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=209
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

11-53

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P485
*

Source for oscillation selection

All binector numbers

BDS
(G128)

11.27

Selection of binector to control activation of the "Oscillation" function

(log. "1" state = oscillation active)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Definition of "Motor interface"

(see also Section 8, Sheets G185 und G186)

CAUTION!
The encoders for measurement and monitoring of the brush length, bearing condition, air flow and motor temperature must be
safely isolated from the power circuit.
P490
*
(G185)

Selection of temperature sensor for analog monitoring of motor

temperature
i001:
i002:

0 to 5
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 200
[C]
1C

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23:

Temperature sensor at terminals 204 / 205:

Settings:
0
1
2
3
4
5

No temperature sensor
KTY84
PTC thermistor with R=600
PTC thermistor with R=1200
PTC thermistor with R=1330
PTC thermistor with R=2660

1)
1)
1)
1)

1) PTC thermistor according to DIN 44081 / 44082 with specified R at rated

response temperature, 1330 on Siemens motors (setting 4 must be
selected). When a PTC thermistor is selected as the temperature
sensor, it is not necessary to set parameters P491 and P492 (alarm and
trip temperatures). These two temperatures are predetermined by the
type of PTC thermistor installed. Whether an alarm or fault is output
when the operating point of the PTC thermistor is reached depends on
how the relevant input is parameterized (P493.F or P494.F).
P491
FDS
(G185)

Analog monitoring of motor temperature: Alarm temperature

P492
FDS
(G185)

Analog monitoring of motor temperature: Trip temperature

Operative only when P490.x=1.

0 to 200
[C]
1C

P493
*

Motor temperature analog 1 (temperature sensor at terminals 22 / 23):

Tripping of alarm or fault message

0 to 3
1

FDS

Motor temperature grasped with KTY84

(G185)

Operative only when P490.x=1.

Monitoring deactivated

Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491

Fault message (F029) at temperature > P492

Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 and

fault message (F029) at temperature > P492

Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor

11-54

Monitoring deactivated

Alarm message (A029) when operating point of PTC thermistor

is reached

Fault message (F029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is

reached

Illegal setting

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P494
*

Motor temperature analog 2 (temperature sensor at terminals 204 /

205): Tripping of alarm or fault message

0 to 3
1

FDS

Motor temperature grasped with KTY84

(G185)

Monitoring deactivated

Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491

Fault message (F029) at temperature > P492

Alarm (A029) at temperature > P491 and

fault message (F029) at temperature > P492

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=170
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Motor temperature grasped with PTC thermistor

P495
*
FDS
(G186)
P496
*
FDS
(G186)
P497
*
FDS
(G186)
P498
*
FDS
(G186)

11.28
P500
*
BDS
(G160)

P501
*
BDS
(G160)

Monitoring deactivated

Alarm message (A029) when operating point of PTC thermistor

is reached

Fault message (F029) when operating point of PTC thermistor is

reached

Illegal setting

Brush length sensing: Tripping of alarm or fault message

No brush length sensing (terminal 211 is not scanned)

Binary brush length sensing (terminal 211 is scanned)

Alarm (A025) in response to 0 signal

Binary brush length sensing (terminal 211 is scanned)

Fault message (F025) in response to 0 signal

Bearing condition: Tripping of alarm or fault message

No bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is not scanned)

Bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is scanned)

Alarm (A026) in response to 1 signal

Bearing condition sensing (terminal 212 is scanned)

Fault message (F026) in response to 1 signal

Air flow: Tripping of alarm or fault message

No air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is not scanned)

Air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is scanned)

Alarm (A027) in response to 0 signal

Air flow monitoring (terminal 213 is scanned)

Fault message (F027) in response to 0 signal

Temperature switch: Tripping of alarm or fault message

No temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is not scanned)

Temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is scanned)

Alarm (A028) in response to 0 signal

Temperature switch connected (terminal 214 is scanned)

Fault message (F028) in response to 0 signal

Configuring of torque shell input

Source for torque setpoint for slave drive
Selection of the connector to be injected as the torque setpoint for a slave
drive
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for additional torque setpoint
Selection of connector to be injected as the additional torque setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-55

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P502
*

Source for value to be added to speed controller output

(G152)

Selection of connector to be injected as the value to be added to the speed

controller output (in addition to friction and moment of inertia compensation)

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-300.00 to 300.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P503
FDS
(G160)

11.29

Multiplier for torque setpoint in slave mode

Speed limiting controller

(see also Section 8, Sheet G160)

The output of the speed limiting controller comprises a positive (K0136) and a negative (K0137) torque limit. These limits are applied to
the torque limitation
All connector
Ind: None
P052 = 3
P509
Source for input quantity (n-act) of speed limiting controller
numbers
FS=167
P051 = 40
*
0 = connector K0000
1
Type: L2
Offline
(G160)
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P510
*
(G160)

Source for pos. torque limit of speed limiting controller

Selection of the connector to be injected as the limit value for torque
limitation 1

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=4
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1% of rated speed
-199.9 to 0.0
[%]
0.1% of rated speed
0.10 to 200.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=105.0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=-105.0
Type: I2
Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P511
*
(G160)

P512
FDS
(G160)
P513
FDS
(G160)
P515
FDS
(G160)

11.30

Source for neg. torque limit of speed limiting controller

Selection of the connector to be injected as the limit value for torque
limitation 2
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Maximum speed in positive direction of rotation
Maximum speed in negative direction of rotation
P gain of speed limiting controller

Friction compensation

(see also Section 8, Sheet G153)

Parameters P520 to P530 are the armature current and torque setpoint required for a stationary input signal (factory setting: speed
controller actual value K0179) of 0%, 10% to 100% of the maximum value (in steps of 10%).
These parameters are intermediate points along the friction curve. Depending on P170 (0 or 1) they are either an armature current or a
torque setpoint and are set automatically when the friction and moment of inertia compensation (P051=28) are optimized. P520 is then set
to 0.0%.
The intermediate points are interpolated linearly during which the output of the friction compensation assumes the sign of the input signal.
P530 is specified by the friction compensation even for input signals >100% of the maximum signal.
During operation in both directions we recommend leaving P520 at 0.0% in order to avoid armature current vibration at 0% of the input
signal.

11-56

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

P519
*

Source for input signal of the friction compensation

(G153)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 2.0 and later]

Selection of the input signals that are added and led to the input of the
friction compensation.
i001

Input signal, with sign

i002

Input signal with absolute value generator

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 179
i002: 0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
offline

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 650.00
[s]
0.01s

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 650.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
P520

Friction at 0% speed

FDS
(G153)
P521

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P522

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P523

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P524

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P525

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P526

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P527

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P528

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P529

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)
P530

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

FDS
(G153)

Setting as % of converter rated DC current or rated torque

11.31

Friction at 10% speed

Friction at 20% speed

Friction at 30% speed

Friction at 40% speed

Friction at 50% speed

Friction at 60% speed

Friction at 70% speed

Friction at 80% speed

Friction at 90% speed

Friction at 100% speed and higher

Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)

(see also Section 8, Sheet G153)

P540
Acceleration time

(G153)

The acceleration time is the time that would be needed to accelerate the
drive from 0% to 100% of maximum speed (with no friction) at 100%
converter rated DC current (armature) and 100% rated motor field current
(i.e. 100% flux). It is a measure of the moment of inertia on the motor shaft.
This parameter is set automatically during the optimization run for friction
and moment of inertia compensation (P051=28).

P541

P gain of acceleration

FDS
(G153)

Proportional gain for "SAD-dependent acceleration" function (see also

parameter P543)

FDS

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-57

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P542

Time difference for dy/dt of ramp-function generator

FDS

Ramp-function generator:
Setting of dt for the output of dy/dt at a connector, i.e. at K0191, the change
in the output quantity of the ramp-function generator (K0190) is output within
the period set in P542

0.01 to 300.00
[s]
0.01s

(G136)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0.01
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01% of maximum
speed

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Example: - The ramp-function generator is currently ramping up with a

ramp-up time of P311=5s, i.e. a ramp-up operation from y=0%
to y=100% takes 5s.
- A time difference dt of P542=2s is set.
- A dy/dt of 40% appears at connector K0191 since the dy
within the set dt of 2 s equals (2s/5s)*100%..
(see also parameter P330)
P543

Threshold for SAD-dependent acceleration

FDS

With respect to the SAD-dependent acceleration function, only the

component of the speed controller setpoint/actual value difference which
has an absolute value in excess of the threshold set in this parameter is
switched through (see also parameter P541).

(G153)

Output (value to be multiplied by P541)

199.99%

-200.00%

negative
threshold
(-P543)

Input (setp./act. val. diff.)

positive
threshold
(P543)

199.99%

-200.00%

P546
FDS
(G153)

11-58

Filter time for compensation of moment of inertia

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.32

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Speed controller

(see also Section 8, Sheet G151)

further parameters for the speed controller P200 - P236
Speed controller adaptation
The parameters of the speed controller (Kp, Tn, droop) can be altered as a function of any connector to adapt the speed controller
optimally to a changing controlled system.
The diagrams below show the active P gain, the active Integration time and the active droop depending on the value of the set connector.
Adaptation of the P gain:

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P554
*

Source for the Influencing quantity of the Tn-adaptation

[SW 1.7 and later]

FDS

Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for

adaptation of the n controllers integration time

(G151)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-59

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P555
*

Source for the Influencing quantity of the droop adaptation

[SW 1.7 and later]

FDS

Selection of which connector is connected at the influencing quantity for

adaptation of the n controllers droop

(G151)

P556
FDS
(G151)
P557
FDS
(G151)
P558
FDS
(G151)
P559
FDS
(G151)
P560
FDS
(G151)
P561
FDS
(G151)

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%
0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
-199.99 to 0.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=-100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Adaptation n controller P gain: Threshold 1
Adaptation n controller integration time: Threshold 1 [SW 1.7 and later]
Adaptation n controller droop: Threshold 1

[SW 1.7 and later]

Adaptation n controller P gain: Threshold 2

Adaptation n controller integration time: Threshold 2 [SW 1.7 and later]
Adaptation n controller droop: Threshold 2

[SW 1.7 and later]

Drehzahlregler - Begrenzung der Statik

P562
FDS
(G151)
P563
FDS
(G151)

Positive speed droop limitation

Negative speed droop limitation

Speed controller optimization for drives with oscillating mechanical system

On drives with oscillating mechanical components, it can be useful to optimize the speed controller using optimization run P051=29. The
frequency response of the controlled system for frequencies from 1 Hz to 100 Hz is recorded during optimization.
The drive is first accelerated up to a base speed (P565, FS=20%). A sinusoidal speed setpoint with low amplitude (P566, FS=1%) is then
injected. The frequency of this supplementary setpoint is incremented in 1 Hz steps from 1 Hz up to 100 Hz. An average per frequency is
calculated over a parameterizable number of current peaks (P567, FS=300).
P565

Base speed for frequency response recording

[SW 1.9 and later]

P566

Amplitude for frequency response recording

[SW 1.9 and later]

P567

Number of current peaks for frequency response recording

[SW 1.9 and later]
While the frequency response is being recorded, an average over the
number of current peaks set here is calculated for each measuring
frequency. High values improve the result, but extend the measuring time.
When P567 = 1000, the frequency response recording takes about 9
minutes.

11-60

1.0 to 30.0
[%]
0.1%
0.01 to 5.00
[%]
0.01%
100 to 1000
1

Ind: None
FS=20.0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1.00
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=300
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.33

Parameter list
Description

(G200)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=167
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=174
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=167
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Field reversal

(see also Section 9)

P580
Source for selection of "Direction of rotation reversal using field
*
reversal
BDS

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Selection of binector to control the "Direction of rotation reversal using field

reversal" function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Signal 0: Positive field direction is selected (B0260 = 1, B0261 = 0),
actual speed value is not inverted
Signal 1: Negative field direction is selected (B0260 = 0, B0261 = 1),
actual speed value is inverted

P581
*
BDS
(G200)

Source for selection of "Braking with field reversal

Selection of binector to control the Braking with field reversal" function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Signal change 01: Reversal of field direction (causes braking);
When n<n-min is reached, the original field direction is
selected again. The drive switches to state o7.2

P582
*
BDS
(G200)

Source for selection of "Field reversal

[SW 1.9 and later]

Selection of binector to control "Field reversal" function

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Signal 0: Positive field direction is selected (B0260 = 1, B0261 = 0)
Signal 1: Negative field direction is selected (B0260 = 0, B0261 = 1)

P583
*
(G200)

Source for actual speed signal for field reversal logic

[SW 1.9 and later]
Selection of connector to be used as actual speed value for the field
reversal logic.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.34

Input quantities for signals

(see also Section 8, Sheet G187 and G188)

P590
Source for setpoint of nset = nact signal 1
*
Setpoint/actual value deviation signal:
Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the
(G187)
setpoint/actual value deviation signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P591
*
(G187)

Source for actual value of "n-set = n-act signal 1"

Setpoint/actual value deviation signal:
Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the
setpoint/actual value deviation signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-61

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P592
*

Source for actual value of "n < ncomp. signal

(G187)

n < ncomp. signal:

Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity (n) for the n < ncomp.
signal.

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=167
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=167
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=170
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=167
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=174
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=167
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=
i001: 102
i002: 0
i003: 0
i004: 0
Typ: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P593
*
(G187)

Source for actual value of n < nmin signal

n < nmin signal:
Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity (n) for the n < nmin
signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P594
*
(G188)

Source for input quantity of "Polarity signal

Polarity signal of speed setpoint:
Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the polarity
signal of the speed setpoint.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P595
*
(G188)

Source for actual value of "Overspeed signal

Overspeed signal:
Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the
overspeed signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P596
*
(G187)

Source for setpoint of "nset = nact signal 2

[SW 1.9 and later]

Setpoint/actual value deviation signal:

Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nset" for the
setpoint/actual value deviation signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P597
*
(G187)

Source for actual value of nset = nact signal 2

[SW 1.9 and later]

Setpoint/actual value deviation signal:

Selection of connector to be injected as input quantity "nact" for the
setpoint/actual value deviation signal.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11.35

Configuring of closed-loop control

Setting values for configuring of torque shell

P600
*
(G163)

Source for gating unit input (armature)

i001 to i004:
Selects which connectors are applied as the gating unit input
(armature). All four values are added.
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11-62

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P601
*

Source for armature current controller setpoint

All connector
numbers
1

(G160)
(G161)
(G162)

i001,i002 Speed limiting controller:

Selection of connectors to be injected as input quantities for
the speed limiting controller. Both values are added.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 6
FS=
i001: 141
i002: 0
i003: 134
i004: 0
i005: 125
i006: 0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=117
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 7
FS=
i001: 1
i002: 1
i003: 1
i004: 1
i005: 1
i006: 2
i007: 2
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

i003,i004 Current limitation:

Selection of connectors to be injected as armature current
controller setpoint (before current limitation). Both values are
added.
i005,i006 Current control:
[SW 1.8 and later]
Selection of which connectors are connected as the armature
current controller setpoint (before current controller). The
two values are added. The magnitude is formed from the
value selected with index 6.
Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P602
*
(G162)

P603
*
(G161)

Source for armature current controller actual value

Selection of connector to be injected as armature current controller
actual value
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for variable current limit in torque direction I

i001..i004 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit

in torque direction I
Normalization: +100% corresponds to P100*P171
i005

Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque

direction I with Fast Stop or Shutdown
Normalization: +100% corresponds to P100*P171

i006

Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit

in torque direction I
Normalization: +100% corresponds to r072.002
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

i007

Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque

direction I with Emergency Stop or Shutdown
Normalization: +100% corresponds to r072.002
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-63

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P604
*

Source for variable current limit in torque direction II

(G161)

i001..i004 Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit

in torque direction II
Normalization: -100% corresponds to P100*P172
i005

Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque

direction II with Fast Stop or Shutdown
Normalization: -100% corresponds to P100*P172

i006

Selection of connector to be injected as variable current limit

in torque direction II
Normalization: -100% corresponds to r072.002
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

i007

Selection of connector to be injected as current limit in torque

direction II with Emergency Stop or Shutdown
Normalization: -100% corresponds to r072.002
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 7
FS=9
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 5
FS=2
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 5
FS=9
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=148
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = value as set in parameter P603.ixx (1)
10 = connector K0010
etc.
P605
*
(G160)

Source for variable positive torque limit

Torque limitation:
Selection of connectors to be injected as the variable positive torque limit
i001..i004 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the positive
system torque limit according to Ia=P171 and If = P102
i005
Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the positive
torque limit according to Ia=r072.002 and If = P102
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P606
*
(G160)

Source for variable negative torque limit

Torque limitation:
Selection of connectors to be injected as the variable negative torque limit
i001..i004 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the negative
system torque limit according to Ia=P172 and If = P102
i005
Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the negative
torque limit according to Ia=r072.002 and If = P102
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]
0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = value as set in parameter P605 (1)
10 = connector K0010
etc.

P607
*
BDS
(G160)

11-64

Source for torque setpoint for master drive

Torque limitation:
Selection of connector to be injected as the torque setpoint for a master
drive
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=252
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=
i001: 277
i002: 0
i003: 0
i004: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
Selection of connectors to be injected as the field current controller actual 1
value. The two values are added.

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 266
i002: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 5
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 5
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Speed controller
P609
*
(G151)

Source for actual speed controller value

Selection of connector to be injected as the actual speed controller value
when P083=4
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Setting values for configuring of closed-loop field and EMF control

P610
*
(G166)

Source for gating unit input (field)

Selection of connector to be applied to the gating unit input (field)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P611
*

Source for field current controller setpoint

(G165)

Selection of connectors to be injected as the field current controller

setpoint. The connectors selected in the four indices are added.

Limitation at EMF controller output:

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P612
*
(G166)

Source for actual field current controller value

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P613
*
(G165)

Source for variable field current setpoint upper limit

Limitation at EMF controller output
Selection of connector to be injected as the variable field current setpoint
upper limit
i001..i004 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the rated
excitation current of the motor (P102)
i005
Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the actual
converter rated DC current (field) (r073.002)
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P614
*
(G165)

Source for variable field current setpoint lower limit

Limitation at EMF controller output
Selection of connector to be injected as the variable field current setpoint
lower limit
i001..i004 Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the minimum
excitation current of the motor (P103)
i005
Normalization:
100% of the connector value corresponds to the actual
converter rated DC current (field) (r073.002)
[can be set in SW 1.9 and later]
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-65

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P615
*

Source for EMF controller setpoint

(G165)

Selection of connectors to be injected as the EMF controller setpoint. The

connectors selected in the four indices are added.

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=
i001: 289
i002: 0
i003: 0
i004: 0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=286
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=191
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P616
*
(G165)

Source for actual EMF controller value

Selection of connector to be injected as the actual EMF controller value
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Configuring of injection of acceleration value

P619
*
(G153)

Source for acceleration injection value

Selection of connector to be applied as the acceleration injection value
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Speed controller
Speed controller, setpoint/actual value deviation
Function:
The connectors selected in parameters P621 and P622 are added and those selected in P623 and 624 subtracted
P620
*
(G152)

P621
*
(G152)
P622
*
(G152)
P623
*
(G152)
P624
*
(G152)

Source for speed controller setpoint/actual value deviation

Selection of connector to be injected as the control deviation

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=165
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=176
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=174
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=179
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=170
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for speed controller setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for speed controller setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for actual speed controller value
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for actual speed controller value
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Speed controller: Filtering of setpoint and actual value, band-stop filters

P625
*
FDS
(G152)

11-66

Source for speed controller setpoint

Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for speed setpoint
filtering
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P626
*

Source for actual speed controller value

FDS
(G152)

P627
*
(G152)

P628
*
(G152)

P629
*
(G152)

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=167
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=178
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for band-stop filter 1 1

Ind: None
FS=179
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
FS=177
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
FS=162
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for actual speed

value filtering
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for input of D element
Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for the D element
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for input of band-stop filter 1

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
All connector
numbers
Selection of connector to be injected as the input signal for band-stop filter 2 1
Source for band-stop filter 2

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Speed controller droop

P630
*
(G151)

Source for influencing quantity for speed droop

Selection of connector to be injected as the influencing quantity

All connector
numbers
1

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Setting the speed controller I component

Function: When the binector selected in P695 switches state from log. "0" to log. "1", the I component of the speed controller is set to the
value of the connector selected in P631.
With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal (binector) to control controller enabling commands and
setting of the I component.
All connector
Ind: None
P052 = 3
P631
Source for setting value for speed controller integrator
numbers
FS=0
P051 = 40
*
Selection of connector to be injected as the setting value for the I
1
Type: L2
Offline
component
(G152)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Setting values for configuring the setpoint processing function and ramp-function generator
Limitation at ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation)
(see also Section 8, Sheet G136)
The effective limitations are:
Upper limit:
Minimum value of P300 and the four connectors selected with P632
Lower limit:
Maximum value of P301 and the four connectors selected with P633
Note:
P632
*
(G137)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-67

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=9
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

P633
*

Source for variable negative limitation at ramp-function generator

output

(G137)

Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable negative limitation at

the ramp-function generator output (setpoint limitation).

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 190
i002: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=194
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Selection of binector to control switchover to "Ramp-function generator
setting 3".
With a log. "1" signal at the binector, ramp-function generator parameter set
3 (P311 - P314) is selected. This function has a higher priority than the
ramp-up integrator function.
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-68

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P639
*

Source for the ramp-function generator setting values

All connector
numbers
1

(G136)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=167
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=2
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable negative limitation of 1
the main setpoint.
The lowest value in each case of the connectors selected via the 4 indices
is applied as the limit.

Ind: 4
FS=9
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=206
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Selection of the connectors that are connected as the ramp-function

generator setting values.
i001
i002

Setting value for the ramp-function generator output in state log.

"1" of the binector selected via P640
Setting value for the ramp-function generator output if the drive
is not in state "Operating" (B0104=0) and the binector selected
via P640 is in state log. "0"
[i002 only available with SW 1.6 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
P640
*
BDS
(G136)
P641
*
BDS
(G136)

P642
*
(G135)

Source for selection of "Set ramp-function generator

Selection of binector to control the "Set ramp-function generator" function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for selection of "Bypass ramp-function generator
Selection of binector to control the "Bypass ramp-function generator"
function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for variable positive limitation of main setpoint
Selection of connectors to be injected at the variable positive limitation of
the main setpoint.
The lowest value in each case of the connectors selected via the 4 indices
is applied as the limit.
Note: Negative values at the selected connectors result in a negative
maximum value at the output of the limitation.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

P643
*
(G135)

Source for variable negative limitation of main setpoint

Note: Positive values at the selected connectors result in a positive

minimum value at the output of the limitation.
0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = value as set in parameter P642 (1)
10 = connector K0010
etc.
P644
*
FDS
(G135)
P645
*
FDS
(G135)

Source for main setpoint

Selection of connector to be injected as the main setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for additional setpoint
Selection of connector to be injected as an additional setpoint
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-69

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P646
*

Source for enable signal for ramp-up integrator switchover

All binector numbers

BDS
(G136)

Selection of binector to control enabling of the ramp-function integrator

switchover function.

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=9
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=9
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P647
*

Source for enable signal for ramp-function generator tracking

[SW 2.1 and later]

BDS

Selection of binector to control enabling of the ramp-function generator

tracking function.

(G136)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.36

Control word, status word

Selection of sources of control words 1 and 2

P648
*
BDS
(G180)

P649
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 1

Selection of connector to act as the source for control word 1.
0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = parameters P654 to P675 are effective
(every individual bit of control word 1 is input by a binector)
10 = connector K0010
etc.
Source for control word 2
Selection of connector to act as the source for control word 2.
0 = connector K0000
...
8 = connector K0008
9 = parameters P676 to P691 are effective
(every individual bit of control word 2 is input by a binector)
10 = connector K0010
etc.

Display of control words 1 and 2

r650

Display of control word 1

(G180)

Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

10 9

Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 0 to 15 of the control word

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state

Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state

r651

Display of control word 2

(G181)

Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

10 9

Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 16 to 31 of the control word

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

11-70

Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state

Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Display of status words 1 and 2

r652

Display of status word 1

(G182)

Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

10 9

Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 0 to 15 of the status word

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state

Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state

r653

Display of status word 2

(G183)

Mode of representation on operator panel (PMU):

10 9

Segments 0 to 15 correspond to bits 16 to 31 of the status word

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

Corresponding bit is in log. "1" state

Corresponding bit is in log. "0" state

The following parameters are used to select the binectors (some of which are gated with one another or with other signals) to be applied to
the individual bits of the control word.
The settings of all these parameters are as follows:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
The functions and logic operations are also shown on Sheets G180 and G181 in Section 8.
Control word 1
P654
*
BDS
(G130)
P655
*
BDS
(G180)
P656
*
BDS
(G180)
P657
*
BDS
(G180)

Source for control word 1, bit0

P658
*
BDS
(G180)

1st source for control word 1, bit2

P659
*
BDS
(G180)

2nd source for control word 1, bit2

(0=OFF2; ANDed with 2 and 3 sources for bit1)

2nd source for control word 1, bit1
st

(0=OFF2; ANDed with 1 and 3 sources for bit1)

3rd source for control word 1, bit1
st

(0=OFF2; ANDed with 1 and 2 sources for bit1)

(0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 2 and 3 sources for bit2)

(0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 1 and 3 sources for bit2)

(0=OFF3=Fast stop; ANDed with 1 and 2 sources for bit2)

(0=pulse disable, 1=enable; ANDed with terminal 38)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-71

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P662
*
BDS
(G180)
P663
*
BDS
(G180)
P664
*
BDS
(G180)
P665
*
BDS
(G180)
P666
*
BDS
(G180)
P667
*
BDS
(G180)
P668
*
BDS
(G180)
P669
*
BDS
(G180)
P671
*
BDS
(G180)
P672
*
BDS
(G180)
P673
*
BDS
(G180)
P674
*
BDS
(G180)
P675
*
BDS
(G180)

Source for control word 1, bit4

Control word 2
P676
*
BDS
(G181)
P677
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 2, bit16

P680
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 2, bit20

P681
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 2, bit21

11-72

(select function data set bit 0)

Source for control word 2, bit17
(select function data set bit 1)

(select fixed setpoint 0)

(select fixed setpoint 1)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P684
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 2, bit24

All binector numbers

P685
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 2, bit25

P686
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 2, bit26

P687
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 2, bit27

P688
*

Source for control word 2, bit28

BDS
(G181)

(0=n controller speed droop disabled, 1=enabled)

(0=n controller disabled, 1=n controller enabled)

(0=external fault 2, 1=no external fault 2)

(0=master drive, speed control, 1=slave drive, torque control)

(0=external alarm 1, 1=no external alarm 1)

P689
*
BDS
(G181)

Source for control word 2, bit29

P690
*
(G181)
P691
*

Source for control word 2, bit30

BDS
(G181)

(0=external alarm 2, 1=no external alarm 2)

(0=select Bico data set 1, 1=select Bico data set 2)

Source for control word 2, Bit31

Selection of binector which is to control enabling of the EMF controller
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-73

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P694
*

Source for selection of enabling command for "Torque limit

switchover

All binector numbers

BDS

Selection of binector which is to control enabling of the "Torque limit

switchover" function (1=enable, see also Sheet G160 in Section 8 and P180
to P183)

(G160)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P695
*
BDS
(G152)

Source for selection of "Set speed controller I component" function

Selection of binector to control the "Set I component" function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
When the binector selected in P695 switches from log. "0" to log. "1", the I
component of the speed controller is set to the value of the connector
selected in P631.
With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal
(binector) to control controller enabling commands and setting of the I
component.

P696
*
BDS
(G152)

Source for selection of "Stop speed controller I component" function

Selection of binector to control the "Stop I component" function
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
When the binector selected in P696 changes to the log. "1" state, the I
component of the speed controller is stopped.

P697
*
BDS
(G153)

Source for selection of enabling of dv/dt injection

Selection of binector to control enabling of dv/dt injection (state "1" =
enable)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P698
*

Source for selection of enabling command for speed-dependent speed

controller PI / P function switchover

BDS

Selection of binector to control enabling of the speed-dependent PI / P

controller switchover function (see also P222)

(G152)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.38

Analog inputs (main actual value, main setpoint, selectable inputs)

(see also Section 8, Sheets G113 and G114)

Analog input terminals 4 / 5 (main setpoint)
P700
*
(G113)

11-74

Signal type of "Main setpoint" analog input

0 = Voltage input 0 to 10 V
1 = Current input 0 to 20 mA
2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA

0 to 2
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P701

Normalization of "Main setpoint" analog input

FDS

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an

input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

(G113)

The following generally applies:

For voltage input:
Y
P701 [%] = 10 V
X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P701 [%] = 20 mA
X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P702

Offset for "Main setpoint" analog input

(G113)
P703
*

Mode of signal injection at "Main setpoint" analog input

(G113)
P704
*
(G113)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Main setpoint" analog input

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P705

Filtering time for "Main setpoint" analog input

(G113)
P706
*

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.

(G113)

Source for enabling of "Main setpoint" analog input

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-75

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P707
*

Resolution of "Main setpoint" analog input

11 to 14
[Bit]
1 bit

(G113)

The voltage applied to the analog input is converted to a digital value (A/D
conversion) for further processing. The method used calculates an average
value of the input voltage over a specific measuring time.
The A/D conversion process produces a scale for the voltage range of 0 to
10V, the number of steps (divisions) along this scale can be set in P707 (i.e.
the smallest possible differentiable change in the input voltage
(quantization) can be set in this parameter). The number of scale steps or
intervals is referred to as "Resolution".

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=12
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 2
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

The resolution is normally specified in bits:

11 bits means 2 * 2048 scale divisions
12 bits means 2 * 4096 scale divisions
13 bits means 2 * 8192 scale divisions
14 bits means 2 * 16384 scale divisions
The following applies:
The higher the resolution, the longer the averaging time and thus also the
delay period between the application of an analog step change and the
earliest possible moment of availability of the digital value for further
processing.
For this reason, it is important to find a compromise between the resolution
and delay period.
Param.
value

Resolution
better than

Quantization

Delay period

11
12
13
14

11 bits
12 bits
13 bits
14 bits

4.4 mV
2.2 mV
1.1 mV
0.56 mV

0.53 ms
0.95 ms
1.81 ms
3.51 ms

If the analog input is operating as a current input (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA),

the above applies analogously.
Analog input terminals 6 / 7 (analog selectable input 1)
P710
*
(G113)

Signal type of "Analog selectable input 1"

0 = Voltage input 0 to 10 V
1 = Current input 0 to 20 mA
2 = Current input 4 to 20 mA

P711

Normalization of "Analog selectable input 1"

FDS

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an

input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(G113)

The following generally applies:

For voltage input:

P711 [%] = 10 V

Y
X

X .. Input voltage in volts

Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X

With current input:

P711 [%] = 20 mA

Y
X

X .. Input current in mA
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P712

Offset for "Analog selectable input 1"

(G113)
P713
*

Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 1"

(G113)

11-76

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P714
*

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 1"

All binector numbers

(G113)

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

10 to 14
[Bit]
1 bit

Ind: None
FS=12
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
P715

Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 1"

(G113)
P716
*

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.

(G113)

Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 1"

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P717
*
(G113)

Resolution of "Analog selectable input 1"

See P707

Analog input terminals 8 / 9 (analog selectable input 2)

P721

Normalization of "Analog selectable input 2"

FDS

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an

input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(G114)

The following generally applies:

For voltage input:
Y
P721 [%] = 10 V
X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P721 [%] = 20 mA
X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P722

Offset for "Analog selectable input 2"

(G114)
P723
*

Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 2"

(G114)

P724
*
(G114)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 2"

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P725

Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 2"

(G114)
P726
*

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.

(G114)

Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 2"

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-77

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
All binector numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-270.00 to 270.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: 4
FS=60.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%
0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Analog input terminals 10 / 11 (analog selectable input 3)

P731

Normalization of "Analog selectable input 3"

FDS

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an

input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(G114)

The following generally applies:

For voltage input:
Y
P731 [%] = 10 V
X .. Input voltage in volts
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X
With current input:
Y
P731 [%] = 20 mA
X .. Input current in mA
X
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

P732

Offset for "Analog selectable input 3"

(G114)
P733
*

Mode of signal injection at "Analog selectable input 3"

(G114)

P734
*
(G114)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Analog selectable input 3"

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P735

Filtering time for "Analog selectable input 3"

(G114)
P736
*

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.

(G114)

Source for enabling of "Analog selectable input 3"

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Analog input terminals 103 / 104 (main actual value)

P741

Normalization for "Main actual value

FDS
(G113)

Rated value of input voltage at nmax (=tachometer voltage at maximum

speed)
This parameter defines the maximum speed when P083=1.

P742

Offset for "Main actual value" analog input

(G113)
P743
*

Mode of signal injection at "Main actual value" analog input

(G113)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P744
*

Source for selection of sign reversal at "Main actual value" analog

input

(G113)

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-78

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P745

Filtering time for "Main actual value" analog input

(G113)
P746
*

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 1 ms is applied as standard.

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
All binector numbers
1

(G113)

Source for enabling of "Main actual value" analog input

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =
enabled)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.39

Analog outputs

(see also Section 8, Sheets G115 and G116)

Analog output terminals 12 / 13 (actual current display)
P749
*

Control word for terminal 12 (actual current display)

Output with correct sign

(positive voltage: Current in torque direction MI)
(negative voltage: Current in torque direction MII)

Output of absolute value (positive voltage only)

Output with sign, inverted

(positive voltage: Current in torque direction MII)
(negative voltage: Current in torque direction MI)

Output of absolute value, inverted (negative voltage only)

(G115)

Analog output terminals 14 / 15

P750
*
(G115)

P751
*
(G115)

Source for output value at analog output 1

Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Mode of signal injection at analog output 1
0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with correct sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P752

Filtering time for analog output 1

(G115)
P753

Normalization of analog output 1

(G115)

y [V ] = x

P753
100 %

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P754

Offset for analog output 1

(G115)
Analog output terminals 16 / 17
P755
*
(G115)

Source for output value at analog output 2

Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-79

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P756
*

Mode of signal injection at analog output 2

0 to 3
1

(G115)

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with correct sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P757

Filtering time for analog output 2

(G115)
P758

Normalization of analog output 2

(G115)

y [V ] = x

P758
100 %

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms
-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P759

Offset for analog output 2

(G115)
Analog output terminals 18 / 19
P760
*
(G116)

P761
*
(G116)

Source for output value at analog output 3

Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Mode of signal injection at analog output 3
0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with correct sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

P762

Filtering time for analog output 3

(G116)
P763

Normalization of analog output 3

(G116)

y [V ] = x

P763
100 %

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P764

Offset for analog output 3

(G116)
Analog output terminals 20 / 21
P765
*
(G116)

P766
*
(G116)
P767
(G116)

11-80

Source for output value at analog output 4

Selection of connector whose value is to applied to the analog output
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Mode of signal injection at analog output 4
0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with correct sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

Filtering time for analog output 4

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P768

Normalization of analog output 4

(G116)

y [V ] = x

P768
100 %

-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

x = Normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

y = Normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with offset = 0)
P769

Offset for analog output 4

(G116)

11.40

Binary outputs

(see also Section 8, Sheet G112)

P770
Control word for binary selectable outputs
*
i001: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 46 is not inverted
1 Binary selectable output at terminal 46 is inverted
(G112)
i002: 0 Binary selectable output at terminal 48 is not inverted
(G200)
1 Binary selectable output at terminal 48 is inverted

P771
*
(G112)
(G200)
P772
*
(G112)
(G200)
P773
*
(G112)
P774
*
(G112)

i003: 0
1

Binary selectable output at terminal 50 is not inverted

Binary selectable output at terminal 50 is inverted

i004: 0
1

Binary selectable output at terminal 52 is not inverted

Binary selectable output at terminal 52 is inverted

Source for output value at binary output 1

Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 46
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for output value at binary output 2
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 48
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for output value at binary output 3
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 50
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for output value at binary output 4
Selection of binector to be injected at binary selectable output, terminal 52
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

P775

Delay for output value at binary output 1

(G112)
(G200)

The logic level at the binary selectable output changes only if the internal
signal level remains constant for the set delay period (internal signal level
changes which do not last as long as this delay period are not switched
through to the output)

P776

Delay for output value at binary output 2

(G112)
(G200)

P777

Delay for output value at binary output 3

(G112)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-81

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P778

Delay for output value at binary output 4

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

(G112)

11.41

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0, 2, 8, 9
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 16
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0, 3, 4, 127
1

Ind: None
FS=127
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 13
1

Ind: None
FS=6
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 16
FS=
i001: 32
i002: 167
i003: 0
i004: 33
i005-i016: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Configuration of serial interfaces on basic converter

G-SST 1 (RS485 / RS232 on X300) (see also Section 8, Sheet G170 and Section 9)
P780
*
(G170)

Selection of protocol for G-SST1 basic converter interface

P781
*
(G170)

Number of process data for G-SST1

0
2
8
9

Setting has no function

USS protocol
for factory purposes
For internal factory test purposes

When P780 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant

When USS protocol (P780=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements

P782
*
(G170)

No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol

1...16

Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number

applies to transmission and receipt)
The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at
connectors (K2001 to K2016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at
binectors for "internal wiring" purposes.
The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected
in parameters P784.01 to P784.16.

Length of parameter jobs for G-SST1

This parameter is effective only when P780=2 (USS protocol).
0
3, 4
127

No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.

3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length

P783
*
(G170)

Baud rate for G-SST1

P784
*
(G170)

Source for transmit data for G-SST1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
13

300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
56700 baud
93750 baud
187500 baud

Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data to the USS

master via USS interface 1.
i001:
i002:
...
i016:

Selection for word 1

Selection for word 2
Selection for word 16

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11-82

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P785

Options for G-SST1

0 to 1
1

i001:
(G170)
i002:

0 = Bus terminator OFF

1 = Bus terminator ON
st
0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K2001 to K2016, or to binectors B2100 to B2915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.

P786
*
(G170)

USS bus address for G-SST1

P787

Telegram failure time for G-SST1

(G170)

The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P780=2 (USS
protocol) is selected.

This parameter is functional only when P780=2 (USS protocol). Address via
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 30
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.000 to 65.000
[s]
0.001s

Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

2030, 2031

Ind: None
FS=2030
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 10
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.000
No time monitoring
0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.
Fault message F011 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this
time period.
Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
P788
*
(G170)

Source for activation of F011

Selection of binector which will activate fault message F011 when it
switches to log. "1"
2030 = binector B2030
2031 = binector B2031

r789

Diagnostic information for G-SST1

Free-running counter, overflow at 65535

(G170)
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

i007:
i008:
i009:

i010:

Number of error-free telegrams

Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
Number of byte frame errors
Number of overrun errors
Parity error
STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. 02
Violation of telegram residual transfer time
Block check error
Incorrect telegram length:
With P782=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is P781 + P782
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P787. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-83

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0, 2, 5, 6, 9
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 16
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0, 3, 4, 127
1

Ind: None
FS=127
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 13
1

Ind: None
FS=6
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

G-SST 2 (RS485 on X172) (see also Section 8, Sheets G171 and G173 and Section 9)
P790
*
(G171)
(G173)

Selection of protocol for G-SST2 basic converter interface

P791
*
(G171)
(G173)

Number of process data for G-SST2

0
2
5
6
9

Setting has no function

USS protocol
Peer-to-peer communication
Communication with the SIMOREG CCP
For internal factory test purposes

When P790 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant

When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements
0
1...16

No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol

Number of process data words in USS protocol (same number
applies to transmission and receipt)
The received PZD elements (1 to max. 16) are available at
connectors (K6001 to K6016) and, in some cases, bit-serially at
binectors for "internal wiring" purposes.
The PZD elements to be transmitted (1 to max. 16) are selected
in parameters P794.01 to P794.16.

When peer-to-peer (P790= 5) is selected: Number of transferred words

P792
*
(G171)

Illegal setting

1...5

Number of transferred words

6...16

Illegal setting

Length of parameter jobs for G-SST2

This parameter is effective only when P790=2 (USS protocol).
0
3, 4
127

P793
*
(G171)
(G173)

11-84

No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.

3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length

Baud rate for G-SST2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
13

300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
56700 baud
93750 baud
187500 baud

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P794
*
(G171)
(G173)

Source for transmit data for G-SST2

All connector
numbers
1

Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via basic

converter interface 2

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 16
FS=
i001: 32
i002: 167
i003: 0
i004: 33
i005-i016: 0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 30
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected:

i001:
i002:
...
i016:

Selection for word 1

Selection for word 2
Selection for word 16

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:

i001:
i002:
...
i005:

Selection for word 1

Selection for word 2

i006:
...
i016:

Not used

Selection for word 5

Not used

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P795
(G171)
(G173)

P796
*
(G171)

Options for G-SST2

i001:
i002:

0 = Bus terminator OFF

1 = Bus terminator ON
st
0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K6001 to K6016, or to binectors B6100 to B6915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.

USS bus address for G-SST2

This parameter is functional only when P790=2 (USS protocol). Address via
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-85

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P797

Telegram failure time for G-SST2

(G171)
(G173)

The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P790=2 (USS
protocol) or P790=5 (peer-to-peer) is selected.

0.000 to 65.000
[s]
0.001s

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
FS=6030
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 10
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.000
No time monitoring
0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.
Fault message F012 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this
time period.
Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
Since the telegram transfer time is dependent on the set baud rate, the
following minimum setting values for P797 are recommended:
Baud rate as set in P793:
300
600
1200
2400
4800

baud
baud
baud
baud
baud

Recommended minimum value for P797:

0.520s
0.260s
0.140s
0.080s
0.040s

Note:
If the "Automatic restart" function is selected (P086>0) on the peer-to-peer
communication partner, then only a parameter setting of P797>P086 (on the
communication partner) is meaningful.
P798
*
(G171)
(G173)

Source for activation of F012

Selection of binector which will activate fault message F012 when it
switches to log. "1"

6030, 6031

6030 = binector B6030

6031 = binector B6031
r799

Diagnostic information for G-SST2

Free-running counter, overflow at 65535

(G171)
(G173)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:*)

i007:*)
i008:*)
i009:*)

i010:

Number of error-free telegrams

Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
Number of byte frame errors
Number of overrun errors
Parity error
STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. 02
Violation of telegram residual transfer time (USS prot. only)
Block check error
Incorrect telegram length:
With P792=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is P791 + P792
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P797. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.

*) Indices i006 to i009 are irrelevant for communication with the SIMOREG
CCP (P790 = 6)

11-86

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0, 2, 5, 9
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 16
1

Ind: None
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0, 3, 4, 127
1

Ind: None
FS=127
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 to 13
1

Ind: None
FS=13
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

G-SST 3 (RS485 on X162) (see also Section 8, Sheets G172 and G174 and Section 9)
P800
*
(G172)
(G174)

Selection of protocol for G-SST3 basic converter interface

P801
*
(G172)
(G174)

Number of process data for G-SST3

0
2
5
9

Setting has no function

USS protocol
Peer-to-peer communication
For internal factory test purposes

When P800 = 0 or 9 is selected: Parameter is irrelevant

When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected: Number of PZD elements
0
1...16

No process data are expected or sent in the USS protocol

When peer-to-peer (P800= 5) is selected: Number of transferred words

P802
*
(G172)

Illegal setting

1...5

Number of transferred words

6...16

Illegal setting

Length of parameter jobs for G-SST3

This parameter is effective only when P800=2 (USS protocol).
0
3, 4
127

P803
*
(G172)
(G174)

No PKW data are expected or sent in the USS protocol.

3 or 4 PKW data words are expected in the USS protocol and 3
or 4 PKW data words are also sent (for transmission of
parameter values).
Number of PKWs is determined by the telegram length

Baud rate for G-SST3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
13

300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
56700 baud
93750 baud
187500 baud

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-87

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P804
*
(G172)
(G174)

Source for transmit data for G-SST3

All connector
numbers
1

Selection of connectors to be transferred as transmit data via basic

converter interface 3

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 16
FS=
i001: 32
i002: 167
i003: 0
i004: 33
i005-i016: 0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 30
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected:

i001:
i002:
...
i016:

Selection for word 1

Selection for word 2
Selection for word 16

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:

i001:
i002:
...
i005:

Selection for word 1

Selection for word 2

i006:
...
i016:

Not used

Selection for word 5

Not used

Applicable settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
P805

Options for G-SST3

i001:

(G172)
(G174)

P806
*
(G172)

11-88

i002:

0 = Bus terminator OFF

1 = Bus terminator ON
st
0 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does not function as "Control
by PLC".
st
1 = Bit 10 of the 1 receive word does function as "Control by
st
PLC, i.e. when bit 10 = 0, all other bits of the 1 receive word,
as well as receive words 2 to 16, are not written to connectors
K9001 to K9016, or to binectors B9100 to B9915. All these
connectors and binectors retain their old values.

USS bus address for G-SST3

This parameter is functional only when P800=2 (USS protocol). Address via
which the unit can be addressed in USS bus operation.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P807

Telegram failure time for G-SST3

0.000 to 65.000
[s]
0.001s

(G172)
(G174)

The failure time set in this parameter is valid when setting P800=2 (USS
protocol) or P800=5 (peer-to-peer) is selected.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
FS=9030
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 10
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0.000
No time monitoring
0.001...65.000 Time which may elapse between the receipt of two
telegrams addressed to the unit before a fault message
is activated.
Fault message F013 is activated if no valid telegram is received within this
time period.
Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
Since the telegram transfer time is dependent on the set baud rate, the
following minimum setting values for P807 are recommended:
Baud rate as set in P803:
300
600
1200
2400
4800

baud
baud
baud
baud
baud

Recommended minimum value for P807:

0.520s
0.260s
0.140s
0.080s
0.040s

Note:
If the "Automatic restart" function is selected (P086>0) on the peer-to-peer
communication partner, then only a parameter setting of P807>P086 (on the
communication partner) is meaningful.
P808
*
(G172)
(G174)

Source for activation of F013

Selection of binector which will activate fault message F013 when it
switches to log. "1"

9030, 9031

9030 = binector B9030

9031 = binector B9031
r809

Diagnostic information for G-SST3

Free-running counter, overflow at 65535

(G172)
(G174)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

i007:
i008:
i009:

i010:

Number of error-free telegrams

Number of errored telegrams:
Byte frame, parity, overrun or BCC error
Number of byte frame errors
Number of overrun errors
Parity error
STX error:
Start interval before STX not observed,
telegram residual transfer time not observed,
delay time of LGE character too long,
erroneous STX, i.e. 02
Violation of telegram residual transfer time (USS prot. only)
Block check error
Incorrect telegram length:
With PP802=3 or 4 only:
The length of the received telegram is P801 + P802
(Note: If the received values are correct, they will be processed
even when this error has been detected)
Timeout error:
No valid telegram has been received for a period exceeding the
setting in P807. After the occurrence of a timeout error, this
counter is not activated again until the next valid telegram is
received.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-89

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

r810

Receive data on G-SST1

Display of data received via USS interface 1

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 20
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: 20
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 20
Type: L2

P052 = 3

(G170)
i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:
r811

Display process data word 1

Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

Transmit data on G-SST1

Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 1

(G170)
i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Display process data word 1

Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

r812

Receive data on G-SST2

(G171)
(G173)

Display of data received via USS interface 2

When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected:

i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Display process data word 1

Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:

Display of data received via peer-to-peer interface 2
i001:
...
i005
i006:
...
i020

Receive data word 1

Receive data word 5
Not used
Not used

When communication with the SIMOREG CCP is selected (P790 = 6):

Data received from the SIMOREG CCP via interface 2 is displayed
i001:
i002:
...
i018
i019
i020

11-90

Last received 1-byte message

Last received header of a multibyte message
Free-running counter for the number of received 1-byte
messages
Free-running counter for the number of received headers of a
multibyte message
Free-running counter for the number of received sequence bytes
of a multibyte message

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

r813

Transmit data on G-SST2

(G171)
(G173)

Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 2

When USS protocol (P790=2) is selected:

i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 20
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: 20
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 20
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Display process data word 1

Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P790=5) is selected:

Display of the data to be transmitted via peer-to-peer interface 2
i001:
...
i005
i006:
...
i020
r814

Transmit data word 1

Transmit data word 5
Not used
Not used

Receive data on G-SST3

When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected:

(G172)
(G174)

Display of data received via USS interface 3

i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Display process data word 1

Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:

Display of data received via peer-to-peer interface 3
i001:
...
i005
i006:
...
i020

Receive data word 1

Receive data word 5
Not used
Not used

r815

Transmit data on G-SST3

(G172)
(G174)

Display of the data to be transmitted via USS interface 3

When USS protocol (P800=2) is selected:

i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i020:

Display process data word 1

Display process data word 16
Display parameter data word 1
Display parameter data word 4

When peer-to-peer (P800=5) is selected:

Display of the data to be transmitted via peer-to-peer interface 3
i001:
...
i005
i006:
...
i020

Transmit data word 1

Transmit data word 5
Not used
Not used

Peer-to-peer interfaces: Enable transmission and receipt of telegrams:

If transmission on a peer-to-peer interface is disabled, the associated output drivers are connected to high impedance. If reception is
disabled on a peer-to-peer interface, then the telegram failure monitoring function is deactivated.
All binector numbers Ind: None
P052 = 3
P816
Peer-to-peer 2: Source for data reception enabling command
1
FS=1
P051 = 40
0 = binector B0000
Type: L2
Offline
(G173)
1 = binector B0001
etc.
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-91

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P817

Peer-to-peer 2: Source for data transmission enabling command

All binector numbers

(G173)
P818
(G174)
P819
(G174)

11.42

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Peer-to-peer 3: Source for data reception enabling command
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Peer-to-peer 3: Source for data transmission enabling command
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Deactivation of monitoring functions

WARNING
If monitoring functions are deactivated, there may be a risk to the safety of operating personnel or of
substantial property damage if a fault or error actually occurs!
P820
*

Deactivation of fault messages

The numbers of all fault messages to be deactivated must be entered in this
parameter. Fault numbers can be entered in any order. 0 must be entered
for any unused indices of the parameter.

0 to 147
1

Ind: 99
FS=
see column
on left
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 147
1

Ind: 99
FS= 0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 10
Type: O2

P052 = 3

13000 to 25000
1

Ind: 3
FS=19139
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Factory setting:
i001 = 7
(overvoltage)
i002 = 18
(short circuit at binary outputs)
i003 = 31
(monitoring of speed controller)
i004 = 35
(drive blocked)
i005 = 36
(armature current cannot flow)
i006 = 37
(I2t motor monitoring function has responded)
i007 to i099 = 0
P821
*

11.43
r824

Deactivation of alarms
The numbers of all alarm messages to be deactivated must be entered in
this parameter. Alarm numbers can be entered in any order. 0 must be
entered for any unused indices of the parameter.

Compensation values
A7006 compensation values
These data contain compensation values for the analog section of
electronics board A7006

P825

Offset compensation for actual field current channel

These data contain compensation values for the actual field current sensing
function. They are automatically set during "Restore factory settings"
(P051=21) and during the automatic offset compensation run (P051=22).

11-92

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
-100 to 100 * 1.333
[s]
1.333s

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

P826

Correction of natural commutation timing

(G163)

If there is a variation in the armature current peak value (in spite of a

constant firing angle), it can be corrected by offsetting the firing angle
reference time of the appropriate line phase in parameter P826. One line
phase (UV, UW, VW, VU, WU, WV) is assigned to each parameter index
(i001 to i006).
Increasing the parameter setting by a value of 1 corresponds to an increase
of 1.333 s in the firing angle (0.024 degrees at 50Hz line frequency),
consequently reducing the armature current peak in the appropriate line
phase.
P826 is automatically set during the optimization run for precontrol and
current controller (armature and field) (P051=25) (only when U800=0; when
U800=1 or 2, parameters P826.001 to 006 are set to 0).

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 3
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 16
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 68
Type: O2

P052 = 3

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Caution:
Even an asymmetrical system causes variations in the magnitude of
armature current peaks. However, the system asymmetry may also change.
r827

Internal diagnosis
i001:
i002:
i003:

r828

Number of write access operations to EEPROM

Number of Page-Write access operations to EEPROM
Counter for DUAL-PORT RAM timeouts

MLFB data
These data contain details about the power section design (model)

r829

A7001 compensation values

These data contain compensation values for the analog section of
electronics board A7001

11.44
P830
*

Thyristor diagnosis
Control word for thyristor diagnosis
0
1
2
3

Thyristor check function deactivated

Thyristors are checked on initial SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command after connection of the electronics supply voltage.
Thyristors are checked on every SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command.
Thyristors will be checked on the next SWITCH-ON or INCHING
command. Parameter P830 is set to 0 if no fault is detected.

Note:
The thyristor check function may not be activated (setting P830=0 must be
selected)
when the Enable a torque direction for torque direction change by
parallel drive function is in use (see also parameter P165) or
when the converter is used to supply large inductances (e.g. field supply
from armature terminals, supply of lifting solenoids, etc.).

11.45

Parameters for DriveMonitor and OP1S

P831
to
r849

Parameters for the Trace function of DriveMonitor

r850
to
P899

Parameters for the OP1S

P052 = 3

These parameters are settings for the data exchange between DriveMonitor
and the SIMOREG converter. They must not be changed!
P052 = 3

These parameters are settings for the data exchange between OP1S and
the SIMOREG converter. They must not be changed!

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-93

Parameter list
PNU

11.46
P918

05.2007

Description

P927
*
(G170)
(G171)
(G172)
(Z110)
(Z111)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 200
1

Ind: 2
FS=3
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 127
1

Ind: None
FS=6
Type: V2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Profile parameters
CB bus address
Protocol-dependent bus address for communication boards

(Z110)
(Z111)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Note:
The validity of the bus address is monitored by the communication board.
(Bus addresses 0 to 2 are reserved for Master stations on PROFIBUS
boards and must not therefore be set for other purposes). If the value is not
accepted by the COM BOARD, fault F080 is displayed with fault value 5
Parameterization enable
Enabling of interfaces for parameterization. A parameter value can only be
altered via an enabled interface.
0:
1:
2:
4:
8:
16:
32:
64:

None
Communications board (CB)
Parameterizing unit (PMU)
G-SST1 serial interface and OP1S
Reserved
Technology board (TB)
G-SST2 serial interface
G-SST3 serial interface

Setting information:
Every interface has a numeric code.
The number for one specific interface, or the sum of various numbers
assigned to several interfaces, must be entered in this parameter in order to
enable the relevant interface(s) for use as a parameterization interface.
Example:
Factory setting value 6 (=4+2) means that the PMU and G-SST1 interfaces
are enabled for parameterization purposes.

11-94

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.47
r947
(G189)

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Ind: 64
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 64
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Fault memory
Fault memory
Display of fault messages generated in response to 8 recent faults. A fault
value and fault time is assigned to each fault number (see Section 10 for
details of fault numbers and fault values).The interrelationship between the
associated parameters is shown in the diagram below.
The fault numbers of the last (maximum 8) fault events are stored under the
indices of parameter P947. r947.001 displays the fault number of the current
(still not acknowledged) fault, index 9 displays the number of the most
recent acknowledged fault, index 17 the fault number of the second most
recent acknowledged fault, etc. An entry of "0" means that no "earlier" fault
has occurred. Since only one fault message can be stored with respect to
any fault event on the SIMOREG 6RA70, only indices 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41,
49 and 57 are relevant.
A fault value is assigned to each fault number in the corresponding index of
parameter r949. This provides further information about the nature of the
fault.
In addition, the fault time (the current reading of the hours run counter as
the fault occurred (r048)), is stored for each fault in r049. The data for the
current (not yet acknowledged) fault are stored as the "Hours run counter
reading" in index 1. The data for earlier, already acknowledged faults are
stored under the following indices.
r947
Fault number

r949
Fault value

Current

Index 1

1 acknowl.

Index 2

2nd acknowl.

Index 3

3rd acknowl.

Index 4

4th acknowl.

Index 5

5th acknowl.

Index 6

6th acknowl.

Index 7

7th acknowl.

Index 8

1st acknowl.

Index 1

Index 9

Index 17

2 acknowl.

...

r049
Fault time [h]

Plaintext information about the fault numbers is available under the

corresponding index of parameter r951.
r949
(G189)

r951

Fault value
Fault value of faults, allows more detailed diagnosis for a variety of
parameters.
The fault values are stored in the same indices as the associated fault
numbers (r947) - see parameter r947.
Fault text

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0 to 65535
1

11-95

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

P952

Number of faults

0 to 65535
1

Settings:

11.48
r953

Deletes the entire fault memory (r947, r949 and r049) by

resetting to 0
Note:
P952 cannot be reset while a fault is pending

Display of the faults stored in the fault memory (r947, r949 and
r049)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Visualization parameters: Alarms

Alarm parameter 1
Display of active alarms in bit-coded form (A001 to A016).
If one of the alarms between 1 and 16 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.
16

See Section 10.2 for meaning of individual alarms.

r954

Alarm parameter 2
Display of active alarms in bit-coded form (A017 to A032).
If one of the alarms between 17 and 32 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.
32

See Section 10.2 for meaning of individual alarms

r955

Alarm parameter 3
Parameter alarms 3
If one of the alarms between 33 and 48 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

r956

Alarm parameter 4
Parameter alarms 4
If one of the alarms between 49 and 64 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

r957

Alarm parameter 5
Parameter alarms 5
If one of the alarms between 65 and 80 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up..

11-96

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

r958

Alarm parameter 6

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Parameter alarms 6 (CB alarms)

If one of the alarms between 81 and 96 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

r959

Alarm parameter 7
Parameter alarms 7 (TB alarms 1)
If one of the alarms between 97 and 112 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: V2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: 6
Type: O2

P052 = 1

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105

104 103 102 101 100 99

r960

Alarm parameter 8
Parameter alarms 8 (TB alarms 2)
If one of the alarms between 113 and 128 is generated, the corresponding
segment in the display lights up.
128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121
120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

11.49
r964

Device identification
Parameters for device identification on the PROFIBUS
[SW 2.0 and later]

0 to 65535
1

Display parameters to support overview and diagnosis of all nodes on the

PROFIBUS-DP during and after commissioning
(coding according to PROFIBUS profile V3)
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

11.50
r967

Display of the manufacturer of the

SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70 : SIEMENS = 42
Display of device type: SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70 = 4110
Display of the software version of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER
6RA70
(see r060.001)
Display of year of generation of the software of the SIMOREG
DC-MASTER 6RA70: y y y y
(see r061.001)
Display of the month and day of generation of the software of
the SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70: d d m m
(see r061.003 and r061.002)
Display of the controlled axes of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER
6RA70: 1

Visualization parameters: Control and status word

Display of control word 1
Visualization parameter for control word 1 (bits 0-15)
Identical to r650 (control word 1)

r968

Display of status word 1

Visualization parameter for status word 1 (bits 0 - 15)
Identical to r652 (status word 1)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-97

Parameter list
PNU

11.51
P970
*

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Resetting and storing parameters,

list of existing and modified P and r parameters
Restore factory setting
Reset parameters to factory setting (default)
0:
1:

Parameter reset: All parameters are reset to their original values

(factory setting). This parameter is then automatically reset to 1.
No parameter reset

Note: Function can also be selected by setting P051=21.

P971
*

r980

EEPROM transfer
Transfer of parameter values from RAM to EERPROM on switchover from 0
to 1.
It takes approximately 15s to process all values. The PMU remains in value
mode for this period.
List of existing parameter numbers, start
Visualization parameter for displaying the first 100 parameter numbers in
the P or r parameter range (0 to 999). The parameter numbers are listed in
ascending sequence.
Repetition of a number over several indices means that there are no further
parameter numbers in the 0 to 999 range.
The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under
index 101.
See also r989

r981

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r982

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r983

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r984

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r985

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r986

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r987

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r988

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

r989

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

See r980.
See r980.
See r980.
See r980.
See r980.
See r980.
See r980.
See r980.
Continuation of the list can be found under index 101. Please note:
860
= r860 (TECH BOARD installed)
2980 = n980
See also r980.
r990

List of modified parameter numbers, start

Visualization parameter for displaying the first 100 modified parameters in
the P or r parameter range (0 to 999). The parameter numbers are listed in
ascending sequence.
Repetition of a number over several indices means that there are no further
modified parameters in the 0 to 999 range.
The list is continued at the parameter whose number is displayed under
index 101.
See also r999.

r991

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

See r990.

11-98

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

r992

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r993

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r994

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r995

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r996

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

r997

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

See r990.
See r990.
See r990.
See r990.
See r990.
See r990.
r998

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

See r990.

r999

List of modified parameter numbers, continuation

Continuation of the list can be found under index 101. Please note:
2990 = n990

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 101
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Password protection, key/lock mechanism

Key/lock mechanism
To prevent unintended parameterization of the devices and to protect the know-how stored in the parameterization, you can restrict
access to the (basic converter) parameters and define your own passwords (=pairs of numbers that you can choose). This done in
parameters:

U005 key and

U006 lock.
If U005 and U006 are parameterized differently, it is only possible to access the following parameters:
All visualization parameters (rxxx, nxxx)
All parameters that can be changed with P051 = 0 (See parameter list)
All "user parameters" (see Parameter U007)
All other parameters neither be read nor altered.
Only when U005 and U006 are parameterized to the same values, are these restrictions removed again.
When using the key-lock-mechanism you should follow this procedure:
1. Program the den lock parameter U006 in both parameter indices with your specific password.
2. Set Parameter P051 to the value 0. This activates the password you have just set (in U006).
After that, P051 can be set to 40 again and the password protection remains active.
Examples:
Lock

Key

Result

U006.1 = 0 (factory setting)

U006.2 = 0

U005.1 = 0 (factory setting)

U005.2 = 0

The key and lock are parameterized identically,

all parameters are accessible

U006.1 = 12345
U006.2 = 54321

U005.1 = 0
U005.2 = 0

The key and lock are parameterized differently,

only the visualization parameters, the parameters that can be
altered with P051=0, and the "user parameters" are accessible

U006.1 = 12345
U006.2 = 54321

U005.1 = 12345
U005.2 = 54321

The key and lock are parameterized identically,

all parameters are accessible

NOTE:

If you forget or lose your password, you can only regain access to all parameters by restoring the factory setting (P051=21).

U005
(2005)
*

Key

U006
(2006)
*

[SW 1.7 and later]

Parameter for entering the keys for the key/lock mechanism

Lock

[SW 1.7 and later]

Parameter for entering the password for the key/lock mechanism

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 0
on-line

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

11-99

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U007
(2007)
*

Numbers of the user parameters

n009
(2009)

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Ind: 6
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

FB 11

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

FB 12

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

FB 13

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

[SW 1.7 and later]

0 to 999
2000 to 2005
2008 to 2999
1

Parameters U000 to U999 must be entered as 2000 to 2999

Processor utilization
Processor utilization
This parameter is particularly relevant as regards the selection of function
blocks of technology software in the basic unit (option S00) and the
definition of the time slices in which these function blocks are processed
(see also Section 8, Function Diagram B101 and parameters U950 to
U952).
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

11.54

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 100
FS=0
Type: O2

Parameters for entering the numbers of those parameters that are to be

accessible if the key and lock are set differently.
NOTE:

11.53

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

0.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1%

Current total processor utilization (=K9990)

Extrapolated total processor utilization for line frequency = 65Hz
(=K9991)
Current total processor utilization by programs in
time slice 10 (=K9992)
Current total processor utilization by programs in
time slice 4 (=K9993)
Current total processor utilization by programs in
time slice 2 (=K9994)
Current total processor utilization by programs in
time slice 1 (=K9995)

Display parameters for technology functions with S00

Only active with optional technology software S00

Connector/binector converters
n010
(2010)
S00

Connector/binector converter 1 (bit field 1)

Displays the status of the bits in the bit field on the bars of the 7-segment
display

(B120)

n011
(2011)
S00
(B120)
n012
(2012)
S00
(B120)

FB 10

Segment ON:
Bit (binector) = log. "1" state
Segment OFF:
Bit (binector) = log. "0" state
Connector/binector converter 2 (bit field 2)
As for n010
Connector/binector converter 3 (bit field 3)
As for n010

Binector/connector converters
n013
(2013)
S00

Binector/connector converter 1 (bit field 4)

Displays the status of the bits in the bit field on the bars of the 7-segment
display

(B121)

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

11-100

Bit = log. "1" state

Bit = log. "0" state

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

n014
(2014)

Binector/connector converter 2 (bit field 5)

S00
(B121)
n015
(2015)
S00
(B121)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
FB 14

As for n013
Binector/connector converter 3 (bit field 6)

FB 15

As for n013

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: V2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: None
Type: V2

P052 = 3

Technology controller
n016
(2016)
S00
(B170)
n017
(2017)
S00
(B170)
n018
(2018)
S00
(B170)
n019
(2019)

Actual value display

FB 260

-200.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Setpoint display

FB 261

-200.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

-32768 to 32767
[rpm]
1

Ind: 2
Type: I2

P052 = 2

S00
(B170)
Velocity/speed calculator
n020
(2020)
S00
(B190)
n021
(2021)
S00
(B190)
n022
(2022)
S00
(B190)
n023
(2023)
S00
(B190)

11.55
n024
(2024)
(G145)
(Z120)
U040
to
U041

Miscellaneous
Display of the speed actual value in rpm
i001:
i002:

[SW 2.0 and later]

Display of the speed actual value from the pulse generator input
of basic device X173
Display of speed actual value from tacho module SBP

Reserved for later use

[SW 2.0 and later]

P052 = 3

These parameters must not be changed by the user!

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-101

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

n042

Warning memory

(2042)

Warning memory for flagging warnings that have occurred since the
electronics supply voltage was last switched on.
The contents of the warning memory are lost when the electronics supply
voltage is switched off and can be deleted with U043.

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 8
Type: V2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 2

0 to 1
1

Ind: none
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 5
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
online

-32768 to 32767
1

Ind:5
Type: I2

P052 = 3

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 5
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
online

0000h to FFFFh
1

Ind:5
Type: L2

P052 = 3

[SW 2.0 and later]

The warnings are displayed in bit code as for r953 to r960

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:

Display of warnings 1 to 16
Display of warnings 17 to 32
Display of warnings 33 to 48
Display of warnings 49 to 64
Display of warnings 65 to 80
Display of warnings 81 to 96
Display of warnings 97 to 112
Display of warnings 113 to 128

See Section 10.2 for the meaning of the individual warnings

U043

Deleting the warning memory

(2043)
*

Settings:

U044
(2044)
*
(G121)

n045
(2045)
(G121)

Deletes the entire warning memory n042 by resetting it to 0.

Subsequently the parameter is automatically set back to value
1.

Not active

Connector display, decimal

(G121)

n047
(2047)
(G121)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:

Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.01

Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.02
Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.03
Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.04
Selects the connector to be displayed with n045.05

Connector display, decimal

[SW 2.0 and later]

Decimal display with sign of the values of the connectors selected with
U044. In the case of double-word connectors the H word is displayed.
Display of the connector selected with U044.01
Display of the connector selected with U044.02
Display of the connector selected with U044.03
Display of the connector selected with U044.04
Display of the connector selected with U044.05

Connector display, hexadecimal

[SW 2.0 and later]

Selection of connectors whose value is to be displayed as a hexadecimal

value with n047l
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:

Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.01

Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.02
Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.03
Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.04
Selection of the connector to be displayed with n047.05

Connector display, hexadecimal

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U049

OP1S operating display

(2049)

Function parameter for selecting parameters whose values must be

included in the operating display of the optional
OP1S convenience operator panel.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.9 and later]

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind:5
FS=
i001: 19
i002: 38
i003: 25
i004: 28
i005: 59
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 100
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 to 3999
1

1 line on left
st
1 line on right
nd
2 line (actual value), visualization parameter only
rd
3 line (setpoint)
th
4 line

Connector type converters (only active with optional technology software S00)
2 connectors are converted into one double word connector.
st
U098
FB 298
Operands for 1 connector type converter (result = KK9498)
nd
(2098)
FB 299
Operands for 2 connector type converter (result = KK9499)
*
[SW 1.9 and later]
S00
i001: Source for the low word of output connector KK9498
i002: Source for the high word of output connector KK9498
(B151)
i003:
i004:

Source for the low word of output connector KK9499

Source for the high word of output connector KK9499

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

11.56
U099
(2099)
S00
(B110)

11.57
U100
(2100)
*
S00
(B115)

Settable fixed values

Only active with optional technology software S00
Fixed value

[SW 1.8 and later]

The values set in Index .001 to .100 are connected to connectors K9501 to
K9600

Activation of fault messages and alarm messages

Only active with optional technology software S00
Source for the activation of F023 and F019

FB 2, FB 286

Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F023 or F019 on log.
"1"

All binector numbers

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Up to SW 1.7: F023 (without fault value) if binector = 1 (FB 2)
SW 1.8 and later:
i001: F023 with fault value 1 (FB 2)
i002: F023 with fault value 2
i003: F023 with fault value 3
i004: F023 with fault value 4
i005: F019 with fault value 1 (FB 286)
i006: F019 with fault value 2
i007: F019 with fault value 3
i008: F019 with fault value 4

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-103

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U101
(2101)
*
S00

Source for the activation of F024 and F020

(B115)

U102
(2102)
*
S00
(B115)

U103
(2103)
*
S00
(B115)

U104
(2104)
*
S00
(B115)

11-104

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
FB 3, FB 287

Selection of the binectors that activate fault messages F024 or F020 on

log. "1"

FB 6, FB 256

Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A023 or A019 on log. "1"
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Up to SW 1.7:
A023

(FB 6)

SW 1.8 and later:

i001:
A023
i002:
A019

(FB 6)
(FB 256)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U105
(2105)
*
S00

Source for the activation of A024 and A020

(B115)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A024 or A020 on log. "1"

A024

SW 1.8 and later:

i001:
A024
i002:
A020

(B115)

A033

(B120)
U111
(2111)
*
S00
(B120)
U112
(2112)
*
S00
(B120)

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

(FB 8)
(FB 8)
(FB 258)

Source for the activation of A034 and A054

FB 9, FB 259

Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A034 or A054 on log. "1"
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
A034

SW 1.8 and later:

i001:
A034
i002:
A054

U110
(2110)
*
S00

FB 8, FB 258

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

Up to SW 1.7:

11.58

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

(FB 7)
(FB 257)

Selection of the binectors that activate alarm A033 or A053 on log. "1"

SW 1.8 and later:

i001:
A033
i002:
A053

(B115)

All binector numbers

(FB 7)

Source for the activation of A033 and A053

Up to SW 1.7:

U107
(2107)
*
S00

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Up to SW 1.7:

U106
(2106)
*
S00

FB 7, FB 257

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

(FB 9)
(FB 9)
(FB 259)

Connector/binector converters, binector/connector converters

Only active with optional technology software S00
Source for connector/binector converter 1

FB 10

Connector which must be converted to binectors B9052 (bit 0) to B9067 (bit

15)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for connector/binector converter 2

FB 11

Connector which must be converted to binectors B9068 (bit 0) to B9083 (bit

15)
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for connector/binector converter 3

FB 12

Connector which must be converted to binectors B9084 (bit 0) to B9099 (bit

15)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-105

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U113
(2113)
*
S00

Source for binector/connector converter 1

(B121)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 13

All binector numbers

FB 14

All binector numbers

Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 15

All binector numbers

Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11.59
U116
(2116)
*
(G170)

Binector/connector converter for serial interfaces

Source for binector/connector converter for GSST1

[SW1.4 and later]

All binector numbers

Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

[SW1.4 and later]

All binector numbers

Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Binectors which must be converted to connector K2020

i001:
i002:
...
i016:

1 binector (bit 0)
nd
2 binector (bit 1)
th

16 binector (bit 15)

Settings:

U117
(2117)
*
(G171)
(G173)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for binector/connector converter for GSST2
Binectors which must be converted to connector K6020
i001:
i002:
...
i016:

1 binector (bit 0)
nd
2 binector (bit 1)
th

16 binector (bit 15)

Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-106

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U118
(2118)
*
(G172)
(G174)

Source for binector/connector converter for GSST3

[SW1.4 and later]

Binectors which must be converted to connector K9020

i001:
i002:
...
i016:

All binector numbers

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

1 binector (bit 0)
nd
2 binector (bit 1)
th

16 binector (bit 15)

Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
U119
(2119)
*

11.60

Parameters for the Trace function of DriveMonitor

[SW1.4 and later]

This parameter is a setting for the exchange of process data between

DriveMonitor and the SIMOREG converter. It must not be changed!

Mathematical functions

Only active with optional technology software S00

Adder / subtractor
The 3 operands of a function block are selected by 3 indices each of a parameter.
U120 to U131:
The connectors selected via indices i001 and i002 are added, the connector selected via index i003 is subtracted.
U120 to U122 [SW 1.8 and later]:
The connectors selected via indices i004 and i005 are added, the connector selected via index i006 is subtracted.
The result is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated.
U120
(2120)
*
S00
(B125)
U121
(2121)
*
S00
(B125)
U122
(2122)
*
S00
(B125)
U123
(2123)
*
S00
(B125)
U124
(2124)
*
S00
(B125)
U125
(2125)
*
S00
(B125)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

FB 23

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 24

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 25

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Operands for 1st adder / subtractor (result = K9120)

FB 20

Operands for 13th adder / subtractor (result = K9132)

(SW 1.8 and later)

FB 32

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Operands for 2nd adder / subtractor (result = K9121)
Operands for 14th adder / subtractor (result = K9133)
[SW 1.8 and later]
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Operands for 3rd adder / subtractor (result = K9122)
Operands for 14th adder / subtractor (result = K9134)
[SW 1.8 and later]
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
th
Operands for 4 adder / subtracter (result = K9123)

FB 21
FB 33

FB 22
FB 34

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
th

Operands for 5 adder / subtracter (result = K9124)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
th

Operands for 6 adder / subtracter (result = K9125)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-107

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U126
(2126)
*
S00
(B125)
U127
(2127)
*
S00
(B125)
U128
(2128)
*
S00
(B125)
U129
(2129)
*
S00
(B125)
U130
(2130)
*
S00
(B125)
U131
(2131)
*
S00
(B125)

Operands for 7 adder / subtracter (result = K9126)

FB 26

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

FB 27

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 28

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 29

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 30

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 31

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
th

Operands for 8 adder / subtracter (result = K9127)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
th

Operands for 9 adder / subtracter (result = K9128)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
th

Operands for 10 adder / subtracter (result = K9129)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
th

Operands for 11 adder / subtracter (result = K9130)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
th

Operands for 12 adder / subtracter (result = K9131)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Adders / subtracters for double word connectors

The 3 operands of a function block are selected in each case via the three indices of a parameter.
The result is switched to a double word connector and a connector.
The double word connector is limited to between -200.00 and +199.99%.
The connector is limited to between 0.003052 and +0.003052% (= value range of LOW word of a double word connector
= 200% / 65536)
st
Ind: 6
U132
FB 48 All connector
Operands for 1 adder / subtracter
nd
FS=0
(2132)
FB 49 numbers
Operands for 2 adder / subtracter
Type: L2
*
[SW 1.9 and later] 1
st
S00
1 adder / subtracter: result = KK9490 and K9491
nd
2 adder / subtracter: result = KK9492 and K9493
(B151)
st
i001: Addition value for 1 adder/subtracter
st
i002: Addition value for 1 adder/subtracter
st
i003: Subtraction value for 1 adder/subtracter
i004:
i005:
i006:

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Addition value for 2 adder/subtracter

nd
Addition value for 2 adder/subtracter
nd
Subtraction value for 2 adder/subtracter

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Sign inverters
The contents of the connector selected in the parameter are negated (two's complement). The result is applied to the specified connector.
st
Ind: None
P052 = 3
U135
FB 35 All connector
Source for 1 sign inverter (result = K9135)
numbers
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2135)
0
=
connector
K0000
1
Type: L2
Offline
*
1 = connector K0001
S00
etc.
(B125)
U136
(2136)
*
S00
(B125)
U137
(2137)
*
S00
(B125)

11-108

Source for 2

sign inverter (result = K9136)

FB 36

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 37

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
rd

Source for 3 sign inverter (result = K9137)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U138
(2138)
*
S00
(B125)

Source for 4 sign inverter (result = K9138)

FB 38

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Switchable sign inverters

The contents of the connector entered in the parameter for selection of a source is switched through, depending on the state of the
binector entered in the parameter for control bit selection, as an unchanged value (when control bit = 0) or as a negated value (two's
complement, when control bit = 1). The result is applied to the specified connector.
st
Ind: None
P052 = 3
U140
FB 40 All connector
Source for 1 switchable sign inverter
numbers
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2140)
Result = K9140
1
Type: L2
Offline
*
0 = connector K0000
S00
1 = connector K0001
(B125)
etc.
st
P052 = 3
U141
FB 40 All binector numbers Ind: None
Control bit for 1 switchable sign inverter
1
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2141)
0 = binector B0000
Type: L2
Offline
*
1 = binector B0001
S00
etc.
(B125)
nd
Ind: None
P052 = 3
U142
FB 41 All connector
Source for 2 switchable sign inverter
numbers
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2142)
Result = K9141
1
Type: L2
Offline
*
0 = connector K0000
S00
1 = connector K0001
(B125)
etc.
nd
P052 = 3
U143
FB 41 All binector numbers Ind: None
Control bit for 2 switchable sign inverter
1
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2143)
0 = binector B0000
Type: L2
Offline
*
1 = binector B0001
S00
etc.
(B125)
Divider
The two operands (x1, x2) for each divider are selected via 2 indices each of the parameter:
Index i001 = x1, index i002 = x2
Index i003 = x1, index i004 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later]
Formula: y =

x1 100%
x2

For division by 0 (x2=0) the following applies:

for x1 > 0: y = +199.99%
for x1 = 0: y = 0.00%
for x1 < 0: y = -200.00%

y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated.

U145
Operands for 1st divider (result = K9145)
(2145)
Operands for 4th divider (result = K9142)
*
0 = Connector K0000
S00
1 = Connector K0001
(B131)
etc.
U146
Operands for 2nd divider (result = K9146)
(2146)
Operands for 5th divider (result = K9143)
*
0 = Connector K0000
S00
1 = Connector K0001
(B131)
etc.
U147
Operands for 3rd divider (result = K9147)
(2147)
Operands for 6th divider (result = K9144)
*
0 = Connector K0000
S00
1 = Connector K0001
(B131)
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

FB 45
FB 42

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

FB 46
FB 43

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

FB 47
FB 44

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

11-109

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Multiplier
The two operands (x1, x2) for each multiplier are selected via 2 indices of the parameter each:
Index i001 = x1, Index i002 = x2
Index i003 = x1, Index i004 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later]
Index i005 = x1, Index i006 = x2 [SW 1.8 and later]
Formula: y =

x1 x 2
100%

y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the connector stated.

U150
Operands for 1st multiplier (result = K9150)
(2150)
Operands for 5th multiplier (result = K9430)
*
Operands for 9th multiplier (result = K9431)
S00
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
(B130)
etc.
U151
Operands for 2nd multiplier (result = K9151)
(2151)
Operands for 6th multiplier (result = K9432)
*
Operands for 10th multiplier (result = K9433)
S00
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
(B130)
etc.
U152
Operands for 3rd multiplier (result = K9152)
(2152)
Operands for 7thmultiplier (result = K9434)
*
Operands for 11th multiplier (result = K9435)
S00
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
(B130)
etc.
U153
Operands for 4th multiplier (result = K9153)
(2153)
Operands for 8the multiplier (result = K9436)
*
Operands for 12th multiplier (result = K9437)
S00
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
(B130)
etc.

FB 50
FB 290
FB 291

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

FB 51
FB 292
FB 293

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

FB 52
FB 294
FB 295

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

FB 53
FB 296
FB 297

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

High-resolution multipliers/dividers
The three operands are selected via the three indices of the parameter, i.e. index i001 = x1, index i002 = x2, index i003 = x3
Equations: x 4( 32 bit ) = x1 x 2 , y =

x 4 x1 x 2
=
x3
x3

Applicable for division by 0 (x2=0):

When x1 > 0: y = +199.99%
When x1 = 0: y = 0.00%
When x1 < 0: y = -200.00%

y is limited to -200.00 to +199.99% and applied to the specified connector.

st
U155
Operands for 1 multiplier/divider (result = K9155)
(2155)
0 = connector K0000
*
1 = connector K0001
S00
etc.
(B131)
U156
(2156)
*
S00
(B131)
U157
(2157)
*
S00
(B131)

Operands for 2

multiplier/divider (result = K9156)

FB 55

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 56

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 57

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 60

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
rd

Operands for 3 multiplier/divider (result = K9157)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Absolute-value generators with filtering

U160
(2160)
*
S00
(B135)

11-110

Source for input quantity for 1 abs.-value generator with filter

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U161
(2161)
*
S00
(B135)

Signal injection mode for 1 abs.-value generator with filter

FB 60

0
Injection of signal with correct sign
1
Injection of absolute value of signal
2
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
st
Filter time for 1 abs.-value generator with filter

0 to 3
1

FB 60

U162
(2162)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 61

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 61

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 61

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 62

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Signal injection mode for 3 abs.-value generator with filter

FB 62

0
Injection of signal with correct sign
1
Injection of absolute value of signal
2
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
rd
Filter time for 3 abs.-value generator with filter

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 62

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 63

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Signal injection mode for 4 abs.-value generator with filter

FB 63

0
Injection of signal with correct sign
1
Injection of absolute value of signal
2
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
th
Filter time for 4 abs.-value generator with filter

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 63

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

S00
(B135)
U163
(2163)
*
S00
(B135)
U164
(2164)
*
S00
(B135)
U165
(2165)

Source for input quantity for 2

abs.-value generator with filter

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
nd

Signal injection mode for 2

abs.-value generator with filter

0
Injection of signal with correct sign
1
Injection of absolute value of signal
2
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
3
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted
nd
Filter time for 2 abs.-value generator with filter

S00
(B135)
U166
(2166)
*
S00
(B135)
U167
(2167)
*
S00
(B135)
U168
(2168)

Source for input quantity for 3 abs.-value generator with filter

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
rd

S00
(B135)
U169
(2169)
*
S00
(B135)
U170
(2170)
*
S00
(B135)
U171
(2171)

Source for input quantity for 4 abs.-value generator with filter

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
th

S00
(B135)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-111

Parameter list
PNU

11.61

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

[SW 1.8 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

[SW 1.8 and later]

1 to 100
1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Processing of connectors

Only active with optional technology software S00

Averager [SW 1.8 and later]
U172
(2172)
*
S00
(B139)

U173
(2173)
S00
(B139)

11.62

Source for input signal

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

1st averager
2nd averager
3rd averager
4. averager

(FB 16)
(FB 17)
(FB 18)
(FB 19)

Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Number of sampling cycles
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

1st averager
2nd averager
3rd averager
4. averager

(FB 16)
(FB 17)
(FB 18)
(FB 19)

Limiters, limit-value monitors

Only active with optional technology software S00

Limiters
st

The input variable selected with index i001 or i004 of the 1 parameter is limited to the limit values selected with indices i002 and i003 or
i005 and i006 and applied to the specified connector. Violation of the limit values is signaled by means of two binectors.
Ind: 6
P052 = 3
U175
Source for input signal and limits for limiter 1
FB 65 All connector
numbers
FS=
P051 = 40
(2175)
Output = connector K9167
1
i001: 0
Offline
*
i001: Input signal
i002: 9165
S00
i002: Upper limiting value (L+)
i003: 9166
(B134)
i003: Lower limiting value (L-)
i004: 0
(B135)
i005: 9174
i006: 9175
Source for input signal and limits for limiter 4
FB 212
Type: L2
[SW2.0 and later]
Output = connector K9176
i004: Input signal
i005: Upper limiting value (L+)
i006: Lower limiting value (L-)

U176
(2176)
S00
(B134)
(B135)

11-112

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Limit value for limiter
i001:
i002:

Applied to connector K9165 (FB 65)

Applied to connector K9174 (FB 212)

FB 65, FB212
[SW2.0 and later]

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U177
(2177)
*
S00
(B134)
(B135)

Source for input signal and limits for limiter 2

FB 66

Output = connector K9170

i001: Input signal
i002: Upper limiting value (L+)
i003: Lower limiting value (L-)
Source for input signal and limits for limiter 5

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 6
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9168
i003: 9169
i004: 0
i005: 9177
i006: 9178
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 6
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9171
i003: 9172
i004: 0
i005: 9260
i006: 9261
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

-199.99 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
FS=100.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

FB 213
[SW2.0 and later]

Output = connector K9179

i004: Input signal
i005: Upper limiting value (L+)
i006: Lower limiting value (L-)

U178
(2178)
S00
(B134)
(B135)
U179
(2179)
*
S00
(B134)
(B135)

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Limit value for limiter
i001:
i002:

FB 66, FB213

Applied to connector K9168 (FB 66)

Applied to connector K9177 (FB 213)

[SW2.0 and later]

Source for input signal and limits for limiter 3

FB 67

Output = connector K9173

i001: Input signal
i002: Upper limiting value (L+)
i003: Lower limiting value (L-)
Source for input signal and limits for limiter 6

FB 214
[SW2.0 and later]

Output = connector K9262

i004: Input signal
i005: Upper limiting value (L+)
i006: Lower limiting value (L-)

U180
(2180)
S00
(B134)
(B135)

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Limit value for limiter
i001:
i002:

FB 67, FB214

Applied to connector K9171 (FB 67)

Applied to connector K9260 (FB 214)

[SW2.0 and later]

Limit-value monitors for double word connectors

U181
(2181)
*
S00
(B151)

U182
(2182)
S00
(B151)

Source for input signal (A) and operating threshold (B)

st
FB 68
for 1 limit-value monitor for double word connectors
nd
FB 69
for 2 limit-value monitor for double word connectors
[SW 1.9 and later]
st

i001:
i002:

Input signal for 1 limit-value monitor

st
Operating threshold for 1 limit-value monitor

i003:
i004:

Input signal for 2 limit-value monitor

nd
Operating threshold for 2 limit-value monitor

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
st
Hysteresis for 1 limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB 68
nd
Hysteresis for 2 limit-value monitor for double word connectors FB69
[SW 1.9 and later]
i001:
i002:

Hysteresis for 1 limit-value monitor

nd
Hysteresis for 2 limit-value monitor

The hysteresis relates to the HIGH word of the double word connector

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-113

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

FB 70

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9181
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 70

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 70

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Hysteresis for 1 limit-value monitor with filtering

FB 70

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
nd
2 limit-value monitor with filtering

FB 71

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9183
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 71

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

limit-value monitor with filtering

FB 71

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

limit-value monitor with filtering

FB 71

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 72

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9185
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 72

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 72

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 72

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Limit-value monitors with filtering

U185
(2185)
*
S00
(B136)

U186
(2186)
S00
(B136)
U187
(2187)
S00
(B136)
U188
(2188)

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
st
1 limit-value monitor with filtering
i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9181
st

Filter time for 1 limit-value monitor with filtering

S00
(B136)
U189
(2189)
*
S00
(B136)

U190
(2190)
S00
(B136)
U191
(2191)
S00
(B136)
U192
(2192)

i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9183
nd

Filter time for 2

Hysteresis for 2

S00
(B136)
U193
(2193)
*
S00
(B136)

U194
(2194)
S00
(B136)
U195
(2195)
S00
(B136)
U196
(2196)
S00
(B136)

11-114

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
rd
3 limit-value monitor with filtering
i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9185
rd

Filter time for 3 limit-value monitor with filtering

Hysteresis for 3 limit-value monitor with filtering

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

FB 73

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9186
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 73

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Hysteresis for 1 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 73

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
nd
2 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 74

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9187
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 74

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 74

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
rd
3 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 75

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9188
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 75

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Hysteresis for 3 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 75

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
th
4 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 76

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9189
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 76

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Limit-value monitors without filtering

U197
(2197)
*
S00
(B137)

U198
(2198)
S00
(B137)
U199
(2199)

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
st
1 limit-value monitor without filtering
i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9186
st

S00
(B137)
U200
(2200)
*
S00
(B137)

U201
(2201)
S00
(B137)
U202
(2202)

i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9187
nd

Hysteresis for 2

S00
(B137)
U203
(2203)
*
S00
(B137)

U204
(2204)
S00
(B137)
U205
(2205)

i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9188
rd

S00
(B137)
U206
(2206)
*
S00
(B137)

U207
(2207)
S00
(B137)

i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9189

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-115

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

U208
(2208)

Hysteresis for 4 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 76

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
th
5 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 77

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9190
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 77

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Hysteresis for 5 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 77

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
th
6 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 78

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9191
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 78

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Hysteresis for 6 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 78

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Source for input signal (A) and operating point (B) for
th
7 limit-value monitor without filtering

FB 79

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 9192
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 79

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 79

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

S00
(B137)
U210
(2210)
*
S00
(B138)

U211
(2211)
S00
(B138)
U212
(2212)

i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9190
th

S00
(B138)
U213
(2213)
*
S00
(B138)

U214
(2214)
S00
(B138)
U215
(2215)

i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9191
th

S00
(B138)
U216
(2216)
*
S00
(B138)

U217
(2217)
S00
(B138)
U218
(2218)
S00
(B138)

11-116

i001:
i002:

Input signal
Operating point

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Settable operating point for limit-value monitor
Applied to connector K9192
th

Hysteresis for 7 limit-value monitor without filtering

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.63

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Processing of connectors

Only active with optional technology software S00

Maximum selection

FB 80, FB 174, FB 175, FB 176

The largest of the input values selected by 3 indices each of the parameter (x1, x2, x3) is applied to the output.
All connector
Ind: 12
U220
Source for maximum selection
numbers
FS=0
(2220)
0
=
Connector
K0000
1
Type: L2
*
1 = Connector K0001
S00
etc.

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

(B140)
i001:
i002:
i003:

x1 Maximum selection 1 (FB 80, Output = K9193)

x2 Maximum selection 1
x3 Maximum selection 1

SW 1.8 and later:

i004: x1 Maximum selection 2 (FB 174, Output = K9460)
i005: x2 Maximum selection 2
i006: x3 Maximum selection 2
i007:
i008:
i009:

x1 Maximum selection 3 (FB 175, Output = K9461)

x2 Maximum selection 3
x3 Maximum selection 3

i010:
i011:
i012:

x1 Maximum selection 4 (FB 176, Output = K9462)

x2 Maximum selection 4
x3 Maximum selection 4

Minimum selection

FB 81, FB 177, FB 178, FB 179

The smallest of the input values selected by 3 indices each of the parameter (x1, x2, x3) is applied to the output.
All connector
Ind: 12
U221
Source for minimum selection
numbers
FS=0
(2221)
0 = Connector K0000
1
Type: L2
*
1 = Connector K0001
S00
etc.

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

(B140)
i001:
i002:
i003:

x1 Minimum selection 1
x2 Minimum selection 1
x3 Minimum selection 1

SW 1.8 and later:

i004: x1 Minimum selection 2
i005: x2 Minimum selection 2
i006: x3 Minimum selection 2

(FB 81, Output = K9194)

(FB 177, Output = K9463)

i007:
i008:
i009:

x1 Minimum selection 3
x2 Minimum selection 3
x3 Minimum selection 3

(FB 178, Output = K9464)

i010:
i011:
i012:

x1 Minimum selection 4
x2 Minimum selection 4
x3 Minimum selection 4

(FB 179, Output = K9465)

Tracking/storage elements
The tracking/storage elements are storage elements for the parameterized input quantity. The outputs are linked to connectors.
Transfer of the input quantity is controlled via the RESET, TRACK and STORE functions:
RESET:
TRACK:

When the controlling binector reaches log. "1", the output is set to 0.00% (y=0)
When the controlling binector reaches log. "1", the output is set to the input value and then tracks it continuously (y=x). If the
TRACK signal switches from "1" to "0", the last value applied to the y output is "frozen"
STORE: With a "0" to "1" transition of the controlling binector signal, the output is permanently set to the current input value (y=x). This
value then remains stored
Priority
1. RESET, 2. TRACK, 3. STORE
Tracking/storage element 1
U222
(2222)
*
S00
(B145)

Source for input quantity (x)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

FB 82

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

11-117

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U223
(2223)
*
S00

Source for control signals RESET, TRACK and STORE

(B145)

Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Control word for Power On Mode

U224
(2224)
*
S00

i001:
i002:
i003:

0
1

(B145)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 82

All binector numbers

FB 82

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 83

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 83

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 83

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

TRACK
STORE
RESET

Volatile storage:
Zero appears at output when voltage recovers
Non-volatile storage:
When the voltage is disconnected or fails, the current output
value is stored and then output when the voltage recovers/is
reconnected

Tracking/storage element 2
U225
(2225)
*
S00
(B145)
U226
(2226)
*
S00

Source for input quantity (x)

(B145)

Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Control word for Power On Mode

U227
(2227)
*
S00

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for control signals RESET, TRACK and STORE
i001:
i002:
i003:

0
1

(B145)

TRACK
STORE
RESET

Connector memories
The connector memories are memory elements for the input quantities selected via the parameters. The outputs are linked to connectors.
While the SET input is in the log. "1" state, output quantity y tracks input quantity x continuously. If the SET input changes state from log.
"1" to log. "0", the current value of x is stored and output continuously at y.
Output (y) = 0 is set on POWER ON.
Connector memory 1
U228
(2228)
*
S00
(B145)
U229
(2229)
*
S00
(B145)

Source for input quantity (x)

FB 84

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 84

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 85

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 85

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for control signal SET
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Connector memory 2
U230
(2230)
*
S00
(B145)
U231
(2231)
*
S00
(B145)

11-118

Source for input quantity (x)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for control signal SET
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Connector changeover switches

FB 94

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Connector changeover switch 2 (output = K9211)

U242
(2242)
*
S00
(B150)

Source for input quantities

U243
(2243)
*
S00
(B150)

Source for control signal

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Connector changeover switch 3 (output = K9212)

U244
(2244)
*
S00
(B150)

Source for input quantities

U245
(2245)
*
S00
(B150)

Source for control signal

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Connector changeover switch 4 (output = K9213)

U246
(2246)
*
S00
(B150)
U247
(2247)
*
S00
(B150)

Source for input quantities

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for control signal
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

Connector changeover switch 5 (output = K9214)

U248
(2248)
*
S00
(B150)
U249
(2249)
*
S00
(B150)

Source for input quantities

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Source for control signal
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-119

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

U255
(2255)
*
S00
(B150)

11-120

FB 97 and FB 198

Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Source for control signal
i001:
i002:

Switchover for output 8

Switchover for output 13

[SW2.0 and later]

FB 97 and FB 198
[SW2.0 and later]

Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Connector changeover switches 9 and 14

U256
(2256)
*
S00
(B150)

Source for input quantities

Output 9 = Connector K9218
i001: 1st input signal
i002: 2nd input signal
Output 14 = Connector K9268
i003: 1st input signal
i004: 2nd input signal

U257
(2257)
*
S00
(B150)

FB 98 and FB 199

Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Source for control signal
i001:
i002:

Switchover for output 9

Switchover for output 14

[SW2.0 and later]

FB 98 and FB 199
[SW2.0 and later]

Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

Connector changeover switches 10 and 15

U258
(2258)
*
S00
(B150)

Source for input quantities

Output 10 = Connector K9219
i001: 1st input signal
i002: 2nd input signal
Output 15 = Connector K9269
i003: 1st input signal
i004: 2nd input signal

U259
(2259)
*
S00
(B150)

11.64

FB 99 and FB 229

Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Source for control signal
i001:
i002:

Switchover for output 10

Switchover for output 15

[SW2.0 and later]

FB 99 and FB 229
[SW2.0 and later]

Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

Integrators, DT1 elements, characteristics, dead zones, setpoint branching

Only active with optional technology software S00

Integrator 1 (output = K9220)

U260
(2260)
*
S00
(B155)
U261
(2261)

Source for input quantity

FB 100

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 100

10 to 65000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=10
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Integral-action time

S00
(B155)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-121

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U262
(2262)
*
S00

Source for control signals

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
FB 100

i001

Source for "Stop integrator" signal

(integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state)

i002

Source for "Set integrator" signal

(when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the
value entered in parameter U263)

(B155)

All binector numbers

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Settings:

U263
(2263)
*
S00
(B155)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for setting value

FB 100

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 101

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Integral-action time

FB 101

10 to 65000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=10
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Source for control signals

FB 101

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 101

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 102

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Integral-action time

FB 102

10 to 65000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=10
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Source for control signals

FB 102

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Integrator 2 (output = K9221)

U264
(2264)
*
S00
(B155)
U265
(2265)
S00
(B155)
U266
(2266)
*
S00

Source for input quantity

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

i001

Source for "Stop integrator" signal

(integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state)

i002

Source for "Set integrator" signal

(when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the
value entered in parameter U267)

(B155)
Settings:

U267
(2267)
*
S00
(B155)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for setting value
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Integrator 3 (output = K9222)

U268
(2268)
*
S00
(B155)
U269
(2269)
S00
(B155)
U270
(2270)
*
S00

Source for input quantity

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

i001

Source for "Stop integrator" signal

(integrator is stopped when binector reaches log. "1" state)

i002

Source for "Set integrator" signal

(when binector reaches log. "1" state, the integrator is set to the
value entered in parameter U271)

(B155)
Settings:

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-122

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U271
(2271)
*
S00
(B155)

Source for setting value

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
FB 102

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

FB 103

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Derivative-action time

FB 103

0 to 1000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Filter time

FB 103

0 to 1000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 104

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Derivative-action time

FB 104

0 to 1000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Filter time

FB 104

0 to 1000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 105

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Derivative-action time

FB 105

0 to 1000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Filter time

FB 105

0 to 1000
[ms]
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

DT1 element 1 (output = K9223, inverted: K9224)

U272
(2272)
*
S00
(B155)
U273
(2273)
S00
(B155)
U274
(2274)

Source for input quantity

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

S00
(B155)
DT1 element 2 (output = K9225, inverted: K9226)
U275
(2275)
*
S00
(B155)
U276
(2276)
S00
(B155)
U277
(2277)

Source for input quantity

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

S00
(B155)
DT1 element 3 (output = K9227, inverted: K9228)
U278
(2278)
*
S00
(B155)
U279
(2279)
S00
(B155)
U280
(2280)

Source for input quantity

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

S00
(B155)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-123

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Characteristic blocks
The curve of the characteristics can be defined by 10 points each:
Index i001 to i010 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): x values for FB 106, FB 107, FB 108
Index i001 to i010 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): associated y values
SW1.8 and later:
Index i011 to i020 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): x values for FB 280, FB 282, FB 284
Index i011 to i020 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): associated y values
Index i021 to i030 of the parameters for the x values (U282, U285, U288): x values for FB 281, FB 283, FB 285
Index i021 to i030 of the parameters for the y values (U283, U286, U289): associated y values
for x = -200.00% up to x value acc. to index i001 (or i011 or i021) of the parameter for the x values gilt:
y = value acc. to index i001 (or i011 or i021) of the parameter for the y values
for x = x value acc. to index i010 (or i020 or i030) of the parameter for the x values to x = 200.00% gilt:
y = value acc. to index i010 (or i020 or i030) of the parameter for the y values
The distance between two adjacent x or y values must not be more than 199.99% otherwise deviations from the required shape of the
characteristic can
Characteristic block 1 (output = K9229)
FB 106
Characteristic block 4 (output = K9410) [SW1.8 and later]
FB 280
Characteristic block 5 (output = K9411) [SW1.8 and later]
FB 281
All connector
Ind: 3
P052 = 3
U281
Source for input quantity
numbers
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2281)
0 = Connector K0000
1
Type: L2
off-line
*
1 = Connector K0001
S00
etc.
(B160)

Up to SW 1.7:
Selected connector = input quantity for FB106
SW 1.8 and later:
i001
Input quantity
i002
Input quantity
i003
Input quantity

U282
(2282)
S00
(B160)

for FB106
for FB280
for FB281

x values
i001
i002
...
i010

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB106
for FB106

10th characteristic point

for FB106

SW 1.8 and later:

i011
1st characteristic point
i012
2nd characteristic point
...
i020
10th characteristic point

U283
(2283)
S00
(B160)

i021
i022
...
i030
y values
i001
i002
...
i010

i021
i022
...
i030

11-124

Ind:30
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01

Ind: 30
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

for FB280
for FB280
for FB280

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB281
for FB281

10th characteristic point

for FB281

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB106
for FB106

10th characteristic point

for FB106

SW 1.8 and later:

i011
1st characteristic point
i012
2nd characteristic point
...
i020
10th characteristic point

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01

for FB280
for FB280
for FB280

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB281
for FB281

10th characteristic point

for FB281

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Characteristic block 2 (output = K9230)

Characteristic block 6 (output = K9412) [SW1.8 and later]
Characteristic block 7 (output = K9413) [SW1.8 and later]
U284
Source for input quantity
(2284)
0 = Connector K0000
*
1 = Connector K0001
S00
etc.
(B160)

S00
(B160)

x values
i001
i002
...
i010

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB107
for FB107

10th characteristic point

for FB107

i021
i022
...
i030
y values

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01

Ind: 30
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01

Ind: 30
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

i001
i002
...
i010

i021
i022
...
i030

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

FB 108
FB 284
FB 285
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

2nd characteristic point

for FB283
for FB283

10th characteristic point

for FB283

Characteristic block 3 (Output = K9231)

Characteristic block 8 (Output = K9414) [SW1.8 and later]
Characteristic block 9 (Output = K9415) [SW1.8 and later]
U287
Source for input quantity
(2287)
0 = Connector K0000
*
1 = Connector K0001
S00
etc.
(B160)

All connector
numbers
1

FB 107
FB 282
FB 283
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

for FB107
for FB282
for FB283

SW 1.8 and later:

i011
1st characteristic point
i012
2nd characteristic point
...
i020
10th characteristic point

U286
(2286)

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

up to SW 1.7:
Selected connector = input quantity for FB107
SW 1.8 and later:
i001
input quantity
i002
input quantity
i003
input quantity

U285
(2285)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

All connector
numbers
1

up to SW 1.7:
Selected connector = input quantity for FB108
SW 1.8 and later:
i001
Input quantity
i002
Input quantity
i003
Input quantity

for FB108
for FB284
for FB285

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-125

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U288
(2288)

x values
i001
i002
...
i010

S00
(B160)

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB108
for FB108

10th characteristic point

for FB108

SW 1.8 and later:

i011
1st characteristic point
i012
2nd characteristic point
...
i020
10th characteristic point

U289
(2289)

i021
i022
...
i030
y values
i001
i002
...
i010

S00
(B160)

i021
i022
...
i030

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01

Ind: 30
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

for FB284
for FB284
for FB284

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB285
for FB285

10th characteristic point

for FB285

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB108
for FB108

10th characteristic point

for FB108

SW 1.8 and later:

i011
1st characteristic point
i012
2nd characteristic point
...
i020
10th characteristic point

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 30
FS=0.00
Type: I2

for FB284
for FB284
for FB284

1st characteristic point

2nd characteristic point

for FB285
for FB285

10th characteristic point

for FB285

Dead zones
The component of the input quantity (x) whose absolute value exceeds the threshold for the dead zone is applied to the output (y).
Dead zone 1 (output = K9232)
U290
(2290)
*
S00
(B161)
U291
(2291)

Source for input quantity

FB 109

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 109

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 110

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 110

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 111

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

Only active with optional technology software S00

Please note: The output (y) = 0 is set in response to "Set simple ramp-function generator to zero" and POWER ON
The output (y) is frozen at the current value in response to "Stop simple ramp-function generator"
The ramp-up and ramp-down times are set to zero in response to "Bypass simple ramp-function generator"
Ramp-up integrator:
The simple ramp-function generator contains a flip-flop whose output is set to log. "0" (ramp generator initial run) after POWER
ON or when the ramp-function generator has been enabled. When the ramp-function generator output reaches a value
corresponding to the input quantity (y=x) for the first time, the flip-flop output switches to log. "1" and remains in this state until
the next enabling command. This output is linked to binector B9191. By parameterizing U301, index i001=919, it is possible to
apply this binector to the "Bypass simple ramp-function generator" function and thus to implement a ramp-up integrator
function.
Ind: None
P052 = 3
U300
Source for input quantity
FB 113 All connector
numbers
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2300)
0 = connector K0000
1
Type: L2
Offline
*
1 = connector K0001
S00
etc.
(B165)
P052 = 3
U301
Source for control signals
FB 113 All binector numbers Ind: 3
1
FS=
P051 = 40
(2301)
i001
Source
for
"Bypass
simple
ramp-function
generator"
signal
i001: 0
Offline
*
i002
Source for "Stop simple ramp-function generator" signal
i002: 0
S00
i003
Source for "Reset / enable simple ramp-function generator"
i003: 1
(B165)
signal
Type: L2
(0 = reset to zero, 1 = enable)
Settings:

U302
(2302)
S00
(B165)
U303
(2303)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Ramp-up time

FB 113

0.00 to 300.00
[s]
0.01

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Ramp-down time

FB 113

0.00 to 300.00
[s]
0.01

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

S00
(B165)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-127

Parameter list
PNU

11.66

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

[SW 1.8 and later]

All binector numbers

Ind: 9
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

[SW 1.8 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

[SW 1.8 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Multiplexer

Only active with optional technology software S00

FB86 = 1st multiplexer (output = K9450)
FB87 = 2nd multiplexer (output = K9451)
FB88 = 3rd multiplexer (output = K9452)
Function:
An input quantity is connected through to the output depending on the control bits:

U310
(2310)
*
S00
(B195)

U311
(2311)
*
S00
(B195)

U312
(2312)
*
S00
(B195)

11-128

B3 B2 B1
Output y
0
0
0
X0
0
0
1
X1
0
1
0
X2
0
1
1
X3
1
0
0
X4
1
0
1
X5
1
1
0
X6
1
1
1
X7
Source for control bits for the multiplexer
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
i003:

Control bit B1
Control bit B2
Control bit B3

for 1st multiplexer

i004:
i005:
i006:

Control bit B1
Control bit B2
Control bit B3

for 2nd multiplexer

i007: Control bit B1

for 3rd multiplexer
i008: Control bit B2
i009: Control bit B3
Source for input quantities for 1st multiplexer
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001
i002
i003
i004
i005
i006
i007
i008

Input quantity X0
Input quantity X1
Input quantity X2
Input quantity X3
Input quantity X4
Input quantity X5
Input quantity X6
Input quantity X7

Source for input quantities for 2nd multiplexer

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001
i002
i003
i004
i005
i006
i007
i008

Input quantity X0
Input quantity X1
Input quantity X2
Input quantity X3
Input quantity X4
Input quantity X5
Input quantity X6
Input quantity X7

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U313
(2313)
*
S00

Source for input quantities for 3rd multiplexer

(B195)

11.67

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.8 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001
i002
i003
i004
i005
i006
i007
i008

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Input quantity X0
Input quantity X1
Input quantity X2
Input quantity X3
Input quantity X4
Input quantity X5
Input quantity X6
Input quantity X7

Counters
Only active with optional technology software S00

Software counter
n314
(2314)
S00
(B196)
U315
(2315)
*
S00
(B196)
U316
(2316)
*
S00
(B196)

FB 89
FB 89
[SW 1.9 and later]

0 to 65535

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Fixed values for setting/limiting inputs of software counter

FB 89
[SW 1.9 and later]

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 4
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 65535
i003: 0
i004: 0
Type: O2
Ind: 4
FS=
i001: 9441
i002: 9442
i003: 9443
i004: 9444
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Display of output of software counter

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

Minimum value
Maximum value
Setting value
Start value

Source for setting/limiting inputs of software counter

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

FB 89
[SW 1.9 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

FB 89
[SW 1.9 and later]

All binector numbers

Minimum value
Maximum value
Setting value
Start value

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Settings:
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
U317
(2317)
*
S00
(B196)

Source for control signals of software counter

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:

Positive edge: Count up

Positive edge: Count down
Stop counter
Set counter
Enable counter

Ind: 5
FS=
i001: 0
i002: 0
i003: 0
i004: 0
i005: 1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-129

Parameter list
PNU

11.68

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

FB 118

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 119

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Logic functions
Only active with optional technology software S00

Decoders/demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8
U318
(2318)
*
S00

Source for input signals for decoder/demultiplexer 1

(B200)

Settings:

U319
(2319)
*
S00
(B200)

i001
i002
i003

Source for input signal, bit 0

Source for input signal, bit 1
Source for input signal, bit 2

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for input signals for decoder/demultiplexer 2
i001
i002
i003

Source for input signal, bit 0

Source for input signal, bit 1
Source for input signal, bit 2

Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

AND elements with 3 inputs each

The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are ANDed and the result of the logic operation applied to the specified
binector.
P052 = 3
U320
Source for input signals, AND element 1 (output = B9350)
FB 120 All binector numbers Ind: 3
1
FS=1
P051 = 40
(2320)
i001
Source for input 1
Type: L2
Offline
*
i002
Source for input 2
S00
i003
Source for input 3
(B205)
Settings:

U321
(2321)
*
S00
(B205)
U322
(2322)
*
S00
(B205)
U323
(2323)
*
S00
(B205)
U324
(2324)
*
S00
(B205)
U325
(2325)
*
S00
(B205)
U326
(2326)
*
S00
(B205)

11-130

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for input signals, AND element 2 (output = B9351)

FB 121

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

11-131

Parameter list
PNU

Description

U341
(2341)
*
S00
(B205)
U342
(2342)
*
S00
(B205)
U343
(2343)
*
S00
(B205)
U344
(2344)
*
S00
(B205)
U345
(2345)
*
S00
(B205)
U346
(2346)
*
S00
(B205)
U347
(2347)
*
S00
(B205)

As for U320

OR elements with 3 inputs each

The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are ORed and the result of the logic operation applied to the specified
binector.
P052 = 3
U350
Source for input signals, OR element 1 (output = B9380)
FB 150 All binector numbers Ind: 3
1
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2350)
i001
Source for input 1
Type: L2
Offline
*
i002
Source for input 2
S00
i003
Source for input 3
(B206)
Settings:

U351
(2351)
*
S00
(B206)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for input signals, OR element 2 (output = B9381)

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 152

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 153

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 154

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

As for U350

U352
(2352)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 3 (output = B9382)

U353
(2353)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 4 (output = B9383)

U354
(2354)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 5 (output = B9384)

11-132

FB 151

As for U350

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U355
(2355)
*
S00
(B206)
U356
(2356)
*
S00
(B206)
U357
(2357)
*
S00
(B206)
U358
(2358)
*
S00
(B206)
U359
(2359)
*
S00
(B206)
U360
(2360)
*
S00
(B206)
U361
(2361)
*
S00
(B206)
U362
(2362)
*
S00
(B206)
U363
(2363)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 6 (output = B9385)

U364
(2364)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 15 (output = B9394)

U365
(2365)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 16 (output = B9395)

U366
(2366)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 17 (output = B9396)

U367
(2367)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 18 (output = B9397)

U368
(2368)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 11 (output = B9390)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

11-133

Parameter list
PNU

Description

U369
(2369)
*
S00
(B206)

Source for input signals, OR element 20 (output = B9399)

05.2007
Value range
[Unit]
Steps
FB 169

As for U350

All binector numbers

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

EXCLUSIVE OR elements with 2 inputs each

The input signals selected via the 2 indices of the parameter are combined in an EXCLUSIVE OR (XOR) operation and the result applied
to the specified binector..
P052 = 3
U370
Source for input signals, XOR element 1 (output = B9195)
FB 170 All binector numbers Ind: 2
1
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2370)
i001
Source for input 1
Type: L2
Offline
*
i002
Source for input 2
S00
(B206)
Settings:

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

As for U380

Source for input signal, inverter 5 (output = B9454)

As for U380

Source for input signal, inverter 6 (output = B9455)

As for U380

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U387
(2387)
*
S00
(B207)
U388
(2388)
*
S00
(B207)
U389
(2389)
*
S00
(B207)
U390
(2390)
*
S00
(B207)
U391
(2391)
*
S00
(B207)
U392
(2392)
*
S00
(B207)
U393
(2393)
*
S00
(B207)

Source for input signal, inverter 8 (output = B9457)

U394
(2394)
*
S00
(B207)

Source for input signal, inverter 15 (output = B9464)

U395
(2395)
*
S00
(B207)

As for U380

NAND elements with 3 inputs each

The input signals selected via the 3 indices of the parameter are combined in an NAND operation and the result applied to the specified
binector.
P052 = 3
U400
Source for input signals, NAND element 1 (output = B9470)
FB 200 All binector numbers Ind: 3
1
FS=1
P051 = 40
(2400)
i001
Source for input 1
Type: L2
Offline
*
i002
Source for input 2
S00
i003
Source for input 3
(B207)
Settings:

U401
(2401)
*
S00
(B207)
U402
(2402)
*
S00
(B207)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
Source for input signals, NAND element 2 (output = B9471)

FB 201

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 202

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

As for U400

Source for input signals, NAND element 3 (output = B9472)

As for U400

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-135

Parameter list

05.2007

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 3
FS=1
Type: L2

As for U400

Storage elements, timers and binary signal selector switches

Only active with optional technology software S00

RS flipflops
st

RS flipflops with SET (Q=1) and RESET (Q=0) (priority: 1 RESET, 2 SET). RESET setting is enabled on POWER ON.
U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 1
FB 215 All binector numbers Ind: 2
1
FS=0
(2415)
(Outputs: Q = B9550, /Q = B9551)
Type: L2
*
i001
Source for SET
S00
i002
Source for RESET
(B210)

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 228

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

As for U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 6
(outputs: Q = B9560, /Q = B9561)
As for U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 7
(outputs: Q = B9562, /Q = B9563)
As for U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 8
(outputs: Q = B9564, /Q = B9565)
As for U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 9
(outputs: Q = B9566, /Q = B9567)
As for U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 10
(outputs: Q = B9568, /Q = B9569)
As for U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 11
(outputs: Q = B9570, /Q = B9571)
As for U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 12
(outputs: Q = B9572, /Q = B9573)

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 218

As for U415
Source for SET and RESET for RS flipflop 5
(outputs: Q = B9558, /Q = B9559)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

As for U415

D flipflops
st

D flipflops with RESET (Q=0), SET (Q=1) and STORE (Q=D on transition from 0 to 1) (priority: 1 RESET, 2 SET, 3 STORE).
RESET setting is enabled on POWER ON.
P052 = 3
U430
Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 1
FB 230 All binector numbers Ind: 4
1
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2430)
(outputs: Q = B9490, /Q = B9491)
Type: L2
Offline
*
i001
Source for SET
S00
i002
Source for D
i003
Source for STORE
(B211)
i004
Source for RESET
Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-137

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U431
(2431)
*
S00
(B211)
U432
(2432)
*
S00
(B211)
U433
(2433)
*
S00
(B211)

Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 2

(outputs: Q = B9492, /Q = B9493)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
All binector numbers
1

FB 232

All binector numbers

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 233

All binector numbers

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 240

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

As for U430
Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 4
(outputs: Q = B9496, /Q = B9497)

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 231

As for U430
Source for SET, D, STORE and RESET for D flipflop 3
(outputs: Q = B9494, /Q = B9495)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

As for U430

Timer 1 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9580, inverted: B9581)

U440
(2440)
*
S00
(B215)

U441
(2441)
S00
(B215)
U442
(2442)
*
S00
(B215)

Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 1
i001
i002

Source for input signal

Source for reset signal for the pulse generator (if U442=3)
(in state "1", the pulse generator is set to "0")

Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
Time for timer 1

FB 240

0.000 to 60.000
[s]
0.001

Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Mode for timer 1

FB 240

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 241

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Time for timer 2

FB 241

0.000 to 60.000
[s]
0.001

Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Mode for timer 2

FB 241

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 242

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Time for timer 3

FB 242

0.000 to 60.000
[s]
0.001

Ind: None
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Mode for timer 3

FB 242

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0
1
2
3

ON delay
OFF delay
ON / OFF delay
Pulse generator with positive edge triggering

Timer 2 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9582, inverted: B9583)

U443
(2443)
*
S00
(B215)
U444
(2444)
S00
(B215)
U445
(2445)
*
S00
(B215)

Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 2
As for U440

As for U442

Timer 3 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9584, inverted: B9585)

U446
(2446)
*
S00
(B215)
U447
(2447)
S00
(B215)
U448
(2448)
*
S00
(B215)

U449
(2449)
*
S00
(B215)
U450
(2450)
S00
(B215)
U451
(2451)
*
S00
(B215)

Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 4
As for U440

As for U442

Timer 5 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9588, inverted: B9589)

U452
(2452)
*
S00
(B215)
U453
(2453)
S00
(B215)
U454
(2454)
*
S00
(B215)

Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 5
As for U440

As for U442

Timer 6 (0.000 to 60.000s) (output = B9590, inverted: B9591)

U455
(2455)
*
S00
(B215)

Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 6

U456
(2456)

U458
(2458)
*
S00
(B216)

Source for input signal and reset signal for timer element 7

U459
(2459)

Time for timer 7

FB 246

0.00 to 600.00
[s]
0.01

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Mode for timer 7

FB 246

0 to 3
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

As for U440

S00
(B216)
U460
(2460)
*
S00
(B216)

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Timer 8 (0.00 to 600.00s) (output = B9594, inverted: B9595)

(output = B9484)

11.70

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 252

All binector numbers

FB 253

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 254

All binector numbers

Ind: 3
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 114

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Filter time for actual value

FB 114

0.00 to 600.00
[s]
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Derivative-action time for actual value (D component)

FB 114

0.000 to 30.000
[s]
0.001

Ind: 4
FS=0.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 114

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 114

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 114

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 114

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 114

0.00 to 600.00
[s]
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

As for U470
Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 4
(output = B9485)
As for U470
Source for input signals for binary signal selector switch 5
(output = B9486)
As for U470

Technology controller
Only active with optional technology software S00

Technology controller: Actual value

U480
(2480)
*
S00
(B170)
U481
(2481)
S00
FDS
(B170)
U482
(2482)
S00
FDS
(B170)
U483
(2483)
*
S00
FDS
(B170)

Source for actual value

Selection of connectors to be added as the actual value

0.000 = D component deactivated

See also U483
Factor for derivative-action time
0
1

Derivative-action time = U482 * 1

Derivative-action time = U482 * 1000

Technology controller: Setpoint

U484
(2484)
*
S00
(B170)

Source for setpoint

U485
(2485)

Injectable additional setpoint

S00
FDS
(B170)

Selection of connectors to be added as the setpoint

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

This parameter setting is added to the setpoint when the binector selected
in U486 changes to the log. "1" state

U486
(2486)
*
S00
(B170)

Source for control bit for injection of additional setpoint

U487
(2487)

Filter time for setpoint

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

S00
FDS
(B170)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-141

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Technology controller: Controller parameters

U488
(2488)
S00
FDS
(B170)
U489
(2489)
*
S00
(B170)
U490
(2490)
S00
FDS
(B170)
U491
(2491)
S00
FDS
(B170)
U492
(2492)
S00
FDS
(B170)
U493
(2493)
S00
FDS
(B170)
U494
(2494)
S00
FDS
(B170)
U495
(2495)
*
S00
FDS
(B170)

P gain

FB 114

0.10 to 200.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=3.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Source for input quantity (x) for Kp adaptation

FB 114

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Threshold 1 (x1)

FB 114

0.00 to 200.00
[%]
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Threshold 2 (x2)

FB 114

0.00 to 200.00
[%]
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=100.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Minimum value (y1)

FB 114

0.10 to 30.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 114

0.10 to 30.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 114

0.010 to 60.000
[s]
0.001

Ind: 4
FS=3.000
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 114

0 to 1
1

Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

Minimum value of Kp factor (y) when x x1

Characteristic for Kp adaptation: Maximum value (y2)

Maximum value of Kp factor (y) when x x2

Reset time
See also U495

Factor for reset time

0
1

Reset time = U494 * 1

Ind: 4
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Technology controller: Control bits

U500
(2500)
*
S00
(B170)
U502
(2502)
*
S00
FDS
(B170)
U503
(2503)
*
S00
FDS
(B170)
U504
(2504)
*
S00
FDS
(B170)

Source for technology controller enabling command

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
PI/PID controller switchover
0
1

PI controller (D component is applied only in actual-value

channel)
PID controller (D component is applied for control deviation)

Set P component to zero

0
1

Set controller P component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure I

controller)
Controller P component is active

Set I component to zero

0
1

Set controller I component to zero (i.e. to obtain pure P

controller)
Controller I component is active

Technology controller: Set I component

When the state of the binector selected in U506 switches from log. "0" to "1", the I component of the technology controller is set to the
value parameterized in U505.
With this function it is possible, for example, to use the same signal (binector) to control controller enabling commands and setting of the I
component.
Ind: None
P052 = 3
U505
Source for setting value for I component
FB 114 All connector
numbers
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2505)
0 = connector K0000
1
Type: L2
Offline
*
1 = connector K0001
S00
etc.
(B170)
P052 = 3
U506
Source for control bit "Set I component"
FB 114 All binector numbers Ind: None
1
FS=0
P051 = 40
(2506)
0
=
binector
B0000
Type: L2
Offline
*
1 = binector B0001
S00
etc.
(B170)
Technology controller: Output, limitation
U507
(2507)
*
S00
(B170)

U508
(2508)
S00
FDS
(B170)

Source for variable positive limit

FB 114

After multiplication with U508, the contents of the selected connector act as
a positive limit for the technology controller output.

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Note:
If the selected connector contains a negative value, a negative maximum
value is applied to the output of this limiter stage.
Positive limit for output of technology controller
FB 114
See also U507

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-143

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U509
(2509)
*
S00

Source for variable negative limit

All connector
numbers
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=9252
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 114

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 114

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 114

-100.0 to 100.0
[%]
0.1

Ind: 4
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

FB 115

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

FB 114

After multiplication with U510, the contents of the selected connector act as
a negative limit for the technology controller output.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

(B170)

Note:
If the selected connector contains a positive value, a positive minimum
value is applied to the output of this limiter stage.
Note:
Connector K9252 contains the positive limiting value with inverted sign
generated by U507 and U508. By setting U509=9252 and U510=100.00,
therefore, it is possible to set the negative and positive limits symmetrically.
U510
(2510)

Negative limit for output of technology controller

S00
FDS
(B170)
U511
(2511)
*
S00
(B170)

U512
(2512)
S00
FDS
(B170)

11.71

Source for variable weighting factor for output

After multiplication with U512, the contents of the selected connector act as
a weighting factor for the technology controller output.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
Weighting factor for output
See also U511

Velocity/speed calculators

Only active with optional technology software S00

Speed/velocity calculator

v _ act =

Function:
v_act
D
n_rated
i
n_act
U515
(2515)
*
S00
(B190)

11-144

D n _ rated n _ act

i
100%

Actual velocity
Diameter
Rated speed
Gear ratio
Actual speed

Source for actual speed

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.

(n021, U521, K9256)

(U517, U518)
(U520)
(U519)
(U515)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

FB 115

10.0 to 6553,5
[mm]
0.1

Ind: 4
FS=6500.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Gear ratio (i)

FB 115

1.00 to 300.00
0.01

Ind: 4
FS=1.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Rated speed (n_rated)

FB 115

100 to 4000
[rev/m]
1

Ind: 4
FS=1450
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

[SW 1.8 and later]

0.01 to 327,67
[m/s]
0.01

Ind: None
FS=16,38
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

[SW 1.8 and later]

0.01 to 327,67
[m/s]
0.01

Ind: None
FS=16,38
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

[SW 1.8 and later]

10 to 60000
[mm]
1

Ind: None
FS=1638
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Velocity/speed calculator

n _ set =

Function:
n_set
D
n_rated
i
v_set
U516
(2516)
*
S00
(B190)
U517
(2517)
*
S00
(B190)
U518
(2518)
S00
FDS
(B190)
U519
(2519)
S00
FDS
(B190)
U520
(2520)
S00
FDS
(B190)
U521
(2521)
S00
(B190)
U522
(2522)
S00
(B190)
U523
(2523)
S00
(B190)

v _ set i
100%
D n _ rated

Setpoint speed
Diameter
Rated speed
Gear ratio
Setpoint velocity

(n023, K9257)
(U517, U518, U523)
(U520)
(U519)
(U516)

Source for set velocity

FB 115

A value of 16384 in the selected connector is equivalent to the set velocity

set in U522
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Source for diameter

FB 115

A value of 16384 in the selected connector is equivalent to the diameter set

in U523
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Minimum diameter
Lower limit for diameter set in U517

Normalization for actual velocity

16384 in K9256 correspond to the actual velocity set here
Normalization for set velocity
See parameter U516
Normalization for diameter
See parameter U517

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-145

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

11.72

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

Variable moment of inertia

Only active with optional technology software S00

Calculation of the variable moment of inertia

JV
D
DHlse
Dmax
K

(B191)

Variable moment of inertia

Diameter
Diameter of the sleeve
Maximum diameter
Constant

Source for input quantities

i001

i003
i004

S00
(B191)
U527
(2527)
S00
(B191)
U528
(2528)
S00
(B191)
U529
(2529)
S00
(B191)

11.73

11-146

Normalization for diameter

See parameter U525
Normalization for diameter of the sleeve
See parameter U525
Normalization for maximum diameter
See parameter U525
Normalization for constant K
See parameter U525

PI controller

Only active with optional technology software S00

PI controller 1 = FB260
PI controller 2 = FB261
PI controller 3 = FB262
PI controller 4 = FB263
PI controller 5 = FB264
PI controller 6 = FB265
PI controller 7 = FB266
PI controller 8 = FB267
PI controller 9 = FB268
PI controller 10 = FB269
U530
Source for input quantity
(2530)
0 = Connector K0000
*
1 = Connector K0001
S00
etc.
(B180...
B189)

[SW 1.8 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

i002

U526
(2526)

FB 115

D 4 D Hlse4 K
JV =
4
D max

Function:

U525
(2525)
*
S00

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

i001:
i002:
...
i010:

input quantity
input quantity

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

input quantity

PI controller 10

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All binector numbers

Ind: 50
WE=0
Typ: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

[SW 1.8 and later]

All binector numbers

Ind: 20
WE=0
Typ: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

[SW 1.8 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 20
WE=0
Typ: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Enable and setting of the PI controllers

U531
(2531)
*
S00
(B180...
B189)

U532
(2532)
*
S00
(B180...
B189)

U533
(2533)
*
S00
(B180...
B189)

Source for control signals (enable PI controller)

[SW 1.8 and later]

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
...
i010:

0 = Disable controller
0 = Disable controller

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

0 = Disable controller

PI controller 10

i011:
i012:
...
i020:

1 = Freeze I component
1 = Freeze I component

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

1 = Freeze I component

PI controller 10

i021:
i022:
...
i030:

1 = Freeze output
1 = Freeze output

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

1 = Freeze output

PI controller 10

i031:
i032:
...
i040:

1 = Freeze I component in pos.direction

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

1 = Freeze I component in pos.direction

PI controller 10

i041:
i042:
...
i050:

1 = Freeze I component in neg.direction PI controller 1

1 = Freeze I component in neg.direction PI controller 2
1 = Stop I component in neg.direction

Source for control signals (set PI controller)

PI controller 10

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
...
i010:

0 = Set I component
0 = Set I component

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

0 = Set I component

PI controller 10

i011:
i012:
...
i020:

0 = Set output
0 = Set output

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

0 = Set output

PI controller 10

Source for Setting values

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
...
i010:

Setting value for I component

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

Setting value for I component

PI controller 10

i011:
i012:
...
i020:

Setting value for Output

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

Setting value for Output

PI controller 10

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-147

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 1
1

Ind: 10
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Filtering of the input signals

U534
(2534)
*
S00

Source for variable filtering time for the input signal

The content of the selected connector acts as filtering time for the PI
controller after multiplication with U535.

(B180...
B189)

U535
(2535)

[SW 1.8 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001: variable filtering time
i002: variable filtering time
...
i010: variable filtering time
Filtering time for the input signal
i001:
i002:
...
i010:

S00
(B180...
B189)

PI controller 1
PI controller 2
PI controller 10

filtering time
filtering time

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

filtering time

PI controller 10

Controller parameters
U536
(2536)
*
S00

Source for variable P gain

The content of the selected connector acts as the P gain for the PI controller
after multiplication with U537.

(B180...
B189)

U537
(2537)
S00
(B180...
B189)
U538
(2538)
*
S00

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001: variable P gain
i002: variable P gain
...
i010: variable P gain
PI controller P gain

PI controller 10

i001: P gain
PI controller 1
i002: P gain
PI controller 2
...
i010: P gain
PI controller 10
Source for variable Integration time

The content of the selected connector acts as the integration time for the PI
controller after multiplication with U539.
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

(B180...
B189)

U539
(2539)

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

i001: variable Integration time PI controller 1

i002: variable Integration time PI controller 2
...
i010: variable Integration time PI controller 10
PI controller integration time
i001:
i002:
...
i010:

S00
(B180...
B189)

Integration time
Integration time

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

Integration time

PI controller 10

Control bits
U540
(2540)
*
S00
(B180...
B189)

11-148

Freeze P component
0
1

Controller P component frozen (i.e. pure I controller)

Controller P component active

i001:
i002:
...
i010:

PI controller 1
PI controller 2
PI controller 10
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U541
(2541)
*
S00

Freeze I component

(B180...
B189)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.8 and later]

0
1

Controller I component frozen (i.e. pure P controller)

Controller I component active

i001:
i002:
...
i010:

PI controller 1
PI controller 2

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 10
FS=1
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 10
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1

Ind: 10
FS=100.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 10
FS=
i001: 9306
i002: 9316
i003: 9326
i004: 9336
i005: 9346
i006: 9356
i007: 9366
i008: 9376
i009: 9386
i010: 9396

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 to 1
1

PI controller 10

Output, Limitation
U542
(2542)
*
S00
(B180...
B189)

Source for variable positive limit

The content of the selected connector acts as the positive limit for the
output of the PI controller after multiplication with U543.
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
...
i010:

U543
(2543)
S00
(B180...
B189)
U544
(2544)
*
S00
(B180...
B189)

S00
(B180...
B189)

PI controller 1
PI controller 2
PI controller 10

Note:
If the content of the selected connector has a negative value, this causes a
negative maximum value at the output of this limiter stage.
Positive limit for the output of the PI controller
[SW 1.8 and later]
See also U542

Source for variable negative Limit

[SW 1.8 and later]

The content of the selected connector acts as the negative limit for the
output of the technology controller after multiplication with U510.
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
...
i010:

U545
(2545)

[SW 1.8 and later]

PI controller 1
PI controller 2
PI controller 10

Note:
If the content of the selected connector has a positive value, this causes a
positive minimum value at the output of this limiter stage.
Note:
Connectors K9306 to K9396 contain for PI controllers 1 to 10 the positive
limitation values formed by U542 and U543 with an inverted sign. In this
way it is possible to set the negative limitation symmetrically to the positive
limitation by setting U544= 9306 to 9396 and U545=100.0.
Negative limit for the output of the PI controller
[SW 1.8 and later]
See also U544

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Type: L2

0.0 to 199.9
[%]
0.1

Ind: 10
FS=100.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

11-149

Parameter list
PNU

11.74

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 10
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 10
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Ind: 10
FS=100
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 10
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Closed-loop control elements

Only active with optional technology software S00

Derivative / delay elements SW 1.8 and later

U550
(2550)
*
S00
(B156)
(B157)
(B158)

U551
(2551)
*
S00
(B156)
(B157)
(B158)

U552
(2552)
S00
(B156)
(B157)
(B158)

U553
(2553)
*
S00
(B156)
(B157)
(B158)

11-150

Source for input quantity

FB 270 to FB 279
[SW 1.8 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:
i009:
i010:

Input quantity derivative/delay element 1

Input quantity derivative/delay element 2
Input quantity derivative/delay element 3
Input quantity derivative/delay element 4
Input quantity derivative/delay element 5
Input quantity derivative/delay element 6
Input quantity derivative/delay element 7
Input quantity derivative/delay element 8
Input quantity derivative/delay element 9
Input quantity derivative/delay element 10

Source for multiplier for derivative-action time

(FB 270)
(FB 271)
(FB 272)
(FB 273)
(FB 274)
(FB 275)
(FB 276)
(FB 277)
(FB 278)
(FB 279)
[SW 1.8 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
I003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:
i009:
i010:

Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier

derivative/delay element 1
derivative/delay element 2
derivative/delay element 3
derivative/delay element 4
derivative/delay element 5
derivative/delay element 6
derivative/delay element 7
derivative/delay element 8
derivative/delay element 9
derivative/delay element 10

Derivative-action time
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i008:
i009:
i010:

Der.-act.time
Der.-act.time
Der.-act.time
Der.-act.time
Der.-act.time
Der.-act.time
Der.-act.time
Der.-act.time
Der.-act.time

(FB 270)
(FB 271)
(FB 272)
(FB 273)
(FB 274)
(FB 275)
(FB 276)
(FB 277)
(FB 278)
(FB 279)
[SW 1.8 and later]

deriv./delay element 1
deriv./delay element 2
deriv./delay element 3
deriv./delay element 4
deriv./delay element 5
deriv./delay element 7
deriv./delay element 8
deriv./delay element 9
deriv./delay element 10

Source for multiplier for filtering time

(FB 270)
(FB 271)
(FB 272)
(FB 273)
(FB 274)
(FB 276)
(FB 277)
(FB 278)
(FB 279)
[SW 1.8 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:
i009:
i010:

Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier
Multiplier

(FB 270)
(FB 271)
(FB 272)
(FB 273)
(FB 274)
(FB 275)
(FB 276)
(FB 277)
(FB 278)
(FB 279)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U554
(2554)

Filtering time

S00
(B156)
(B157)
(B158)

11.75
n560
n569
n570
n571
n572
n574
n575
n576
U577
U578
U580
(2580)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:
i009:
i010:

Filtering time
Filtering time
Filtering time
Filtering time
Filtering time
Filtering time
Filtering time
Filtering time
Filtering time
Filtering time

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.8 and later]
derivative/delay element 1
derivative/delay element 2
derivative/delay element 3
derivative/delay element 4
derivative/delay element 5
derivative/delay element 6
derivative/delay element 7
derivative/delay element 8
derivative/delay element 9
derivative/delay element 10

(FB 270)
(FB 271)
(FB 272)
(FB 273)
(FB 274)
(FB 275)
(FB 276)
(FB 277)
(FB 278)
(FB 279)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 10
FS=100
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 7
1

Ind: none
FS=7
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 68
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
online

1 to 2
1

Ind: none
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
online

0 to 10000
[ms]
1

Commutation monitoring
Parameters for SIMOREG DC-MASTER Converter Commutation
Protector (SIMOREG CCP)

Control word for commutation monitoring

[SW 2.1 and later]

The commutation of the converter is constantly monitored. If a commutation

failure is detected, fault message F030 is activated and the thyristor is
quenched by the SIMOREG CCP (if installed).
Detection of a commutation failure is based on three decision criteria. They
can be individually activated/deactivated with this parameter for test
purposes.
0:
1:

None of the three decision criteria are evaluated

Decision criterion 1 (sufficient voltage time area for
commutation) is evaluated
2:
Decision criterion 2 (curvature of the current crest curve) is
evaluated
4:
Decision criterion 3 (maximum current actual value) is evaluated
Setting instruction:
Each decision criterion has a numeric code.
If more than one decision criterion is to be evaluated, the sum of the
relevant digits must be entered.
If U806 is 2 (i.e. the basic unit is a slave connected in parallel), decision
criterion 1 is not evaluated irrespective of the setting of U580.
U581
(2581)

U582
(2582)

Diagnostic memory for commutation monitoring

[SW 2.1 and later]

This memory is updated every time fault message F030 is activated.

It provides the SIEMENS specialist with more detailed information about the
cause of the commutation failure.
Reaction of commutation monitor
[SW 2.1 and later]
This parameter allows the reaction of the commutation monitor to be
programmed.
1

Detection of a commutation failure or overcurrent results in

immediate pulse blocking and generation of warning A030. The
pulses are enabled again after approximately 20ms and warning
A030 is reset.

Detection of a commutation failure or overcurrent results in

immediate pulse blocking and generation of fault message
F030.

Important:
The setting U582 = 1 is not allowed when the SIMOREG CCP is selected
(P790 = 6)!
U583
(2583)

Parameter for SIMOREG CCP

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-151

Parameter list
PNU

11.76
U607
(2607)
*
BDS
(G135)

U608
(2608)
FDS
(G135)

11.77
U616
(2616)
(G117)

11.78
U619
(2619)
*
BDS
(G117)

11.79

05.2007

Description

U656
(2656)
*
(G150)
U657
(2657)
*
BDS
(G150)

11-152

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=15.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 to 1
1

Ind: none
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
online

Setpoint reduction
Source for activation of the setpoint reduction

[SW 1.6 and later]

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
0
Setpoint reduction active
The Setpoint (before the ramp-function generator) is multiplied
by the factor set in parameter U608
1
No setpoint reduction
Multiplier for speed setpoint on activation of the setpoint reduction[SW
1.6 and later]

Definition of the function of inputs and outputs

Control word for input "E stop" (term. 105 to 108)

[SW 2.0 and later]

0 = E stop has same effect as OFF2

1 = E stop immediately cancels the firing pulse chain (without waiting for
I = 0 and without outputting w)

Definition of the function of the relay output at terminals 109 / 110

Source for the relay output "line contactor ON" (terminals 109 / 110)
[SW 1.7 and later]

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=124
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

-100.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0.00 to 200.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=50.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
124 = Main contactor ON

Starting pulse Speed controller

(See also Chapter 8 Function Diagram Sheet G150)

U651
Starting pulse (integrator setting value for the speed controller)
(2651)
[SW 1.7 and later]
FDS
(G150)
U652
Multiplier for starting pulse with neg. setpoint
[SW 1.7 and later]
(2652)
if the starting pulse acc. to U651 is also used for pos. setpoint
FDS
(G150)
U653
(2653)
FDS
(G150)
U655
(2655)
*
(G150)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Starting pulse with neg. setpoint

[SW 1.7 and later]

-100.00 to 100.00
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Source for Starting pulse

[SW 1.7 and later]

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Source for starting pulse with neg. setpoint

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=451
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

[SW 1.7 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: None
FS=452
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All binector numbers

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Source for switchover starting pulse for pos./neg. setp.
[SW 1.7 and later]
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.80

Parameter list
Description

U670
(2670)
*
S00
(B152)

Ind: None
FS=10.00
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=25.00
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=40.00
Type: O2
Ind: None
FS=100.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=
i001: 46
i002: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
offline

Evaluation of a 4-step master switch for cranes

(See also Chapter 8 Function Diagram Sheet G125)

U660
Source for travel command 1
(2660)
0 = Binector B0000
*
1 = Binector B0001
(G125)
etc.
U661
Source for travel command 2
(2661)
0 = Binector B0000
*
1 = Binector B0001
(G125)
etc.
U662
Source for switchover to setpoint step S2
(2662)
0 = Binector B0000
*
1 = Binector B0001
(G125)
etc.
U663
Source for switchover to setpoint step S3
(2663)
0 = Binector B0000
*
1 = Binector B0001
(G125)
etc.
U664
Source for switchover to setpoint step S4
(2664)
0 = Binector B0000
*
1 = Binector B0001
(G125)
etc.
U665
Setpoint for setpoint step S1
(2665)
(G125)
U666
Setpoint for setpoint step S2
(2666)
(G125)
U667
Setpoint for setpoint step S3
(2667)
(G125)
U668
Setpoint for setpoint step S4
(2668)
(G125)

11.81

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

[SW 1.7 and later]

[SW 1.7 and later]
[SW 1.7 and later]

Position/positional deviation acquisition

Only active with optional technology software S00
Source for actual position values

FB 54
[SW 2.0 and later]

Selection of connector whose values are to be used as actual position

values.
i001: Actual position value 1
i002: Actual position value 2
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-153

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 6
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 2
P051 = 40
offline

U671
(2671)
*
S00
(B152)

Source for setting/resetting signal for position acquisition

FB 54
[SW 2.0 and later]

All binector numbers

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 3
FS=
i001: 9471
i002: 9472
i003: 9473
Type: L2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
offline

-32766 to 32766
1

Ind: 4
FS=10000
Type: I2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
off-line

Selection of binector whose value is to be used as the setting or resetting

signals.
i001: Reset actual position value 1
i002: Set actual position value 1
i003:
i004:

Reset actual position value 2

Set actual position value 2

i005:
i006:

Reset positional deviation

Set positional deviation

Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
U672
(2672)
*
S00
(B152)

Source for setting values

FB 54
[SW 2.0 and later]

Selection of connectors whose values are to be used as setting values

i001: Setting value for position 1
i002: Setting value for position 2
i003: Setting value for positional deviation
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

U673
(2673)
*
FDS
S00
(B152)
U674
(2674)
*
FDS
S00
(B152)
U675
(2675)
*
S00
(B152)

Numerator of transformation ratio

for actual position value 2

FB 54
[SW 2.0 and later]

U673 must be less than or equal to U674, otherwise F058 is output with
fault value 14
Denominator of transformation ratio
for actual position value 2

FB 54
[SW 2.0 and later]

1 to 32767
1

Ind: 4
FS=10000
Type: O2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
offline

Source for connecting the positional deviation offset

FB 54
[SW 2.0 and later]

All binector numbers

Ind: none
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
offline

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: none
FS=9474
Type: L2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
offline

-32768 to 32767
1

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: I2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
offline

Selection of the binector whose value connects the offset of the positional
deviation
Settings:
0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.

U676
(2676)
*
S00
(B152)

Source for positional deviation offset

FB 54
[SW 2.0 and later]

Selection of the connector whose value is to be used as the offset of the

positional deviation
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.

U677
(2677)
*
S00
(B152)

11-154

Fixed values for position acquisition

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:

LOW word of double-word connector KK9471

HIGH word of double-word connector KK9471
LOW word of double-word connector KK9472
HIGH word of double-word connector KK9472
LOW word of double-word connector KK9473
HIGH word of double-word connector KK9473
LOW word of double-word connector KK9474
HIGH word of double-word connector KK9474

FB 54
[SW 2.0 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U678
(2678)
*
S00
(B152)

Memory for actual position values: Initial value at POWER ON

FB 54
[SW 2.1 and later]

0 to 1
1

11.82
U680
(2680)
*
S00
(B153)

U681
(2681)
S00
(B153)
U682
(2682)
S00
(B153)
U683
(2683)
S00
(B153)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: none
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 2
P051 = 40
online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: none
FS=9483
Type: L2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
offline

1 to 65535
1

Ind: none
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
online

Hysteresis for limit monitoring indicator of the root extractor

FB 58
[SW 2.0 and later]

1 to 65535
1

Ind: none
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
online

x value for root function and gradient

1 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=1000
Type: O2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
online

0.01 to 199.99
[%]
0.01

Ind: 2
FS=100.00
Type: O2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
online

Initial value = 0

Initial value is set such that on POWER ON KK9481 or KK9482

assumes whatever its setting value was before the electronics
supply was disconnected.

Root extractor
Only active with optional technology software S00
Source for the input of the root extractor

FB 58
[SW 2.0 and later]

Selection of the connector whose value is to be used for the root extractor
input.
Settings:
0 = Connector K0000
1 = Connector K0001
etc.
Operating point for limit monitoring indicator of the root extractor
FB 58
[SW 2.0 and later]
applied to connector KK9483

FB 58
[SW 2.0 and later]

Definition of input values

i001:
i002:

Distance between input value of root function and fictitious

passage through zero for y value U684.001
x value of gradient for y value U684.002

U684
(2684)

y value for root function and gradient

S00
(B153)

Definition of output values

i001:
i002:

FB 58
[SW 2.0 and later]

y value of root function for distance U683.001

y value of gradient for x value U683.002

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-155

Parameter list
PNU

11.83

05.2007

Description

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 2
1

Ind:6
FS= 0
Type O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

[SW 1.9 and later]

0 to 15
1

Ind:6
FS= 2
Type O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

[SW 1.9 and later]

-20.00 to 20.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind:6
FS= 0
Type I2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

[SW 1.9 and later]

All connector
numbers
1

Ind:6
FS= 0
Type L2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

-320.00 to 320.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind:6
FS= 10.00
Type I2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

Configuration of SCB1 with SCI

U690

Configuration of analog inputs of SCI1

(2690)

Definition of type of input signals

(Z150)
(Z151)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

Parameter value

Terminals
X428/3, 6, 9

0:
1:
2:

-10 V ... + 10 V
0 V ... + 10 V

[SW 1.9 and later]

Terminals
X428/5, 8, 11
- 20 mA ... + 20 mA
0 mA ... + 20 mA
4 mA ... + 20 mA

Notes:
- Only one signal can be processed per input. Voltage or current signals can
be evaluated.
- Voltage and current signals must be connected to different terminals.
- Only unipolar signals are permitted with settings 1 and 2, i.e. the internal
process quantities are also unipolar.
- When setting 2 is selected, an input current of< 2 mA causes shutdown on
faults (open-circuit monitoring)
- The offset compensation for the analog inputs is set in parameter U692.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

Slave 1, analog input 1

Slave 1, analog input 2
Slave 1, analog input 3
Slave 2, analog input 1
Slave 2, analog input 2
Slave 2, analog input 3

U691

Smoothing time constant for analog inputs of SCI1

(2691)
(Z150)
(Z151)

Formula:
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

U692

Offset compensation for analog inputs of SCI1

(2692)
(Z150)
(Z151)

Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1

i001: Slave 1, analog input 1
i002: Slave 1, analog input 2
i003: Slave 1, analog input 3
i004: Slave 2, analog input 1
i005: Slave 2, analog input 2
i006: Slave 2, analog input 3

U693

Actual value output via analog outputs of SCI1

(2693)

Selection of connectors whose values are to be output (for details, see

Operating Instructions for SCI1)
i001: Slave 1, analog output 1
i002: Slave 1, analog output 2
i003: Slave 1, analog output 3
i004: Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Slave 2, analog output 3

(Z155)
(Z156)

T = 2ms * 2 to the power of U691

Slave 1, analog input 1
Slave 1, analog input 2
Slave 1, analog input 3
Slave 2, analog input 1
Slave 2, analog input 2
Slave 2, analog input 3

U694

Gain for analog outputs of SCI1

(2694)

Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1

i001: Slave 1, analog output 1
i002: Slave 1, analog output 2
i003: Slave 1, analog output 3
i004: Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Slave 2, analog output 3

(Z155)
(Z156)

11-156

[SW 1.9 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.9 and later]

-100.00 to 100.00
[V]
0.01V

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind:6
FS= 0
Type I2

U695

Offset compensation for analog outputs of SCI1

(2695)
(Z155)
(Z156)

Setting instructions, see Operating Instructions for SCI1

i001: Slave 1, analog output 1
i002: Slave 1, analog output 2
i003: Slave 1, analog output 3
i004: Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Slave 2, analog output 3

U696

Telegram failure time for SCB1

(2696)

Fault message F079 is displayed if no process data are exchanged with the
supplementary board within this delay period. The monitoring function is
implemented within a 20 ms cycle. For this reason, only setting values
which constitute a multiple of 20 ms are meaningful.

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

[SW 1.9 and later]

0 to 65000
[ms]
1ms

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Online

Ind:24
Type O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

Settings:
0
1...65000

No time monitoring
Permissible time interval between two process data
exchange operations before a fault message is output.

Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).
n697

Diagnostic information of SCB1

(2697)

Visualization parameter for displaying diagnostic info relating to SCB1.

The displayed values overflow at "255 (e.g. the number of telegrams begins
at "0" again after "255").
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:
i009:
i010:
i011:
i012:
i013:
i014:

i015:

i016:
i017:
i018:
i019:
i020:
i021:
i022:
i023:
i024:

[SW 1.9 and later]

Number of error-free telegrams

Number of errored telegrams
Number of voltage failures on slaves
Number of interruptions in fiber-optic connection
Number of missing response telegrams
Number of search telegrams for slave location
ETX error
Number of configuration telegrams
Highest terminal numbers needed according to PZD
connection (parameterization of connectors or binectors)
Analog inputs/outputs required according to PZD connection of
setpoint channel and actual value output via SCI
(parameterization of appropriate connectors)
Reserved
Reserved
SCB1 alarm word
Setting defining whether slave no. 1 is needed and type if
applicable
0: No slave required
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
Setting defining whether slave no. 2 is needed and type if
applicable
0: No slave required
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
SCI board: Initialization error
SCB1 generation: Year
SCB1 generation: Day and month
SCI slave1: Software version
SCI slave1: Year of generation
SCI slave1: Day and month of generation
SCI slave2: Software version
SCI slave2: Year of generation
SCI slave2: Day and month of generation

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-157

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U698

Binector selection for binary outputs of SCI

(2698)

Selection of binectors whose states are output via the binary outputs of the
SCIs
i001: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 1
i002: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 2
i003: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 3
i004: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 4
i005: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 5
i006: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 6
i007: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 7
i008: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 8
i009: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 9
i010: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 10
i011: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output 11
i012: Binector selection for SCI slave1, binary output12
i013: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 1
i014: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 2
i015: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 3
i016: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 4
i017: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 5
i018: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 6
i019: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 7
i020: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 8
i021: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 9
i022: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 10
i023: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output 11
i024: Binector selection for SCI slave2, binary output12

(Z135)
(Z136)
(Z145)
(Z146)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

n699

Display of SCB1/SCI process data

(2699)

All values in hexadecimal representation

(Z130)
(Z131)
(Z135)
(Z136)
(Z140)
(Z141)
(Z145)
(Z146)
(Z150)
(Z151)
(Z155)
(Z156)

11.84
U710
(2710)
*
(Z110)
(Z111)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:
i009:
i010:
i011:
i012:
i013:
i014:
i015:
i016:

[SW 1.9 and later]

All binector numbers

[SW 1.9 and later]

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind:24
FS= 0
Type L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

Ind:16
Type L2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
on-line

SCI slave1, binary inputs

SCI slave1, analog input1
SCI slave1, analog input2
SCI slave1, analog input3
SCI slave2, binary inputs
SCI slave2, analog input1
SCI slave2, analog input2
SCI slave2, analog input3
SCI slave1, binary outputs
SCI slave1, analog output1
SCI slave1, analog output2
SCI slave1, analog output3
SCI slave2, binary outputs
SCI slave2, binary outputs
SCI slave2, analog output2
SCI slave2, analog output3

Configuration of supplementary boards in board locations 2 and 3

Initialize link to supplementary boards
st

i001

Initialization of 1 communications board (in slot with lower ID

letter)

i002

Initialization of 2 communications board (in slot with higher ID

letter

0 to 1
1

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

Settings:
0

The link to supplementary boards is re-initialized. After the

configuration parameters for supplementary boards have been
changed, U710 must be set to 0 so that the new settings can
take effect.
The parameter is then set automatically to 1.
Note: Data transmission is interrupted while initialization is in
progress.

11-158

Deactivated

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U711
(2711)
*
(Z110)
(Z111)

Communications board parameter 1 (CB parameter 1)

0 to 65535
1

See documentation for installed COM BOARD.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
Online

0 to 65535
1

Ind: 10
FS=0
Type: O2

See U711

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-159

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U722
(2722)
*

Telegram failure time for CB and TB

0 to 65000
[ms]
1ms

(Z110)
(Z111)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:

Telegram failure time for board location 2

Telegram failure time for board location 3
st
Fault delay time for 1 CB or TB
nd
Fault delay time for 2 CB

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
Online

Ind: 2
FS= 20
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Settings for telegram failure time:

No time monitoring; must be parameterized for sporadic

(acyclic) telegrams
Maximum permissible time interval between 2 data
exchanges before fault message F082 can be output

1...65500

Settings for fault delay time:

0
1...65499
65500

Instantaneous activation of F082

Fault delay time before F082 is activated.
F082 is never activated

If no process data are exchanged with the supplementary board for a period
in excess of the telegram failure time, fault message F082 is activated as a
function of the fault delay time.
Monitoring takes place in a 20 ms cycle. For this reason, it is only
meaningful to set values that are multiples of 20 ms.
U722.001
or
U722.002

U722.003
or
U722.004
t [ms]

last
receive
telegram

B3035 = 1
or
B8035 = 1

F082 and
B3030 = 1
B3031 = 1
or
B8030 = 1
B8031 = 1

[SW 2.1 and later] 20 to 60

[s]
Timeout period until F080 fault value 1 (no heartbeat)
1s
Timeout period until F080 fault value 6 (delay until initialization
is complete).
Additional permissible period after expiry of time set in index
001 for completion of initialization.

Timeout period for technology boards

i001:
i002:

Example
U732.001 = 30, U732.002 = 20:
When the electronics supply is switched on, F080 fault value 1 is delayed by
30 s and F080 fault value 6 by 30s + 20s = 50s.
U728
(2728)
*
(Z110)

Source for binector/connector converter for 1 CB/TB

[SW 1.9 and later]
Binectors to be converted to connector K3020
i001:
i002:
...
i016:

All binector numbers

1 binector (bit 0)
nd
2 binector (bit 1)
th

16 binector (bit 15)

Settings:
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.

11-160

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U729
(2729)
*

Source for binector/connector converter for 2

(Z111)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
nd

[SW 1.9 and later]

Binectors to be converted to connector K8020

i001:
i002:
...
i016:

All binector numbers

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Ind: 68
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 32
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 16
FS=
i001: 32
i002: 167
i003: 0
i004: 33
i005: 0
to
i016: 0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
Online

Ind: 32
Type: L2

P052 = 3

1st binector (bit 0)

nd
2 binector (bit 1)
th

16 binector (bit 15)

Settings:

n732
(2732)
(Z110)
(Z111)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
CB/TB diagnostics
Diagnostic information about an installed communications board (CB) or
technology board (TB).
i001 - i032:
i033 - i064:
i065, i066:
i067, i068:

1. CB/TB (lower slot ID letter)

2. CB (higher slot ID letter)
1. CB/TB (internal diagnostic data)
2. CB (internal diagnostic data)

For detailed information, please refer to operating instructions of relevant

CB or TB.
n733
(2733)
(Z110)
(Z111)

U734
(2734)
*
(Z110)

CB/TB receive data

Display of control words and setpoints (process data) that are transferred to
the basic converter from a communications board (CB) or technology board
(TB).
i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i032:

1 process data word from 1 CB/TB

16 process data word from 1 CB/TB

st
nd
1 process data word from 2 CB
16 process data word from 2 CB

All connector
numbers
Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data to 1
the first communications board (CB) or technology board (TB).
Transmit data for first CB/TB (lower slot ID letter)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in
the transmit telegram.
i001:
i002:
...
i016:

Word 1 in PZD section of telegram

Word 2 in PZD section of telegram
Word 16 in PZD section of telegram

Status word 1 (K0032) should be linked to word 1.

n735
(2735)
(Z110)
(Z111)

Display of transmit data to CB/TB

i001:
...
i016
i017:
...
i032:

1 process data word to 1 CB or TB

16 process data word to 1 CB or TB

st
nd
1 process data word to 2 CB
16 process data word to 2 CB

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-161

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U736
(2736)
*

Transmit data for second CB (higher slot letter)

(Z111)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

All connector
numbers
Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data to 1
a communications board (CB) with a higher slot ID letter.

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
Online

Ind: 12
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 12
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Offline

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in
the transmit telegram.
i001:
i002:
...
i016:

Word 1 in PZD section of telegram

Word 2 in PZD section of telegram
Word 16 in PZD section of telegram

Status word 1 (K0032) should be linked to word 1.

n738
(2738)
(Z110)
(Z111)

Display of PKW job from supplementary boards

i001:
...
i004
i005:
...
i008
i009:
...
i012:

1 word of PKW job from 1 CB

4 word of PKW job from 1 CB
st
nd
1 word of PKW job from location 2 CB
4 word of PKW job from 2 CB
st
1 word of PKW job from TB
th

4 word of PKW job from TB

Details refer to Function diagrams, Section 8 Sheets Z110 and Z111

n739
(2739)
(Z110)
(Z111)

Display of PKW response to supplementary boards

i001:
...
i004
i005:
...
i008
i009:
...
i012:

1 word of PKW job from 1 CB

4 word of PKW job from 1 CB
st
nd
1 word of PKW job from location 2 CB
4 word of PKW job from 2 CB
st
1 word of PKW job from TB
th

4 word of PKW job from TB

Details refer to Function diagrams, Section 8 Sheets Z110 and Z111

11.85

Configuring the SIMOLINK board

U740

SLB Node address

(2740)

Node address of the SIMOLINK board (SLB) on the bus. The node address
defines the telegrams to which the relevant board has write access. The
node address also defines whether a node is to perform the additional
function of dispatcher.

*
(Z121)

0=
Not 0 =

[SW 1.5 and later]

0 to 200
1

Dispatcher (generates telegram circulation)

Transceiver

Only one node in a SIMOLINK ring may perform the function of dispatcher.
Node address 0 may not be assigned to any node if a higher-level PLC is
performing the dispatcher function as the SIMOLINK master. When an SLB
is selected to operate as dispatcher, all nodes must be assigned
consecutive addresses, starting with address 0 for the dispatcher.
i001: For first SLB in unit
i002: Reserved

11-162

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U741

SLB Telegram failure time

(2741)

The telegram failure time defines the period within which a valid
synchronizing telegram (SYNC telegram) must be received. Failure of any
SYNC telegram to arrive within the set period indicates a communications
error. The unit activates fault message F015 (see also U753) as a function
of U741.

*
(Z121)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.5 and later]

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 =40
Online

1 to 3
1

Ind: 2
FS=3
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Online

All binector numbers

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Online

1 to 8
1

Ind: 2
FS=3
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Offline

0.20 to 6.50
[ms]
0.01

Ind:2
FS=1.20
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Offline

0 to 6500
[ms]
1

0 = No telegram failure monitoring

i001: For first SLB in unit
i002: Reserved
U742

SLB Transmitter power

(2742)

Setting of power of fiber optic transmitter

*
(Z121)

[SW 1.5 and later]

1 = 0m to 15m (length of plastic fiber optic cable)

2 = 15m to 25m (length of plastic fiber optic cable)
3 = 25m to 40m (length of plastic fiber optic cable)
Operation at a lower transmitter power increases the service life of the
transmitter and receiver modules. Reducing the transmitter power also
allows hidden fault sources on the transmission path (e.g. poor contacts on
fiber optics) to be detected.
i001: For first SLB in unit
i002: Reserved

U744

SLB Selection of active SLB board

(2744)

Selection of the active SIMOLINK board (SLB) when two SLBs are installed
in one unit.

[SW 1.5 and later]

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001 etc.
A binector value of 0 means "SLB in low slot is active.
A binector value of 1 is reserved for "SLB in high slot is active".
U745

SLB No. of channels

(2745)

Number of channels which dispatcher provides for each transceiver.

Together with U746, the number of channels determines the number of
addressable nodes.
This parameter is relevant only for the dispatcher.

*
(Z121)

[SW 1.5 and later]

i001: For first SLB in unit

i002: Reserved

U746

SLB Cycle time

(2746)

The cycle time is the period required for all telegrams to be passed around
the SIMOLINK ring. Together with U745, the cycle time determines the
number of addressable nodes.
This parameter is relevant only for the dispatcher.

*
(Z121)

[SW 1.5 and later]

i001: For first SLB in unit

i002: Reserved
Caution:
Settings 0.20 ms to 0.99 ms are permissible only if option S00 is not
activated. Otherwise F059 with fault value 3 is output.
If option S00 (free function blocks) is not activated and if an SLB cycle time
of < 1.00 ms is set in parameter U746, connectors K7001 to K7008 are
updated immediately every time a telegram is received. The other
connectors (K7009 to K7016) and binectors B7100 to B7915 are updated
only once in each computation cycle (= 1/6 line period). In addition, the
connectors selected in U751.001 to U751.008 are read with every transmit
telegram and the relevant up-to-date value transmitted. The connectors
selected in parameters U751.009 to U751.016 are read only once in each
computation cycle and written to the transmit buffer of the SLB.
[A cycle time of < 1.00 ms can be set in SW 1.9 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-163

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

n748

SLB Diagnosis

(2748)

Visualization parameter which displays diagnostic information for an

installed SIMOLINK board (SLB)

(Z121)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:
...
i016:

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

0.0 to 200.7
0.1

Ind: 8
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Offline

Ind: 16
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: 16
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Offline

Ind: 16
Type: L2

P052 = 3

Ind: None
FS=0.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 =40
Offline

Number of error-free synchronizing telegrams

Number of CRC errors
Number of timeout errors
Last accessible bus address
Address of node sending the special telegram "Timeout
Implemented bus cycle time
Number of new configurations
Reserved
Reserved

SLB Read address

(2749)

Definition of node addresses and channels from which the SLB must read
data (a total of 8 channels can be read according to the index entries). The
digits before the decimal point in the input value define the node address
and those after the point the channel number (see also Section 7 "Starting
up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8, Sheet Z122).

(Z122)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 16
Type: O2

[SW 1.5 and later]

U749

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

[SW 1.5 and later]

Example:
2.0 = address 2 channel 0
n750

SLB Receive data

(2750)

Visualization parameter for data received via the SIMOLINK board (see also
Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8 , Sheet Z122)

(Z122)

[SW 1.5 and later]

i001: Word 1 in PZD section of telegram

...
i016: Word 16 in PZD section of telegram

U751

SLB Transmit data selection

(2751)

Selection of connectors whose contents must be transferred as transmit

data by the SLB (see also Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and
Section 8 , Sheet Z122).

*
(Z122)

[SW 1.5 and later]

All connector
numbers

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
In addition to the transmit data itself, its place in the transmit telegram is
also defined.
i001:
i002:
...
i015:
i016:

Channel0, low word

Channel0, high word
Channel7, low word
Channel7, high word

n752

SLB Display of transmit data

(2752)

Process data transmitted by SLB via SIMOLINK in hexadecimal notation

(see also Section 7 "Starting up SIMOLINK boards" and Section 8 , Sheet
Z122)

(Z122)

[SW 1.5 and later]

U753

SLB Fault delay

(2753)
*
(Z121)

Delay in activation of fault message F015 (see also U741)

0 = fault message is activated immediately the telegram failure monitor
responds

11-164

[SW 1.5 and later]

0.0 to 100.0
[s]
0.1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.86

U755

Signal type of analog inputs on EB1

(2755)

0 = Voltage input 0 to 10 V
1 = Current input 0 to 20 mA

*
(Z112)
(Z115)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

i001: AI1 of the first EB1

i002: AI1 of the second EB1

U756

Normalization of analog inputs on EB1

(2756)

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an

input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(Z112)
(Z115)

The following general rule applies:

With a voltage input:

U 756 [%] = 10 V

Y
X

X .. input voltage in volts

Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X

With a current input:

U 756 [%] = 20 mA

Y
X

X .. input current in mA
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
U757
(2757)
(Z112)
(Z115)
U758
(2758)
*
(Z112)
(Z115)

U759
(2759)
*
(Z112)
(Z115)

AI1 of the first EB1

AI2 of the first EB1
AI3 of the first EB1
AI1 of the second EB1
AI2 of the second EB1
AI3 of the second EB1

Offset for analog inputs on EB1

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

AI1 of the first EB1

AI2 of the first EB1
AI3 of the first EB1
AI1 of the second EB1
AI2 of the second EB1
AI3 of the second EB1

Mode of signal injection at analog inputs on EB1

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

AI1 of the first EB1

AI2 of the first EB1
AI3 of the first EB1
AI1 of the second EB1
AI2 of the second EB1
AI3 of the second EB1

Source for selection of sign reversal at

analog inputs on EB1

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)
0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

AI1 of the first EB1

AI2 of the first EB1
AI3 of the first EB1
AI1 of the second EB1
AI2 of the second EB1
AI3 of the second EB1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-165

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U760

Filtering time for analog inputs on EB1

(2760)

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 0.2 ms is applied as standard

*
(Z112)
(Z115)

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 6
WE=0
Typ: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

All binector numbers

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =

enabled)

*
(Z112)
(Z115)

(2762)
(Z112)
(Z115)

[SW 1.5 and later]

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

n762

AI1 of the first EB1

AI2 of the first EB1
AI3 of the first EB1
AI1 of the second EB1
AI2 of the second EB1
AI3 of the second EB1

Display of analog inputs on EB1

i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:

AI1 of the first EB1

PNU

Description

U766

Normalization of analog outputs on EB1

(2766)
(Z113)
(Z116)

y [V ] = x

(2767)
(Z113)
(Z116)
n768
(2768)
(Z113)
(Z116)

-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 4
WE=10,00
Typ: I2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

[SW 1.5 and later]

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: 4
WE=0,00
Typ: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

[SW 1.5 and later]

-200.0 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 4
Typ: I2

P052 = 3

All binector numbers

Ind: 8
WE=0
Typ: L2

AO2 of the first EB1
AO1 of the second EB1
AO2 of the second EB1

U769

Source for output values at binary outputs on EB1 [SW 1.5 and later]

(2769)

Selection of binectors to be applied to binary outputs at terminals 43 - 46.

*
(Z114)
(Z117)

n770
(2770)

0 = Binector B0000
1 = Binector B0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:

BO1 of the first EB1

BO2 of the first EB1
BO3 of the first EB1
BO4 of the first EB1
BO1 of the second EB1
BO2 of the second EB1
BO3 of the second EB1
BO4 of the second EB1

Display of status of binary inputs and outputs on EB1

[SW 1.5 and later]
Representation on operator panel (PMU):

(Z114)
(Z117)
6

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

Corresponding terminal is activated

(HIGH level is applied)
Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied)

Segment or bit
0 ....... Terminal 40
1 ....... Terminal 41
2 ....... Terminal 42
3 ....... Terminal 43
4 ....... Terminal 44
5 ....... Terminal 45
6 ....... Terminal 46
i001:
i002:

Terminal states of first EB1

Terminal states of second EB1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-167

Parameter list
PNU

11.87
n773
(2773)

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Ind: 2
Type: V2

P052 = 3

All binector numbers

Ind: 8
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

[SW 1.5 and later]

0 to 1
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

[SW 1.5 and later]

-1000.0 to 1000.0
[%]
0.1%

Ind: 2
FS=100.0
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

Configuring the EB2 expansion board

Display of status of binary inputs and outputs on EB2
[SW 1.5 and later]
Representation on operator panel (PMU):

(Z118)
(Z119)
5

Segment ON:
Segment OFF:

Corresponding terminal is activated

(HIGH level is applied)
Corresponding terminal is not activated
(LOW level is applied)

Segment or bit
0 ........ Terminal 53
1 ........ Terminal 54
2 ........ Terminal 39
3 ........ Terminal 41
4 ........ Terminal 43
5 ........ Terminal 45
i001:
i002:

Terminal states of first EB2

Terminal states of second EB2

U774

Source for output values at binary outputs on EB2 [SW 1.5 and later]

(2774)

Selection of binectors to be applied to binary outputs at terminals 39 - 46.

*
(Z118)
(Z119)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:

BO1 of the first EB2

BO2 of the first EB2
BO3 of the first EB2
BO4 of the first EB2
BO1 of the second EB2
BO2 of the second EB2
BO3 of the second EB2
BO4 of the second EB2

U775

Signal type of analog input on EB2

(2775)

0 = voltage input 0 to 10 V
1 = current input 0 to 20 mA

*
(Z118)
(Z119)

i001: AI1 of the first EB2

i002: AI1 of the second EB2

U776

Normalization of analog input on EB2

(2776)

This parameter specifies the percentage value which is generated for an

input voltage of 10V (or an input current of 20mA) at the analog input.

(Z118)
(Z119)

The following general rule applies:

With a voltage input:

U 776 [%] = 10 V

Y
X

X .. input voltage in volts

Y .. % value which is generated for input
voltage X

With a current input:

U 776 [%] = 20 mA

Y
X

X .. input current in mA
Y .. % value which is generated for input
current X

i001: AI of the first EB2

i002: AI of the second EB2

11-168

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

U777

Offset for analog input on EB2

(2777)
(Z118)
(Z119)
U778
(2778)
*
(Z118)
(Z119)
U779
(2779)
*
(Z118)
(Z119)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

0=
1=
2=
3=

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 3
1

Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

i001: AI of the first EB2

i002: AI of the second EB2
Mode of signal injection at analog input on EB2

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0.00
Type: I2

Injection of signal with sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

i001: AI of the first EB2

i002: AI of the second EB2
Source for selection of sign reversal at
analog input on EB2

Selection of binector to control sign reversal at the analog input ("1" state
= reverse sign)

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
i001: AI of the first EB2
i002: AI of the second EB2

U780

Filtering time for analog input on EB2

(2780)

Note: Hardware filtering of approximately 0.2 ms is applied as standard

(Z118)
(Z119)

[SW 1.5 and later]

i001: AI of the first EB2

i002: AI of the second EB2

U781

Source for enabling of analog inputs on EB2

(2781)

Selection of binector to control enabling of the analog input ("1" state =

enabled)

*
(Z118)
(Z119)

[SW 1.5 and later]

0 = binector B0000
1 = binector B0001
etc.
i001: AI of the first EB2
i002: AI of the second EB2

n782
(2782)

Display of analog input on EB2

i001: AI of the first EB2
i002: AI of the second EB2

(Z118)
(Z119)
U783

Source for output value at analog output on EB2

(2783)

Selection of connector whose value must be output at the analog output

*
(Z118)
(Z119)

0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
i001: AO of the first EB2
i002: AO of the second EB2

U784
(2784)
*
(Z118)
(Z119)

Mode of signal injection at analog output on EB2

0=
1=
2=
3=

Injection of signal with sign

Injection of absolute value of signal
Injection of signal with sign, inverted
Injection of absolute value of signal, inverted

[SW 1.5 and later]

i001: AO of the first EB2

i002: AO of the second EB2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-169

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

U785

Filtering time for analog outputs on EB2

(2785)
(Z118)
(Z119)
U786
(2786)
(Z118)
(Z119)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps
[SW 1.5 and later]

0 to 10000
[ms]
1ms

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 2
FS=0
Type: O2

[SW 1.5 and later]

-200.00 to 199.99
[V]
0.01V

Ind: 2
FS=10.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

[SW 1.5 and later]

-10.00 to 10.00
[V]
0.01V

Ind: 2
FS=0.00
Type: I2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

[SW 1.5 and later]

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]
0.01%

Ind: 2
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Ind: 2
FS=1
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

100 to 20000
1

Ind: None
FS=1024
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

50.0 to 6500.0
[rev/min]
0.1

Ind: None
FS=500.0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

i001: AO of the first EB2

i002: AO of the second EB2
Normalization of analog outputs on EB2
y [V ] = x

U786
100%

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

x = normalization input (corresponds to filtering output)

y = normalization output (corresponds to output voltage at analog output
with an offset of 0)
i001: AO of the first EB2
i002: AO of the second EB2

U787
(2787)
(Z118)
(Z119)
n788
(2788)
(Z118)
(Z119)

11.88
U790
(2790)
*
(Z120)

Offset for analog output on EB2

i001: AO of the first EB2
i002: AO of the second EB2
Display of analog outputs on EB2
i001: AO of the first EB2
i002: AO of the second EB2

Configuring the SBP pulse encoder board

0 to 3
Configuration of input level of A/B and CRTL tracks and Zero pulse
[SW 1.5 and later] 1
i001:
i002:

A/B and CRTL track

Zero pulse

0:
1:
2:
3:

HTL unipolar
TTL unipolar
HTL differential input
TTL/RS422 differential input

U791

Configuration of encoder supply voltage

(2791)
*

The supply is subject to a current limit of 250mA

Caution: Setting the parameter incorrectly can damage the encoder (i.e. 15
V voltage for an encoder which requires a 5 V supply).

(Z120)

0:
1:

[SW 1.5 and later]

5V voltage supply
15V voltage supply

U792

Number of pulses per revolution

(2792)
*
(Z120)
U793

Number of lines on one track around circumference of disk

(2793)
*
(Z120)

Encoder type
0:
1:

[SW 1.5 and later]

Encoder with A/B track (two tracks displaced by 90 degrees)

Encoder with separate forward and reverse tracks

U794

Reference speed

(2794)

[SW 1.5 and later]

(Z120)

When actual speed = reference speed a value of 100% is output in the

appropriate diagnostic parameter (n795) and connector

n795

Display of actual speed in % of reference speed

[SW 1.5 and later]

-200.00 to 199.99
[%]

Ind: None
Type: I2

P052 = 3

Resetting the position counter

[SW 2.0 and later]

0 to 2
1

Ind: none
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 2
P051 = 40
online

(2795)
(Z120)
U796
(2796)
*
S00
(Z120)

11-170

Setting the type of resetting for position acquisition

0 = free-running (no reset)
1 = see function diagram Z120
2 = see function diagram Z120

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.89

Parameter list
Description

Operating mode for the parallel connection

(G195)
1

U804
(2804)
*
(G195)

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 2
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

All connector
numbers
1

Ind: 10
FS=0
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

0 to 1
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

see column on left

Ind: 2
FS=2
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Configuration of paralleling interface

Notes about parameterization of the paralleling interface see Chapter 6.3.2

U800
Control word for paralleling interface
(2800)
0:
Paralleling interface not active
*
1:
Paralleling interface active
The gating pulses are generated by this SIMOREG converter
2:
Paralleling interface active
(G195)
The gating pulses of the master are used
Must also be set if a SIMOREG CCP is used
U803
(2803)
*

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

[SW 1.7 and later]

Standard mode
All parallel-connected SIMOREG devices must be in continuous
operation. Failure (fault message, fuse blown) of one of the
parallel-connected SIMOREG devices causes immediate pulse
disabling for all SIMOREG devices.
"N+1 mode" (redundancy mode)
On failure (fault message, fuse blown) of one of the parallelconnected SIMOREG devices, operation is maintained with the
remaining SIMOREG devices.

Transmit data on paralleling interface

Selection of connectors whose contents must be injected as transmit data
(master to slaves or slave to master) for the paralleling interface.
0 = connector K0000
1 = connector K0001
etc.
This parameter not only defines the transmit data, but also their position in
the transmit telegram.
i001:
...
i005:
i006:
...
i010:

Word 1 of telegram
Word 5 of telegram
word 1 of the telegram, if "standby master"

[SW 1.7 and later]

word 5 of the telegram, if "standby master"

[SW 1.7 and later]

Indices .06 to .10 of U804 are activated on the master and the standby
master when the master function is transferred to the standby master
U805
(2805)
(G195)
U806
(2806)
*
(G195)

Control word for bus terminator of paralleling interface

0:
1:

No bus terminator
Bus terminator active

Address for the parallel connection of SIMOREG devices

i001:
i002:

Address of the masters or of the slaves

Address of the "standby master" or slaves

2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

Slave device with address 2

Slave device with address 3
Slave device with address 4
Slave device with address 5
Slave device with address 6
Master device for 1 slave device with address 2
Master device for 2 slave devices with addresses 2 and 3
Master device for 3 slave devices with addresses 2, 3 and 4
Master device for 4 slave devices with addresses 2, 3, 4 and 5
Master device for 5 slave devices with addresses 2, 3, 4, 5 and
6

[SW 1.7 and later]

In "Standard" mode (U803 = 0), i001 and i002 must be set to the same
value.
In "N+1 mode" (U803 = 1), a SIMOREG device has the "master" function, a
SIMOREG device has the "standby Master" function and all other devices
are slaves. In the slaves, i001 and i002 must be set to the same value.
On the master, a value of 12 to 16 must be set in i001, in i002 a value of 2
to 6.
In the "standby master", a value of 2 to 6 must be set in i001, in i002 a value
of 12 to 16.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-171

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U807
(2807)

Telegram failure time on paralleling interface

0.000 to 65.000
[s]
0.001s

(G195)

No time monitoring

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
FS=0.100
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Online

6040, 6041

Ind: None
FS=6040
Type: L2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 65535

Ind: 9
Type: O2

P052 0

0.001...65.000 Permissible time interval between two data exchange

operations before a fault message is output.
Fault message F014 is displayed if no data are exchanged with the parallelconnected converter within this delay period.
The monitoring function is implemented within a 20 ms cycle. For this
reason, only setting values which constitute a multiple of 20 ms are
meaningful.
Note:
The telegram monitoring function is active
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after connection of the
electronics power supply
from the receipt of the first error-free telegram after the telegram monitor
has responded (i.e. monitoring timeout).

U808
(2808)
*
(G195)
n809
(2809)
(G195)

11-172

Source for triggering of message F014

Selection of binector which must trigger message F014 when it switches to
log. "1"
6040 = binector B6040
6041 = binector B6041
Diagnostic information for paralleling interface
i001 to i009 = Free-running counter, overflow at 65535
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:
i006:
i007:
i008:
i009:

Number of error-free telegrams

Number of errored telegrams
Transmit Error Counter
Receive Error Counter
Phase Error Counter
Baud rate Error Counter
Bad BCC Counter
Timeout Counter
Number of telegrams with unknown identifier

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

n810
(2810)

Diagnostic information for the paralleling interface

(G195)

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

10 9

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: None
Type: V2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Unit with active master function

Segment
0 .......
1 .......
2 ....... ON: Slave with address 2 responding
3 ....... ON: Slave with address 3 responding
4 ....... ON: Slave with address 4 responding
5 ....... ON: Slave with address 5 responding
6 ....... ON: Slave with address 6 responding
7 .......
8 ....... OFF
9 ....... OFF
10 .......
11 .......
12 .......
13 .......
14 .......
15 ....... ON: Master function active
Unit with slave function
Segment
0 .......
1 .......
2 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 2 are ok
3 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 3 are ok
4 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 4 are ok
5 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 5 are ok
6 ....... ON: Data for slave with address 6 are ok
7 .......
8 ....... ON: Slave function active
9 ....... ON: Firing pulses of master are used
10 .......
11 .......
12 .......
13 .......
14 .......
15 ....... OFF

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-173

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

n812
(2812)

Receive data on paralleling interface

0000 to FFFFH
1

(G195)

When U806=1 (master) is selected

i001
...
i005

Receive data from slave with address 2, word 1

i006
...
i010

Receive data from slave with address 3, word 1

i011
...
i015

Receive data from slave with address 4, word 1

i016
...
i020

Receive data from slave with address 5, word 1

i021
...
i025

Receive data from slave with address 6, word 1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 25
Type: L2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 0

Ind: 5
Type: L2

P052 0

Receive data from slave with address 2, word 5

Receive data from slave with address 3, word 5

Receive data from slave with address 4, word 5

Receive data from slave with address 5, word 5

Receive data from slave with address 6, word 5

When U806=2 to 6 (slave) is selected:

n813
(2813)
(G195)

i001
...
i005

Receive data from master, word 1

i006
...
i025

Not in use

Receive data from master, word 5

Not in use
0 to FFFFH

Transmit data on paralleling interface

When U806=1 (master) is selected
i001
...
i005

Transmit data to slaves, word 1

Transmit data to slaves, word 5

When U806=2 to 6 (slave) is selected:

i001
...
i005

11.90

Transmit data to master, word 1

Transmit data to master, word 5

Parameters for SIMOREG DC-MASTER Control Module (SIMOREG CM)

U819
to
U835
(2819 to
2835)

These parameters have no meaning for SIMOREG DC-MASTER!

The SIMOREG CM (Control Module, control section for converting or
upgrading systems) requires these parameters.
(for details see operating instructions for SIMOREG CM, order No.
6RX1700-0BD76)

11.91

Rated DC current of external field device

U838
(2838)
*

Rated DC current of external field device

0.00

Parameter not yet set

[SW 1.9 and later]

0.00 to 600.00
[A]
0.01A

Ind: None
FS=0.00
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Note:
This parameter is operative only if P082 >= 21.

11-174

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.92

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Simulation operation

Simulation operation
Simulation operation is used to test the power section (measurement of the firing pulses with a current probe). Firing pulses are output to
a single thyristor (pulse distance = 20 ms, pulse duration = approx. 1 ms, firing pulse chopping as in normal operation). The thyristor is
selected with parameter U840. The line voltage does not have to be applied during simulation operation.
Simulation operation is activated by setting a value > 0 in Parameter U840.
Simulation operation is then actually started when the SIMOREG DC-MASTER is in an operating state o7.
As soon as the SIMOREG DC-MASTER is in simulation operation, it goes into operating state o8.1 (simulation operation).
Simulation operation is exited by resetting parameter U840 to zero.
U840
(2840)
*

Control parameters for simulation operation

No simulation operation

11
...
16
21
...
26

Firing cable 11

U845
to
n909
(2845 to
2909)

These parameters are used by DriveMonitor

(G101)

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

[SW 1.9 and later]

0 and 1
1

Ind: 5
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

Firing cable 26

Parameter for DriveMonitor

U910
(2910)
*

0,
11 to 16,
21 to 26
1

Firing cable 16
Firing cable 21

11.93

11.94

[SW 1.7 and later]

Slot deactivation
Slot deactivation parameter

Parameter for deactivating supplementary boards, e.g. during start-up or

troubleshooting (for details of slot identification codes, see diagram under
parameter r063)
i001:
i002:
i003:
i004:
i005:

Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G

0
1

Board in slot active

Board in slot not active

The deactivated slot is ignored during the search for installed

supplementary boards when the supply voltage is next switched on.
Likewise, activation of a slot does not take effect until the supply voltage
has been switched off and on again.
Note:
Slot E can simply be deactivated to conceal a technology board (large
format).
If a communications board is installed in addition to the technology board,
and the technology board is concealed, then the communications board will
not be processed either.

11.95

Parameter for DriveMonitor

U911
to
n949
(2911 to
2949)

These parameters are used by DriveMonitor

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-175

Parameter list
PNU

11.96

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Technology software in the basic converter, Option S00: Sampling times

Only active with optional technology software S00

Sampling times
For each function block of the technology software S00, it is necessary to define in which "time slice" (i.e. with which sampling time) it is
processed.
5 time slices are available:
Time slice
1
2
4
10
20
U950
(2950)
*
S00

11-176

Sampling time
.
1 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice)
2 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice)
4 * T0 (firing-pulse-synchronous time slice)
20 ms (not firing-pulse-synchronous )
Block is not calculated

T0 = Mean distance between 2 firing pulses

T0 = 3.33 ms at 50 Hz line frequency
T0 = 2.78 ms at 60 Hz line frequency

1, 2, 4, 10, 20

Selection of time slices for function blocks FB1 to FB100

Index

Function
block

i001
i002
i003
i004
i005
i006
i007
i008
i009
i010
i011
i012
i013
i014
i015
i016
i017
i018
i019
i020
i021
i022
i023
i024
i025
i026
i027
i028
i029
i030
i031
i032
i033
i034
i035
i036
i037
i038
i039
i040
i041
i042
i043
i044
i045
i046
i047
i048
i049
i050

FB1
FB2
FB3
FB4
FB5
FB6
FB7
FB8
FB9
FB10
FB11
FB12
FB13
FB14
FB15
FB16
FB17
FB18
FB19
FB20
FB21
FB22
FB23
FB24
FB25
FB26
FB27
FB28
FB29
FB30
FB31
FB32
FB33
FB34
FB35
FB36
FB37
FB38
FB39
FB40
FB41
FB42
FB43
FB44
FB45
FB46
FB47
FB48
FB49
FB50

Time
slice
(FS)
20
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
20
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
20
20
1

Index

Function
block

i051
i052
i053
i054
i055
i056
i057
i058
i059
i060
i061
i062
i063
i064
i065
i066
i067
i068
i069
i070
i071
i072
i073
i074
i075
i076
i077
i078
i079
i080
i081
i082
i083
i084
i085
i086
i087
i088
i089
i090
i091
i092
i093
i094
i095
i096
i097
i098
i099
i100

FB51
FB52
FB53
FB54
FB55
FB56
FB57
FB58
FB59
FB60
FB61
FB62
FB63
FB64
FB65
FB66
FB67
FB68
FB69
FB70
FB71
FB72
FB73
FB74
FB75
FB76
FB77
FB78
FB79
FB80
FB81
FB82
FB83
FB84
FB85
FB86
FB87
FB88
FB89
FB90
FB91
FB92
FB93
FB94
FB95
FB96
FB97
FB98
FB99
FB100

Time
slice
(FS)
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
20
1
1
1
1
20
1
1
1
20
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Ind: 100
FS=
see column
on left
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U951
(2951)
*
S00

Selection of time slices for function blocks FB101 to FB200

1, 2, 4, 10, 20

Index

Function
block

FB101
FB102
FB103
FB104
FB105
FB106
FB107
FB108
FB109
FB110
FB111
FB112
FB113
FB114
FB115
FB116
FB117
FB118
FB119
FB120
FB121
FB122
FB123
FB124
FB125
FB126
FB127
FB128
FB129
FB130
FB131
FB132
FB133
FB134
FB135
FB136
FB137
FB138
FB139
FB140
FB141
FB142
FB143
FB144
FB145
FB146
FB147
FB148
FB149
FB150

Time
slice
(FS)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
20
1

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Index

Function
block

FB151
FB152
FB153
FB154
FB155
FB156
FB157
FB158
FB159
FB160
FB161
FB162
FB163
FB164
FB165
FB166
FB167
FB168
FB169
FB170
FB171
FB172
FB173
FB174
FB175
FB176
FB177
FB178
FB179
FB180
FB181
FB182
FB183
FB184
FB185
FB186
FB187
FB188
FB189
FB190
FB191
FB192
FB193
FB194
FB195
FB196
FB197
FB198
FB199
FB200

Time
slice
(FS)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
10
1

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 100
FS=
see column
on left
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

11-177

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

U952
(2952)
*
S00

Selection of time slices for function blocks FB201 to FB300

1, 2, 4, 10, 20

Index

Function
block

FB201
FB202
FB203
FB204
FB205
FB206
FB207
FB208
FB209
FB210
FB211
FB212
FB213
FB214
FB215
FB216
FB217
FB218
FB219
FB220
FB221
FB222
FB223
FB224
FB225
FB226
FB227
FB228
FB229
FB230
FB231
FB232
FB233
FB234
FB235
FB236
FB237
FB238
FB239
FB240
FB241
FB242
FB243
FB244
FB245
FB246
FB247
FB248
FB249
FB250

Time
slice
(FS)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
1
20
20
20
20
20
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
10
1

Index

Function
block

FB251
FB252
FB253
FB254
FB255
FB256
FB257
FB258
FB259
FB260
FB261
FB262
FB263
FB264
FB265
FB266
FB267
FB268
FB269
FB270
FB271
FB272
FB273
FB274
FB275
FB276
FB277
FB278
FB279
FB280
FB281
FB282
FB283
FB284
FB285
FB286
FB287
FB288
FB289
FB290
FB291
FB292
FB293
FB294
FB295
FB296
FB297
FB298
FB299
FB300

11.97

Parameter for DriveMonitor

n953
to
n959
(2953 to
2959)

These parameters are used by DriveMonitor

11-178

Time
slice
(FS)
1
1
1
1
20
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 100
FS=
see column
on left
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

Parameter list
Description

11.98

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Technology software in basic unit, S00 option:

Altering the processing sequence of function blocks
Only active with optional technology software S00

Processing sequence of function blocks

The function blocks of the S00 technology software are processed within the computational cycle in the sequence defined in parameters
U960 to U962:
1.
...
100.
101.
...
200.
201.
etc.

Function block with number set in U960 index.001

Function block with number set in U960 index.100
Function block with number set in U961 index.001
Function block with number set in U961 index.100
Function block with number set in U962 index.001

The numbers are parameterized in ascending sequence (1, 2, 3, ) in the factory setting (standard sequence).
Altering the processing sequence:
If a new function block number is entered (i.e. moved from another location) in a certain index of parameter U960, U961 or U962, then the
new processing sequence is defined such that the function block previously entered in this index will be processed after the newly entered
block. The gap which may be left at the old location of the moved (newly entered) function block is closed by shifting the function block
numbers behind the space forward by one position.
Example 1:
Starting with the standard sequence setting, the processing sequence must be altered such that function block 90 (analog signal selector
switch) will be processed immediately after function block 83 (tracking/storage element):
Function block no. 90 must be entered in the index in which the number of the function block previously processed after block 83 (84 in
U960.9065) is currently stored. Function block numbers (84 and 85) in the following indices of U960 will be shifted up to the next index
automatically.
Function
block

Processing
sequence

U960.Index 068

90
85
84
83
82
81

U960.Index 067
U960.Index 066
U960.Index 065
U960.Index 064
U960.Index 063
U960.Index 062

Function
block
91
85
84
90
83
82
81

Processing
sequence
U960.Index 068
U960.Index 067
U960.Index 066
U960.Index 065
U960.Index 064
U960.Index 063
U960.Index 062

Example 2:
Starting with the standard sequence setting, the processing sequence must be altered such that function block 38 (sign inverter) will be
processed immediately after function block 45 (divider):
Function block number 38 must be entered in the index in which the number of the function block previously processed after function block
45 (46 in U960.i035) is currently stored. The function block numbers stored in the indices immediately above this position shift up by one
index, then all numbers immediately above the gap left shift down automatically by one index.
Function
block

U960
(2960)
*
S00

Processing
sequence

U960.Index 036

46
45
41
40
38
37

U960.Index 035
U960.Index 034

Function
block
47
46
38
45
41
40

U960.Index 033
U960.Index 032
U960.Index 031
U960.Index 030

Processing
sequence
U960.Index 036
U960.Index 035
U960.Index 034

U960.Index 033
U960.Index 032
U960.Index 031
U960.Index 030

Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology

software (1)
st

i001:

Number of function block for 1 place in processing

sequence

i002:

Number of function block for 2 place in processing

sequence

Function
block
47
46
38
45
41
40
37

Numbers of all
function blocks

Processing
sequence
U960.Index 036
U960.Index 035
U960.Index 034
U960.Index 033
U960.Index 032
U960.Index 031
U960.Index 030

Ind: 100
FS=
Standard
sequence
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

etc.
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

11-179

Parameter list

05.2007

PNU

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 100
FS=
Standard
sequence
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

U961
(2961)
*
S00

Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology

software (2)

Numbers of all
function blocks

Ind: 100
FS=
Standard
sequence
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

0 to 4
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
off-line

i001:

Number of function block for 101 place in processing sequence

i002:

Number of function block for 102 place in processing

sequence

etc.
U962
(2962)
*
S00

Processing sequence of function blocks of S00 technology

software (3)
st

i001:

Number of function block for 201 place in processing sequence

i002:

Number of function block for 202 place in processing

sequence

etc.
U969
(2969)
*
S00

Automatic setting and activation of the execution sequence

Return

Set standard sequence:

The numbers of the function blocks are entered in ascending
order in Parameters U960, U961 and U962. The parameter is
then automatically set to value 0.
Set optimum sequence:
U960, U961, and U962 are set in such a way that as few
deadtimes as possible occur. After that, the parameter is
automatically set to value 0 again.
Set standard setting of the sampling times.
U950, U951, and U952 are set to the factory setting.
Automatic activation / deactivation:
U950, U951 and U952 are set in such a way that the unwired
function blocks are deselected and the wired function blocks are
selected (activated), if they are not yet selected.
The time slice 10 (sampling time 20 ms) is set for all function
blocks not previously activated, the time slice is left unchanged
for all previously activated function blocks.
In order to ensure that this function also functions correctly for
function blocks FB261 to FB269 (PI controllers 2 to 10), the
value 0 is to be set for PI controllers 2 to 10 which are not used
and this must be done at the corresponding indices U544.i002
to i010 before this function is used.

3
4

11-180

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
PNU

11.99

Parameter list
Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

Enabling of technology software in basic unit, S00 option

("freely assignable function blocks")

The S00 technology option can only be utilized on SIMOREG DC-MASTER converters on which this option has been enabled by a proper
PIN number. The software remains enabled after software updates, i.e. it need not be enabled again after new software has been
installed.
Permanent enabling of S00 technology option (subject to charge):
Please proceed as follows if you wish to enable the S00 technology option:
1. Find out the serial number of your SIMOREG DC-MASTER unit (e.g. "Q6K31253320005"):
The serial number is specified on the delivery note
The serial number is printed on the rating plate of the SIMOREG DC-MASTER
The serial number can be displayed in parameter r069 on the OP1S
2. Find out the PIN number (a number between 2001 and 65535) which matches the converter serial number:
If you have ordered the SIMOREG DC-MASTER with S00 option, you will find the PIN number printed on a sticker on the unit
and specified on the delivery note.
If not, please contact your local Siemens sales office to obtain the correct PIN number.
3. Enter the PIN number in parameter U977 and complete your entry by pressing button . This parameter is automatically reset to
0 after the entry is made. Enter the PIN number with care as you only have five attempts.
4. Technology option S00 is now enabled, which can be verified in n978 = 2000.
Technology option S00 can be disabled by entering U997 = PIN - 1 (e.g. for test purposes). Parameter n978 then displays 500. The option
is enabled again by entering U977 = PIN.
Temporary enabling of S00 technology option (free of charge):
The S00 technology option can be enabled once, free of charge, on all converters for 500 hours of use by means of a special PIN
number. This 500-hour period can be used for test purposes or for the operation of replacement units which have been ordered without
the S00 option (i.e. to cover the period until a PIN number for permanent enabling is obtained).
The 500 hours are counted by the hours run counter (r048) , i.e. only the time that the drive is actually switched on is counted. When the
500-hour period has expired, the S00 option is disabled automatically if the PIN number for permanent enabling has not been entered in
the meantime.
The special PIN number is: U977 = 1500 (identical number for all units)
Temporary enabling of the option can be interrupted with PIN U977 = 500. The remaining time credit remains valid for the next period of
use with the temporarily enabling PIN number.
Alarm A059 is output if the time credit is less than 50 hours and the S00 technology option is temporarily enabled.
Fault message F059 is displayed if the time credit of 500 hours has run out and the S00 option is still temporarily enabled.
System response when S00 technology option is not enabled:
The connectors and binectors associated with freely assignable function blocks are not updated (they are set to 0 when the electronics
voltage is connected; when the time credit for temporary enabling has run out, they remain frozen at the last recorded values until the
electronics voltage is disconnected again).
U977
(2977)
*
S00

PIN number for S00 option

n978
(2978)

"S00 enabled" display

This parameter is automatically reset to "0" after entry of the PIN number.
Take care to enter the PIN number correctly. You are only allowed up to 5
attempts!

The optional S00 technology software is disabled

The time credit for temporary enabling has run out

xxx

The optional S00 technology software is not enabled.

xxx = number of credit hours which are still available for use
under temporary enabling PIN number

1xxx

The optional SOO technology software is temporarily enabled.

xxx = number of credit hours still available

2000

The optional S00 technology software is permanently enabled.

S00

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

0 to 65535
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
Offline

see column on left

Ind: None
Type: O2

P052 = 3

11-181

Parameter list
PNU

05.2007

Description

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type

See
Change
(Access /
Status)

0 to 2000
1

Ind: None
FS=0
Type: O2

P052 = 3
P051 = 40
on-line

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

11.100 Parameter access for experts

U979
(2979)
*

Parameter access for experts

999

[SW 1.9 and later]

Parameter access for experts is activated.

This means that even offline parameters can be modified in
operation.

Notes:
The value of this parameter is lost when the electronics power supply is
switched off.
Parameters can be modified only if both P051 and P052 as well as P927
are set to the correct values.

11.101 List of existing and modified U and n parameters

n980
(2980)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

Viewing parameter for displaying the first 100 parameter numbers in the U
or n parameter range (numbers 2000 to 2999).
The parameters are arranged in ascending sequence.
The list is continued in the parameter whose number is displayed in index
101. This means, for example,
2981

n981

The first 0 to be displayed signals that no further parameter numbers are

stored.
n981
(2981)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n982
(2982)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n983
(2983)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n984
(2984)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n985
(2985)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n986
(2986)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n987
(2987)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n988
(2988)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n989
(2989)

List of existing parameter numbers, continuation

n990
(2990)

List of modified parameters, continuation

See n980.
See n980.
See n980.
See n980.
See n980.
See n980.
See n980.
See n980.
See n980.
Viewing parameter for displaying the first 100 modified parameters in the U
or n parameter range (numbers 2000 to 2999).
The parameters are arranged in ascending sequence.
The list is continued in the parameter whose number is displayed in index
101. This means, for example,
2991

n991

The first 0 to be displayed signals that there are no further modified

parameters.
n991
(2991)

List of modified parameters, continuation

n992
(2992)

List of modified parameters, continuation

11-182

See n990.
See n990.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Parameter list

PNU

Description

n993
(2993)

List of modified parameters, continuation

n994
(2994)

List of modified parameters, continuation

n995
(2995)

List of modified parameters, continuation

n996
(2996)

List of modified parameters, continuation

n997
(2997)

List of modified parameters, continuation

n998
(2998)

List of modified parameters, continuation

n999
(2999)

List of modified parameters, continuation

See n990.
See n990.
See n990.
See n990.
See n990.
See n990.
See n990.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

Value range
[Unit]
Steps

No. indices
Factory
setting
Type
Ind: 101
Type: O2

See
Change
(Access /
Status)
P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

Ind: 101
Type: O2

P052 = 3

11-183

Parameter list

11-184

05.2007

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

List of connectors and binectors

12.1

Connector list
The values of connectors can be displayed via parameters r041, r042, r043 and P044.
The following numeric representation applies to all connectors:
In the internal software representation, 100% corresponds to the number 4000 hex = 16384 dec. The
value range is -200.00% ... +199.99%, corresponding to 8000 hex ... 7FFF hex. The connectors are
transferred via the serial interfaces in this internal mode of representation.
100% corresponds to converter rated quantities r072.i02 (currents, armature), r073.i02 (currents,
field), P078.i01 (line voltages, armature).
The following numeric representation applies to all double-word connectors:
In the internal software representation, 100% corresponds to the number 4000 0000 hex =
16384*65536 dec.
The value range is -200.00% ... +199.9999999%, corresponding to -231 dec ... +(231 - 1) dec or
8000 0000 hex ... 7FFF FFFF hex.
If a double-word connector is the input of a connector selection parameter, or if a connector is the
input of a double-word connector selection parameter, this may be equivalent to division or
multiplication by the value 65536. For details of the connection to double-word connectors, see
Section 9.1, "The following rules apply to the selection of double-word connectors.

Connector

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

Fixed values
K0000

Fixed value 0

G120

K0001

Fixed value 100.00%

100%
16384 =

K0002

Fixed value 200.00%

100%
16384 =

G120

K0003

Raw value after A/D conversion (unfiltered, not normalized)

100%
16384 =

G114

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-1

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Connector

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

K0019

Analog input, terminal 10 / 11 (analog selectable input 3)

After normalization, offset injection, filtering

100%
16384 =

G114

Binary inputs, binary outputs

K0020

Binary inputs, terminals 36 to 43 and 211 to 214, E Stop

Bit0 = Status of terminal 36
Bit1 = Status of terminal 37
Bit2 = Status of terminal 38
Bit3 = Status of terminal 39
Bit4 = Status of terminal 40
Bit5 = Status of terminal 41
Bit6 = Status of terminal 42
Bit7 = Status of terminal 43
Bit8 = Status of terminal 211
Bit9 = Status of terminal 212
Bit10 = Status of terminal 213
Bit11 = Status of terminal 214
Bit12 = 0 ... E Stop is active
1 ... No E Stop is active

1
1=

G110

K0021

Binary outputs, terminals 46 to 52, 109/110

Bit0 = Status of terminal 46
Bit1 = Status of terminal 48
Bit2 = Status of terminal 50
Bit3 = Status of terminal 52
Bit7 = Status of terminal 109/110

1
1=

G112

Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Bit12
Bit13

G117

= Overload at terminal 46
= Overload at terminal 48
= Overload at terminal 50
= Overload at terminal 52
= Overload at terminal 26 (15V output)
= Overload at terminal 34, 44 and/or 210 (24V output)

Analog outputs
K0026

Analog output, terminal 14 / 15

100%
16384 =

Control word 2

K0032

Status word 1

K0033

Status word 2

K0034

Active function data set

[SW 2.0 and later]

K0035

Active BICO data set

[SW 2.0 and later]

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Evaluation of the pulse encoder board SBP

KK0036
K0038
K0039

12-2

G181
G182
G183
G175
G175
[SW 1.6 and later]

Position actual value of SBP

1
[SW 2.0 and later] 1 =

Z120

Actual speed value of SBP in rev./min

1 rpm
[SW 2.0 and later] 1 =

Z120

Actual speed value of SBP

100%
16384 =

Z120

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
Connector

Connectors and binectors

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

Pulse encoder evaluation

The pulse encoder evaluation function supplies an actual speed value (K0040 und K0041)
and an actual position value (K0042, K0043, K0044, KK0046).
The pulses of the pulse encoder are counted according to sign to generate the actual position value
(a hardware counter is used for this purpose.)
The setting in parameter P144 (multiple evaluation) is also relevant,
i.e. when P144 = 0, every positive edge of the first track of the pulse encoder is counted,
when P144 = 1, every edge of the first track of the encoder is counted,
when P144 = 2, every edge of both tracks of the encoder is counted.
When P145 = 1 (automatic switchover of multiple evaluation), the position sensor (K0042, K0043, K0044, KK0046) produces invalid data!
K0042 and K0043 together form a signed 24-bit actual position value.
23
23
(value range: FF80 0000H to 007F FFFFH or 2 to +2 -1 )
K0040
K0041
K0042

Actual speed value from pulse encoder

100%
16384 =

G145

Absolute actual speed value from pulse encoder

100%
16384 =

G145

Actual position value, LOW word

1
1=

G145

1
1=

Actual position value extended in the software to a 32-bit value

31
31
(value range: 8000 0000H to 7FFF FFFFH or 2 to +2 -1 )
KK0047

Deceleration distance

[SW 1.9 and later]

When setpoint 0 is applied to the ramp-function generator input, the speed

setpoint at the generator output is reduced to zero according to the current
settings for ramp-down and transition roundings.
This double-word connector specifies the requisite deceleration distance as
the number of increments of the pulse encoder (defined in parameters P140
ff.).
This deceleration distance calculation is correct only on the condition that the
parameterized ramp-down time and transition roundings do not change
during the braking operation.
K0048

Actual speed value from pulse encoder in rpm

1 rpm
[SW 2.0 and later] 1 =

G145

Heatsink temperature
K0050

100C
16384 =

Heatsink temperature

Motor interface
K0050 is always set to 0 when a PTC thermistor or no temperature sensor is connected (P490.x 1).
K0051

Motor temperature 1 (from sensor to terminal 22 / 23)

K0052

Motor temperature 2 (from sensor to terminal 204 / 205)

100C
16384 =
16384 100C

G185

0
16384 =

0 90

G163

G185

Closed-loop armature current control, auto-reversing stage, armature gating unit

K0100

Firing angle (armature)

K0101

180
-16384 =

16384 0

G163

180
-16384 =

16384 0

G162

180
-16384 =
100%
[SW 2.0 and later] 16384 =

G162

Firing angle (armature) before limitation

90
0=

K0102

Precontrol value + armature current controller output

(gating unit input)

K0103

duration of current flow

100%
time between 2 firing pulses

K0105

Code of triggered thyristor pair in a thyristor bridge for switching through the
corresponding line phase:
0 UV
6 VU

2 UW
8 WU

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

90
0=

100%
16384 =

G162

K0114

Internal signed actual current value (armature), averaged over one firing
cycle

100%
16384 =

G162

K0115

Current controller actual value (armature)

100%
16384 =

G162

K0116

Absolute value of internal actual current (armature)

100%
16384 =

G162

100%
16384 =

G161

Precontrol output (armature)

0
16384 =
0 90

G162

K0113

K0117
K0118

K0121

180
-16384 =

K0122

EMF which is applied as an input value for the armature precontrol

(generated from K0123 or K0124 depending on P162, filtered acc. to P163)

P078.001 3 2
16384 =
*

K0123

EMF= UaIaRaLadia/dt, where the measured armature voltage is applied

as Ua
(Note: K0287 is the result of PT1 filtering with 10ms)

P078.001 3 2
16384 =
*

K0124

EMF= UaIaRaLadia/dt, where the armature voltage calculated from the

P078.001 3 2
16384 =
*
delay angle, measured armature conduction interval and mean line voltage
is applied as Ua. If this calculation cannot be made or is insufficiently
accurate (e.g. with a conduction angle < 10, average armature current value
< 2 % in r072.002), K0124 assumes the value set in K0123.

K0125

Armature current setpoint after reduced gearbox stressing or current setpoint

integrator

G162

Current limitation
Lowest positive current limit (armature)

100%
16384 =

G161

K0132

Highest negative current limit (armature)

100%
16384 =

G161

K0133

Current setpoint (armature) before limitation (incl. additional setpoint)

100%
16384 =

G161

K0134

Current setpoint (armature) before torque limitation

100%
16384 =

G160

K0131

Torque limitation, speed limiting controller

Normalization of torque connectors:
An armature current corresponding to 100% of the converter rated DC current (r072.002) with a motor flux (K0290) corresponding to
100 % of the rated motor field current (P102) produces a torque of 100%.
Note:
Whether connectors K0140, K0141, K0145 and K0147 act as the torque setpoint or the current setpoint depends on P170 (setting
determines which quantity is divided by motor flux).
Speed limiting controller, active torque limit 1
G160
K0136
16384 100%

100%
16384 =

G162

Upper torque limit

100%
16384 =

G160

K0137
K0140

K0143

12-4

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

K0144

Lower torque limit

100%
16384 =

G160

K0145

Torque setpoint before limitation (incl. additional setpoint)

100%
16384 =

G160

K0147

Torque setpoint before limitation (without additional setpoint)

100%
16384 =

G160

K0148

Torque setpoint (from speed controller)

100%
16384 =

G152

100%
[SW 2.0 and later] 16384 =

G162

K0149

Torque actual value related to P100 * P102

Compensation of moment of inertia (dv/dt injection)

K0150

Component of precontrol for speed controller

calculated from d(K0168)/dt * P540

100%
16384 =

G153

K0152

Component of precontrol for speed controller

calculated from f(K0164) * P541 (= function of speed actual value/setpoint
deviation in K0164)

100%
16384 =

G153

Speed controller
Setpoint processing, ramp-function generator, friction and moment of inertia compensation
Speed controller output

100%
16384 =

G152

K0161

P component

100%
16384 =

G152

K0162

I component

100%
16384 =

G152

100%
16384 =

G151

D component output * (-1)

100%
16384 =

G152

100%
16384 =

G151

K0177

Band-stop output 1

100%
16384 =

G152

Band-stop output 2

100%
16384 =

G152

K0179

Filtering element output for nact filtering

100%
16384 =

G152

K0181

Lowest positive setpoint limit

100%
16384 =

G137

K0182

100%
16384 =

G136

Setpoint input for ramp-function generator

100%
16384 =

G135

K0194

Total of main setpoint (limited) + additional setpoint

100%
16384 =

G135

K0195

G135

K0196

100%
Ramp-function generator input before the setpoint reduction
16384 =
[SW 1.6 and later]
Effective positive limit for main setpoint
16384 100%

K0197

Effective negative limit for main setpoint

G135

K0198

Main setpoint before limitation

K0160

K0164
K0165

K0168
K0169

K0178

K0183

K0193

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

=
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =

G135

12-5

Connectors and binectors

Connector

05.2007

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

Crawling setpoint, inching setpoint, oscillation, fixed setpoint

K0201

Crawling setpoint

100%
16384 =

G130

K0202

Inching setpoint

100%
16384 =

G129

Oscillation setpoint

100%
16384 =

G128

K0204

Fixed setpoint

100%
16384 =

G127

K0206

Crawling setpoint: Output value of function block

G130

K0207

Inching setpoint: Output value of function block

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

K0208

K0203

K0209

G129

Oscillation: Output value of function block

=
100%
16384 =

Fixed setpoint: Output value of function block

100%
16384 =

G127

1
1=
11

G124

G128

Connector selector switches

K0230

Output of connector selector switch 1

[SW 1.9 and later]

K0231

Output of connector selector switch 2

[SW 1.9 and later]

G124

Motorized potentiometer
K0240

Motorized potentiometer output (setpoint from potentiometer)

100%
16384 =

G126

K0241

dy/dt (rise in ramp-function generator output in time period set in P542 +

P465)

100%
16384 =

G126

K0242

Ramp-function generator input in motorized potentiometer (setpoint)

100%
16384 =

G126

0
16384 =

0 90

G166

Closed-loop field current control, field gating unit

K0250

Firing angle (field)

K0251

Firing angle (field) before limitation

180
-16384 =

16384 0

G166

180
-16384 =

16384 0

G166

180
-16384 =

16384 100%

=
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =

G166

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

G165

90
0=

K0252

Precontrol value + field current controller output

(gating unit input)

K0260

Current controller output (field)

K0261

Current controller P component (field)

K0262

Current controller I component (field)

K0263

Current controller setpoint/actual value deviation (field)

K0265

Actual value at field current controller input

K0266

Absolute internal actual current value (field)

K0268

Setpoint at field current controller input

K0271

Precontrol output (field)

90
0=

G166
G166
G166
G166
G166
G166
G166

Closed-loop EMF control

K0273

Lowest positive current limit (field)

K0274

Lowest negative current limit (field)

K0275

Current controller setpoint (field) before standstill field

K0276

Current controller setpoint (field) before limitation

K0277

Current controller setpoint (field) before summing stage at limiter input

K0278

Precontrol value + EMF controller output

K0280

EMF controller output

K0281

P component of EMF controller

K0282

I component of EMF controller

K0283

EMF controller, setpoint/actual value deviation

K0284

EMF controller, setpoint/actual value deviation after droop

12-6

=
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =

G165
G165
G165
G165
G165
G165
G165
G165
G165
G165

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

Normalization

K0285

EMF controller actual value

P078.001 3 2
16384 =
*

K0292

Signed actual armature voltage

P078.001 3 2
16384 =
*

Precontrol output (EMF)

100%
16384 =

K0293

Function
diag., Sheet

G165

General connectors
P078.001
16384 =
16384 P078.001

K0301

Line voltage U-V (armature)

K0302

Line voltage V-W (armature)

K0303

Line voltage W-U (armature)

K0304

Line voltage (field)

K0305

Average line voltage (armature), filtered

K0306

Line frequency

P078.001
16384 =
16384 50.0Hz

K0307

Motor power output

see Column 2

P078.001
16384 =
16384 400V

=
=

P100 * (P101 P100 * P110)

Normalization: 16384 =
K0309

see Column 2

Calculated motor temperature rise

the overtemperature which is reached at a
Normalization: 16384 =
continuous current corresponding to the rated motor armature
current

K0310

Calculated thyristor temperature rise as % of maximum permissible thyristor

temperature rise

100%
16384 =

K0311

Hours run

G189

K0312

Hours run / 10

1h
1=
1 10h

Fixed value 1 (P401)

100%
16384 =

G120

K0402

Fixed value 2 (P402)

100%
16384 =

G120

K0403

Fixed value 3 (P403)

100%
16384 =

G120

K0404

100%
16384 =

G120

Fixed value 9 (P409)

100%
16384 =

G120

K0410

Fixed value 10 (P410)

100%
16384 =

G120

K0411

Fixed value 11 (P411)

100%
16384 =

G120

K0412

Fixed value 12 (P412)

100%
16384 =

G120

Fixed value 13 (P413)

100%
16384 =

G120

Fixed value 14 (P414)

100%
16384 =

G120

[SW 1.9 and later]

[SW 2.25 and later]

Fixed setpoints
K0401

K0405

K0409

K0413
K0414

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-7

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Connector

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

K0415

Fixed value 15 (P415)

100%
16384 =

G120

Fixed value 16 (P416)

100%
16384 =

G120

K0416

Start pulse for the speed controller

K0451

Fixed setting value 1 for the n controller I component

K0452

Setting value 1 for the n controller I component, weighted

K0453

Fixed setting value 2 for the n controller I component

K0454

Setting value for the n controller I component

[SW 1.7 and later]

100% of P100
16384 =
16384 100% of P100

=
100% of P100
16384 =
100% of P100
16384 =

4-step master switch

K0510

G150
G150
G150
[SW 1.7 and later]

Setpoint of the 4-step master switch

100%
16384 =

Connectors for SIMOREG DC-MASTER Converter Commutation Protector (SIMOREG CCP)

K0574 -

G150

G125
[SW 2.1 and later]

See Operating Instructions SIMOREG CCP

K0577
General connectors
K0800

Operating status (code number) with one decimal place

K0801

Latest fault and alarm message

G189

Low byte: Latest alarm message

If several alarms are active simultaneously, the alarm with the
lowest number if displayed here.
Value "0" means that no alarm is active.
High byte: Latest fault message
Value "0" means that no fault is active.
K0810

Limitation bits
The meaning of these bits is described in Section 11, Parameter List, under
parameter r040.

K0900

Optimization run, setpoint 0

K0901

Optimization run, setpoint 1

K0902

Optimization run, setpoint 2

K0903

Optimization run, setpoint 3

K0904

Optimization run, setpoint 4

Connectors for raw data of pulse encoder evaluation

K0910

Measuring time for speed evaluation of pulse encoder

G145

1 corresponds to 41.6666 ns if K0912 = xxxx xx0x (divisor 1:1)

1 corresponds to 83.3333 ns if K0912 = xxxx x01x (divisor 1:2)
1 corresponds to 166.666 ns if K0912 = xxxx x11x (divisor 1:4)
This value is always slightly higher than the measuring time set in P147.
K0911

Number of pulses during measuring time set in K0910

G145

The speed of the pulse encoder can be calculated from connectors K0910,
K0911 and K0912 by the following equation:

nact [ rev / s ] =

K 0911 24 000 000

Pulse no. of encoder Meas. time

Pulse number of encoder = 1*P141,

if K0912 = xx0x xxxx (1x evaluation)
Pulse number of encoder = 2*P141,
if K0912 = x01x xxxx (2x evaluation)
Pulse number of encoder = 4*P141,
if K0912 = x11x xxxx (4x evaluation)
Meas. time = 1* K0910 if K0912 = xxxx xx0x (divisor 1:1)
Meas. time = 2* K0910 if K0912 = xxxx x01x (divisor 1:2)
Meas. time = 4* K0910 if K0912 = xxxx x11x (divisor 1:4)

12-8

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

Normalization

K0912

Status of speed evaluation of pulse encoder

Function
diag., Sheet
G145

xxxx xxx0 = asynchronous measurement

xxxx xxx1 = (gating-pulse-)synchronized measurement
xxxx xx0x = divisor 1:1
xxxx x01x = divisor 1:2
xxxx x11x = divisor 1:4
xxx0 0xxx = pulse encoder type1
xxx1 0xxx = pulse encoder type1a
xxx0 1xxx = pulse encoder type2
xxx1 1xxx = pulse encoder type3

(P140 = 1)
(P140 = 2)
(P140 = 3)
(P140 = 4)

xx0x xxxx = 1x evaluation

x01x xxxx = 2x evaluation
x11x xxxx = 4x evaluation
0xxx xxxx = No pulse encoder error
1xxx xxxx = Pulse encoder signal states occurred during the measurement
which may not occur on a rotating pulse encoder. They indicate a signal
short circuit or an interruption in a pulse encoder signal.
When the pulse encoder is stationary or oscillating around one position,
signal states of this type are perfectly normal and do not indicate a signal
fault.
K0960

Time interval between averaged line synchronization time reference point

and "unfiltered" zero crossing of scanned and software-filtered line voltage in
1.334 s (when P152 = 1 to 20)

K0970

Positive line zero crossing of phase U-V (as T1 instant)

K0971

Negative line zero crossing of phase W-U (as T1 instant)

K0972

Positive line zero crossing of phase V-W (as T1 instant)

K0973

Negative line zero crossing of phase U-V (as T1 instant)

K0974

Positive line zero crossing of phase W-U (as T1 instant)

K0975

Negative line zero crossing of phase V-W (as T1 instant)

K0976

Positive line zero crossing, field supply

K0977

Negative line zero crossing, field supply

K0980

Cycle time of the asynchronous part of the armature firing interrupt (at the
C167 processor) and, at the same time, the cycle time of the fastest time slot
(time slot 1) at the C163/C165 processor
[as of SW2.22]

K0981

Filtered C163/C165 total processor utilization K9990, which is also used to

control the processor utilization through variation of the cycle time of the
asynchronous part of the armature firing interrupt [as of SW2.22]

K0982

Filtered C167 total processor utilization K0990, which is also used to control
the processor utilization through variation of the cycle time of the
asynchronous part of the armature firing interrupt
[as of SW2.22]

K0984

Last line zero crossing used (as T1 instant) (field)

K0985

Field firing instant (as T1 instant)

K0986

Last line zero crossing used (as T1 instant) (armature)

K0987

Armature firing instant (as T1 instant)

K0988

Firing pulse cycle time (time difference between current and previous
armature firing instant) in T1 increments of 1.334 s each

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

1.334 s
1=

12-9

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

K0989

Information about torque direction and firing angle

Nibble 0 ..

Nibble 1 ..

Nibble 2 ..

Nibble 3 ..

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

Torque direction
0 = M0 (--)
1 = MI
2 = MII
9 = The master waits in M0 until all slaves have reached the
RUN state
Code number for firing angle
1 = Firing angle requested by current controller+precontrol
implemented
2 = Firing angle requested by current controller+precontrol
was > P151. It has been implemented or limited to 165
3 = Alpha-W pulse at 165
4 = Alpha-W pulse at P151 angle setting
5 = Firing angle requested by current controller+precontrol
could not be implemented due to strong pulse compression
6 = Slave connected in parallel could not adapt its computing
cycle to the firing angle of the paralleling master
7 = No firing angle received from paralleling master
8 = The cycle time received from the paralleling master is too
long
9 = The firing angle of the paralleling master has been
implemented
Code number for requested torque direction
0: Not RUN ( o1.0)
1: Torque direction acc. to current setpoint K119
(==> M0, MI, MII)
2: Wait for enable from parallel drive [acc. to P165] (==> M0)
3: Firing angle of > 165 degrees requested (==> M0)
4: Additional wait time in auto-reversing stage (==> M0)
5: Output 165-degree pulse without second pulse in the old
torque direction (==> MI, MII)
6: Output Alpha-W pulse (as set in P151) without second
pulse in the old torque direction (==> MI, MII)
7: Torque direction request during short-circuit test of thyristor
check function (==> MI)
8: Torque direction request during open circuit test of thyristor
check function (==> M0, MI, MII)
9: The selected thyristor pair is disabled during thyristor check
(==> M0)
A: No meaning
B: Torque direction of paralleling is being implemented
(==> M0, MI, MII)
C: Simulation operation (==> MI, MII)
[SW 1.8 and later]
D: The command Fire all thyristors simultaneously is being
executed
(see also under P0176)
[SW 1.8 and later]
E: Output 165-degree pulse with second pulse in the old
torque direction (==> MI, MII) (see also P0179)
[SW 1.9 and later]
F: Output Alpha-W pulse (as set in P151) with second pulse in
the old torque direction (==> MI, MII)
(see also P0179)
[SW 1.9 and later]
Code number for zero current signal
[SW 1.9 and later]
0: The "I=0" signal is not evaluated because no change in
torque direction is required
1: I <> 0
2: I = 0 for less than 0.1 msec
3: I = 0 for more than 0.1 msec
4: I = 0 for more than 0.6 msec
5: Ia-act (K116) is < 1 % for more than 6 current peaks

K0990

Current total processor capacity utilization (C167)

K0991

Projected total processor capacity utilization (C167) for

line frequency = 65 Hz

K0992

Total processor capacity (C167) currently utilized by background routines

12-10

05.2007

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

K0993

Total processor capacity (C167) currently utilized by routines synchronized

with field firing pulses

K0994

Total processor capacity (C167) currently utilized by routines synchronized

with armature firing pulses

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

1
1=
11

G170

Serial interface 1 (USS1 on G-SST1)

K2001

USS1 receive data, word 1

K2002

USS1 receive data, word 2

K2003

USS1 receive data, word 3

K2004

USS1 receive data, word 4

K2005

USS1 receive data, word 5

K2006

USS1 receive data, word 6

K2007

USS1 receive data, word 7

K2008

USS1 receive data, word 8

K2009

USS1 receive data, word 9

K2010

USS1 receive data, word 10

K2011

USS1 receive data, word 11

K2012

USS1 receive data, word 12

K2013

USS1 receive data, word 13

K2014

USS1 receive data, word 14

K2015

USS1 receive data, word 15

K2016

USS1 receive data, word 16

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

G170

1
1=
11

Z110

G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G170
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169

Process data exchange with 1 CB/TB

K3001
K3002

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2

K3003

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3

K3004

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4

st
st

K3005

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5

K3006

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6

K3007

st
st

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7

K3008

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8

K3009

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9

K3010

st
st

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 10

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Z110
Z110
Z110
Z110
Z110
Z110
Z110
Z110
Z110

12-11

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Connector

Description

K3011

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 11

K3012

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 12

st
st
st

K3013

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 13

K3014

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 14

K3015

st
st

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 15

K3016

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 16

K3020

Output of binector/connector converter for 1 CB/TB

[SW 2.0 and later]

KK3031

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1 and 2

KK3032

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2 and 3

KK3033

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3 and 4

KK3034

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4 and 5

KK3035

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5 and 6

KK3036

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6 and 7

KK3037

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7 and 8

KK3038

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8 and 9

KK3039

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9 and 10

KK3040

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 10 and 11

KK3041

[SW 1.9 and later]

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 11 and 12

KK3042

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 12 and 13

KK3043

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 13 and 14

KK3044

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 14 and 15

KK3045

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 15 and 16

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

1
1=
11

Z110

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Z110

1
1=
11

Z124

Z110
Z110
Z110
Z110
Z110

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Z124

1
1=
11

K4203

SCI, slave 2, analog input 3

[SW 1.9 and later]

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Expansion boards
K5101

1st analog input of 1st plugged EB1

K5102

2nd analog input of 1st plugged EB1

K5103

3rd analog input of 1st plugged EB1

K5104

1st analog output of 1st plugged EB1

K5105

2nd analog output of 1st plugged EB1

K5106

Binary inputs and outputs of 1st plugged EB1

K5111

Analog input of 1st plugged EB2

K5112

Analog output of 1st plugged EB2

K5113

Binary inputs and outputs of 1st plugged EB2

K5201

1st analog input of 2nd plugged EB1

K5202

2nd analog input of 2nd plugged EB1

K5203

3rd analog input of 2nd plugged EB1

K5204

1st analog output of 2nd plugged EB1

K5205

2nd analog output of 2nd plugged EB1

K5206

Binary inputs and outputs of 2nd plugged EB1

K5211

Analog input of 2nd plugged EB2

K5212

Analog output of 2nd plugged EB2

K5213

Binary inputs and outputs of 2nd plugged EB2

12-12

Z150
Z150
Z151
Z151
Z151
[SW 1.5 and later]

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

=
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =

1=1
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =

1=1
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =

1=1
100%
16384 =
100%
16384 =
1
1=

Z112
Z112
Z112
Z113
Z113
Z114
Z118
Z118
Z118
Z115
Z115
Z115
Z116
Z116
Z117
Z119
Z119
Z119

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
Connector

Connectors and binectors

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

1
1=
11

G171, G173

Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2)

K6001

USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1

K6002

USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2

K6003

USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 3

K6004

USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 4

K6005

USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 5

K6006

USS2 receive data, word 6

K6007

USS2 receive data, word 7

K6008

USS2 receive data, word 8

K6009

USS2 receive data, word 9

K6010

USS2 receive data, word 10

K6011

USS2 receive data, word 11

K6012

USS2 receive data, word 12

K6013

USS2 receive data, word 13

K6014

USS2 receive data, word 14

K6015

USS2 receive data, word 15

K6016

USS2 receive data, word 16

K6020

Output of binector/connector converter for G-SST2

[SW 1.4 and later]

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

G171, G173

1
1=
11

G195

G171, G173
G171, G173
G171, G173
G171
G171
G171
G171
G171
G171
G171
G171
G171
G171
G171
G171, G173

Paralleling interface
K6021

Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2

K6022

Word 2 from master / Word 2 from slave with address 2

K6023

Word 3 from master / Word 3 from slave with address 2

K6024

Word 4 from master / Word 4 from slave with address 2

K6025

Word 5 from master / Word 5 from slave with address 2

K6031

Word 1 from slave with address 3

K6032

Word 2 from slave with address 3

K6033

Word 3 from slave with address 3

K6034

Word 4 from slave with address 3

K6035

Word 5 from slave with address 3

K6041

Word 1 from slave with address 4

K6042

Word 2 from slave with address 4

K6043

Word 3 from slave with address 4

K6044

Word 4 from slave with address 4

K6045

Word 5 from slave with address 4

K6051

Word 1 from slave with address 5

K6052

Word 2 from slave with address 5

K6053

Word 3 from slave with address 5

K6054

Word 4 from slave with address 5

K6055

Word 5 from slave with address 5

K6061

Word 1 from slave with address 6

K6062

Word 2 from slave with address 6

K6063

Word 3 from slave with address 6

K6064

Word 4 from slave with address 6

K6065

Word 5 from slave with address 6

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

G195

1
1=
11

G169

G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195
G195

Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2)

KK6081

USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 1 and 2

[SW 2.0 and later]

KK6082

USS2 / Peer2 receive data, word 2 and 3

[SW 2.0 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

G169

12-13

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Connector

[SW 2.0 and later]

KK6095

USS2 receive data, word 15 and 16

[SW 2.0 and later]

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

1
1=
11

G169

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Process data exchange with SIMOLINK

G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
[SW 1.5 and later]

1
1=
11

K7001

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 1

K7002

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 2

K7003

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 3

K7004

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 4

K7005

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 5

K7006

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 6

K7007

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 7

K7008

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 8

K7009

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 9

K7010

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 10

K7011

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 11

K7012

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 12

K7013

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 13

K7014

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 14

K7015

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 15

K7016

Receive data from SIMOLINK, word 16

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 2

K7103

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 3

K7104

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 4

K7105

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 5

K7106

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 6

K7107

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 7

K7108

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 8

KK7131

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 1 and 2 [SW 2.0 and later]

KK7132

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 2 and 3 [SW 2.0 and later]

KK7133

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 3 and 4 [SW 2.0 and later]

12-14

G169

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z122
Z124
Z124
Z124

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

Normalization

KK7134

1
Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 4 and 5 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 =
Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 5 and 6 [SW 2.0 and later] 1 1

Z124

KK7135
KK7136

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 6 and 7 [SW 2.0 and later]

Z124

KK7137

Receive data from SIMOLINK, special data word 7 and 8 [SW 2.0 and later]
nd

Process data exchange with 2

K8001
K8002

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1

Receive data from 2 CB, word 13

K8014

Receive data from 2 CB, word 14

K8015

Receive data from 2 CB, word 15

nd
nd

K8016

Receive data from 2 CB, word 16

K8020

Output of binector/connector converter for 2 CB

[SW 1.9 and later]

[SW 2.0 and later]

KK8031

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1 and 2

KK8032

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2 and 3

KK8033

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3 and 4

KK8034

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4 and 5

KK8035

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5 and 6

KK8036

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6 and 7

KK8037

=
1
1=
1
1=

Z124

1
1=
11

Z111

Z124

CB
nd

K8003

K8013

Function
diag., Sheet

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7 and 8

KK8038

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8 and 9

Receive data from 2 CB, word 15 and 16

[SW 2.0 and later]

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Z111

1
1=
11

Z124

Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111
Z111

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Z124

1
1=
11

G172, G174

Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124
Z124

Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3)

K9001

USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1

K9002

USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 2

K9003

USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3

K9004

USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 4

K9005

USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 5

K9006

USS3 receive data, word 6

K9007

USS3 receive data, word 7

K9008

USS3 receive data, word 8

K9009

USS3 receive data, word 9

K9010

USS3 receive data, word 10

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

G172, G174
G172, G174
G172, G174
G172, G174
G172
G172
G172
G172
G172

12-15

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Connector

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

K9011

USS3 receive data, word 11

USS3 receive data, word 12

1
1=
11

G172

K9012
K9013

USS3 receive data, word 13

K9014

USS3 receive data, word 14

K9015

USS3 receive data, word 15

USS3 receive data, word 15 and 16

[SW 2.0 and later]

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

G172

B121

G172
G172
G172
G172
G172, G174
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169
G169

Technology software S00: Binector/connector converters

K9113

Output of binector/connector converter 1

K9114

Output of binector/connector converter 2

1
FB 13 1 =
FB 14 1 1

K9115

Output of binector/connector converter 3

1
FB 15 1 =

B121

B125
B125

B121

Technology software S00: Adders / Subtracters

K9120

Output of adder/subtracter 1

K9121

Output of adder/subtracter 2

100%
FB 20 16384 =
FB 21 16384 100%

K9122

Output of adder/subtracter 3

FB 22 16384

K9123

Output of adder/subtracter 4

FB 23 16384

K9124

Output of adder/subtracter 5

FB 24 16384

K9125

Output of adder/subtracter 6

FB 25 16384

K9126

Output of adder/subtracter 7

FB 26 16384

K9127

Output of adder/subtracter 8

FB 27 16384

K9128

Output of adder/subtracter 9

FB 28 16384

K9129

Output of adder/subtracter 10

FB 29 16384

K9130

Output of adder/subtracter 11

FB 30 16384

K9131

Output of adder/subtracter 12

FB 31 16384

K9132

Output of adder/subtracter 13

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 32 16384

K9133

Output of adder/subtracter 14

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 33 16384

K9134

Output of adder/subtracter 15

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 34 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B125

100%
FB 35 16384 =
FB 36 16384 100%

B125

100%
FB 37 16384 =
FB 38 16384 100%

B125

B125
B125
B125
B125
B125
B125
B125
B125
B125
B125
B125
B125

Technology software S00: Sign inverters, switchable sign inverters

K9135

Output of sign inverter 1

K9136

Output of sign inverter 2

K9137

Output of sign inverter 3

K9138

Output of sign inverter 4

12-16

=
=

B125
B125

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

K9140

Output of switchable sign inverter 1

K9141

Output of switchable sign inverter 2

Normalization

100%
FB 40 16384 =
FB 41 16384 100%

Function
diag., Sheet
B125
B125

Technology software S00: Dividers, multipliers, high-resolution multipliers/dividers

100%
FB 42 16384 =
FB 43 16384 100%

B131

FB 44 16384

B131

K9142

Output of divider 4

[SW 1.8 and later]

K9143

Output of divider 5

[SW 1.8 and later]

K9144

Output of divider 6

[SW 1.8 and later]

K9145

Output of divider 1

FB 45 16384

K9146

Output of divider 2

FB 46 16384

K9147

Output of divider 3

FB 47 16384

K9150

Output of multiplier 1

FB 50 16384

K9151

Output of multiplier 2

FB 51 16384

K9152

Output of multiplier 3

FB 52 16384

K9153

Output of multiplier 4

FB 53 16384

K9155

Output of high-resolution multiplier/divider 1

FB 55 16384

K9156

Output of high-resolution multiplier/divider 2

FB 56 16384

K9157

Output of high-resolution multiplier/divider 3

FB 57 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B131

100%
FB 60 16384 =
FB 61 16384 100%

B135

100%
FB 62 16384 =
FB 63 16384 100%

B135

100%
FB 65 16384 =
FB 65 16384 100%

B135
B135

B131
B131
B131
B130
B130
B130
B130
B131
B131
B131

Technology software S00: Absolute-value generator with filter

K9160

Output of absolute-value generator with filter 1

K9161

Output of absolute-value generator with filter 2

K9162

Output of absolute-value generator with filter 3

K9163

Output of absolute-value generator with filter 4

=
=

B135
B135

Technology software S00: Limiters

K9165

Limiter 1: Fixed limiting value

K9166

Limiter 1: Positive limiting value * (-1)

K9167

Limiter 1: Output

FB 213 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B135

100%
FB 70 16384 =
FB 70 16384 100%

B136
B136
B136

B135
B135
B135
B135
B135
B135
B134
B134
B134
B134
B134
B134

Technology software S00: Limit-value monitor with filter

K9180

Limit-value monitor with filter 1: Filtered input quantity

K9181

Limit-value monitor with filter 1: Fixed operating point

K9182

Limit-value monitor with filter 2: Filtered input quantity

K9183

Limit-value monitor with filter 2: Fixed operating point

100%
FB 71 16384 =
FB 71 16384 100%

K9184

Limit-value monitor with filter 3: Filtered input quantity

FB 72 16384

K9185

Limit-value monitor with filter 3: Fixed operating point

FB 72 16384

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

=
= 100%
= 100%

B136
B136
B136

12-17

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

05.2007
Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

Technology software S00: Limit-value monitor without filter

100%
FB 73 16384 =
FB 74 16384 100%

B137
B137

Limit-value monitor without filter 4: Fixed operating point

100%
FB 75 16384 =
FB 76 16384 100%

K9190

Limit-value monitor without filter 5: Fixed operating point

FB 77 16384

B138

K9191

Limit-value monitor without filter 6: Fixed operating point

FB 78 16384

K9192

Limit-value monitor without filter 7: Fixed operating point

FB 79 16384

K9186

Limit-value monitor without filter 1: Fixed operating point

K9187

Limit-value monitor without filter 2: Fixed operating point

K9188

Limit-value monitor without filter 3: Fixed operating point

K9189

B137

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B137

100%
FB 80 16384 =
FB 81 16384 100%

B140

100%
FB 82 16384 =
FB 83 16384 100%

B145

100%
FB 84 16384 =
FB 85 16384 100%

K9211

Output connector changeover switch 2

100%
FB 90 16384 =
FB 91 16384 100%

K9212

Output connector changeover switch 3

FB 92 16384

K9213

Output connector changeover switch 4

FB 93 16384

K9214

Output connector changeover switch 5

FB 94 16384

K9215

Output connector changeover switch 6

FB 95 16384

K9216

Output connector changeover switch 7

FB 96 16384

K9217

Output connector changeover switch 8

FB 97 16384

K9218

Output connector changeover switch 9

FB 98 16384

K9219

Output connector changeover switch 10

FB 99 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B150

B155
B155

B150
B150
B150
B150
B150
B150
B150

Technology software S00: Integrators

K9220

Output of integrator 1

K9221

Output of integrator 2

100%
FB 100 16384 =
FB 101 16384 100%

K9222

Output of integrator 3

FB 102 16384

=
= 100%

B155

100%
FB 103 16384 =
FB 103 16384 100%

B155
B155

Technology software S00: DT1 elements

K9223

Output of DT1 element 1

K9224

Output of DT1 element 1, inverted

K9225

Output of DT1 element 2

FB 104 16384

K9226

Output of DT1 element 2, inverted

FB 104 16384

K9227

Output of DT1 element 3

FB 105 16384

K9228

Output of DT1 element 3, inverted

FB 105 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B155

B160
B160

B155
B155
B155

Technology software S00: Characteristic blocks

K9229

Output of characteristic block 1

K9230

Output of characteristic block 2

100%
FB 106 16384 =
FB 107 16384 100%

K9231

Output of characteristic block 3

FB 108 16384

12-18

=
= 100%

B160

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
Connector

Connectors and binectors

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

Technology software S00: Dead zones

B161

Output of dead zone 2

100%
FB 109 16384 =
FB 110 16384 100%

Output of dead zone 3

100%
FB 111 16384 =

B161

100%
FB 112 16384 =

B161

100%
FB 113 16384 =

B165

100%
FB 114 16384 =
FB 114 16384 100%

B170
B170

K9232

Output of dead zone 1

K9233
K9234

B161

Technology software S00: Setpoint branching

K9235

Setpoint branching output

Technology software S00: Simple ramp-function generator

K9236

Simple ramp-function generator output

Technology software S00: Technology controller

K9240

Technology controller, signed actual value

K9241

Technology controller, absolute actual value

K9242

D component

FB 114 16384

K9243

Technology controller, setpoint

FB 114 16384

K9254

Technology controller output after multiplication with weighting factor FB 114 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B170

100%
FB 115 16384 =
FB 115 16384 100%

B190

100%
16384 =

B191

B134

B170
B170
B170
B170
B170
B170
B170
B170
B170
B170
B170
B170

Technology software S00: Speed/velocity calculator, velocity/speed calculator

K9256

Speed/velocity calculator: Actual velocity

K9257

Velocity/speed calculator: Speed setpoint

Technology software S00: Variable moment of inertia

K9258

[SW 1.8 and later]

Variable moment of inertia (output)

FB 116

Technology software S00: Limiters

K9260

Limiter 6: Fixed limiting value

[SW 2.0 and later]

K9261

Limiter 6: Positive limiting value * (-1)

[SW 2.0 and later]

100%
FB 214 16384 =
FB 214 16384 100%

K9262

Limiter 6: Output

[SW 2.0 and later]

100%
FB 214 16384 =

B134

100%
FB 196 16384 =
FB 197 16384 100%

B150
B150
B150

B134

Technology software S00: Connector changeover switches

K9265

Output connector changeover switch 11

[SW 2.0 and later]

K9266

Output connector changeover switch 12

[SW 2.0 and later]

K9267

Output connector changeover switch 13

[SW 2.0 and later]

K9268

Output connector changeover switch 14

[SW 2.0 and later]

100%
FB 198 16384 =
FB 199 16384 100%

K9269

Output connector changeover switch 15

[SW 2.0 and later]

100%
FB 229 16384 =

Technology software S00: PI controller 1

K9300

Input quantity filtered

K9301

P component

=
=

B150
B150

[SW 1.8 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

FB260

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

B180
B180

12-19

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Connector

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

K9302

I component

B180

K9303

Output PI controller before limitation

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

K9304

Output PI controller after limitation

16384

B180

K9305

Positive limit for the output of the PI controller

16384

K9306

Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9305) -1

16384

K9307

Negative limit for the output of the PI controller

16384

Technology software S00: PI controller 2

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

Input quantity filtered

K9311

P component

K9312

I component

K9321

P component

K9322

I component

K9331

P component

K9332

I component

K9341

P component

K9342

I component

B182
B182

B182
B182
B182
B182
B182
B182

B183
B183

B183
B183
B183
B183
B183
B183
FB264

B184
B184

B184
B184
B184
B184
B184
B184

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB265

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

B185
B185

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

K9352

I component

B185

K9353

Output PI controller before limitation

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

K9354

Output PI controller after limitation

16384

B185

K9355

Positive limit for the output of the PI controller

16384

K9356

Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9355) -1

16384

K9357

Negative limit for the output of the PI controller

16384

Technology software S00: PI controller 7

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B185
B185
FB266

K9360

Input quantity filtered

K9361

P component

K9362

I component

B186
B186
B186
B186
B186
B186

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB267

K9370

Input quantity filtered

K9371

P component

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

K9372

I component

16384

K9373

Output PI controller before limitation

16384

K9374

Output PI controller after limitation

16384

K9375

Positive limit for the output of the PI controller

16384

K9376

Positive limit for the output of the PI controller (K9375) -1

16384

K9377

Negative limit for the output of the PI controller

16384

Technology software S00: PI controller 9

B185

[SW 1.8 and later]

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

Technology software S00: PI controller 8

B185

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B187
B187

B187
B187
B187
B187
B187
B187

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB268

K9380

Input quantity filtered

K9381

P component

100%
16384 =
16384 100%

K9382

I component

16384

K9383

Output PI controller before limitation

16384

K9384

B189

100%
FB 270 16384 =
FB 271 16384 100%

B156

B189
B189
B189
B189
B189

Technology software S00: Derivative/delay elements

K9400

Derivative/delay element 1 output

[SW 1.8 and later]

K9401

Derivative/delay element 2 output

[SW 1.8 and later]

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

B156

12-21

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Connector

Description

Normalization

K9402

Derivative/delay element 3 output

[SW 1.8 and later]

K9403

Derivative/delay element 4 output

K9404

Function
diag., Sheet
B156

[SW 1.8 and later]

100%
FB 272 16384 =
FB 273 16384 100%

Derivative/delay element 5 output

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 274 16384

B157

K9405

Derivative/delay element 6 output

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 275 16384

K9406

Derivative/delay element 7 output

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 276 16384

K9407

Derivative/delay element 8 output

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 277 16384

K9408

Derivative/delay element 9 output

K9415

Output characteristic block 9

B160

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 285 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B130
B130

B160
B160
B160

Technology software S00: Multiplier

K9430

Output multiplier 5

FB 297 16384

[SW 1.9 and later]

1
FB 89 1 =
FB 89 1 1

B196
B196
B196

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B130
B130
B130
B130
B130
B130

S00 technology software: Software counter

K9441

Minimum value for software counter

K9442

Maximum value for software counter

[SW 1.9 and later]

K9443

Setting value for software counter

[SW 1.9 and later]

K9444

Start value for software counter

[SW 1.9 and later]

1
FB 89 1 =
FB 89 1 1

K9445

Software counter output

[SW 1.9 and later]

FB 89

B195
B195

B196

=
1
1=

B196

Technology software S00: Multiplexer

K9450

Output multiplexer 1

[SW 1.8 and later]

K9451

Output multiplexer 2

[SW 1.8 and later]

100%
FB 86 16384 =
FB 87 16384 100%

K9452

Output multiplexer 3

B195

[SW 1.8 and later]

FB 88 16384

=
= 100%

B139
B139

Technology software S00: Averagers

K9455

Output averager 1

FB 19 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%

B139

B140
B140

B139

Technology software S00: Minimum selections, Maximum selections

K9460

Output Maximum selection 2

[SW 1.8 and later]

12-22

=
= 100%
= 100%

B140
B140

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

Normalization

K9464

Output Minimum selection 3

[SW 1.8 and later]

K9465

Output Minimum selection 4

[SW 1.8 and later]

100%
FB 178 16384 =
FB 179 16384 100%

Technology software S00: position fixed value, position actual value, positional deviation
Position fixed value1
[SW 2.0 and later]
FB 54 1 1
KK9471

=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=
1
1=

Function
diag., Sheet
B140
B140

FB 54

[SW 2.0 and later]

100%
FB 58 16384 =

B153

100%
FB 48 16384*65536 =

FB 48 16384
100%/65536

B151

100%
FB 49 16384*65536 =

FB 49 16384 = 100%/65536

B151

100%
FB 298 16384*65536 =
FB 299 16384*65536 100%

B151

B152
B152
B152
B152
B152
B152
B152

Technology software S00: root extractor

KK9485

Root extractor output

S00 technology software: Adders / subtracters for double-word connectors

KK9490
K9491

[SW 1.9 and later]

Output of 1 adder / subtracter

Output of 1 adder / subtracter (limited)
nd

[SW 1.9 and later]

KK9492

Output of 2 adder / subtracter

K9493

Output of 2 adder / subtracter (limited)

B151
B151

S00 technology software: Connector type converters

KK9498
KK9499

Output of 1 connector type converter

Output of 2

connector type converter

[SW 1.9 and later]

Technology software S00: Fixed values

[SW 1.8 and later]

100%
[SW 1.8 and later] 16384 =
100%
[SW 1.8 and later] 16384 =
[SW 1.8 and later] 16384 100%

B110

100%
[SW 1.8 and later] 16384 =
[SW 1.8 and later] 16384 100%

B110
B110
B110

K9501

Fixed value 1 (U099.01)

K9502

Fixed value 2 (U099.02)

K9503

Fixed value 3 (U099.03)

K9504

Fixed value 4 (U099.04)

K9505

Fixed value 5 (U099.05)

K9506

[SW 1.8 and later] 16384

K9523

Fixed value 23 (U099.23)

[SW 1.8 and later] 16384

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

B151

=
=

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110

12-23

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

K9524

Fixed value 24 (U099.24)

K9525

05.2007
Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet
B110

12-24

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

K9573

Fixed value 73 (U099.73)

K9574

Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet
B110

K9600

Fixed value 100 (U099.100)

[SW 1.8 and later] 16384

=
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%
= 100%

B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110
B110

General connectors
K9801

Alarm word 1 (= parameter r953)

K9802

Alarm word 2 (= parameter r954)

K9803

Alarm word 3 (= parameter r955)

K9804

Alarm word 4 (= parameter r956)

K9805

Alarm word 5 (= parameter r957)

K9806

Alarm word 6 (= parameter r958)

K9807

Alarm word 7 (= parameter r959)

K9808

G189

K9990

Current total processor capacity utilization (C163/C165) (= parameter

n009.01)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-25

Connectors and binectors

Connector

Description

K9991

Projected total processor capacity utilization (C163/C165) for line frequency

= 65Hz (= parameter n009.02)

K9992

Current total processor capacity (C163/C165) utilized by background

routines (= parameter n009.03)

K9993

Current total processor capacity (C163/C165) utilized by routines in

foreground cycle 4 (= parameter n009.04)

K9994

Current total processor capacity (C163/C165) utilized by routines in

foreground cycle 2 (= parameter n009.05)

K9995

Current total processor capacity (C163/C165) utilized by routines in

foreground cycle 1 (= parameter n009.06)

12-26

05.2007
Normalization

Function
diag., Sheet

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

12.2

Connectors and binectors

Binector list
The states of binectors can be displayed via parameters r045 and P046.

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B0000

Fixed value 0

G120

B0001

Fixed value 1

G120

Fixed values

G111

B0032

No meaning

B0033

No meaning

B0034

No meaning

B0035

No meaning

G113

Pulse encoder evaluation

B0052

Fault in digital speed sensing circuit

B0053

Underflow of actual position value

G145
[SW 1.9 and later]

G145

This binector changes to 1 when connector KK0046 (actual position value extended in software to a 32-bit
31
31
value) counts from value 8000 0000H (= 2 ) to value 7FFF FFFFH (= +2 1).
Binector B0053 does not change back to 0 until connector KK0046 assumes a value other than 7FFF
31
FFFFH (= +2 1) again.
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-27

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B0054

Overrflow of actual position value

[SW 1.9 and later]

G145

This binector changes to 1 when connector KK0046 (actual position value extended in software to a 32-bit
31
31
value) counts from value 7FFF FFFFH (= +2 1) to value 8000 0000H (= 2 ).
Binector B0054 does not change back to 0 until connector KK0046 assumes a value other than 8000 0000H
31
(= 2 ) again.
Evaluation of the pulse encoder board SBP
B0055

Position acquisition of SBP, underflow

[SW 2.0 and later]

Z120

B0056

Position acquisition of SBP, overflow

[SW 2.0 and later]

Z120

[SW 2.0 and later]

G162

Monitoring of the armature currents

B0057

1 = Commutation failure or overcurrent has occurred

B0128

Stat.word 1, bit 14: 0=negative speed setpoint, 1=positive speed setpoint

G182

B0129

Stat.word 1, bit 14 inverted

12-28

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

G183

B0160

0=AUS1 or AUS3 active, 1=no AUS1 and no AUS3 is pending

G180

B0161

B0160 inverted

G117

B0172

Output of "Setpoint-actual value deviation 2" signal

[SW 1.9 and later]

G187

B0173

B0172 inverted

[SW 1.9 and later]

G187

Messages
G180

Acknowledgement of fault codes

B0179

Acknowledgement of control word or P key on PMU (pulse)

G180

Motor interface
G186

B0180

1 = Monitoring brush length (Terminal 211=0) has responded, condition for A025 or F025 fulfilled

B0181

1 = Monitoring bearing state (terminal 212=1) has responded, condition for A026 or F026 fulfilled

G186

B0182

1 = Monitoring motor fan (terminal 213=0) has responded, condition for A027 or F027 fulfilled

G186

B0183

1 = Monitoring motor temperature (terminal 213=0) has responded, condition for A028 or F028 fulfilled

G186

Temperature sensor inputs

[SW 1.6 and later]

B0184

1=Alarm motor temperature 1

G185

B0185

1=Alarm motor temperature 2

G185

Alarms

[SW 1.6 and later]

B0186

1=Alarm A037 (I2t motor) is pending

B0187

1=Alarm A039 (I2t power section) is pending

B0188

1=Alarm A067 (heat sink temperature) is pending

B0189

1=Alarm A067 (device fan) is pending

Torque limitation, current limitation, current controller, armature gating unit

B0190

0 = pulsating current, 1 = continuous current

[SW 2.0 and later]

G162

B0192

Speed limitation controller: Positive speed limit reached

[SW 1.8 and later]

G160

B0193

Speed limitation controller: Negative speed limit reached

[SW 1.8 and later]

G160

B0194

Current limitation: Positive current limit reached

[SW 1.8 and later]

G161

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-29

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B0195

Current limitation: Negative current limit reached

[SW 1.8 and later]

G161

B0196

G limit reached

[SW 1.8 and later]

G163

B0197

W limit reached

[SW 1.8 and later]

G163

B0198

Any positive limit (speed, torque, armature, G) reached

[SW 2.0 and later]

Speed controller
B0205

Speed controller enabling by sequencing control

G152

[SW 1.6 and later]

G136

Limit-value monitor for field current

B0215

Limit-value signal If < If min (see P394, P395)

G188

B0216

Limit-value signal If < If x (see P398, P399)

G188

Armature gating unit

B0220

Enabled torque direction for parallel drive

B0221

1 = Torque direction I active

G163

B0222

1 = Torque direction II active

[SW 2.1 and later]

G163

B0225

1 = active paralleling master

[SW 2.1 and later]

G195

B0230

1 = No torque direction requested

[SW 2.1 and later]

G163

B0231

1 = Torque direction I requested

[SW 2.1 and later]

G163

B0232

1 = Torque direction II requested

[SW 2.1 and later]

G163

[SW 2.1 and later]

G163

Motorized potentiometer
B0240

Motorized potentiometer output = 0 (y = 0)

G126

B0241

Ramp-up/ramp-down finished (y = x)

G126

Brake control
B0250

Brake control (1=close brake, 0=release brake)

G140

B0251

1=auxiliaries ON, 0=auxiliaries OFF

s.Chap. 9.10

B0252

1=device fan on, 0=device fan off

[SW 1.5 and later]

B0255

B0250 inverted

[SW 1.4 and later]

B0256

B0251 inverted

[SW 1.5 and later]

G140

Field reversal
B0260

1=Close field contactor 1 (control command for one contactor for connection of positive field direction)

G200

B0261

1=Close field contactor 2 (control command for one contactor for connection of negative field direction)

G200

12-30

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
Binector

Connectors and binectors

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

G120

USS1 receive data, word 3, bit 2

G170

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-31

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

G170

12-32

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

G170

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-33

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

G170

B2915

USS1 receive data, word 9, bit 15

G170

Process data exchange with 1 CB/TB

B3030

Fault delay timeout for 1 CB/TB - maintained signal

Z110

B3031

Fault delay timeout for 1 CB/TB - 1s pulse

B3035

Telegram failure timeout for 1 CB/TB

Z110
[SW 1.9 and later]

Z110

Z110

B3112

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 12

B3113

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 13

B3114

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 1, bit 14

B3115

Z110

B3212

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 12

B3213

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 13

B3214

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 14

B3215

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 2, bit 15

B3300

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 0

Z110

B3301

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 1

Z110

12-34

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

B3314

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 3, bit 14

B3315

B3413

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 13

B3414

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 14

B3415

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 4, bit 15

B3513

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 13

B3514

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 14

B3515

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 5, bit 15

B3600

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 0

Z110

B3601

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 1

Z110

B3602

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 2

Z110

B3603

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 3

Z110

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-35

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

B3614

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 6, bit 14

B3615

Z110

B3712

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 12

B3713

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 13

B3714

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 7, bit 14

B3715

B3814

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 8, bit 14

B3815

Z110

12-36

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B3906

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 6

Z110

B3907

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 7

Z110

B3908

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 8

Z110

B3909

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 9

Z110

B3910

Z110

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 10

B3911

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 11

B3912

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 12

B3913

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 13

B3914

Receive data from 1 CB/TB, word 9, bit 14

B3915

[SW 1.9 and later]

Z131, Z141

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-37

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

[SW 1.9 and later]

Z141

Optional supplementary boards: 1st expansion board EB1

[SW 1.5 and later]

B5101

Analog input terminal 50 / 51: 1 = wire break (i 2 mA)

Z112

B5102

Analog input terminal 52 (use as digital input): 1 = input voltage is > 8V (log "1")

Z112

B5103

Analog input terminal 53 (use as digital input): 1 = input voltage is > 8V (log "1")

Z114

Optional supplementary boards: 1st Expansion board EB2

[SW 1.5 and later]

B5121

Analog input terminal 49 / 50: 1 = wire break (i 2 mA)

Z118

B5122

State terminal 53 (digital input) inverted

Z118

B5123

State terminal 53 (digital input)

Z118

12-38

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B5124

State terminal 54 (digital input) inverted

Z118

B5125

State terminal 54 (digital input)

Z118

Optional supplementary boards: 2

expansion board EB1

[SW 1.5 and later]

B5201

Analog input terminal 50 / 51: 1 = wire break (i 2 mA)

Z115

B5202

Analog input terminal 52 (use as digital input): 1 = input voltage is > 8V (log "1")

Z115

B5203

Analog input terminal 53 (use as digital input): 1 = input voltage is > 8V (log "1")

Z117

Optional supplementary boards: 2

Expansion board EB2

[SW 1.5 and later]

B5221

Analog input terminal 49 / 50: 1 = wire break (i 2 mA)

Z119

B5222

State terminal 53 (digital input) inverted

Z119

B5223

State terminal 53 (digital input)

Z119

B5224

State terminal 54 (digital input) inverted

Z119

B5225

State terminal 54 (digital input)

Z119

Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2)

B6030

USS2 / Peer2 - Telegram monitoring timeout - maintained signal

G171, G173

B6031

USS2 / Peer2 - Telegram monitoring timeout - 1s pulse

G171, G173

Paralleling interface
B6040

Telegram monitoring timeout - maintained signal

G195

B6041

Telegram monitoring timeout - 1s pulse

G195

G171, G173

G195

B6234

Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 14

G195

B6235

Word 1 from master / Word 1 from slave with address 2, bit 15

G195

G171, G173

12-40

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

B6334

Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 14

G195

B6335

Word 1 from slave with address 3, bit 15

G195

G195

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-41

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

G195

G195

Serial interface 2 (USS2 / Peer-to-peer 2 on G-SST2)

B6600

USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 0

G171

B6601

USS2 receive data, word 6, bit 1

G171

12-42

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

G195

G171

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-43

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

G171

Optional supplementary boards: SBP pulse encoder evaluation

[SW 1.5 and later]

B7000

Z121

B7050

1 = Alarm start-up

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

Z122

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-45

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Binector

Name, description

Z122

B7915

Receive data from the SIMOLINK board, word 9 bit 15

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 1

B8102

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 2

B8103

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 3

B8104

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 4

B8105

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 5

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-47

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B8106

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 6

B8107

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 7

Z111

B8108

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 8

B8109

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 9

B8110

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 10

B8111

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 11

B8112

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 12

B8113

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 13

B8114

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 14

B8115

Receive data from 2 CB, word 1, bit 15

B8200

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 0

B8201

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 1

B8202

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 2

B8203

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 3

B8204

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 4

B8205

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 5

B8206

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 6

B8207

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 7

B8208

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 8

B8209

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 9

B8210

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 10

B8211

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 11

B8212

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 12

B8213

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 13

B8214

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 14

B8215

Receive data from 2 CB, word 2, bit 15

B8300

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 0

B8301

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 1

B8302

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 2

B8303

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 3

B8304

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 4

B8305

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 5

B8306

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 6

B8307

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 7

B8308

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 8

Z111

B8309

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 9

B8310

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 10

B8311

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 11

B8312

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 12

B8313

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 13

B8314

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 14

B8315

Receive data from 2 CB, word 3, bit 15

B8400

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 0

B8401

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 1

B8402

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 2

B8403

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 3

B8404

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 4

B8405

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 5

B8406

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 6

B8407

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 7

12-48

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B8408

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 8

B8409

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 9

Z111

B8410

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 10

B8411

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 11

B8412

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 12

B8413

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 13

B8414

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 14

B8415

Receive data from 2 CB, word 4, bit 15

B8500

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 0

B8501

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 1

B8502

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 2

B8503

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 3

B8504

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 4

B8505

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 5

B8506

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 6

B8507

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 7

B8508

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 8

B8509

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 9

B8510

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 10

B8511

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 11

B8512

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 12

B8513

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 13

B8514

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 14

B8515

Receive data from 2 CB, word 5, bit 15

B8600

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 0

B8601

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 1

B8602

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 2

B8603

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 3

B8604

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 4

B8605

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 5

B8606

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 6

B8607

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 7

B8608

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 8

Z111

B8609

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 9

B8610

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 10

B8611

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 11

B8612

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 12

B8613

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 13

B8614

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 14

B8615

Receive data from 2 CB, word 6, bit 15

B8700

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 0

B8701

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 1

B8702

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 2

B8703

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 3

B8704

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 4

B8705

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 5

B8706

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 6

B8707

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 7

B8708

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 8

B8709

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 9

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-49

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B8710

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 10

B8711

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 11

Z111

B8712

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 12

B8713

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 13

B8714

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 14

B8715

Receive data from 2 CB, word 7, bit 15

B8800

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 0

B8801

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 1

B8802

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 2

B8803

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 3

B8804

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 4

B8805

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 5

B8806

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 6

B8807

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 7

B8808

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 8

Z111

B8809

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 9

B8810

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 10

B8811

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 11

B8812

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 12

B8813

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 13

B8814

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 14

B8815

Receive data from 2 CB, word 8, bit 15

B8900

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 0

B8901

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 1

B8902

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 2

B8903

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 3

B8904

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 4

B8905

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 5

B8906

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 6

B8907

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 7

B8908

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 8

Z111

B8909

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 9

B8910

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 10

B8911

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 11

B8912

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 12

B8913

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 13

B8914

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 14

B8915

Receive data from 2 CB, word 9, bit 15

Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3)

B9030

USS3 / Peer3 - Telegram monitoring timeout - maintained signal

G172, G174

B9031

USS3 / Peer3 - Telegram monitoring timeout - 1s pulse

G172, G174

Technology software S00: Voltage monitor for electronics power supply

B9050

Power ON (100ms pulse on connection of voltage)

B110

B9051

Power OFF (10ms pulse on disconnection of voltage)

B110

Technology software S00: Connector/binector converters

B9052

Connector/binector converter 1, bit 0

FB 10 B120

B9053

Connector/binector converter 1, bit 1

FB 10 B120

12-50

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

B9098

Connector/binector converter 3, bit 14

FB 12 B120

B9099

Connector/binector converter 3, bit 15

FB 12 B120

Serial interface 3 (USS3 / Peer-to-peer 3 on G-SST3)

B9100

USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 0

G172, G174

B9101

USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 1, bit 1

G172, G174

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-51

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

G172, G174

Technology software S00: Limiters

B9150

Limiter 1: Positive limitation has responded

FB 65 B135

B9151

Limiter 1: Negative limitation has responded

FB 65 B135

B9152

Limiter 2: Positive limitation has responded

FB 66 B135

B9153

Limiter 2: Negative limitation has responded

FB 66 B135

B9154

Limiter 3: Positive limitation has responded

FB 67 B135

B9155

Limiter 3: Negative limitation has responded

B9156

Limiter 4: Positive limitation has responded

[SW 2.0 and later] FB 212 B134

B9157

Limiter 4: Negative limitation has responded

[SW 2.0 and later] FB 212 B134

B9158

Limiter 5: Positive limitation has responded

FB 75 B137

B9178

Limit-value monitor without filter 4: |A| < B has responded

FB 76 B137

B9179

Limit-value monitor without filter 4: A < B has responded

FB 76 B137

12-52

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

B9197

Output of EXCLUSIVE OR element 3

FB 172 B206

B9198

Output of EXCLUSIVE OR element 4

FB 173 B206

G172, G174

Technology software S00: Decoders / demultiplexers, binary to 1 of 8

B9250

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q0

FB 118 B200

B9251

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q1

FB 118 B200

B9252

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q2

FB 118 B200

B9253

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q3

FB 118 B200

B9254

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q4

FB 118 B200

B9255

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q5

FB 118 B200

B9256

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q6

FB 118 B200

B9257

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: Q7

FB 118 B200

B9260

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q0

FB 118 B200

B9261

Decoder / demultiplexer 1: /Q1

FB 118 B200

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-53

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

FB 118 B200

B9270

Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q0

FB 119 B200

B9271

Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q1

FB 119 B200

B9272

Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q2

FB 119 B200

B9273

Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q3

FB 119 B200

B9274

Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q4

FB 119 B200

B9275

Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q5

FB 119 B200

B9276

Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q6

FB 119 B200

B9277

Decoder / demultiplexer 2: Q7

FB 119 B200

S00 technology software: Software counter

B9290

Output overflow software counter

[SW 1.9 and later]

FB 89 B196

B9291

Output underflow software counter

[SW 1.9 and later]

FB 89 B196

Technology software S00: Limiters

B9295

Limiter 6: Positive limitation has responded

[SW 2.0 and later] FB 214 B134

B9296

Limiter 6: Negative limitation has responded

USS3 / Peer3 receive data, word 3, bit 15

G172, G174

12-54

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007
Binector

Connectors and binectors

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

Technology software S00: AND elements with 3 inputs each

B9350

Output of AND element 1

FB 120 B205

B9351

Output of AND element 2

FB 121 B205

B9352

Output of AND element 3

FB 122 B205

B9353

Output of AND element 4

FB 123 B205

B9354

Output of AND element 5

FB 124 B205

B9355

Output of AND element 6

FB 125 B205

B9356

Output of AND element 7

FB 126 B205

B9357

Output of AND element 8

FB 127 B205

B9358

Output of AND element 9

FB 128 B205

B9359

Output of AND element 10

FB 129 B205

B9360

Output of AND element 11

FB 130 B205

B9361

Output of AND element 12

FB 131 B205

B9362

Output of AND element 13

FB 132 B205

B9363

Output of AND element 14

FB 133 B205

B9364

Output of AND element 15

FB 134 B205

B9365

Output of AND element 16

FB 135 B205

B9366

Output of AND element 17

FB 136 B205

B9367

Output of AND element 18

FB 137 B205

B9368

Output of AND element 19

FB 138 B205

B9369

Output of AND element 20

FB 139 B205

B9370

Output of AND element 21

FB 140 B205

B9371

Output of AND element 22

FB 141 B205

B9372

Output of AND element 23

FB 142 B205

B9373

Output of AND element 24

FB 143 B205

B9374

Output of AND element 25

FB 144 B205

B9375

Output of AND element 26

FB 145 B205

B9376

Output of AND element 27

FB 146 B205

B9377

Output of AND element 28

FB 147 B205

Technology software S00: OR elements with 3 inputs each

B9380

Output of OR element 1

FB 150 B206

B9381

Output of OR element 2

FB 151 B206

B9382

Output of OR element 3

FB 152 B206

B9383

Output of OR element 4

FB 153 B206

B9384

Output of OR element 5

FB 154 B206

B9385

Output of OR element 6

FB 155 B206

B9386

Output of OR element 7

FB 156 B206

B9387

Output of OR element 8

FB 157 B206

B9388

Output of OR element 9

FB 158 B206

B9389

Output of OR element 10

FB 159 B206

B9390

Output of OR element 11

FB 160 B206

B9391

Output of OR element 12

FB 161 B206

B9392

Output of OR element 13

FB 162 B206

B9393

Output of OR element 14

FB 163 B206

B9394

Output of OR element 15

FB 164 B206

B9395

Output of OR element 16

FB 165 B206

B9396

Output of OR element 17

FB 166 B206

B9397

Output of OR element 18

FB 167 B206

B9398

Output of OR element 19

FB 168 B206

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-55

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

B9399

Output of OR element 20

05.2007
Function
diag., Sheet
FB 169 B206

G172, G174

Technology software S00: Inverters

B9450

Output of inverter 1

FB 180 B207

B9451

Output of inverter 2

FB 181 B207

B9452

Output of inverter 3

FB 182 B207

B9453

Output of inverter 4

FB 183 B207

B9454

Output of inverter 5

FB 184 B207

B9455

Output of inverter 6

FB 185 B207

B9456

Output of inverter 7

FB 186 B207

B9457

Output of inverter 8

FB 187 B207

B9458

Output of inverter 9

FB 188 B207

B9459

Output of inverter 10

FB 189 B207

B9460

Output of inverter 11

FB 190 B207

B9461

Output of inverter 12

FB 191 B207

B9462

Output of inverter 13

FB 192 B207

B9463

Output of inverter 14

FB 193 B207

B9464

Output of inverter 15

FB 194 B207

B9465

Output of inverter 16

FB 195 B207

Technology software S00: NAND elements with 3 inputs each

B9470

Output of NAND element 1

FB 200 B207

B9471

Output of NAND element 2

FB 201 B207

B9472

Output of NAND element 3

FB 202 B207

B9473

Output of NAND element 4

FB 203 B207

B9474

Output of NAND element 5

FB 204 B207

B9475

Output of NAND element 6

FB 205 B207

B9476

Output of NAND element 7

FB 206 B207

B9477

Output of NAND element 8

FB 207 B207

B9478

Output of NAND element 9

FB 208 B207

B9479

Output of NAND element 10

FB 209 B207

B9480

Output of NAND element 11

FB 210 B207

12-56

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

B9481

Output of NAND element 12

Function
diag., Sheet
FB 211 B207

Technology software S00: Binary signal selector switches

B9482

Output of binary signal selector switch 1

FB 250 B216

B9483

Output of binary signal selector switch 2

FB 251 B216

B9484

Output of binary signal selector switch 3

FB 252 B216

B9485

Output of binary signal selector switch 4

FB 253 B216

B9486

Output of binary signal selector switch 5

FB 254 B216

Technology software S00: D flipflops

B9490

D flipflop 1: Output Q

FB 230 B211

B9491

D flipflop 1: Output /Q

FB 230 B211

B9492

D flipflop 2: Output Q

FB 231 B211

B9493

D flipflop 2: Output /Q

FB 231 B211

B9494

D flipflop 3: Output Q

FB 232 B211

B9495

D flipflop 3: Output /Q

FB 232 B211

B9496

D flipflop 4: Output Q

FB 233 B211

B9497

D flipflop 4: Output /Q

FB 233 B211

Technology software S00: Technology controller

B9499

Ramp-function generator output = ramp-function generator input (y = x)

FB 113 B170

G172, G174

Technology software S00: RS flipflops

B9550

RS flipflop 1: Output Q

FB 215 B210

B9551

RS flipflop 1: Output /Q

FB 215 B210

B9552

RS flipflop 2: Output Q

FB 216 B210

B9553

RS flipflop 2: Output /Q

FB 216 B210

B9554

RS flipflop 3: Output Q

FB 217 B210

B9555

RS flipflop 3: Output /Q

FB 217 B210

B9556

RS flipflop 4: Output Q

FB 218 B210

B9557

RS flipflop 4: Output /Q

FB 218 B210

B9558

RS flipflop 5: Output Q

FB 219 B210

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-57

Connectors and binectors

05.2007

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B9559

RS flipflop 5: Output /Q

FB 219 B210

B9560

RS flipflop 6: Output Q

FB 220 B210

B9561

RS flipflop 6: Output /Q

FB 220 B210

B9562

RS flipflop 7: Output Q

FB 221 B210

B9563

RS flipflop 7: Output /Q

FB 221 B210

B9564

RS flipflop 8: Output Q

FB 222 B210

B9565

RS flipflop 8: Output /Q

FB 222 B210

B9566

RS flipflop 9: Output Q

FB 223 B210

B9567

RS flipflop 9: Output /Q

FB 223 B210

B9568

RS flipflop 10: Output Q

FB 224 B210

B9569

RS flipflop 10: Output /Q

FB 224 B210

B9570

RS flipflop 11: Output Q

FB 225 B210

B9571

RS flipflop 11: Output /Q

FB 225 B210

B9572

RS flipflop 12: Output Q

FB 226 B210

B9573

RS flipflop 12: Output /Q

FB 226 B210

B9574

RS flipflop 13: Output Q

FB 227 B210

B9575

RS flipflop 13: Output /Q

FB 227 B210

B9576

RS flipflop 14: Output Q

FB 228 B210

B9577

RS flipflop 14: Output /Q

FB 228 B210

Technology software S00: Timers

B9580

Timer 1: Output

FB 240 B215

B9581

Timer 1: Output inverted

FB 240 B215

B9582

Timer 2: Output

FB 241 B215

B9583

Timer 2: Output inverted

FB 241 B215

B9584

Timer 3: Output

FB 242 B215

B9585

Timer 3: Output inverted

FB 242 B215

B9586

Timer 4: Output

FB 243 B215

B9587

Timer 4: Output inverted

FB 243 B215

B9588

Timer 5: Output

FB 244 B215

B9589

Timer 5: Output inverted

FB 244 B215

B9590

Timer 6: Output

FB 245 B215

B9591

Timer 6: Output inverted

FB 245 B215

B9592

Timer 7: Output

FB 246 B216

B9593

Timer 7: Output inverted

FB 246 B216

B9594

Timer 8: Output

FB 247 B216

B9595

Timer 8: Output inverted

FB 247 B216

B9596

Timer 9: Output

FB 248 B216

B9597

Timer 9: Output inverted

FB 248 B216

B9598

Timer 10: Output

FB 249 B216

B9599

Timer 10: Output inverted

FB 249 B216

G172

B9606

USS3 receive data, word 6, bit 6

G172

12-58

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

B9650

PI controller 1: Controller at output limitation

FB 260 B180

B9652

PI controller 3: Controller at output limitation

FB 262 B182

B9653

PI controller 4: Controller at output limitation

FB 263 B183

B9654

PI controller 5: Controller at output limitation

FB 264 B184

B9655

PI controller 6: Controller at output limitation

FB 265 B185

B9656

PI controller 7: Controller at output limitation

FB 266 B186

B9657

PI controller 8: Controller at output limitation

FB 267 B187

B9658

PI controller 9: Controller at output limitation

FB 268 B188

B9659

PI controller 10: Controller at output limitation

FB 269 B189

B9660

PI controller 1: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 260 B180

B9661

PI controller 2: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 261 B181

B9662

PI controller 3: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 262 B182

B9663

PI controller 4: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 263 B183

B9664

PI controller 5: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 264 B184

B9665

PI controller 6: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 265 B185

B9666

PI controller 7: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 266 B186

B9667

PI controller 8: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 267 B187

B9668

PI controller 9: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 268 B188

B9669

PI controller 10: Controller at positive output limitation

FB 269 B189

B9670

PI controller 1: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 260 B180

B9671

PI controller 2: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 261 B181

B9672

PI controller 3: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 262 B182

B9673

PI controller 4: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 263 B183

B9674

PI controller 5: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 264 B184

B9675

PI controller 6: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 265 B185

B9676

PI controller 7: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 266 B186

B9677

PI controller 8: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 267 B187

B9678

PI controller 9: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 268 B188

B9679

PI controller 10: Controller at negative output limitation

FB 269 B189

FB 69 B151

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

12-59

Connectors and binectors

Binector

05.2007

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

Technology software S00: root extractor

B9686

|root extractor input| < threshold responded

[SW 2.0 and later]

FB 58 B153

B9687

|root extractor input| < threshold responded (inverted)

[SW 2.0 and later]

FB 58 B153

G172

B9912

USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 12

G172

12-60

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Connectors and binectors

Binector

Name, description

Function
diag., Sheet

B9913

USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 13

G172

B9914

USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 14

G172

B9915

USS3 receive data, word 9, bit 15

G172

Trace function
B9999

Trigger condition of trace function is fulfilled

Open a DOS window on the PC and enter

program call:
HEXLOAD 7001Axxx.H86 7001Bxxx.H86 COMx

Start the program by pressing Return

The software update is performed
automatically
6

Note:
The parameter set can be transferred to a PC or
programming device by means of DriveMonitor
(see also Section 15).

When the software has been updated

successfully, the SIMOREG switches to
operating state o13.2 for approx. 1 s
The SIMOREG converter then switches to
operating state o12.9 in many cases
(depending on which SW version was
previously installed in the converter) for
approximately 15s.

A software update can be started only from the

PMU panel and not via an OP1S or the
DriveMonitor system
Note:
HEXLOAD.EXE:

Note:
The currently programmed addressed is displayed
on the PMU while the update is in progress
The current status of the update routine is
displayed on the PC

Check the checksum:

Comparison of the value of parameter r062.001 with the checksum in the Internet under menu item
"Info" (see the inside page of the cover sheet of the operation instructions).
Was the electronics supply disconnected
while Step 6 was in progress?

n
o

10b

11b

13-2

Loading program

7001Axxx.H86 and 7001Bxxx.H86:

Data files which contain the SIMOREG software
xxx is the SW release
COMx: COM1 or COM2

yes
Acknowledge any fault message that may
appear on the SIMOREG device
Restore default setting
(see Section 7.4)
Start up the converter again
(see Section 7.5)
Note:
The parameter set stored in Step 1 above can
be loaded from a PC or programming device
by means of DriveMonitor.

End

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

13.2

Maintenance

Replacement of components

13.2.1 Replacement of fan

WARNING
The converter fan may be replaced only by properly qualified personnel.
The snubber capacitors might still be carrying hazardous voltage after isolation from the
supply. For this reason, the converter must not be opened for at least two minutes after switchoff.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage.

Replacement of fan on 210A to 280A converters

2
1

The two fans are mounted on the underside of the converter.

Remove connector a.
Release the two retaining clips s on the fan and swing fan out downwards.
Installation:
When mounting the fan make sure it is in the correct mounting position (blowing direction
upward, see arrow d on the fan housing).
Insert the fan into lugs f and push upwards until it engages in retaining clips s
Insert connector a again.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

13-3

Maintenance

05.2007

Replacement of fan on 400A to 850A converters

4U1
4V1
4W1
PE

The fan is mounted on the underside of the converter.

Remove connector a.
Use a T20 screwdriver to undo the two Torx screws s.
Lift the fan using the fixing straps and pull out downwards.
Installation:
Push fan box up along the rear panel right up over the fixing clips.
Tighten the two Torx screws s with 2.5 Nm.
Insert connector a.

13-4

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Maintenance

Replacement of fan on 900A to 1200A converters

The fan is mounted on top of the converter.

Remove connector a.
Use a T20 screwdriver to undo the two Torx screws s.
Undo the M6 hexagonal nut d.
Pull fan upwards out of its guideway and then forwards to remove. Take care to protect the field
module mounted on the left (risk of mechanical damage!).
Installation:
Insert fan into guideway from above.
Tighten the two Torx screws s with 10 Nm.
Tighten hexagonal nut M6 d with 10 Nm.
Insert connector a.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

13-5

Maintenance

05.2007

Replacement of fan on 1500A to 3000A converters

WARNING
When dismantling the fan-mounting box, please remember that it weighs 12 kg.
Non-observance of this warning can result in severe personal injury or substantial property
damage.

The fan is mounted on top of the converter.

Remove connector a.
Undo the M6 hexagonal nut s.
Swing fan upwards and pull it out towards you, taking care to protect the field module mounted
on the left against any mechanical damage!
Installation:
Tilting the fan from the front and upward (see Fig.), slot it into the two rear guide tabs and then
tilt it downward as far as it will go.
Tighten hexagonal nut M6 s with 10 Nm.
Insert connector a.

13-6

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Maintenance

13.2.2 Replacement of PCBs

WARNING
PCBs may be replaced only by properly qualified personnel.
PCBs must not be removed or inserted when the power supply is connected.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage.

CAUTION
PCBs contains electrostatically sensitive devices. Before touching a PCB, the person carrying
out the work must himself be electrostatically discharged. The simplest way of doing this is to
touch an electrically conductive earthed object, e.g. socket outlet earth contact.

CAUTION
If one of the following boards is replaced

C98043-A7004

(field board for units with disk-type thyristors)

C98043-A7010

(power section for 15A and 30A units)

C98043-A7014

C98043-A7015

(field boards for 60A to 1200A units)

the "internal offset adjustments" (P051 = 22) must be repeated !

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

13-7

Maintenance

05.2007

13.2.3 Replacement of diodes and thyristor modules for devices up to 1200A

The diodes and thyristor modules are mounted by means of self-tapping screws. When a module is
replaced, the support surfaces on the heatsink must be cleaned and a new layer of thermolubricant applied to the thyristor module. To fix the modules always used screws with a metric
thread of the same length as the original screws and fixing elements (washer and spring lock
washer). When screwing the modules to the busbars and boards, also use screws with a metric
thread and the same length as the original screws and fixing elements (washer and spring lock
washer).

NOTICE
The layer of thermo-lubricant (silicone-free, type H-T-C made by Electrolube) applied to the modules must
be so thin and even that the baseplate is still clearly visible underneath!
No auxiliary cathodes must be contacted on the standby modules!

Module design

Tightening torque on module: 3,5 Nm

Tightening torque of current terminals: 3 Nm

Tightening torque on module: 6 Nm

Tightening torque of current terminals: 12 Nm

13-8

Tightening torque on module: 3,5 Nm

Tightening torque of current terminals: 5 Nm

Tightening torque on module: 6 Nm

Tightening torque of current terminals: 15 Nm

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Maintenance

13.2.4 Replacement of fuses and thyristor assemblies on converters of 1500A and

above

25 Nm

10 Nm

4
6 Nm

6
25 Nm

8
6 Nm

Undo the M6 hexagonal nut a.

Swing the fan s upwards and hold in place with support rail d .
Remove the brace f with the attached protective cover by undoing the 2 M6 hexagon-head
screws.
Remove fuses g by undoing the 2 hexagon-head screws on each (M10 or M12 depending on
converter model).
Undo the M10 hexagon-head screw h and swing thyristor assembly j out towards you.
Undo assembly locking mechanism (M6 hexagonal nut) k , and pull out thyristor assembly j
upwards at an angle.
Install the new components in the reverse order.
Caution: The fuse mounting screws are of different lengths!
SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

13-9

Maintenance

13-10

05.2007

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Servicing / Spare Parts

Servicing
Siemens supplies thoroughly tried and tested products and systems of the highest quality. To
ensure maximum availability of our products and systems in your plant, we offer extensive aftersales services and support.
For further information about our services and your regional Siemens contacts, please go to our
Internet website:
www.siemens.de/automation/csi_en/service

14.1

Technical Support
You can obtain technical assistance with our products, systems and solutions from our Technical
Support service. Whether you have a simple query, or need help in solving a more difficult,
complex task, our Central Technical Support specialists will be pleased to advise you. Our Central
Technical Support service is available in English and German.
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request

14.1.1 Time zone Europe and Africa

Tel.: +49 180 5050 222
Fax: +49 180 5050 223
mailto:ad.support@siemens.com
7:00 to 17:00 (CET)

14.1.2 Time zone America

24 Hour Hotline: +1 800 333 7421
Tel.: +1 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 423 262 2200
mailto:solutions.support@sea.siemens.com
8:00 to 17:00 (local time: Eastern Standard Time)

14.1.3 Time zone Asia / Australia

Tel.: +86 1064 757575
Fax: +86 1064 747474
mailto:adsupport.asia@siemens.com
7:30 to 17:30 (local time: Beijing)

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

14-1

Servicing / Spare Parts

14.2

05.2007

Spare parts
Information about spare parts can be found in Catalog DA 21.1 E. You will find this catalog on the
CD-ROM (order separately under order number: 6RX1700-0AD64, or with product order by
specifying Z option Z-D64) and via Internet website:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/en/9260805

14.3

Repairs
If you wish to have a part or unit repaired, please call or write to your regional Siemens contact
for repairs.

14.4

On-site servicing
Qualified specialists can offer an on-site repair and maintenance service to increase the availability
of your plant. Repair and/or maintenance support can be charged according to time and cost or
provided within the scope of a service contract at a flat rate. Services charged on a time/cost basis
will be available within the normal working hours of the relevant region subject to an appropriate
call-out period.
For on-site servicing, please call your regional Siemens contact.

NOTE
If you contact us with a query, please specify the following converter data:
Converter order number and serial number
Software version
Hardware version of basic electronics board (screen printing on component side)
Hardware version and software version of supplementary boards (if installed)

14-2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

DriveMonitor

DriveMonitor
The DriveMonitor software tool is available to assist the start-up, parameterization and diagnosis of
SIMOREG 6RA70 units via a PC.

15.1

Scope of delivery
DriveMonitor is supplied on a CD-ROM together with the operating manual and sample
applications.
Order No. 6RX1700-0AD64
It can also be ordered as an option in conjunction 6RA70 units. The relevant short code for this
option is D64.

15.2

Installing the software

You can find a brief overview of the CD contents in START.HTM. If you have installed an HTML
browser (e.g. Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator) on your PC, you can open the overview by
double clicking on START.HTM. If you do not have an HTML browser, you can find similar
information in text format in file README.TXT.
After you have chosen an installation language by selecting links DriveMonitor Installation of
DriveMonitor- Start Installation, you can call the DriveMonitor installation routine.
Some Internet Browsers are not capable of starting programs directly. If this is the case on your
PC, a "Setup.exe - Save as" dialog appears after you select Start Installation.
You can then start the Setup program manually in sub-catalog
DriveMonitor\setup\setup.exe
Then follow the instructions displayed by the installation routine.
The default installation path for DriveMonitor is C:\DriveMon\P7VRVISX\System. A "DriveMonitor"
icon is also placed on your desktop.

15.3

Connecting the SIMOREG to the PC

The simplest method is to link connector X300 in the front panel of the SIMOREG unit to a
COM port on the PC using the connecting cable available under order no. 6SX7005-0AB00.

1
6

2
7

3
8

4
9

PC COMx
socket

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

X300
1
2 RxD (RS232)
3 Rx+/Tx+ (RS 485)
4
5 Ground
6 +5V (OP1S)
7 Tx D (RS 232)
8 Rx-/ Tx- (RS485)
9 Ground

6RA70 X300
connector

15-1

DriveMonitor

15.4

05.2007

Setting up an online link to the SIMOREG

DriveMonitor always starts in offline mode. For this reason, you must open or create an offline file
which has been set up specifically for the device and software version:
To open an existing offline file:

File - Open <select parameter file>

(if the parameter file has been created in DriveMonitor, the drive type SIMOREG DC-MASTER
and the software version used must then be set. If you want to set up an online link to the
drive, you must click the ONLINE button and enter the bus address set in the device)

To create a new offline file:

File - New - Based on Factory Setting <select drive type and software version> . (If you want
to set up an online link to the drive, you must click the ONLINE button and enter the bus
address set in the device)
<enter file name>

File - New - Empty Parameter Set <select drive type and software version> (If you want to set
up an online link to the drive, you must click the ONLINE button and enter the bus address set
in the device) <enter file name>

The data regarding drive type and software version are stored in the DNL file. You can then start
the program in future by the normal Windows method, i.e. by double clicking on a DNL file, without
further system queries.
You can open the ONLINE Settings screen under Options to check, and if necessary change, the
interface parameters such as COM port and baud rate.
You can set the bus address and number of transmitted process data under File - Drive Settings.
To switch to online mode, select View - Online or the appropriate button on the toolbar. If the
message "Device is not networked" then appears, then "Offline mode" is currently selected. You
can switch to online mode under File - Drive Settings.

15.5

Further information
The engineering tool Drive ES is available for the diagnosis of complex installations containing
several drives as well as Profibus-based drive communication.
Several different packages of Drive ES are available:

Drive ES Basic

Data management in Step 7 projects, drive communications via

Profibus or USS
Order No.:6SW1700-5JA00-1AA0

Drive ES Graphic

Interconnection of Option S00 free functions blocks using the CFC

interconnection editor
Order No.:6SW1700-5JB00-1AA0

Drive ES Simatic

Provides function blocks for SIMATIC CPUs and sample projects for
communication with the SIMOREG unit
Order No.:6SW1700-5JC00-1AA0

IMPORTANT
DriveMonitor will run under Windows95/98/Me/XP or Windows NT4 / Windows 2000, but not
under Windows 3.x.

15-2

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Environmental compatibility

Environmental compatibility
Environmental aspects of development
The number of parts has been greatly reduced through the use of highly integrated components
and a modular design of the entire converter series. As a consequence, the power consumed in
the production process is significantly lower.
Particular importance has been attached to reducing the volume, mass and diversity of metal and
plastic parts.
Front components:
Plastic components in
converter:

PC + ABS

Cycoloy

GE-Plastics

ABS

Novodur

Bayer

Lexan 141-R

PA 6.6
SE1-GFN1

Noryl

Insulation:

PC (FR) fl

Makrolon or Lexan

Keyboard membrane:

Polyester membrane 0.15 mm

Rating plate:

Polyester membrane

Flame arresters containing halogen and insulating materials containing silicone have been
replaced by pollutant-free materials on all major components.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterion in the selection of supplied parts.
Environmental aspects of production
Most supplied parts are shipped in reusable packaging. The packaging material itself is recyclable,
consisting mainly of cardboard.
With the exception of the converter housing, surface coating materials have not been applied.
The production process is free of emissions.
Environmental aspects of disposal
The unit features screw and snap-on connections that can be separated easily to dismantle it into
recyclable mechanical components.
The printed circuit boards can be disposed of by thermal processing. The percentage of
components containing dangerous substances is low.

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

16-1

Environmental compatibility

16-2

05.2007

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Applications

Applications
Descriptions of applications (e.g. Winder Application, 12-Pulse Operation, Master-Slave Operation,
Operation of SIMOREG 6RA70 as Field Supply Unit and others) can be found on the CD-ROM
(order separately under order number: 6RX1700-0AD64, or with product order by specifying Z
option Z-D64) and via Internet website:

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/en/10804967

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

17-1

Applications

17-2

05.2007

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Appendix

18.1

Further documentation
Catalog DA21

Converters

Catalog DA21E

Spare parts

Catalog DA22

Cabinet-mounted converters

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

18-1

Appendix

18-2

05.2007

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

Appendix

Comments sheet
We have made every effort to critically edit this Instruction Manual. However, if you still come across
printing errors, we should be grateful if you would let us know.
We would also be grateful if you could let us have your opinion of this Instruction Manual and the
converter itself!
Contact your local Siemens office for any comments - either negative or positive!
Many thanks!
SIEMENS AG Austria, SIMEA
From: Name:

Date:

Company:
Address:
Tel.:
To:

SIEMENS Office
Address:
Please pass on to
SIEMENS AG Austria
SIMEA

Concerns: Comments for the SIMOREG 6RA70 Instruction Manual, Edition

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

18-3

Appendix

18-4

05.2007

SIEMENS AG 6RX1700-0AD76
SIMOREG DC-MASTER Operating Instructions

05.2007

The following versions have appeared so far:

Version

Internal Part No.

C98130-A1256-A2-03-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-04-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-05-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-06-7619

06.1

C98130-A1256-A2-07-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-08-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-09-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-10-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-11-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-12-7619

C98130-A1256-A2-13-7619

Version 12 consists of the following sections

Section

Pages

Date of edition

Contents

05.2007

Safety information

05.2007

Type spectrum

05.2007

Description

05.2007

Shipment, unpacking

05.2007

Installation

05.2007

Connections

05.2007

Start-up

05.2007

Function diagrams

138

05.2007

Function descriptions

05.2007

Faults / Alarms

05.2007

Parameter list

184

05.2007

List of connectors and binectors

05.2007

Maintenance

05.2007

Servicing

05.2007

DriveMonitor

05.2007

Environmental compatibility

05.2007

Applications

05.2007

Appendix

05.2007

SIMEA
Siemens Industrial Manufacturing,
Engineering and Applications
Postfach 83, A-1211 Wien

Siemens AG, 1998-2007

Subject to change without notice
Order No.: 6RX1700-0AD76
Printed in EU (Austria)

Sony STR-K1600 Multi Channel Av Receiver
No ratings yet
Sony STR-K1600 Multi Channel Av Receiver
68 pages
Solar Inverter RS232 Protocol
No ratings yet
Solar Inverter RS232 Protocol
14 pages
PF753 Reference Manual
No ratings yet
PF753 Reference Manual
432 pages
ACS 6000 Brochure RevA
No ratings yet
ACS 6000 Brochure RevA
18 pages
Plantronics Discovery 925
No ratings yet
Plantronics Discovery 925
20 pages
6RA70 Field Reversal
No ratings yet
6RA70 Field Reversal
12 pages
Simoreg - Operation PDF
No ratings yet
Simoreg - Operation PDF
646 pages
B37580 - TM - Easygen 3400 3500 XT P1 - H
No ratings yet
B37580 - TM - Easygen 3400 3500 XT P1 - H
1,287 pages
Simoreg 6ra70 LP en
No ratings yet
Simoreg 6ra70 LP en
184 pages
ABB Softstarter 1SFC132003M0201
No ratings yet
ABB Softstarter 1SFC132003M0201
200 pages
Sinamics DCM DC Converter En-Us
No ratings yet
Sinamics DCM DC Converter En-Us
758 pages
Abb Acs800 Manual
No ratings yet
Abb Acs800 Manual
156 pages
Manual Axpert KING PYLON
No ratings yet
Manual Axpert KING PYLON
59 pages
FAQ 6RA70 Fault Diagnostics en
100% (1)
FAQ 6RA70 Fault Diagnostics en
81 pages
Siemens Sinamics G120C Getting Started
No ratings yet
Siemens Sinamics G120C Getting Started
54 pages
Woodward DTSC-200 Configuration
100% (2)
Woodward DTSC-200 Configuration
158 pages
SKiiP Testing in Service All Types 2013-03-21
No ratings yet
SKiiP Testing in Service All Types 2013-03-21
15 pages
Benning Catalog
No ratings yet
Benning Catalog
7 pages
Parker SSD Parvex Digivex DSD Manual PVD3500GB
No ratings yet
Parker SSD Parvex Digivex DSD Manual PVD3500GB
114 pages
Simovert Master Drive
No ratings yet
Simovert Master Drive
30 pages
Technology Software Module: Simoreg DC - Master 6ra70 and T300
No ratings yet
Technology Software Module: Simoreg DC - Master 6ra70 and T300
56 pages
PowerFlex 700s Frames 9 A 14
No ratings yet
PowerFlex 700s Frames 9 A 14
220 pages
Ac 450
No ratings yet
Ac 450
564 pages
Powerflex DC Stand Alone Regulator and Gate Amplifier: User Manual
No ratings yet
Powerflex DC Stand Alone Regulator and Gate Amplifier: User Manual
90 pages
Symap®: SYMAP® - Advanced Feeder Protection Relay
100% (1)
Symap®: SYMAP® - Advanced Feeder Protection Relay
8 pages
CMR900
No ratings yet
CMR900
6 pages
As 60156 KV-CL20 RC Um 960129-2
No ratings yet
As 60156 KV-CL20 RC Um 960129-2
330 pages
Nordac SK 700e
No ratings yet
Nordac SK 700e
128 pages
440 Siemens Inverter
100% (1)
440 Siemens Inverter
308 pages
EN ACS800 SafetyOptions E A4
100% (1)
EN ACS800 SafetyOptions E A4
94 pages
MCD 3000 Manuel Service
No ratings yet
MCD 3000 Manuel Service
48 pages
SKiiP 2403 GB172-4DK1483 - 1.0 - 20451483 - DS
No ratings yet
SKiiP 2403 GB172-4DK1483 - 1.0 - 20451483 - DS
6 pages
User Manual: Semikron Skiip - Tester Manual Control Unit
100% (2)
User Manual: Semikron Skiip - Tester Manual Control Unit
20 pages
En MultiBlockProgApplFW C
No ratings yet
En MultiBlockProgApplFW C
274 pages
Fuji Micrex SX
No ratings yet
Fuji Micrex SX
73 pages
04-D2C&D2H - Using Display and Keyboard
No ratings yet
04-D2C&D2H - Using Display and Keyboard
21 pages
Combivert: Instruction Manual Pitch Inverter P6 Rated Current 45 A/52A
No ratings yet
Combivert: Instruction Manual Pitch Inverter P6 Rated Current 45 A/52A
48 pages
Gutor - UPS PXP Technical Data
100% (1)
Gutor - UPS PXP Technical Data
4 pages
Control Module 11 09 en
No ratings yet
Control Module 11 09 en
424 pages
Preliminary: Fagor Automation, S.Coop
No ratings yet
Preliminary: Fagor Automation, S.Coop
32 pages
Bender IRDH275 Manual - 07-04
No ratings yet
Bender IRDH275 Manual - 07-04
78 pages
Maintenance Manual
100% (1)
Maintenance Manual
28 pages
Zmd400at CT Manual
No ratings yet
Zmd400at CT Manual
93 pages
PowerFlex 70
No ratings yet
PowerFlex 70
48 pages
Kinetix 6000 Multi-Axis Servo Drive: Integration Manual
No ratings yet
Kinetix 6000 Multi-Axis Servo Drive: Integration Manual
153 pages
Fiedbus Interfaces Faq
100% (1)
Fiedbus Interfaces Faq
17 pages
MC 4 Operating Manual
No ratings yet
MC 4 Operating Manual
76 pages
6sr41 Series
No ratings yet
6sr41 Series
202 pages
EN ACS800 304 704 V992 HW ScreenResolution C
No ratings yet
EN ACS800 304 704 V992 HW ScreenResolution C
162 pages
Operating Instructions: MCD 3000 Soft Starter
No ratings yet
Operating Instructions: MCD 3000 Soft Starter
44 pages
Field Supply T P C DWG PDF
100% (1)
Field Supply T P C DWG PDF
8 pages
A7&M7 Spindle Servo Driver User Manual-Leanmax
No ratings yet
A7&M7 Spindle Servo Driver User Manual-Leanmax
73 pages
6RA70 Operating Instruction - Total-Rev10
No ratings yet
6RA70 Operating Instruction - Total-Rev10
728 pages
Simens Simoreg (DC Drive)
No ratings yet
Simens Simoreg (DC Drive)
712 pages
Simoreg Dc-Master: Operating Instructions
No ratings yet
Simoreg Dc-Master: Operating Instructions
9 pages
Vdocument - in Manual Simoreg DC Master
No ratings yet
Vdocument - in Manual Simoreg DC Master
616 pages
Manual Simoreg DC Master
No ratings yet
Manual Simoreg DC Master
616 pages
Simoreg DC Master 6ra70286ds22
No ratings yet
Simoreg DC Master 6ra70286ds22
616 pages
Supplement To The Operating Instructions For Simoreg Dc-Master Series 6ra70 For Software Release 3.2
No ratings yet
Supplement To The Operating Instructions For Simoreg Dc-Master Series 6ra70 For Software Release 3.2
12 pages
6ra70 Sw32en
No ratings yet
6ra70 Sw32en
12 pages
Binary Image
No ratings yet
Binary Image
91 pages
Elektronik Komponent Üretici Logoları
No ratings yet
Elektronik Komponent Üretici Logoları
26 pages
OMRON PLC Programming
50% (2)
OMRON PLC Programming
253 pages
Elektronik Komponent Üretici Logoları
No ratings yet
Elektronik Komponent Üretici Logoları
26 pages
MPI Library Example Code
No ratings yet
MPI Library Example Code
8 pages
Users Manual WinCC Flexible en-US
No ratings yet
Users Manual WinCC Flexible en-US
454 pages
Project Gantt Chart - Field
No ratings yet
Project Gantt Chart - Field
1 page
System On Chips Soc'S & Multiprocessor System On Chips Mpsocs
No ratings yet
System On Chips Soc'S & Multiprocessor System On Chips Mpsocs
42 pages
4090 - 9116 Aislador de Fallas PDF
No ratings yet
4090 - 9116 Aislador de Fallas PDF
4 pages
Stimulus Generator For Spice Simulations Using Graphical Programming Language
No ratings yet
Stimulus Generator For Spice Simulations Using Graphical Programming Language
5 pages
CV Electrical Random
No ratings yet
CV Electrical Random
7 pages
Lab 1
No ratings yet
Lab 1
8 pages
Pre-Mid Term - 2024-25 - Q - Paper
No ratings yet
Pre-Mid Term - 2024-25 - Q - Paper
1 page
Please Read This Manual Carefully Before Using The System
No ratings yet
Please Read This Manual Carefully Before Using The System
107 pages
Nodal and Mesh Analysis: Galgotias University
No ratings yet
Nodal and Mesh Analysis: Galgotias University
21 pages
DCS Qsns PDF
100% (2)
DCS Qsns PDF
32 pages
Ignition System: Main Fuse 30 A
No ratings yet
Ignition System: Main Fuse 30 A
6 pages
Signals and System MATLAB Code
No ratings yet
Signals and System MATLAB Code
7 pages
Soniya Cs Lab
No ratings yet
Soniya Cs Lab
12 pages
Rcs 10
No ratings yet
Rcs 10
16 pages
Handout of BEEE
No ratings yet
Handout of BEEE
2 pages
Antena 80 40 Morgain
No ratings yet
Antena 80 40 Morgain
12 pages
ST10F273
No ratings yet
ST10F273
4 pages
NCERT Solutions Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity
No ratings yet
NCERT Solutions Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity
12 pages
OILFIELD ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION Durham2015
No ratings yet
OILFIELD ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION Durham2015
14 pages
2p12s Module: Rechargeable Battery
No ratings yet
2p12s Module: Rechargeable Battery
2 pages
Analog System Design: Sarun Soman Asst: Professor EEE Department
No ratings yet
Analog System Design: Sarun Soman Asst: Professor EEE Department
25 pages
WT41 E Bluetooth Datasheet
No ratings yet
WT41 E Bluetooth Datasheet
43 pages
NIOEC SP 70 54 (1) 1 Instrument.
No ratings yet
NIOEC SP 70 54 (1) 1 Instrument.
161 pages
Sem-III Electrical Engineering
No ratings yet
Sem-III Electrical Engineering
62 pages
Battery Standard Procedure Ignition-Off Draw Test
No ratings yet
Battery Standard Procedure Ignition-Off Draw Test
2 pages
3v2ox305r-2q - PDS - Jers
No ratings yet
3v2ox305r-2q - PDS - Jers
2 pages
IEEE 34 Bus Intermittent Sources PDF
No ratings yet
IEEE 34 Bus Intermittent Sources PDF
8 pages
Tavner Peter
100% (1)
Tavner Peter
303 pages

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.